FM 20-32 Mine Countermine Operations

FM20-32
Mine/Countermine
Operations
Headquarters,
Department of the Army
DI STRI BUTI ON RESTRI CTI ON: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
This reprint includes Changes 1, 2, and 3.
FM 20-32
C3
Change 3 Headquarters
Washington, DC, 1 October 2002
Mine/Countermine Operations
1. Change FM 20-32, 29 May 1998, as follows:
Remove Old Pages Insert New Pages
v through x v through x
xiii through xvi xiii through xvi
11-7 through 11-25 11-7 through 11-26
A-11 and A-12 A-11 and A-12
F-3 through F-20 F-3 through F-23
G-7 and G-8 G-7 and G-8
Index-1 through Index-6 Index-1 through Index-6
2. A bar ( ) marks new or changed material.
3. File this transmittal sheet in front of the publication.
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
ERIC K. SHINSEKI
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, Army National Guard, and US Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the
initial distribution number 111053, requirements for FM 20-32.
JOEL B. HUDSON
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0226802
FM 20-32
C2
Washington, DC, 22 August 2001
Mine/Countermine Operations
1. Change FM 20-32, 30 September 1992, as follows:
i through xviii i through xviii
1-5 through 1-8 1-5 through 1-8
2-9 and 2-10 2-9 and 2-10
2-21 and 2-22 2-21 and 2-22
2-45 and 2-46 2-45 and 2-46
3-13 and 3-14 3-13 and 3-14
4-7 and 4-8 4-7 and 4-8
4-11 and 4-12 4-11 and 4-12
4-15 4-15
5-3 and 5-4 5-3 and 5-4
5-7 and 5-8 5-7 and 5-8
6-9 and 6-10 6-9 and 6-10
6-25 and 6-26 6-25 and 6-26
7-13 and 7-14 7-13 and 7-14
8-5 and 8-6 8-5 and 8-6
8-17 and 8-18 8-17 and 8-18
9-1 and 9-2 9-1 and 9-2
9-7 9-7
10-11 and 10-12 10-11 and 10-12
10-25 through 10-34 10-25 through 10-34
10-37 and 10-38 10-37 and 10-38
11-1 and 11-2 11-1 and 11-2
11-5 and 11-6 11-5 and 11-6
11-13 and 11-14 11-13 and 11-14
11-17 and 11-18 11-17 and 11-18
12-1 and 12-2 12-1 and 12-2
12-9 through 12-12 12-9 through 12-12
2
12-15 and 12-16 12-15 and 12-16
13-15 and 13-16 13-15 and 13-16
13-21 and 13-22 13-21 and 13-22
13-29 through 13-33 13-29 through 13-33
A-11 and A-12 A-11 and A-12
A-29 and A-30 A-29 and A-30
A-33 and A-34 A-33 and A-34
B-1 through B-6 B-1 through B-5
C-1 and C-2 C-1 and C-2
D-5 and D-6 D-5 and D-6
D-15 and D-16 D-15 and D-16
E-1 and E-2 E-1 and E-2
F-3 and F-4 F-3 and F-4
F-9 and F-10 F-9 and F-10
F-17 and F-18 F-17 and F-18
Glossary-7 through Glossary-10 Glossary-7 through Glossary-10
References-1 and References-3 References-1 and References-3
Index-1 through Index-6 Index-1 through Index-6
DA Form 1355-1-R DA Form 1355-1-R
2. A bar ( ) marks new or changed material.
3. File this transmittal sheet in front of the publication.
4. This change includes Change 1, 30 June 1999.
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
ERIC K. SHINSEKI
Chief of Staff
Official:
0121803
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, Army National Guard, and US Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance
with the initial distribution number 111053, requirements for FM 20-32.
JOEL B. HUDSON
FM 20-32
C 1
Washi ngton, DC, 30 June 1999
MINE/COUNTERMINE OPERATIONS
1. Change FM 20-32, 29 May 1998, as fol l ows:
Page 13-32. After the fi rst paragraph add the fol l owi ng:
NOTE: The United Nations Convention of Certain Conventional Weapons (CCW)
mandates that all fragment munitions produce fragments that are visible by x-ray
(such as metal or rock).
Page A-33. M1 AND M2 ACTI VATORS, thi rd paragraph, l i ne 1, change "533 mi l l i meters
l ong" to "54 mi l l i meters l ong (wi th cap)."
Page A-33. M1 AND M2 ACTI VATORS, thi rd paragraph, l i ne 5, change "190" to "25."
Page A-33. M1 AND M2 ACTI VATORS, fourth paragraph, l i ne 2, del ete enti re l i ne and add
"i ts overal l l ength, wi th cap, i s 53 mi l l i meters."
2. Post these changes accordi ng to DA Pamphl et 310-13.
3. Fi l e thi s transmi ttal sheet i n the front of the publ i cati on.
DI STRI BUTI ON RESTRI CTI ON. Approved for publ i c rel ease; di stri buti on i s unl i mi ted.

FM 20-32
C1, 30 June 1999
ERIC K. SHINSEKI
Chief of Staff
Official:
JOEL B. HUDSON
9916103
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, Army National Guard, and US Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the initial
distribution number 111053, requirements for FM 20-32.
i
*FM 20-32
Field Manual Headquarters
No. 20-32 Department of the Army
Washington, DC, 29 May 1998
MINE/COUNTERMINE OPERATIONS
Table of Contents
Page
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.............................................................................................................x
Fi gures ............................................................................................................................................ x
Tabl es............................................................................................................................................ xv
PREFACE.......................................................................................................................................xvii
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................1-1
MECHANI CS OF MI NES ..........................................................................................................1-1
Characteri sti cs and Functi oni ng .........................................................................................1-1
Components and I ni ti ati ng Acti ons .....................................................................................1-2
ANTI TANK MI NES....................................................................................................................1-4
Types of Ki l l s ........................................................................................................................1-4
Types of Sensi ng ...................................................................................................................1-5
Types of Warheads ...............................................................................................................1-5
ANTI PERSONNEL MI NES .......................................................................................................1-5
Types of Ki l l s ........................................................................................................................1-5
Types of Sensi ng ...................................................................................................................1-6
Types of Effects .....................................................................................................................1-6
ANTI HANDLI NG DEVI CES .....................................................................................................1-6
Part One. Mine Operations
CHAPTER 2. MINE-WARFARE PRINCIPLES........................................................................2-1
MI NE-WARFARE CONCEPTS..................................................................................................2-1
TYPES OF MI NEFI ELDS ..........................................................................................................2-1
Protecti ve Mi nefi el ds ............................................................................................................2-2
Tacti cal Mi nefi el ds ...............................................................................................................2-3
Nui sance Mi nefi el ds .............................................................................................................2-4
Phony Mi nefi el ds ..................................................................................................................2-4
PROTECTI VE VERSUS TACTI CAL MI NEFI ELDS................................................................2-5
TACTI CAL MI NEFI ELDS .........................................................................................................2-5
Mi nefi el d Vari abl es ..............................................................................................................2-7
Desi gn..................................................................................................................................2-10
DI STRI BUTI ON RESTRI CTI ON: Approved for publ i c rel ease; di stri buti on i s unl i mi ted.
____________________________
*Thi s manual supersedes FM 20-32, 30 September 1992.
C2
ii
Page
C2
TACTI CAL-OBSTACLE I NTEGRATI ON PRI NCI PLES....................................................... 2-14
Obstacl e Empl acement Authori ty ..................................................................................... 2-14
Obstacl e Control ................................................................................................................. 2-14
Obstacl e Control Measures................................................................................................ 2-15
Fratri ci de Preventi on......................................................................................................... 2-19
Maneuver-Pl an Support .................................................................................................... 2-19
SI TI NG AND EMPLACI NG TACTI CAL MI NEFI ELDS....................................................... 2-32
Coordi nati ng wi th the Maneuver Commander ................................................................ 2-32
Si ti ng the Mi nefi el d ........................................................................................................... 2-37
Empl aci ng Mi nefi el ds ........................................................................................................ 2-39
Determi ni ng Resource Requi rements ............................................................................... 2-39
MI NEFI ELD SUPPLY OPERATI ONS ................................................................................... 2-39
Resuppl y Nodes .................................................................................................................. 2-41
Resuppl y Rul es ................................................................................................................... 2-43
Suppl y Locati on.................................................................................................................. 2-44
Resuppl y Methods .............................................................................................................. 2-44
MI NEFI ELD MARKI NG ......................................................................................................... 2-49
Cri teri a ............................................................................................................................... 2-49
Peri meter ............................................................................................................................ 2-50
Techni ques.......................................................................................................................... 2-50
MI NEFI ELD TURNOVER....................................................................................................... 2-52
MI NEFI ELD I NSPECTI ON AND MAI NTENANCE ............................................................. 2-55
CHAPTER 3. SCATTERABLE MINES AND MINE DELIVERY SYSTEMS........................3-1
GENERAL CHARACTERI STI CS.............................................................................................. 3-1
Anti personnel Mi nes ............................................................................................................ 3-1
Anti tank Mi nes .................................................................................................................... 3-3
CAPABI LI TI ES .......................................................................................................................... 3-5
Faster Response ................................................................................................................... 3-5
Remote Pl acement................................................................................................................ 3-5
I ncreased Tacti cal Fl exi bi l i ty .............................................................................................. 3-5
Effi ci ency .............................................................................................................................. 3-5
I ncreased Lethal i ty .............................................................................................................. 3-5
LI MI TATI ONS............................................................................................................................ 3-5
Extensi ve Coordi nati on ....................................................................................................... 3-5
Prol i ferati on of Targets........................................................................................................ 3-6
Vi si bi l i ty ............................................................................................................................... 3-6
Accuracy................................................................................................................................ 3-6
Ori entati on ........................................................................................................................... 3-6
LI FE CYCLE............................................................................................................................... 3-6
LETHALI TY AND DENSI TY.................................................................................................... 3-7
Lethal i ty and Tacti cal -Obstacl e Effect ............................................................................... 3-7
Densi ty .................................................................................................................................. 3-8
COMMAND AND CONTROL .................................................................................................... 3-9
AUTHORI TY .............................................................................................................................. 3-9
COORDI NATI ON ..................................................................................................................... 3-10
EMPLOYMENT AND EMPLACEMENT ............................................................................... 3-10
Area-Deni al Arti l l ery Muni ti ons and Remote Anti armor Mi nes .................................... 3-11
Gator ................................................................................................................................... 3-14
Vol cano................................................................................................................................ 3-17
Modul ar Pack Mi ne System............................................................................................... 3-27
iii
Page
C2
MARKI NG .................................................................................................................................3-26
Safety Zones ........................................................................................................................3-27
Fragment Hazard Zones.....................................................................................................3-27
Fenci ng................................................................................................................................3-28
CHAPTER 4. SPECIAL-PURPOSE MUNITIONS...................................................................4-1
M18A1 CLAYMORE ...................................................................................................................4-2
SELECTABLE LI GHTWEI GHT ATTACK MUNI TI ON ..........................................................4-3
Operati ng Modes...................................................................................................................4-3
Anti tamper Feature..............................................................................................................4-6
M93 HORNET.............................................................................................................................4-6
Empl oyment Consi derati ons ................................................................................................4-7
Empl oyment Rol es ................................................................................................................4-7
Tacti cal Empl acement ..........................................................................................................4-8
Recordi ng and Marki ng......................................................................................................4-15
CHAPTER 5. CONVENTIONAL MINES...................................................................................5-1
ANTI TANK MI NES....................................................................................................................5-1
M15........................................................................................................................................5-1
M19........................................................................................................................................5-2
M21........................................................................................................................................5-2
ANTI PERSONNEL MI NES .......................................................................................................5-3
M14........................................................................................................................................5-3
M16........................................................................................................................................5-4
EMPLACI NG MI NES.................................................................................................................5-4
Mi nes Wi th Prongs ...............................................................................................................5-4
Mi nes Wi th Pressure Pl ates.................................................................................................5-4
Mi nes Wi th Ti l t Rods............................................................................................................5-6
Beari ng Boards .....................................................................................................................5-6
Conceal ment .........................................................................................................................5-6
Maneuver Assi stance............................................................................................................5-8
CHAPTER 6. ROWMINING........................................................................................................6-1
USE ..............................................................................................................................................6-1
RULES.........................................................................................................................................6-1
LOGI STI CS .................................................................................................................................6-3
Cal cul ati ons ..........................................................................................................................6-3
Task Organi zati on ..............................................................................................................6-14
Si te Layout..........................................................................................................................6-16
Mi ne-Layi ng Vehi cl es .........................................................................................................6-18
Layi ng a Row Mi nefi el d......................................................................................................6-18
I mmedi ate-Acti on Dri l l ......................................................................................................6-24
Squad Dri l l ..........................................................................................................................6-24
Marki ng, Recordi ng, and Reporti ng Row Mi nefi el ds........................................................6-25
STANDARDI ZED TACTI CAL ROW MI NEFI ELDS ..............................................................6-25
Di srupt and Fi x...................................................................................................................6-28
Turn .....................................................................................................................................6-29
Bl ock ....................................................................................................................................6-31
HASTY PROTECTI VE ROW MI NEFI ELDS ..........................................................................6-33
Rul es ....................................................................................................................................6-34
Si te Layout..........................................................................................................................6-34
iv
Page
CHAPTER 7. STANDARD-PATTERN MINEFIELDS............................................................7-1
COMPONENTS .......................................................................................................................... 7-1
Mi ne Stri ps ........................................................................................................................... 7-1
Mi ne Cl usters ....................................................................................................................... 7-1
Rul es for Posi ti oni ng Cl usters Wi thi n a Stri p.................................................................... 7-2
Standard-Pattern Mi nefi el d Rul es ...................................................................................... 7-4
LOGI STI CAL CALCULATI ONS ............................................................................................... 7-9
Cl uster Cal cul ati on .............................................................................................................. 7-9
Pl atoon Organi zati on ......................................................................................................... 7-10
Mi ne-Empl acement Procedures ........................................................................................ 7-11
Mi ne Empl acement ............................................................................................................ 7-13
NUI SANCE MI NEFI ELDS ..................................................................................................... 7-17
Si ti ng................................................................................................................................... 7-17
Locati on .............................................................................................................................. 7-17
Layi ng ................................................................................................................................. 7-18
I nspecti on and Mai ntenance ............................................................................................. 7-18
Handover ............................................................................................................................ 7-19
CHAPTER 8. REPORTING AND RECORDING......................................................................8-1
MI NEFI ELD/MUNI TI ON FI ELD REPORTS .......................................................................... 8-1
Report of I ntenti on ............................................................................................................... 8-1
Report of I ni ti ati on............................................................................................................... 8-1
Report of Compl eti on ........................................................................................................... 8-2
Report of Transfer ................................................................................................................ 8-2
Report of Change.................................................................................................................. 8-3
Progress Reports .................................................................................................................. 8-3
MI NEFI ELD/MUNI TI ON FI ELD RECORDS.......................................................................... 8-3
Mi nefi el d Record .................................................................................................................. 8-4
Hasty Protecti ve Row Mi nefi el d Record ........................................................................... 8-17
Nui sance Mi nefi el d ............................................................................................................ 8-20
SCATTERABLE MI NEFI ELD/MUNI TI ON FI ELD REPORTI NG AND RECORDI NG ..... 8-20
MI NEFI ELD/MUNI TI ON FI ELD OVERLAY SYMBOLS..................................................... 8-25
Part Two. Counteroperations
CHAPTER 9. COUNTERMINE OPERATIONS.......................................................................9-1
DEFI NI TI ONS............................................................................................................................ 9-1
Obstacl e ................................................................................................................................ 9-1
Reducti on .............................................................................................................................. 9-1
Breachi ng.............................................................................................................................. 9-1
Area Cl earance ..................................................................................................................... 9-1
Route Cl earance ................................................................................................................... 9-1
Mi ne Neutral i zati on............................................................................................................. 9-1
Proofi ng................................................................................................................................. 9-2
Demi ni ng .............................................................................................................................. 9-2
BREACHI NG OPERATI ONS .................................................................................................... 9-2
I ntel l i gence ........................................................................................................................... 9-2
Fundamental s ...................................................................................................................... 9-4
Organi zati on ......................................................................................................................... 9-4
Mass ...................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Synchroni zati on ................................................................................................................... 9-5
v
Page
C3
CLEARI NG OPERATI ONS........................................................................................................9-6
Upgrade of Breach Lanes .....................................................................................................9-6
Area Cl earance .....................................................................................................................9-7
Demi ni ng...............................................................................................................................9-7
CHAPTER 10. MINEFIELD REDUCTION............................................................................ 10-1
DETECTI NG .............................................................................................................................10-1
Vi sual ..................................................................................................................................10-1
Physi cal ...............................................................................................................................10-2
El ectroni c ............................................................................................................................10-3
Mechani cal ..........................................................................................................................10-6
REPORTI NG .............................................................................................................................10-7
REDUCI NG...............................................................................................................................10-7
Expl osi ve .............................................................................................................................10-7
Mechani cal ........................................................................................................................10-14
El ectroni c ..........................................................................................................................10-22
Manual ..............................................................................................................................10-22
PROOFI NG .............................................................................................................................10-24
MARKI NG ...............................................................................................................................10-24
Lane-Marki ng Terms........................................................................................................10-25
Level s of Lane Marki ng and Patterns .............................................................................10-27
Commander's Gui dance for Lane Marki ng .....................................................................10-33
Lane-Marki ng Devi ces .....................................................................................................10-34
Marki ng Requi rements of the North Atl anti c Treaty Organi zati on..............................10-36
CHAPTER 11. ROUTE AND AREA CLEARANCE ............................................................... 11-1
ROUTE CLEARANCE..............................................................................................................11-1
Pl anni ng..............................................................................................................................11-1
Pl anni ng Consi derati ons ....................................................................................................11-3
Task Organi zati on ..............................................................................................................11-7
Methods and Types ...........................................................................................................11-11
AREA CLEARANCE...............................................................................................................11-15
Pl anni ng............................................................................................................................11-16
Pl anni ng Consi derati ons ..................................................................................................11-17
Task Organi zati on ............................................................................................................11-18
Methods and Types ...........................................................................................................11-18
I MPROVI SED MI NE THREAT.............................................................................................11-19
MI NE LOCATI ONS ................................................................................................................11-20
DI SPOSI TI ON OF MI NES.....................................................................................................11-20
Mi ne-Removal Techni ques ...............................................................................................11-21
Hand Neutral i zati on ........................................................................................................11-21
SAFETY...................................................................................................................................11-22
REPORTS ................................................................................................................................11-22
Si tuati on Report ...............................................................................................................11-23
Progress Report ................................................................................................................11-23
Mi ne I nci dent Report........................................................................................................11-26
vi
Page
C2
Part Three. Special Mining Operations
CHAPTER 12. MINING OPERATIONS IN SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTS........................12-1
STREAMBED AND RI VER MI NI NG ..................................................................................... 12-1
Empl oyment ....................................................................................................................... 12-1
Empl acement...................................................................................................................... 12-2
Recovery.............................................................................................................................. 12-3
Recordi ng............................................................................................................................ 12-3
Safety .................................................................................................................................. 12-3
URBAN-TERRAI N MI NI NG ................................................................................................... 12-6
Anti personnel Mi nes .......................................................................................................... 12-7
Conventi onal Anti tank Mi nes ......................................................................................... 12-12
Scatterabl e Mi nes ............................................................................................................ 12-13
Decepti on Measures ......................................................................................................... 12-15
SPECI AL ENVI RONMENTS ................................................................................................ 12-16
Col d Regi ons ..................................................................................................................... 12-16
Jungl es .............................................................................................................................. 12-17
Deserts .............................................................................................................................. 12-17
CHAPTER 13. BOOBY TRAPS AND EXPEDIENT DEVICES............................................13-1
Section I. SettingBooby Traps.................................................................................................13-1
TACTI CS................................................................................................................................... 13-2
SI TI NG...................................................................................................................................... 13-4
TYPES OF TRAPS ................................................................................................................... 13-4
COMPONENTS AND PRI NCI PLES....................................................................................... 13-5
ACTUATI ON METHODS ........................................................................................................ 13-5
METHODS OF CONNECTI ON............................................................................................... 13-5
Remote ................................................................................................................................ 13-5
Di rect .................................................................................................................................. 13-8
PLANNI NG, SETTI NG, AND RECORDI NG ......................................................................... 13-8
Ti mel i ness........................................................................................................................... 13-8
Orders and Bri efi ng ........................................................................................................... 13-8
Rehearsal ............................................................................................................................ 13-9
Organi zati on and Procedure.............................................................................................. 13-9
Reporti ng and Recordi ng ................................................................................................. 13-10
SI TES ...................................................................................................................................... 13-14
SAFETY .................................................................................................................................. 13-14
Section II. ClearingBooby Traps...........................................................................................13-14
I NDI CATI ONS ....................................................................................................................... 13-15
DETECTI ON........................................................................................................................... 13-15
CLEARI NG METHODS......................................................................................................... 13-15
COMBAT CLEARANCE ........................................................................................................ 13-16
CLEARANCE I N SECURE AREAS ...................................................................................... 13-17
Pol i cy and Pl anni ng ......................................................................................................... 13-17
Control Poi nt .................................................................................................................... 13-18
Control and Si ze of Parti es .............................................................................................. 13-18
Marki ng ............................................................................................................................ 13-18
Cl eari ng of Open Areas .................................................................................................... 13-18
Cl eari ng of Bui l di ngs ....................................................................................................... 13-19
Exteri or Reconnai ssance and Entry................................................................................ 13-19
Search Techni ques ........................................................................................................... 13-19
vii
Page
Cl eari ng I nstal l ati ons and Faci l i ti es ...............................................................................13-21
Cl eari ng Obstacl es ............................................................................................................13-21
Cl eari ng Secure Areas ......................................................................................................13-21
CLEARANCE METHODS......................................................................................................13-22
I MPROVI SED TRAPS ............................................................................................................13-23
NONEXPLOSI VE TRAPS ......................................................................................................13-23
Punji ..................................................................................................................................13-23
Cl osi ng Trap......................................................................................................................13-23
Spi ke Board.......................................................................................................................13-28
Venus Fl ytrap ...................................................................................................................13-28
Section III. Expedient Devices............................................................................................... 13-29
AUTHORI ZATI ON .................................................................................................................13-29
EMPLOYMENT AND CONSTRUCTI ON TECHNI QUES...................................................13-29
Hi gh-Expl osi ve, Arti l l ery-Shel l Anti tank Devi ce ...........................................................13-30
Pl atter Charge ..................................................................................................................13-31
I mprovi sed Cl aymore .......................................................................................................13-31
Grapeshot Anti personnel Devi ce .....................................................................................13-32
Barbwi re Anti personnel Devi ce .......................................................................................13-32
APPENDIX A. INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF US MINES
AND FIRING DEVICES.........................................................................................................A-1
Section I. Antipersonnel Mines..................................................................................................A-2
M14 ............................................................................................................................................. A-2
Characteri sti cs ..................................................................................................................... A-2
I nstal l ati on........................................................................................................................... A-3
Removal ................................................................................................................................ A-5
M16 ............................................................................................................................................. A-6
Characteri sti cs ..................................................................................................................... A-6
I nstal l ati on........................................................................................................................... A-7
Removal .............................................................................................................................. A-10
Section II. Antitank Mines........................................................................................................A-11
M15 ........................................................................................................................................... A-11
Characteri sti cs ................................................................................................................... A-12
I nstal l ati on Usi ng the M624 Fuse .................................................................................... A-13
Removal Usi ng the M624 Fuse ......................................................................................... A-17
I nstal l ati on Usi ng the M603 Fuse .................................................................................... A-17
Removal Usi ng the M603 Fuse ......................................................................................... A-20
M19 ........................................................................................................................................... A-21
I nstal l ati on......................................................................................................................... A-22
Removal .............................................................................................................................. A-24
M21 ........................................................................................................................................... A-24
I nstal l ati on......................................................................................................................... A-26
Removal .............................................................................................................................. A-29
Section III. FiringDevices and Activators...........................................................................A-29
M5 PRESSURE-RELEASE FI RI NG DEVI CE (MOUSETRAP) ........................................... A-30
I nstal l ati on......................................................................................................................... A-31
Removal .............................................................................................................................. A-31
C2
viii
Page
C3
M142 MULTI PURPOSE FI RI NG DEVI CE ............................................................................A-32
Characteri sti cs ...................................................................................................................A-33
Armi ng and Di sarmi ng ......................................................................................................A-33
M1 AND M2 ACTI VATORS.....................................................................................................A-33
APPENDIX B. CONTROLS AND COMPONENTS OF
SPECIAL-PURPOSE MUNITIONS..................................................................................... B-1
SELECTABLE LI GHTWEI GHT ATTACK MUNI TI ON..........................................................B-1
M93 HORNET............................................................................................................................B-1
APPENDIX C. THREAT MINE/COUNTERMINE OPERATIONS...................................... C-1
MI NE OPERATI ONS.................................................................................................................C-1
CHEMI CAL MI NES...................................................................................................................C-6
COUNTERMI NE OPERATI ONS ..............................................................................................C-7
Organi zati on .........................................................................................................................C-7
Equi pment ..........................................................................................................................C-11
APPENDIX D. AIR VOLCANO..................................................................................................D-1
COMPONENTS ......................................................................................................................... D-1
M87-Seri es Mi ne Cani ster .................................................................................................. D-1
M139 Di spenser................................................................................................................... D-2
LI MI TATI ONS........................................................................................................................... D-2
EMPLOYMENT......................................................................................................................... D-2
Deep Operati ons.................................................................................................................. D-3
Cl ose Operati ons ................................................................................................................. D-4
Rear Operati ons .................................................................................................................. D-5
Mi nefi el d Effects ................................................................................................................. D-6
Pl anni ng .............................................................................................................................. D-8
EMPLACEMENT.................................................................................................................... D-18
Outsi de Fri endl y Terri tory ............................................................................................... D-20
Wi thi n Fri endl y Terri tory................................................................................................. D-20
REPORTI NG............................................................................................................................ D-22
Scatterabl e Mi nefi el d Warni ng ........................................................................................ D-22
Scatterabl e Mi nefi el d Report and Record........................................................................ D-22
APPENDIX E. SAFETY AND TRAINING................................................................................ E-1
STORAGE ...................................................................................................................................E-1
LI VE-MI NE TRAI NI NG ............................................................................................................E-3
LI VE-MI NE DEMONSTRATI ONS ...........................................................................................E-5
M16 Anti personnel Mi ne .....................................................................................................E-5
M18A1 Anti personnel Muni ti on..........................................................................................E-6
M15, M19, and M21 Anti tank Mi nes ..................................................................................E-7
RI SK ASSESSMENT FOR LI VE-MI NE DEMONSTRATI ONS..............................................E-8
RI SK ASSESSMENT FOR LI VE-MI NE TRAI NI NG.............................................................E-10
APPENDIX F. MINE AWARENESS...........................................................................................F-1
SOLDI ER ....................................................................................................................................F-1
Vi sual I ndi cators ..................................................................................................................F-1
Probi ng..................................................................................................................................F-2
AN/PSS-12 Metal l i c Mi ne Detector .....................................................................................F-3
Evacuati on Dri l l s ...............................................................................................................F-13
ix
Page
C3
LEADER................................................................................................................................... F-17
Ri sk Management.............................................................................................................. F-17
Recordi ng and Mi ne-Data Tracki ng ................................................................................. F-20
Mi ne-I nci dent Report ........................................................................................................ F-21
TRAI NI NG ............................................................................................................................... F-21
I ndi vi dual Trai ni ng ........................................................................................................... F-21
Leader Trai ni ng................................................................................................................. F-22
Uni t Trai ni ng..................................................................................................................... F-23
APPENDIX G. COUNTERMINE DATA....................................................................................G-1
BREACHI NG ASSETS VERSUS THREAT OBSTACLES......................................................G-1
FOREI GN MI NE DATA ............................................................................................................G-1
FOREI GN MI NEFI ELD EMPLACEMENT DATA..................................................................G-1
FOREI GN MI NE DELI VERY SYSTEMS ................................................................................G-1
APPENDIX H. METRIC CONVERSION CHART .................................................................. H-1
GLOSSARY ....................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
REFERENCES..............................................................................................................References-1
INDEX......................................................................................................................................Index-1
x
C2
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figures
Page
Fi gure 1-1. Mi ne components .......................................................................................................... 1-2
Fi gure 1-2. Methods of actuati ng mi nes ......................................................................................... 1-3
Fi gure 1-3. Types of fuses ................................................................................................................ 1-4
Fi gure 1-4. AHD i ncorporati ng a rel ease mechani sm.................................................................... 1-7
Fi gure 1-5. AHD not attached to the mi ne ..................................................................................... 1-7
Fi gure 1-6. Hand-empl aced US AHDs ............................................................................................ 1-8
Fi gure 2-1. Tacti cal versus protecti ve obstacl es............................................................................. 2-6
Fi gure 2-2. Tacti cal -obstacl e effects ................................................................................................ 2-6
Fi gure 2-3. Mi nefi el d vari abl es ....................................................................................................... 2-7
Fi gure 2-4. Vehi cl e mi ne encounter probabi l i ty versus mi nefi el d densi ty ................................... 2-9
Fi gure 2-5. Di srupt-effect group.................................................................................................... 2-10
Fi gure 2-6. Fi x-effect group ........................................................................................................... 2-11
Fi gure 2-7. Turn-effect group ........................................................................................................ 2-12
Fi gure 2-8. Bl ock-effect group ....................................................................................................... 2-13
Fi gure 2-9. Obstacl e zones ............................................................................................................. 2-16
Fi gure 2-10. Obstacl e bel ts ............................................................................................................ 2-17
Fi gure 2-11. Obstacl e groups......................................................................................................... 2-18
Fi gure 2-12. TF defense COA ........................................................................................................ 2-24
Fi gure 2-13. TF di rect-fi re anal ysi s .............................................................................................. 2-25
Fi gure 2-14. TF obstacl e-i ntent i ntegrati on and pri ori ti es.......................................................... 2-26
Fi gure 2-15. Obstacl e-pl an refi nement ......................................................................................... 2-28
Fi gure 2-16. Scheme-of-obstacl e overl ay....................................................................................... 2-30
Fi gure 2-17. Sampl e obstacl e-executi on matri x ........................................................................... 2-31
Fi gure 2-18. Mi nefi el d si ti ng ......................................................................................................... 2-38
Fi gure 2-19. Exampl e of mi nefi el d resourci ng ............................................................................. 2-40
Fi gure 2-20. Mi ne resuppl y ........................................................................................................... 2-41
Fi gure 2-21. Suppl y-poi nt resuppl y method ................................................................................. 2-46
Fi gure 2-22. Servi ce-stati on resuppl y method.............................................................................. 2-47
Fi gure 2-23. Tai l gate resuppl y method......................................................................................... 2-48
Fi gure 2-24. Mi nefi el d marki ng .................................................................................................... 2-51
Fi gure 2-25. Marki ng of mi nefi el ds and obstacl e groups ............................................................. 2-52
Fi gure 2-26. Sampl e obstacl e-turnover work sheet...................................................................... 2-54
Fi gure 3-1. AP SCATMI NEs ........................................................................................................... 3-2
Fi gure 3-2. AT SCATMI NE ............................................................................................................. 3-3
Fi gure 3-3. Empl acement of ADAMs and RAAMs ....................................................................... 3-11
Fi gure 3-4. Gator SCATMI NE system.......................................................................................... 3-15
Fi gure 3-5. Gator mi nefi el d ........................................................................................................... 3-17
Fi gure 3-6. Vol cano mi ne system .................................................................................................. 3-18
Fi gure 3-7. Vol cano components ................................................................................................... 3-18
Fi gure 3-8. Vol cano di srupt and fi x mi nefi el ds ............................................................................ 3-21
Fi gure 3-9. Vol cano turn and bl ock mi nefi el ds............................................................................. 3-22
Fi gure 3-10. MOPMS ..................................................................................................................... 3-22
xi
Page
C2
Fi gure 3-11. MOPMS empl acement and safety zone.................................................................... 3-23
Fi gure 3-12. MOPMS i n a di srupt mi nefi el d ................................................................................ 3-25
Fi gure 3-13. MOPMS i n a fi x mi nefi el d ........................................................................................ 3-26
Fi gure 3-14. Ground Vol cano mi nefi el d ........................................................................................ 3-27
Fi gure 4-2. M18A1 cl aymore............................................................................................................ 4-2
Fi gure 4-3. SLAM ............................................................................................................................. 4-3
Fi gure 4-4. SLAM i n bottom-attack mode....................................................................................... 4-4
Fi gure 4-5. SLAM i n si de-attack mode............................................................................................ 4-5
Fi gure 4-6. SLAM i n ti med-demol i ti on mode.................................................................................. 4-5
Fi gure 4-7. SLAM i n command-detonati on mode ........................................................................... 4-5
Fi gure 4-8. M93 Hornet.................................................................................................................... 4-6
Fi gure 4-9. Hornet rei nforci ng a conventi onal mi nefi el d ............................................................... 4-9
Fi gure 4-10. Hornet rei nforci ng a Vol cano mi nefi el d ................................................................... 4-10
Fi gure 4-11. Hornet area-di srupti on obstacl e............................................................................... 4-11
Fi gure 4-12. Hornet gauntl et obstacl e (one cl uster)..................................................................... 4-12
Fi gure 4-13. Hornet gauntl et obstacl e (pl atoon)........................................................................... 4-13
Fi gure 4-14. Hornet-enhanced turn-and fi x-obstacl e groups ....................................................... 4-14
Fi gure 5-1. AT mi nes ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
Fi gure 5-2. AP mi nes ........................................................................................................................ 5-3
Fi gure 5-3. Prong-acti vated AP mi ne .............................................................................................. 5-5
Fi gure 5-4. Tri p-wi re-acti vated AP mi ne ........................................................................................ 5-5
Fi gure 5-5. Buri ed mi ne wi th pressure pl ate.................................................................................. 5-6
Fi gure 5-6. Buri ed mi ne wi th ti l t rod .............................................................................................. 5-7
Fi gure 5-7. Buri ed and conceal ed mi nes ......................................................................................... 5-7
Fi gure 6-1. Mi nefi el d requi rements computati on work sheet........................................................ 6-5
Fi gure 6-2. Step-by-step procedures for compl eti ng the mi nefi el d requi rements
computati on work sheet............................................................................................................ 6-9
Fi gure 6-3. Si te l ayout.................................................................................................................... 6-19
Fi gure 6-4a. Layi ng a mi nefi el d..................................................................................................... 6-20
Fi gure 6-4b. Layi ng a mi nefi el d (conti nued)................................................................................. 6-21
Fi gure 6-5. Layi ng an I OE short row ............................................................................................ 6-21
Fi gure 6-6. Sampl e stri p feeder report .......................................................................................... 6-22
Fi gure 6-7. Layi ng a row mi nefi el d ............................................................................................... 6-23
Fi gure 6-8. Measuri ng di stances between mi nes wi th sandbags................................................. 6-25
Fi gure 6-9a. Sampl e DA Form 1355 for a row mi nefi el d (front).................................................. 6-26
Fi gure 6-9b. Sampl e DA Form 1355 for a row mi nefi el d (back) .................................................. 6-27
Fi gure 6-10. Standardi zed di srupt and fi x row mi nefi el ds .......................................................... 6-28
Fi gure 6-11. Standardi zed turn row mi nefi el d ............................................................................. 6-30
Fi gure 6-12. Standardi zed bl ock row mi nefi el d ............................................................................ 6-32
Fi gure 6-13. Si te l ayout.................................................................................................................. 6-35
Fi gure 7-1. Mi nefi el d l ayout............................................................................................................. 7-2
Fi gure 7-2. Cl uster composi ti ons ..................................................................................................... 7-3
Fi gure 7-3. Arrangement of cl usters i n a mi ne stri p ...................................................................... 7-3
Fi gure 7-4. I OE basel i ne wi th short stri ps...................................................................................... 7-4
Fi gure 7-5. Cl usters on an I OE short stri p ..................................................................................... 7-7
Fi gure 7-6. Mi nefi el d l anes and gaps .............................................................................................. 7-8
Fi gure 7-7. Mi ne-empl acement procedures ................................................................................... 7-11
Fi gure 7-8. Layi ng and fusi ng mi nes............................................................................................. 7-14
Fi gure 7-9. Lane cl osure................................................................................................................. 7-16
xii
Page
C2
Fi gure 8-1. Conventi onal mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d reporti ng chai n ............................................. 8-2
Fi gure 8-2a. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (front si de) for a standard-pattern
mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d ........................................................................................................... 8-5
Fi gure 8-2b. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (i nsi de) for a standard-pattern
Fi gure 8-2c. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (back si de) for a standard-pattern
Fi gure 8-3a. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (front si de) for a Hornet mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d............ 8-12
Fi gure 8-3b. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (back si de) for a Hornet mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d ............ 8-13
Fi gure 8-4. Sampl e DA Form 1355-1-R ........................................................................................ 8-18
Fi gure 8-5. Hasty protecti ve row mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d record .............................................. 8-19
Fi gure 8-6a. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (front si de) for a nui sance mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d......... 8-21
Fi gure 8-6b. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (i nsi de) for a nui sance mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d .............. 8-22
Fi gure 8-7. Scatterabl e mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d report and record work sheet ........................ 8-23
Fi gure 8-8. Sampl e SCATMI NWARN........................................................................................... 8-24
Fi gure 8-9. Scatterabl e mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d report and record
for an ADAM/RAAM arti l l ery mi ssi on .................................................................................. 8-24
Fi gure 8-10. Sampl e SCATMI NWARN for an arti l l ery mi ssi on ................................................. 8-25
Fi gure 8-11. Mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d overl ay symbol s ............................................................... 8-26
Fi gure 9-1. Sampl e OBSTI NTEL report......................................................................................... 9-3
Fi gure 10-1. AN/PSS-12 mi ne detector ......................................................................................... 10-3
Fi gure 10-2. ASTAMI DS................................................................................................................ 10-4
Fi gure 10-3. I VMMD components ................................................................................................. 10-5
Fi gure 10-4. MI CLI C ..................................................................................................................... 10-8
Fi gure 10-5. AVLM ........................................................................................................................ 10-8
Fi gure 10-6. MI CLI C empl oyment i n a mi nefi el d l ess than 100 meters deep.......................... 10-10
Fi gure 10-7. MI CLI C empl oyment i n a mi nefi el d of uncertai n depth
or greater than 100 meters ................................................................................................... 10-10
Fi gure 10-8. Ski p zone ................................................................................................................. 10-11
Fi gure 10-10. APOBS................................................................................................................... 10-13
Fi gure 10-11. Bangal ore torpedo................................................................................................. 10-13
Fi gure 10-12. Ski m techni que ..................................................................................................... 10-15
Fi gure 10-13. MCB....................................................................................................................... 10-15
Fi gure 10-14. Mi ne-bl ade wi dth compared to track-vehi cl e wi dths .......................................... 10-16
Fi gure 10-15. MCR....................................................................................................................... 10-17
Fi gure 10-16. Mi ne-rol l er wi dth compared to track-vehi cl e wi dths .......................................... 10-17
Fi gure 10-17. Panther .................................................................................................................. 10-19
Fi gure 10-18. Mi ni Fl ai l ................................................................................................................ 10-20
Fi gure 10-19. Gri zzl y ................................................................................................................... 10-20
Fi gure 10-20. CEV wi th mi ne rake ............................................................................................. 10-21
Fi gure 10-21. Tri pod .................................................................................................................... 10-23
Fi gure 10-22. I ni ti al l ane marki ng.............................................................................................. 10-28
Fi gure 10-23. I ntermedi ate l ane marki ng .................................................................................. 10-30
Fi gure 10-24. Ful l l ane marki ng ................................................................................................. 10-32
Fi gure 10-25. Marki ng devi ces .................................................................................................... 10-35
Fi gure 10-26. NATO standard marker ....................................................................................... 10-37
Fi gure 10-27. NATO l ane-marki ng conversi on .......................................................................... 10-37
Fi gure 10-28. NATO standard marki ng for l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty ................................................... 10-38
Fi gure 11-1. I BASI C ...................................................................................................................... 11-6
xiii
Page
C3
Fi gure 11-2. Pl atoon-si ze sweep team ........................................................................................... 11-9
Fi gure 11-3. Squad-si ze sweep team ........................................................................................... 11-10
Fi gure 11-4. Sweep teams i n echel on .......................................................................................... 11-11
Fi gure 11-5. Li near cl earance method......................................................................................... 11-12
Fi gure 11-6. Combat cl earance method....................................................................................... 11-13
Fi gure 11-7. Del i berate route cl earance ...................................................................................... 11-14
Fi gure 11-8. Hasty route cl earance ............................................................................................. 11-15
Fi gure 11-9. Area cl earance si te l ayout....................................................................................... 11-19
Fi gure 11-10. Sampl e enemy obstacl e report.............................................................................. 11-24
Fi gure 11-11. Sampl e route status report ................................................................................... 11-25
Fi gure 11-12. Sampl e mi ne i nci dent report ................................................................................ 11-26
Fi gure 12-1. Outri gger techni ques ................................................................................................ 12-3
Fi gure 12-2a. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (front si de) for ri ver mi ni ng ............................................. 12-4
Fi gure 12-2b. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (i nsi de) for ri ver mi ni ng ................................................... 12-5
Fi gure 12-3. Bui l di ng sketch and mi ne pl an (DA Form 1355)..................................................... 12-7
Fi gure 12-4. Underground passageway......................................................................................... 12-8
Fi gure 12-5. Open spaces ............................................................................................................... 12-8
Fi gure 12-6. Street obstacl es.......................................................................................................... 12-9
Fi gure 12-7. Roof obstacl es ............................................................................................................ 12-9
Fi gure 12-8. Bui l di ng obstacl es ................................................................................................... 12-10
Fi gure 12-9. Probabl e M14 AP mi ne empl acement .................................................................... 12-11
Fi gure 12-10. Probabl e M16 AP mi ne empl acement .................................................................. 12-11
Fi gure 12-11. Probabl e M18A1 AP mi ne empl acement.............................................................. 12-12
Fi gure 12-12. AT mi ne empl acement i n urban areas ................................................................. 12-13
Fi gure 12-13. AT mi ne empl acement i n i ndustri al and transportati on areas .......................... 12-13
Fi gure 12-14. ADAM/RAAM empl oyment................................................................................... 12-14
Fi gure 12-15. MOPMS empl oyment ............................................................................................ 12-16
Fi gure 13-1. Typi cal el ectri c and nonel ectri c booby traps ............................................................ 13-6
Fi gure 13-2. Methods of actuati on ................................................................................................. 13-7
Fi gure 13-3. Remotel y connected traps ......................................................................................... 13-7
Fi gure 13-4. Standard booby-trap si gn.......................................................................................... 13-9
Fi gure 13-5a. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (front si de) for a booby-trapped area ............................. 13-12
Fi gure 13-5b. Sampl e DA Form 1355 (i nsi de) for a booby-trapped area ................................... 13-13
Fi gure 13-6. I mprovi sed el ectri cal FDs ....................................................................................... 13-24
Fi gure 13-7. I mprovi sed nonel ectri c FDs (shear-pi n operated) ................................................. 13-25
Fi gure 13-8. I mprovi sed nonel ectri c FDs (spri ng-operated) ...................................................... 13-25
Fi gure 13-9. I mprovi sed, el ectri c del ay devi ces .......................................................................... 13-26
Fi gure 13-10. I mprovi sed, nonel ectri c del ay devi ces .................................................................. 13-26
Fi gure 13-11. Typi cal punji s ........................................................................................................ 13-27
Fi gure 13-12. Si de-cl osi ng trap .................................................................................................... 13-27
Fi gure 13-13. Spi ke board ............................................................................................................ 13-28
Fi gure 13-14. Venus fl y trap ........................................................................................................ 13-28
Fi gure 13-15. HE, arti l l ery-shel l AT devi ce ................................................................................ 13-30
Fi gure 13-16. Pl atter charge ........................................................................................................ 13-31
Fi gure 13-17. I mprovi sed cl aymore devi ce.................................................................................. 13-32
Fi gure 13-18. Grapeshot AP devi ce ............................................................................................. 13-33
Fi gure 13-19. Barbwi re AP devi ce ............................................................................................... 13-33
Fi gure A-1. M14 AP mi ne................................................................................................................ A-2
Fi gure A-2. M22 wrench.................................................................................................................. A-3
Fi gure A-3. M14 mi ne i n ARMED posi ti on .................................................................................... A-4
Fi gure A-4. Removal of safety cl i p .................................................................................................. A-4
xiv
Page
C2
Fi gure A-5. Bottom vi ew of M14 mi ne ............................................................................................ A-5
Fi gure A-6. M16A1 AP mi ne ........................................................................................................... A-6
Fi gure A-7. M16A1 mi ne and M25 wrench..................................................................................... A-7
Fi gure A-8. M605 fuse ..................................................................................................................... A-8
Fi gure A-9. Safety pi ns .................................................................................................................... A-9
Fi gure A-10. Buri ed mi ne wi th a tri p wi re ..................................................................................... A-9
Fi gure A-11. Metal col l ar on an M605 fuse .................................................................................. A-10
Fi gure A-12. M15 AT mi ne ............................................................................................................ A-12
Fi gure A-13. M20 wrench .............................................................................................................. A-13
Fi gure A-14. Correct safety-pi n confi gurati on.............................................................................. A-14
Fi gure A-15. Greasi ng the M624 fuse ........................................................................................... A-14
Fi gure A-16. Ti ghteni ng the fuse wi th the extensi on rod ............................................................ A-15
Fi gure A-17. M15 mi ne i n the hol e ............................................................................................... A-15
Fi gure A-18. Extensi on-rod assembl y ........................................................................................... A-16
Fi gure A-19. Assembl y of the extensi on rod i nto the fuse ri ng ................................................... A-16
Fi gure A-20. Removal of safety pi n ............................................................................................... A-17
Fi gure A-21. ARMED posi ti on....................................................................................................... A-18
Fi gure A-22. SAFE posi ti on........................................................................................................... A-18
Fi gure A-23. Safety fork ................................................................................................................ A-19
Fi gure A-24. Cl earance test........................................................................................................... A-20
Fi gure A-25. M15 mi ne i n the hol e ............................................................................................... A-20
Fi gure A-27. Removal of the pressure pl ate ................................................................................. A-22
Fi gure A-28. Fi ri ng pi n .................................................................................................................. A-23
Fi gure A-30. M607 fuse ................................................................................................................. A-26
Fi gure A-31. M26 wrench .............................................................................................................. A-26
Fi gure A-32. Buri ed M21 mi ne...................................................................................................... A-27
Fi gure A-33. Removi ng the band and the stop ............................................................................. A-28
Fi gure A-34. M5 FD ....................................................................................................................... A-30
Fi gure A-35. Armi ng the M15 ....................................................................................................... A-31
Fi gure A-36. M142 FD ................................................................................................................... A-32
Fi gure A-37. M1 acti vator ............................................................................................................. A-34
Fi gure B-1. SLAM components ....................................................................................................... B-1
Fi gure B-2. Hornet components ...................................................................................................... B-3
Fi gure B-3. Hornet control s and i ndi cators .................................................................................... B-4
Fi gure C-1. GMZ armored tracked mi ne l ayer ............................................................................... C-2
Fi gure C-2. Threat-styl e rapi dl y empl aced mi nefi el d .................................................................... C-3
Fi gure C-3. Threat-styl e anti track mi nefi el d ................................................................................. C-3
Fi gure C-4. Threat-styl e anti hul l mi nefi el d ................................................................................... C-4
Fi gure C-5. Threat-styl e AP mi nefi el d............................................................................................ C-4
Fi gure C-6. UMZ SCATMI NE system ............................................................................................ C-6
Fi gure C-7. Chemi cal -mi ne empl oyment ........................................................................................ C-7
Fi gure C-8. BAT-M wi th BTU bul l dozer bl ade............................................................................... C-8
Fi gure C-9. KMT-4 pl ow .................................................................................................................. C-8
Fi gure C-10. I MP portabl e mi ne detector ....................................................................................... C-9
Fi gure C-11. DI M mi ne detector ..................................................................................................... C-9
Fi gure C-12. KMT-5 pl ow-rol l er combi nati on .............................................................................. C-10
Fi gure C-13. I MR armored engi neer tractor ................................................................................ C-10
Fi gure C-14. M1979 armored mi ne cl earer .................................................................................. C-11
xv
Page
C3
Fi gure D-1. Ai r Vol cano system...................................................................................................... D-1
Fi gure D-2. Turn obstacl e ............................................................................................................... D-6
Fi gure D-3. Bl ock obstacl e .............................................................................................................. D-7
Fi gure D-4. Di srupt obstacl e........................................................................................................... D-7
Fi gure D-5. Fi x obstacl e .................................................................................................................. D-8
Fi gure D-6. Si te l ayout .................................................................................................................. D-15
Fi gure D-7. Sampl e Vol cano card ................................................................................................. D-17
Fi gure D-8. Fenci ng for an ai r Vol cano mi nefi el d........................................................................ D-21
Fi gure E-1. M16 AP mi ne................................................................................................................ E-6
Fi gure E-2. M18A1 AP mi ne ........................................................................................................... E-7
Fi gure E-3. M15 and M19 AT mi nes .............................................................................................. E-8
Fi gure E-4. M21 AT mi ne................................................................................................................ E-8
Fi gure E-5. Excerpt from Ri sk-Assessment Techni ques Manual , prepared by the
Department of Transportati ons Transportati on Safety I nsti tute, August 1986 .................. E-9
Fi gure E-6. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (armi ng M15).......................................... E-11
Fi gure E-7. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (di sarmi ng M15)..................................... E-12
Fi gure E-8. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (armi ng M16).......................................... E-13
Fi gure E-9. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (di sarmi ng M16)..................................... E-14
Fi gure E-10. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (armi ng M19)........................................ E-15
Fi gure E-11. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (di sarmi ng M19)................................... E-16
Fi gure E-12. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (armi ng M21)........................................ E-17
Fi gure E-13. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (di sarmi ng M21)................................... E-18
Fi gure E-14. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (command detonati on)......................... E-19
Fi gure E-15. Prel i mi nary hazard-anal ysi s work sheet (peri pheral factors) .............................. E-20
Fi gure F-1. AN/PSS-12 metal l i c mi ne detector .............................................................................. F-4
Fi gure F-2. AN/PSS-12 packed components .................................................................................. F-4
Fi gure F-3. El ectroni c uni t.............................................................................................................. F-5
Fi gure F-4. Battery i nstal l ati on...................................................................................................... F-5
Tables
Tabl e 2-1. Echel ons of obstacl e control and effect .........................................................................2-15
Tabl e 2-2. Pl anni ng factors for the mi ne dump .............................................................................2-21
Tabl e 2-3. Pl anni ng factors for work rates .....................................................................................2-21
Tabl e 2-4. Pl anni ng factors for standardi zed row mi nefi el ds .......................................................2-22
Tabl e 2-5. Pl anni ng factors for scatterabl e mi nefi el ds ..................................................................2-22
Tabl e 2-6. Ranges of common weapons ..........................................................................................2-23
Tabl e 2-7. Personnel requi rements for a Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt................................................2-42
Tabl e 2-8. Cl ass I V/V haul capaci ty................................................................................................2-45
Tabl e 3-1. Characteri sti cs of AP SCATMI NEs ................................................................................3-2
Tabl e 3-2. Characteri sti cs of AT SCATMI NEs ................................................................................3-4
Tabl e 3-3. SD wi ndows ......................................................................................................................3-7
Tabl e 3-4. Empl acement authori ty ...................................................................................................3-9
Tabl e 3-5. Coordi nati on responsi bi l i ti es.........................................................................................3-10
Tabl e 3-6. RAAM and ADAM mi nefi el d densi ty and si ze .............................................................3-14
Tabl e 3-7. Marki ng scatterabl e mi nefi el ds ....................................................................................3-26
Tabl e 3-8. Safety and fragment hazard zones................................................................................3-28
Tabl e 4-1. Hornet mi ni mum empl acement di stances ....................................................................4-15
xvi
Page
C3
Tabl e 5-1. Characteri sti cs of AT mi nes............................................................................................ 5-2
Tabl e 5-2. Characteri sti cs of AP mi nes............................................................................................ 5-3
Tabl e 5-3. Sympatheti c detonati on chart ........................................................................................ 5-8
Tabl e 7-1. Pl atoon organi zati on and equi pment ........................................................................... 7-10
Tabl e 7-2. Sampl e mi nes tal l y sheet .............................................................................................. 7-15
Tabl e 8-1. Mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d obstacl e numberi ng system ................................................... 8-8
Tabl e 8-2. Abbrevi ati ons for obstacl e types ..................................................................................... 8-9
Tabl e 9-1. Lane wi dths ..................................................................................................................... 9-4
Tabl e 10-1. Lane-marki ng l evel s, uni t responsi bi l i ti es, and tri gger events .............................. 10-33
Tabl e 10-2. Gui del i nes for l ane-marki ng devi ces ........................................................................ 10-34
Tabl e 11-1. Sampl e task organi zati on for a route cl earance ........................................................ 11-2
Tabl e 11-2. Personnel and equi pment requi rements for a sweep team....................................... 11-8
Tabl e 11-3. Sampl e task organi zati on for an area cl earance...................................................... 11-17
Tabl e 13-1. Tacti cal reports .......................................................................................................... 13-11
Tabl e 13-2. Cl eari ng equi pment ................................................................................................... 13-17
Tabl e C-1. Normal parameters for threat-styl e mi nefi el ds ............................................................C-2
Tabl e D-1. Ai r Vol cano capabi l i ti es and l i mi tati ons ...................................................................... D-4
Tabl e D-2. Ai r Vol cano mi nefi el d data............................................................................................ D-6
Tabl e D-3. Pl anni ng process (H-hour sequence) .......................................................................... D-11
Tabl e D-4. Ai r Vol cano di spensi ng ti mes based on ai r speed ...................................................... D-19
Tabl e E-1. Mi ne col or-codi ng system ...............................................................................................E-2
Tabl e F-1. Ri sk-assessment cri teri a...............................................................................................F-18
Tabl e F-2. Sampl e ri sk assessment................................................................................................F-19
Tabl e G-1. Mounted breachi ng assets versus threat obstacl es ..................................................... G-2
Tabl e G-2. Di smounted breachi ng assets versus threat obstacl es ................................................ G-5
Tabl e G-3. Forei gn track-wi dth AT mi nes ...................................................................................... G-9
Tabl e G-4. Forei gn ful l -wi dth AT mi nes ....................................................................................... G-10
Tabl e G-5. Forei gn si de-attack AT mi nes ..................................................................................... G-11
Tabl e G-6. Forei gn pressure-fused AP mi nes ............................................................................... G-11
Tabl e G-7. Forei gn tri p-wi re/break-wi re-fused AP mi nes............................................................ G-12
Tabl e G-8. Forei gn empl aced mi nefi el ds ...................................................................................... G-13
Tabl e G-9. Forei gn mi ne del i very systems ................................................................................... G-14
Tabl e H-1. Metri c conversi on chart................................................................................................. H-1
xvii
C2
Preface
Fi el d Manual (FM) 20-32 provi des Uni ted States (US) armed forces wi th tacti cal , techni cal , and
procedural gui dance for conducti ng mi ne and countermi ne operati ons. I t appl i es to al l el ements of
the combi ned arms team for maneuver and engi neer staff pl anni ng and coordi nati on. The manual
i s presented i n three partsmi ne operati ons, counteroperati ons, and speci al -mi ni ng operati ons.
The gui dance provi ded focuses on i ndi vi dual ski l l s of empl aci ng and r emovi ng mi nes, team and
squad tasks, pl atoon and company or gani zati on and pl anni ng, and battal i on/task for ce (TF)
organi zati on and coordi nati on for successful obstacl e reducti on and breachi ng operati ons.
The provi si ons of thi s publ i cati on support exi sti ng doctri ne establ i shed by FMs 5-34, 5-100, 90-7,
and 90-13-1. I t al so contai ns new and i mpr oved techni ques for empl aci ng r ow mi nes; mar ki ng,
r epor ti ng, and r ecor di ng mi nefi el ds; r educi ng si mpl e and compl ex obstacl es; and empl aci ng a
standard-pattern mi nefi el d. Thi s manual refl ects new doctri ne from FMs 5-10, 5-71-2, and 5-71-3.
Th i s pu bl i cati on i mpl emen ts th e fol l owi n g I n ter n ati on al Stan dar di zati on Agr eemen ts
(STANAGs) between North Atl anti c Treaty Organi zati on (NATO) forces:
STANAG 2036. Land Minefield Laying, Marking, Recording, and Reporting Procedures.
Edi ti on 5.
STANAG 2889. Markingof Hazardous Areas and Routes Through Them. Edi ti on 3.
STANAG 2990. Principles and Procedures for the Employment in Land Warfare of
ScatterableMines with a Limited Laid Life. Edi ti on 1.
NOTE: US policy regarding the use and employment of antipersonnel land mines
(APLs) outlined in this FM is subject to the Convention on Certain Conventional
Weapons and Executive Orders. Current US policy limits the use of non-self-
destructing APLs to (1) defending the US and its allies fromarmed aggression across
the Korean demilitarized zone and (2) training personnel engaged in demining and
countermine operations. The use of the M18A1 claymore in the command-detonation
modeis not restricted under international lawor ExecutiveOrder.
Al l r efer ences to US empl oyment of non-sel f-destr ucti ng APLs (such as r ow mi ni ng) i n thi s
manual ar e i ntended to pr ovi de doctr i ne for use i n Kor ea onl y. Thi s i nfor mati on i s pr ovi ded i n
bol d l etteri ng thr oughout the manual . Detai l ed doctri ne on APLs i s al so pr ovi ded to ensure that
US forces recogni ze how the enemy can empl oy these weapons.
As the US mi l i tar y seeks to end i ts r el i ance on APLs, commander s must consi der the i ncreased
use of other systems such as the M18A1 cl aymor e, nonl ethal bar r i er s (such as wi r e obstacl es),
sensors and survei l l ance pl atforms, and di rect and i ndi rect fi res.
Thi s publ i cati on i ncl udes the fol l owi ng appendi xes:
Appendi x A. I nstal l ati on and Removal of US Mi nes and Fi ri ng Devi ces.
Appendi x B. Control s and Components of Speci al -Purpose Muni ti ons.
Appendi x C. Threat Mi ne/Countermi ne Operati ons.
Appendi x D. Ai r Vol cano.
Appendi x E. Safety and Trai ni ng.
Appendi x F. Mi ne Awareness.
Appendi x G. Countermi ne Data.
Appendi x H. Metri c Conversi on Chart.
xviii
The pr oponent for thi s publ i cati on i s Headquarter s, US Ar my Trai ni ng and Doctr i ne Command
(TRADOC). For war d comments and r ecommendati ons on Depar tment of the Ar my (DA) For m
2028 to Commandant, US Army Engi neer School , ATTN: ATSE-DME-MWF, Fort Leonard Wood,
Mi ssouri 65473-5000.
Unl ess thi s publ i cati on states otherwi se, nouns and pronouns do not refer excl usi vel y to men.
Introduction 1-1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Thi s chapter pr ovi des the mechani cs and char acter i sti cs of anti tank (AT)
mi nes and muni ti ons, anti per sonnel (AP) mi nes and muni ti ons, and
anti handl i ng devi ces (AHDs). The i nfor mati on contai ned i n thi s chapter
al so provi des a foundati on for the r est of the manual .
Land-based mi nes and muni ti ons ar e hand-empl aced, r emote-del i ver ed,
ground-del i vered, or ai r-del i ver ed:
Hand-empl aced mi nes and muni ti ons requi re manual armi ng and
are l abor-, resource-, and tr ansport-i ntensi ve.
Remote- and ai r-del i vered mi nes and muni ti ons requi re l ess ti me
and l abor ; howev er, th ey ar e not as pr eci sel y pl aced as han d-
empl aced mi nes and muni ti ons.
Ground-del i ver ed mi nes are l ess resource-i ntensi ve than hand-
empl aced mi n es. Th ey ar e n ot pr eci s el y pl aced; h owev er, th e
mi nefi el d boundari es are.
Sol di ers can surface l ay or bury mi nes and muni ti ons and can pl ace AHDs
on hand-empl aced AT mi nes.
NOTE: Some countries employ AHDs on AP mines, but US forces
arenot authorized to employ AHDs on any typeof AP mine.
MECHANICS OF MINES
CHARACTERISTICS AND FUNCTIONING
A l and mi ne i s an expl osi ve devi ce that i s desi gned to destr oy or damage
equi pment or per sonnel . Equi pment tar gets i ncl ude gr ound vehi cl es, boats,
and ai r cr aft. A mi ne i s detonated by the acti on of i ts tar get, the passage of
ti me, or control l ed means. There are two types of l and-based mi nesAT and
AP. Mi nes general l y consi st of the fol l owi ng parts (Fi gure 1-1, page 1-2):
Fi ri ng mechani sm or other devi ce (sets off the detonator or i gni ter
charge).
Detonator or i gni ter (sets off the booster charge).
Booster charge (may be attached to the fuse or the i gni ter or be part of
the mai n charge).
Mai n charge (i n a contai ner; usual l y forms the body of the mi ne).
Casi ng (contai ns al l the above parts).
FM 20-32
1-2 Introduction
COMPONENTS AND INITIATING ACTIONS
A fi ri ng mechani sm pr events the mi ne fr om expl odi ng unti l i t makes contact
wi th, or i s i nfl uenced by, i ts tar get. Once a mi ne has been ar med, the fi r i ng
mechani sm may be actuated by the fol l owi ng methods (Fi gure 1-2):
Appl yi ng pressure (i ncl udi ng ti l t rod).
Pul l i ng a tri p wi re.
Rel easi ng tensi on or breaki ng a tri p wi re.
Rel easi ng pressure.
Passage of ti me (ti me-del ay mechani sm).
I mpul ses.
El ectri cal .
Vi brati on.
Magneti c-i nfl uence.
El ectromagneti c-frequency.
I nfrared-sensored.
Acousti c.
To arm some mi nes, you must posi ti on the i gni ter, set the mechani sm properl y,
and di sengage the safety devi ce (usual l y by removi ng a safety pi n). The fuse i s
the i ni ti al component i n the fi r i ng chai n; i t has a l ow-expl osi ve (LE) powder
but i s hi ghl y sensi ti ve. The fuse i s actuated by an i ni ti ati ng acti on. Al though
mi nes ar e i ssued wi th a standar d fuse, al ternate fuses are i ssued separ atel y
for some mi nes.
The four mai n fuse types are shown i n Fi gure 1-3, page 1-4.
Figure 1-1. Mine components
Firing mechanism
Casing
Booster charge Main charge
Detonator or igniter
FM 20-32
Introduction 1-3
Figure 1-2. Methods of actuating mines
Pressure
Pull
Tension-release
Pressure-release
Time-delay
Electrical
Vibration
Infrared-sensored
Magnetic-influence
Acoustic
Electromagnetic-frequency
FM 20-32
1-4 Introduction
ANTITANK MINES
AT mi nes are desi gned to i mmobi l i ze or destroy vehi cl es and thei r occupants.
TYPES OF KILLS
An AT mi ne produces a mobi l i ty ki l l (M-Ki l l ) or a catastrophi c ki l l (K-Ki l l ). An
M-Ki l l destr oys one or mor e of the vehi cl e's vi tal dr i ve components (for
Mechanical. A spring drives a
striker against a percussion cap,
which fires the detonator.
Chemical. A small container of a
chemical compound is broken by
the initiating action. The chemical
compound reacts with another
substance to generate heat,
which ignites the detonator.
Friction. The initiating action
ignites substances inside the
fuse by friction. The flame fires
the detonator.
Electrical. The initiating action
closes an electrical circuit, which
functions an electrical detonator.
Figure 1-3. Types of fuses
Striker spring
Percussion cap
Striker
Chemical container
Restraining wire
Primer
Firing Firing-pin spring
Delay charge Chemical compound
Detonator
Trip wire
Plunger head
Contact
Spring clip
Contact rod
Electric-
wire leads
Electric detonator
Battery
Contact
C2, FM 20-32
Introduction 1-5
exampl e, breaks a track on a tank) and i mmobi l i zes the target. An M-Ki l l does
not al ways destr oy the weapon system and the cr ew; they may conti nue to
functi on. I n a K-Ki l l , the weapon system and/or the crew i s destroyed.
TYPES OF SENSING
AT fuses fal l i nto three desi gn categori es:
Track-wi dth. Usual l y pressure-actuated, requi ri ng contact wi th the
wheel s or tracks of a vehi cl e.
Ful l -wi dth. Acti vated by several methodsacousti cs, magneti c-
i nfl uence, ti l t-r od, r adi o-fr equency, i nfr ar ed-sensor ed, command, or
vi brati on. Ti l t-r od or magneti c-i nfl uence fuses are the most common.
Ful l -wi dth fuses ar e desi gned to be effecti ve over the enti r e tar get
wi dth and can cause a K-Ki l l fr om penetr ati on and spal l i ng metal or
fr om secondary expl osi ons. When a ful l -wi dth fuse i s acti vated sol el y
by contact wi th the wheel s or tr acks of the tar get vehi cl e, i t usual l y
causes an M-Ki l l because most of the energy i s absorbed by the wheel s
or tracks.
Off-route. Desi gned to be pl aced al ong the si de of a route l i kel y to be
tak en by ar mor ed vehi cl es. I t has numer ous fuzi ng possi bi l i ti es,
i ncl udi ng i nfr ared, sei smi c, br eak wi r e, and magneti c. I t produces an
M-Ki l l or a K-Ki l l , dependi ng on the l ocati on of the target at the ti me
of mi ne detonati on.
TYPES OF WARHEADS
AT mi nes can be i denti fi ed by thei r warheads:
Bl ast AT mi nes deri ve thei r effecti veness from the force generated by
hi gh-expl osi ve (HE) detonati on. They usual l y produce an M-Ki l l when
the bl as t damages the tr ack or th e vehi cl e, but a K-Ki l l i s al so
possi bl e.
Shaped-charge mi nes use a di rected-energy warhead. A shaped charge
i s for med by detonati ng an expl osi ve char ge behi nd a cone of dense
metal or other mater i al . Upon detonati on, the cone col l apses and
for ms a metal sl ug and a gaseous metal jet that penetr ate the tar get.
A K-Ki l l i s probabl e i f the crew or ammuni ti on compartment i s hi t.
Expl osi ve-formed penetrati ng (EFP) mi nes have an expl osi ve charge
wi th a metal pl ate i n front. Upon detonati on, the pl ate for ms i nto an
i nverted di sk, a sl ug, or a l ong rod. A K-Ki l l i s probabl e i f the crew or
ammuni ti on compartment i s hi t.
ANTIPERSONNEL MINES
TYPES OF KILLS
AP mi nes can ki l l or i ncapaci tate thei r vi cti ms. The i njuri es and deaths they
cau s e commi t medi cal r es ou r ces, degr ade u n i t mor al e, an d damage
nonarmored vehi cl es. Some types of AP mi nes may break or damage the track
on armored vehi cl es.
C2, FM 20-32
1-6 Introduction
TYPES OF SENSING
AP mi nes can be fused i n many ways, to i ncl ude pr essur e, sei smi c, wi r e, or
command detonati on:
Pressure fuses usual l y acti vate an AP mi ne when a l oad i s pl aced on
the fuse.
Sei smi c fuses acti vate an AP mi ne when the sensor detects vi brati ons.
Tri p wi res or break wi res acti vate an AP mi ne when somethi ng
di sturbs barel y vi si bl e wi res.
Command-detonated mi nes are acti vated by a sol di er when he detects
the enemy i n the mi nes bl ast area.
TYPES OF EFFECTS
AP mi nes contai n fi ve types of effects:
Bl ast. Cri ppl es the foot or l eg of a sol di er who steps on i t; can al so
bur st the ti r es of a wheel ed vehi cl e that passes over i t.
Boundi ng-fragmentati on. Throws a cani ster i nto the ai r; the cani ster
bursts and scatters shrapnel throughout the i mmedi ate area.
Di rect-fragmentati on. Pr opel s fr agments i n the general di r ecti on of
enemy sol di ers.
Stake-fragmentati on. Bursts and scatters shrapnel i n al l general
di recti ons.
Chemi cal . Di sper ses a chemi cal agent to whoever acti vates i t;
contami nates the surroundi ng area.
ANTIHANDLING DEVICES
AHDs perform the functi on of a mi ne fuse i f someone attempts to tamper wi th
the mi ne. They ar e i ntended to pr event movi ng or removi ng the mi ne, not to
pr event r educti on of the mi nefi el d by enemy di smounts. An AHD usual l y
con si sts of an ex pl osi ve char ge that i s con nected to, pl aced next to, or
manufactur ed i n the mi ne. The devi ce can be attached to the mi ne body and
acti vated by a wi r e that i s attached to a fi r i ng mechani sm. US for ces can
empl oy AHDs on conventi onal AT mi nes onl y. Other countr i es empl oy AHDs
on AT and AP mi nes.
Some mi nes have extra fuse wel l s that make i t easi er to i nstal l AHDs (Fi gure
1-4). An AHD does not have to be attached to the mi ne; i t can be pl aced
u n der n eath th e mi n e (Fi gu r e 1-5). Mi n es wi th AHDs ar e s ometi mes
i ncorrectl y cal l ed booby-trapped mi nes.
C2, FM 20-32
Introduction 1-7
The fol l owing hand-emplaced AHDs are used by US forces (Figure 1-6, page 1-8):
M5 pressure-rel ease fi ri ng devi ce (FD).
M142 mul ti purpose FD.
These devi ces use a spr i ng-l oaded str i ker wi th a standar d base, and they
functi on i n one or mor e modespr essur e, pr essur e-r el ease, tensi on, and/or
tensi on-rel ease. When an FD i s empl oyed as an AHD on cer tai n AT mi nes, i t
r equi res the use of an M1 or M2 acti vator. FDs and acti vator s ar e descr i bed i n
Appendi x A.
Figure 1-4. AHD incorporating a release mechanism
Figure 1-5. AHD not attached to the mine
Secondary
fuse well
Activator
M5 pressure-release FD
M142 multipurpose
FD (pressure-release
model)
C4 explosive
Detonating cord
Blasting cap
FM 20-32
1-8 Introduction
Figure 1-6. Hand-emplaced US AHDs
M5 Pressure-Release FD
M142 Multipurpose FD
Square-head safety pin
FD
Tension-release
device
Round-head safety pin
Positive safety
(remove last)
Mine-Warfare Principles 2-1
PART ONE
Mine Operations
This part of the manual provides tactical and technical information on mines,
minefields, and mine-delivery systems; emplacement and employment methods and
responsibilities; and reporting and recording procedures for US mine operations.
Current US policy for restrictions on AP mines and other devices is also discussed.
Chapter 2
Mine-Warfare Principles
Thi s chapter pr ovi des gui dance to staff per sonnel who must pl an the
empl oyment of mi nefi el ds for tacti cal operati ons. I t defi nes the four types
of mi nefi el dsprotecti ve, tacti cal , nui sance, and phony. The r emai nder of
the chapter provi des gui dance on the empl oyment of tacti cal mi nefi el ds
speci fi cal l y thei r functi ons, desi gns, and i ntegrati on pri nci pl es.
MINE-WARFARE CONCEPTS
Mi nes are expl osi ve devi ces that are empl aced to ki l l , destroy, or i ncapaci tate
enemy personnel and/or equi pment. They can be empl oyed i n quanti ty wi thi n
a speci fi ed ar ea to for m a mi nefi el d, or they can be used i ndi vi dual l y to
rei nforce nonexpl osi ve obstacl es. They can al so be empl aced i ndi vi dual l y or i n
gr oups to demor al i ze an enemy for ce. A mi nefi el d i s an ar ea of gr ound that
contai ns mi nes or an ar ea of gr ound that i s perceived to contai n mi nes (a
phony mi nefi el d). Mi nefi el ds may contai n any type, mi x, or number of AT and/
or AP mi nes. Mi nefi el ds are used to
Produce a vul nerabi l i ty on enemy maneuver that can be expl oi ted by
fri endl y forces.
Cause the enemy to pi ecemeal hi s forces.
I nterfere wi th enemy command and control (C
2
).
I nfl i ct damage to enemy personnel and equi pment.
Expl oi t the capabi l i ti es of other weapon systems by del ayi ng enemy
forces i n an engagement area (EA).
Protect fri endl y forces from enemy maneuver and i nfi l trati on.
TYPES OF MINEFIELDS
There are four general types of mi nefi el dsprotecti ve, tacti cal , nui sance, and
phony. Each type i s deter mi ned by i ts di sti nct battl efi el d pur pose. Ther efor e,
C2, FM 20-32
mi nefi el ds ar e empl oyed di ffer entl y, and they tar get the enemy i n uni que
ways that support the overal l concept of the operati on.
Pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds ar e empl oyed to protect sol di ers, equi pment,
suppl i es, and faci l i ti es from enemy attacks or other threats.
Tacti cal mi nefi el ds di r ectl y effect the enemy's maneuver i n a way that
gi ves the defendi ng force a posi ti onal advantage.
Nui sance mi nefi el ds i mpose cauti on on enemy forces and di srupt,
del ay, and someti mes weaken or destroy fol l ow-on echel ons.
Phony mi nefi el ds decei ve the enemy about the exact l ocati on of real
mi nefi el ds. They cause the attacker to questi on hi s deci si on to breach
and may cause hi m to expend hi s r educti on assets wasteful l y. Phony
mi nefi el ds may be empl oyed i n conjuncti on wi th other mi nefi el ds, but
shoul d be used onl y after the enemy has become mi ne-sensi ti ve.
I t i s i mpor tant to di sti ngui sh the di ffer ence between the types of mi nefi el d
an d th e mean s of empl acemen t. Vol can o, Modu l ar Pack Mi n e Sy s tem
(MOPMS), standard-pattern, and row mi ni ng are not types of mi nefi el ds; they
ar e just some of the means used to empl ace tacti cal , nui sance, and protecti ve
mi nefi el ds. They may al so be the method of empl acement that i s repl i cated by
a phony mi nefi el d.
PROTECTIVE MINEFIELDS
Pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds ar e empl oyed to pr otect sol di er s, equi pment, suppl i es,
and faci l i ti es fr om enemy attacks or other thr eats. Other threats r ange fr om
enemy survei l l ance to theft of suppl i es and equi pment. I n tacti cal operati ons,
pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds pr ovi de fr i endl y for ces wi th cl ose-i n pr otecti on and
defeat the enemys abi l i ty to maneuver or uti l i ze the tenants of offense. They
deny mechani zed penetr ati on and di smounted i n fi l tr ati on. I n mi l i tar y
oper ati ons other than war (MOOTW), pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds may focus on
pr eventi ng unauthor i zed access to faci l i ti es and i nstal l ati ons, r ather than
assi sti ng i n the destructi on of an enemy force.
Pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds ar e usual l y empl oyed and empl aced at the smal l -uni t
l evel (pl atoon or compan y /team). Th e au th or i ty to empl ace pr otecti ve
mi nefi el ds i s nor mal l y del egated to the company/team commander. I n some
cases, such as a hasty defense, protecti ve mi nefi el ds are l ai d on short noti ce by
uni ts that use mi nes fr om thei r basi c l oad or l ocal stock. Mor e commonl y,
protecti ve mi nefi el ds are used as part of a uni t's del i berate defense. The mi nes
are l ai d so that they are easy to detect and recover by the l ayi ng uni t.
An i mpor tant aspect of pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds i s the r equi r ement to r ecover
them befor e l eavi ng the ar ea. Thi s i s often over l ooked and i s di ffi cul t to
contr ol because they ar e empl aced at the smal l -uni t l evel . When a uni t i s
bei ng r el i eved i n pl ace by an adjacent uni t, pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds ar e tur ned
over to the r el i evi ng uni t (mi nefi el d tur nover i s fur ther defi ned l ater i n thi s
chapter ). The decentr al i zed empl acement of pr otecti ve obstacl es mak es
con s ol i d ati n g r epor ts a n d r ecor ds d i f f i cu l t a n d r equ i r es comma n d
i nvol vement.
Much l i ke fi nal pr otecti ve fi r es (FPF), pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds pr ovi de the
defender wi th cl ose-i n protecti on dur i ng the enemy's fi nal assaul t. Pr otecti ve
mi nefi el ds serve two purposes. Fi rst, they i mpose a del ay on an attacker that
C2, FM 20-32
al l ows the defender ti me to br eak contact as the uni t di spl aces to another
battl e posi ti on. Secondl y, they br eak up the enemy's assaul t to compl ete i ts
destr ucti on. The composi ti on of a pr otecti ve mi nefi el d i s dr i ven by the
vul nerabi l i ty of the defender:
Di smounted i nfantry i s the greatest cl ose-combat threat to a
defendi ng tank company/team. Pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds encounter ed i n
th i s cas e con s i s t pr edomi n an tl y of AP mi n es th at l i mi t en emy
di smounts from cl osi ng wi th the armor defender.
A tank force i s the greatest threat to an i nfantry defense. Protecti ve
mi nefi el ds i n thi s case consi st predomi nantl y of AT mi nes that reduce
the enemy's abi l i ty to cl ose qui ckl y onto the i nfantry's posi ti on.
Nei ther AP nor AT mi nes ar e used i n i sol ati on. The pr eponder ance of mi ne
composi ti on i s desi gned agai nst the most sever e cl ose-combat threat and the
l i kel i hood of that threat.
A pr otecti ve mi nefi el d may take many for ms. I t may be onl y a few mi nes i n
fr ont of a pl atoon, or i t may be a standar d-patter n mi nefi el d ar ound an
ai rfi el d. Protecti ve mi nefi el ds ar e used i n both cl ose and rear operati ons, and
they are cl assi fi ed as ei ther hasty or del i berate:
Hasty protecti ve mi nefi el ds are temporary i n nature and are used as
part of a uni t's defense peri meter. They are usual l y l ai d by uni ts usi ng
mi nes from thei r basi c l oad. I f ti me permi ts, mi nes shoul d be buri ed to
i ncrease thei r effecti veness; but they can be l ai d on top of the ground.
AHDs and l ow-metal l i c mi nes ar e not used so that the mi nefi el d can
be easi l y r ecover ed. Mi nes ar e empl oyed outsi de the hand-gr enade
r ange but wi thi n the r ange of smal l -cal i ber weapons. Al l mi nes ar e
pi cked up by the empl aci ng uni t upon l eavi ng the area, unl ess enemy
pressure prevents mi ne retri eval or the mi nefi el d i s bei ng transferred
to a r el i evi ng commander. The br i gade commander has the i ni ti al
author i ty to empl oy hasty pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds. Thi s author i ty may
be del egated to a battal i on or company commander on a mi ssi on basi s.
Pr ocedu r es for empl aci n g a h as ty pr otecti v e r ow mi n efi el d ar e
contai ned i n Chapter 6.
Del i berate protecti ve mi nefi el ds are more permanent, requi re more
detai l ed pl anni ng, and usual l y r equi r e mor e r esour ces. They ar e
commonl y used to pr otect stati c assets (vi tal si tes)l ogi sti cal si tes,
communi cati on nodes, depots, ai r fi el ds, mi ssi l e si tes, ai r-defense
ar ti l l er y (ADA) s i tes, an d per man en t-u n i t l ocati on s. A ty pi cal
del i ber ate pr otecti ve mi nefi el d i s the standar d-patter n mi nefi el d;
however, a r ow mi nefi el d can al so be used. Del i ber ate pr otecti ve
mi nefi el ds are usual l y empl aced for extended peri ods of ti me and can
be tr ansfer r ed to another uni t. Techni ques for empl aci ng del i ber ate
protecti ve mi nefi el ds are di scussed i n Chapters 6 and 7.
TACTICAL MINEFIELDS
Tacti cal mi nefi el ds ar e empl oyed to di r ectl y attack enemy maneuver and to
gi ve the defender a posi ti onal advantage over the attacker. Tacti cal mi nefi el ds
may be empl oyed by themsel ves or i n conjuncti on wi th other types of tacti cal
obstacl es. They attack the enemy's maneuver by di sr upti ng i ts combat
C2, FM 20-32
formati ons, i nterferi ng wi th i ts C
2
, reduci ng i ts abi l i ty to mass fi res, causi ng
hi m to pr ematur el y commi t l i mi ted br eachi ng r esour ces, and r educi ng hi s
abi l i ty to r ei nfor ce. The defender masses fi r es and maneuver to expl oi t the
posi ti onal advantage created i n part by tacti cal obstacl es.
Tacti cal mi nefi el ds add an offensi ve di mensi on to the defense. They ar e a
commander 's tool for r ecaptur i ng and mai ntai ni ng the i ni ti ati ve that i s
normal l y afforded to an attacker. Combi ned wi th fi res, tacti cal obstacl es force
the attacker to conform to the defender's pl an.
Tacti cal mi nefi el ds may be empl aced dur i ng offensi ve oper ati ons to pr otect
exposed fl anks, i sol ate the objecti ve ar ea, deny enemy counter attack r outes,
and di srupt enemy r etr ogr ade. Thi s chapter fur ther di scusses the pr i nci pl es
behi nd desi gni ng, i ntegrati ng, si ti ng, and empl aci ng tacti cal mi nefi el ds.
NUISANCE MINEFIELDS
Nui sance mi nefi el ds are a form of tacti cal mi nefi el ds. They are mai nl y used to
i mpose cauti on on enemy forces and to di srupt, del ay, and someti mes destroy
fol l ow-on echel ons. Once nui sance mi nefi el ds ar e empl aced, they do not
r equi r e cover by obser vati on or di r ect fi r e. Nui sance mi nefi el ds ar e usual l y
i r r egul ar i n si ze and shape; they can be a si ngl e gr oup of mi nes or a ser i es of
mi ned areas. They can be used to rei nforce exi sti ng obstacl es and can al so be
r api dl y empl aced on mai n avenues of appr oach (AAs). Conventi onal mi nes
and scatterabl e mi nes (SCATMI NEs) may be used i n nui sance mi nefi el ds.
PHONY MINEFIELDS
Phony mi nefi el ds ar e ar eas of gr ound that ar e al ter ed to gi ve the same
si gnature as a real mi nefi el d and thereby decei ve the enemy. Phony mi nefi el ds
serve two pri mary functi ons. Fi rst, they confuse an attacker's breach cycl e and
cause hi m to questi on hi s br each deci si on. Secondl y, they may cause an
attacker to wasteful l y expend r educti on assets to r educe mi nes that ar e not
real l y there.
The success of phony mi nefi el ds depends on the enemy's state of mi nd. The
bl uff succeeds best when the enemy i s mi ne-consci ous and has al r eady
suffer ed the consequences of a mi ne encounter. A fear of mi nes can qui ckl y
ev ol v e i nto par anoi a an d br eak th e momen tu m of th e en emy's attack .
Ther efor e, phony mi nefi el ds ar e nor mal l y empl oyed i n conjuncti on wi th real
mi nefi el ds and are sel dom empl oyed al one. Once the enemy has become mi ne-
consci ous, phony mi nefi el ds may pr oduce consi der abl e tacti cal effects wi th
very l i ttl e i nvestment i n ti me, l abor, and materi al . Phony mi nefi el ds may al so
be used to extend the front and depth of l i ve mi nefi el ds when mi nes or l abor
ar e i n shor t suppl y or when ti me i s r estr i cted. They may be used to conceal
mi nefi el d gaps thr ough l i ve mi nefi el ds. Ther e i s no guar antee that phony
mi nefi el ds wi l l achi eve thei r purpose.
There are two mi ssi on-essenti al tasks i nherent i n the empl oyment of a phony
mi nefi el d:
The phony mi nefi el d must compl etel y repl i cate a l i ve mi nefi el d i n
every detai l , usi ng a speci fi c method of empl acement as a model . Thi s
becomes the decepti on stor y, and every aspect of the phony mi nefi el d
must support the decepti on story. For exampl e, i f the decepti on story i s
C2, FM 20-32
a buri ed row mi nefi el d, the depth, front, and marki ng must be si mi l ar
to that of a l i ve buri ed row mi nefi el d. The ground shoul d be di sturbed,
and tracks shoul d be made on the ground i n the same pattern as other
mi nefi el ds to gi ve the gr ound the same si gnatur e. Occasi onal empty
mi ne crates, di scarded fuses, or other mi ne-l ayi ng suppl i es add to the
decepti on.
The decepti on story must never be compromi sed. Once empl aced, the
phony mi nefi el d must be r egar ded by fr i endl y for ces as l i ve unti l the
tacti cal si tuati on no l onger warr ants mai ntai ni ng the decepti on. Thi s
can be ex tr emel y pai n fu l for th e fr i en dl y u n i t. Th er e i s gr eat
temptati on to dr i ve thr ough, r ather than ar ound, a known phony
mi nefi el dpar ti cul ar l y i f i t i s i ntended to be a gap between l i ve
mi nefi el ds. However, one vehi cl e dr i vi ng thr ough a phony mi nefi el d
and obser ved by enemy r econnai ssance compr omi ses the mi nefi el ds
effecti veness.
Li ve mi nes ar e never l ai d i n a phony mi nefi el d. A mi nefi el d desi gnated as
phony i mpl i es that the ar ea contai ns no l i ve mi nes. Empl aci ng even a si ngl e
l i ve mi ne wi thi n a phony mi nefi el d makes i t a l i ve mi nefi el d. Empty ti ns and
such may be l ai d i n a phony mi nefi el d but i s sel dom wor thwhi l e. Mi nefi el d
mar k i n g an d cover i ng fi r e sh ou l d be th e same as for a l i ve mi n efi el d.
Empl oyment author i ty and r epor ti ng r equi r ements ar e the same as for the
mi nefi el d bei ng si mul ated.
PROTECTIVE VERSUS TACTICAL MINEFIELDS
As di scussed, mi nefi el ds can be tacti cal or pr otecti ve obstacl es (Fi gur e 2-1,
page 2-6). Tacti cal and pr otecti ve obstacl es have di ffer ent pur poses wi th
r egar d to the enemy's maneuver. Thi s di ffer ence causes them to have a
par ti cul ar r el ati ve pl ace on the battl efi el d. Tacti cal obstacl es attack enemy
maneuver and are pl aced on the battl efi el d where the enemy maneuvers from
mar ch, pr ebattl e, and attack for mati ons. Pr otecti ve obstacl es ar e used to
pr otect the for ce fr om the enemy's fi nal assaul t onto the for ce's posi ti on.
Pr otecti ve obstacl es ar e cl ose to defensi ve posi ti ons and ar e ti ed i n wi th the
FPF of the defendi ng uni t. Addi ti onal i nformati on on obstacl es can be found i n
FM 90-7.
TACTICAL MINEFIELDS
Tacti cal mi nefi el ds are desi gned, si ted, empl aced, and i ntegrated wi th fi res to
pr oduce four speci fi c tacti cal -obstacl e effectsdi sr upt, tur n, fi x, and bl ock
(Fi gure 2-2, page 2-6). Each obstacl e effect has a speci fi c i mpact on an enemy's
abi l i ty to maneuver, mass, and r ei nfor ce. Obstacl e effects al so i ncr ease the
enemy's vul ner abi l i ty to fr i endl y fi r es. They suppor t the fr i endl y scheme of
man eu v er by man i pu l ati n g th e en emy i n a way th at i s cr i ti cal to th e
commander 's i ntent. Mi nefi el d desi gn i s the means by whi ch an empl aci ng
uni t vari es mi nefi el d wi dth, mi nefi el d depth, mi ne densi ty, mi ne composi ti on,
the use of AHDs, and the i rregul ar outer edge (I OE) to best achi eve one of the
four tacti cal -obstacl e effects. Modi fyi ng these var i abl es i s at the hear t of
tacti cal mi nefi el d empl oyment pri nci pl es.
C2, FM 20-32
Figure 2-1. Tactical versus protective obstacles
Obstacle Effect Application Examples Conveying
Intent
Description
The short arrow
indicates where an
enemy is attacked by
obstacles. The longer
arrows indicate where
the bypass is allowed
and attacked by fires.
Causes an enemy to
break up its formation
and tempo, interrupt its
timetable, commit its
reduction assets
prematurely, and
piecemeal the attack.
The heel of the arrow is
the anchor point. The
direction of the arrow
indicates the desired
direction of turn.
Manipulates anenemys
maneuver in a desired
direction.
The irregular part of the
arrow indicates where
an enemy advance is
slowed by obstacles.
Slows an enemy within
a specific area,
normally an EA. Gives
the defender time to
acquire, target, and
destroy the attacking
enemy throughout the
depth of an EA.
The ends of the vertical
line indicate the limit of
an enemys advance
and where obstacles tie
in to no-go terrain.
Stops an enemy along a
specific AA or prevents
it from passing through
an EA.
NOTES:
1. Arrows indicate the direction of enemy attack.
2. Minefields must be integrated with fires to achieve the desired effect.
Figure 2-2. Tactical-obstacle effects
Enemy
assault
Enemy maneuver
phase
Protective
obstacles
Tactical
obstacles
EA
Disrupt
Turn
Fix
Block
C2, FM 20-32
MINEFIELD VARIABLES
Fi r st, i t i s i mpor tant to under stand how the var i abl es r el ate to mi nefi el d
effects. Fi gure 2-3 cl earl y defi nes some of the ter ms used to di scuss mi nefi el d
vari abl es.
Front
Mi nefi el d fr ont i s the di mensi on of a mi nefi el d that defi nes how much of the
attack i ng enemy for mati on i s affected by the mi nefi el d. The fr ont of a
mi nefi el d i s based on the desi r ed obstacl e effect (di sr upt, tur n, fi x, or bl ock)
and the attack front of a company-si ze enemy force. The front of an attacki ng
enemy depends l ar gel y on the type of enemy for ce (ar mor ed, motor i zed, or
di smou nted i n fantr y) an d nor ms by whi ch the en emy ar my fi ghts. For
armored warfare, the mi nefi el d front i s based on effecti ng a doctri nal company
attack front of 500 meters (13 to 18 combat vehi cl es). For di smounted warfare,
the mi nefi el d front i s based on effecti ng a company attack front of 150 meters.
The front may vary and requi re a study of enemy force and terrai n. Groups of
i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds are empl oyed to achi eve a l ar ger front for battal i on and
l ar ger enemy for mati ons. For exampl e, a battal i on consi sti ng of 52 to 72
combat vehi cl es has a front of 1,500 meters and requi res more mi nefi el ds.
Depth
Mi nefi el d depth i s based on the amount of r educti on assets that wi l l be
r equi r ed by an enemy to r educe a l ane. The standar d shoul d star t wi th 100
meter s and i ncr ease i n depth i f denyi ng the enemy the use of a mobi l i ty
corri dor (MC) i s the i ntent (turn or bl ock).
Density
Mi nefi el d densi ty depi cts the number of mi nes i n a mi nefi el d. I t i s expr essed
i n l i near or area densi ty:
Figure 2-3. Minefield variables
IOE
Assume
100 mines
Minefield front
200 m
Minefield
depth 100 m
Linear density: 100 mines 200 meters = 0.5 mine per meter of front
Area density: 100 mines (100 x 200) = 0.005 mine per square meter
C2, FM 20-32
Li near densi ty i s the average number of mi nes wi thi n a 1-meter-wi de
path thr ough the mi nefi el d's depth, anywher e al ong the fr ont. I n
Fi gu r e 2-3, page 2-7, the mi nefi el d con tai n s 100 mi n es, wi th a
mi nefi el d front of 200 meters. The l i near densi ty i s 0.5 mi ne per meter
of front (100 mi nes/200 meters of front).
Area densi ty i s the average number of mi nes wi thi n a square meter,
anywher e i n the mi nefi el d. I n Fi gur e 2-3, the mi nefi el d contai ns 100
mi nes wi thi n a 20,000-squar e-meter ar ea. The ar ea densi ty i s 0.005
mi ne per squar e meter (100 mi nes/[200 meter s x 100 meter s]). Ar ea
den s i ty i s n or mal l y u s ed to ex pr es s th e den s i ty of s catter abl e
mi nefi el ds.
MineComposition
Thi s var i abl e i ncl udes the effecti ve use of di ffer ent types of mi nes. By usi ng
ful l -wi dth mi nes, the probabi l i ty of ki l l i ncreases for the mi nefi el d. AT mi nes
wi th AHDs (Korea Only: aswell asAP mines) are used where the enemy i s
expected to use di smounted reducti on techni ques.
Anti tank Mi nes
I f the enemy i s an ar mor ed for ce, tacti cal obstacl es ar e pr edomi nantl y AT
mi nes. Tr ack-wi dth mi nes (M15s wi th the M603 fuse) have a l ower pr obabi l i ty
of ki l l (M-Ki l l or K-Ki l l ) than ful l -wi dth mi nes (M21s and M15s wi th the M624
fuse). The rati o of ful l -wi dth versus track-wi dth mi nes i n a mi nefi el d depends
on the ki l l r equi r ed. I n gener al , a tr ack-wi dth mi nefi el d does not adequatel y
affect the enemy's maneuver.
Anti personnel Mi nes
AP mi nes target di smounted sol di ers. Thei r composi ti on i n tacti cal mi nefi el ds
depends on the thr eat and the enemy's r educti on assets. Based on cur r ent
technol ogy, most br eachi ng oper ati ons ar e accompl i shed by mechani cal or
expl osi ve means. (Korea Only: If the minefield groups intent is to
exhaust theenemy's breachingassets, AP mines should beintegrated
to attack its dismounted reduction ability.)
Probabilities of Encounter and Kill
The probabi l i ti es of encounter and ki l l measure a mi nefi el d's l ethal i ty.
Probabi l i ty of Encounter
The pr obabi l i ty of encounter i s measur ed by the chance (i n per cent) that a
vehi cl e, bl i ndl y movi ng thr ough a mi nefi el d, wi l l detonate a mi ne. The
pr obabi l i ty of encounter i s based on mi ne densi ty, the type of mi ne, and the
type of enemy vehi cl e. I n shor t, the mor e dense a mi nefi el d, the hi gher the
probabi l i ty i s of encounteri ng a mi ne. Probabi l i ty of encounter al so depends on
the fuse capabi l i ty of the mi nes. Ti l t-r od and magneti c-i nfl uence mi nes wi l l
detonate i f they ar e encounter ed anywher e al ong the wi dth of the enemy
vehi cl e. Pr essur e-fused mi nes detonate i f a vehi cl e's tr ack or wheel actual l y
r uns over them. The pr obabi l i ty of encounter i s al so affected by the type of
enemy vehi cl e. The smal l er the wi dth or tr ack si gnatur e of the vehi cl e, the
l ess l i kel y i t wi l l encounter and detonate a mi ne.
Fi gu r e 2-4 i l l u s tr ates th e r el ati on sh i p between mi n e den si ty an d th e
probabi l i ty of encounter for l i ght versus heavy tracked vehi cl es and for track-
wi dth versus ful l -wi dth mi nes. Fi gur e 2-4 al so provi des general gui dance for
varyi ng the mi ne densi ty to yi el d the necessary probabi l i ty of encounter when
devel opi ng di sr upt, fi x, tur n, and bl ock mi nefi el ds. Var yi ng mi ne densi ty i s
further di scussed l ater i n thi s chapter.
FM 20-32
Probabi l i ty of Ki l l
The pr obabi l i ty of ki l l i s measur ed by the chance (i n per cent) that a vehi cl e
wi l l no l onger be mi ssi on-capabl e (M-Ki l l or K-Ki l l ) because of mi ne effects. I t
i s a functi on of the combi ned probabi l i ty that a vehi cl e wi l l encounter a mi ne
and the probabi l i ty that the mi ne effect wi l l produce an M-Ki l l or a K-Ki l l .
AntihandlingDevices
Empl aci ng AHDs on mi nes i s ti me-i ntensi ve. AHDs ar e added to a mi nefi el d
to di scour age manual r emoval and r euse of mi nes by the enemy and to
demoral i ze the enemy who i s attempti ng to reduce the mi nefi el d. AHDs do not
pr event an enemy fr om r educi ng the mi nefi el d; they onl y di scourage manual
reducti on methods.
Irregular Outer Edge
An I OE i s a str i p/r ow or mul ti pl e str i ps/r ows of mi nes that nor mal l y extend
towar d the enemy fr om th e fi r st (enemy si de) r ow of mi nes. An I OE i s
empl oyed to br eak up the other wi se regul ar patter n of a mi nefi el d. I t i s used
to confuse the enemy about the exact l i mi ts of the mi nefi el d, parti cul ar l y i ts
l eadi ng edge. An I OE adds an unknown qual i ty to a mi nefi el d that makes the
enemys deci si on of whether to br each or bypass mor e di ffi cul t. The effect an
I OE has on enemy acti ons may i ncrease the overal l l ethal i ty of a mi nefi el d.
Figure 2-4. Vehicle mine encounter probability versus minefield density
P
r
o
b
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
o
f
e
n
c
o
u
n
t
e
r
(
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
)
Minefield linear density (mines per meter)
(Tanks)
(Tanks)
(APCs)
(APCs)
TURN AND
BLOCK
DISRUPT
AND FIX
Pressure-fused mines (track-width)
Tilt-rod or magnetic-influence mines (full-width)
C2, FM 20-32
2-10 Mine-Warfare Principles
DESIGN
Modi fyi ng mi nefi el d var i abl es to achi eve the desi r ed obstacl e effect i s a
chal l enge for the engi neer, both techni cal l y (r esour ci ng and desi gni ng) and
tacti cal l y (supporti ng the maneuver scheme). Experi ence wi l l provi de the best
basi s for desi gni ng mi nefi elds. Fi gures 2-5 through 2-8, pages 2-10 through 2-13,
provi de gui del i nes for varyi ng mi nefi el d depth, front, densi ty, and composi ti on
to best achi eve di srupt, fi x, turn, and bl ock effects.
Theseareguidelines, not fixed rules. Minefield designsmust bebased
on a threat analysis. The designs are simply considerations or
parameters to use when designing tactical minefields, regardless of
the emplacement method. Th ey appl y to con v en ti on al mi n e-l ay i n g
techni ques as wel l as the empl oyment of SCATMI NE di spenser s. These
par ameter s gi ve the engi neer the fl exi bi l i ty to desi gn and empl ace tacti cal
mi nefi el ds based on mi ssi on, enemy, ter r ai n, tr oops, ti me avai l abl e, and
ci vi l i an consi der ati ons (METT-TC) (par ti cul ar l y r esour ces and ter r ai n) and
sti l l achi eve the requi red effect. These norms are al so the basi s for devel opi ng
mi nefi el d packages and empl acement pr ocedur es outl i ned thr oughout thi s
manual . Chapter 3 di scusses the characteri sti cs and empl acement procedures
for each of the SCATMI NE systems, Chapter 6 outl i nes pr ocedur es for r ow
mi ni ng usi ng conventi onal mi nes, and Chapter 7 i s dedi cated to the standard-
patter n mi nefi el d. Each chapter descr i bes standar d di sr upt, fi x, tur n, and
bl ock mi n efi el d pack ages par ti cul ar to that method of empl acement or
di spensi ng system.
Each tacti cal -obstacl e effect has a speci fi c r esour ci ng factor. I n shor t, thi s
numer i c val ue hel ps deter mi ne the amount of l i near obstacl e effor t that i s
needed to achi eve the desi r ed effect. The resour ce factor i s mul ti pl i ed by the
wi dth of the AA or MC to get the total amount of l i near obstacl e effor t
requi red. The l i near obstacl e effort i s then di vi ded by the mi nefi el d front norm
for the speci fi c effect (rounded up) to yi el d the number of i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds
requi red i n the obstacl e group.
Disrupt
A di srupt effect (Fi gur e 2-5) focuses fi re pl anni ng and obstacl e effort to cause
the enemy to br eak up i ts for mati on and tempo, i nter r upt i ts ti metabl e,
commi t r educti on assets pr ematur el y, and pi ecemeal the attack . I t al so
decei v es th e enemy abou t the l ocati on of fr i en dl y defen si v e posi ti ons,
separ ates combat echel ons, or separ ates combat for ces fr om thei r l ogi sti cal
suppor t. A di sr upt effect shoul d not be ti me-, manpower -, or r esou r ce-
i ntensi ve. I t shoul d not be vi si bl e at l ong r ange but easi l y detected as the
enemy nears i t. Commanders normal l y use the di srupt effect forward of EAs.
Resource factor 0.5 (3 point obstacles) x AA
Group dimensions W = 0.5 x AA
Probability of kill 50%
Minefield front 250 m
Minefield depth 100 m
AT mines Yes (pressure/tilt)
AP mines No (Korea Only: optional, based on
threat analysis)
AHD Optional, based on threat analysis
IOE No
Figure 2-5. Disrupt-effect group
0.5
FM 20-32
Nor mal l y, onl y hal f of the enemy's AA i s attacked wi th mi nefi el ds or other
tacti cal obstacl es to achi eve a di sr upt effect. For a mi nefi el d to di sr upt an
enemy company, hal f of the formati on must react to the mi nefi el d. The typi cal
wi dth of a di sr upt-effect mi nefi el d i s 250 meter s wi th a standar d mi nefi el d
depth of 100 meter s. When desi gni ng a di sr upt effect to attack an enemy
battal i on, three di sr upt-effect mi nefi el ds are arr ayed i n a gr oup to achi eve a
wi dth that i s about hal f the si ze of the battal i on's attack fr ont (750 meter s of
mi nefi el d). Mul ti pl y the r esour ce factor of 0.5 by the wi dth of the AA to
pr ovi de the amount of l i near obstacl e effor t r equi r ed for the di sr upt effect.
When the AA i s nar row, an al ternati ve di sr upt group i s three poi nt obstacl es
al ong the AA.
Di sr upt-effect mi nefi el ds shoul d be desi gned wi th appr oxi matel y 50 per cent
probabi l i ty of mi ne encounter to achi eve the desi red di srupt effect (see Fi gure
2-4, page 2-9). They shoul d contai n predomi nantl y track-wi dth AT mi nes and
i ncl ude ful l -wi dth AT mi nes at the l eadi ng edge of the mi nefi el d to i ncr ease
the probabi l i ty of mi ne encounter. Thi s shoul d cause the enemy to commi t i ts
reducti on assets.
AHDs can be added to di sr upt-effect mi nefi el ds to fr ustr ate the enemy's
br eachi ng an d cl ear i n g oper ati on s. However, addi ng AHDs may be too
resource-i ntensi ve for the return i n effect. An I OE i s not requi red.
Fix
A fi x effect (Fi gur e 2-6) focuses fi r e pl anni ng and obstacl e effor t to sl ow an
attacker wi thi n a speci fi c ar ea, nor mal l y an EA. The fi x effect i s pr i mar i l y
used to gi ve the defender ti me to acqui r e, tar get, and destr oy the attacki ng
enemy thr oughout the depth of an EA or AA. A fi x effect may be used to
gener ate the ti me necessar y for the for ce to br eak contact and di sengage as
the enemy maneuver s i nto the ar ea (typi cal l y used for del ays). Fi x-effect
mi nefi el ds i n the obstacl e gr oup must be empl oyed i n depth, causi ng the
enemy for mati on to r eact and br each r epeatedl y. Fi x-obstacl e gr oups must
span the enti r e wi dth of the AA. Commander s nor mal l y use the fi x effect
i nsi de the EA.
I ndi vi dual fi x-effect mi nefi el ds must not appear too di ffi cul t to r educe. The
enemy shoul d be enti ced i nto the ar ea. The concept i s to empl oy mul ti pl e
mi n efi el ds th at i n di v i du al l y attack a por ti on of a depl oyi n g compan y
Resource factor 1.0 x AA
threat analysis)
IOE Yes
Figure 2-6. Fix-effect group
1.0
FM 20-32
formati on. Ther efore, the fi x-effect mi nefi el d fr ont i s 250 meter s. I t takes on
the char acter i sti cs of a di sr upt-effect mi nefi el d wi th a si mi l ar densi ty,
composi ti on, and pr obabi l i ty of encounter (Fi gur e 2-4, page 2-9), wi th two
excepti ons. Fi rst, AHDs are not used because the appl i cati on of massed di rect
and i ndi rect fi res compl i cate the enemy's breachi ng effort. Secondl y, an I OE i s
added to fur ther del ay the enemy and confuse the attack er on the exact
ori entati on of i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds. Thi s al so serves to i ncrease the effecti ve
l ethal i ty of the mi nefi el d. The majori ty of mi nes are tr ack-wi dth AT, but ful l -
wi dth AT mi nes ar e used i n the I OE and the l eadi ng edge of the mi nefi el d
because they are the most l ethal .
Whi l e i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds ar e desi gned to attack onl y por ti ons of an enemy
company formati on, the fi x-obstacl e group i s resourced, arranged, and si ted to
attack the enti re front of an enemy battal i on. Fi gure 2-6, page 2-11, depi cts a
fi x gr oup effect on an attacki ng enemy battal i on. I n thi s case, si x fi x-effect
mi nefi el ds ar e ar r ayed i n an ar ea the ful l wi dth of the battal i on AA (1,500
meter s) by 1,500 meter s deep. Accordi ngl y, the r esour ce factor for a fi x-effect
mi nefi el d gr ou p i s on e; the amou n t of l i near mi nefi el d th at sh oul d be
resourced equal s the wi dth of the AA.
Turn
A tur n effect (Fi gur e 2-7) mani pul ates the enemy's maneuver i n a desi r ed
di recti on. One techni que or a combi nati on of techni ques ai ds i n achi evi ng the
tur n effect. Fi r st, i n or der to enti ce the enemy to maneuver i n the desi r ed
di r ecti on r ather than r educe the obstacl e, the obstacl e must have a subtl e
ori entati on rel ati ve to the enemys approach. Secondl y, the obstacl e and fi res
mu s t al l ow by pas s i n th e di r ecti on des i r ed by th e fr i en dl y s ch eme of
maneuver. Obstacl es i n the start of the turn are vi si bl e and l ook more compl ex
than those i n the di r ecti on of the tur n. Fi nal l y, the obstacl e i s ti ed i nto
sever el y r estr i cted ter r ai n (r estr i cted ter r ai n as a mi ni mum) at the i ni ti al
poi nt of the turn. The poi nt where the severel y r estri cted ter rai n feature and
the mi nefi el d meet i s known as the anchor point. Commanders normal l y use
the turn effect on the fl anks of an EA.
The standard tur n-effect mi nefi el d has a wi dth of 500 meter s and a depth of
300 meter s. One tur n-effect mi nefi el d affects the enti r e wi dth of an enemy
company's front. I t must be deep enough to cause mul ti pl e appl i cati ons of l i ne-
threat analysis)
IOE No
Figure 2-7. Turn-effect group
1.0
FM 20-32
charge reducti on assets. I n short, the mi nefi el d must di scourage any attempts
to breach and must enti ce the enemy to bypass rather than reduce. Fi gure 2-7
depi cts a tur n effect on an attacki ng battal i on, wi th tur n-effect mi nefi el ds
ar r ayed i n a gr oup acr oss a 1,500-meter AA. The angl e of the mi nefi el ds
shoul d be subtl e, encour agi ng the enemy to bypass i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds.
Each mi nefi el d over l aps another one to ti e the mi nefi el ds together and
prevent gaps. Thi s i s consi dered i n the resource factor (1.2) for a turn-obstacl e
gr oup. Thi s factor, mul ti pl i ed by the wi dth of the AA, equal s the amount of
l i near obstacl e effort requi red for thi s turn effect.
As shown i n Fi gur e 2-4, page 2-9, tur n-effect mi nefi el ds must be extr emel y
l ethal and achi eve approxi matel y 80 percent probabi l i ty of encounter. I n other
words, an enemy vehi cl e attempti ng to reduce or pass thr ough the mi nefi el d
wi l l l i kel y encounter a mi ne. Thi s for ces the smal l -uni t commander to make
an i mmedi ate deci si onbreach or bypass. A l ethal mi nefi el d that i s cover ed
by i ntense fi res and has an easi l y detectabl e bypass r educes breach deci si ons
to i nsti nct and causes the enemy to choose the bypass (turn). To produce thi s
l ethal i ty, the majori ty of mi nes shoul d be ful l -wi dth AT. Ful l -wi dth mi nes i n
the fi rst rows the enemy encounter s and i n the depth of the mi nefi el d ei ther
exhaust the enemy's br eachi ng assets or convi nce hi m to bypass earl y. AHDs
ar e not r equi r ed because the enemy for ce wi l l sel dom commi t to di smounted
breach when faced wi th i ntense di rect and i ndi rect fi res. An I OE shoul d not be
used because the enemy must be abl e to deter mi ne the or i entati on of the
mi nefi el d and the bypass.
Block
A bl ock effect (Fi gur e 2-8) i ntegrates fi re pl anni ng and obstacl e effor t to stop
an attacker al ong a speci fi c AA or pr event hi m from passi ng through an EA.
Bl ock obstacl es are compl ex and are i ntegrated wi th i ntense fi res; they do not
stop an attacker by themsel ves. I ndi vi dual bl ock obstacl es ar e empl oyed
successi vel y i n a rel ati vel y shal l ow ar ea. When the enemy r educes one bl ock
obstacl e, i t i s cri ti cal that he encounters another, thus denyi ng hi m to project
combat power and mai ntai n momentum. Bl ock obstacl es must defeat the
enemy's breachi ng effort (mounted and di smounted) as wel l as hi s maneuver.
A bl ock effect must span the enti re wi dth of an AA and prevent a bypass.
The typi cal bl ock-effect mi nefi el d i s 500 meter s wi de and 300+ meter s deep
(i ncl udes an I OE). Fi gure 2-8 depi cts a bl ock effect on an attacki ng battal i on.
Note how i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds ar e ar r ayed to affect the enti r e wi dth of the
Minefield depth 300+ m
AP mines No (Korea Only: Yes)
AHD Yes
IOE Yes
Figure 2-8. Block-effect group
1.0
FM 20-32
AA but i n a r el ati vel y shal l ow depth. Ei ght bl ock -effect mi nefi el ds ar e
requi red i n thi s exampl e to achi eve the necessary depth and wi dth. The bl ock
group i s the most resource-i ntensi ve. A r esour ce factor of 2.4 i s mul ti pl i ed by
the wi dth of the AA to determi ne the l i near obstacl e effort requi red.
The l ethal i ty of a bl ock-effect mi nefi el d (80 per cent or hi gher ) i s si mi l ar to
that of a tur n-effect mi nefi el d (see Fi gur e 2-4, page 2-9). The l ethal i ty of the
group i s consi derabl y hi gher, si nce there are enough mi nefi el ds i n the group to
cover mor e than twi ce the wi dth of the AA. Thi s l ethal i ty i s pr oduced by a
densi ty sl i ghtl y gr eater than one mi ne per meter of fr ont and the use of
predomi nantl y ful l -wi dth AT mi nes.
A bl ock -effect mi n efi el d mus t be capabl e of defeati n g mech ani cal an d
di smounted breach efforts. Ther efor e, AHDs (Korea Only: and AP mines)
are used to target di smounted breachi ng. An I OE confuses the attacker about
the exact mi nefi el d l i mi ts and compl i cates hi s empl oyment of mechani cal
r educti on assets. The depth of the bl ock-effect mi nefi el d r equi r es empl oyi ng
mul ti pl e l i ne charges.
The above mi nefi el ds ar e not standar d sol uti ons to ever y si tuati on. The
ter r ai n cou l d di ctate a decr ease or an i n cr eas e i n the effor t r equ i r ed.
I ncor por ati ng other r ei nfor ci ng obstacl es (AT di tches, r oad cr ater s, wi r e,
SCATMI NEs) ai d i n attacki ng the di fferent reducti on assets.
TACTICAL-OBSTACLE INTEGRATION PRINCIPLES
Tacti cal mi nefi el ds are consi dered tacti cal obstacl es and fol l ow the same basi c
i ntegr ati on pr i nci pl es. Tacti cal obstacl e C
2
focuses on obstacl e empl acement
authori ty and obstacl e control .
OBSTACLE EMPLACEMENT AUTHORITY
Obstacl e empl acement author i ty i s the jur i sdi cti on that a uni t commander
has to empl ace tacti cal obstacl es. I n a theater of oper ati ons (TO), theater
commander s have the author i ty to empl ace obstacl es. I n most cases, they
del egate that author i ty to cor ps commander s who fur ther del egate i t to
di vi si on commanders. Di vi si on commanders then have obstacl e empl acement
au th or i ty i n th ei r a r ea of oper ati on s (AO), u n l es s th e au th or i ty i s
subsequentl y wi thhel d or r estr i cted by a hi gher commander. Commander s
subor di n ate to cor p and di v i si on do not have the auth or i ty to empl ace
obstacl es unl ess the hi gher commander del egates author i ty for a cur r ent
oper ati on. Commander s use contr ol measur es and other speci fi c gui dance or
order s to grant obstacl e empl acement authori ty to subordi nate commander s.
Empl acement authori ty for SCATMI NEs i s covered i n Chapter 3.
OBSTACLE CONTROL
Commander s exer ci se obstacl e contr ol to ensur e that obstacl es suppor t
cur r ent and futur e oper ati ons. Obstacl e contr ol ensur es that subor di nate
commander s empl ace obstacl es to best suppor t the hi gher commander s
scheme of maneuver. I t al so ensur es that subor di nate commander s do not
i nter fer e wi th futur e oper ati ons. Commander s mai ntai n obstacl e contr ol by
focusi ng or wi thhol di ng empl acement authori ty or by r estr i cti ng the types or
l ocati ons of obstacl es. Commanders use contr ol measur es, speci fi c gui dance,
and orders to mai ntai n obstacl e control .
FM 20-32
OBSTACLE CONTROL MEASURES
Obstacl e con tr ol measu r es ar e s peci fi c con tr ol measu r es that si mpl i fy
granti ng obstacl e empl acement authori ty and provi di ng obstacl e control for al l
l evel s of command (Tabl e 2-1). Obstacl e control measures are cl assi fi ed as
Zone.
Bel t.
Group.
Restri cti on.
A pr otecti ve obstacl e i s the onl y obstacl e that can be empl oyed outsi de a
desi gnated obstacl e zone, bel t, or group.
A speci fi c obstacl e effect (di sr upt, tur n, fi x, or bl ock ) may be assi gned to
obstacl e control measur es. Thi s enabl es the commander to di r ect the over al l
effect of obstacl es wi thi n a desi gnated zone, bel t, or group to support hi s pl an.
At cor ps and di vi si on l evel s, assi gni ng speci fi c effects to obstacl e zones i s
opti onal . At bri gade l evel , the commander wi l l normal l y assi gn a speci fi c effect
to the obstacl e bel ts. At TF and battal i on l evel s, obstacl e effects for obstacl e
gr oups ar e r equi r ed. Thi s ensur es that subor di nate commander s empl ace
tacti cal obstacl es that suppor t the maneuver and fi r e pl ans. Assi gni ng a
speci fi c obstacl e effect to a control measure becomes obstacl e i ntent, gi vi ng the
obstacl e effect, tar get, and l ocati on. Obstacl e i ntent pr ovi des a di r ect l i nk
between the obstacl e pl an, the scheme of maneuver, the commander 's i ntent,
and the fi r e pl an (di r ect and i ndi r ect). Obstacl e i ntent i s cr i ti cal at br i gade
l evel and bel ow, and i t becomes the foundati on for obstacl e group devel opment
and desi gn at the TF l evel .
ObstacleZones
Obstacl e zones (Fi gure 2-9, page 2-16) are graphi c control measures that corps
and di vi si on commander s use to gr ant obstacl e empl acement author i ty to
Table 2-1. Echelons of obstacle control and effect
Obstacle
Control
Measure
Echelon Specific
Obstacle
Effects
Assigned
Size of Enemy AA/MC Planning Guidance
Armored Light vs
Armored
Zone
Corps or
division
Optional
Division/
brigade
Brigade/
battalion
Requires anticipating
belts and intents
Belt Brigade
Optional but
normal
Brigade/
battalion
Battalion/
company
Requires anticipating
groups and intents
Group
Corps,
brigade,
division, or
battalion/TF
Mandatory Battalion/TF
Company/
platoon
Based on individual
obstacle norms
Restriction All NA NA NA
Used only when
necessary to support
the scheme of
maneuver
FM 20-32
br i gades (i ncl udi ng ar mor ed caval r y r egi ments [ACRs] and other maj or
subor di nate uni ts). Cor ps and di vi si on commander s use zones to ensure that
subordi nates empl ace obstacl es that suppor t the hi gher commanders scheme
of maneuver, and to ensur e that the obstacl es do not i nter fer e wi th futur e
operati ons.
ObstacleBelts
Obstacl e bel ts (Fi gur e 2-10) ar e gr aphi c contr ol measur es that br i gade
commander s use to constr ai n tacti cal -obstacl e empl oyment, and the bel ts
shoul d not cr oss uni t boundar i es. Commander s pl an obstacl e bel ts wi thi n
assi gned obstacl e zones to gr ant obstacl e empl acement author i ty to thei r
maj or su bor di n ate u n i ts. Th i s i s nor mal l y th e fi r s t l evel i n wh i ch the
commander assi gns an i ntent to the obstacl e pl an. I t gi ves TF commander s
the necessar y gui dance on the over al l effect of obstacl es wi thi n a bel t. I t does
not desi gnate that al l obstacl e groups wi thi n the bel t must be the same effect.
I t si mpl y means that the sum effect of groups wi thi n the bel t must achi eve the
assi gned bel t effect. Thi s ser ves to synchroni ze the obstacl e effort wi thi n the
bri gade, parti cul arl y between adjacent TFs. Obstacl e bel ts al so focus obstacl es
Unit Zone Priority Remarks
1st Brigade A 3
3d Brigade B 2 No SCATMINEs with SD after H+2
3d Brigade C 1 Block intent
Cavalry Squadron D 4
Figure 2-9. Obstacle zones
PL TIGER
PL LION
PL JAGUAR
ZONE
D
ENEMY
PL JAGUAR
PL LION
PL TIGER
ZONE A
ZONE B
(RESTRICTED
ZONE
A
X
I
S
T
H
U
N
D
E
R
52 ID
52 ID
Obstacle number prefix: IO52
A
X
I
S
2
x
II
FM 20-32
i n support of the bri gade scheme of maneuver and ensure that obstacl es do not
i nterfere wi th the maneuver of any hi gher headquarters.
Bel ts are pl anned to attack enemy r egi ments based on an anal ysi s of enemy
battal i on MCs. Bri gades al l ocate maneuver compani es based on the motori zed
r i fl e battal i on (MRB) AAs and or gani ze TFs to defeat the motor i zed r i fl e
r egi ment (MRR). Obstacl e bel ts and thei r i ntents ar e di r ected agai nst MRR
AAs. Thi s provi des the appropri ate l evel of gui dance whi l e preservi ng the TF's
need to refi ne the obstacl e i ntent, based on how the TF wi l l fi ght i ts al l ocated
compani es.
ObstacleGroups
Obstacl e gr oups (Fi gur e 2-11, page 2-18) contai n one or mor e i ndi vi dual
obstacl es that ar e gr ouped together to pr ovi de a speci fi c obstacl e effect. TFs
use obstacl e gr oups to ensur e th at company teams empl ace i ndi vi dual
obstacl es that suppor t the TF scheme of maneuver. I n r ar e cases, br i gades,
di vi si ons, or even corps may use obstacl e groups for speci fi c tacti cal obstacl es.
Unit Belt Intent Priority Remarks
1-78 C1 Turn 2
1-78 C2 Block 1
1-79 B1 Fix 5 No long-duration SCATMINEs; must SD by H+2
1-79 B2 Turn 3 No long-duration SCATMINEs; must SD by H+2
1-4 B3 Fix 4 No long-duration SCATMINEs; must SD by H+2
Figure 2-10. Obstacle belts
BP
18
BELT C2
BE
LT
A
BELT B2
1-78
W
H
I
T
B
L
A
C
1-78 1-4
ZONE C
ZONE B
BELT B3
BELT B1 1-79
1-4
ENEMY
I
FM 20-32
Al so, uni ts per for m detai l ed i ntegr ati on of obstacl e gr oups wi th di r ect- and
i ndi rect-fi re pl ans.
A TF al l ocates pl atoons agai nst motor i zed r i fl e company (MRC) MCs and
task-or gani ze them i nto compani es/teams to defeat MRBs. Li kewi se, di r ect-
fi r e pl ans ar e desi gned based on the maneuver of MRBs and i ndependent
MRCs. Ther efor e, obstacl e gr oups are used to attack the maneuver of MRB-
si ze forces. Groups are desi gned speci fi cal l y to suppor t the di rect-fi r e pl an of
the TF. The TF desi gnates groups r ather than obstacl es because the l ocati on
of i ndi vi dual obstacl es hi nges on si ti ng at the company/team l evel . The group
effect or obstacl e i ntent dri ves obstacl e si ti ng and i s therefore more i mportant
to convey to commander s. Ther e can be mor e than one type of obstacl e gr oup
to support the overal l i ntent of an obstacl e bel t. Thi s i s because the bel t desi gn
i s based on the br i gades scheme of maneuver, wi thout knowi ng the TFs
di r ect-fi r e pl an and scheme of maneuver. Groups ar e devel oped once the fi re
pl an i s establ i shed.
ObstacleRestrictions
Commanders at al l l evel s may use obstacl e restr i cti ons to pr ovi de addi ti onal
obstacl e control . They may use obstacl e restri cti ons to l i mi t the speci fi c types
of obstacl es used (for exampl e, no bur i ed mi nes and no SCATMI NEs that do
not sel f-destruct wi thi n 48 hours). These restri cti ons ensure that subordi nates
do not use obstacl es wi th characteri sti cs that i mpai r future operati ons. I t al so
al l ows commanders to focus the use of l i mi ted resources for the mai n effort by
r estr i cti ng thei r use el sewher e. Commander s may al so use r estr i cti ons to
Unit/BP Group Intent Priority Remarks
Company A/Screen B3A Disrupt 3 All groups restricted:
Long-duration SCATMINEs are not allowed.
Short-duration SCATMINEs must be
emplaced by H-3.
Team B/BP 30 B3B Turn 1
Team D/BP 10 B3C Fix 2
Figure 2-11. Obstacle groups
Individual
obstacles
02
B3B
01
30
EA RED
ENEMY
B3A
B3B
02
01
1-4
A
X
I
S
A
X
I
S
21
20
10
11
EA
06
04
03
05
B3C
A
A 1-4
I
I
FM 20-32
prevent subordi nates fr om empl aci ng obstacl es i n a certai n area. Thi s type of
restri cti on may be shown graphi cal l y as an obstacl e-restri cted area.
FRATRICIDE PREVENTION
The modern tendency toward maneuver warfare and the di sappearance of the
l i near battl efi el d pl aces r eposi ti oni ng for ces at an i ncr eased r i sk of fr atr i ci de
by mi nefi el ds. Obstacl e contr ol and the u se of gr aphi c obstacl e contr ol
measur es ar e vi tal i n pr eventi ng mi nefi el d fr atr i ci de at ever y echel on.
Obstacl e control i s further faci l i tated by posi ti ve C
2
of al l sustai nment traffi c,
tacti cal r eposi ti oni ng, obstacl e tur nover, wel l -establ i shed and di ssemi nated
tr affi c pl ans wi th tr affi c contr ol , and str i ct adher ence to mi nefi el d mar ki ng
procedures (di scussed l ater i n thi s chapter).
MANEUVER-PLAN SUPPORT
Commander s i ncl ude obstacl e pl anni ng i n each l evel of the deci si on-maki ng
pr ocess. Thi s ensur es that obstacl e i ntegr ati on i s effecti ve and that the
obstacl e pl an i s fl exi bl e enough to al l ow changes du r i ng the pl an ni n g,
pr epar ati on, and executi on phases of an oper ati on. The fol l owi ng method i s
used to i ntegr ate obstacl e pl anni ng at the TF l evel ; i t uses the deci si on-
maki ng doctr i ne contai ned i n FM 101-5. Obstacl e pl anni ng for br i gade and
hi gher l evel s can be found i n FM 90-7.
The focus of obstacl e pl anni ng i s to i ntegr ate obstacl es i nto the maneuver
di r ect- and i ndi r ect-fi r e pl ans. Thi s pl anni ng i s di r ecti ve and detai l ed i n
natur e and focuses on the deter mi nati on of obstacl e gr oups and the type and
amount of pr epar ed posi ti ons. Actual obstacl e si ti ng, empl acement, and
posi ti on l ocati on ar e the pur vi ew of the company/team commander and ar e
normal l y supported by an engi neer pl atoon.
TF-l evel defensi ve pl anni ng i s par t of the mi l i tar y deci si on-maki ng pr ocess.
The engi neer battl efi el d assessment (EBA) pr ocess pr ovi des the basi s for
i ntegrati ng engi neer i ssues i nto the deci si on-maki ng process.
Mission Analysis
The key acti vi ti es duri ng mi ssi on anal ysi s are to
Determi ne facts and assumpti ons.
Anal yze rel ati ve combat power.
Anal yze the engi neer battal i ons/bri gades mi ssi on and the
commanders i ntent.
I ssue the commanders gui dance.
Determi ne Facts and Assumpti ons
Defensi ve pl anni ng normal l y starts wi th the r ecei pt of a warni ng order (WO)
fr om the hi gher headquar ter s to defend. The company executi ve offi cer (XO)
and the battl efi el d i nformati on control center (BI CC) (or the TF engi neer and
the I ntel l i gence Offi cer [US Ar my] [S2]) begi n by devel opi ng a si tuati on
templ ate (SI TEMP) that i ncl udes a modi fi ed combi ned obstacl e over l ay
(MCOO). Th e MCOO i s a pr odu ct dev el oped du r i n g th e i n tel l i gen ce
preparati on of the battl efi el d (I PB) process. The MCOO devel opment i s a joi nt
effor t of th e engi n eer an d th e i n tel l i gence secti on of th e TFs tacti cal
operati ons center (TOC).
The MCOO shoul d defi ne the AAs and the MCs wi thi n the TFs AO. Thi s
i nfor mati on i s vi tal to obstacl e pl anni ng. Obstacl es ar e pl aced on AAs to
attack enemy maneuver. The AA anal ysi s detai l s potenti al EAs and i ndi cates
wher e for ces can defend wi th l i mi ted sur vi vabi l i ty constr ucti on, because a
reverse sl ope or undul ati ng terrai n provi des natural conceal ment and cover.
FM 20-32
The thr eat eval uati on and the enemy cour se-of-acti on (COA) devel opment
detai l how the enemy wi l l potenti al l y attack. They al so provi de an i nsi ght as
to what and wher e the enemys objecti ve and r outes mi ght be. The SI TEMP
hel ps the engi neer to under stand how the enemy wi l l tr aver se thr ough the
TFs sector and al l ows the engi neer to gai n an under standi ng of how and
where he can best attack the enemys maneuver.
The SI TEMP al so depi cts how the enemys r econnai ssance for ces wi l l enter
the sector. Thi s i s especi al l y i mportant when counteri ng the enemys abi l i ty to
reconnoi ter obstacl e efforts.
The engi neer must ar ti cul ate the cur r ent capabi l i ti es of the engi neer for ces,
i ts cur r ent combat power, and i ts abi l i ty to suppor t the TF. Assumpti ons of
futur e capabi l i ty or potenti al r ei nfor cement by other engi neer s shoul d be
an al y zed. Speci fi c ch ar acter i s ti cs of s peci al en gi n eer equ i pmen t an d
SCATMI NE systems ar e detai l ed for the staff. An i ni ti al Cl ass I V/V suppl y-
poi nt l ocati on and an oper ati on pl an shoul d be devel oped wi th the TF staff
(note that the TF has r esponsi bi l i ty for Cl ass I V/V suppl y-poi nt oper ati on).
The XO/fi r st ser geant (1SG) wor ks wi th the TF and the engi neer battal i on
Suppl y Offi cer (US Ar my) (S4) to ensur e that del i ver y of Cl ass I V/V bar r i er
materi al supports the TF countermobi l i ty pl an.
Anal yze Rel ati ve Combat Power
The engi neer compar es fr i endl y and enemy combat power and i denti fi es
possi bl e obstacl e r equi r ements that offset potenti al enemy br eachi ng and
di r ect- and i ndi r ect-fi r e capabi l i ti es. The actual i ncl usi on of the obstacl es
nor mal l y occur s after COA devel opment. Dur i ng thi s phase, the engi neer
fi ni shes hi s EBA to gai n an understandi ng for the engi neer companys abi l i ty
to support the TF.
Anal yze the Engi neer Battal i ons/Bri gades Mi ssi on and the Commanders I ntent
The staff anal yzes and i denti fi es i nfor mati on fr om the maneuver br i gade
or der and the commander s i ntent that wi l l potenti al l y i mpact defensi ve
pl anni ng. The engi neer anal yzes the maneuver br i gade/engi neer battal i on
commander s i ntent to deter mi ne potenti al obstacl e pl acement, obstacl e
i ntent, and constructi on pri ori ty based on hi s concept of the operati on.
Th e TF mu st i den ti fy task s an d l i mi tati on s i mpos ed fr om the br i gade
operati on order (OPORD). These mi ght i ncl ude obstacl e bel ts wi th or wi thout
speci fi c i ntents, obstacl e-r estr i cted ar eas, or r estr i cti ons on the type of
obstacl es. Al so, the br i gade OPORD mi ght speci fy r eser ve, si tuati onal , or
di rected obstacl e groups.
The engi neer must i denti fy the TFs total obstacl e capabi l i ti es. Avai l abl e
assets i ncl ude engi neer uni ts, SCATMI NE systems, and other uni ts that can
pr ovi de addi ti onal manpower for obstacl e constr ucti on. Engi neer-equi pment
status, work rates, and the ti me avai l abl e must be eval uated i n detai l .
NOTE: Work rates should only be used in the absence of unit-
developed planningfactors.
Tabl e 2-2 provi des pl anni ng factors for the mi ne dump. Tabl es 2-3 through 2-6,
pages 2-21 thr ough 2-23, pr ovi de pl anni ng factors for obstacl es. Speci al focus
to l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty wor k r ates and engi neer squad str engths must be made
when maki ng total -capabi l i ty esti mates. Pl an to accompl i sh obstacl e si ti ng
FM 20-32
and Cl ass I V/V suppl y-poi nt setup duri ng dayl i ght hours, and pl an to empl ace
mi nes duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty hours as much as possi bl e.
Table 2-2. Planning factors for the mine dump
Number of Personnel Quantity of Mines Required Equipment
2-man team (2 minutes per mine) 25 mines per hour Shears, metal cutting
Grease, automotive and artillery
Rags
Work gloves
Flashlight
Night-vision goggles
Pliers
Squad (7 soldiers and an NCO) 100 mines per hour
Platoon (with leadership)
300 mines per hour; 3,600 mines
per day
Company 10,800 mines per day
NOTE: Soldiers work 50 minutes per hour, 12 hours per day.
Table 2-3. Planning factors for work rates
Survivability Time Required to Construct
With D7F Dozer With ACE With SEE
Hull-defilade position 1 BTH 1.5 BTH NA
Turret-defilade position 2.5 BTH 3.5 BTH NA
HMMWV TOW position 1.5 BTH 2 BTH NA
Vehicle-protective position 0.75 BTH 1 BTH NA
Dismount-crew position NA NA 1 SEEH
Individual-fighting position NA NA 0.5 SEEH
Countermobility With D7F Dozer With ACE In Man-Hours
Antitank ditch 1 BTH/70 m 1 BTH/50 m NA
Standardized disrupt minefield NA NA 1.5 PH
Standardized fix minefield NA NA 1.5 PH
Standardized turn minefield NA NA 3.5 PH
Standardized block minefield NA NA 5 PH
Triple-standard concertina NA NA 1 PH/300 m
Road crater NA NA 1.5 SH
Point minefield NA NA 1 SH
Concertina roadblock NA NA 1 SH
Bridge demolition (massive) NA NA 2 SH
Bridge demolition (steel) NA NA 1 SH
Mine preparation at the TF Class IV/V
supply point
NA NA 1 SH/100 mines
LEGEND:
BTH (blade team hour). One blade team working for one hour. A blade team consists of two engineer
blades (two dozers, two ACEs, or one ACE and one dozer). One vehicle digs (cutter) while the other
spreads the spoil (striker). A dozer-ACE blade team uses the dozer BTH.
SEEH (SEE hour). One SEE working for one hour.
PH (platoon hour). One platoon (3 squads) working for one hour.
SH (squad hour). One squad working for one hour.
C2, FM 20-32
Table 2-4. Planning factors for standardized row minefields
Effect Resource
Factor
Front Depth Full-Width
AT Mines
Track-Width
AT Mines
Frag AP Mines
Disrupt 0.5 250 m 100 m 42 84 NA
Fix 1.0 250 m 120 m 63 84 NA
Turn 1.2 500 m 300 m 336 168 NA
Block 2.4 500 m 320 m 378 168 84 (Korea Only)
Table 2-5. Planning factors for scatterable minefields
System Minefield Size SD Time Arming Time
ADAM
400 x 400 m
200 x 800 m
4 hr
48 hr
Within 1 min
after ground
impact
RAAM
400 x 400 m
200 x 800 m
4 hr
48 hr
2 min 45 sec
Volcano (one load = 160
canisters or 960 mines
[800 AT and 160 AP])
Turn or block (1 per load):
Ground: 555 x 320 m
Air: 557 x 320 m
Fix or disrupt (4 per load):
Ground: 277 x 120 m
Air: 278 x 120 m
4 hr
5 days
15 days
2 min
MOPMS 70 x 35 m 4 hr* 89 sec
*Can be recycled 3 times for a total of 13 hr
FM 20-32
Table 2-6. Ranges of common weapons
Weapon Maximum
Effective Range
Planning
Range*
FRIENDLY WEAPON SYSTEMS
M16A2 580 m 400 m
M249 SAW 1,000 m 800 m
M60 1,100 m 1,100 m
M203
Area 350 m 350 m
Point 160 m 160 m
M2, .50 Cal
Area 1,830 m 1,830 m
Point 1,200 m 1,200 m
MK19
Area 2,200 m 2,200 m
Point 1,600 m 1,600 m
AT4 300 m 300 m
M47 Dragon 1,000 m 800 m
Javelin 2,000 m 2,000 m
M1 Abrams tank
105 mm 2,500 m 2,000 m
120 mm 3,000 m 2,500 m
M2 Bradley ITV
25 mm (APDS) 3,000 m 1,700 m
25 mm (HEI-T) 3,000 m 1,700 m
TOW2 3,750 m 3,750 m
60-mm mortar
HE 3,400 m 50 m (min)
WP 4,800 m 50 m (min)
ILLUM 931 m 50 m (min)
81-mm mortar
HE 4,595 m 75 m (min)
WP 4,595 m 75 m (min)
ILLUM 3,150 m 75 m (min)
4.2-in mortar
HE 6,840 m 770 m (min)
WP 5,650 m 920 m (min)
ILLUM 5,490 m 400 m (min)
SOVIET-STYLE WEAPON SYSTEMS
BMP, 73 mm 800 m 800 m
AT3 missile 3,000 m 3,000 m
AT5 missile 4,000 m 4,000 m
BMP-2 2,000 m 2,000 m
BTR, 14.5 mm 2,000 m 1,000 m
T-72 tank, 125 mm 2,100 m 2,000 m
T-80 tank, 125 mm 2,400 m 2,000 m
T-80 AT8 4,000 m 4,000 m
*The planning range is based on ideal weather conditions during daylight.
FM 20-32
I ssue the Commanders Gui dance
The commander shoul d be as speci fi c as possi bl e wi th hi s i ni ti al obstacl e
gui dance. I f the commander nar r ows the COA focus, he shoul d al so pr ovi de
obstacl e gui dance. Hi s gui dance i s a key factor to an ear l y star t and must be
sol i ci ted i f not offered.
Course-of-Action Development
Detai l ed pl anni ng begi ns fol l owi ng the COA devel opment (Fi gur e 2-12). The
engi neer focuses on four speci fi cs of obstacl e pl anni ng i n the scheme of
engi neer operati ons (SOEO) for the defensi ve pl an:
Di rect-/i ndi rect-fi re anal ysi s.
Obstacl e-i ntent i ntegrati on.
Obstacl e pri ori ty.
Mobi l i ty requi rements.
Di rect-/I ndi rect-Fi re Anal ysi s
The di r ect-/i ndi r ect-fi r e anal ysi s exami nes how engi neer s can best use
obstacl es (wi thi n the commander s i ntent) to enhance the di rect-/i ndi rect-fi re
pl an. Fi gur e 2-13 shows a sampl e di r ect-fi r e anal ysi s. Thi s anal ysi s can be
Figure 2-12. TF defense COA
D
A
B
C
SCT
E
N
E
M
Y
EA TEE
FM 20-32
used to for mul ate obstacl e l ocati ons wi th the di r ect-fi r e pl an. The engi neer
must have a fundamental under standi ng of the di r ect-/i ndi r ect-fi r e and
maneuver pl ans and the TFs or gani zati on of the EA to effecti vel y i ntegr ate
obstacl es wi th the di rect-/i ndi rect-fi re pl an.
Synchr oni zati on of di r ect and i ndi r ect fi r es wi th obstacl es mul ti pl i es the
r el ati v e effect on th e en emy. An obs tacl e i s an ex cel l en t l ocati on for
pr epl anned ar ti l l ery and mor tar fi res. These fi r es can el i mi nate di smounted
br eachi ng effor ts. I ndi r ect fi r es contr i bute to the thr eats abi l i ty to br each,
maki ng the obstacl e more effecti ve and pr ovi di ng di rect-fi re systems a hi gher
probabi l i ty to ki l l .
Obstacl e-I ntent I ntegrati on
The engi neer deter mi nes l ocati ons for the di r ected obstacl e gr oups. Gr oups
are pl aced on the COA overl ay to support the maneuver pl an. Thi s l ocati on i s
f or p l a n n i n g on l y a n d wi l l n or ma l l y be a d j u s t ed a f ter th e gr ou n d
reconnai ssance.
Obstacl e gr oups tar get speci fi c enemy el ements based on the SI TEMP. The
engi neer gener al l y al l ocates an obstacl e gr oup agai nst a battal i on-si ze AA.
Thi s appr oach mi r r or s the staff s pl acement of a company/team agai nst the
same en emy for ce. The company s/teams fi r e r esponsi bi l i ty dr i ves the
pl acement of the obstacl e gr oups. The engi neer advi ses the commander on
Figure 2-13. TF direct-fire analysis
E
N
E
M
Y
FM 20-32
whi ch speci fi c effect each di r ected obstacl e gr oup must achi eve. He pl ans
obstacl e groups to
Di srupt the enemy.
Turn the enemy i nto an area where fri endl y uni ts can mass fi res.
Fi x the enemy i n the EA and enhance hi s di rect-fi re destructi on.
Bl ock the enemy from usi ng an AA.
The engi neer i ntegr ates di r ected obstacl e gr oups wi th the COA. The obstacl e
effects are shown on the COA overl ay usi ng obstacl e-effect graphi cs (Fi gure 2-14).
The engi neer dr aws the obstacl e-gr oup gr aphi c to r efl ect the l ocati on, the
tar get, and the speci fi c i ntent of the gr oup as accur atel y as possi bl e. The
engi neer shoul d vi sual i ze how the terrai n natural l y effects maneuver. Terrai n
vi sual i zati on i s vi tal to proper obstacl e-group desi gn.
Note the pl acement and the effect of obstacl e groups i n Fi gure 2-14. Fi rst, the
engi neer must mani pul ate the MRB i nto the EA. The tur n gr oups (2 and 5),
combi ned wi th a heavy vol ume of ATfi res from a company team at the turni ng
poi nt, achi eves thi s. I n the EA, parti cul arl y where the TF fi res are massed, a
fi x gr oup (3) sl ows the enemy and i ncr eases the effects of the fi r es. A bl ock
group (1) i n the south, al ong wi th di rect fi res from a company team, wi l l stop
the advance of any el ement al ong the southern AA. A di srupt group (4), wi th
i ndi r ect fi r es, wi l l br eak up the C
2
and the tempo of the attacki ng for ce.
Figure 2-14. TF obstacle-intent integration and priorities
E
N
E
M
Y
BELT A1
1
5
4
2
3
FM 20-32
Pr otecti ve obstacl es i n fr ont of al l team posi ti ons pr otect the teams fr om the
enemy's fi nal assaul t.
Obstacl e Pri ori ty
The staff deter mi nes the pr i or i ty of each gr oup depi cted on the over l ay.
Pri or i ty i s establ i shed by the commander s i ntent and the most l i kel y enemy
COA. Th e obs tacl e pr i or i ty s h ou l d r efl ect th e TFs gr eates t obs tacl e
r equi r ement. The pr i mar y obstacl e effor t can be wi th an economy of for ce
where the commander needs mor e obstacl es to overcome a shortage of di r ect-
fi re systems. The TF engi neer shoul d be cogni zant of fl ank protecti on, weapon
types and r anges, and the over al l commander s i ntent for the enti r e for ce
before pl aci ng obstacl e pri ori ty on the mai n EA. Pri ori ti es assi st the engi neer
i n al l ocati ng resources and ensuri ng that the most cri ti cal obstacl e groups are
empl aced fi rst.
I n Fi gur e 2-14, the fi r st pr i or i ty i s to tur n the enemy wher e the fi r es ar e
massed. The second pri or i ty i s to deny the enemy access (bl ock effect) to the
souther n AA. The fi x effect i s the thi r d pr i or i ty because i t enhances the TF
fi res i n the EA but onl y sl ows the enemy). The bl ock effect i s a hi gher pri ori ty
than the fi x effect because i t stops the enemy fr om fl ank i ng the TF. The
di srupt effect i s the l ast pri ori ty.
Mobi l i ty Requi rements
The engi neer i denti fi es the TFs mobi l i ty r equi r ements. Obstacl e gr oups
shoul d not be arrayed al ong potenti al counterattack routes or where there i s a
potenti al to hamper uni t r eposi ti oni ng. Mobi l i ty assets shoul d be used to
counter potenti al enemy si tuati onal obstacl es and fr i endl y obstacl es that
mi gh t h i n der fr i en dl y man eu v er. Th e TF en gi n eer mu s t con s i der th e
commanders mobi l i ty requi rements and pl an for mobi l i ty assets so he can be
ready when and where he i s needed.
Course-of-Action Analysis
The staff war-games the COAs to deter mi ne thei r vi abi l i ty and recommends
the best COA to the commander. The engi neer refi nes the SOEO duri ng thi s
pr ocess as wel l . Obstacl es shoul d be consi der ed wi thi n the context of the
maneuver COA (Fi gure 2-15, page 2-28).
The engi neer staff offi cer shoul d consi der the fol l owi ng:
Enemy reacti ons at the obstacl e groups (breachi ng or bypassi ng
capabi l i ty) versus the desi red obstacl e effect.
Enemy breachi ng capabi l i ti es that make one obstacl e type preferabl e
to another (such as an AT di tch versus a mi nefi el d).
Obstacl e l ocati ons that hi nder fri endl y maneuver.
The compati bi l i ty of obstacl e effects and weapon-system capabi l i ti es.
Adequate di rect-/i ndi rect-fi re control measures and targeti ng that
suppor t the obstacl e effect. The effects of ar ti l l ery and obstacl es must
be synchroni zed to gai n the desi red effect on the enemys maneuver.
Locati ons and types of enemy si tuati onal obstacl es that make one type
of breachi ng asset preferabl e to another.
FM 20-32
After war gami ng, the staff adjusts the COA (i ncl udi ng the obstacl e pl an) by
Changi ng the l ocati on of obstacl e groups.
Changi ng the obstacl e effects.
Addi ng more si tuati onal obstacl es.
Addi ng more reserve obstacl es.
I denti fyi ng other mobi l i ty requi rements.
Refi ni ng arti l l ery targets based on obstacl e-group changes.
Mobi l i ty Requi rements
The staff determi nes whi ch obstacl es requi re l anes and determi nes the cl osure
cri teri a for the l anes. I t al so determi nes obstacl e-restri cted areas that support
the TFs man euver. Lan es and bypasses ar e deter mi ned usi ng tacti cal
reposi ti oni ng requi rements devel oped duri ng the COA anal ysi s. Requi rements
for r ehear sal movement, pl acement of the tar get r efer ence poi nt (TRP), and
l ogi s ti cal su ppor t of for war d TF el emen ts ar e al s o con s i der ed i n l an e
devel opment. Mobi l i ty r equi r ements i denti fi ed duri ng COA devel opment are
s y n ch r on i zed an d r efi n ed du r i n g COA an al y s i s. Addi ti on al mobi l i ty
requi rements i denti fi ed duri ng war gami ng are resourced and pl anned. (Lane
marki ng i s di scussed l ater i n thi s chapter.)
Figure 2-15. Obstacle-plan refinement
E
N
E
M
Y
Lanes for
withdrawal of
scouts
Situational disrupt
obstacle group
Marked bypasses to
support EA
rehearsal
FM 20-32
Obstacl e Desi gn/Resourci ng
After the COA anal ysi s, the engi neer conducts a detai l ed study of the obstacl e
pl an to deter mi ne r esour ce r equi r ements. Gr oups ar e r esour ced usi ng the
methods previ ousl y di scussed. The TF engi neer resources the obstacl e groups
based on thei r assi gned pr i or i ti es. Once the engi neer has devel oped the
r esour ce r equi r ements for the obstacl e gr oups, he pl ans the i ndi vi dual
obstacl es wi thi n the group.
I f ti me per mi ts, a detai l ed gr ound r econnai ssance of the obstacl e-gr oup
l ocati on can be conducted. Thi s wi l l al l ow a mor e detai l ed anal ysi s of the
obstacl e r equi r ement for that AA, and then the engi neer can pl an i ndi vi dual
obstacl es. Th e TF engi neer us ual l y desi gn ates th e i n ten t to gu i de the
compani es/teams; the company/team commander s and thei r suppor ti ng
engi neers compl ete the actual desi gn of the obstacl e gr oups.
Decision and Execution
The engi neer makes adjustments to the SOEO based on the COA that the
commander appr oves. The engi neer then pr ovi des or al , wr i tten, and/or
gr aphi cal or der s wi th suffi ci ent detai l to al l ow the subor di nate uni ts to
conduct the oper ati on. The engi neer pr ovi des cr i ti cal i nfor mati on usi ng the
scheme-of-obstacl e overl ay and the obstacl e-executi on matri x.
Scheme-of-Obstacl e Overl ay
The scheme-of-obstacl e overl ay (Fi gure 2-16, page 2-30) depi cts the l ocati on of
the TFs obstacl e gr oups, br i gade-di r ected obstacl e gr oups (i f any), and
obstacl e bel ts wi thi n the TFs sector. The over l ay al so i ncl udes any obstacl e
r estr i cti ons di ctated fr om a hi gher headquar ter s. The over l ay depi cts the
obstacl e gr oups usi ng the standar di zed obstacl e-effect symbol s. The over l ay
does not gener al l y show i ndi vi dual obstacl es unl ess the engi neer has had
suffi ci ent ti me to conduct a thor ough gr ound r econnai ssance wher e exact
obstacl e l ocati ons have been i denti fi ed. The engi neer must exer ci se extr eme
cauti on i f he uses i ndi vi dual obstacl es on the over l ay. He must ensur e that
i nexperi enced l eaders do not attempt to empl ace obstacl es exactl y as shown on
the over l ay, but i nstead, pr oper l y si te the obstacl e wi th the company/team
commander. The scheme-of-obstacl e over l ay gr aphi cal l y depi cts how the
commander seeks to i nfl uence enemy maneuver through obstacl es.
Obstacl e-Executi on Matri x
The obstacl e-executi on matr i x i ncl udes speci fi c i nstr ucti ons and detai l ed
i nformati on concer ni ng the obstacl e gr oups shown on the scheme-of-obstacl e
over l ay. Devel op an obstacl e-executi on matr i x for al l si tuati onal , reser ve, and
di rect obstacl es wi thi n the TF area. As a mi ni mum, the matri x shoul d i ncl ude
the i nformati on shown i n Fi gure 2-17, page 2-31.
FM 20-32
Figure 2-16. Scheme-of-obstacle overlay
E
N
E
M
Y Co D sites
A1E.
Co D sites
A1D.
No bypass allowed
at wood line.
Tm C sites A1C
and removes
bypass markings
for Lane Blue.
Lane Red closed
after scouts have
passed. Tm B
closes the lane
with MOPMS.
Tm B sites A1A. No
bypasses allowed
after lane closure.
A1E
A1A
A1B
A1D
A1C
BLUE
R
E
D
S
Tm A sites
A1B.
FM 20-32
P e r c e n t
C o m p l e t e
P r i o r i t y
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
N
u
m
b
e
r
O b s t a c l e
L o c a t i o n
L a y i n g
U n i t
O v e r w a t c h
U n i t
C l a s s I V / V P l a n n e d a n d
P r e - p o s i t i o n G r i d
S t a r t
T i m e
F i n i s h
T i m e
L a n e G r i d
( O p e n o r C l o s e d )
R e m a r k s
O b s t a c l e
A u t h o r i t y
Z o n e , B e l t , o r
G r o u p
O b s t a c l e T y p e
a n d N u m b e r
S t a t u s
F
i
g
u
r
e
2
-
1
7
.
S
a
m
p
l
e
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
-
e
x
e
c
u
t
i
o
n
m
a
t
r
i
x
FM 20-32
SITING AND EMPLACING TACTICAL MINEFIELDS
Thi s secti on outl i nes the pri nci pl es for si ti ng tacti cal mi nefi el ds to support the
company/team. These pr i nci pl es appl y to al l methods of empl acement
standard pattern, row mi ni ng, and SCATMI NE systems. The focal poi nt of the
di s cu s s i on on s i ti n g i s th e coor di n ati on th at mu s t occu r between th e
empl aci ng engi neer (normal l y the engi neer pl atoon l eader) and the maneuver
company commander. Coor di nati on between the engi neer pl atoon and the
maneuver company i s perhaps the most vi tal component of effecti ve obstacl e
i ntegrati on, and i t i s al so a vi tal component i n EA devel opment. Obstacl es are
di r ectl y i ntegr ated wi th weapon effects, capabi l i ty, and the fi r e pl an at thi s
l evel . The two subcomponents of tacti cal -obstacl e si ti ng are coordi nati ng wi th
the maneuver commander and si ti ng the mi nefi el d.
COORDINATING WITH THE MANEUVER COMMANDER
Effecti ve coordi nati on wi th the maneuver company/team commander who wi l l
fi ght the obstacl e(s) i s essenti al to real i zi ng the ful l potenti al of mi nefi el ds as
a combat mul ti pl i er. I n shor t, the empl aci ng engi neer becomes the maneuver
company/team commander's team engi neer for the mi ssi on. The engi neer, the
fi re-support team (FI ST), and the maneuver commander must work cl osel y to
ensur e compl ete i ntegrati on of the mi nefi el d i nto al l aspects of the company
pl an. The engi neer must be i ntegr ated i nto the maneuver company/team EA
devel opment process. Throughout each step of the pr ocess, the engi neer must
pr ovi de the maneuver commander and the FI ST wi th the engi neer experti se
necessary to ensure compl ete and effecti ve obstacl e i ntegrati on.
Befor e the empl aci ng engi neer can conduct effecti ve coor di nati on, he must
have tool s and i nfor mati on from the TF or der that serves as common gr ound
between the empl aci ng engi neer, the FI ST, and the maneuver commander.
The or der dr i ves the i ntegr ati on of tacti cal obstacl es i nto the fi r e pl an and
ensur es that the obstacl es affect thei r i ntended enemy tar get i n a way that
supports the scheme of maneuver.
Modified Combined ObstacleOverlay
The MCOO i s a pr oduct fr om the I PB pr ocess that gr aphi cal l y depi cts the
maneuverabi l i ty of the terrai n. I t depi cts sl ow-go and no-go terrai n rel ati ve to
the type of enemy force. I t al so defi nes AAs and MCs that the enemy may use
for i ts attack. Si nce tacti cal obstacl es attack the enemy's maneuver and must
compl ement the exi sti ng terrai n, the MCOO i s vi tal to obstacl e si ti ng. I t hel ps
ensure that obstacl es correctl y address the enemy AAs and MCs. I t al so hel ps
sel ect how and what par t of the enemy formati on wi l l be di rectl y attacked by
obstacl es, and i t shows the effect the obstacl es wi l l have on the enemy's
maneuver.
Situation Template
The SI TEMP i s devel oped by the maneuver battal i on S2 and the TF engi neer
duri ng the I PB. I t esti mates how the enemy wi l l attack, i n ter ms of si ze and
type of uni ts, and the formati ons i t wi l l use. Tacti cal obstacl es are empl oyed to
pr oduce speci fi c effects on speci fi c enemy tar gets. Ther efor e, the SI TEMP
hel ps the engi neer and the maneuver commander si te and empl ace obstacl es
i n a way that attacks the i ntended tar get. The SI TEMP may al so depi ct the
FM 20-32
l i kel y routes for enemy reconnai ssance el ements. Thi s hel ps the engi neer and
the maneuver commander anal yze r equi r ements for r econnai ssance and
sur vei l l ance (R&S) patr ol s that defeat enemy attempts to r econnoi ter the
obstacl es and r educe enemy effecti veness befor e the attack . The type of
for mati ons the S2 expects the enemy to use dur i ng the enti r e cour se of the
attack i s al so vi tal i nformati on. The SI TEMP shoul d i denti fy when the enemy
i s i n mar ch, pr ebattl e, and attack for mati ons. The enemy for mati on may
i mpact on the necessar y fr ont of obstacl e gr oups and the obstacl e gr oups
effecti veness i n achi evi ng the i ntended effect on enemy maneuver.
Commander's Intent
The empl aci ng engi neer, the FI ST, and the maneuver commander must have a
common under standi ng of the battal i on commander 's i ntent. The battal i on
commander 's i ntent i s hi s vi si on of the battl e and nor mal l y outl i nes what
acti ons the uni t must do to accompl i sh the mi ssi on. The commander 's i ntent
may i n cl u de k ey as pects of th e pl an th at h e wan ts to emph as i ze to
subor di nates to synchr oni ze the acti ons of subor di nates towar d a si ngl e
pur pose. The engi neer must under stand the commander 's i ntent and how i t
r el ates to i ntegr ati ng obstacl es. The engi neer shoul d al ways ensur e that the
obstacl es he i s empl aci ng support the commander's overal l i ntent.
Maneuver Graphics and theFirePlan
I n order to ful l y support the scheme of maneuver, the engi neer must have and
understand the maneuver graphi cs on the battal i on's operati onal overl ay. The
maneuver graphi cs use symbol s to depi ct the mi ssi ons of each subuni t wi thi n
the battal i on. Maneuver contr ol measur es such as battl e posi ti ons, sector s,
ph as e l i n es, pas s age l an es /poi n ts, an d cou n ter attack ax i s ar e v i tal l y
i mpor tant to under standi ng the pl an and i ntegr ati ng tacti cal obstacl es. The
maneuver gr aphi cs may i ncl ude di r ect-fi r e contr ol measur es that di r ect how
and wher e combat for ces wi l l mass, shi ft, and l i ft fi r es to destroy the enemy.
Di r ect-fi r e contr ol measur es i ncl ude EAs, tr i gger l i nes, and TRP and uni t
boundar i es. I n shor t, they di ctate the di r ect-fi r e r esponsi bi l i ti es of each
subor di nate. Under standi ng the di r ect-fi r e pl an and the or gani zati on of the
engagement i s fundamental to i ntegrati ng obstacl es wi th fi res. The maneuver
gr aphi cs al so gi ve the engi neer an appr eci ati on of how tacti cal obstacl es
supporti ng one uni t must compl ement the adjacent uni ts. Thi s i s parti cul arl y
true of adjacent EAs or pl ans requi ri ng any tacti cal reposi ti oni ng of forces.
Obstacle-Execution Matrix
The obstacl e-executi on matr i x i ncl udes speci fi c i nstr ucti ons and detai l ed
i nformati on concer ni ng the obstacl e gr oups shown on the scheme-of-obstacl e
over l ay. Thi s matr i x gi ves the engi neer cr i ti cal i nfor mati on on mi nefi el d
groups that wi l l be empl aced wi thi n the company's/team's AO. As a mi ni mum,
the obstacl e-executi on matri x shoul d i ncl ude the i nformati on shown i n Fi gure
2-17, page 2-31.
Scheme-of-ObstacleOverlay
At the maneuver battal i on l evel , the scheme-of-obstacl e over l ay depi cts the
l ocati on of br i gade-di r ected bel ts, TF obstacl e gr oups, and any di r ected
obstacl es wi thi n the battal i on sector. Any obstacl e restri cti ons attached to an
obstacl e contr ol measur e (bel t or gr oup) that pr ecl ude the empl oyment of
FM 20-32
certai n types of obstacl es ar e annotated on the overl ay. A scheme-of-obstacl e
overl ay i s a gr aphi c contr ol measure that defi nes the gener al l ocati on of the
obstacl e gr oups and the effect to be achi eved by them. The scheme-of-obstacl e
overl ay does not normal l y depi ct i ndi vi dual obstacl e l ocati ons. The l ocati on of
i ndi vi dual obstacl es wi thi n a gr oup i s deter mi ned dur i ng the si ti ng pr ocess
between the empl aci ng engi neer and the maneuver company commander.
When over l ai d on the maneuver gr aphi cs and the SI TEMP, the scheme-of-
obstacl e overl ay shoul d depi ct the essenti al el ements of obstacl e i ntegrati on:
Enemy targeted by the obstacl e.
Locati on of the obstacl e on the battl efi el d.
Uni t coveri ng the obstacl e.
Di rected l i nk between the obstacl e effects and the fi re pl an.
Fire-Support Plan
The empl aci ng engi neer shoul d be fami l i ar wi th the key el ements of the fi r e-
suppor t pl an. He must under stand the gener al scheme of fi r es and how the
fi r es suppor t the scheme of maneuver, the commander 's i ntent, and the
obstacl e pl an. Normal l y, the empl aci ng engi neer does not need the enti re fi re-
support overl ay depi cti ng the l ocati on of al l targets. However, he shoul d know
the l ocati on of fi re-support targets di rected by the battal i on to cover obstacl es.
The empl aci ng engi neer shoul d know who has the pr i or i ty of fi r es for each
phase of the battl e. The empl aci ng engi neer shoul d al so know the l ocati on and
the type of pr i or i ty targets or FPF al l ocated to the maneuver company he i s
suppor ti ng. Dur i ng coordi nati on wi th the maneuver company, the empl aci ng
engi neer shoul d di scuss the fi re-support pl an wi th the company FI ST and get
updates on changes to the pl an as wel l as any company-l evel fi r e-suppor t
pl ans that may i mpact on the i ntegrati on of obstacl es.
Combat ServiceSupport
The engi neer must be fami l i ar wi th the pl an for combat servi ce support (CSS).
I n parti cul ar, the engi neer must know the l ocati on of major suppl y routes i nto
and through the battal i on ar ea, the l ocati on of the battal i on l ogi sti cs rel ease
poi nt (LRP), what routes the maneuver company wi l l take from i ts posi ti on to
the LRP, and the l ocati on of key battal i on l ogi sti cs nodes. The empl aci ng
engi neer must al ways be cogni zant of the sustai nment tr affi c fl ow and the
i mpact obstacl e empl acement has on sustai nment oper ati ons. Of par ti cul ar
concern to the engi neer i s the l ocati on of the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt and the
routes to i t.
Battlefield OperatingSystem
Duri ng coordi nati on wi th the maneuver company commander, a checkl i st or a
framework i s a useful tool for organi zi ng thoughts and formul ati ng questi ons.
Bel ow i s a l i st of consi der ati ons or poi nts of coor di nati on that shoul d dri ve the
i n tegr a ti on of th e empl aci n g en gi n eer a n d th e ma n eu v er compa n y
commander. The l i st i s or gani zed usi ng the Battl efi el d Oper ati ng System
(BOS) because i t pr ovi des a l ogi cal sequence and a fr amewor k that i s easi l y
remembered.
I ntel l i gence.
FM 20-32
Enemy AAs and MCs (mounted and di smounted).
Li kel y enemy COA and possi bl e reacti ons to the obstacl es.
Enemy breach capabi l i ty.
Enemy reconnai ssance routes and fri endl y counterreconnai ssance
or R&S pl ans, parti cul arl y company-l evel patrol s.
Li kel y enemy formati ons and transi ti ons between formati ons.
Maneuver.
Speci fi ed, i mpl i ed, and essenti al tasks of the maneuver company.
Hi gher commander's i ntent.
Organi zati on of the defensi ve posi ti on, i ncl udi ng
> Task organi zati on (type of weapons).
> Deci si ve poi nt or defeat mechani sm.
> Organi zati on of di rect fi res i n the EA.
> Locati on and marki ng of di rect-fi re control measures.
> Posi ti on of weapons to cover assi gned di rect-fi re
responsi bi l i ti es.
Tacti cal mobi l i ty requi rements of the maneuver company and any
adjacent uni ts, i ncl udi ng
> Counterattack axi s.
> Reposi ti oni ng of forces and thei r routes to al ternate,
suppl ementar y, or subsequent battl e posi ti ons.
> Empl oyment of reserves.
> Passage of l i nes.
Obstacl e protecti on measures.
Mobi l i ty/survi vabi l i ty.
I ntent of tacti cal obstacl es covered by the maneuver company
(enemy target, obstacl e l ocati on, and obstacl e effect).
Obstacl e control measures and restri cti ons i mposed by hi gher
headquarters.
Mobi l i ty requi rements (l anes/gaps), as i denti fi ed above i n
maneuver.
Mutual support between the obstacl e l ocati on, the fi re pl an,
obstacl e effects, and survi vabi l i ty posi ti ons.
Securi ty for engi neers provi ded by the maneuver uni t supported.
Fi re support.
Locati on of the company FI ST and frequency of fi re support.
Updates on the tentati ve fi re-support pl an.
FM 20-32
Al l ocati on of fi res to the company, i ncl udi ng
> Arti l l ery or mortar targets.
> Pri ori ty targets, types of targets, and the FPF.
Cover i ng obstacl es and thei r effects wi th i ndi rect fi res.
I ndi rect-fi re control measures to synchroni ze di rect fi res, i ndi rect
fi res, and obstacl es.
Area-deni al arti l l ery muni ti on (ADAM)/remote anti armor mi ne
(RAAM) use (l ane cl osure and breached obstacl e repai r).
Regi steri ng fi res. (Deconfl i ct wi th obstacl e empl acement;
r egi str ati on shoul d occur after obstacl es ar e si ted but befor e
empl acement.)
Company fi re-support executi on matri x.
Means for obtai ni ng fi re support, i f enemy contact i s made duri ng
empl acement.
Ai r defense.
Enemy ai r AAs duri ng empl acement.
Update on changes to ai r-defense warni ng and weapons status.
Locati on of ai r-defense systems that can cover engi neers
empl aci ng obstacl es.
Method of obtai ni ng earl y ai r-defense warni ng.
CSS.
Tentati ve l ocati on of the mi ne dump, i f used, wi thi n the company
posi ti on and routes from the mi ne dump to obstacl es.
Routes the company pl ans on usi ng to conduct l ogi sti cs package
(LOGPAC) operati ons that must remai n open.
Manpower assi stance for operati ons at the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt
and the mi ne dump.
Casual ty evacuati on routes for scouts, observati on posts (OPs),
and ADA systems.
C
2
.
Locati on of the commander duri ng defensi ve preparati on.
Frequency-modul ated (FM) net of the supported company and the
means of communi cati on.
Uni t boundari es affecti ng obstacl e empl acement.
Ti me and pl ace of the company/team order.
Coordi nati on that must occur wi th adjacent uni ts.
Obstacl e reporti ng and recordi ng requi rements.
FM 20-32
Control and executi on of si tuati onal and reserve obstacl es.
Lane-cl osure responsi bi l i ti es and procedures.
Ti me and method of obstacl e turnover, i ncl udi ng l anes.
Company/team understandi ng of the obstacl e i ntent.
SITING THE MINEFIELD
The empl aci ng engi neer and the company/team commander si te i ndi vi dual
obstacl es to achi eve synchr oni zati on between the obstacl e effect and fi r es.
Si ti ng i s a key component to the EA devel opment pr ocess, and i t r epr esents
the fi nal adjustments to the obstacl e l ocati on and the fi r e contr ol measur es
before empl acement.
Cer tai n pr econdi ti ons ar e necessar y to si te i ndi vi dual obstacl es. Fi r st, the
company/team commander deci des wher e he pl ans to mass fi r es and mar ks
the necessar y fi r e contr ol measur es on the gr ound. The l ocati on of these
contr ol measur es must be cl ear, si nce they ar e the basi s for obstacl e si ti ng.
The commander then i denti fi es tentati ve l ocati ons for key weapons wi thi n the
posi ti on or the sector. Fi nal l y, the commander and the engi neer must both
understand the i ntent of the obstacl e group.
Obstacl e si ti ng concentrates on marki ng the obstacl e group as a whol e i nstead
of mar ki ng each i ndi vi dual obstacl e. I n br oken ter r ai n, however, i t may be
easi er to si te i ndi vi dual obstacl es. The company/team commander and the
empl aci ng engi neer use vehi cl es or sol di er s fr om the company/team, the
engi neer pl atoon, or both to si mul ate the enemy for ce and do the physi cal
mar ki ng. The si mul ated enemy force moves i nto the EA to the enemy si de of
the obstacl e gr oup. The engi neer pl atoon l eader and the company/team
commander col l ocate near the weapons coveri ng the obstacl e. As a techni que,
one or al l of the tanks, Bradl eys, and other crew-ser ved weapons may occupy
thei r posi ti on and contr i bute to the si ti ng pr ocess. Al l par ti ci pants i n the
si ti ng process use a common FM net to communi cate duri ng si ti ng.
The si mul ated enemy force moves i nto the EA, si mul ati ng the enemy's attack.
I t depl oys i nto a for mati on of fr ont that i s si mi l ar to the expected enemy
formati on. Once i t i s near the marked fi re control measures, i t pl aces markers
at i nter val s as i t dr i ves the tr ace of the obstacl e-gr oup effect (or i ndi vi dual
obstacl es i n broken terrai n). I t remai ns ori ented on key fi re control measures
to ensure that obstacl e l ocati on and effect are synchroni zed wi th fi res. Duri ng
the process, each parti ci pant veri fi es that he can cover the obstacl e, notes the
l ocati on of fi r e contr ol measur es and obstacl es, and r ecor ds the appr opr i ate
data on r ange car ds. As the si mul ated for ce dr i ves the obstacl e tr ace, si ti ng
parti ci pants al so i denti fy dead space and requi rements to refi ne the l ocati on of
the obstacl e group and fi re control measures. Figure 2-18, page 2-38, i l l ustrates
how the engi neer and the company/team commander wor k together to si te
turn- and fi x-obstacl e groups.
FM 20-32
Figure 2-18. Minefield siting
EA
EA
01 01
02 02
03
04
11
15
Planned TRP
Marked TRP
Bradley position
Tank position
Engineer vehicle
Group marker
Individual minefield
TURN-OBSTACLE
GROUP
FIX-OBSTACLE
GROUP
FM 20-32
Once the company/team mar ks the gener al l i mi ts and the or i entati on of the
obstacl e gr oup, the engi neer s can begi n mar ki ng i ndi vi dual obstacl es (i f not
al r eady done). To mar k i ndi vi dual obstacl es, the engi neer pl atoon uses the
gr oup mar ker s as gui des. As shown i n Fi gur e 2-18, the gr oup mar ker s may
l end themsel ves wel l as the star t and end poi nts of i ndi vi dual obstacl es;
however, thi s i s not al ways the case. As the engi neer pl atoon refi nes the group
l i mi ts i nto the si te of i ndi vi dual obstacl es, the pl atoon can then begi n the
necessary si te l ayout based on the method of obstacl e empl acement.
Si ti ng i s not the l ast thi ng done duri ng preparati ons. The ti me and resources
i n v ol v ed i n empl aci n g ta cti cal obs ta cl es r equ i r e th at s i ti n g begi n s
concurrentl y wi th establ i shi ng the defensi ve posi ti on. I t i s i mperati ve that the
u ni t s i tes th e obstacl es as s oon as the compan y/team comman der h as
establ i shed the EA and i denti fi ed tentati ve posi ti ons for key weapons. I t i s not
necessar y that al l weapons ar e i n pl ace and dug i n befor e si ti ng. Nor mal l y,
wel l -mar ked fi r e contr ol measur es and one known posi ti on per maneuver
pl atoon (not dug i n) are al l that i s requi red to si te the obstacl es effecti vel y.
EMPLACING MINEFIELDS
Based on the gr oup effect, r esour ces al l ocated, and the engi neer pl an, the
pl atoon l eader deter mi n es th e meth od of empl acemen t for i n di vi du al
mi nefi el ds. The pr ocedur es for empl aci ng scatter abl e, r ow, and standar d-
pattern mi nefi el ds are contai ned i n Chapters 3, 6, and 7, respecti vel y.
DETERMINING RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS
The engi neer must deter mi ne the number of i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds needed to
make up the gr oup and ensur e the al l ocati on of r equi r ed r esour ces. The
amount of l i near obstacl e effor t for a gr oup i s equal to the wi dth of the AA,
mul ti pl i ed by the r esour ce factor. I n Fi gur e 2-19, page 2-40, the AA i s 1,500
meters wi de, the tacti cal -obstacl e effect i s to turn the enemy, and the resource
factor i s 1.2. The l i near mi nefi el d requi rement i s 1,800 meters. One turn-effect
mi nefi el d has a front of 500 meters (1,800/500 = 4 mi nefi el ds [round up]). The
number of mi nes and the ti me requi red to empl ace each mi nefi el d depends on
the empl acement method.
MINEFIELD SUPPLY OPERATIONS
Requests for Cl ass I V/V obstacl e mater i al that ar e or i gi nated at TF l evel or
bel ow go to the TF S4. The TF S4 pr ocesses the r equests and sends them to
the for war d suppor t battal i on (FSB). The FSB pr ocesses the r equests and
for war ds them to the br i gade-l evel FSB, the di vi si on mater i al -management
center (DMMC), and the corps materi al -management center (CMMC).
The i ssue of Cl ass I V obstacl e materi al normal l y i nvol ves l arge quanti ti es of
materi al ; therefore, corps support el ements normal l y use thei r transportati on
assets to del i ver the materi al di rectl y to the empl acement si tes or to the Cl ass
I V/V suppl y poi nt.
Uni ts r equest Cl ass V obstacl e mater i al somewhat di ffer entl y. The TF S4
noti fi es the br i gade S4 of Cl ass V r equi r ements. The br i gade S4 noti fi es the
di vi si on ammuni ti on offi cer (DAO) i n the DMMC, who author i zes Cl ass V
i ssue by the ammuni ti on tr ansfer poi nt (ATP). Cl ass V obstacl e mater i al ,
FM 20-32
unl i ke most ammuni ti on, i s del i vered to the user at the obstacl e empl acement
si te or the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt.
A suppl y r equest i ncl udes the quanti ty, the r equi r ed del i ver y ti me, the
transportati on responsi bi l i ti es, and the desi red del i very l ocati on. The quanti ty
i ncl udes the total for each type of obstacl e. There may be several Department
of Defense i denti fi cati on codes (DODI Cs) and nati onal stock numbers (NSNs)
i nvol ved, dependi ng on the types of obstacl es requi r ed. The requi r ed del i ver y
ti me i s ver y i mpor tant for ensur i ng an ear l y star t on the pr epar ati on of the
battl efi el d because the l ack of mater i al coul d adver sel y affect the mi ssi on.
Transportati on responsi bi l i ti es must be cl earl y understood. Materi al handl i ng
equi pment (MHE) i s requi red to ensure a rapi d turnaround of haul assets.
I n addi ti on, the br i gade staff coor di nates wi th the TF staff to i denti fy the
l ocati on of Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nts i n the TF sectors. Prompt i denti fi cati on of
TF Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nts i s requi r ed i f the obstacl e materi al i s for war ded
from the corps i nto the TF sector. I f the materi al i s not forwarded i nto the TF
sector, the bri gade i s responsi bl e for del i veri ng i t to the TF.
At the TF l evel , sustai ni ng obstacl e operati ons i s an extr emel y di ffi cul t task.
Central i zed throughput operati ons by the corps or the di vi si on stop at the TF
l evel . Mass quanti ti es of obstacl e mater i al , especi al l y mi nes, ar e centr al l y
r ecei v ed, br ok en down i n to mi n efi el d pack ages, an d th en di str i bu ted
thr oughout the sector based on the obstacl e pl an. At some poi nt i n the
di str i buti on pl an, the TF tur ns over contr ol of the obstacl e mater i al to
engi neer s who then empl ace the obstacl es. Obstacl e l ogi sti cs (especi al l y for
mi ne war far e) at the TF l evel can be compl ex, r equi r e pr udent use of scar ce
haul assets and MHE, and demand posi ti ve C
2
.
Figure 2-19. Example of minefield resourcing
AA or MC
1,500
Width of AA/MC = 1,500 m
Obstacle effect: Turn
Linear effort resource factor: 1.2
Turn minefield front norm: 500 m
Determine number of minefields in the group
1,500 x 1.2 = 1,800 m linear effort
1,800/500 = 4 turn minefields (round up)
FM 20-32
Th e su ppl y of obstacl e mater i al may v ar y s l i ghtl y for obs tacl e gr ou ps
devel oped at cor ps, di vi si on, and bri gade l evel s. The staff at the l evel wher e
the obstacl e gr oup i s pl anned deter mi nes the r esour ces r equi r ed for the
obstacl e. I t al so determi nes how the empl aci ng uni t wi l l get the materi al . For
exampl e, i f the cor ps staff pl ans a r eser ve obstacl e gr oup but the detai l ed
pl anni ng i s done at TF l evel , the TF resources the obstacl e group. However, i f
the corps staff pl ans the obstacl e gr oup i n detai l , i t determi nes the resources
r equi r ed. The cor ps staff al so pl ans the del i ver y of obstacl e mater i al to the
empl aci ng uni t. Al ternatel y, the corps staff coul d di rect the empl aci ng uni t to
pi ck up the obstacl e materi al from a l ocati on such as the corps storage area.
Thi s secti on descr i bes some of the under l yi ng pr i nci pl es i n mi ne suppl y
operati ons. I t concentrates on the fl ow of Cl ass I V/V materi al (mi nes) through
the battal i on sector. The maneuver uni t i s responsi bl e for the fl ow of obstacl e
mater i al wi thi n the maneuver battal i on sector ; however, i t i s effecti vel y a
shared responsi bi l i ty between the engi neer and the maneuver uni t.
RESUPPLY NODES
Ther e ar e two cr i ti cal mi ne r esuppl y nodes wi thi n the TF sector the Cl ass
I V/V suppl y poi nt and the mi ne dump. The rel ati ve l ocati ons of the Cl ass I V/V
suppl y poi nt and the mi ne dump are shown i n Fi gure 2-20.
Class IV/V Supply Point
A Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt i s a central recei vi ng poi nt for obstacl e materi al i n a
TF sector. I t i s wher e the TF r ecei ves and tr ansfer s contr ol of obstacl e
materi al pushed forward by hi gher l evel s. The suppl y poi nt i s establ i shed and
oper ated by the TF and i s centr al l y l ocated to suppor t al l pl anned obstacl es
wi thi n the TF sector. Where the tacti cal -obstacl e pl an al l ows, the suppl y poi nt
shoul d be l ocated near the TF combat tr ai ns to better faci l i tate C
2
and the
avai l abi l i ty of equi pment. The TF combat trai ns command post (CTCP) shoul d
Figure 2-20. Mine resupply
CLASS IV/V SUPPLY
POINT (MINES)
COMBAT
TRAINS
MSR
MINE
DUMP
EA BLUE
MINE
DUMP
EA RED
MINE
DUMP
A 1-4
10
20
21
30
A 1-4
B3
02
01
B3A B3C
03 05
06
04
ENEMY
FM 20-32
provi de C
2
of operati ons at the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt. The TF engi neer wi l l
nor mal l y fur ni sh a r epr esentati ve that pr ovi des techni cal assi stance to the
CTCP.
The mai n purpose of a Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt operati on i s to recei ve obstacl e
materi al and reconfi gure i t based on the requi rements for each obstacl e group.
Each suppl y poi nt must have a dedi cated S4 r epr esentati ve to tr ack the fl ow
of obstacl e mater i al i n and out of the suppl y poi nt. The suppl y poi nt shoul d
have dedi cated MHE to off-l oad the bul k quanti ti es of obstacl e mater i al and
r econfi gur e them i nto mi nefi el d packages as r equi r ed. Obstacl e mater i al i s
normal l y br oken down i nto mi nefi el d packages i f the mater i al i s not al r eady
del i ver ed i n combat-confi gured l oads. Thi s may r equi r e a dedi cated engi neer
representati ve to ensure that obstacl e materi al i s confi gured properl y. Tabl e 2-
7 shows personnel requi rements for a Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt.
The most l abor-i ntensi ve task at the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt i s the uncrati ng
of mi nes. Thi s r equi r es dedi cated manpower fr om the suppor ted maneuver
for ce and the tool s needed to br eak shi ppi ng bands and uncr ate the mi nes
fr om thei r contai ner s. Another i mpor tan t aspect of uncr ati ng mi nes i s
tr acki ng fuses and booster char ges. As the mi nes ar e uncr ated, fuses and
booster char ges ar e separ ated. However, the same number and type of fuses
and booster char ges must be task-or gani zed wi th mi nefi el d packages. Thi s
requi res stri ct supervi si on; mi stakes can qui ckl y l ead to confusi on and a waste
of empl acement ti me.
Because of the assets i nvol ved at a Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt, a TF i s nor mal l y
capabl e of operati ng onl y one suppl y poi nt at any gi ven ti me. I f the TF sector
i s extr emel y wi de or deep, sever al suppl y poi nts may be pl anned; however,
onl y one can be oper ated at a ti me, based on the commander 's pr i or i ti es for
obstacl e empl acement.
Table 2-7. Personnel requirements for a Class IV/V supply point
Personnel Responsibilities
TF S4/S4 NCOIC
Provides overall C
2
and Class IV/V accountability
Coordinates for MHE
Is assisted by the RTO
TF engineer representative
Supervises organization of Class IV/V material into
packages to support obstacle groups
Provides technical assistance on Class IV/V supply-
point setup and mine uncrating and inspection
Infantry squad* Downloads incoming Class V trucks
Infantry squad* Downloads incoming Class IV trucks
Infantry squad* Uploads outgoing Class IV/V trucks
Two infantry squads* Uncrates and inspects mines
Support PL/PSG
Provides C
2
for cross loading of Class IV/V material
Infantry squad* Provides local security for the Class IV/V supply point
* or equivalent-sized element from a supported unit
FM 20-32
MineDump
A mi ne dump i s the most forward mi ne r esuppl y node. I t i s where mi nes ar e
task-or gani zed i nto mi ne-str i p packages and then i nspected, pr epar ed, and
l oaded onto empl aci ng vehi cl es. A mi ne dump i s not a per manent suppl y
poi nt, and i t i s not al ways used. I ts use depends on the method of mi nefi el d
r esuppl y, and these techni ques ar e di scussed i n mor e detai l l ater i n thi s
chapter. When used, one mi ne dump suppor ts a si ngl e obstacl e gr oup. I t i s
acti vated or deacti vated upon i ni ti ati on and compl eti on of the obstacl e groups
empl acement. Mi ne-dump oper ati ons ar e pri mar i l y an engi neer company or
pl atoon responsi bi l i ty. However, i t i s a good techni que to augment mi ne-dump
operati ons wi th personnel fr om the company/team overwatchi ng the obstacl e
gr oup bei ng empl aced. A mi ne dump may be l ocated i n the vi ci ni ty of the
company/team posi ti on or cl oser to the obstacl e group.
There are three cri ti cal tasks that must be accompl i shed at the mi ne dump:
The mi nefi el d packages are further task-organi zed i nto mi ne-stri p
packages (compl ete wi th the ri ght number, type, and mi x of fuses and
boosters) as they are transported to the mi ne dump. For exampl e, i f a
pl atoon i s empl aci ng a standardi zed di srupt row mi nefi el d, mi nes are
task -or gani zed i n to thr ee mi ne-str i p pack ages. As the engi neer
pl atoon moves to the mi ne dump to r esuppl y, each empl aci ng vehi cl e
l oads a desi gnated mi ne-stri p package.
The mi nes are prepared for empl acement; but they are not fused at
the mi ne dump. Preparati on i ncl udes l ooseni ng and greasi ng fuse and
booster wel l s and ensuri ng proper functi oni ng of the mi ne.
The mi nes are transl oaded onto empl aci ng vehi cl es or a mi ne-del i very
system.
Transportati on of mi nes from the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt to the mi ne dump i s
a suppor ted TF r esponsi bi l i ty. However, i t i s nor mal l y shar ed between the
engi neer company and the TF, si nce nei ther one has the haul capabi l i ty to
si mul taneousl y servi ce al l acti ve mi ne dumps.
RESUPPLY RULES
The fol l owi ng rul es govern mi ne resuppl y:
Mi nes shoul d be uncrated at the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt to preserve
transportati on assets goi ng forward.
Mi nes are task-organi zed i nto mi nefi el d packages at the Cl ass I V/V
suppl y poi nt.
Transportati on from the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt to the mi ne dump i s
a shar ed engi neer and maneuver uni t r esponsi bi l i ty when a mi ne
dump i s used.
Mi nes are i nspected and prepared at the l ast suppl y node (Cl ass I V/V
suppl y poi nt or mi ne dump) before they are l oaded onto an empl aci ng
vehi cl e or a mi ne-del i very system.
FM 20-32
Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nts are set up usi ng authori zed ammuni ti on
procedures and di stance requi rements.
SUPPLY LOCATION
Consi der the fol l owi ng when sel ecti ng a l ocati on for the Cl ass I V/V suppl y
poi nt or the mi ne dump:
Carryi ng capaci ty. The l ocati on of key suppl y nodes and the type of
r esuppl y method used depends i n par t on the type, amount, and
avai l abi l i ty of haul assets. The carryi ng capaci ty pl ays a l arge rol e. I n
shor t, the mor e mater i al a vehi cl e can car r y, the mor e tur nar ound
ti me you can affor d. Tabl e 2-8 pr ovi des the mi ne haul capaci ty for
vari ous types of vehi cl es.
Traffi c ci rcui t. Vehi cl es must be abl e to enter, l oad, unl oad, and exi t
wi thout i nterferi ng wi th the l oadi ng and unl oadi ng of other vehi cl es.
Camoufl age and cover. Protecti on from observati on and thermal
i magi ng i s desi red. Protecti on fr om arti l l ery and ai r attack shoul d be
consi dered. Resi due must be removed.
Defense. The si te must be organi zed for defense agai nst enemy patrol s
and saboteurs.
Ti me. Ti me factors for handl i ng the obstacl e materi al , to i ncl ude al l
unl oadi ng, uncrati ng, i nspecti ng, and l oadi ng, must be consi dered.
Operators. Leaders and sol di ers must be speci fi cal l y al l ocated to
operate Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nts and mi ne dumps. They wi l l probabl y
remai n there unti l the task i s compl ete. The suppl y node may have to
be coll ocated with or be near a source of manpower. Tabl e 2-7, page 2-42,
pr ovi des gener al gui dance on how much manpower i s r equi r ed to
sustai n mi ne resuppl y operati ons.
RESUPPLY METHODS
The methods for obstacl e materi al resuppl y are
Suppl y poi nt.
Servi ce stati on.
Tai l gate.
I n each method, cor ps or di vi si on tr anspor t del i ver s Cl ass I V/V suppl i es
for war d to a desi gnated Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt i n each TF sector. The
pri mary di fferences i n the methods are how the materi al i s del i vered from the
Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt to the obstacl e l ocati on and whether or not mi ne
dumps are establ i shed.
Supply Point
The suppl y-poi nt method (Fi gure 2-21, page 2-46) requi res that the empl aci ng
engi neer pl atoon return to the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt each ti me i t resuppl i es.
Thi s method does not r equi r e a separ ate mi ne dump. I n effect, i t moves the
nor mal tasks associ ated wi th a mi ne dump to the suppl y poi nt. Mi nes ar e
pr epared and i nspected at the suppl y poi nt as they are bei ng l oaded onto an
empl aci ng vehi cl e or a mi ne-del i very system.
C2, FM 20-32
Sever al consi der ati ons may dr i ve the use of suppl y-poi nt r esuppl y. Fi r st, i f
ther e ar e no addi ti onal haul assets to tr anspor t obstacl e mater i al for war d
fr om the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt, the suppl y-poi nt method may be the onl y
vi abl e techni que. Secondl y, the mi nefi el d gr oup may be cl ose enough to the
suppl y poi nt that any other method i s l ess effi ci ent.
Advantages.
Mi ni mi zes unl oadi ng and l oadi ng of materi al .
Requi res mi ni mal augmentati on of haul assets.
Table 2-8. Class IV/V haul capacity
Vehicle
C
o
n
c
e
r
t
i
n
a
W
i
r
e
1
M
1
5
A
T
M
i
n
e
M
1
9
A
T
M
i
n
e
M
2
1
A
T
M
i
n
e
M
1
6
A
P
M
i
n
e
M
1
4
A
P
M
i
n
e
M
O
P
M
S
M
i
n
e
V
o
l
c
a
n
o
M
i
n
e
M
I
C
L
I
C
R
e
l
o
a
d
2
H
o
r
n
e
t
HMMWV
1,124 kg, 6 cu m
2 51 34 27 55 56 15 1 NA 1
M35 2-ton truck
2,250 kg, 12.5 cu m
4 102 69 55 111 113 30 2 2 2
M1078 2-ton truck
2,250 kg, 13.4 cu m
4 102 69 55 111 113 30 2 2 2
M54 5-ton truck
4,500 kg, 13.6 cu m
7 204 138 109 222 227 61 5 3 5
M1083 5-ton truck
4,500 kg, 15.6 cu m
8 204 138 109 222 227 61 5 3 5
M930 5-ton dump truck
(without sideboards)
4,500 kg, 3.8 cu m
2 112 64 32 168 71 23 3 2 2
(with sideboards)
4,500 kg, 8.2 cu m
4 204 138 70 222 153 51 5 3 4
4,500 kg, 3.8 cu m
2 112 64 32 168 71 23 3 2 2
HEMTT truck
9,000 kg, 15 cu m
8 408 277 128 444 317 94 10 7 8
12-ton S&T
10,800 kg, 24.5 cu m
13 489 333 208 533 514 148 12 9 13
40-ton lowboy
36,000 kg, 49.3 cu m
27 1,466 1,035 419 1,777 1,035 308 30 27 27
M548 cargo
5,400 kg, 14.9 cu m
8 244 166 125 266 272 74 6 4 6
M1077 PLS flat rack
14,900 kg, 17.6 cu m
9 440 352 164 586 293 110 11 9 9
No of mines per box NA 1 2 4 4 90 21 240 NA 30
Weight per box (kg) 531 22 33 41 21 20 73 833 1,195 810
Size of box (cu m) 1.8 0.04 0.05 0.12 0.03 0.06 0.16 1.6 1.8 1.8
1
The number of concertina = bundles; 1 bundle = 40 rolls
2
Line charge + rocket
FM 20-32
Al l ows manpower and equi pment to be massed at a si ngl e suppl y
poi nt.
Streaml i nes C
2
of materi al .
Di sadvantages.
Requi res more movement of the pl atoon, whi ch may take away
from empl acement ti me.
Requi res that the pl atoon move i n and out of the area where the
mi nefi el ds are bei ng empl aced, i ncreasi ng the ri sk of fratri ci de.
May di srupt the empl acement of i ndi vi dual obstacl es when
empl aci ng vehi cl es cannot car r y enough mater i al to star t and
compl ete the obstacl e. Thi s causes empl aci ng vehi cl es to stop
work, rel oad, and pi ck up where they l eft off.
Requi res a l arger Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt that i s capabl e of
r ecei vi ng mass qu an ti ti es of obstacl e mater i al and mu l ti pl e
l oadi ng pl atoons si mul taneousl y.
ServiceStation
The ser vi ce-stati on method (Fi gur e 2-22) centers on the acti vati on of a mi ne
dump forward of the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt. The mi nes are transported to a
mi ne dump usi ng a combi nati on of engi neer and TF haul assets that ar e
nor mal l y under the contr ol of the empl aci ng engi neer. At the mi ne dump,
mater i al i s stock pi l ed and pr epar ed by the mi ne-dump par ty. Obstacl e
Figure 2-21. Supply-point resupply method
Corps/division truck
Received mine
Task-organized mine
package
Emplacing vehicle
S4/engineer
representatives
Entrance
Exit
Class IV/V supply
point (mines)
FM 20-32
mater i al i s fur ther task-or gani zed i nto mi nefi el d and mi ne-str i p packages.
The empl aci ng pl atoon moves to a mi ne dump to resuppl y empl aci ng vehi cl es
or di spenser s. On ce the obstacl e gr oup i s empl aced, the mi ne dump i s
deacti vated or moved to support another obstacl e group.
There are several consi derati ons for usi ng the servi ce-stati on method. Fi rst, i t
i s used when the obstacl e group i s l ocated too far fr om the Cl ass I V/V suppl y
poi nt to al l ow effi ci ent turnaround. Si nce thi s method provi des for prestocki ng
obstacl e mater i al for war d, i t i s used when avai l abl e haul assets have a
r el ati vel y smal l capaci ty. Thi s r equi r es maki ng fr equent, shor t-dur ati on
r esuppl y tr i ps and stocki ng mi nes to keep pace wi th empl acement. I t al so
str eaml i nes empl acement si nce ther e i s an oppor tuni ty to task-or gani ze the
mi nes i nto mi ne-str i p packages, based on the empl acement method and the
type of mi nefi el d. Fi nal l y, whi l e i t sti l l requi res the empl aci ng pl atoon to stop
l ayi ng and r esuppl y, i t mi ni mi zes the di stance and the amount of ti me the
pl atoon must tr avel to r el oad. Thi s r equi res that a smal l party be l eft at the
mi nefi el d to hel p pi ck up where empl acement stopped.
Advantages.
Figure 2-22. Service-station resupply method
Mine dump
Class IV/V supply
point (mines)
S4/engineer
representatives
Exit
Entrance
Battalion/engineer truck
Received mine
Task-organized mine package
Task-organized mine-strip
package
Emplacing vehicle
FM 20-32
Al l ows prestockage of obstacl e materi al to keep pace wi th
empl acement.
Mi ni mi zes the di stance and the amount of ti me the empl aci ng
pl atoon must travel to rel oad.
May provi de addi ti onal manpower and securi ty i f i t i s l ocated near
a company/team.
Di sadvantages.
Requi res addi ti onal l oadi ng and unl oadi ng of obstacl e materi al .
May requi re augmentati on wi th haul assets.
Di srupts empl acement by requi ri ng the empl aci ng pl atoon to stop
obstacl e empl acement, move to the suppl y poi nt, r el oad, and
return to the mi nefi el d.
Tailgate
The tai l gate r esuppl y method (Fi gur e 2-23) tr anspor ts obstacl e mater i al
di r ectl y fr om the Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt to the empl aci ng pl atoon at the
obstacl e si te. Obstacl e mater i al i s tr anspor ted wi th TF and engi neer haul
assets. Obstacl e materi al i s transl oaded by empl aci ng engi neers to empl aci ng
vehi cl es or di spensers at the obstacl e si te.
Figure 2-23. Tailgate resupply method
Class IV/V supply
point (mines)
S4/engineer
representatives
Exit
Entrance
Battalion/engineer truck
Received mine
Task-organized mine package
Emplacing vehicle
FM 20-32
Two overri di ng consi derati ons dr i ve the deci si on to use the tai l gate resuppl y
method. Fi r st, i f obstacl e empl acement i s bei ng conducted dur i ng l i mi ted
vi si bi l i ty, the tai l gate method i s the pr i mar y r esuppl y method. I t mi ni mi zes
di sr upti on of empl acement and the chance of fr atr i ci de as engi neer s move
back i nto the wor k ar ea after r el oadi ng. Secondl y, tai l gate r esuppl y i s the
pri mary method used when establ i shi ng a hasty defense or when the si tuati on
i s uncl ear and an attack can happen at anyti me. Si nce obstacl e mater i al
remai ns l oaded unti l transferred to an empl aci ng vehi cl e, the tai l gate method
enabl es engi neer s to qui ckl y br eak contact wi thout r i ski ng a l oss of obstacl e
mater i al to the enemy. The tai l gate resuppl y method i s the preferred method
for l i ght forces.
Advantages.
Mi ni mi zes l oadi ng and unl oadi ng of obstacl e materi al .
Al l ows engi neers to break contact rapi dl y i n the event of enemy
attack wi thout l osi ng obstacl e materi al to the enemy.
Mi ni mi zes the movement of pl atoons i n and out of the mi nefi el d
(sui tabl e for l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty).
Di sadvantages.
Requi res augmentati on by hi gh-capaci ty transportati on assets
that ar e capabl e of offsetti ng the l oss i n tur nar ound ti me i f the
vehi cl e has to wai t at the obstacl e si te.
May resul t i n i neffi ci ent use of haul assets.
Compl i cates C
2
i n l i nki ng mi ne transport assets wi th empl aci ng
engi neers si nce the engi neers conti nue empl acement.
Causes task-organi zi ng of mi nefi el d packages to be conducted
concurrentl y wi th l oadi ng.
MINEFIELD MARKING
CRITERIA
Mi nefi el ds must be mar k ed to pr event fr atr i ci de. Mar k i ng ensur es that
fri endl y sol di ers do not acci dental l y enter a mi nefi el d, and i t i s a requi rement
under STANAGs and Geneva Conventi on agr eements. When empl aci ng
mi nefi el ds behi nd the forward l i ne of own troops (FLOT) (i n the mai n battl e or
r ear ar ea), mar k the mi nefi el ds on al l four si des. Thi s i ncl udes ai r-del i ver ed
Vol cano mi nefi el ds that are si ted and empl aced before the enemy attacks.
Gator, RAAM, and ADAM mi nefi el ds ar e excepti ons to the r ul e. To pr eser ve
the system's fl exi bi l i ty and because of the rel ati ve i naccuracy of empl acement,
these mi nefi el ds ar e not nor mal l y mar ked befor e empl acement unl ess the
tacti cal si tuati on permi ts. Marki ng the area where mi nes are to be empl aced
by ar ti l l er y or fi xed-wi ng ai r craft i s not r ecommended. Mi nes coul d l i kel y be
empl aced outsi de the marked area.
For wa r d of th e FL OT, mi n ef i el d s ar e n ot gen er a l l y ma r k ed bef or e
empl acement. However, commanders must make every attempt to mark these
mi nefi el ds as soon as the tacti cal si tuati on al l ows. For scatterabl e mi nefi el ds,
FM 20-32
a commander may choose to remove marki ngs once the sel f-destruct (SD) ti me
of the mi nes has expi r ed; but the l ocati on of the mi nefi el d must sti l l be
recorded and forwarded to hi gher and adjacent uni ts i n case some of the mi nes
di d not sel f-destruct.
PERIMETER
Con s tr u ct a per i meter fen ce (Fi gu r e 2-24) to mar k a mi n efi el d. Star t
empl aci ng the peri meter fence before empl aci ng mi nes, preferabl y duri ng si te
l ayout i f the tacti cal si tuati on per mi ts. For conventi onal mi nefi el ds, ensur e
that the per i meter fence i s at l east 15 meter s outsi de the near est mi ne or
cl uster. For scatter abl e mi nefi el ds, the ar ea i nsi de the per i meter fence must
i ncl ude the safety zone. (See Chapter 3 for more detai l s.)
Pl ace warni ng si gns for areas contai ni ng empl aced mi nes. Space the warni ng
si gns 10 to 50 meter s apar t, dependi ng on the ter r ai n. I f usi ng pi ckets and
bar bwi re to mar k the mi nefi el d, ensur e that the wi r e i s wai st-hi gh. I f usi ng
concerti na wi re, use a one-rol l hei ght. Pl ace addi ti onal strands of barbwi re or
rol l s of concerti na at the di screti on of the commander.
TECHNIQUES
A commander may deci de to mark i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds i n an obstacl e group
or to mar k the gr oup as a whol e (Fi gur e 2-25, page 2-52). Dependi ng on the
si ze and the l ocati on of mi nefi el ds, ei ther techni que may have the advantage
of usi ng fewer r esour ces or l abor. Nor mal l y, mar ki ng i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds i n
a fi x-obstacl e gr oup r equi r es l ess resour ces than marki ng the enti r e obstacl e
gr oup. The opposi te i s usual l y tr ue for di sr upt-, tur n-, and bl ock-obstacl e
gr oups. The deci si on to mar k i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds or obstacl e gr oups shoul d
not be based sol el y on l ogi sti cal consi derati ons. A commander must consi der
the amount of tacti cal and/or sustai nment movement requi red i n and around
the obstacl e groups as wel l as the capabi l i ty of the uni ts C
2
forces.
The fol l owi ng advantages and di sadvantages to marki ng i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds
versus marki ng the obstacl e group are provi ded to hel p commanders make the
best deci si on.
MarkingIndividual Minefields
Advantages.
Returni ng uni ts forward of the mi nefi el ds have more routes
(tacti cal l anes or bypasses) through the obstacl e group.
Tacti cal l anes need onl y pass through i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds.
Mi ne recover y i s easi er.
Di sadvantages.
Obstacl e may not provi de the desi red effect.
Enemy uni ts can more easi l y bypass i ndi vi dual l y marked
mi nefi el ds i n a fi x- or bl ock-obstacl e group.
MarkingObstacleGroups
Advantages.
FM 20-32
Obstacl e i s more l i kel y to provi de the desi red effect.
The enemy cannot easi l y di scern i ndi vi dual mi nefi el ds and deci de
when to empl oy breach assets i n a fi x-or bl ock-effect mi nefi el d.
Di sadvantages.
Fri endl y patrol s cannot cl earl y see i f the mi nefi el d i s tampered
wi th unl ess they are wi thi n the peri meter fence.
Figure 2-24. Minefield marking
Mines
Mines
Warning sign for areas containing mines
Red
White
Barbwire fencing for a minefield
Concertina fencing for a minefield
2
0
c
m
28 cm
MINES
FM 20-32
Tacti cal l anes need to pass through the enti re obstacl e group.
Fr i en dl y u n i ts pa s s i n g th r ou gh th e l a n es wi l l be s l owed
consi derabl y.
MINEFIELD TURNOVER
Once an obstacl e group i s compl eted, the empl aci ng uni t conducts mi nefi el d or
obstacl e tur nover wi th the owni ng uni t. Occasi onal l y, the owni ng uni t wi l l
tr ansfer r esponsi bi l i ty for a mi nefi el d to another uni t. Mi nefi el d or obstacl e
tur nover ensures that the commander of the owni ng uni t i s fami l i ar wi th the
mi nefi el d and under stands hi s r esponsi bi l i ti es concer ni ng i t. Tur nover i s
conducted whether or not there are l anes/gaps to be cl osed. Mi nefi el d turnover
i s a must; the ti me and the l ocati on for the turnover i s establ i shed duri ng the
i ni ti al si ti ng coordi nati on.
Th e en gi n eer mu s t v er ba l l y a d d r es s th e f ol l owi n g i t ems wi t h th e
overwatchi ng company/team:
I ntel l i gence.
Provi de an update on enemy acti vi ty forward of the mi nefi el d.
Obstacle
Effect
Individual Minefield Obstacle Group
Disrupt
Turn
Fix
Block
Figure 2-25. Marking of minefields and obstacle groups
FM 20-32
Di scuss expected enemy reconnai ssance efforts.
Bri ef on l ocal , fri endl y, and enemy si tuati ons.
Maneuver.
Di scuss obstacl e protecti on agai nst enemy di smounted patrol s.
Recommend that the maneuver uni t conducts secur i ty/patr ol s to
protect the mi nefi el d duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty.
Di scuss fi re control measures.
Mobi l i ty/survi vabi l i ty.
Di scuss the obstacl e's i ntended effect on enemy maneuver.
Di scuss the mi nefi el d front and depth and wal k/ri de the mi nefi el d
trace. Provi de gri d coordi nates of the mi nefi el d trace.
Di scuss mi nefi el d composi ti on.
Di scuss fri endl y mi nefi el d marki ng.
Di scuss l ane/gap cl osure, i f appl i cabl e. Confi rm the si gnal or the
acti vi ty that i ni ti ates l ane cl osure.
Trai n uni ts on how to cl ose l anes. Thi s may mean trai ni ng the uni t
on empl aci ng conventi onal mi nes or usi ng the MOPMS.
Fi re support.
Update the company FI ST on gri d coordi nates for the mi nefi el d
trace.
Di scuss i ndi rect fi res coveri ng the mi nefi el d.
CSS. Provi de mi nes/materi al requi red to cl ose l anes/gaps and ensure
that al l necessary materi al i s avai l abl e and prepared.
C
2
.
Transfer graphi cs and documentati on (mi nefi el d records,
demol i ti on-target fol ders, or other wri tten records).
Report compl eti on of the turnover to the hi gher engi neer and
supported uni t headquarters.
Compl ete an obstacl e-turnover report (a sampl e work sheet i s
s h own i n Fi gu r e 2-26, page 2-54) an d s u bmi t i t to h i gh er
headquarters.
Forward the wri tten mi nefi el d report and record (DA Form 1355 or
1355-1-R) to the next hi gher commander common to both uni ts.
FM 20-32
OBSTACLE-TURNOVER/TRANSFER REPORT
OBSTACLE DATA
Obstacle Number Obstacle Type Emplacing Authority
Obstacle Location (8-digit UTM
grid to center of mass)
Obstacle Effect Emplacing Unit
TURNOVER DATA
Transferring Unit Receiving Unit Date/Time of Transfer
Next Higher Command Common to Both Date Obstacle Emplaced
TURNOVER CHECKLIST
Intelligence.
Enemy activity forward of the obstacle (discuss enemy recon and breaching efforts).
Friendly activity in the vicinity of the obstacle (discuss LOGPAC, recon, counterrecon maneuver).
Maneuver.
Obstacle protection against enemy recon/breaching (discuss overwatch, counterrecon patrols, sunrise
sweep).
Location of TRPs and indirect-fire targets (point out location on graphics and terrain).
Rearward/forward passage of lines (discuss planned and routine activity around the obstacle).
Mobility/survivability.
Obstacle trace (discuss corner grids on map and point them out on terrain).
Obstacle marking (rear side, all four sides, fence, signs, HEMMS poles, or no marking).
Obstacle composition.
Location of gaps/lanes.
Method of closing gaps/lane (MOPMS, ADAM, RAAM, conventional mines).
Location of material to close gaps/lanes.
CSS. Planned casualty evacuation and supply routes in the vicinity of the obstacle.
C
2
.
DA Form 1355 or 1355-1-R, dated ________, transferred to receiving unit.
Obstacle overlay, dated ________, transferred to receiving unit.
Target folder, dated ________, preparing headquarters ______________, transferred to receiving unit.
Higher headquarters (transferring, receiving, and emplacing units) notified of transfer.
DA Form 1355 or 1355-1-R forwarded. (NOTE: Three copies are required for transferone to
transferring unit, one to receiving unit, and one to next higher headquarters common to both.)
CERTIFICATION
The undersigned certify that the receiving unit has assumed full responsibility for the obstacle indicated
above. The unit commander understands all the information related to the obstacle, the obstacle intent, and
his responsibility to transfer or recover the obstacle upon his departure.
___________________________________ ___________________________________
Signature of Transferring Unit Commander Signature of Receiving Unit Commander
___________________________________ ___________________________________
Printed Name and Rank Printed Name and Rank
Figure 2-26. Sample obstacle-turnover work sheet
FM 20-32
MINEFIELD INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Mi nes l eft i n the ground for a l ong ti me may deteri or ate and mal functi on for
one or mor e of the fol l owi ng reasons:
Moi sture may have entered the i gni ter or the body of the mi ne and
ei ther neutr al i zed the expl osi ve or cor r oded the metal par ts. Such
acti ons may be aggr avated by l ocal factor s (soi l aci di ty or wi de
temperature swi ngs).
Frost or heat may have subjected the mi ne to mechani cal strai n and
caused di storti on.
I nsects or vegetati on may have caused obstructi ons.
Ani mal s may have turned mi nes over or detonated them.
Techni cal i nspecti ons shoul d onl y be made by exper i enced engi neer s or
expl osi ve or dnance di sposal (EOD) per sonnel . When a mi nefi el d deter i or ates
bel ow the operati ng l evel , addi ti onal mi ne stri ps/rows are added to restore i ts
effecti veness. They are si ted to the front or the rear of the exi sti ng mi nefi el d to
i ncrease i ts depth. New mi ne stri ps/rows are treated as separate mi nefi el ds.
Techn i cal i nspecti on s of mi nefi el ds ar e n or mal l y done at th r ee-mon th
i nterval s. They are done more frequentl y duri ng extreme weather condi ti ons.
Detai l ed i nfor mati on on mi ne i nspecti ons can be found i n Techni cal Manual
(TM) 9-1345-203-12.
FM 20-32
Scatterable Mines and Mine Delivery Systems 3-1
Chapter 3
Scatterable Mines and Mine Delivery Systems
SCATMI NEs ar e l ai d wi thout r egar d to a cl assi cal patter n. They ar e
desi gned to be del i ver ed or di spensed r emotel y by ai r cr aft, ar ti l l er y,
mi ssi l e, or a gr ound di spenser. Al l US SCATMI NEs have a l i mi ted acti ve
l i fe and sel f-destruct after that l i fe has expi red. The durati on of the acti ve
l i fe vari es wi th the type of mi ne and the del i very system.
SCATMI NE systems enabl e a tacti cal commander to empl ace mi nefi el ds
r api dl y i n enemy-hel d ter r i tor i es, contami nated ter r i tor i es, and i n most
other ar eas wher e i t i s i mpossi bl e for engi neer s to empl ace conventi onal
mi nefi el ds. Some systems al l ow for r api d empl acement of mi nefi el ds i n
fr i endl y areas. As wi th al l mi nefi el ds and obstacl es, scatterabl e mi nefi el ds
are an engi neer r esponsi bi l i ty.
Based on the tacti cal pl an, the maneuver commander 's staff engi neer
determi nes the mi nefi el d l ocati on, si ze, densi ty, and empl acement and SD
ti mes. Wi th thi s i nfor mati on and a thor ou gh un der s tandi n g of the
av ai l abl e s y s tems, h e can th en r ecommen d th e ty pe of mi n efi el d
(conventi onal or scatter abl e) to be empl aced. I f a scatter abl e mi nefi el d i s
s el ected, h e r ecommen ds th e del i v er y s y s tem an d coor di n ates th e
mi nefi el d wi th appropri ate staff offi cer s.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Most US SCATMI NEs have si mi l ar char acter i sti cs. SCATMI NEs ar e much
smal l er i n si ze and wei ght than conventi onal mi nes. For exampl e, a standard
AT SCATMI NE wei ghs appr oxi matel y 1.8 ki l ogr ams and has 600 gr ams of
expl osi ve; an M15 conventi onal mi ne wei ghs 13.5 ki l ogr ams and has 10
ki l ogr ams of expl osi ve. Ar mi ng mechani sms, ar mi ng ti mes, and SD ti mes of
SCATMI NEs di ffer based on the di spensi ng system.
ANTIPERSONNEL MINES
Ther e ar e two gener al categor i es of AP SCATMI NEswedge-shaped and
cyl i ndr i cal (Fi gur e 3-1, page 3-2). Tabl e 3-1, page 3-2, summar i zes the
characteri sti cs of each AP SCATMI NE.
This chapter implements STANAG 2990.
C2, FM 20-32
3-2 Scatterable Mines and Mine Delivery Systems
Figure 3-1. AP SCATMINEs
Table 3-1. Characteristics of AP SCATMINEs
Mine
Delivery
System
DODIC
Arming
Time
Fuse Warhead AHD SD Time
Explosive
Weight
Mine
Weight
Number
of Mines
M67 155-mm
artillery
(ADAM)
D502 Within 1
min after
ground
impact
Trip
wire
Bounding
frag
20% 4 hr 21 g
Comp A5
540 g 36 per
M731
projectile
M72 155-mm
artillery
(ADAM)
D501 Within 1
min after
ground
impact
Trip
wire
Bounding
frag
20% 48 hr 21 g
Comp A5
540 g 36 per
M692
projectile
BLU 92/B USAF
(Gator)
K291
K292
K293
2 min Trip
wire
Blast frag 100% 4 hr
48 hr
15 days
540 g
Comp B4
1.44 kg 22 per
CBU 89/B
dispenser
M77 MOPMS K022 2 min Trip
wire
Blast frag 0% 4 hr
(recycle
up to 3
times)
540 g
Comp B4
1.44 kg 4 per
M131
dispenser
Volcano Ground/
air
K045 2 min Trip
wire
Blast frag 0% 4 hr
48 hr
15 days
540 g
Comp B4
1.44 kg 1 per M87
canister
Cover
Trip-wire
port
S&A mechanism
Main
charge
Booster
pellet
Fragmenting
body
Trip-wire
port
Power
supply
12 cm
6 cm
FM 20-32
The M67 and M72 AP SCATMI NEs are wedge-shaped and di spensed from an
ADAM pr ojecti l e, whi ch i s a speci al 155-mi l l i meter ar ti l l er y muni ti on. Each
mi ne wei ghs 540 grams and i s 7 centi meters hi gh.
The M74, BLU 92/B, M77, and Vol cano AP SCATMI NEs are al l cyl i ndri cal i n
s h ape. Th ey ar e 6 cen ti meter s h i gh an d 12 cen ti meter s i n di ameter.
Cyl i ndri cal AP SCATMI NEs ki l l enemy sol di ers through the combi ned effects
of bl ast and fr agmentati on. Each mi ne contai ns 540 grams of composi ti on B4
as i ts mai n char ge. The char ge detonates upon actuati on and shatter s the
mi nes metal casi ng to pr oduce shr apnel . Shr apnel i s pr opel l ed upwar d and
outwar d fr om the mi ne and pr oduces fatal casual ti es to a di stance of 15
meter s. Each mi ne has ei ght tr i p wi r es (four on the top and four on the
bottom) that depl oy after ground i mpact up to 12 meters from the mi ne. Tr i p
wi res are si mi l ar i n appearance to very fi ne thread; they are ol i ve-drab green
i n col or and wei ghted at the fr ee end. A tensi on of 405 gr ams appl i ed to one
tr i p wi r e i s enough to cr eate a br eak i n the el ectr i cal ci r cui t and cause the
mi ne to detonate.
ANTITANK MINES
Al l AT SCATMI NEs (Fi gure 3-2) have si mi l ar functi onal characteri sti cs. They
ar e cyl i ndr i cal i n shape, wei gh appr oxi matel y 1.8 ki l ogr ams, contai n 585
gr ams of cy cl on i te (RDX) ex pl os i v e as th e mai n ch ar ge, an d h av e a
magneti cal l y i nduced fuse. The char acter i sti cs of each AT SCATMI NE ar e
summari zed i n Tabl e 3-2, page 3-4.
Figure 3-2. AT SCATMINE
6 cm
Booster
charge
Clearing
charge
S&A
mechanism
Plate
Main
charge
Plate
12 cm
C2, FM 20-32
AT SCATMI NEs are desi gned to produce a K-Ki l l i nstead of an M-Ki l l . They
pr oduce a ki l l by usi ng an SFF war head (cr eated fr om an M-S pl ate). The
war head penetr ates the vehi cl e's bel l y ar mor, and spal l i ng metal fr om the
vehi cl e (caused by the mi ne bl ast) ki l l s occupants i nstantl y. Even though the
cr ew i s k i l l ed, the dr i ve tr ai n may be undamaged and th e veh i cl e may
conti nue to move. On enemy tanks wi th autol oaders, the detonati on of rounds
i n the bel l y-mounted ammuni ti on car ousel i s ver y l i kel y. The mi ne may not
achi eve a ki l l when the track of an armored vehi cl e runs di rectl y over i t.
The magneti c fuse i s desi gned to detonate as the magneti c fi el d changes over
the mi ne. The warhead i s bi di recti onal , meani ng that i t can fi re fr om the top
or the bottom. AHDs ar e bui l t i nto 20 per cent of M70, M73, and M75 mi nes.
Al though Vol cano, M76, and BLU 91/B mi nes do not have AHDs, they may
detonate when moved, because the mi ne may sense a si gni fi cant change from
i ts ori gi nal ori entati on.
Due to thei r smal l si ze, the r educed expl osi ve, and the possi bi l i ty of l andi ng
wi th an i mpr oper or i entati on (on thei r si de or at an angl e), AT SCATMI NEs
have l ess chance of destr oyi ng a vehi cl e than a conventi onal ful l -wi dth AT
mi ne. An ar mor ed vehi cl e wi l l not al ways be destr oyed after an encounter
wi th an AT SCATMI NE. Fur ther, the effecti veness of SCATMI NEs i n water
obstacl es i s reduced even mor e, because 5 centi meter s of water pr events the
for mati on of th e M-S sl u g. Al though th e bl as t wav e i s accen tu ated by
under water pl acement (attacki ng hatches and cover s), mi ni ng of banks and
approaches i s recommended i nstead.
Table 3-2. Characteristics of AT SCATMINEs
Mine
Delivery
System
DODIC
Arming
Time
Fuse Warhead AHD SD Time
Explosive
Weight
Mine
Weight
Number
of Mines
M73 155-mm
artillery
(RAAM)
D503 Within 1
min after
ground
impact
Magnetic M-S plate 20% 48 hr 585 g RDX 1.7 kg 9 per
M718
projectile
M70 155-mm
artillery
(RAAM)
D509 Within 1
min after
ground
impact
Magnetic M-S plate 20% 4 hr 585 g RDX 1.7 kg 9 per
M741
projectile
BLU 91/B USAF
(Gator)
K291
K292
K293
2 min Magnetic M-S plate NA 4 hr
48 hr
15 days
585 g RDX 1.7 kg 72 per
CBU 89/B
dispenser
M76 MOPMS K022 2 min Magnetic M-S plate NA 4 hr
(recycle
up to 3
times)
585 g RDX 1.7 kg 17 per
M131
dispenser
Volcano Ground/
air
K045 2 min
30 sec
Magnetic M-S plate NA 4 hr
48 hr
15 days
585 g RDX 1.7 kg 5 per M87
canister; 6
per
M87A1
canister
C2, FM 20-32
CAPABILITIES
FASTER RESPONSE
SCATMI NEs can be empl aced mor e rapi dl y than conventi onal mi nes, so they
pr ovi de a commander wi th gr eater fl exi bi l i ty and mor e ti me to r eact to
changes i n si tuati ons. The commander can use SCATMI NEs to mai ntai n or
regai n the i ni ti ati ve by acti ng faster than the enemy. Usi ng SCATMI NEs al so
hel ps preserve scarce mi ne resources.
REMOTE PLACEMENT
Al l SCATMI NEs are remotel y empl aced. Thi s enhances battl efi el d agi l i ty and
al l ows the maneuver commander to empl ace mi nes r api dl y to best expl oi t
enemy weaknesses. SCATMI NEs can be used as si tuati onal obstacl es or to
attack enemy for mati ons di r ectl y thr ough di sr upt, fi x, tur n , and bl ock
obstacl es. Moder n fusi ng, sensi ng, and AHDs al l ow SCATMI NEs to better
defeat enemy attempts to reduce the mi nefi el d.
INCREASED TACTICAL FLEXIBILITY
Upon expi r ati on of the SD ti me, the mi nefi el d i s cl ear ed and the commander
can move thr ough an ar ea that was pr evi ousl y deni ed to enemy or fr i endl y
for ces. I n many cases, the SD per i od may be set at onl y a few hour s. Thi s
feature al l ows for effecti ve counterattacks to the enemy's fl ank and rear areas.
EFFICIENCY
SCATMI NEs can be empl aced by a var i ety of del i very methods. They can be
depl oyed by fi xed-wi ng ai r cr aft, hel i copter s, ar ti l l er y, manpack, or gr ound
vehi cl es. They sati sfy the hi gh mobi l i ty r equi r ements of moder n war far e.
Manpower, equi pment, and tonnage are reduced for thei r empl acement.
INCREASED LETHALITY
AT SCATMI NEs uti l i ze an SFF that i s created from two M-S pl ate charges to
produce a ful l -wi dth ki l l . I n si mpl e terms, a metal pl ate i s formed i nto a hi gh-
vel oci ty sl ug that punches a hol e i n the bel l y of a tank. The effect produces an
M-Ki l l agai nst the vehi cl es engi ne, tr ack, or dr i ve tr ai n; or i t pr oduces a K-
Ki l l when the on -boar d ammuni ti on i s set off and the cr ew i s k i l l ed or
i ncapaci tated or the vehi cl es weapon system i s destr oyed. AT SCATMI NEs
ar e desi gned to destr oy any tank i n the wor l d. I n or der to for m an SFF, the
mi ne r equi r es a cer tai n standoff between the vehi cl e and the tar get. Mi nes
must al so be near l y per pendi cul ar to the tar get (l ayi ng on ei ther si de). The
M-S pl ate i s actual l y two pl atesone faci ng the top of the mi ne and one faci ng
the bottom. Thi s ensures that i t wi l l successful l y attack the target whi l e l yi ng
on ei ther si de.
AP SCATMI NEs are actuated by a tri p wi re and uti l i ze a bl ast-fragmentati on
warhead.
LIMITATIONS
EXTENSIVE COORDINATION
Because SCATMI NEs are a very dynami c weapon system, great care must be
taken to ensur e that proper coordi nati on i s made wi th hi gher, adjacent, and
C2, FM 20-32
subor di nate uni ts. To pr event fr i endl y casual ti es, al l affected uni ts must be
noti fi ed of the l ocati on and the durati on of scatterabl e mi nefi el ds. Recordi ng
and reporti ng procedures for SCATMI NEs are di scussed i n detai l i n Chapter 8,
and they were speci fi cal l y desi gned to mi ni mi ze fri endl y casual ti es.
PROLIFERATION OF TARGETS
SCATMI NEs may be r egar ded by some commander s as easy sol uti ons to
tacti cal probl ems. Target requests must be careful l y eval uated, and a pri ori ty
system must be establ i shed because i ndi scr i mi nate use of weapon systems
wi l l r esul t i n r api d depl eti on of a uni t's basi c l oad. Contr ol l ed suppl y r ates
(CSRs) wi l l probabl y be a constrai nt i n al l theaters.
VISIBILITY
SCATMI NEs are hi ghl y effecti ve, especi al l y when fi res and obscurants strai n
the enemys C
2
. SCATMI NEs l ay on the sur face of the gr ound, but they ar e
rel ati vel y smal l and have natural col ori ng.
ACCURACY
SCATMI NEs cannot be l ai d wi th the same accur acy as conventi onal mi nes.
Remotel y del i ver ed SCATMI NE systems ar e as accur ate as conventi onal
arti l l ery-del i vered or tacti cal ai rcraft-del i vered muni ti ons.
ORIENTATION
Between 5 and 15 per cent of SCATMI NEs wi l l come to r est on thei r edges;
mi nes wi th spr i ng fi nger s wi l l be i n the l ower per centi l e. I f ther e i s mud or
snow mor e than 10 centi meter s deep, the number wi l l be i n the hi gher
per centi l e. When empl oyi ng ADAMs or RAAMs i n mor e than 10 centi meters
of snow or mud, hi gh-angl e fi r e shoul d be used and the number of mi nes
i ncreased. AP mi nes may be l ess effecti ve i n snow, because the depl oyment of
tri p wi res i s hi ndered. Mel ti ng of the snow may al so cause the mi nes to change
posi ti ons and acti vate AHDs.
LIFE CYCLE
Al l SCATMI NEs have a si mi l ar l i fe cycl e, al though speci fi c ti mes vary based
on the SD ti me and the di spensi ng system.
For safety reasons, SCATMI NEs must recei ve two armi ng si gnal s at l aunch.
One si gnal i s usual l y physi cal (spi n, accel er ati on, or unstacki ng), and the
other i s el ectroni c. Thi s same el ectroni c si gnal acti vates the mi nes SD ti me.
Mi nes start thei r safe-separati on countdown (armi ng ti me) when they recei ve
ar mi ng si gnal s. Thi s al l ows the mi nes to come to r est after di spensi ng and
al l ows the mi ne di spenser to exi t the ar ea safel y. Tabl e 3-1, page 3-2, and
Tabl e 3-2, page 3-4, show armi ng ti mes for i ndi vi dual SCATMI NEs.
Mi nes are ar med after the ar mi ng ti me expi res. The fi r st step i n armi ng i s a
sel f-test to ensure proper ci rcui try. Approxi matel y 0.5 percent of mi nes fai l the
sel f-test and sel f-destruct i mmedi atel y.
After the sel f-test, mi nes remai n acti ve unti l thei r SD ti me expi res or unti l they
are encountered. Mi nes actual l y sel f-destruct at 80 to 100 percent of thei r SD
time. The ti me peri od from when the mines begi n to sel f-destruct and when they
C2, FM 20-32
fi ni sh i s cal l ed the SD wi ndow (Tabl e 3-3). No mi nes shoul d remai n acti ve after
the SD time has been reached. Two to five percent of US SCATMI NEs fai l to sel f-
destr uct as i ntended. Any mi nes found after the SD ti me must be tr eated as
unexpl oded or dnance (UXO). For exampl e, mi nes wi th a 4-hour SD ti me wi l l
actual l y start sel f-destructi ng at 3 hours and 12 mi nutes. When the 4-hour SD
time i s reached, no unexploded mines shoul d exi st.
LETHALITY AND DENSITY
LETHALITY AND TACTICAL-OBSTACLE EFFECT
Scatter abl e mi n efi el ds ar e empl oy ed to r edu ce th e en emy 's abi l i ty to
maneuver, mass, and r ei nfor ce agai nst fr i endl y for ces. They i ncr ease the
enemy's vul ner abi l i ty to fi r es by pr oduci ng speci fi c obstacl e effects (di sr upt,
fi x, turn, and bl ock) on the enemy's maneuver. To achi eve thi s ai m, i ndi vi dual
mi nefi el ds must be empl aced wi th var yi ng degr ees of l ethal i ty. Dur i ng
empl acement, l ethal i ty i s vari ed pri mari l y by changi ng the mi nefi el d densi ty.
Ther efor e, ther e i s a di r ect cor r el ati on between the obstacl e effect and the
mi nefi el d densi ty. I n or der to achi eve the tacti cal -obstacl e effect, use the
fol l owi ng gui dance when sel ecti ng mi nefi el d densi ty:
Di srupt.
Low densi ty.
Probabi l i ty of encounter: 40 to 50 percent.
Li near densi ty: 0.4 to 0.5 mi ne per meter.
Fi x.
Medi um densi ty.
Li near densi ty: 0.5 to 0.6 mi ne per meter.
Turn.
Hi gh densi ty.
Table 3-3. SD windows
SD Time SD Window Begins
4 hours 3 hours 12 minutes
48 hours 38 hours 24 minutes
5 days 4 days
15 days 12 days
FM 20-32
Li near densi ty: 0.9 to 1.1 mi nes per meter.
Bl ock.
Hi gh densi ty.
Probabi l i ty of encounter: 85+ percent.
Li near densi ty: More than 1.1 mi nes per meter.
DENSITY
Densi ty i s nor mal l y expr essed as l i near or ar ea. For conventi onal mi nes,
l i near densi ty i s nor mal l y used and i s expr essed i n the aver age number of
mi nes per meter of mi nefi el d fr ont. For SCATMI NE systems, ar ea densi ty i s
nor mal l y used and i s expr essed as the aver age number of mi nes per squar e
meter. Si nce SCATMI NE systems normal l y empl oy a preset combi nati on of AT
and AP mi nes, the ar ea densi ty i ncl udes both. For exampl e, a scatter abl e
mi nefi el d wi th an ar ea densi ty of 0.006 mi ne per square meter may have an
AT densi ty of 0.004 AT mi ne per square meter and an AP densi ty of 0.002 AP
mi n e per squ ar e meter. Du e to th e v ar y i n g di men si on s of s catter abl e
mi nefi el ds that can be cr eated by the di ffer ent types of empl oyment devi ces,
the exact densi ty of a scatter abl e mi nefi el d cannot be deter mi ned. However,
an esti mate of the average densi ty can be determi ned by usi ng the fol l owi ng
formul as:
Li near densi ty equal s the number of mi nes di vi ded by the mi nefi el d
front.
Area densi ty equal s the number of mi nes di vi ded by the mi nefi el d
area.
Area densi ty can be converted to l i near densi ty by mul ti pl yi ng the
ar ea densi ty by the mi nefi el d depth. (NOTE: Converting area
density to linear density is not always accurate due to the
spacebetween minefield strips.)
EXAMPLE: A 650- by 200-meter Gator mi nefi el d contai ns 564 mi nes (432 AT
and 132 AP).
Area densi ty: 564 (200 x 650) = 0.004 mi ne per square meter.
AT area densi ty: 432 (200 x 650) = 0.003 mi ne per square meter.
number of mines
minefield front
--------------------------------------- - mines per meter =
number of mines
front depth
--------------------------------------- - mines per square meter =
area density minefield depth linear density =
FM 20-32
AP area densi ty: 132 (200 x 650) = 0.001 mi ne per square meter.
Li near densi ty: 564 650 = 0.87 mi ne per meter.
AT l i near densi ty: 432 650 = 0.67 mi ne per meter.
AP l i near densi ty: 132 650 = 0.2 mi ne per meter.
COMMAND AND CONTROL
Du e to th e del i v er y mean s, C
2
of SCATMI NEs i s mor e compl ex th an
conventi onal mi nes. SCATMI NEs ar e very dynami c weapon systems because
they can be r api dl y empl aced and then cl ear ed vi a thei r SD capabi l i ty. Al so,
the physi cal boundar y of a scatterabl e mi nefi el d i s not cl ear l y defi ned. These
char acter i sti cs r equi r e i mpeccabl e communi cati ons and coor di nati on to
ensure that al l fri endl y uni ts know where mi nes are l ocated, when they wi l l be
effecti ve, and when they wi l l sel f-destruct.
AUTHORITY
Th e cor ps comman der h as empl acemen t au th or i ty for al l s catter abl e
mi nefi el ds wi thi n the cor ps AO. He may del egate thi s author i ty to l ower
echel ons accordi ng to the gui del i nes contai ned i n Tabl e 3-4.
Bas ed on h ow th e commander wan ts to sh ape the battl efi el d, he mus t
speci fi cal l y del egate or wi thhol d the authori ty to empl oy SCATMI NE systems.
The commander 's gui dance concer ni ng SCATMI NEs i s found i n the uni ts
OPORD/oper ati on pl an (OPLAN). Addi ti onal i nformati on i s i ncl uded i n thei r
engi neer and fi re-support annexes, i f used.
Due to the compl ete control a commander has over the MOPMS, empl acement
author i ty gui del i nes do not appl y to the MOPMS. I t i s i mpr acti cal for the
Table 3-4. Emplacement authority
System Characteristics Emplacement Authority
Ground- or artillery-delivered, with SD time greater
than 48 hours (long duration)
The corps commander may delegate emplacement
authority to division level, who may further delegate
it to brigade level.
Ground- or artillery-delivered, with SD time of 48
hours or less (short duration)
The corps commander may delegate emplacement
authority to division level, who may further delegate
it to brigade level, who may further delegate it to TF
level.
Aircraft-delivered (Gator), regardless of SD time Emplacement authority is normally at corps,
theater, or army command level, depending on who
has air-tasking authority.
Helicopter-delivered (Volcano), regardless of SD
time
Emplacement authority is normally delegated no
lower than the commander who has command
authority over the emplacing aircraft.
MOPMS, when used strictly for a protective
minefield
Emplacement authority is usually granted to the
company, team, or base commander. Commanders
at higher levels restrict MOPMS use only as
necessary to support their operations.
FM 20-32
corps or bri gade commander to authori ze every MOPMS protecti ve mi nefi el d.
Ther efor e, author i ty to empl ace MOPMS mi nefi el ds i s speci fi cal l y del egated.
I n general , uni ts can empl ace MOPMS pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds as r equi r ed for
thei r own sel f-defense and report them as they do any protecti ve obstacl e. Any
MOPMS mi nefi el d used as par t of an obstacl e pl an must be r epor ted as a
scatterabl e mi nefi el d.
COORDINATION
Basi c responsi bi l i ti es of key commands, staff el ements, and uni ts are outl i ned
i n Tabl e 3-5. The fi re-support coordi nator (FSCOORD) i s i nvol ved i n pl anni ng
ar ti l l er y-del i ver ed (ADAM and RAAM) SCATMI NEs, and the ai r l i ai son
offi cer (ALO) i s i nvol ved i n pl anni ng ai r -del i ver ed (Gator and Vol cano)
SCATMI NEs. The engi neer has pr i mar y r esponsi bi l i ty for pl anni ng and
empl oyi ng SCATMI NE systems. I t i s vi tal that coordi nati on be conducted wi th
a l l u n i ts a n d s u bu n i ts th a t wi l l be ef f ected by th e empl oy men t of
SCATMI NEs. A scatterabl e mi nefi el d warni ng (SCATMI NWARN) wi l l be sent
to al l effected uni ts before the empl acement of the mi nefi el d (see Chapter 8 for
more detai l s).
EMPLOYMENT AND EMPLACEMENT
Empl oyment consi der ati ons and empl acement techni ques and pr ocedur es
di ffer for each type of SCATMI NE and del i very system. Thi s secti on di scusses
th e ch a r a cter i s ti cs of ea ch d el i v er y s y s t em a n d p r ov i d es t a cti ca l
con s i der ati on s for th e empl oy men t of each sy stem on th e battl efi el d.
Techni ques and pr ocedures for empl aci ng mi nefi el ds i ntended to di srupt, fi x,
Table 3-5. Coordination responsibilities
Element Responsibilities
G3/S3 with Engineer
FSCOORD/ALO
Plan and coordinate the minefield location, size, composition, density, SD
time, safety zone, and emplacement time
Designate and brief the emplacing unit
Incorporate the minefield and the safety zone into the obstacle plan
Receive and forward the scatterable minefield report and record
Disseminate information concerning the minefield in the SCATMINWARN to
adjacent and subordinate units prior to laying
Post operation maps with the minefield location, safety zone, and DTG of
the SD time; and disseminate the SCATMINWARN 1 hour prior to initiation
of the SD sequence
Emplacing Unit
Calculate the logistical requirements
Calculate the safety zone
Emplace the minefield
Report the amount of ammunition expended
Prepare and forward the scatterable minefield report and record to the
authorizing commander via appropriate channels
Maneuver Units
Be aware of the calculated safety-zone boundary and advise subunits of its
location
FM 20-32
tur n, and bl ock are al so di scussed; and they bui l d on tacti cal -obstacl e desi gn
pri nci pl es di scussed i n Chapter 2.
AREA-DENIAL ARTILLERY MUNITIONS AND REMOTE ANTIARMOR MINES
ADAMs and RAAMs are del i vered by a 155-mi l l i meter howi tzer (Fi gure 3-3).
Ther e ar e no speci al modi fi cati ons or adaptati ons necessar y for the fi r i ng
system. Mi nes are contai ned wi thi n a pr ojecti l e and are di spensed whi l e the
pr ojecti l e i s i n the ai r. The effecti ve r ange for the M109 howi tzer i s 17,500
meters, and for the M198 howi tzer, 17,740 meters.
The M692 (l ong-dur ati on) and the M731 (shor t-dur ati on) ADAM pr ojecti l es
del i ver AP mi nes wi th di ffer ent SD ti mes. Each ADAM r ound contai ns 36
mi nes. The M731/M731A1 r ound contai ns M72 AP mi nes wi th 4-hour SD
ti mes; the M692/M692A1 r ound contai ns M67 AP mi nes wi th 48-hour SD
ti mes. SD ti mes ar e pr eset dur i ng the manufactur i ng pr ocess and cannot be
changed.
The wedge-shaped ADAM i s a boundi ng-fragmentati on mi ne that depl oys up
to seven tensi on-acti vated tr i p wi r es 6 meter s away fr om the mi ne. After
gr ound i mpact, tr i p wi r es ar e r el eased and the mi ne i s ful l y ar med. The
ADAM contai ns a metal -j ack eted spher e that i s fi l l ed wi th 21 gr ams of
composi ti on A5 as i ts mai n char ge. A l i qui d-expl osi ve pr opel l i ng char ge
posi ti ons i tsel f at the bottom of the spher e after i mpact wi th the gr ound.
When the mi ne i s jar r ed or ti l ted, or when one of i ts tr i p wi r es r ecei ves a
Figure 3-3. Emplacement of ADAMs and RAAMs
FM 20-32
tensi on of at l east 405 grams, the sphere propel s upward 0.6 to 2.4 meters and
detonates. The l ethal casual ty radi us i s between 6 and 10 meters.
Th e M741 (sh or t-du r ati on ) an d the M718 (l on g-du r ati on ) RAAMs ar e
ar ti l l er y-del i ver ed AT mi nes. Each RAAM r ound contai ns ni ne mi nes. The
M741/M741A1 r ound contai ns M70 AT mi nes wi th 4-hour SD ti mes; the
M718/M718A1 round contai ns M73 AT mi nes wi th 48-hour SD ti mes. The SD
ti mes ar e pr eset dur i ng the manufactur i ng pr ocess and cannot be changed.
The RAAM mi ne uti l i zes an SFF war head, has a magneti c-i nfl uence fuse,
wei ghs 1.7 k i l ogr ams, and has a smal l (12 centi meter s i n di ameter by 6
centi meters i n hei ght) cyl i ndri cal shape.
The new model ADAM and RAAM mi nes (desi gnated by an A1 suffi x) have a
45-second ar mi ng ti me; the ol der model s have a 2-mi nute ar mi ng ti me. The
new model RAAM has a bui l t-i n featur e that defeats magneti c, si gnatur e-
dupl i cati ng breachi ng devi ces.
Employment
The ADAM and RAAM systems wer e desi gned to pr ovi de a fl exi bl e, r api d-
response mi ni ng capabi l i ty. These systems provi de the maneuver commander
wi th the capabi l i ty to empl ace mi nes di r ectl y on top of, i n fr ont of, or behi nd
enemy for ces. Thi s i s one of thei r greatest advantages. Thei r r esponsi veness
al l ows the mi ssi on to be executed qui ckl y and al l ows the commander to
effecti vel y i nfl uence a r api dl y changi ng battl efi el d. They al so al l ow the
commander to empl ace mi nefi el ds whi l e mai ntai ni ng maxi mum standoff from
the target. I n short, thei r empl acement does not requi re commi tti ng any force
(gr ound or ai r ) for war d. ADAM and RAAM systems may be used for the
fol l owi ng purposes:
Defense.
Devel op tar gets for l ong-range AT weapons.
Cl ose gaps and l anes i n other obstacl es.
Del ay or di srupt attacki ng forces.
Deny the enemy unrestri cted use of sel ected areas.
Di srupt movement and commi tment of second-echel on forces.
Di srupt and harass enemy C
2
, l ogi sti cs (excl udi ng medi cal ), and
stagi ng areas.
Rei nforce exi sti ng obstacl es.
Di srupt or del ay ri ver crossi ngs.
Offense.
Suppl ement fl ank reconnai ssance and securi ty forces to protect
fl anks al ong AAs.
Suppress and di srupt enemy securi ty el ements once contact has
been made.
Hi nder the wi thdrawal of enemy forces.
FM 20-32
Hi nder the abi l i ty of the enemy to rei nforce the objecti ve area.
The ti me and the number of r ounds r equi r ed to i nstal l effecti ve ADAMs and
RAAMs l i mi t thei r use. Thei r r ange i s l i mi ted to 17,500 or 17,740 meter s,
dependi ng on whi ch howi tzer (M109 or M198, respecti vel y) i s used. Many of
the deep-i nterdi cti on mi ssi ons that support force-projecti on doctri ne requi re a
gr eater di stance. Due to the l ar ge footpr i nt cr eated when the mi nefi el d i s
fi r ed, many mi nes wi l l scatter outsi de the pl anned mi nefi el d ar ea. I t i s
ther efor e necessar y to pl ot the safety zone i n or der to pr event fr atr i ci de. The
fi re-support el ement (FSE) i s responsi bl e for pl otti ng the safety zone, and the
staff engi neer shoul d be fami l i ar wi th the pr ocess and the expected r esul ts.
The staff engi neer ensur es that the safety zone i s pl otted on the tacti cal
command post (TCP)/TOC operati on overl ay.
Emplacement
ADAM and RAAM mi ni ng mi ssi ons ar e r equested thr ough normal ar ti l l er y-
suppor t channel s. Al though the actual number s var y based on the uni t and
the mi ssi on, a r epr esentati ve basi c l oad for an ar ti l l er y battal i on consi sts of
appr oxi matel y 32 ADAM and 24 RAAM (short SD ti me) r ounds per ar ti l l er y
pi ece. NOTE: The rounds with long SD times are normally used for
preplanned targets and are issued froman ammunition supply point
(ASP) on a mission-by-mission basis.
Once the pr oper author i zati on has been r ecei ved to empl oy the mi nes,
r equests for ADAMs and RAAMs ar e pr ocessed i n the same way as other
r equests for fi r e suppor t, i ncl udi ng tar gets of oppor tuni ty. Al l ocate enough
ti me for processi ng the request and compl eti ng fi ri ng procedures. Thi s ensures
that the enemy has not moved out of the target area before executi on. (FM 90-
7 contai ns mor e i nformati on on thi s process.) The use of ADAMs and RAAMs
for prepl anned fi r es r equi res cl ose coordi nati on among the Assi stant Chi ef of
Staff, G3 (Oper ati ons and Pl ans) (G3)/Oper ati ons and Tr ai ni ng Offi cer (US
Army) (S3), the staff engi neer, and FSE secti ons. Coordi nati on shoul d al so be
made wi th the S2 and the S3 duri ng the devel opment of the deci si on suppor t
templ ate (DST) to i denti fy the proper named areas of i nter est (NAI s), tar get
areas of i nterest (TAI s), tri gger poi nts, and deci si on poi nts.
There are two cri ti cal aspects when empl aci ng ADAM and RAAM mi nefi el ds:
Desi gni ng the mi nefi el d to achi eve the requi red effect.
Ensuri ng the techni cal correctness of resourci ng and del i veri ng the
mi nefi el d.
Th e fol l owi n g di s cu ss i on pr ov i des gen er al gu i dan ce for desi gn i n g th e
mi nefi el d to achi eve the desi r ed effect and for determi ni ng the safety zone to
assess the i mpact on maneuver. Appendi x H of FM 6-20-40 ser ves as the
pr i mar y sour ce for techni cal l y r esour ci ng and del i ver i ng ar ti l l er y-del i ver ed
mi nefi el ds.
ADAM and RAAM mi nefi el ds can be empl aced to achi eve di sr upt, fi x, tur n,
and bl ock effects based on the pr i nci pl es outl i ned i n Chapter 2. The engi neer
i s r esponsi bl e for deci di ng the r equi r ed l ocati on, the densi ty, the si ze, the
composi ti on, and the durati on of the mi nefi el d based on the tacti cal -obstacl e
pl an and the obstacl e r estr i cti ons of the hi gher uni t. The engi neer pr ovi des
FM 20-32
thi s i nfor mati on to the FSE. Tabl e 3-6 pr ovi des gui dance on the mi nefi el d
densi ty and si ze necessary to achi eve the desi red obstacl e effect.
The FSE deter mi nes al l the techni cal aspects for del i ver i ng the mi nefi el d,
such as the number of r ounds r equi r ed per ai m poi nt, the number of ai m
poi nts requi red, the si ze of the safety zone, and the ti me requi red to empl ace
mi nes. There i s a wi de vari ety of factors i nvol ved i n determi ni ng the number
of rounds, the si ze of the safety zone, and the empl acement ti me. These factors
ar e the range-to-target ti me, the battery-to-mi nefi el d angl e, the hi gh- or l ow-
angl e tr ajector y, and the method of fi r i ng (obser ver adjust or meteor ol ogi cal
data pl us vel oci ty err or [Met+VE] transfer ). The FSE must tel l the engi neer
whether the mi nefi el d mi ssi on i s feasi bl e. Feasi bi l i ty i s based on the number
of r ounds avai l abl e, the scheme of i ndi r ect fi r es, and the avai l abi l i ty of
arti l l ery tubes.
The engi neer i s pr i mar i l y concer ned wi th two techni cal aspects of del i ver y
pr ovi ded by the FSEth e safety zon e an d the empl acement ti me. The
engi neer uses the safety zone and the mi nefi el d durati on to assess the i mpact
of the mi nefi el d on the mobi l i ty requi rements of the scheme of maneuver. The
engi neer depi cts the safety zone on the obstacl e over l ay. He al so uses the
safety zone to i denti fy requi rements for mi nefi el d marki ng i f the uni t l eaves or
tur ns over the ar ea befor e the SD ti me. The engi neer and the FSE use the
empl acement ti me to synchr oni ze the del i ver y of the mi nefi el d wi th the
tacti cal pl an.
GATOR
The Gator (Fi gure 3-4) has a l onger range than any other SCATMI NE system.
I t pr ovi des a means to r api dl y empl ace mi nefi el ds anywher e that can be
r eached by tacti cal ai r cr aft. The Gator i s pr oduced i n two ver si onsthe
Uni ted States Ai r Force (USAF) CBU-89/B system that contai ns 94 mi nes (72
AT and 22 AP) per di spenser and the Uni ted States Navy (USN) CBU-78/B
system that contai ns 60 mi nes (45 AT and 15 AP) per di spenser.
The mi nes used wi th the Gator are the BLU-91/B AT mi ne and the BLU-92/B
AP mi ne. They ar e si mi l ar to the mi nes used wi th the Vol cano system. The
mi nes are capabl e of three fi el d-sel ectabl e SD ti mes (4 hours, 48 hours, and 15
days). Both types of mi nes ar e encased i n a pl asti c, squar e-shaped pr otecti ve
Table 3-6. RAAM and ADAM minefield density and size
Obstacle
Effect
RAAM ADAM
Width
(meters)
Depth
(meters)
Area
1
Linear
2
Area
1
Linear
2
Disrupt 0.001 0.2 0.0005 0.1 200 200
Turn 0.002 0.8 0.001 0.4 400 400
Fix 0.002 0.4 0.0005 0.1 200 200
Block 0.004 0.6 0.002 0.8 400 400
1
Area density = mines per square meter
2
Linear density = mines per meter
FM 20-32
casi ng that i s desi gned to ai d di sper si on and l essen gr ound i mpact upon
del i very.
The mi nes are contai ned i nsi de tacti cal muni ti on di spensers (TMDs) that are
attached under the wi ngs of hi gh-per formance, fi xed-wi ng ai r craft. The TMD
i s a USAF di s pen s er th at was des i gn ed for common u s e wi th cl u s ter
muni ti ons. The Gator i s compati bl e wi th the USAF A-10, F-4, F-15, F-16, B-1,
and B-52 ai rcraft and wi th the USN A-6, A-7, F-4, FA-18, and AV-8B ai rcraft.
The TMD i s r el eased i n the ai r and al l owed to fal l fr ee. Four l i near char ges
al on g th e edge of th e TMD cu t th e ou ter cas i n g, an d th e mi n es ar e
aer odynami cal l y di sper sed. The maxi mum del i ver y speed i s 800 knots at
al ti tudes of 75 to 1,500 meters. The area of mi nefi el d coverage depends on the
number of muni ti ons carri ed, the ai rcraft speed and al ti tude, and the al ti tude
where the fuse functi ons and opens the di spenser. The average area covered i s
approxi matel y 200 by 650 meters.
Employment
Gator mi ssi ons ar e pri mari l y used at l ong range to di srupt, fi x, turn, or bl ock
enemy troop movement beyond the fi re-support coordi nati on l i ne (FSCL). For
use i n i nter di cti on mi ssi ons beyond the FSCL, submi t r equests for Gator
mi ssi ons as ear l y as possi bl e to nomi nate targets for the theater ai r-taski ng
or der. Gator muni ti ons ar e wel l -sui ted for pl aci ng mi nefi el ds on speci fi c
concentr ati ons of for ces (ar ti l l er y, l ogi sti c, and C
2
) that ar e out of r ange of
conventi onal arti l l ery.
Figure 3-4. Gator SCATMINE system
FM 20-32
Whi l e the Gator can provi de cl ose combat support, deep-i nterdi cti on mi ni ng i s
expected to be i ts pri mary mi ssi on. Gator mi nefi el ds are normal l y empl oyed i n
conjuncti on wi th other deep i ndi rect-fi re attacks, such as area of i nterest (AI ),
battl efi el d ai r i nterdi cti on (BAI ), or joi nt ai r-attack team (JAAT). However, a
Gator mi nefi el d may be empl oyed i n conjuncti on wi th cl ose ai r support (CAS)
and covered by cl ose i ndi rect- and di rect-fi re systems. Typi cal mi ni ng mi ssi ons
i ncl ude
I sol ati ng objecti ves.
Counteri ng ADA/arti l l ery fi res.
Denyi ng terrai n.
Di srupti ng and di sorgani zi ng support acti vi ti es.
I nfl i cti ng personnel and equi pment l osses.
Th e exten ded r an ge of th e Gator sy s tem, togeth er wi th i ts s peed an d
r esponsi veness, makes i t one of the most i nfl uenti al weapon systems on the
deep battl efi el d. The pr i mar y l i mi tati ons of the Gator ar e the avai l abi l i ty of
hi gh-per for mance ai r cr aft to empl ace the mi nes and the systems r el ati ve
i neffecti veness on uni ts i n col umn. Duri ng any confl i ct, ai rcraft wi l l be i n hi gh
demand and wi l l not al ways be i mmedi atel y avai l abl e for a Gator mi ssi on
when r equi r ed. Communi cati ons may al so pose a pr obl em because mi ssi on
executi on i s a joi nt US Army-USAF operati on.
The Gator i s wel l sui ted to suppor t conti ngency oper ati ons and amphi bi ous
l andi ng oper ati ons i n an i mmatur e theater when ther e i s no danger to
fr i endl y for ces or host-nati on assets. Gator mi nefi el ds ar e one of the l i ght-
force commander's few durabl e, l ong-range anti armor weapons.
Emplacement
As an ai r cr aft-del i ver ed muni ti on, the Gator i s a corps asset. The Gator i s a
BAI mi ssi on and i s contr ol l ed by the tacti cal ai r contr ol center (TACC).
Mi ssi ons shoul d be r equested as ear l y as possi bl e (no l ater than 36 hour s i n
advance) thr ough fi r e-suppor t channel s to the corps FSE. As a mi ne system,
Gator mi ssi ons must be approved by corps. The corps FSE passes the mi ssi on
to the theater or ar my ai r headquar ter s to be i ncl uded on the theater ai r-
taski ng or der for executi on. I n suppor t of BAI or CAS, Gator sor ti es may be
al l ocated down to battal i on l evel , wi th fi nal control exerci sed by the battal i on
ALO. I mmedi ate Gator mi ssi ons can al so be r equested di r ectl y fr om the
maneuver uni ts TACC. The same r ecor ds and r epor ts appl i cabl e to other
SCATMI NE systems are used wi th the Gator mi ne system. Cl ose cooperati on
and coor di nati on among the G3/S3, the staff engi neer, and the ALO ar e
requi red for pl anni ng and executi ng Gator mi ssi ons.
As wi th ar ti l l ery-del i ver ed mi nefi el ds, the engi neer i s pr i mar i l y r esponsi bl e
for i denti fyi ng the mi nefi el d l ocati on, si ze, dur ati on, and densi ty. Mi nefi el d
densi ty i s vari ed by changi ng the ori entati on of the mi nefi el d wi th respect to
the tar get AA. Fi gure 3-5 i l l ustr ates how mi nefi el d or i entati on i s changed to
achi eve a fi x or bl ock effect. Normal l y, Gator i s empl oyed as a fi x obstacl e wi th
a fr ont of 650 meter s. Empl aci ng a fi x-obstacl e gr oup al ong a battal i on AA
(1,500 meters) requi res two Gator sorti es, each del i veri ng one mi nefi el d. Each
Gator mi nefi el d woul d have a front of 650 meter s and a depth of 200 meters.
C2, FM 20-32
The mi nefi el ds woul d be del i ver ed at di ffer ent l ocati ons so that the gr oup
covers the enti re AA and affects the enti re enemy battal i on.
VOLCANO
The Vol cano mul ti pl e-del i ver y mi ne system (Fi gur e 3-6, page 3-18) can be
di spensed from the ai r or on the ground. I t can be mounted on any 5-ton truck,
an M548 tr acked car go car r i er, a heavy expanded mobi l i ty tacti cal tr uck
(HEMTT), a pal l eti zed l oad system (PLS) fl at r ack, or a UH-60A Bl ackhawk
hel i copter. The Vol cano uses modi fi ed Gator mi nes and consi sts of four
components (Fi gur e 3-7, page 3-18)the mi ne cani ster, the di spenser, the
di spenser contr ol uni t (DCU), and the mounti ng har dwar e (ai r cr aft al so
requi re a jetti son ki t). The Vol cano uses M87 and M87A1 mi ne cani sters. The
M87 mi ne cani ster i s pr epackaged wi th fi ve AT mi nes, one AP mi ne, and a
pr opu l si on devi ce i n s i de a tube hou si ng. Th e M87A1 mi ne cani ster i s
prepackaged wi th si x AT mi nes and a propul si on devi ce. The mi xture of mi nes
i s fi xed and cannot be al ter ed. Mi nes ar e el ectr i cal l y connected wi th a web
that functi ons as a l ater al di sper si on devi ce as the mi nes exi t the cani ster.
Spr i ng fi nger s mounted on each mi ne pr event i t fr om comi ng to r est on i ts
edge. Al l cani ster s ar e capabl e of di spensi ng mi nes wi th 4-hour, 48-hour, and
15-day SD ti mes. The SD ti mes are fi el d-sel ectabl e pri or to di spensi ng and do
not requi re a change or modi fi cati on to the mi ne cani ster. The armi ng ti me i s
2 mi nutes 15 seconds for AT and AP mi nes. The r el oad ti me (not i ncl udi ng
movement ti me to the r el oad si te) for an exper i enced four -man cr ew i s
approxi matel y 20 mi nutes.
Figure 3-5. Gator minefield
Six Gator dispensers (72 AT and 22 AP mines each)
NOTE: Add 275 m to all dimensions for the safety zone.
650 m
200 m
432 AT and 132 AP mines
AA 2
AA 1
FIX
BLOCK
C2, FM 20-32
Figure 3-6. Volcano mine system
Figure 3-7. Volcano components
Vehicle mounting hardware
Aircraft mounting hardware
M139 dispenser DCU
M87-series
mine canister
C2, FM 20-32
The di spenser consi sts of an el ectr oni c DCU and four l auncher r acks. Four
racks can be mounted on a vehi cl e, and each rack can hol d 40 M87-seri es mi ne
cani ster s. The r ack s pr ovi de the str uctur al str ength and the mechani cal
suppor t requi red for l aunch and provi de the el ectr i cal i nter face between the
mi ne cani ster s and the DCU. Mounti ng har dwar e secur es the r acks to the
vehi cl e or the ai r cr aft. Mounti ng har dwar e for the Bl ackhawk i ncl udes a
jetti son subassembl y to propel the Vol cano racks and cani sters away from the
ai rcraft i n the event of an emergency.
The oper ator uses the DCU to contr ol the di spensi ng oper ati on el ectr i cal l y
fr om wi thi n the car r i er vehi cl e. The DCU pr ovi des contr ol s for the ar mi ng
sequence and the del i very speed and sets mi ne SD ti mes. The DCU al l ows the
operator to start and stop mi ne di spensi ng at anyti me. A counter on the DCU
i ndi cates the number of remai ni ng l oaded cani sters on each si de of the carri er.
Mi nes ar e di spensed fr om thei r cani ster s by an expl osi ve pr opel l i ng char ge.
For ground vehi cl es, the mi nes are di spensed 25 to 60 meters from the vehi cl e
at gr ound speeds of 8 to 90 kph. The aver age ti me to empl ace one gr ound
Vol cano l oad (160 cani sters) i s 10 mi nutes.
Employment
The pri mary mi ssi on of the Vol cano i s to provi de US forces wi th the capabi l i ty
to empl ace l arge mi nefi el ds rapi dl y under vari ed condi ti ons. The Vol cano can
be r api dl y attached to ai r or gr ound vehi cl es. I t i s used to empl ace tacti cal
mi nefi el ds; rei nfor ce exi sti ng obstacl es; cl ose l anes, gaps, and defi l es; pr otect
fl anks; and deny pr obabl e enemy ai r-defense si tes. Vol cano mi nefi el ds ar e
i deal for pr ovi di ng fl ank pr otecti on of advanci ng for ces and for oper ati ng i n
concert wi th ai r and ground caval ry uni ts on fl ank guard or screen mi ssi ons.
The ai r Vol cano i s the fastest method for empl aci ng l arge tacti cal mi nefi el ds.
When empl oyed by combat avi ati on el ements i n suppor t of maneuver uni ts,
cl ose coor di nati on between avi ati on and gr ound uni ts assur es that Vol cano-
di s pens ed mi n es ar e empl aced accur atel y an d qui ck l y. Al th ou gh mi ne
pl acemen t i s n ot as pr eci s e as i t i s wi th gr ou n d s y stems, ai r Vol can o
mi nefi el ds can be pl aced accur atel y enough to avoi d the danger i nher ent i n
mi nefi el ds del i vered by arti l l ery or jet ai r craft. Ai r Vol cano mi nefi el ds can be
empl aced i n fri endl y and enemy terri tory. They shoul d not be pl anned i n areas
of enemy obser vati on and fi r e because the hel i copter i s extr emel y vul ner abl e
whi l e fl yi ng at the steady al ti tude, the speed, and the path r equi r ed to
empl ace the mi nefi el d. The ai r Vol cano i s the best form of an obstacl e reserve
because a mi nefi el d can be empl aced i n mi nutes.
The gr ound Vol cano i s desi gned to empl ace l ar ge mi nefi el ds i n depth. I t i s
nor mal l y empl oyed by combat engi neer uni ts. These mounted di spensers are
pr i mar i l y used to empl ace tacti cal mi nefi el ds or i ented on enemy for ces i n
s u ppor t of man eu v er oper ati on s an d fr i en dl y AT fi r es. Th e s y s tem i s
vul ner abl e to di r ect and i ndi r ect fi r es, so i t must be pr otected when cl ose to
the FLOT. I t i s i deal for use as an obstacl e reserve, empl oyed when the enemy
reaches a deci si on poi nt that i ndi cates future movement. Obstacl es can then
be empl aced i n depth on the avenues the enemy i s usi ng, l eavi ng other
avenues open for fri endl y movement.
C2, FM 20-32
Emplacement
The pr i nci pl es and pr ocedur es of Vol cano empl acement ar e si gni fi cantl y
di fferent for ai r- and ground-del i very systems. Thi s secti on outl i nes the use of
the ground Vol cano system to empl ace di srupt, fi x, turn, and bl ock mi nefi el ds.
The ai r Vol cano system i s di scussed i n detai l i n Appendi x D. Both ai r and
gr ound Vol cano systems ar e capabl e of empl aci ng nonstandar d mi nefi el ds.
However, the empl acement nor ms bel ow str eaml i ne i denti fyi ng r esour ce
requi rements and conducti ng empl acement dri l l s.
Ai r and gr ound Vol cano systems empl ace a mi nefi el d wi th an aver age AT
l i near densi ty of 0.72 mi ne per meter and an AP l i near densi ty of 0.14 mi ne
per meter. These densi ti es may var y sl i ghtl y si nce some mi nes wi l l fai l the
ar mi n g s equ en ce an d s el f-des tr u ct 2 to 4 mi n u tes after di s pen s i n g.
Addi ti onal l y, some mi nes may not or i ent cor r ectl y, wi l l not del i ver thei r ful l
mi ne effect, and wi l l not pr oduce a K-Ki l l . The pr obabi l i ty of fai l i ng the
ar mi n g s equ en ce an d mi s or i en ti n g i s r el ati v el y s mal l an d does n ot
appr eci abl y degr ade the mi nefi el d's l ethal i ty. For tr acked vehi cl es, the AT
densi ty yi el ds mor e than 80 per cent pr obabi l i ty of encounter. Vol cano AT
mi nes do not have AHDs but are hi ghl y sensi ti ve to any movement once they
are armed. Any attempt to remove the mi nes wi l l l i kel y resul t i n detonati on.
The basi c si te l ayout i s extr emel y i mpor tant, and i t i s the same for ai r and
ground Vol cano mi nefi el ds. The l i mi ts of Vol cano mi nefi el ds are marked before
empl acement when the si tuati on (pl anned targets wi thi n the mai n battl e area
[MBA] of a defensi ve oper ati on) al l ows i t. The mi nefi el d i s not pr emar ked
when the si tuati on (offensi ve oper ati ons or si tuati onal obstacl es) does not
al l ow i t. I f the mi nes have not sel f-destructed, the mi nefi el d i s marked before
the uni t l eaves the ar ea or tur ns i t over to an adj acent uni t. Mi nefi el d
marki ng must i ncl ude the safety zone, whi ch i s 40 meters fr om the star t and
end poi nts and 80 meters to the l eft and ri ght of the centerl i ne. The start and
end poi nts of the stri p centerl i ne are marked based on the mi nefi el d front and
the number of str i ps. For a gr ound Vol cano mi nefi el d, gui de mar ker s ar e
empl aced al ong the path of the center l i ne but ar e offset l eft to al l ow the host
vehi cl e to r emai n on the center l i ne. When usi ng a gr ound-del i ver y system,
mi nefi el d marki ng must l eave a gap al ong each centerl i ne for vehi cl e entrance
and exi t. The number of gui de mar ker s used depends on the terr ai n and the
vi si bi l i ty. Gui de markers are not requi red for an ai r Vol cano mi nefi el d because
the pi l ot wi l l use the start and end poi nts of the centerl i ne as reference poi nts.
Fi gur e 3-8 i l l ustr ates the empl acement patter n for standar d di sr upt and fi x
mi nefi el ds usi ng the gr ound or ai r Vol cano. Di sr upt and fi x mi nefi el ds use
onl y one center l i ne to gi ve a mi nefi el d depth of 120 meter s (gr ound) or 140
meters (ai r), not i ncl udi ng the safety zone. The stri p centerl i ne i s 277 meters
(gr ound) or 278 meter s (ai r ) l ong. The host vehi cl e moves towar d the star t
poi nt, achi evi ng and mai ntai ni ng the ground or ai r speed sel ected on the DCU.
The operator depresses the l aunch swi tch on the DCU when the vehi cl e passes
the star t mar ker, and he stops di spensi ng mi nes when the vehi cl e passes the
end mar ker. The oper ator di spenses 40 cani ster s (20 on each si de) al ong the
centerl i ne. One ful l l oad of ground or ai r Vol cano empl aces four di srupt or fi x
mi nefi el ds. For ground empl acement, the vehi cl e moves out of the mi nefi el d,
mar ks the exi t, and wai ts a mi ni mum of 4 mi nutes befor e appr oachi ng the
mi nefi el d. Thi s del ay al l ows faul ty mi nes to sel f-destruct.
C2, FM 20-32
Tur n and bl ock mi nefi el ds (Fi gur e 3-9, page 3-22) ar e empl aced usi ng the
same basi c procedures as those used for di srupt and fi x mi nefi el ds. However,
turn and bl ock mi nefi el ds use two stri p centerl i nes al ong a front of 555 meters
(ground) or 557 meters (ai r). Duri ng si te l ayout, centerl i nes are separated by
at l east 320 meter s for both gr ound and ai r del i ver y. Thi s gi ves a total
mi nefi el d depth of 440 meter s (gr ound) or 460 meter s (ai r ). The oper ator
di spenses 80 cani sters al ong each centerl i ne (40 on each si de); therefore, turn
and bl ock mi nefi el ds r equi r e a total Vol cano l oad of 160 cani ster s. One ful l
l oad of ground or ai r Vol cano empl aces one turn or bl ock mi nefi el d. Wherever
possi bl e, two gr ound Vol canoes ar e empl oyed si mul taneousl y on tur n and
bl ock mi nefi el ds. When onl y one gr ound del i ver y system i s used, the cr ew
must wai t 4 mi nutes after di spensi ng the fi r st str i p befor e di spensi ng the
second stri p. Thi s al l ows mi nes that fai l the armi ng sequence to sel f-destruct.
For ai r del i v er y, two sor ti es ar e al so opti mal ; bu t demands for sor ti es
el sewher e i n the di vi si on may pr ecl ude the si mul taneous empl oyment of two
Bl ackhawks.
MODULAR PACK MINE SYSTEM
The MOPMS (Fi gur e 3-10, page 3-22) i s a man-por tabl e, 162-pound, box-
shaped mi ne di spenser that can be empl aced anyti me befor e di spensi ng
mi nes. The di spenser contai ns 21 mi nes (17 AT and 4 AP). The mi nes have
l eaf spr i ngs al ong thei r outer ci r cumfer ence that ar e desi gned to push the
mi nes i nto proper ori entati on i f they l and on thei r si de.
Each di spenser contai ns seven tubes; thr ee mi nes ar e l ocated i n each tube.
When di spensed, an expl osi ve pr opel l i ng char ge at the bottom of each tube
expel s mi nes thr ough the contai ner r oof. Mi nes ar e pr opel l ed 35 meter s from
the contai n er i n a 180-degr ee semi ci r cl e (Fi gu r e 3-11, page 3-23). The
resul ti ng densi ty i s 0.01 mi ne per squar e meter. The safety zone around one
contai ner i s 55 meters to the front and si des and 20 meters to the rear.
Figure 3-8. Volcano disrupt and fix minefields
5-ton 5-ton
20 m
35 m
35 m
20 m
Start or end marker
Guide marker
120 m (ground)
140 m (air)
277 m (ground)
278 m (air)
C2, FM 20-32
Figure 3-9. Volcano turn and block minefields
Figure 3-10. MOPMS
35 m
50 m
20 m
20 m
20 m
20 m
440 m
(ground)
460 m
(air)
120 m
320 m (minimum)
5 ton
5 ton
555 m (ground), 557 m (air)
Start or end marker
Guide marker
C2, FM 20-32
Mi nes are di spensed on command usi ng an M71 remote-control uni t (RCU) or
an el ectr oni c i ni ti ati ng devi ce. Once mi nes ar e di spensed, they cannot be
r ecover ed or r eused. I f mi nes ar e n ot di spensed, the contai n er may be
di sarmed and recovered for l ater use.
The RCU can r ecycl e the 4-hour SD ti me of the mi nes thr ee ti mes, for a total
durati on of approxi matel y 13 hours. Mi nes wi th a 4-hour SD ti me wi l l begi n to
sel f-destr uct at 3 hour s and 12 mi nutes. Al l acti ve mi nes must be r ecycl ed
wi thi n 3 hour s of the i ni ti al l aunch or l ast r ecycl e. Thi s featur e makes i t
possi bl e to keep the mi nefi el d empl aced for l onger per i ods i f necessar y. The
RCU ca n a l s o s el f -des tr u ct mi n es on comma n d, a l l owi n g a u n i t to
counter attack or wi thdr aw thr ough the mi nefi el d, as necessar y, r ather than
wai ti ng unti l the SD ti me has expi red. The RCU can control up to 15 MOPMS
contai ner s or gr oups of MOPMS contai ner s fr om a di stance of 300 to 1,000
meter s vi a separate pul se-coded fr equenci es. Coded frequenci es defeat threat
el ectroni c countermeasures di rected agai nst the system.
I f the M71 RCU i s unavai l abl e, a di rect wi r e l i nk i s used i n conjuncti on wi th
an M32, M34, or M57 bl asti ng machi ne. By usi ng the M32 10-cap bl asti ng
machi ne, one MOPMS di spenser can be detonated at a maxi mum r ange of
1,000 meters. The M34 50-cap bl asti ng machi ne can detonate one MOPMS at
a maxi mum range of 3,000 meters. (Due to i nternal resi stance, the maxi mum
r ange i s decr eased by 400 meter s for each addi ti onal MOPMS connected i n
seri es.) The M57 cl aymore-type FD can fi r e onl y one MOPMS at a maxi mum
Figure 3-11. MOPMS emplacement and safety zone
55 m
Area of mine coverage
35
m
55 m
20 m
Safety
zone
MOPMS dispenser
C2, FM 20-32
r ange of 100 meter s. When contr ol l ed by di r ect wi r e, MOPMS di spenser s
cannot be command-detonated, and the SD ti me cannot be recycl ed.
Employment
The MOPMS pr ovi des a sel f-contai ned, on-cal l mi nefi el d empl acement
capabi l i ty for al l forces. I t can be command-detonated, reused (i f mi nes are not
di spensed), and di rectl y empl aced to provi de compl ete and certai n coverage of
smal l or cr i ti cal tar gets. The abi l i ty to command-detonate mi nes or extend
thei r SD ti me provi des an added fl exi bi l i ty not currentl y avai l abl e wi th other
SCATMI NE systems. Wi th i ts uni que char acter i sti cs, the MOPMS i s i deal l y
sui ted for the fol l owi ng mi nefi el d mi ssi ons:
Empl aci ng hasty protecti ve mi nefi el ds.
Empl aci ng del i berate protecti ve mi nefi el ds (cases empl aced, but
mi nes not di spensed).
Empl aci ng nui sance mi nefi el ds (trai l s, crossi ng si tes, l andi ng zones
[LZs], drop zones [DZs], and road juncti ons).
Empl aci ng tacti cal di srupt and fi x mi nefi el ds.
Cl osi ng gaps and l anes i n exi sti ng mi nefi el ds.
Temporari l y cl osi ng counterattack routes.
Supporti ng ambushes.
Supporti ng mi l i tary operati ons i n bui l t-up areas (MOBA) operati ons.
When the MOPMS i s used to cl ose l anes, the contai ner i s posi ti oned and
di spensed by per sonnel i n an over watch posi ti on fr om a safe standoff. The
MOPMS i s i deal l y sui ted for cr eati ng a smal l di sr upt obstacl e i n suppor t of
engi neer s executi ng a r eser ved demol i ti on tar get. Engi neer s pr epar e the
r eser ved tar get for demol i ti on and empl ace sever al MOPMS uni ts on the
enemy si de, just out of tar get r ange. When the l ast for war d el ement passes
thr ough the tar get, the fi r i ng par ty detonates the char ges. I f somethi ng goes
wrong or the fi ri ng party needs more ti me, MOPMS mi nes can be di spensed to
di srupt the enemy before i t reaches the target.
The MOPMS pr ovi des l i ght and speci al for ces wi th a ver sati l e, compact
system for empl aci ng nui sance mi nefi el ds. I t can be used i n l ow-, mi d-, and
hi gh-i ntensi ty confl i cts and i n a vari ety of envi ronments. The MOPMS cannot
be tr anspor ted l ong di stances by hand because of i ts wei ght, so i ts use i s
l i mi ted.
Emplacement
MOPMS di spensers are i ssued as standard Cl ass V muni ti ons and are drawn
from an ASP on a mi ssi on-by-mi ssi on basi s. RCUs are organi zati onal i ssues of
equi pment and ar e assi gned to engi neer and combat ar ms uni ts. Due to the
WARNING
The MOPMS dispenser has seven launch tubes. If all seven tubes are not
visible after deployment, mines are jammed in the tube(s). In this event,
clear the area and notify EOD. The dispenser is considered to be UXO; do
not attempt to recover the dispenser.
C2, FM 20-32
wei ght of the system, i t wi l l nor mal l y be tr anspor ted by vehi cl e, as cl ose as
possi bl e to the empl acement si te, wher e i t can easi l y be hand-empl aced by
four sol di ers usi ng the four fol dout carryi ng handl es.
To ensur e that the mi nefi el d wi l l be di spensed i n the pr oper l ocati on, the
contai ner shoul d be careful l y si ted by the noncommi ssi oned offi cer i n char ge
(NCOI C). Several contai ners can be used together to provi de a greater area of
cover age or a hi gher mi ne densi ty. I f mi nes ar e not di spensed i mmedi atel y,
contai ner s shoul d be camoufl aged and, i f possi bl e, bur i ed. When pl aced i n
sand or snow, brace the contai ners to prevent them from movi ng duri ng mi ne
di spensi ng. Desi gnate a fi r i ng poi nt that gi ves the oper ator cl ear obser vati on
of the ar ea to be mi ned. Fi r i ng systems must be i nspected accor di ng to
MOPMS operati ng i nstructi ons. I f mi nes are di spensed i mmedi atel y, r emove
empty contai ners to avoi d reveal i ng the mi nefi el d l ocati on.
The MOPMS can be empl oyed to empl ace di srupt and fi x tacti cal mi nefi el ds.
Empl acement pr ocedur es ar e the same as for pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds above.
However, MOPMS contai ners are arranged i n a speci fi c pattern to achi eve the
necessar y depth, front, and densi ty. Once the mi nefi el d i s marked (to i ncl ude
the safety zone), MOPMS contai ners are arranged as shown i n Fi gure 3-12 for
a di srupt mi nefi el d. The safety zone i s 55 meters from the front and si des and
20 meter s fr om the r ear of the contai ner. The di sr upt mi nefi el d uses four
MOPMS contai ners that are spaced 70 meters apart to gi ve a mi nefi el d front
of 280 meter s. Other MOPMS contai ner s ar e offset fr om the basel i ne by 35
meter s to gi ve the mi nefi el d a depth of 70 meter s. Al l contai ner s ar e fi r ed
usi ng the same RCU or FD.
Figure 3-12. MOPMS in a disrupt minefield
280 m
70 m
70 m 70 m 70 m
70 m
35 m
AP mine
AT mine
Four MOPMSs required
C2, FM 20-32
Fi gur e 3-13 i l l ustr ates the ar r angement of MOPMS contai ner s for a fi x
mi nefi el d. The basi c l ayout i s the same as the di srupt mi nefi el d; however, the
fi x mi nefi el d has one addi ti onal MOPMS that i s pl aced 70 meters forwar d of
the basel i ne to act as an I OE. Thi s gi ves the same 280-meter mi nefi el d front
but i ncreases the mi nefi el d depth to 115 meters.
MOPMS can be used to construct turn and bl ock tacti cal mi nefi el ds usi ng the
pr i nci pl es outl i ned i n Chapter 2; however, tur n and bl ock mi nefi el ds r equi re
more contai ners than are normal l y avai l abl e to a uni t.
MARKING
The maneuver uni t that i s r esponsi bl e for the ar ea of gr ound i n whi ch the
mi nefi el d i s empl aced i s al so r esponsi bl e for mar ki ng the mi nefi el d. Thi s
nor mal l y r equi r es di r ect coor di nati on between el ements of the maneuver
command (usual l y the engi neer) and the del i veri ng/empl aci ng uni t. However,
i t i s unreal i sti c to expect uni ts to mark arti l l ery-del i vered ADAM and RAAM,
ai r-del i vered Vol cano, or Gator mi nefi el ds. For thi s r eason, uni ts oper ati ng i n
the vi ci ni ty of these mi nefi el ds must know cal cul ated safety zones and use
extreme cauti on. Scatterabl e mi nefi el ds are marked to protect fri endl y troops
as shown i n Tabl e 3-7. Ground Vol cano mi nefi el ds are marked accordi ng to the
gui del i nes bel ow.
Figure 3-13. MOPMS in a fix minefield
Table 3-7. Marking scatterable minefields
Minefield Location Marking
Enemy forward area Unmarked
Friendly forward area Sides and rear marked
Friendly rear area All sides marked
MOPMSs placement along
the horizontal plane is
variable, like an IOE.
35 m
35 m
35 m
70 m 70 m 70 m
70 m
70 m
280 m
AP mine
AT mine
Five MOPMSs required
C2, FM 20-32
SAFETY ZONES
A safety zone i s an ar ea wher e a str ay or outl yi ng mi ne has a chance of
l andi ng and l ayi ng to rest. The commander must prevent fri endl y forces from
maneuveri ng i nto the safety zone duri ng the mi nefi el d's l i fe cycl e. Dependi ng
on i ts speci fi c l ocati on on the battl efi el d, the safety zone may be marked wi th
a fence.
The safety zone around a Vol cano mi nefi el d i s shown i n Fi gure 3-14.
FRAGMENT HAZARD ZONES
I f an AT mi n e that i s or i en ted on i ts si de s el f-destr ucts, th e EFP can
theor eti cal l y tr avel 640 meters. Thi s i s the maxi mum fr agment hazar d zone;
however, the chances of bei ng str uck ar e negl i gi bl e at thi s di stance. Tests
i ndi cate that the acceptabl e ri sk di stance i s 235 meters fr om the outer edges
of the mi nefi el d's safety zone. Thi s fr agment hazar d zone i s al so associ ated
wi th th e Gator an d MOPMS AT mi n es. Wh en th e MOPMS i s u s ed for
pr otecti ve mi nefi el d mi ssi ons, commander s must be made awar e of the
fragment hazard zone.
Figure 3-14. Ground Volcano minefield
Marking fence
35 m
35 m
20 m
25 m
20 m
1,150 m
80 m
80 m
630 m
1,620 m
Fragment hazard zone
160 m
1,110 m
40 m
Stop dispensing Start dispensing
C2, FM 20-32
Use Tabl e 3-8 to determi ne safety zones and fragment hazard zones.
FENCING
Fenci ng for ground Vol cano mi nefi el ds (Fi gure 3-14, page 3-27) i s empl aced 80
meter s beyond the center l i ne of the mi nefi el d and 40 meter s fr om the star t
and stop poi nts. Fenci ng shoul d be no cl oser than 20 meters from the nearest
mi ne.
Ai r Vol cano mi nefi el ds ar e not nor mal l y mar ked by fenci ng. However, i f ai r
Vol cano mi nefi el ds ar e empl aced i n fr i endl y ar eas, they ar e mar ked wi th
fenci ng to protect fri endl y personnel . Fenci ng i s i nstal l ed before del i veri ng an
ai r Vol cano, and i t i s l ocated 100 meters fr om the center l i ne of the mi nefi el d
and 100 meters from the star t and end poi nts. Appendi x D contai ns detai l ed
i nformati on pertai ni ng to ai r Vol cano mi nefi el ds.
Table 3-8. Safety and fragment hazard zones
System Safety Zone Fragment Hazard Zone
ADAM/RAAM 500 to 1,500 meters from aim
point(s) (depends on delivery
factors)
235 meters from the outside
dimensions of the safety zone
Gator 925 x 475 meters from aim
point(s)
1,395 x 945 meters from aim
point(s)
Ground Volcano 1,150 x 160 meters 235 meters from start and stop
points and the centerline
Air Volcano 1,315 x 200 meters 235 meters from start and stop
points and the centerline
MOPMS See page 3-28 for specific
placement.
235 meters from the outside
dimensions of the safety zone
Special-Purpose Munitions 4-1
Chapter 4
Special-Purpose Munitions
Speci al -pur pose muni ti ons ar e hand-empl aced and used to cr eate an
expedi ent obstacl e, enhance exi sti ng ones, and attack speci fi c types of
tar gets. The commander can empl oy these muni ti ons to suppor t hi s
scheme of maneuver, to mass fi r epower, and to di sr upt or destr oy enemy
for ces i n depth. Speci al consi der ati ons must be made i n the pl anni ng
pr ocess to effecti vel y empl oy speci al -purpose muni ti ons.
C2
FM 20-32
4-2 Special-Purpose Munitions
M18A1CLAYMORE
The M18A1 cl aymore muni ti on (Fi gure 4-2) i s a fragmentati on muni ti on that
contai ns 700 steel bal l s and 682 grams of composi ti on C4 expl osi ve. I t wei ghs
1.6 ki l ograms and can be detonated by command (Korea Only: or tripwire).
I t i s acti vated by el ectri c or nonel ectri c bl asti ng caps that are i nserted i nto the
detonator wel l . The cl aymor e pr ojects a fan-shaped patter n of steel bal l s i n a
60-degr ee hor i zontal ar c, at a maxi mum hei ght of 2 meter s, and cover s a
casual ty radi us of 100 meters. The forward danger radi us for fri endl y forces i s
250 meter s. The backbl ast ar ea i s unsafe i n unpr otected ar eas 16 meter s to
the r ear and si des of the muni ti on. Fr i endl y per sonnel wi thi n 100 meter s to
the rear and si des of the muni ti on shoul d be i n a cover ed posi ti on to be safe
from secondary mi ssi l es. I f the M18A1 i s empl oyed i n a mi nefi el d for 72 hours
or more, the mi nefi el d must be fenced on al l si des.
Wh en empl oyi n g the M18A1 cl aymor e wi th oth er mu ni ti ons or mi nes,
separate the muni ti ons by the fol l owi ng mi ni mum di stances:
50 meters i n front of or behi nd other M18A1s.
3 meters between M18A1s that are pl aced si de by si de.
10 meters from AT or fragmentati on AP muni ti ons.
2 meters from bl ast AP muni ti ons.
Figure 4-2. M18A1 claymore
Molded, slit-type
peep sight
Detonator well
Plastic matrix
containing steel balls
Scissor-type,
folding legs
C2, FM 20-32
SELECTABLE LIGHTWEIGHT ATTACK MUNITION
Th e s el ectabl e l i gh twei gh t attack mu n i ti on (SLAM) (Fi gu r e 4-3) i s a
mul ti pur pose muni ti on wi th an anti tamper featur e. The SLAM i s compact
and wei ghs onl y 1 ki l ogram, so i t i s easi l y portabl e. The SLAM i s i ntended for
use agai nst APCs, par ked ai r cr aft, wheel ed or tr acked vehi cl es, stati onar y
tar gets (such as el ectr i cal tr ansformer s), smal l fuel -stor age tanks (l ess than
10,000-gal l on), and ammuni ti on stor age faci l i ti es. The EFP war head can
penetrate 40 mi l l i meters of homogeneous steel .
The SLAM has two model sone i s sel f-neutral i zi ng (M2) and the other i s sel f-
destructi ng (M4):
The M2 i s sol i d green and has no l abel s, brands, or other
di sti ngui shi ng marks. Thi s devi ce i s used by SOF and i s not avai l abl e
to other uni ts.
The M4 i s green wi th a bl ack warhead (EFP) face. Thi s devi ce i s
normal l y used by uni ts desi gnated as l i ght, ai rborne, ai r assaul t, cri si s
response, and rapi d depl oyment.
See Appendi x B for a descri pti on of major SLAM components.
OPERATING MODES
The SLAM has four possi bl e empl oyment methodsbottom attack , si de
attack, ti med demol i ti on, and command detonati on.
BottomAttack
The SLAM has a bui l t-i n magneti c sensor, so i t can be used as a magneti c-
i nfl uenced muni ti on agai nst trucks and l i ght armored vehi cles (Fi gure 4-4, page
4-4). I t can be conceal ed al ong tr ai l s and r oads wher e tar get vehi cl es oper ate
Figure 4-3. SLAM
FM 20-32
and can be camoufl aged wi th dry l eaves, grass, and so forth wi thout affecti ng
EFP perfor mance. Mud, gr avel , water, and other debri s that fi l l the EFP cup
have mi ni mal i mpact on EFP formati on and effecti veness as l ong as the debri s
does not extend beyond the depth of the EFP cup. The magneti c sensor i s
desi gned to tr i gger detonati on when i t senses a vehi cl es over pass. For the
EFP to form properl y, i t needs a mi ni mum of 13 centi meters from the poi nt of
empl acement to the tar get. The bottom-attack mode i s acti ve when the
sel ector swi tch i s set to 4, 10, or 24 HOURS and the passi ve i nfr ar ed sensor
(PI RS) cover i s i n pl ace. The SLAM wi l l sel f-destruct (M4) or sel f-neutral i ze
(M2) i f the sel ected ti me expi r es befor e the SLAM i s detonated by a vehi cl e.
SideAttack
The SLAM i s equi pped wi th a PI RS that was speci fi cal l y devel oped for the
si de-attack mode (Fi gur e 4-5). The PI RS detects tr ucks and l i ght ar mor ed
vehi cl es by sensi ng the change i n backgr ound temper atur e when vehi cl es
cr oss i n front of the PI RS port. The PI RS i s di recti onal and al i gned wi th the
EFP when the devi ce i s ai med. The si de-attack mode i s acti ve when the SLAM
sel ector swi tch i s set to 4, 10, or 24 HOURS and the PI RS cover i s removed to
expose the PI RS. The SLAM wi l l sel f-destr uct (M4) or sel f-neutr al i ze (M2) i f
the sel ected ti me expi res before i t i s detonated by a vehi cl e.
Timed Demolition
The SLAM's bui l t-i n ti mer wi l l tri gger detonati on at the end of a sel ected ti me
(Fi gur e 4-6). The ti med-demol i ti on mode i s acti ve when the SLAM sel ector
swi tch i s set to 15, 30, 45, or 60 MI NUTES. I n thi s mode, the magneti c sensor
and the PI RS are i noper abl e, and the SLAM wi l l detonate after the sel ected
ti me has expi red.
Command Detonation
Thi s mode pr ovi des manual war head i ni ti ati on usi ng standar d mi l i tar y
bl asti ng caps and a pr i mi ng adapter (Fi gur e 4-7). The command-detonati on
capabi l i ty bypasses the SLAMs fuse and safi ng and armi ng (S&A) assembl y.
Figure 4-4. SLAM in bottom-attack mode
FM 20-32
Figure 4-5. SLAM in side-attack mode
Figure 4-6. SLAM in timed-demolition mode
Figure 4-7. SLAM in command-detonation mode
FM 20-32
ANTITAMPER FEATURE
The SLAM has an anti tamper featur e that i s onl y acti ve i n the bottom- and
si de-attack modes. The SLAM wi l l detonate when an attempt i s made to
change the sel ector swi tchs posi ti on after armi ng.
M93HORNET
The M93 Hornet (Fi gure 4-8) i s an AT/anti vehi cul ar off-route muni ti on made
of l i ghtwei ght materi al (35 pounds) that one person can carry and empl oy. The
Hornet i s a nonrecoverabl e muni ti on that i s capabl e of destroyi ng vehi cl es by
usi ng sound and moti on detecti on methods. I t wi l l automati cal l y sear ch,
detect, recogni ze, and engage movi ng targets by usi ng top attack at a standoff
di stance up to 100 meter s fr om the muni ti on. I t i s empl oyed by combat
engi neers, rangers, and SOF.
The RCU i s a hand-hel d encodi ng uni t that i nter faces wi th the Hornet when
the r emote mode i s sel ected at the ti me of empl oyment. After encodi ng, the
RCU can be used to ar m the Hor net, r eset i ts SD ti mes, or destr oy i t. The
maxi mum operati ng di stance for the RCU i s 2 ki l ometers.
Hi gh wi nds, heavy rai n, snow, i ce, extreme col d, and extreme heat reduce the
Hor nets abi l i ty to detect tar gets at maxi mum r ange. Radi o-fr equency (RF)
j a mmi n g dev i ces (s u ch a s th e h a n d-empl aced, ex pa n d abl e j a mmer
[HEXJAM]), l i mi t the Hornets communi cati on capabi l i ti es i f they are pl aced
i n the muni ti on fi el d, but they wi l l not affect the Hor nets abi l i ty to engage
targets and wi l l not damage the system. RF jammi ng devi ces affect the remote
ar mi ng of cur r ent Hor net systems usi ng the MOPMS RCU, and they wi l l
Figure 4-8. M93 Hornet
C2, FM 20-32
affect future Hornets two-way communi cati ons capabi l i ty wi th the Centuri on
remote control devi ce.
See Appendi x B for a descri pti on of Hornet components.
EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS
The Hor nets acti ve batter y pack i s i nser ted dur i ng pr ear mi ng and has an
esti mated l i fe of 4 hour s. The acti ve batter y pack power s the muni ti on fr om
the ti me i t i s i nser ted unti l the end of the safe-separ ati on ti me, when the
bui l t-i n r eser ve batter y i s acti vated. To pr event muni ti ons fr om becomi ng
duds, do not pr ear m them too earl y. Al l ow adequate ti me for travel l i ng to the
obstacl e si te, empl aci ng mi nes, throwi ng ar mi ng swi tches, and expi r ati on of
safe-separati on ti mes.
Once the Hor net i s ar med and the sel f-test i s per for med, the muni ti on wi l l
remai n acti ve unti l i ts SD ti me expi res or unti l i t i s encountered. The SD ti me
(4 hour s, 48 hours, 5 days, 15 days, or 30 days) i s deter mi ned by the mi ssi on
and the commander s i ntent. The muni ti on wi l l sel f-detonate after the SD
ti me has expi red.
Hor net muni ti ons have an empl oyed l i fe of 60 days i n the pr ear med mode
(r emote armi ng) and 30 days i n the ar med mode. I f the temper ature exceeds
100F, the empl oyed l i fe drops to 15 days i n the prearmed mode and 30 days i n
the armed mode.
EMPLOYMENT ROLES
Combat engi neer s or maneuver for ces under engi neer super vi si on empl ace
Hor n ets i n cl ose oper ati on s; SOF or r an ger s empl ace Hor n ets i n deep
operati ons. Hornets wi l l be empl oyed throughout the enti re depth of the battl e
space to support Army operati ons.
CloseOperations
I n cl ose operati ons, the Hornet can be
Used to fi x the enemy and weaken i t al ong i ts AA.
Empl aced as an offensi ve-support weapon system because of i ts qui ck
empl acement ti me and wi de attack area.
Empl oyed rapi dl y al ong exposed fl anks dur i ng a maneuver as a
si tuati onal obstacl e to di srupt the enemy's counterattacks.
FM 20-32
Used as a stand-al one tacti cal obstacl e or as a rei nforcement to
conventi onal obstacl es.
Used to di srupt and del ay the enemy, al l owi ng l ong-range weapons to
engage more effecti vel y.
Deep Operations
I n deep operati ons, the Hornet can be
Empl aced al ong key routes i n gauntl et obstacl es to di srupt and del ay
thr eat second-echel on for ces, r esuppl y oper ati ons, and key l i nes of
communi cati on (LOC).
Used at C
2
and l ogi sti cs si tes to di srupt enemy operati ons.
Rear Operations
I n rear operati ons, the Hornet can be empl aced (unarmed) al ong key routes i n
preparati on for possi bl e retrograde operati ons.
Early-Entry Operations
I n earl y-entry operati ons, the Hornet can be
Used as an addi ti onal anti armor weapon to suppl ement l i ght forces.
Used al ong hi gh speed AAs i n gauntl et obstacl es to buy ti me and
space.
TACTICAL EMPLACEMENT
There are four basi c empl acement scenari os for the Hornet.
Conventional Minefield Reinforcement
Th e Hor n et can be used to r ei nfor ce a conv enti onal tu r n , bl ock , or fi x
mi nefi el d (Fi gure 4-9).
Pl atoon engi neer s empl ace the conventi onal mi nefi el d fi r st, and then they
traverse the safe l ane that i s perpendi cul ar to the mi nefi el d. The Hornets are
empl oyed i n two stagger ed rows, spaced 100 meter s apar t, 50 to 100 meter s
from the front edge (on the enemy si de) of the conventi onal mi nefi el d. I t i s al so
recommended that a row of Hornets be pl aced 50 meters behi nd the mi nefi el d
to r educe the enemys br eachi ng capabi l i ty. (Thi s r ow wi l l be empl aced after
the safe l ane i s cl osed.) The empl aci ng vehi cl es work toward the safe l ane.
Two squads empl oy Hor nets i n two r ows of ten each. One or mor e sol di er s
pr ovi de securi ty. Under the super vi si on of a noncommi ssi oned offi cer (NCO),
four sol di er s i n each squad vehi cl e star t pr ear mi ng the Hor nets, i f necessar y.
They
Rotate the handl e.
Remove the cover.
I nsert the acti ve battery pack and veri fy functi onal i ty vi a a sol i d
status l i ght.
Rei nstal l the acti ve battery-pack cover.
FM 20-32
Sel ect the SD ti me.
Encode the Hornet wi th the M71 RCU and veri fy functi onal i ty vi a a
fl ashi ng status l i ght.
Rei nstal l the cover.
Each empl acement vehi cl e moves to the fi rst Hornet empl acement si te i n each
row. The empl aci ng sol di er and the ar mi ng sol di er di smount. The empl aci ng
sol di er i s handed a Hor net fr om the vehi cl e. He empl aces the Hor net at the
desi gnated si te and returns to the vehi cl e.
The armi ng sol di er r otates the handl e on the Hornet, r emoves the cover and
the safety and handl i ng (S&H) band, rotates the SD swi tch to U, and pushes
the arm swi tch to ARM. He then r eturns to the vehi cl e, taki ng the cover and
the S&H band wi th hi m. The vehi cl e travel s to the next Hornet empl acement
si te.
After al l the Hornets i n the two l eadi ng rows have been empl aced and armed,
the empl aci ng vehi cl es exi t through the safe l ane and usual l y secure i t wi th a
MOPMS. The empl acement vehi cl es must be at l east 475 meters (safe standoff
di stance) from the nearest Hornet wi thi n 30 mi nutes. Before sendi ng a remote
armi ng si gnal , vehi cl es must wai t at l east 36 mi nutes after the armi ng swi tch
i s thrown on the l ast Hornet empl aced. I f a rear row i s requi red, i t i s empl aced
at thi s ti me. The Hornets are then remotel y armed wi th the M71 RCU, when
requi red. They are now capabl e of coveri ng the mi nefi el d by fi re and engagi ng
threat tracked vehi cl es.
Figure 4-9. Hornet reinforcing a conventional minefield
W W W W W W W W W W
W W W W W W W W W
50 to
100 m
100 m
Squad
no 1
Squad
no 2
MOPMS
S
a
f
e
l
a
n
e
Conventional
minefield
Enemy movement
FM 20-32
ScatterableMinefield Reinforcement
The Hor net can be used to r ei nfor ce a Vol cano or MOPMS tur n, bl ock, or fi x
mi nefi el d (Fi gur e 4-10). Hor net muni ti ons ar e empl aced, usi ng the same
procedures as above, beforethe Vol cano or MOPMS mi nefi el d i s empl aced.
To ensure that the Vol cano di spensi ng vehi cl e has suffi ci ent ti me to reach the
safe standoff di stance (475 meters), Vol cano di spensi ng shoul d star t no l ater
than 30 mi nutes (mi nus the Vol cano di spensi ng ti me) after the fi rst Hornet i s
armed. Thi s al l ows Hornet empl aci ng squads to be fi ni shed or nearl y fi ni shed
before the Vol cano di spenser begi ns empl aci ng the mi nefi el d.
Area-Disruption Obstacle
When the X-patter n i s empl oyed, the Hor net i s ver y effecti ve as a di sr upti ng
obstacl e (Fi gur e 4-11). An ar ea-di srupti on obstacl e i s empl oyed to di sr upt the
en emy 's appr oach pr i or to th e star t of th e di r ect-fi r e battl e. I t cau ses
di sr upti on and attr i ti on of the advanci ng thr eat for ce and encourages fol l ow-
on for ces to seek an al ter nate r oute. Ther efor e, mul ti pl e ar ea-di sr upti on
obstacl es wi l l typi cal l y be empl oyed to adequatel y cover the cross-country AA.
Thi s requi res coordi nated acti on among mul ti pl e squads.
An engi neer pl atoon empl aces a Hornet area-di srupti on obstacl e. The obstacl e
typi cal l y consi sts of 20 Hor nets (fi ve cl uster s of four Hor nets each) empl oyed
i n an X-patter n over a 1- by 1-k i l ometer ar ea. I ndi vi dual Hor n ets ar e
empl aced 100 meter s apar t. Empl aci ng thi s obstacl e must be done as a
di spense-and-r ol l oper ati on to ensur e that the empl aci ng vehi cl es can r each
the safe standoff di stance (475 meter s) from any ar med Hor nets.
Figure 4-10. Hornet reinforcing a Volcano minefield
W W W W W W W W W W
W W W W W W W W W
50 to
100 m
100 m
Squad
no 1
Squad
no 2
Volcano mine strip
35 m
Volcano mine strip
35 m
50 m
Enemy movement
C2, FM 20-32
Ar ea-di sr upti on obstacl es ar e nor mal l y ar med by r emote, but they can be
manual l y armed under the fol l owi ng condi ti ons:
METT-TC requi res rapi d empl acement and armi ng.
Terrai n reconnai ssance determi nes that there are no major
i mpedi ments (rough terrai n, vegetati on) to maneuver.
Empl acement i s done duri ng dayl i ght hours (mi ssi on-ori ented
protecti ve posture [MOPP] l evel 0 onl y).
Hor nets ar e pr ear med the same as above. Two squads l ay the Hor nets i n
uni son, star ti ng wi th the two empl acement si tes cl osest to the enemy. Each
squad dr i ves i n a str ai ght l i ne, cr ossi ng paths at the mi ddl e of the X, and
empl aces ten Hornets.
A sol di er i n the back of each empl aci ng vehi cl e throws the armi ng swi tch and
sets the Hornet down or drops i t off (base down) the back of the vehi cl e. After
al l the Hornet cl usters are empl aced, squad vehi cl es qui ckl y travel to the 475-
meter safe standoff di stance (no fur ther than 2 ki l ometer s) to pr epar e for
remote armi ng. Hornets can be r emotel y ar med 36 mi nutes after the ar mi ng
swi tch i s thr own on the l ast Hor net empl aced. I f manual ar mi ng i s used,
Hor nets automati cal l y ar m at the end of thei r safe-separ ati on ti me (5 to 6
mi nutes after the armi ng swi tch i s thrown).
Figure 4-11. Hornet area-disruption obstacle
Squad no 2 Squad no 1
W
W
NOTE: Arrows indicate direction of emplacement.
W
Enemy movement
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
C2, FM 20-32
Gauntlet Obstacle
Hor net gauntl et obstacl es (Fi gur e 4-12) ar e empl aced by an engi neer pl atoon
and ar e ver y effecti ve i n constr i cted ter r ai n al ong the enemys AA and at
chok e poi nts. A Hor net gauntl et typi cal l y consi sts of 40 to 50 Hor nets
empl oyed i n a ser i es of cl uster s (Fi gur e 4-13). Each cl uster contai ns 3 to 6
Hor nets. The Hor nets i n each cl uster ar e empl aced at 50-meter i nter val s,
perpendi cul ar to the road centerl i ne, on al ternati ng si des of the road/AA, and
25 to 50 meter s (dependi ng on the ter r ai n and the vegetati on) off the si de of
the road/AA. The di stance between cl usters vari es from 750 to 2,000 meters so
that th e advan ci ng thr eat for ce i s k ept guessi ng about wh en they wi l l
encounter the next cl uster.
Before l ayi ng any Hornets, the muni ti ons are prearmed as above. Sol di ers al so
set the tar get swi tch to HVY for cl uster s cl osest to the enemy, so that the
Hornets wi l l onl y engage heavy tracked vehi cl es. The i ntent i s to make threat
forces commi t to a route they percei ve to be cl ear.
Hor nets ar e empl aced begi nni ng on the fr i endl y si de of the cl uster. The fi r st
engi neer squad empl aces Hornet muni ti ons begi nni ng wi th the cl uster cl osest
to the enemy. The empl acement vehi cl e dr i ves even wi th the fi r st Hor net
Figure 4-12. Hornet gauntlet obstacle (one cluster)
Enemy movement
Squad
leader
and
driver
W
W
W
W
W
W
50 m
Initial emplacement
position (located up to
10 kilometers from the
mine dump)
50 m
FM 20-32
empl acement si te. The empl aci ng sol di er di smounts, and a sol di er i n the
vehi cl e hands hi m a Hor net. The empl aci ng sol di er then pr oceeds to the
Hor net empl acement si te. The vehi cl e tr avel s to a poi nt even wi th each
subsequent empl acement si te. A sol di er depl oys at each empl aci ng si te to l ay
one of the remai ni ng Hornet muni ti ons i n the cl uster. The vehi cl e then turns
around and stops even wi th the l ast Hornet (on the enemy si de) i n the cl uster.
Upon r eachi ng the Hor net empl oyment l ocati on, each empl aci ng sol di er
removes the cover and the S&H band, rotates the SD swi tch to U, and on the
command (audi bl e or vi sual si gnal ) of the NCOI C, pushes the ar m swi tch to
ARM. Once the Hor nets ar mi ng swi tches ar e thr own, sol di er s r etur n to the
road, taki ng the cover s and the S&H bands wi th them, and wai t to be pi cked
up by the empl acement vehi cl e. After al l the sol di er s ar e i n the empl aci ng
vehi cl e, the dri ver qui ckl y tr avel s to the safe standoff di stance (475 meter s).
The Hor net muni ti ons i n the fi r st cl uster wi l l ar m at the end of the safe-
separati on ti me (5 to 6 mi nutes).
Figure 4-13. Hornet gauntlet obstacle (platoon)
Enemy movement
1st engr
squad
W
ASSUMPTIONS:
1. The gauntlet consists
of nine clusters.
2. Each squad in the
platoon employs three
clusters of three to six
Hornets.
3. All Hornets are armed
by the manual mode,
from clusters one through
nine.
V
e
h
i
c
l
e
p
a
t
h
2d engr
squad
250 m 1st cluster
750 to 2,000 m
250 m 2d cluster
750 to 2,000 m
250 m 3d cluster
750 to 2,000 m
2d engr squad
begins arming
010023Sep
W
010023Sep
W
010023Sep
FM 20-32
The squad repeats the empl acement process for the next Hornet cl uster i n the
gauntl et, taki ng care not to empl ace any Hornets or dri ve wi thi n 475 meters of
the pr evi ous cl uster. Each squad i n the pl atoon typi cal l y empl aces thr ee
cl usters i n the Hornet gauntl et, or 9 to 18 total Hornets.
Fi gure 4-14 shows Hornet empl acement i n the battl e space. The exampl e used
i s i n support of a defensi ve posi ti on where Vol cano mi nes are used as tacti cal
obstacl es.
Deep-BattleInterdiction Weapon
SOF or r anger uni ts empl ace Hor net muni ti ons i n the deep battl e ar ea as
i nterdi cti on weapons. A typi cal mi ssi on requi res a uni t rangi ng i n si ze from a
si x-man team to an enti r e company. The number of Hor nets car r i ed by the
uni t depends on the mi ssi on and the mode of i nser ti on (vehi cl e, ai r cr aft, or
di smounted tr oops); a man can nor mal l y car r y onl y one Hor net. Hor nets ar e
typi cal l y used to suppor t a rai d agai nst an enemy posi ti on or compl ex and at
br i dges or choke poi nts al ong hi gh-speed AAs used by advanci ng second-
echel on forces or for resuppl y. I n these rol es, the Hornets are empl oyed si mi l ar
to the cl usters i n a gauntl et obstacl e.
Figure 4-14. Hornet-enhanced turn-and fix-obstacle groups
W
Hornet
X-pattern
5 km
4 km
3 km
2 km
1 km
Hornet
gauntlets
Hornet conventional
obstacle integration
071000Z
W
071030Z
W
071035Z
W
071130Z
W
071230Z
W
071200Z
W
071000Z
W
0
7
1
3
0
0
Z
W
0
7
1
3
0
0
Z
C2, FM 20-32
Camouflageand Concealment
The best camoufl age and conceal ment for the Hor net i s tal l gr ass and br ush.
The Hor net can be par ti al l y bur i ed i f the ter r ai n or the vegetati on does not
provi de effecti ve natural camoufl age and conceal ment. Pl aci ng the Hornet i n a
hol e degrades i ts performance, so i t shoul d onl y be done when Hornets cannot
be cover ed by fi r es or pr otected fr om tamper i ng by di smounted enemy. The
fol l owi ng condi ti ons must be met:
The depth of the hol e must not exceed 4 i nches, because the acousti c
sensors must be above ground l evel .
The hol e must not restri ct the Hornets abi l i ty to rotate and ti l t i ts
body and to fi re the subl et. To meet thi s requi rement, the hol e must be
at l east 36 i nches wi de and fl at enough to suppor t the muni ti on.
Al though the Hor net shoul d be pl aced on a fl at sur face i f possi bl e, i t
can operate on sl opes up to 15 degrees.
Muni ti ons pl aced at ground l evel shoul d be no cl oser to obstructi ons than the
di stances shown i n Tabl e 4-1.
When the Hor net i s empl aced and conceal ed, r emove al l i ndi cator s of excess
soi l and camoufl age materi al before performi ng the armi ng sequence.
RECORDING AND MARKING
When the Hornet muni ti on fi el d i s compl eted, the OI C wi l l i denti fy an NCO to
be the recorder. The NCO wi l l col l ect data from the NCOI Cs of the empl aci ng
squads and compl ete DA For m 1355 as outl i ned i n Chapter 8. The OI C wi l l
ensure that the DA Form 1355 i s compl eted ti mel y and accuratel y.
Marki ng the Hornet muni ti on fi el d wi l l be compl eted as prescri bed i n Chapter
2. The fence wi l l be no cl oser than 150 meter s fr om the near est Hor net
muni ti on. Marki ng must be compl eted before empl aci ng the muni ti ons.
Table 4-1. Hornet minimum emplacement distances
Maximum
Obstruction Height
Minimum Employment
Distance from Obstruction
1 m 3 m
2.4 m 5 m
6.5 m 15 m
25 m 25 m
FM 20-32
Conventional Mines 5-1
Chapter 5
Conventional Mines
Conventi onal mi nes ar e hand-empl aced mi nes that r equi r e manual
ar mi ng. Thi s type of mi ne l ayi ng i s l abor -, r esour ce-, and tr anspor t-
i ntensi ve. Sol di ers empl ace conventi onal mi nes wi thi n a defi ned, mar ked
boundary and l ay them i ndi vi dual l y or i n cl usters. They r ecord each mi ne
l ocati on so that the mi nes can be r ecover ed. Sol di er s can sur face l ay or
bury conventi onal mi nes and may pl ace AHDs on AT mi nes.
ANTITANK MINES
The M15, M19, and M21 AT mi nes are used by US forces. They are shown i n
Fi gure 5-1, and thei r characteri sti cs are l i sted i n Tabl e 5-1, page 5-2.
M15
The M15 AT mi ne i s 337 mi l l i meters i n di ameter and 125 mi l l i meters hi gh. I t
wei ghs 13.5 ki l ograms and contai ns 9.9 ki l ograms of Composi ti on B expl osi ve.
The pr i mar y fuse wel l i s on the top center of the mi ne; secondar y fuse wel l s
are on the si de and bottom. The M15 can contai n the fol l owi ng fuses:
Figure 5-1. AT mines
M15
M21
M19
M607 fuse
Safety
clip
Setting knob
in S position
Pressure
plate
Activator-well
plug
Safety-clip cord
Carrying-cord handle
FM 20-32
5-2 Conventional Mines
M603 fuse. When the M603 fuse i s empl oyed on the pri mary fuse wel l ,
th e M15 i s a tr ack -wi dth mi n e th at i s acti v ated by 158 to 338
ki l ograms on the pressure pl ate. Thi s produces an M-Ki l l .
M624 fuse. When the M624 fuse (wi th ti l t rod) i s empl oyed on the
pri mary fuse wel l , the M15 i s a ful l -wi dth mi ne that i s acti vated by a
defl ecti on of 20 degr ees or 1.7 ki l ogr ams of pr essur e to the ti l t r od.
Dependi ng on the armor, thi s produces an M-Ki l l or a K-Ki l l .
M19
The M19 ATmi ne i s a l ow-metal l i c, square-shaped mi ne that measures 332 by
332 mi l l i meter s and i s 94 mi l l i meter s hi gh. I t wei ghs 12.6 ki l ogr ams and
contai ns 9.45 ki l ogr ams of Composi ti on B expl osi ve, a tetr yl booster pel l et,
and an M606 i ntegral fuse. When the setti ng knob on the pressure pl ate i s i n
the S (safe) posi ti on, the mi ne cannot functi on by acti on of the mai n fuse.
After the safety cl i p has been r emoved and the setti ng knob tur ned to the A
(ar med) posi ti on, a for ce of 157.5 to 225 k i l ogr ams on the pr essur e pl ate
depr esses the Bel l evi l l e spr i ng and begi ns the fi r i ng chai n. A standar d FD
may be used wi th the M2 acti vator i n any of the secondar y fuse wel l s on the
si des or the bottom of the mi ne. When the M19 i s empl oyed, i t i s di ffi cul t to
detect because of i ts pl asti c constr ucti on. I t pr oduces an M-Ki l l wi th a bl ast
effect.
M21
The M21 AT mi ne i s 230 mi l l i meters i n di ameter and 206 mi l l i meters hi gh. I t
wei ghs 7.6 ki l ogr ams and has 4.95 ki l ogr ams of Composi ti on H6 expl osi ve.
The mi ne i s acti vated by 1.7 ki l ograms of pressure agai nst a 61-centi meter-l ong
rod on the end of the M607 fuse. I t uses an M-S pl ate to produce a K-Ki l l . The
M21 wi th ti l t rod must be buri ed or staked (use three stakes at the 12, 4, and
8 o'cl ock posi ti ons) so that enemy vehi cl es wi l l not ti p the mi ne over. Wi thout
the ti l t rod, the mi ne i s acti vated by 130.5 ki l ograms of pressure on the M607
fuse and produces an M-Ki l l by bl ast effect.
Table 5-1. Characteristics of AT mines
Mine DODIC Fuse Warhead AHD
Explosive
Weight
Mine
Weight
Mines per
Container
M15 w/
M603 fuse
K180 Pressure Blast Yes 9.9 kg 13.5 kg 1
M15 w/
M624 fuse
K180 (mine)
K068 (fuse)
Tilt rod Blast Yes 9.9 kg 13.5 kg 1
M19 K250 Pressure Blast Yes 9.45 kg 12.6 kg 4
M21 K181 Tilt rod or
pressure
SFF Yes* 4.95 kg 7.6 kg 4
*Conventional AHDs will not couple with this mine; however, the M142 multipurpose FD can be emplaced
under this mine.
C2, FM 20-32
ANTIPERSONNEL MINES
The M14 and M16 AP mines are used by US forces on the Korean
peninsula. They are also used by many other countries. The M16 AP
mineislikely tobeseen in a modified form. Theseminesareshown in
Figure5-2, and their characteristics arelisted in Table5-2.
M14
The M14 AP mine is a low-metallic blast mine consisting of a main
charge (28.4grams of tetryl) and a plastic fuse with a steel firingpin.
I t i s cyli ndri cal i n shape (56 mi l li meters i n di ameter and 40
millimeters high) and weighs 99.4 grams. The pressure plate has an
indented, yellowarrowthat points totheA or S position on top of the
fuse body. A force of 11.5 to 13.5 kilograms depresses the pressure
plate and causes the Belleville spring to drive the firing pin into the
detonator. The M14 is not designed to kill, but to incapacitate. The
M14 AP mine has been modified by gluing a metal washer to the
bottom of the mine. The modification was directed to improve the
detectability of the mine. Unmodified mines are not authorized for
useby US forces.
Figure 5-2. AP mines
Table 5-2. Characteristics of AP mines
Mine DODIC Fuse Warhead AHD Explosive
Weight
Mine
Weight
Mines per
Container
M14 K121 Pressure Blast No 28.4 g 99.4 g 90
M16-
series
K092 Pressure
or trip wire
Bounding
frag
No 450 g 3.5 kg 4
M14
M16
Pressure prongs
Release-pin
ring
Fuse
Pull cord
Safety clip
Indicating
arrow
Carrying cord
FM 20-32
M16
TheM16AP mineis a boundingfragmentation minethat consists of a
mine fuse (M605), trinitrotoluene (TNT) explosive, a propelling
charge, and a projectile that are contained in a sheet-steel case. The
mine is 103millimeters in diameter, 199 millimeters high (including
thefuse), and weighs 3.5kilograms. Theprincipal differencebetween
the M16, M16A1, and M16A2 versions are in the construction of the
detonators and boosters. Thecasualty radius is 27meters for theM16
and M16A1 and 30 meters for the M16A2. A pressure of 3.6 to 9
kilograms applied on one or more of the three prongs of the M605
fuse or a pull of 1.4to 4.5kilograms on the trip wire will activate the
mine.
EMPLACING MINES
The method used to l ay and conceal each type of mi ne depends on the method
of mi ne operati ons, the type of ground i n whi ch the mi ne i s to be l ai d, and the
type of ground cover avai l abl e for camoufl age.
Standard-pattern mi ne l ayi ng i s l abori ous and ti me-consumi ng, but i t i s more
eff ecti v e an d f l ex i bl e th an r ow mi n e l ay i n g an d al l ows better mi n e
conceal ment. Standar d-patter n mi ne l ayi ng i s wel l sui ted for pr otecti ve
mi nefi el ds, and i t can be used i n ter r ai n wher e the natur e of the gr ound
makes row mi ne l ayi ng i mpracti cal .
To achi eve the maxi mum effect, mi nes must be l ai d where they cannot be seen
and where a vehi cl e or a person exerts enough pressure to detonate them. The
fol l owi ng rul es shoul d be appl i ed to achi eve the maxi mum effects of mi nes:
MINES WITH PRONGS
Korea Only: If themineis activated by its prongs, it should beburied
flush with the ground so that only the tips of the mechanism are
exposed (Figure 5-3). A mine buried in this manner is held firmly
upright. Thetarget exerts a direct, downward pressurerather than a
sideways thrust. The mine is protected fromdamage and is difficult
to see. If it is buried more deeply, it becomes unreliable because the
layer of spoil may prevent theminemechanismfromoperating.
If themineisactivatedbyatripwire, it shouldbeburiedsothat thetrip
wireisat least 2to3centimetersabovetheground(Figure5-4).
MINES WITH PRESSURE PLATES
Mi nes wi th pr essur e pl ates wi l l functi on when compl etel y bur i ed as l ong as
the cushi on of ear th above them i s not too thi ck . AT mi nes ar e nor mal l y
bur i ed wi th the top of the mi ne appr oxi matel y 5 centi meter s bel ow gr ound
l evel .
FM 20-32
Figure 5-3. Prong-activated AP mine
Figure 5-4. Trip-wire-activated AP mine
Prongs
Pressure Actuation
M
in
i
m
u
m
2
t
o
3
c
m
Minimum 2 to 3 cm
Maximum 10 m
M
a
x
i
m
u
m
1
0
m
FM 20-32
Korea Only: AP mines are usually placed in a hole and covered with
camouflagematerial. If the hole is only slightly larger than the mine,
theweight of thetarget may besupported by theshoulder of thehole,
and the mine will fail to activate. Such bridging action can be
avoided if theholeis dugmuch wider than themine(Figure5-5).
MINES WITH TILT RODS
Ti l t-rod fuses normal l y requi re the body of the mi ne to be buri ed and the ti l t-
rod assembl y to be cl ear of the ground (Fi gure 5-6). A ti l t-rod fuse i s preferred
i n ar eas wh er e v egetati on i s s u ffi ci en t to con ceal th e ex ten s i on r od.
Camoufl age mater i al s ar e car eful l y used to pr event pr ematur e detonati on or
i nter fer ence wi th the nor mal functi oni ng of the fuse. Extensi on r ods ar e
camoufl aged before the mi ne i s armed. I f ti l t r od mi nes are surface-l ai d, they
must be staked.
BEARING BOARDS
Hi gh pressur e i s requi red to acti vate AT mi nes. When bur yi ng a mi ne i n soi l
that has a l ow bear i ng pr essur e (such as soft sand or cl ayey soi l ), i t may be
n eces s ar y to pl ace a boar d or an oth er bear i n g pl ate u n der th e mi n e.
Otherwi se, the mi ne may not detonate when i t i s forced down.
CONCEALMENT
After di ggi ng the hol e for a mi ne, pl ace the spoi l i n a sandbag to r educe the
evi dence of mi ni ng. I f a sandbag i s not avai l abl e, heap the spoi l . Camoufl age
al l traces of di ggi ng after the mi ne i s l ai d. I f the ground cover i s turf or other
matted, root materi al , remove spoi l that cannot be hi dden. Cut the sod i n an
X, I , or U shape i n the area where the mi ne i s to be pl aced; l ay the mi ne; and
then r ol l the sod back i n pl ace to camoufl age the mi ne. Loose ear th over a
mi ne wi l l eventual l y consol i date, so the mi ne l ocati on shoul d have a smal l
mound i mmedi atel y after l ayi ng (Fi gur e 5-7). Ensur e that the mound i s
i nconspi cuous and that i t bl ends wi th the sur r oundi ng ar ea. I t i s ver y
i mportant that you make a fi nal check after conceal i ng each mi ne so that you
can correct faul ts progressi vel y, because they cannot be corrected l ater.
AT mi nes i n standar d-patter n mi nefi el ds shoul d be bur i ed. However i f
condi ti ons di ctate, mi nes wi th a si ngl e-i mpul se fuse may be l ai d on the
sur face. Mi nes wi th doubl e-i mpul se fuses shoul d al ways be bur i ed, because i f
Figure 5-5. Buried mine with pressure plate
FM 20-32
Figure 5-6. Buried mine with tilt rod
Figure 5-7. Buried and concealed mines
Use natural cover
to hide the tilt rod.
Make steep slopes to
prevent tipping.
Ensure that the mine has
a firm, level base.
RIGHT - The hole is much
larger than the mine and the
pressure plate is 5 cm below
the surface (AT mines).
RIGHT - A small mound is
left and covered with the
original sod or camouflage.
WRONG- The mine
is too deep.
WRONG - The hole
is too small.
WRONG- A depression is
left and not camouflaged.
C2, FM 20-32
they ar e sur face-l ai d, they may be physi cal l y damaged when pr essur e i s
exer ted by a tr ack ed vehi cl e. Bur i ed mi nes al so have some r esi stance to
countermeasures, but surface-l ai d mi nes have none. Consi der ati on must al so
be gi ven to sympatheti c detonati on of AT mi nes (Tabl e 5-3). US conventi onal
mi nes do not have i ntegral AHDs, so al l ow extra ti me to l ay mi nes wi th AHDs.
The di ffi cul ty of bur yi ng mi nes i n ver y r ocky gr ound and the necessi ty for
surface l ayi ng wi l l have a bear i ng on whi ch mi nes are sui tabl e. For exampl e,
smal l , bl ast-type AP mi nes ar e har d to detect and easy to camoufl age. They
are much easi er to camoufl age than l ar ger fr agmentati on mi nes. The type of
AT mi ne used wi l l make l i ttl e di fference, because the mi nes si ze wi l l al ways
make camoufl age very di ffi cul t.
MANEUVER ASSISTANCE
Dur i ng l ar ge mi ne-l ayi ng oper ati ons, en gi neer s sel dom have suffi ci en t
manpower to car r y out al l mi nefi el d tasks. Other combat ar ms uni ts must
often pr ovi de wor k par ti es. En gi n eer s mu st be capabl e of or gan i zi n g,
contr ol l i ng, and super vi si ng combi ned ar ms wor k par ti es. They must al so
i n str uct them i n n ew equi pmen t and techni ques. Wor k par ti es may be
i n tegr ated wi th en gi neer s or gi ven cer tai n task s that ar e wi thi n thei r
capabi l i ti es.
When l ayi ng a standar d-patter n mi nefi el d, consi der suppl ementi ng wor k
parti es wi th other combat arms sol di ers to perform the fol l owi ng:
Executi ng Cl ass I V/V suppl y poi nt or mi ne dump mi ssi ons. Sol di ers
uncrate and prepare mi nes and remove empty boxes and resi due.
Layi ng. Sol di ers posi ti on mi nes wi thi n stri ps and di g hol es.
Marki ng. Sol di ers construct the peri meter fence and empl ace mi ne
si gns.
Unpacki ng, prepari ng, and l oadi ng mi nes ar e the most ti me-consumi ng tasks
when l ayi ng a row mi nefi el d; and they ar e i deal tasks for other combat ar ms
sol di ers.
Table 5-3. Sympathetic detonation chart
Type M16 M15 M19
Surface-laid NA 4.0 m 4.0 m
Buried flush 1.5 m 2.4 m 5.5 m
Buried 5 cm NA 1.5 m 4.8 m
Row Mining 6-1
Chapter 6
Row Mining
Row mi ni ng i s a means of empl acement for tacti cal mi nefi el ds. For
exampl e, a ty pi cal tacti cal mi nefi el d cou l d con tai n s ever al r ows of
regul arl y spaced mi nes.
USE
Row mi ni ng i s not a new i dea. I t has been used si nce the begi nni ng of modern
mi ne war far e and i s ver y effecti ve. I t i s especi al l y effecti ve i n suppor t of
maneuver-or i ented doctr i ne. Row mi ni ng i s faster than standar d-patter n
mi ni ng and i mproves the maneuver commander's fl exi bi l i ty by provi di ng hi m
an obstacl e that requi res l ess manpower effort.
Mi nes may be sur face-l ai d or bur i ed, and they ar e often l ai d di r ectl y fr om a
sl ow-movi ng vehi cl e. Thi s r educes the ti me and the per sonnel r equi r ed to
empl ace a mi nefi el d. Row mi ni ng can be used as a tacti cal or si tuati onal
obstacl e. Mi nefi el ds ar e usual l y empl aced at or near the FLOT, al ong fl ank
AAs, to support securi ty operati ons. Speed and effi ci ency make row mi ni ng a
desi rabl e opti on, and row mi ni ng supports current doctri ne.
RULES
Rul es gover ni ng author i ty, r epor ti ng, r ecor di ng, and mar ki ng ar e gener al l y
the same for r ow mi nefi el ds as they ar e for other mi nefi el ds. Row mi ni ng i s
si mpl y a method of l ayi ng mi nes.
The most i mportant factor i n row mi ni ng i s the requi rement for stri ct C
2
. Row
mi ni ng i s potenti al l y the most hazar dous for m of mi ne l ayi ng. I t entai l s
vehi cl es and per sonnel movi ng i n and ar ound mi nes wi thout the safety of a
center l i ne str i p. Leader s must pl ace extr eme emphasi s on safety because the
l ayi ng procedure i s very rapi d.
Most of the r ul es gover ni ng r ow mi ni ng ar e defi ned i n STANAG 2036. A
summary of those rul es and some addi ti onal rul es that appl y are shown bel ow.
Rows.
There are two types of mi ne rowsregul ar and short. Short rows
are descri bed under I OE rul es bel ow.
Regul ar rows are marked and recorded. They are desi gnated by
l etters (A, B, and so forth), wi th Row A bei ng cl osest to the enemy.
The mi ni mum di stance between rows of AT mi nes i s 8 meters.
Korea Only: Theminimumdistancebetween any rowand a
rowcontainingAP mines is 15meters.
FM 20-32
6-2 Row Mining
The di stance between the start row marker and the fi rst mi ne i n a
row i s the mi ne spaci ng for that row.
Start and end row markers are permanent markers and must be
made of detectabl e materi al .
Cl usters.
Cl usters are pl aced on the row centerl i ne and di rected toward the
enemy si de.
A cl uster i n row mi ni ng usual l y consi sts of one AT mi ne (Korea
Only: but it may also contain AP mines).
Cl uster composi ti on must remai n the same throughout the row.
Korea Only: Different types of AP mines may be used in a
cluster.
Korea Only: The total number of mines in one cluster will
not exceed five; no morethan onewill bean AT mine.
The type of AT mi ne may vary from one cl uster to another.
Korea Only: A cluster of AP mines can be laid in a 2-meter
semicircleon theenemy sideof thebaseline.
When a cl uster contai ns a mi ne that i s equi pped wi th an AHD, the
mi ne i s armed before the AHD i s armed. The cl uster i s not armed
unti l al l personnel are at l east 60 meters away.
Omi tted cl usters do not contai n mi nes. They are recorded on DA
Form 1355 (see Chapter 8).
Cl usters are omi tted wi thi n l anes, wi thi n gaps, i n areas l ess than
2 meter s fr om boundar i es and l anes, and i n ar eas wher e the
terrai n (trees, rocks) prohi bi ts empl acement.
I OE.
The I OE i s l ocated on the enemy si de of the mi nefi el d.
The I OE basel i ne must be at l east 15 meter s from Row A.
I OE mi nes are buri ed.
I OE short rows are l abel ed at start (I 1) and end (I 1E) poi nts.
I OE short rows must be at l east 15 meters apart.
Korea Only: Trip wires.
Trip wires can be used in regular rows, but only one mine
per cluster can beactuated by a trip wire.
No morethan two trip wires can beused on a mine.
Trip wires arenot considered AHDs.
Trip wires must be at least 2meters froma minefield lane,
a cl uster, another tri p wi re, an I OE short row, or a
minefield perimeter fence.
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-3
Trip wires can only beused with AP fragmentation mines.
Lanes.
Lanes are si ted before l ayi ng begi ns. Lane l ocati ons shoul d not be
obvi ous.
Cl usters must be at l east 2 meters from l ane edges.
The number of l anes must be suffi ci ent to ensure that no one l ane
i s overused and turned i nto an obvi ous track.
Suffi ci ent mi nes must be stockpi l ed so that the responsi bl e uni t
can seal l anes suspected of bei ng l ocated by the enemy.
General .
The spaci ng between mi nes or cl usters can vary from 4 to 10
meters but must remai n constant wi thi n the row.
Mi nes and cl usters must be at l east 15 meters from the peri meter
fence.
I f the di stance between a mi ne or a cl uster and any turni ng poi nt
i s l ess than the spaci ng for that row, omi t that mi ne or cl uster. The
mi ne i mmedi atel y fol l owi ng a tur ni ng poi nt i s al ways l ocated at
the mi ne spaci ng for that row.
The mi nefi el d has two l andmarks l ocated to the rear, never to the
extreme si de or front.
Gl obal -posi ti oni ng systems (GPSs) can onl y be used to determi ne
the coor di nates for mi nefi el d l andmar k s and r efer ence poi nts
(RPs).
I f l andmarks are more than 200 meters away from the l ast row or
ar e out of the di r ect l i ne of si ght, i nter medi ate r ow mar ker s or
l andmar ks ar e pl aced at l east 75 meter s fr om the l ast end r ow
marker.
Landmarks can be used for more than one mi nefi el d. Thi s must be
recorded i n the remarks bl ock of DA Form 1355.
Back azi muths are not used to record the mi nefi el d.
Measurements are i n meters.
LOGISTICS
CALCULATIONS
To si mpl i fy the cal cul ati on pr ocess, a mi nefi el d r equi r ements computati on
work sheet (Fi gure 6-1, pages 6-5 through 6-8) has been devel oped. Thi s work
sheet i s pr ovi ded to the pl atoon l eader or ser geant as a step-by-step gui de to
the mathemati cs i nvol ved i n the l ogi sti cal computati on pr ocess. Pr oper l y
WARNING
Do not use GPSs to chart or record minefield perimeter coordinates
or to determine safe routes through or around existing minefields.
FM 20-32
6-4 Row Mining
compl eted, the work sheet provi des the number of mi nes to order (by type), the
number of r egul ar str i ps to be empl aced, cl uster composi ti on, the esti mated
man-hour s r equi r ed to i nstal l the mi nefi el d, the amount of fenci ng and
mar ki ng mater i al r equi r ed, the number of tr uckl oads r equi r ed to car r y the
mi nes, and the number of rol l s of engi neer tape requi red.
Step-by-step procedures for compl eti ng the work sheet are shown i n Fi gure 6-2,
pages 6-9 through 6-14. Each step i s expl ai ned i n the exampl e to faci l i tate the
understandi ng of the l ogi c behi nd the cal cul ati ons.
Use the fol l owi ng steps to deter mi ne the number of AT mi nes requi red for a
row mi nefi el d when not usi ng the standard row mi nefi el ds di scussed l ater i n
thi s chapter. Round the resul ti ng numbers up to the nearest whol e number.
Step 1. Determi ne the number of mi nes requi red.
Step 2. Determi ne the number of mi nes per row.
Step 3. Determi ne the number of rows.
Step 4. Determi ne the actual number of mi nes.
Step 5. Deter mi ne the number of mi nes to r equest (i ncl udes a 10 per cent
resource factor).
Step 6. Determi ne the number of vehi cl e l oads by usi ng Tabl e 2-8, page 2-45.
Step 7. Determi ne the fenci ng and marki ng materi al requi red.
Sample Problem: Your pl atoon has been tasked to empl ace a 400-meter row
mi nefi el d wi th a densi ty of 0.5-0-0 (AT-AP fragmentati on-AP bl ast). You have
deci ded to space the mi nes 6 meter s apar t. Deter mi ne the number of M15
mi nes to or der and the number of 5-ton dump tr uck s (wi th si deboar ds)
requi red to del i ver the mi nes.
Step 1. 0.5 400 meters = 200 mi nes
Step 2. 400 6 = 66.6 = 67 mi nes per row
Step 3. 200 67 = 2.98 = 3 rows
Step 4. 67 3 = 201 mi nes
Step 5. 201 1.1 = 221.1 = 222 mi nes
Step 6. 222 204 = 1.08 = 2 5-ton trucks
Step 7.
Concerti na: ([400 2] + [200 2] + 160) 1.4 = 1,904 meters of
concerti na
Pi ckets: 1,904 15 = 126.9 = 127 pi ckets
Si gns: 127 pi ckets = 127 si gns
density front number of mines =
front mine Spacing number of mines per row =
number of mines number of mines per row number of rows =
number of mines per row number of rows number of mines =
number of mines 1.1 number of mines to request =
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-5
MINEFIELD REQUIREMENTS COMPUTATION WORK SHEET
GIVEN
Desired density AT ______ APF ______ APB _____
IOE representative cluster AT ______ APF ______ APB _____
Front ______ meters
Depth ______ meters
Percentage of AHDs ______%
Type of mines AT ______ APF ______ APB _____
Type of truck/trailer ___________
Lanes/gaps/traffic tapes ______
Trip-wire safety tapes ______
PART 1. NUMBER OF MINES
A. IOE live clusters = front 9 ______ 9 = _____ (round up)
AT APF APB
B. IOE representative cluster ______ ______ ______
Number of IOE clusters = ____ ____ ____
Number of mines in IOE ______ ______ ______
C. Desired density ______ ______ ______
Minefield front = ____ ____ ____
Mines in regular strips ______ ______ ______
D. Subtotal of mines ______ ______ ______
(line B + line C)
E. 10% excess factor = 1.10 1.10 1.10
Total number of mines to order ______ ______ ______
(round up for each)
PART 2. NUMBER OF REGULAR STRIPS
A. Add desired density AT _____ + APF _____ + APB ____= _____
B. 0.6 line A above 0.6 _____ = _____ (round up)
C. 3 AT desired density 3 _____ = _____
Figure 6-1. Minefield requirements computation work sheet
FM 20-32
6-6 Row Mining
D. Number of regular strips required = highest number of line B or C _____
PART 3. NUMBER OF AHDs
% AHDs total number of AT mines _____
PART 4. STRIP CLUSTER COMPOSITION
A. Desired density
AT: 3 _____ = _____ APF: 3 _____ = _____ APB: 3 _____ = _____
B. Cluster composition table
STRIP AT APF APB STRIP TOTAL
(cannot exceed 5)
A _____ _____ _____ _____
B _____ _____ _____ _____
C _____ _____ _____ _____
D _____ _____ _____ _____
E _____ _____ _____ _____
F _____ _____ _____ _____
G _____ _____ _____ _____
H _____ _____ _____ _____
I _____ _____ _____ _____
TOTAL _____ _____ _____ _____
(Cannot exceed
desired density 3
as computed in A above)
PART 5. NUMBER OF MAN-HOURS FOR INSTALLATION
Number of mines emplacement rate = mines per man-hour
Number of AT mines:______ 4 = _____ (round up)
Number of APF mines:______ 8 = _____ (round up)
Number of APB mines:______ 16 = _____ (round up)
_____ + _____ + _____ 1.2 = _____ man-hours (round up)
Figure 6-1. Minefield requirements computation work sheet (continued)
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-7
PART 6. AMOUNT OF FENCING AND MARKING MATERIAL
A. Concertina wire or single-strand barbwire
([front 2] + [depth 2] + 160) 1.4 = meters of concertina or single-strand barbwire required
([_____ 2] + [_____ 2] + 160) 1.4 = _____ (round up)
Number of pickets = amount of concertina or single-strand barbwire 15
______ 15 = _____ (round up)
- OR -
B. Double-strand barbwire
([front 2] + [depth 2] + 160) 2.8 = meters of double-strand barbwire required
([_____ 2] = [_____ 2] + 160) 2.8 = _____ (round up)
Number of pickets = amount of double-strand barbwire 30
______ 30 = _____ (round up)
C. Number of signs = number of pickets = _____
PART 7. NUMBER OF TRUCKLOADS
AT mines
_____ cases per truck _____ mines per case = _____ mines per truck
_____ mines required _____ mines per truck = _____ truckloads of AT mines
APF mines
_____ mines required _____ mines per truck = _____ truckloads of APF mines
APB mines
_____ mines required _____ mines per truck = _____ truckloads of APB mines
Total truckloads
_____ AT truckloads + _____ APF truckloads + _____ APB truckloads =
_____ total truckloads required (round up)
FM 20-32
6-8 Row Mining
PART 8. AMOUNT OF ENGINEER TAPE
A. Minefield boundaries depth 2 = _____ 2 = _____
B. Regular strips front number of regular strips = _____ _____ = _____
C. IOE front + (number of IOE clusters 3) = _____ + (____ 3) = _____
D. Lanes and gaps depth 2 number of lanes and gaps = _____ 2 _____ = _____
E. Traffic tapes depth number of traffic tapes _____ _____ = _____
F. Trip-wire safety tape front number of regular strips with trip wire _____ _____ = ______
G. Subtotal (lines A + B + C + D + E + F)
_____ + _____ + _____ + ______ + _____ + _____ = _____ meters (round up)
H. Number of rolls to order (line G 1.2)
______ 1.2 = _____ meters
_____ meters 170 meters per roll = _____ rolls of engineer tape (round up)
PART 9. SANDBAGS
A. Number of clusters in IOE (from 1A) = _____
B. Number of clusters in minefield = number of clusters in IOE 3 number of regular strips (from 2D) =
_____
C. Total number of clusters (line A + line B) = _____
D. Number of sandbags = number of clusters 3 sandbags per cluster (line C 3) = _____
C2, FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-9
Basic information pertaining to the minefield is normally determined by the engineer company commander
or the staff engineer. It is provided to the OIC or NCOIC of the emplacing unit during the mission briefing.
In this example, the following guidance is given to the emplacing unit:
Desired density AT 1 APF 4 APB 8
IOE representative cluster AT 1 APF 2 APB 2
Front 200 meters
Depth 300 meters
Percentage of AHDs 10%
Type of mines AT M15 APF M16A2 APB M14
Type of truck/trailer 5-ton dump (with sideboards)
Lanes/gaps/traffic tapes 1 lane, 1 traffic tape (foot troops)
Trip-wire safety tapes 3
The rest of this work sheet is completed by using the above information.
The regular strip has a cluster density of one cluster every 3 meters. The IOE has a cluster density of one-
third that of a regular strip, or one cluster every 9 meters. Therefore, to obtain the number of clusters in the
IOE, the length of the strip is divided by 9. Decimals are rounded up to the next higher whole number.
PART 1. NUMBER OF MINES
Step 1.
IOE live clusters 200 9 = 23 (rounded up)
The representative cluster composition for the IOE clusters is established and provided by the commander
based on METT-TC factors. The number of clusters in the IOE is multiplied by the cluster composition to
determine the number of mines, by type, in the entire IOE.
Step 2.
AT APF APB
IOE representative cluster 1 2 2
Number of IOE clusters = 23 23 23
Number of mines in IOE 23 46 46
The minefield front multiplied by the desired density determines the number of mines in the minefield.
NOTE: The desired density pertains only to the regular strips and does not take into account the
number of mines in the IOE which were calculated in Step 2.
Figure 6-2. Step-by-step procedures for completing the minefield requirements
computation work sheet
FM 20-32
6-10 Row Mining
Step 3.
Desired density 1 4 8
Minefield front = 200 200 200
Mines in regular strips 200 800 1,600
The number of mines required for the IOE (Step 2) is added to the number of mines in the regular strips
(Step 3).
Step 4. Subtotal of mines
(Step 2 + 3) 223 846 1,646
Ten percent is added to the total number of mines required to allow for damaged items and irregularities in
terrain and strip length. This is accomplished by multiplying the total number of mines (Step 4) by 1.1. Dec-
imals are rounded up to the next higher whole number.
Step 5.
10% excess factor = 1.1 1.1 1.1
Total number of mines to order 246 931 1,811
These figures represent the total number of mines, by type, required for the entire minefield. When order-
ing by the case rather than by individual mines, the total should be divided by the number of mines per
case and rounded up to the next whole case. (See Table 2-8, page 2-45.)
PART 2. NUMBER OF REGULAR STRIPS
Step 1.
Add desired density AT 1 + APF 4 + APB 8 = 13
Each regular mine strip has a cluster every 3 meters; therefore, its density is one-third cluster per meter of
front. A total density of 13 mines per meter of front in the previous example would equal 3 13 or 39 mines
per 3 meters of front. Clusters may contain a maximum of five mines, so the resulting figure must be
divided by 5. In short, to determine the minimum number of regular strips required, the total density must
be multiplied by three-fifths (3 meters between clusters and five mines per cluster). For ease of calculation,
three-fifths is converted to the decimal 0.6. Decimals are rounded up to the next highest whole number.
Step 2.
0.6 Step 1 0.6 13 = 8 (rounded up)
The calculations to determine the minimum number of regular strips previously described are not suitable
when the ratio of AT to AP mines is greater than 1:4. For example, if the desired density is 1-1-1, the total
density is 3. The minimum number of strips would be 3 3/5 = 1.8, rounded up to 2 strips. However,
because of the restriction on the number of AT mines per cluster, it is impossible to obtain a density of 1 AT
mine per meter of front with only 2 strips. A minimum of 3 regular strips is required. The alternative means
of determining the number of regular strips is founded by multiplying the AT desired density by 3.
computation work sheet (continued)
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-11
Step 3.
3 AT desired density 3 1 = 3
The number of regular strips calculated by the first method and the alternative method are compared, and
the higher figure is used as the minimum number of regular strips. The 8 determined by the 3/5 rule is
larger than the 3 determined by the alternative method. Therefore, the minimum number of regular strips in
the example is 8.
Step 4.
Number of regular strips required = highest number of Step 2 or 3 = 8
PART 3. NUMBER OF AHDs
0.1 223 = 23 (rounded up)
PART 4. STRIP CLUSTER COMPOSITION
The cluster composition table is prepared by the OIC of the laying unit to control the allocation of mines to
a regular strip. The cluster composition remains constant within a particular strip, but it may vary among
different strips. As the mines are allocated by strip, no more than 1 AT mine can be placed in each repre-
sentative cluster, and each cluster can have a maximum of 5 mines.
A tabular format is prepared (see Figure 6-1, page 6-6) to facilitate the distribution of mines by emplace-
ment personnel. Note that each component of the desired density is multiplied by 3. The number 3 is
always used regardless of the minimum number of regular strips because it is the number of mine strips
required to give a minefield density of 1 mine per meter of front when a cluster contains only 1 mine of
each type. Each mine strip has a cluster every 3 meters; therefore, it has a density of one-third mine per
meter when a cluster contains 1 of each type of mine.
Step 1. Desired density
AT: 3 1 = 3 APF: 3 4 = 12 APB: 3 8 = 24
The total of each column in the table cannot exceed the number of mines above. For example, with an APF
desired density of 4, 3 4 = 12, so the total APF mines in the representative cluster composition for each
of the regular strips cannot exceed 12.
PART 5. NUMBER OF MAN-HOURS FOR INSTALLATION
Remember, the total number of mines includes the mines in regular strips and the mines in IOE short
strips. The laying rates are
AT mines: 4 per man-hour.
APF mines: 8 per man-hour.
APB mines: 16 per man-hour.
FM 20-32
6-12 Row Mining
The number of man-hours required for each mine type is computed and rounded up. These amounts are
totalled and a 20 percent excess factor is included by multiplying the total by 1.2. The resulting figure is the
total number of man-hours required for emplacement and represents straight work time only. It does not
take into account the time for transportation to and from the emplacement site, meals, and breaks; limited
visibility; or NBC conditions. The commander should use his judgment and past experience to determine
the time required for transportation, meals, and breaks. When working under limited visibility or NBC con-
ditions, the total man-hours (after the excess factor has been included) should be multiplied by 1.5.
In this example, a total of 357 man-hours is required as determined below. Note that each decimal is
rounded to the next higher whole number.
Number of mines emplacement rate = mines per man-hour
Number of AT mines 246 4 = 62 (rounded up)
Number of APF mines 961 8 = 121 (rounded up)
Number of APB mines 1,811 16 = 114 (rounded up)
Total 62 + 121 + 114 = 297 1.2 = 357 (rounded up)
PART 6. AMOUNT OF FENCING AND MARKING MATERIAL
Standard-pattern minefields must be marked and fenced. The amount of fencing required depends on
whether barbwire (single- or double-strand) or concertina is used.
The amount of wire for a single-strand barbwire or a single-strand concertina fence is calculated with the
following formula:
([front 2] + [depth 2] + 160) 1.4
The amount of wire for a double-strand barbwire fence is calculated with the following formula:
([front 2] + [depth 2] + 160) 2.8
Step 1.
Concertina Wire or Single-Strand Barbwire
([200 2] + [300 2] + 160) 1.4 = 1,624
The number of pickets required is determined by dividing the total amount of fence by 15.
Number of pickets = amount of fence 15 1,624 15 = 109 (rounded up)
Step 2.
Double-Strand Barbwire
([200 2] + [300 2] + 160) 2.8 = 3,248 (rounded up)
The number of pickets required is determined by dividing the total amount of fence by 30.
Number of pickets = amount of fence 30 3,248 30 = 109 (rounded up)
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-13
The number of minefield marking signs is equal to the number of pickets.
NOTE: These calculations determine the marking and fencing materials required for the minefield
perimeter only. Additional materials may be required for lanes and gaps.
PART 7. NUMBER OF TRUCKLOADS
The number of vehicles required depends on the type and amount of mines as well as the type of vehicles
available. The total mines, by type, required is divided by the haul capacity of available vehicles to deter-
mine the number of truckloads required to transport the mines.
In this example, crated M15 AT mines, M16A2 APF mines, and M14 APB mines are hauled in M930 5-ton
dump trucks (with sideboards). (See Table 2-8, page 2-45).
AT mines:
246 mines required 204 mines per truck = 1.2 truckloads of AT mines
APF mines:
931 mines required 888 mines per truck = 1.05 truckloads of APF mines
APB mines:
1,811 mines required 13,770 mines per truck = 0.13 truckloads of APB mines
Total truckloads:
1.2 AT truckloads + 1.05 APF truckloads + 0.13 APB truckloads = 2.38 truckloads = 3 truckloads
(rounded up) required
PART 8. AMOUNT OF ENGINEER TAPE
An extensive amount of engineer tape is used to mark the initial layout of a standard-pattern minefield.
Engineer tape comes in 170-meter rolls and is used to mark several portions of the minefield.
NOTE: In this example, only one lane and one roll of traffic tape is required.
Step 1.
Minefield boundaries depth 2 300 2 = 600
Step 2.
Regular strips front number of regular strips 200 8 = 1,600
Step 3.
IOE front + (number of IOE clusters 3) 200 + (23 3) = 269
Step 4.
Lanes and gaps depth 2 number of lanes and gaps 300 2 1 = 600
Step 5.
Traffic tape depth number of traffic tapes 300 1 = 300
FM 20-32
6-14 Row Mining
TASK ORGANIZATION
To maxi mi ze the effi ci ency of the row-mi ni ng process, the pl atoon l eader must
task-organi ze hi s pl atoon. The organi zati on of the task, as a whol e, i s i ntri cate
and pl aces gr eat demands on the l eader. Leave nothi ng to chance when
pl anni ng and executi ng a r ow mi nefi el d, because each si tuati on i s di ffer ent.
Make al l owances for tr anspor ti ng, handl i ng, and contr ol l i ng the mi nes. The
offi cer i n charge (OI C) and the squad l eaders must be abl e to exerci se control
throughout the task under al l condi ti ons. Al ways observe safety.
Or gani ze the pl atoon i nto four parti essi ti ng and r ecordi ng, mar ki ng, mi ne
dump, and l ayi ng.
Step 6.
Trip-wire safety tape front number of regular strips with trip wire 200 3 = 600
Step 7.
Total of Steps 1 through 6 = 600 + 1,600 + 269 + 600 + 300 + 600 = 3,969 meters
Step 8.
Add 20% excess total amount of engineer tape required for the minefield 1.2 =
3,969 1.2 = 4,762.8 = 4,763 (rounded up)
Step 9.
Total number of rolls total amount of engineer tape, in meters, from Step 8
170 meters per roll = 4,763 meters 170 = 28.02 = 29 rolls
PART 9. SANDBAGS
To determine the number of sandbags for the removal of spoil.
Step 1.
Number of clusters in IOE (Part 1, Step 1) = 23
Step 2.
Number of clusters in minefield = number of clusters in IOE 3 number of regular strips (Part 1, Step 4)
23 3 8 = 552
Step 3.
Total number of clusters (add Steps 1 and 2) = 575
Step 4.
Number of sandbags = number of clusters 3 sandbags per cluster
575 x 3 = 1,725
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-15
Siting-and-RecordingParty
The pl atoon l eader di r ects the par ty and i s r esponsi bl e for si ti ng, r ecor di ng,
and r eporti ng the mi nefi el d. Thi s par ty consi sts of one or two sol di er s and a
vehi cl e to car r y mater i al . (I f a vehi cl e i s not avai l abl e, i ncr ease the par ty to
three sol di ers.) Because si ti ng i s usual l y done i n dayl i ght, the party must take
appr opr i ate physi cal -secur i ty measur es. The par ty star ts wel l ahead of the
actual l ayi ng, sets out contr ol mar ker s, and avoi ds usi ng shar p tur ns. The
party marks the vehi cl e traffi c routes to and from the mi nefi el d rows.
When si ti ng i s compl ete, the OI C i denti fi es one member of the party to be the
r ecor der and assi gns the r emai ni ng sol di er s to other task s. The r ecor der
col l ects data fr om the l ayi ng par ty NCOI C and compl etes DA For m 1355 as
outl i ned i n Chapter 8. The OI C ensures that the DA For m 1355 i s compl eted
ti mel y and accuratel y.
MarkingParty
Thi s par ty i s composed of an NCOI C and per sonnel who ar e not wor ki ng as
member s of other teams. After the mi nefi el d i s si ted, the mar k i ng par ty
empl aces fence posts, wi re, and marki ng si gns.
Mine-Dump Party
Thi s par ty i s contr ol l ed by the pl atoon ser geant (PSG) and i s composed of
per sonnel who ar e not wor ki ng as member s of other teams. The mi ne-dump
par ty accounts for al l str i p packages that ar r i ve fr om other sour ces, sets up
vehi cl e mi ne sets at the mi ne dump, and haul s suppl i es as requi red. The PSG
pl aces r ow pack ages i n a l ocati on th at maxi mi zes s peed an d pr ov i des
conceal ment for mi nefi el d empl acement, and he al so ensur es that the mi ne
dump i s pr epar ed for ni ght oper ati ons. The par ty mar ks the mi ne dumps
entr ance and exi t and the r outes to them. The PSG ver i fi es the str i p feeder
r epor ts wi th the squad l eader s upon the compl eti on of each r ow and passes
the reports to the recordi ng party. The PSG i s not requi red to stay at the mi ne
dump conti nuousl y; he has the fl exi bi l i ty to move around the area to perform
other acti vi ti es.
The mi ne-dump par ty cr eates vehi cl e sets by setti ng asi de the number of
mi nes and fuses that ar e r equi r ed by each l ayi ng vehi cl e. The par ty l oosens
and then hand-ti ghtens armi ng and shi ppi ng pl ugs, hel ps l oad the mi nes onto
l ayi ng vehi cl es, and di sposes of resi due. Sol di ers may al so assi st the marki ng
party and provi de l ocal securi ty. For i ni ti al vehi cl e l oads, the mi ne-dump party
may be assi sted by the l ayi ng party.
LayingParty
Thi s par ty consi sts of an NCOI C, four sol di er s, and a vehi cl e to car r y the
mi nes. The NCOI C contr ol s the movement of each l ayi ng vehi cl e. He di r ects
each vehi cl e to start and stop l ayi ng and control s i mmedi ate-acti on dri l l s. The
NCOI C i ni ti ates a stri p feeder report wi th the PSG or the mi ne-dump NCOI C,
recei ves azi muths from the si ti ng party, and di rects hi s el ement to the correct
r ow. He i s r espon s i bl e for r epl aci n g th e tempor ar y r ow mar k er s wi th
per manent mar ker s and for ensur i ng that mi nes ar e l ai d accor di ng to the
azi muths, mi nes are spaced cor rectl y, and the stri p feeder r epor t i s accur ate.
FM 20-32
6-16 Row Mining
The NCOI C ensures that the end row marker i s empl aced at the compl eti on of
each row, and he cl oses the stri p feeder report wi th the PSG.
NOTE: Using tilt-rod fuses requires additional soldiers to stake
mines, insert fuses, and armmines.
When l ayi ng thr ee r ows at once, each l ayi ng par ty consi sts of an APC or an
organi c squad vehi cl e and a carri er, sapper, and di ggi ng team.
Carri er Team
Thi s team i s compr i sed of the APC dr i ver and the tr ack commander (TC).
They ensure that the APC mai ntai ns the proper speed and stays on the proper
course.
Sapper Team
Thi s team i s composed of the squad l eader and the remai ni ng squad members.
I t provi des personnel to l ay and arm mi nes. Each sol di er carri es wrenches and
fuses. The squad l eader super vi ses l ayi ng and tasks per sonnel who ar e not
needed for l ayi ng to other parti es.
Di ggi ng Team
The di ggi ng team bur i es mi nes. I t consi sts of an NCOI C and sever al sol di ers
(may be sol di er s fr om suppor ted maneuver uni ts) who ar e equi pped wi th
sui tabl e di ggi ng tool s. I ncrease the armi ng party by two to speed up the l ayi ng
pr ocess or task per sonnel who ar e not needed to other par ti es. NOTE: If
mines aresurface-laid, thereis nodiggingteam.
SITE LAYOUT
Once the pl atoon l eader has coor di nated the l ocati on of the mi nefi el d(s) wi th
the maneuver commander, si ti ng i n the mi nefi el d can begi n. Si ti ng i s the fi rst
step i n the actual l ayi ng pr ocess and i s done for safety and contr ol . Al though
the mi nefi el d may be empl aced at ni ght or duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty, the si ti ng
party shoul d si te the mi nefi el d under favorabl e condi ti ons, prefer abl y duri ng
dayl i ght. Si ti ng consi sts of i denti fyi ng l andmar ks; establ i shi ng r outes; and
empl aci ng start, end, and i ntermedi ate row markers. Actual control measures
(stakes or pi ckets) shoul d not stand out to such an extent that they gi ve away
the mi nefi el d or i entati on, but they must be easi l y di scer ni bl e to the l ayi ng
party.
Cer tai n featur es, l i k e thi ck woods and deep, wi de str eams, ar e natur al
obstacl es. Mi ne r ows shoul d be l ai d to r ei nfor ce ter r ai n and i ncr ease the
effecti veness of the mi nefi el d.
MineRows
Mi ne r ows ar e l abel ed wi th a l etter and shoul d be l ai d i n or der. Row A i s
near est the enemy, fol l owed by r ows B, C, D, E, and so for th. When l ayi ng
tacti cal mi nefi el ds, each r ow has per manent star t and end r ow mar ker s.
I ntermedi ate mar kers may be requi red, dependi ng on the row l ength and the
ter r ai n. Pl atoon l eader s deter mi ne the number of l ayi ng vehi cl es to be
empl oyed. The preferred techni que i s to use three vehi cl es so that three r ows
can be l ai d si mul taneousl y. Usi ng mor e than thr ee vehi cl es i s beyond the
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-17
pl atoons C
2
capabi l i ti es and i s not consi dered. The di stance between rows i s
determi ned by the fol l owi ng factors:
Depth and densi ty of the mi nefi el d.
Terrai n.
Sui tabi l i ty of the ground.
Desi red obstacl e i ntent.
NOTE: Rows are spaced 50 meters apart i n standardi zed row
minefields (discussed later in this chapter).
MineSpacing
The mi nefi el d OI C deter mi nes the mi ne spaci ng. The desi r ed densi ty, the
avai l abi l i ty of l ayi ng vehi cl es, the number of r ows, and the possi bi l i ty of
sympatheti c detonati on (Tabl e 5-3, page 5-8) affect the di stance between
mi nes. NOTE: Mines are spaced 6 meters apart in standardized row
minefields (discussed later in this chapter).
Control Measures
Control measures ar e temporary markers that ar e used to gui de vehi cl es and
tr oops dur i ng r ow-mi ni ng oper ati ons. Mar ker s ar e constr ucted of di ffer ent
mater i al s for di ffer ent uses. For exampl e, use VS17 panel s on pol es for star t
and end r ow mar ker s, and use M133 hand-empl aced mi nefi el d mar ki ng set
(HEMMS) pol es wi th fl ags for i nter medi ate mar k er s. Use the fol l owi ng
temporary markers:
Start row (does not repl ace the mandatory permanent marker).
Start l ayi ng (fi rst i ntermedi ate marker after the start row marker).
I ntermedi ate (used between the l ast row marker and the next vi si bl e
poi nt, not more than 100 meters away).
Change of di recti on or turni ng poi nt (actual l y consi sts of three
markerswarni ng, turni ng poi nt, and new di recti on).
Stop l ayi ng.
End row (does not repl ace the mandatory permanent marker).
The fol l owi ng materi al s may be used to construct temporary markers:
U-shaped pi ckets.
HEMMS pol es.
Wooden posts.
Steel rods.
Engi neer tape.
VS17 panel s.
Contr ol measur es for l ayi ng mi nes at ni ght r equi r e l i ghts or i nfr ar ed (I R)
equi pment as fol l ows:
Chem-l i ghts pl aced i n U-shaped pi ckets or hand-hel d.
FM 20-32
6-18 Row Mining
Di recti onal fl ashl i ghts taped i n U-shaped pi ckets or hand-hel d.
HEMMS l i ghts used wi th U-shaped pi ckets or pol es.
Li ghts from a mi nefi el d marki ng set number 2.
I R refl ectors.
NOTE: The use of control measures should be incorporated into unit
standard operatingprocedures (SOPs).
Procedures
The mi nefi el d OI C arri ves on the si te wi th the si ti ng-and-recordi ng party. He
sel ects Landmark 1 and then si tes the l eft (or ri ght) boundary fence and start
r ow mar ker s (al l star t and end r ow mar ker s ar e per manent mar ker s). The
si ti ng-and-r ecor di ng par ty tak es di stances an d azi muths to be used i n
pr epar i ng the r ecor di ng for m. I f the tacti cal si tuati on per mi ts and the
marki ng party i s ready, empl acement of the fence shoul d begi n.
I f the mi nefi el d i s to have an I OE row, the si ti ng-and-recordi ng party proceeds
across the I OE and establ i shes I 1, I 1E, I 2, I 2E, and so on unti l i t reaches the
end. Per sonnel pr oceed down the r i ght (or l eft) boundar y and empl ace star t
row marker A1. Proceedi ng from A1 to A2, they pl ace i ntermedi ate markers as
r equi r ed. Per sonnel use di ffer ent col or ed mar ker s to i denti fy each r ow (for
exampl e: Row A, r ed l i ght; Row B, gr een l i ght; Row C, bl ue l i ght). For I R
mar ki ngs, they use mul ti pl e hor i zontal I R l i ght sour ces that ar e spaced at
l east 6 i nches apart (for exampl e: Row A, one l i ght; Row B, two l i ghts; Row C,
thr ee l i ghts). When they r each A2, they empl ace an end r ow mar ker and
repeat the procedure from B1 to B2, C1 to C2, and so on unti l they empl ace al l
the r equi r ed contr ol measur es (Fi gur e 6-3). The si ti ng-and-r ecor di ng par ty
establ i shes Landmar k 2 and the l eft (or ri ght) rear fence l ocati on. Per sonnel
al so assi st the PSG i n si ti ng mi ne dumps near the mi nefi el d.
MINE-LAYING VEHICLES
Sol di er s nor mal l y l ay r ow mi n efi el ds fr om a tacti cal vehi cl e. Consi der
vul ner abi l i ty, capaci ty, and tr affi cabi l i ty when sel ecti ng a vehi cl e. Befor e
empl aci ng the mi nefi el d and prepari ng the vehi cl e for mi ne l ayi ng, dri ve i t i n
a random patter n across the mi nefi el d si te. The r andom pattern decei ves the
enemy by maski ng the actual l ayi ng pattern. Load enough mi nes so that each
vehi cl e can compl ete at l east one enti re row before rel oadi ng, but do not stack
fused mi nes more than two-hi gh.
LAYING A ROWMINEFIELD
The fol l owi ng dri l l s demonstrate how to l ay a mi nefi el d:
Drill 1
Squad vehi cl es arri ve on the si te and proceed down the l eft (or ri ght) boundary
of the mi nefi el d to thei r assi gned row. (A separ ate party must be detai l ed to
i nstal l the I OE.) At the star t r ow mar k er, the squad vehi cl e moves i nto
posi ti on and prepares to l ay mi nes. The squad l eader for Row A di rects Vehi cl e
1 to move out.
Mi nes ar e l ai d on the gr ound at the r equi r ed spaci ng, al ong the tempor ar y
markers posi ti oned by the si ti ng-and-recordi ng party.
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-19
As mi nes ar e l ai d, the ar mi ng par ty moves behi nd the vehi cl e and ar ms the
mi nes. Per sonnel r emove tempor ar y mar ker s i nstal l ed by the si ti ng-and-
recordi ng party and repl ace the end row markers wi th permanent markers.
When Vehi cl e 1 moves a safe di stance (approxi matel y 25 meters) al ong Row A,
Vehi cl e 2 begi ns to l ay mi nes on Row B. When Vehi cl e 2 moves a safe di stance
al ong Row B, Vehi cl e 3 begi ns to l ay mi nes on Row C.
The mar ki ng par ty conti nues to empl ace the l eft and r i ght boundar y fences
(Fi gure 6-4a, page 6-20).
The I OE party exi ts the mi nefi el d outsi de the l eft (or ri ght) boundary after i t
compl etes the I OE.
When Vehi cl es 1 and 2 fi ni sh thei r assi gned rows, they move past the end row
marker and execute a l eft (or ri ght) turn and wai t for Vehi cl e 3 to compl ete i ts
row. Al l vehi cl es move i n col umn down the l eft (or ri ght) boundary to the mi ne
dump, l oad the next r ows mi nes, and then move to thei r next assi gned r ow.
The process of l ayi ng and armi ng mi nes i s repeated (Fi gure 6-4b, page 6-21).
After the mi nefi el d i s l ai d, al l the vehi cl es exi t down the l eft (or r i ght)
boundar y and out the r ear. The mar ki ng par ty compl etes the r ear boundar y
fence, and the r ecor di ng par ty compl etes DA For m 1355. The OI C or PSG
ensures that the DA Form 1355 i s compl ete and accurate and si gns i t.
Figure 6-3. Site layout
Start
row
markers
Fence location
Landmark 1
End
row
markers
A2
B2
C2
D2
E2
F2
F1
E1
D1
C1
B1
A1
Landmark 2
Mine dump
Intermediate control markers
FM 20-32
6-20 Row Mining
Drill 2
Thi s dri l l may be used to speed up mi ne l ayi ng; however, stri ct C
2
i s vi tal to
ensure securi ty and safety. Thi s method i s di ffi cul t to use when the terr ai n i s
rugged or when weather or vi si bi l i ty i s subject to change.
The dri l l i s conducted by three squad vehi cl es, each l ayi ng one row. Row B has
turni ng poi nts and Rows A and C do not. I f the mi nefi el d has si x rows, Row E
has turni ng poi nts and Rows D and F do not. The squad l eader (l ayi ng l eader)
i n Row B (and Row E, i f requi red) i s i n charge of the overal l l ayi ng.
Squad vehi cl es arri ve on the si te and proceed down the l eft (or ri ght) boundary
of the mi nefi el d to thei r assi gned r ow. Squad vehi cl es move i nto posi ti on at
start row markers and prepare to l ay mi nes.
The l ayi ng l eader di r ects Vehi cl e 1 to move out on Row A. The sapper team
l ays mi nes on the gr ound at the r equi r ed spaci ng. I f an I OE i s r equi r ed, the
Row A team empl aces the I OE concur r entl y wi th Row A and at the same
spaci ng. When Vehi cl e 1 r eaches the I OE shor t-r ow star t mar ker, the l ayi ng
party l ays mi nes al ong an azi muth desi gnated by the l ayi ng l eader (Fi gure 6-
5). After the I OE short row i s l ai d, Vehi cl e 1 returns to Row A and conti nues
l ayi ng mi nes.
Figure 6-4a. Laying a minefield
F
E
D1
C1
B1
A1 A2
B2
C2
D2
E
F
IOE1
I1E I2E
IOE2
I2
I1
Vehicle 1
Vehicle 2
Vehicle 3
Landmark
L
a
n
d
m
a
r
k
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-21
Figure 6-4b. Laying a minefield (continued)
Figure 6-5. Laying an IOE short row
I2E
I1E
IOE1
I1
I2
A1
B1
C1
D1
E1
F1
F2
E2
D2
C2
B2
A2
IOE2
Landmark 2
L
a
n
d
m
a
r
k
1
First mine in the IOE
short row
6
m
Row A
6 m
15 m
FM 20-32
6-22 Row Mining
After al l the mi nes ar e l ai d, the ar mi ng par ty moves behi nd the vehi cl e and
arms the mi nes. Per sonnel remove temporary mar kers and repl ace start and
end r ow mar k er s wi th per manent mar k er s. The ar mi ng par ty must be
di sti ngui shabl e fr om ever yone el se. The l ast member of the ar mi ng par ty
shoul d wear a col or ed vest or car r y a speci fi c col or ed chem-l i ght. No one i s
al l owed behi nd the l ast member of the armi ng party.
The NCOI C compl etes a str i p feeder r epor t (Fi gur e 6-6) and gi ves i t to the
recordi ng party. The stri p feeder report i ncl udes the number of mi nes l ai d, the
type of mi nes l ai d, azi muths of I OE stri ps and turni ng poi nts, AHDs empl aced
(by cl uster number ), and any other i nfor mati on (such as omi tted mi nes) the
pl atoon l eader requi res.
Vehi cl e 1 moves down Row A and l ays mi nes unti l the l ayi ng l eader di rects i t
to stop. (The l ayi ng l eader chooses vehi cl e stops to coi nci de wi th the l ocati ons
of tur ni ng poi nts.) The l ayi ng l eader then di r ects Vehi cl e 3 to begi n l ayi ng
mi nes al ong Row C. Vehi cl e 3 l ays mi nes on Row C unti l the l ayi ng l eader
di rects i t to stop (somewhere wel l past Vehi cl e 1).
Vehi cl e 2 moves towar d Vehi cl e 1 and begi ns to l ay mi nes on Row B. He l ays
mi nes to wi thi n 15 meters of Vehi cl e 1. Vehi cl e 2 then turns toward Vehi cl e 3
and l ays mi nes on Row B to wi thi n 15 meters of Vehi cl e 3. Vehi cl e 2 then turns
back towar d Vehi cl e 1 and conti nues to l ay mi nes i n thi s pattern unti l Row B
i s l ai d.
Fi gure 6-7 shows vehi cl e posi ti ons when usi ng the above method to l ay a row
mi nefi el d.
NOTES:
1. At night or during low visibility, Vehicle 1 has two red flashlights
and Vehicle 3has two green flashlights. The flashlights are held side
by side, and pointed toward Vehicle 2. The driver of Vehicle 2moves
forward until he is within 15 meters of the lights or until the light
holder turns thelights off.
STRIP FEEDER REPORT FOR STRIP/ROW _________
Type of
Mine
Number
of Mines
AHDs by
Cluster
IOE-Strip
Azimuth
Turning-Point
Azimuth
Remarks
Figure 6-6. Sample strip feeder report
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-23
2. I f the platoon leader feels that low visibility or other reasons
preclude the use of vehicle positions as turning points, he may have
the siting party emplace turning-point markers (three intermediate
markers) for Vehicle 2 to use as a guide. I n this event, the three
vehicles emplacemines simultaneously.
After Vehi cl es 1 and 2 fi ni sh thei r assi gned rows, they move past the end row
mar ker, execute a l eft (or r i ght) tur n, and wai t for Vehi cl e 3 to compl ete i ts
row. Al l the vehi cl es move i n col umn down the l eft (or ri ght) boundary to thei r
next assi gned r ow, i f ther e i s one, and conti nue to l ay and ar m mi nes. Thi s
Figure 6-7. Laying a row minefield
IOE2
A2
B2
C2
Vehicle 1
IOE1
A1
B1
C1
Vehicle 2
Vehicle 3
Vehicle 1
IOE1
A1
B1
C1
Vehicle 2
Vehicle 3
Step 1: Vehicle 1 lays mines until it is stopped by the laying leader.
Step 2: Vehicle 3 lays mines until it is stopped by the laying leader.
IOE2
A2
B2
C2
Vehicle 1
IOE1
A1
B1
C1
Vehicle 2
Vehicle 3
IOE2
A2
B2
C2
Step 3: Vehicle 2 lays mines, turns at Vehicle 1, and lays mines toward Vehicle 3.
IOE1
A1
B1
C1
Vehicle 1
Vehicle 2
Vehicle 3
IOE2
A2
B2
C2
Step 4: Vehicle 1 repeats Step 1, to include emplacing IOE strips.
FM 20-32
6-24 Row Mining
process i s repeated unti l the enti re mi nefi el d i s l ai d. Al l the vehi cl es then exi t
the mi nefi el d down the l eft (or ri ght) boundary and out the rear. The marki ng
party compl etes the r ear boundar y fence, and the r ecordi ng par ty compl etes
DA Form 1355. The OI C or PSG ensur es that the DA For m 1355 i s compl ete
and accurate and si gns i t.
IMMEDIATE-ACTION DRILL
I f the enemy attacks the pl atoon dur i ng mi nefi el d empl acement, the l ayi ng
party shoul d execute the fol l owi ng acti ons:
Sapper teams enter vehi cl es and recover spaci ng sandbags.
Vehi cl e 1 exi ts the mi nefi el d by maki ng a wi de turn around the front
of the other two vehi cl es.
Vehi cl e 2 fol l ows by maki ng a wi de turn around the front of Vehi cl e 3.
Vehi cl e 3 exi ts the mi nefi el d.
The three squads conduct the i mmedi ate-acti on dri l l as ordered by the
pl atoon l eader.
SQUAD DRILL
Dur i ng r ow mi ni ng, the squad i n each l ayi ng vehi cl e per for ms the fol l owi ng
acti ons:
Squad l eader.
Di rects the squad to start l ayi ng mi nes.
Supervi ses mi ne armi ng and pl aci ng.
Al l ocates a vehi cl e, i f possi bl e, to hel p remove spoi l from the si te.
Carri er team.
Moves the APC to the row start poi nt.
Lowers the APC ramp unti l i t i s hori zontal or opens the rear door.
(I f usi ng the APC ramp to di stri bute mi nes, chai ns the ramp open
to support the wei ght.)
Moves the APC at a l ow speed (3 to 5 kph) i n a strai ght l i ne toward
the row end poi nt.
Sapper team.
Sol di er 1 ti es the rope to the end of the l owered ramp or the tow
pi ntl e.
Sol di er 2 ti es the par ti al l y fi l l ed sandbag on the other end of the
r ope. (The r ope l ength fr om th e en d of the r amp door to the
sandbag i s the correct spaci ng between mi nes [Fi gure 6-8]).
Sol di er 3 (squad l eader ) posi ti ons the team members. Sol di er 1 i s
at the r ear of the compar tment, Sol di er 2 si ts on the edge of the
APC ramp or open door, and Sol di er 4 wal ks behi nd the APC.
Sol di er 1 fuses a mi ne and passes i t to Sol di er 2. (Korea Only: If
AP mines arealso laid, they aregiven out simultaneously.)
Sol di er 2 records al l the mi nes i ssued.
Sol di er 2 pl aces the fused mi ne on the ground when the sandbag
ti ed to the rope i s even wi th the pr evi ousl y l ai d mi ne.
Sol di er 3 (squad l eader) wal ks behi nd the vehi cl e and supervi ses
mi ne l ayi ng.
C2, FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-25
Sol di er 4 wal ks behi nd the vehi cl e and arms mi nes.
After the mi ne row i s armed and camoufl aged, Sol di er 4 buri es
pi ns, cl i ps, and shi ppi ng pl ugs 30 centi meter s to the r ear of the
start row marker.
The sapper team repeats the above steps unti l the end of the row
i s reached.
Di ggi ng team, i f needed. (The NCOI C sel ects the mi ne to be buri ed by
each sol di er and supervi ses the operati on.)
Fol l ows the l ayi ng party al ong the fri endl y si de of the row.
Di gs i n mi nes but l eaves them exposed unti l armi ng i s compl ete.
Korea Only: Arms AP mines in a cluster before arming AT
mines.
MARKING, RECORDING, AND REPORTING ROWMINEFIELDS
Mar k i ng pr ocedur es for r ow mi nefi el ds ar e the same as those for other
mi nefi el ds (see Chapter 2).
Row mi nefi el ds are recorded on DA Form 1355 (Fi gur es 6-9a and 6-9b, pages
6-26 and 6-27). Repor ti ng pr ocedur es for i ntent, i ni ti ati on, status, and
compl eti on reports are detai l ed i n Chapter 8.
STANDARDIZED TACTICAL ROWMINEFIELDS
The speci fi c composi ti on of a tacti cal r ow mi nefi el d depends on METT-TC
factor s an d av ai l abl e r es ou r ces. To ai d i n s tan dar di zati on of pl atoon
techni ques, four composi ti ons have been devel oped to match desi r ed obstacl e
effects. Usi ng standar di zed mi nefi el ds faci l i tates pl anni ng the obstacl e type,
si ze, and l ogi sti cal r equi r ements. I t i s i mper ati ve that the desi gn and the
effect of these mi nefi el ds ar e wel l under stood. They ar e an i ntegr al par t of
combi ned ar ms obstacl e doctr i ne and for m the cor ner stone of engi neer
obstacl e oper ati ons.
Figure 6-8. Measuring distances between mines with sandbags
Siting
picket
Driver
Air guard
Spotter/feeder
Layer
Mine
Mine
Start row marker
6 m
C2, FM 20-32
6-26 Row Mining
Figure 6-9a. Sample DA Form 1355 for a row minefield (front)
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-27
Figure 6-9b. Sample DA Form 1355 for a row minefield (back)
FM 20-32
6-28 Row Mining
DISRUPT AND FIX
Di srupt and fi x row mi nefi el ds (Fi gure 6-10) ar e si mi l arl y constr ucted, but a
fi x mi nefi el d has an I OE and does not have AHDs.
Disrupt Fix
Front 250 m 250 m
Depth 100 m 120 m
Rows of AT full-width mines 1 1
Rows of AT track-width mines 2 2
IOE No Yes
AHD No No
Platoon hours required 1.5 1.5
Full-width mines 42 63
Track-width mines 84 84
Density 0.5 0.6
Figure 6-10. Standardized disrupt and fix row minefields
1
0
0
m
5
0
m
6 m
Row A
Row B
Row C
DISRUPT
250 m
1
2
0
m
5
0
m
I3 Marker
I2 Marker
I1 Marker
Row A
Row B
Row C
IOE
FIX
250 m
15 m
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-29
Di srupt and fi x row mi nefi el ds are empl aced as fol l ows:
Row A.
42 ful l -wi dth AT mi nes (ti l t-rod) are pl aced 6 meters apart.
No turni ng poi nts.
Mi nes are surface-l ai d (staked) or buri ed.
Row B.
Start and end row markers are empl aced 50 meters behi nd Row A.
42 track-wi dth AT mi nes are pl aced 6 meters apart.
Preferabl y no more than 3 turni ng poi nts.
Mi nes are surface-l ai d or buri ed.
Row C.
Empl aced 100 meters behi nd Row A.
I OE (fi x mi nefi el d onl y).
3 I OE short rows.
A separate I OE basel i ne.
The I OE basel i ne i s on the enemy si de, 15 meters from Row A.
7 ful l -wi dth ATmi nes are pl aced 6 meters apart on each I OE short
row.
Mi nes are buri ed.
The fi rst I OE short row i s pl aced 48 meters from the I OE end
mar ker, the next shor t r ow i s 84 meter s fr om the fi r st shor t r ow,
and the thi rd short row i s 84 meters from the second short row.
TURN
A tur n mi nefi el d (Fi gur e 6-11, page 6-30) consi sts of four r ows of ful l -wi dth
mi nes and two rows of track-wi dth mi nes.
A turn row mi nefi el d i s empl aced as fol l ows:
Row A.
Row B.
FM 20-32
6-30 Row Mining
Row C.
Front 500 m
Depth 300 m
Rows of AT full-width mines 4
Rows of AT track-width mines 2
IOE No
AHD No
Platoon hours required 3.5
Full-width mines 336
Track-width mines 168
Density 1.0
Figure 6-11. Standardized turn row minefield
NOTE: The center of the minefield shown in this figure is
omitted for clarity.
6 m
5
0
m
1
0
0
m
5
0
m
1
0
0
m
500 m
Row A
Row B
Row C
Row D
Row E
Row F
1
0
0
m
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-31
Row D.
Empl aced 100 meters behi nd Row C.
Row E.
Start and end row markers are empl aced 50 meters behi nd Row D.
Row F.
Empl aced 100 meters behi nd Row D.
BLOCK
A bl ock mi nefi el d (Fi gure 6-12, page 6-32) has an I OE (Korea Only: and AP
mines) and has 20 percent AHDs i n two of i ts rows of ful l -wi dth mi nes. AHDs
ar e pl aced i n Rows B and C for the best effect. (Korea Only: A block
minefield also requires 84M16or M14AP mines and has a density of
0.17M16/M14AP mineper linear meter.)
A bl ock row mi nefi el d i s empl aced as fol l ows:
Row A.
Row B.
Row C.
FM 20-32
6-32 Row Mining
Front 500 m
Depth 320 m
Rows of AT full-width mines 4
Rows of AT track-width mines 2
IOE Yes
AHD Yes
Platoon hours required 5
Full-width mines 378
Track-width mines 168
AT mine density 1.1
Korea Only:
AP frag mines
84
Korea Only:
AP mine density
0.17
Figure 6-12. Standardized block row minefield
6 m
1
5
m
5
0
m
1
2
0
m
1
0
0
m
5
0
m
NOTE: The center of the minefield shown
in this figure is omitted for clarity.
500 m
AP mine employment
IOE
I1 marker
I6 marker
Row A
Row B
Row C
Row D
Row E
Row F
1
0
0
m
FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-33
Row D.
Empl aced 100 meters behi nd Row C.
Row E.
Start and end row markers are empl aced 50 meters behi nd Row D.
Row F.
Empl aced 100 meters behi nd Row D.
I OE.
6 I OE short rows.
A separate I OE basel i ne.
7 ful l -wi dth ATmi nes are pl aced 6 meters apart on each I OE short
row.
Mi nes are buri ed.
The fi r st I OE shor t r ow i s pl aced 72 meter s fr om the I OE end
mar ker , and the fi ve subsequent I OE shor t r ows ar e pl aced at
72-meter i nterval s on the I OE basel i ne.
Korea Only: AP mines.
AP mines areplaced on two rows of full-width AT mines.
AP mines areplaced in a cluster around AT mines.
OneAP mineis placed in front of every other AT mine.
HASTY PROTECTIVE ROWMINEFIELDS
Hasty protecti ve row mi nefi el ds are temporary i n nature and are used as part
of a uni t's defensi ve peri meter. Uni ts usual l y use mi nes from thei r basi c l oad.
I f ti me per mi ts, mi nes shoul d be bur i ed to i ncr ease thei r effecti veness, but
they can be surface-l ai d. The mi nefi el d can be easi l y recovered because AHDs,
nonmetal l i c mi nes, or l ow-metal l i c mi nes ar e not used. Mi nes ar e empl oyed
ou tsi de th e han d-gr en ade r an ge but wi th i n the r ange of s mal l -cal i ber
weapons. Al l mi nes ar e pi cked up by the empl aci ng uni t upon l eavi ng the
FM 20-32
6-34 Row Mining
area, unl ess enemy pressure prevents mi ne retri eval or the mi nefi el d i s bei ng
transferred to a rel i evi ng commander.
RULES
The br i gade commander has the i ni ti al authori ty to empl oy hasty protecti ve
row mi nefi el ds. Thi s authori ty may be del egated to the battal i on or company
commander on a mi ssi on-by-mi ssi on basi s.
Most of the r ul es gover ni ng hasty pr otecti ve r ow mi ni ng ar e defi ned i n
STANAG 2036. A summar y of those r ul es and some addi ti onal r ul es that
appl y are shown bel ow.
Rows.
Rows are marked and recorded. They are desi gnated by l etters (A,
B, and so forth) wi th Row A bei ng cl osest to the enemy.
The mi ni mum di stance between rows of AT mi nes i s 8 meters.
Korea Only: Theminimumdistancebetween any rowand a
rowcontainingAP mines is 15meters.
The di stance between the start row marker and the fi rst mi ne i n a
row i s the mi ne spaci ng for that row.
An I OE row i s not used.
Start and end row markers are permanent markers and must be
made of detectabl e materi al .
General .
The spaci ng between mi nes i s at l east 4 meters to prevent
sympatheti c detonati on. Ther e i s no maxi mum di stance between
mi nes wi thi n the row.
Mi nes are at l east 15 meters from the peri meter fence.
The mi nefi el d must be fenced on al l si des i f M18A1 AP mi nes are
empl oyed and the mi nefi el d wi l l be i n pl ace for mor e than 72
hours.
The mi nefi el d has at l east one l andmark that i s l ocated to the rear,
never to the extreme si de or front.
The mi nefi el d has an easi l y i denti fi abl e RP (tree, stump, stake).
Measurements are i n meters.
AHDs, nonmetal l i c mi nes, or l ow-metal l i c mi nes are not used.
Mi nefi el ds are recorded on DA Form 1355-1-R (see Chapter 8).
SITE LAYOUT
Requesti ng and r ecei vi ng per mi ssi on to l ay mi nes i s the fi r st step when
empl aci ng a hasty pr otecti ve r ow mi nefi el d. The next step i s conducti ng a
thor ough l eader 's r econnai ssance of the pr oposed mi nefi el d ar ea. I denti fy
mi ne l ocati ons that cover l i kel y AAs, enhance key weapon systems, and cover
dead space. Establ i sh an easi l y i denti fi abl e RP between the mi nefi el d and the
uni t posi ti on. From the RP, vi sual i ze mi nes as runni ng i n rows paral l el to the
uni t posi ti on (Fi gur e 6-13). After the RP i s establ i shed and the mi nefi el d i s
C2, FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-35
vi sual i zed, compl ete recor di ng and empl ace the mi nes, but do not ar m them.
Thi s procedure si mpl i fi es recordi ng and makes retri eval qui cker and safer.
MineRows
The r ow cl osest to the enemy i s desi gnated as Row A; succeedi ng r ows ar e
desi gnated B, C, D, and so on. The ends of r ows ar e shown by two end r ow
markers. They are l abel ed wi th the l etter of the row and the number 1 for the
ri ght end of the row or the number 2 for the l eft end of the row. The rows are
numbered from ri ght to l eft, faci ng the enemy. The marker shoul d be an easi l y
i denti fi abl e object, such as a wooden stake wi th a nai l or a steel pi cket so that
i t can be found wi th an AN/PSS-12 mi ne detector.
LayingProcedures
Fr om the RP, the l eader measur es the magneti c azi muth, i n degr ees, to a
sel ected poi nt on the ri ght si de (faci ng the enemy) of the tentati ve mi nefi el d.
He paces off the di stance and records i t i n meter s. Thi s poi nt (B1) mar ks the
begi nni ng of the second row. The l eader pl aces a marker at B1 and records the
azi muth and the di stance on DA Form 1355-1-R.
Figure 6-13. Site layout
A
2
A
1
B
2
B
1
RP
End row markers
Row B
Row A
FM 20-32
6-36 Row Mining
From B1, the l eader measur es the azi muth and di stance to a second poi nt on
the ri ght si de of the mi nefi el d (faci ng the enemy). He pl aces a mar ker at thi s
poi nt (A1), and records the i nformati on.
The l eader measures the di stance and the azi muth from A1 to the l ocati on of
the fi rst mi ne i n that row. The di stance (or spaci ng) from the end row marker
to the fi rst mi ne i s the mi ne spaci ng for that row. After the l eader records the
l ocati on, the mi ne i s empl aced, but i t i s not armed.
The di stance and azi muth ar e measur ed fr om the fi r st mi ne to the second
mi ne, and so on, unti l al l the mi nes ar e empl aced and the l ocati ons ar e
r ecor ded. Thi s pr ocedur e i s r epeated for the second r ow. As each mi ne i s
recorded, i t i s assi gned a number to i denti fy i t i n the mi nefi el d record.
When the l ast mi ne l ocati on i s r ecor ded for a r ow, the di stance and the
azi muth are measured from that poi nt to another arbi trary poi nt, A2 or B2. A
marker i s pl aced her e i n the same manner as A1 and B1. Next, the di stance
and azi muth from the RP to B2 and from B2 to A2 are measured and recorded.
When al l the mi nes have been pl aced and r ecor ded, the l eader measur es the
di stance and the azi muth between the RP and a per manent l andmar k that
can be found on the map. He r ecor ds the i nfor mati on on DA For m 1355-1-R.
The l andmar k i s used to assi st other s i n l ocati ng the mi n efi el d i f i t i s
transferred or unexpectedl y abandoned.
Mi nes can be armed after recordi ng i s compl ete. Mi nes nearest the enemy are
ar med fi r st, al l owi ng sol di er s to safel y wor k thei r way back to the uni t
posi ti on. Pi ns and cl i ps are buri ed 30 centi meters behi nd row markers, the RP,
or any easi l y i denti fi abl e, accessi bl e l ocati on. Recor d the l ocati on of the pi ns
and cl i ps i n the remarks secti on of DA Form 1355-1-R. The l eader then reports
the compl eti on of the mi nefi el d to hi gher headquarters.
I f the mi nefi el d i s tr ansfer r ed to another uni t, the tr ansfer r i ng uni t l eader
br i efs the gai ni ng uni t l eader. The gai ni ng uni t l eader si gns and dates the
mi nes-tr ansfer r ed bl ock on the DA For m 1355-1-R. The for m i s destr oyed
when the mi nefi el d i s r emoved. I f the mi nefi el d i s abandoned unexpectedl y,
the DA Form 1355-1-R i s forwarded to hi gher headquarters.
MineRemoval
When removi ng mi nes from a hasty pr otecti ve row mi nefi el d, the l eader fi rst
deter mi nes the best method to use:
I f the mi nefi el d has been under constant observati on from the ti me i t
was l ai d and has not been tampered wi th, the squad l eader di rects the
personnel who l ai d the mi nes to pi ck up the same mi nes. He uses DA
Form 1355-1-R preceded by a mi ne detector to determi ne the types of
mi nes to be removed and where they are l ocated.
I f the mi nefi el d has not been under constant observati on, may have
been tamper ed wi th, or the per sonnel who l ai d the mi nes ar e not
avai l abl e or do not r emember the l ocati on of the mi nes, the squad
l eader uses DA For m 1355-1-R and a cl ear ance team as outl i ned i n
Chapter 11 to l ocate and remove mi nes.
C2, FM 20-32
Row Mining 6-37
The l eader r etr i eves safety devi ces, shi ppi ng pl ugs, and other i tems that
accompani ed the empl aced mi nes. Usi ng the azi muths and di stances provi ded
on the DA Form 1355-1-R, the removal team starts at the RP and moves to B1.
They then move from B1 to the mi ne and remove the mi ne. I f B1 i s destroyed,
the team moves fr om the RP to B2. The team then shoots a back azi muth
(subtr act 180 degr ees) fr om the r ecor ded azi muth fr om B2 to the fi r st mi ne
and r emoves the mi ne. Per sonnel conti nue thi s pr ocess unti l al l the mi nes
have been removed. The stakes at Al , B1, A2, and B2 are necessary because i t
i s safer to fi nd a stake than to fi nd an armed mi ne.
The removal team observes basi c safety precauti ons by mai ntai ni ng 30 meters
between personnel , not runni ng, and movi ng onl y i n cl ear ed ar eas. The team
star ts wi th the r ow cl osest to the defender and wor ks towar d the enemy.
Personnel
Check the si des and bottoms of the mi nes for AHDs, and di sarm or
mark the mi nes as they are found.
Repl ace al l pi ns, cl i ps, and other safety devi ces before the mi nes are
removed from the ground.
Turn armi ng di al s to SAFE or UNARMED; or i f mi nes have screw-
type fuses, remove the fuses and take them away from the mi nes.
Li ft the mi nes from the hol es after they have been rendered safe.
I f a mi ne was put i n pl ace and kept i n si ght by the i ndi vi dual who
removes i t, he l i fts i t di rectl y from the hol e after renderi ng i t safe.
I f a mi ne has not been kept i n si ght, the i ndi vi dual attaches a
60-meter rope or wi re to the mi ne, takes cover, and pul l s the mi ne
from the hol e.
As each mi ne i s removed, pl ace a ti ck mark besi de i t on the DA Form
1355-1-R.
Assembl e al l the mi nes i n one l ocati on for accountabi l i ty.
NOTE: AHDs are not used in hasty protective row minefields.
However, as a safety precaution, consider all mines to be equipped
with AHDs until proven otherwise.
The l eader confi rms the removal of the mi nes and accounts for the number of
mi nes, by type, as recorded on the DA Form 1355-1-R. The l eader may fi nd i t
necessary to confi rm an expl oded mi ne to account for al l the mi nes.
To confi r m a mi ne expl osi on that was not wi tnessed, i denti fy the cr ater or
traces of burnt soi l made by the detonated mi ne and pl ace a ti ck mark besi de
the mi ne number on the DA For m 1355-1-R. Ensure that the cr ater found i n
the vi ci ni ty of the mi ne was caused by a l and mi ne and not by arti l l ery. A mi ne
cr ater i s nor mal l y ci r cul ar, and i t shows tr aces of bur nt soi l . The i mpact and
the soi l di spersi on of arti l l ery i s normal l y el ongated.
The squad l eader confi rms that each mi ne i s di sarmed and safe. The removal
team cl eans and r epacks ser vi ceabl e mi nes for futur e use and destr oys the
other s; they r epack ser vi ceabl e mi nes i n thei r or i gi nal contai ner s and stor e
them accor di ng to the uni t SOP and l ocal r egul ati ons. The r emoval team
FM 20-32
6-38 Row Mining
removes and stores the row markers. The l eader submi ts a report to hi s hi gher
headquar ters stati ng that the mi nefi el d has been r emoved and that the area
i s cl ear.
Standard-Pattern Minefields 7-1
Chapter 7
Standard-Pattern Minefields
Empl aci ng standar d-patter n mi nefi el ds i s l abor i ous and ti me-consumi ng,
but i t al l ows better mi ne conceal ment than row mi ni ng. Standard-pattern
l ayi ng i s wel l sui ted for protecti ve and nui sance mi nefi el ds. I t can be used
i n t e r r a i n wh er e t h e n a t u r e of t h e gr ou n d ma k e s r ow mi n i n g
i mpracti cabl e.
To achi eve thei r maxi mum effect, mi nes must be l ai d so that they cannot
be seen and so that a vehi cl e's wheel or tr ack or a per sons foot exer ts
enough pr essure to detonate them.
The method used to l ay mi nes depends on the mi ne oper ati on, the type of
ground i n whi ch the mi ne i s to be l ai d, and the type of ground cover that i s
avai l abl e for camoufl age.
COMPONENTS
MINE STRIPS
The mi ne str i p i s the foundati on of a standar d-patter n mi nefi el d. I f a mi ne
str i p was l ai d i n one str ai ght l i ne, the enemy coul d easi l y l ocate the mi nes;
ther efor e, mi ne str i ps ar e l ai d i n sever al segments as shown i n Fi gur e 7-1,
page 7-2.
When si ti ng, l ayi ng, an d r ecor di ng mi n e str i ps , al l measu r emen ts ar e
expr essed i n meter s. Di r ecti ons ar e r ecor ded as magneti c azi muths, i n
degrees.
MINE CLUSTERS
The cl uster i s the basi c uni t of a mi nefi el d. I t consi sts of one to fi ve mi nes that
ar e l ai d wi thi n a 2-meter -r adi us semi ci r cl e (Fi gur e 7-2, page 7-3). When
cl usters are pl aced i n a mi ne stri p, they are numbered progressi vel y and may
consi st of
One AT mi ne.
Korea Only: OneAT mineand oneto four AP mines.
Korea Only: Oneto fiveAP mines.
FM 20-32
7-2 Standard-Pattern Minefields
Cl usters are pl aced at 6-meter i nter val s, center to center, to for m r ows. Two
paral l el rows, 6 meters apart, form a mi ne stri p. The arrangement of cl usters
i n a mi ne stri p i s shown i n Fi gure 7-3.
RULES FOR POSITIONING CLUSTERS WITHIN A STRIP
The fi r st cl uster i s pl aced on the enemy si de of the str i p centerl i ne, 6 meters
fr om the begi nni ng-of-str i p mar ker . The fol l owi ng cl uster s ar e number ed
consecuti vel y. Odd-number ed cl uster s ar e al ways on the enemy si de of the
Figure 7-1. Minefield layout
Marking of IOE
strips
IOE baseline
ENEMY
IOE1
IOE2
i1
i2
i3
15 m (min)
Turning point
A2
B2
Cluster omitted
End points of
mine strip
A1
B1
15 m (min)
2
4
6
8
10
12
1
3
5
9
11
15 m (min)
C1
C2
Strip segment
End points of
mine strip
FM 20-32
stri p centerl i ne. The di recti on of l ayi ng fol l ows the numberi ng (A1 to A2, B1 to
B2, and so on).
The I OE i s normal l y the fi rst part of the mi nefi el d encountered by the enemy.
I t consi sts of a basel i ne from whi ch short stri ps are extended (Fi gure 7-4, page
7-4). Short stri ps al ong the I OE decei ve the enemy on the mi nefi el ds pattern,
spaci ng, and si ze. I OE pl acement and composi ti on are l argel y di ctated by the
Individual laying of AT mine (to
be at base of cluster)
Korea Only: Cluster with one
AT mine plus several AP mines
within or on a 2-meter semicir-
cle of the AT mine (the AT mine
must be the base mine)
Korea Only: Individual laying
of AP mine (to be at base of
cluster)
Korea Only: Cluster with sev-
eral AP mines within or on a 2-
meter semicircle of the center
AP mine (the most easily
detected mine is the base
mine)
Figure 7-2. Cluster compositions
Figure 7-3. Arrangement of clusters in a mine strip
2 m
3 m 3 m 3 m 3 m
6 m 6 m
Centerline
3 m
3 m
ENEMY
Beginning-of-
strip marker
6 m
FM 20-32
ti me al l owed for l ayi ng the mi nefi el d, terrai n condi ti ons at the l ayi ng si te, and
the tacti cal si tuati on.
The I OE basel i ne extends fr om one end poi nt (I OE1) to another end poi nt
(I OE2). The l ayi ng di r ecti on i s i ndi cated by end-of-str i p mar ker s. Layi ng
al way s begi ns at I OE1. I nter medi ate or tur ni n g poi n ts ar e mar k ed i n
consecuti ve or der begi nni ng wi th I 1. On the enemy si de of the I OE basel i ne,
shor t str i ps ar e extended fr om tur ni ng poi nts at i r r egul ar angl es. They ar e
i denti fi ed by turni ng-poi nt markers.
Turni ng poi nts shoul d be no more than 45 degrees from the l ast azi muth. The
l ength of short stri ps i s not standard. A marker i s empl aced at the end of each
shor t str i p. Mar ker s ar e number ed i n consecuti ve or der begi nni ng wi th I 1E
for recor di ng purposes. No tri p wi res are used i n the I OE, but AHDs may be
empl oyed.
Korea Only: AP mines actuated by trip wires areplaced on theenemy
side of each regular strip. No more than one mine per cluster uses
trip wires, and no more than two trip wires extend from the mine.
Trip wires are angled toward the enemy and should be at least 2
meters fromthecluster, thelaneborder, and theminefield boundary.
Trip wires are only used with AP fragmentation mines; they are not
considered to beAHDs.
STANDARD-PATTERN MINEFIELD RULES
Th e fol l owi n g r u l es appl y to tacti cal an d pr otecti v e s tandar d-patter n
mi nefi el ds. They do not appl y to nui sance mi nefi el ds.
Clusters
A cl uster i s a 2-meter-radi us semi ci rcl e l ocated 3 meters off the stri p
centerl i ne.
There are two types of cl ustersl i ve and omi tted.
Figure 7-4. IOE baseline with short strips
I3E
I2E
I1E
IOE1 IOE2
I3
I2
I1
IOE short strips
IO
E
b
a
s
e
lin
e
FM 20-32
A l i ve cl uster contai ns one AT mi ne. (Korea Only: A livecluster
contains as many as five mines, only one can be an AT
mine).
Omi tted cl usters do not contai n mi nes, but they are numbered and
recorded on DA Form 1355 (see Chapter 8).
Cl usters are omi tted wi thi n l anes and gaps; i n areas l ess than 2
meters from boundari es, l anes, or another cl uster (i ncl udi ng the I OE);
and i n areas where the terrai n (trees, rocks) prohi bi ts empl acement.
The base mi ne i n a l i ve cl uster i s the fi rst mi ne l ai d. I t i s 3 meters
from the stri p centerl i ne.
When a l i ve cl uster contai ns an AT mi ne, the mi ne i s al ways used as
the base mi ne. (Korea Only: If an AT mine is not present, the
largest metallic AP mineis thebasemine.)
The fi rst cl uster i n a mi ne stri p i s l ocated on the enemy si de, 6 meters
from the begi nni ng-of-stri p marker.
The mi ni mum di stance between a cl uster and a l ane, a gap, a
boundar y, or another cl uster i s 2 meter s (measur ed fr om the edge of
the cl uster).
Cl uster composi ti on i s the number of mi nes, by type, i n any cl uster i n
a speci fi c group.
Cl uster composi ti on remai ns the same through the enti re mi ne stri p
and i s recorded on DA Form 1355.
Korea Only: Thetypes of AP mines may vary within a cluster.
The cl uster boundary must at l east 15 meters from the mi nefi el d
peri meter fence.
Cl usters are numbered, begi nni ng wi th the fi rst cl uster on the enemy
si de. Odd-number ed cl uster s ar e al ways on the enemy si de of the
stri p, and even-numbered cl usters are al ways on the fri endl y si de.
Regular Strips
A regul ar stri p (someti mes referred to as a lettered strip) consi sts of a
stri p centerl i ne and two r ows of cl usters (Row 1, enemy si de; Row 2,
fri endl y si de).
Regul ar stri ps are marked and recorded. They are desi gnated by
l etters (A, B, and so forth), wi th Stri p A bei ng cl osest to the enemy.
A standard-pattern mi nefi el d contai ns at l east three regul ar stri ps.
The mi ni mum di stance between stri p centerl i nes i s 15 meters; there i s
no maxi mum di stance.
Safety tapes are used to ensure that personnel i nstal l i ng tri p wi res do
not move for war d i nto ar med cl uster s. A safety tape i s used behi nd
each regul ar stri p. Safety tapes are 8 meters from the stri p centerl i ne
(3 meters from the outer edge of the cl uster).
FM 20-32
The marki ng of end poi nts i ndi cates the di recti on of l ayi ng (for
exampl e, A1 to A2).
IOE
The I OE consi sts of a basel i ne from whi ch short stri ps are extended.
The I OE i s l ocated on the enemy si de of the mi nefi el d.
The number of cl usters i n an I OE i s approxi matel y one-thi rd the
number used i n a regul ar stri p.
The fi rst cl uster al ong a short stri p i s pl aced on the enemy si de and
must be at l east 6 meters from the I OE basel i ne; the cl uster boundary
must be at l east 2 meter s fr om the I OE basel i ne (Fi gur e 7-5). I f the
shor t str i p i s exactl y par al l el to the enemy di r ecti on of tr avel , the
NCOI C desi gnates the enemy si de of the stri p.
The I OE basel i ne i s l abel ed at the begi nni ng (I OE1) and end (I OE2)
accordi ng to the di recti on mi nes are empl aced.
Short stri ps are l abel ed at turni ng poi nts (I 1) and at the end (I 1E).
The I OE contai ns a safety tape that i s 2 meters behi nd the I OE
basel i ne and runs paral l el wi th i t.
The I OE basel i ne i s at l east 15 meters from any poi nt of the stri p
centerl i ne of a regul ar stri p; there i s no maxi mum di stance.
An I OE short stri p i s at l east 15 meters from another I OE short stri p;
there i s no maxi mum di stance.
AHDs may be empl oyed.
IOE Short Strips
Short stri ps ori gi nate from turni ng poi nts al ong the I OE basel i ne.
The number and l ength of short stri ps depend on the tacti cal si tuati on
and the resources avai l abl e.
Trip Wires (Korea Only)
Trip wires arenot used in an IOE.
Trip wires may be used in regular strips, but only one mine
per cluster may beactuated by a trip wire.
Trip wires areemployed no closer than every third cluster.
No morethan two trip wires can beused on onemine.
Trip wires areused only on theenemy sideof thestrip.
Trip wires arenot considered AHDs.
Trip wires are located at least 2 meters from a lane, a safety
tape, a cluster, another trip wire, the IOE baseline, and the
minefield perimeter fence.
Trip wires can only beused with AP fragmentation mines.
TurningPoints
Cl usters must be at l east 3 meters from turni ng poi nts.
FM 20-32
The fi rst cl uster after a turni ng poi nt i s l ai d on the opposi te si de of the
stri p centerl i ne from the l ast cl uster before the turni ng poi nt.
The angl e of any gi ven turni ng poi nt cannot exceed 45 degrees from
the l ast azi muth. (Thi s ensur es a mi ni mum di stance of 2 meter s
between cl uster boundari es i n the same row.)
Lanes
Mi nefi el d l anes (Fi gure 7-6, page 7-8) are used by di smounted patrol s
and vehi cl es.
Lanes are si ted before l ayi ng begi ns.
Lane l ocati ons shoul d not be obvi ous.
Cl usters are not l ai d wi thi n 2 meters of l ane edges.
Lanes are zi gzagged, not strai ght.
Lanes cross the stri p centerl i ne at approxi matel y ri ght angl es.
Di recti on changes wi l l not exceed 45 degrees. (Thi s ensur es that l ong
vehi cl es wi l l be abl e to negoti ate turns.)
The number of l anes must be suffi ci ent to ensure that no one l ane i s
overused and turned i nto an obvi ous track.
Suffi ci ent mi nes are stockpi l ed so that the responsi bl e uni t can cl ose
l anes suspected of bei ng l ocated by the enemy.
Recommended mi nefi el d l ane wi dths are
Footpath: 1 meter.
Figure 7-5. Clusters on an IOE short strip
ENEMY
2 m (min)
Short strip
3
m
3
m
6
m
5
3
1
2
4
I1
IO
E
b
a
s
e
lin
e
I1E
FM 20-32
One-way vehi cl e l ane: 8 meters.
Two-way vehi cl e l ane: 16 meters.
Gaps
Mi nefi el d gaps (Fi gure 7-6) are l eft so that fri endl y forces can pass
through the mi nefi el d i n tacti cal formati on.
Gaps must be at l east 100 meters wi de.
Gaps are si ted before l ayi ng begi ns.
Gaps are l ocated al ong recogni zabl e features (fences, tracks, creeks).
Gaps shoul d run strai ght through a mi nefi el d and not contai n bends.
Suffi ci ent mi nes must be stockpi l ed so that the responsi bl e uni t can
cl ose gaps when necessary.
Gaps shoul d cl osel y resembl e the rest of the mi nefi el d so that they wi l l
not be di scovered by the enemy.
The ground wi thi n a gap shoul d be di sturbed wi th tracks to represent
the passage of a mi ne-carryi ng vehi cl e.
Si gns of mi ne l ayi ng (di ggi ng, scatter ed spoi l , cr ates) shoul d be vi si bl e
i n a gap.
General
The farthest extremi ti es of a regul ar stri p determi ne the mi nefi el d
front.
Mi nefi el d depth i s measured from the fi rst to the l ast stri p and
i ncl udes the I OE (i f appl i cabl e).
Stri ps can be l ai d l eft to ri ght or ri ght to l eft.
Figure 7-6. Minefield lanes and gaps
Gap
Perimeter fence
Lane
100 m
(min)
FM 20-32
The mi nefi el d wi l l have two l andmarks l ocated to the rear, never to
the extreme si de or front.
GPSs can be used to determi ne the coordi nates for mi nefi el d
l andmarks and reference poi nts.
I f l andmarks are more than 200 meters away from the l ast regul ar
str i p or ar e out of the di r ect l i ne of si ght, i nter medi ate mar ker s ar e
pl aced at l east 75 meters from the l ast end-of-stri p marker.
Landmarks can be used for more than one mi nefi el d. They are
recorded on DA Form 1355.
LOGISTICAL CALCULATIONS
Empl aci ng standar d-patter n mi nefi el ds al l ows the uni t to cal cul ate the
number of mi nes requi red for a mi nefi el d accuratel y.
To si mpl i fy the cal cul ati on pr ocess, a mi nefi el d r equi r ements computati on
wor k sheet (Fi gur e 6-1, pages 6-5 through 6-8) has been devel oped. Step-by-
step procedures for compl eti ng the work sheet are shown i n Fi gure 6-2, pages
6-9 through 6-14.
CLUSTER CALCULATION
Accur acy i s essenti al when empl aci ng a standar d-patter n mi nefi el d. The
fol l owi ng check system has been desi gned so that the mi nefi el d OI C can
accuratel y r ecor d the number of mi nes l ai d. Compar e the str i p feeder r epor t
wi th the
Number of pi ns and cl i ps returned by the l ayi ng party.
Mi ne tal l y sheet.
Cl uster computati on.
EXAMPLE: You r ecei ve a str i p feeder r epor t for Str i p A. Ther e ar e 26
cl usters i n the stri p. The stri p has three segments (30, 42, and 21 meters) and
two turni ng poi nts.
Step 1. Add the total l ength of the stri p as determi ned by the recordi ng party.
30 + 42 + 21 = 93 meters
Step 2. The fi rst and l ast cl uster i n the stri p are l ocated 6 meters i n from the
end-of-stri p markers. Subtract 12 from Step 1.
93 - 12 = 81 meters
Step 3. Cl uster s ar e not l ocated on tur ni ng poi nts. Mul ti pl y the number of
turni ng poi nts by 3 and subtract i t from Step 2.
81 - (3 2) = 75 meters
Step 4. Di vi de Step 3 by the cl uster spaci ng.
75 3 = 25 cl usters
Step 5. Add one cl uster , because when a l i ne i s di vi ded, ther e i s one mor e
i nterval than spaci ng.
25 + 1 = 26 cl usters
WARNING
Do not use GPSs to chart or record minefield perimeter coordinates
or to determine safe routes through or around existing minefields.
FM 20-32
Fr om these computati ons, the mi nefi el d OI C i s abl e to cr oss-check the
i nformati on on the stri p feeder report. I n thi s exampl e, Stri p A shoul d have a
total of 26 cl usters, l ess any omi tted cl usters.
PLATOON ORGANIZATION
The pl atoon i s the basi c uni t used to i nstal l a standar d-patter n mi nefi el d.
Or der s to the l ayi ng uni t OI C speci fy the pr oposed l ocati on, the l ength, and
the mi ne type and densi ty. The pl atoon or gani zati on and equi pment ar e
shown i n Tabl e 7-1.
The OI C per for ms a map study, and i f the si tuati on per mi ts, conducts a
gr ound r econnai ssance of the si te. He deter mi nes l ocati ons for mi ne str i ps,
l andmar k s, fences, mi ne du mps, an d appr oaches . Usi n g th e mi nefi el d
requi rements computati on work sheet (Fi gure 6-1, pages 6-5 through 6-8), the
OI C deter mi nes the r equi r ed number of mi nes and other mater i al s. He
ar r anges for mi nes to be del i ver ed and or gani zes the pl atoon i nto si ti ng,
l ayi ng, recordi ng, marki ng, and mi ne-dump parti es.
SitingParty
The si ti ng par ty pl aces boundar y stakes or pi ckets as str i p mar ker s at the
begi nni ng and end of each mi ne str i p and at the poi nts wher e str i ps change
di r ecti on. I t l ays tape on the centerl i nes of each str i p, l ane, and tr affi c path.
After si ti ng i s compl ete, the si ti ng party augments other parti es.
Table 7-1. Platoon organization and equipment
Personnel Officer NCO EM Equipment
Supervisory 1 1 0
Officer: Map, lensatic compass,
notebook, and minefield record
forms
NCO: Map, lensatic compass, and
notebook
Siting party 0 1 3
Stakes or pickets,
sledgehammers, engineer tape on
reels, and nails to peg tape
Marking party 0 1 2
Rolls of barbwire or concertina,
marking signs, lane signs, wire
cutters, gloves, sledgehammers,
pickets, and picket pounder
Recording
party
0 1 2
Sketching equipment, lensatic
compass, minefield record forms,
map, and metric tape
First laying
party
0 1 6-8
Notebook for squad leader, picks,
shovels, and sandbags
Second laying
party
0 1 6-8 Same as first laying party
Third laying
party
0 1 6-8 Same as first laying party
Totals 1 7 25-31
FM 20-32
LayingParties
One l ayi ng par ty i s r esponsi bl e for i nstal l i ng, ar mi ng, and camoufl agi ng al l
the mi nes on a stri p or a porti on of a stri p. Each l ayi ng party i s then assi gned
addi ti onal stri ps.
RecordingParty
The r ecordi ng party obtai ns the necessary reference data, prepares DA For m
1355 (see Chapter 8), and when needed, i nstal l s i ntermedi ate markers.
MarkingParty
The marki ng par ty erects fences and si gns to mark mi nefi el d boundari es and
l anes. After marki ng i s compl ete, the marki ng party augments other parti es.
Mine-Dump Party
The mi ne-dump par ty, contr ol l ed by the PSG, i s composed of per sonnel who
are not worki ng as members of other teams. I t accounts for al l Cl ass I V and V
suppl i es that ar r i ve fr om other sour ces, or gani zes mi ne sets at the mi ne
dump, and haul s addi ti onal suppl i es as r equi red. The PSG i s not r equi red to
stay at the mi ne dump conti nuousl y; he has the fl exi bi l i ty to move around the
area to per form other acti vi ti es.
MINE-EMPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
Mi ne-empl acement pr ocedur es ar e shown i n Fi gur e 7-7. I n the i l l ustr ati on,
the mi nefi el d i s l ai d from ri ght to l eft.
Figure 7-7. Mine-emplacement procedures
First fence
picket
C2
B2
A2
IOE2
I5E
I4E
I3E
I2E
I1E
IOE1
A1
B1
C1
I5
I4
I3
I2
I1
L
a
n
d
m
a
r
k
2
L
a
n
d
m
a
r
k
1
FM 20-32
The OI C arri ves at the si te wi th the si ti ng and marki ng parti es. He goes to the
r i gh t or l eft (dependi n g on th e l ay i n g di r ecti on ) r ear boun dar y of th e
mi nefi el d. Thi s part of the mi nefi el d i s the farthest from the enemy. The OI C
i ndi cates the star ti ng poi nt of the r ear str i p (thi s i s Str i p C i n a thr ee-str i p
mi nefi el d), and the si ti ng party empl aces a begi nni ng-of-stri p marker.
The OI C desi gnates a starti ng poi nt for the mar ki ng party that i s at l east 15
meter s to the r i ght of the boundar y stake. He i ndi cates where the mi nefi el d
mar ki ng fence shoul d be pl aced. The mar ki ng par ty i mmedi atel y begi ns to
i nstal l fence pi ckets, worki ng i n a countercl ockwi se di recti on.
When al l the pi ckets are i nstal l ed, the marki ng party enci rcl es the fi el d wi th a
s i n gl e s tr an d of bar bwi r e (at wai s t h ei gh t) an d empl aces mi n e s i gn s .
Personnel empl ace a second strand of barbwi re i f requi red.
Fr om the boundar y stake of Str i p C, the OI C moves i n the di r ecti on of the
enemy and establ i shes the starti ng poi nt of Stri p B. Str i p centerl i nes shoul d
not be paral l el nor l ess than 15 meters apart. Two members of the si ti ng party
empl ace a begi nni ng-of-str i p mar ker at the star ti ng poi nt of Str i p B. The
remai ni ng two members l ay tape between the two stri ps and fasten the tape to
the gr ound at fr equent i nter val s to pr event movement. Thi s pr ocedur e i s
fol l owed unti l the begi nni ng-of-stri p markers of the three regul ar stri ps (C, B,
and A) and th e I OE on th e r i ght-h and si de of th e mi nefi el d have been
i nstal l ed.
At the I OE begi nni ng-of-stri p marker (I OE1), the OI C gi ves the si ti ng party a
sketch of the mi nefi el d and i nstructi ons on si ti ng the I OE basel i ne and stri p
cen ter l i n es . Th e NCOI C a n d on e oth er member of th e s i ti n g par ty
i mmedi atel y begi n setti ng stakes to i ndi cate the I OE basel i ne. The centerl i ne
l ayi ng team l ays tape on the I OE basel i ne, l eavi ng tape reel s where tapes run
out. Short stri ps extendi ng from the I OE basel i ne are establ i shed at the same
ti me. Each short stri p starts wi th a marker that i s desi gnated as I 1, I 2, and so
for th and ends wi th a mar ker that i s desi gnated as I 1E, I 2E, and so for th.
Turni ng poi nts are not used on short stri ps.
Upon r eachi ng the I OE end-of-str i p mar ker (I OE2), the NCO moves away
from the enemy si de, establ i shes the l eft boundary stake of Stri p A, stakes out
Str i p A, and r epeats the pr ocedur e unti l al l str i p center l i nes ar e taped. Al l
stakes are dri ven fl ush wi th the ground.
Whi l e the I OE i s bei ng taped, the r ecordi ng par ty obtai ns r efer ence data for
the DA For m 1355. Wor ki ng behi nd the si ti ng par ty, the r ecor di ng par ty
starts from Landmark 1 (desi gnated by the OI C) and proceeds to C1. After C2
has been si ted, the r ecor di ng par ty pr oceeds fr om Landmar k 2 to C2 to
establ i sh the di stance and the azi muth. Fi nal l y, the r ecor di ng par ty ti es C1
and C2 to both l andmar k s i n case on e of th e l an dmar k s i s r emoved or
destr oyed. The amount of detai l obtai ned by the r ecor di ng party depends on
the tacti cal cl assi fi cati on of the mi nefi el d and any speci al or der s. Aer i al
photographs taken of the mi nefi el d before the traci ng tape i s removed become
val uabl e suppl ements to the DA Form 1355.
As soon as l ayi ng par ti es ar r i ve at the si te wi th mi nes, they establ i sh mi ne
dumps a mi ni mum of 150 meters apart and 50 meter s behi nd the fi el d. They
uncrate and stack AT mi nes and pl ace fuses and detonators i n separate boxes.
FM 20-32
Fuse types are not mi xed. (Korea Only: AP mines areleft in their crates,
and thecratelids areremoved.)
When the si ti ng party compl etes the centerl i ne staki ng, i t i nstal l s l ane tapes
and tr affi c tapes, r especti vel y. Lane tapes ar e used by tacti cal vehi cl es and
patrol s. Traffi c tapes are used by l ayi ng personnel to assi st i n camoufl age and
to r educe the amount of tr affi c on str i p center l i nes. Tr affi c tapes ar e l ai d
perpendi cul ar to the mi nefi el d trace at 100-meter i nterval s.
MINE EMPLACEMENT
The l ayi ng party must know the cl uster composi ti on of the stri p, the l ocati on
of any omi tted cl uster, and future l ane l ocati ons. When the centerl i ne tape for
a regul ar stri p has been i nstal l ed, the NCOI C desi gnates al l but two members
of the l ayi ng par ty to empl ace mi nes i n the gr ound. The r emai ni ng two
sol di er s, usual l y the most exper i enced, ar e desi gnated as fuser s and ar e
responsi bl e for armi ng mi nes. Layers carr y the maxi mum l oad of mi nes to be
used as base mi nes i n the cl usters. Fusers carry the fuses and the detonators.
The NCOI C moves to the r i ght or l eft (dependi ng on the l ayi ng di r ecti on)
begi nni ng-of-str i p mar ker of the str i p and or gani zes the l ayer s i nto one
col umn to hi s rear, di rectl y on the centerl i ne. He measures 6 meters al ong the
centerl i ne for the fi rst cl uster and, poi nti ng perpendi cul ar from the centerl i ne
and i n the di r ecti on of the enemy, i ndi cates the pl acement of the base mi ne.
The fi rst l ayer on the enemy si de pl aces a mi ne on the ground, 3 meters from
the centerl i ne.
The NCO measures 3 more meters and i ndi cates the pl acement of the second
base mi ne on the opposi te (fr i endl y) si de of the str i p. The fi r st l ayer on that
si de pl aces a base mi ne on the ground. As the i ni ti al l oad of mi nes i s l ai d, each
l ayer returns to the nearest mi ne dump for another l oad. Fusers fol l ow behi nd
l ayers and i nsert mi ne fuses, but they do not arm the mi nes. Thi s procedure i s
fol l owed unti l the end-of-str i p mar k er on the far si de of the mi nefi el d i s
reached.
Korea Only: TheNCO tells layers thenumber and typeof mines to be
placed next to the base mine in each cluster. As AP mines are being
placed, theNCO proceeds alongthestrip and ensures that theproper
number of AP minesis placed in each cluster. TheNCO placesa spool
of trip wirenext to themines that areto beactivated by trip wire.
When al l the mi nes are posi ti oned i n cl usters, one l ayer i s assi gned to di g the
hol es for al l the mi nes i n a cl uster . He pl aces the spoi l fr om the hol es i n
sandbags and l eaves the sandbags besi de the base mi ne i n each cl uster . The
l ayer checks the posi ti oni ng of the mi nes i n the hol es, removes the mi nes from
the hol es, and pl aces the mi nes besi de the hol es. (Korea Only: The layers
anchor trip wires with nails or stakes and wrap thelooseends of trip
wires around thefuses.)
When di ggi ng has pr ogressed at l east 25 meter s from the fi r st mi ne l ai d, the
ar mi ng pr ocedur e begi ns. Fuser s ar m al l the mi nes i n a cl uster , begi nni ng
wi th the mi ne farthest from the centerl i ne and work backward. They pl ace al l
the mi nes i n the hol es (Korea Only: attach trip wires) and ar m and
camoufl age the mi nes. They pl ace fi l l ed sandbags on the center l i ne of the
C2, FM 20-32
str i p, opposi te the base mi ne. Fuser s keep thei r back towar d the center l i ne.
Other personnel must remai n at l east 25 meters from the fusers (Fi gure 7-8).
Mi nes l ocated i n l anes ar e not i ni ti al l y bur i ed. They ar e pl aced asi de to
prevent confusi on when counti ng cl usters. The mi nes can be bur i ed after the
l ane i s cl osed. Upon compl eti ng the ar mi ng oper ati on, fuser s gi ve the safety
cl i ps to the NCO, who ver i fi es that al l the mi nes have been ar med and
camoufl aged. The NCO checks the stri p and ensures that sandbags, tape, and
debri s have been pi cked up. The NCO gi ves the safety cl i ps to the PSG, who
buri es them 30 centi meters to the rear of the begi nni ng-of-stri p marker.
Al l mi nes and other expl osi ve i tems ar e r ecor ded upon i ssue. They ar e
summar i zed on a mi nes tal l y sheet (see Tabl e 7-2). I f mor e than one mi ne
Figure 7-8. Laying and fusing mines
6 m
3 m
NCOIC
Tape
Boundary
stake
Fuser
Layer
25 m (minimum)
Layer Layer Layer
Layer Layer
3 m
6 m
Boundary
stake
Fuser
NCOIC
Tape
Enemy
Enemy
FM 20-32
dump i s establ i shed, a mi nes tal l y sheet i s k ept at each dump and the
i nformati on i s l ater transferred to a master tal l y sheet.
The PSG ensures that the number of mi nes used per tal l y sheet i s entered on
the DA Form 1355.
When a l ane i s no l onger r equi r ed thr ough a mi nefi el d, i t i s cl osed by a l ane-
cl osur e team that consi sts of one NCO and two other sol di er s. Befor e cl osur e
starts, the NCO checks the mi nefi el d record to ascertai n the
Wi dth of the l ane.
Cl uster composi ti on of each stri p.
Total number of mi nes requi red.
Number of stri ps that i ntersect the l ane.
Azi muth of each stri p.
Di stance between str i ps, al ong the l ane center l i ne.
Locati on of the mi ne dump.
The procedures for l ane cl osure i s as fol l ows (see Fi gure 7-9, page 7-16):
The l ane-cl osure team moves al ong the safe-l ane centerl i ne unti l i t
arri ves at the stri p safe-l ane marki ng pi cket.
The NCO l ays out a stri p centerl i ne tape and a tape al ong both si des of
the safe l ane to mark i ts boundari es.
The team l ays cl usters.
The team recovers the tapes.
Table 7-2. Sample mines tally sheet
Strip/Laying
Party
Movement of
Mines
M15 M16 Trip Wire AHD Type
IOE strip/
Party 1
No forecasted 23 46
No issued 23 46
No returned
No used 23 46
Strip A/
Party 2
No forecasted 81 154 35
No issued 81 154 35
No returned 7 6 9
No used 74 148 26
Strips B, C, D,
and so forth
No forecasted
No issued
No returned
No used
Total
No forecasted
No issued
No returned
No used
Date _______ Rank _____ Name ______________________ Signature __________________________
FM 20-32
The above steps are repeated at successi ve stri ps.
The NCO amends the DA Form 1355.
NOTE: When gaps must be closed, fences are temporarily erected
along the side boundaries. They are removed later to avoid the
indication of a passagethrough theminefield.
NCOI Cs do not act as worki ng members of thei r parti es; they ensure that
No one moves back i nto a mi ned area.
Any i rregul ari ty, such as an omi tted cl uster, i s recorded.
Figure 7-9. Lane closure
Strip/safe-lane
marking picket
Engineer tape
(safe lane)
Engineer tape
(strip centerline)
S
a
f
e
l
a
n
e
S
t
r
i
p
c
e
n
t
e
r
l
i
n
e
S
a
f
e
-
l
a
n
e
c
e
n
t
e
r
l
i
n
e
FM 20-32
Al l safety devi ces are recovered and checked agai nst the mi nefi el d
record.
Safety tapes are used to cr eate a networ k of safe r outes thr ough a mi nefi el d.
They may be r emoved pr ogr essi vel y but ar e nor mal l y l eft i n pl ace unti l the
mi nefi el d i s compl ete.
Korea Only: When trip wires are used, safety tapes are laid between
strips where the trip wire will be positioned (including Strip A and
the I OE baseli ne). I f trip wi res are not used, safety tapes are
recommended but arenot mandatory.
NUISANCE MINEFIELDS
SITING
Consi der the fol l owi ng factors when si ti ng a nui sance mi nefi el d:
The effort needed by the enemy to bypass a mi ned area.
The i mportance of an area or a route to the enemy.
Achi evement of the goal (use the mi ni mum amount of effort needed to
maxi mi ze casual ti es and the effect on enemy moral e).
Remember, the more i ngenuous the methods of conceal ment, the l onger i t wi l l
take to l ay mi nes.
Obser vati on and cover i ng fi r es ar e not essenti al and ar e sel dom feasi bl e for
nui sance mi nefi el ds. Thei r val ue depends on effecti ve si ti ng and conceal ment
to cause surpri se.
The mi nefi el d OI C i s r esponsi bl e for detai l ed si ti ng and the desi gn of a
nui sance mi nefi el d. He must consi der the mi nefi el d from the enemy's poi nt of
vi ew and assess the cour ses open to the enemy when he encounters i t. Such
consi der ati ons may expose weaknesses i n the i ni ti al pl an and br i ng about a
change to the pr oposed mi nefi el d l ayout or may l ead to a deci si on to si te the
mi nefi el d el sewhere.
LOCATION
I n wooded or hi l l y ter r ai n, the enemy's l ogi sti cs tr anspor t wi l l nor mal l y be
confi ned to exi sti ng r outes. Nui sance mi nes at sel ected si tes al ong roads can
i mpose consi derabl e del ay on the enemy and have a cumul ati ve effect on hi s
resources and moral e. The best si tes for axi al mi ni ng are
Natural defi l es and constructed areas that are di ffi cul t to bypass
(cuts, embankments, causeways, fords, forest tracks, bui l t-up areas).
I n the vi ci ni ty of road craters, AT di tches, and any obstacl es that have
to be cl eared.
Around cul verts.
Demol i shed bri dges, parti cul arl y the home bank, i ncl udi ng l i kel y
adjacent crossi ng pl aces and al ternati ve bui l di ng si tes.
Li kel y assembl y ar eas.
Covered approaches or dead space.
FM 20-32
I n the vi ci ni ty of enemy-needed fuel , suppl i es, and engi neeri ng
materi al s that cannot be destroyed or removed.
Rai l roads (i n or near cul verts, bri dges, sharp turns, tunnel s, steep
gr ades). Mi nes shoul d be l ai d wher e enemy tr ai ns cannot bypass the
mi ned area on branches or spurs.
LAYING
Ther e i s no r equi r ement for r ecor di ng the pr eci se l ocati on of i ndi vi dual
nui sance mi nes. Recor di ng mi ne posi ti ons that ar e l ai d to a patter n i s easy
an d qui ck . Patter n l ayi ng shoul d be used when i t can be done wi thou t
prejudi ci ng conceal ment.
When the number of mi nes to be l ai d on the si te makes i t i mpr acti cabl e or
undesi r abl e to l ay mi nes i n a patter n, th ey may be scatter -l ai d u nl ess
other wi se di r ected. Scatter -l ayi ng by hand i s useful i n r oad bl ocks, br i dge
abutments, and craters when i t woul d be di ffi cul t and wasteful to l ay mi nes i n
a patter n. Agai n, scatter -l ayi ng al ong r outes to be deni ed to the enemy wi l l
add consi der abl y to the del ay i mposed. Al l avai l abl e types of AT mi nes
(Korea Only: and AP mines) are used to make nui sance mi nefi el ds compl ex
an d di ffi cu l t to r emov e. Combi n ati on s of mi n e types s h ou l d be var i ed
constantl y so that each mi nefi el d presents a cl earance probl em. Deepl y buri ed
mi nes can be i ncl uded; however , they take much l onger to l ay. These mi nes
may be wor th wh i l e ar oun d cr ater s , wh er e th e enemy i s l i k el y to need
earthmovi ng equi pment.
I f a nui sance mi nefi el d i s l ai d i n a standard pattern, standard procedures are
fol l owed. I f mi nes ar e sel ecti vel y posi ti oned, pr ocedur es must be tai l or ed to
sui t the si tuati on. I n al l occasi ons, however , the fol l owi ng r ul es shoul d be
observed:
The i ntended posi ti on for each mi ne i s cl earl y marked on the ground
before l ayi ng begi ns.
Layi ng parti es work i n pai rs, and each pai r i s detai l ed to l ay speci fi c
mi nes.
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Mi n es th at ar e l eft i n th e gr ou n d for an ex ten ded per i od of ti me may
deteri orate and mal functi on for one or more of the fol l owi ng reasons:
Moi sture may have entered the i gni ter or body of the mi ne and ei ther
neutr al i zed the expl osi ve or cor r oded the metal par ts. Such acti ons
may be aggr avated by l ocal factor s (soi l aci di ty, wi de temper atur e
swi ngs).
Frost or heat may have subjected the mi ne to mechani cal strai n and
caused di storti on.
I nsects or vegetati on may have caused obstructi ons.
Ani mal s may have turned mi nes over or detonated them.
Techni cal i nspecti ons shoul d onl y be made by exper i enced engi neer s or EOD
per sonnel . When a mi nefi el d deter i orates bel ow the oper ati ng l evel , addi ti onal
mi ne str i ps and/or r ows must be added to r estor e i ts effecti veness. They ar e
FM 20-32
si ted to the fr ont or r ear of the exi sti ng mi nefi el d to i ncr ease i ts depth. New
mi ne stri ps and/or rows are treated as a separate, addi ti onal mi nefi el d.
Techn i cal i ns pecti ons of mi nefi el ds ar e n or mal l y done at thr ee-month
i nterval s, and personnel work i n pai rs. They are done more frequentl y duri ng
extreme weather condi ti ons.
HANDOVER
Mi nefi el d handover i s an extremel y i mportant task. The fol l owi ng i tems need
to be addressed between empl aci ng and overwatchi ng uni ts:
Di scussi ng mi nefi el d composi ti ons.
Di scussi ng the mi nefi el d confi gurati on and wal ki ng and/or ri di ng the
mi nefi el d trace.
Di scussi ng l ane cl osure, i f appl i cabl e.
Trai ni ng the uni t on how to the cl ose l ane, i f appl i cabl e.
Di scussi ng obstacl e protecti on agai nst enemy di smounted patrol s.
Si gni ng over the wri tten report (Fi gure 2-26, page 2-54).
Di scussi ng i ndi rect fi res.
Reporti ng compl eti on of handover to hi gher headquarters.
Forwardi ng a copy of the wri tten report and the DA Form 1355 to
hi gher headquarters.
FM 20-32
Reporting and Recording 8-1
Chapter 8
Reporting and Recording
Reporti ng and recordi ng mi ne and mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i nformati on i s
cr i ti cal to the success of a uni ts mi ssi on. I t not onl y pr ovi des tacti cal data
for the commander , but i t al so pr ovi des for ce-pr otecti on i nfor mati on to
subordi nate and adjacent uni ts.
MINEFIELD/MUNITION FIELD REPORTS
A mi n ef i el d/mu n i ti on f i el d r epor t i s a n or al , el ectr on i c, or wr i tten
communi cati on that concerns fri endl y or enemy mi ni ng acti vi ti es. The repor t
for mat i s speci fi ed by the l ocal command. I t i s submi tted by the empl aci ng
uni t commander through operati onal channel s to the G3/S3 of the authori zed
h eadqu ar ter s . Th e h eadqu ar ter s i n tegr ates th e r epor t wi th ter r ai n
i ntel l i gence and di ssemi nates i t al ong wi th tacti cal i ntel l i gence. The report i s
sent by the fastest, most secur e means avai l abl e. Fi gur e 8-1, page 8-2,
summari zes the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d repor t fl ow at the di vi si on l evel and
bel ow.
REPORT OF INTENTION
When pl anni ng to empl ace a mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d, the uni t must submi t a
report of i ntenti on to noti fy thei r hi gher headquarters. The report doubl es as a
request when i t i s i ni ti ated at l evel s bel ow empl acement authori ty. The report
i ncl udes
Tacti cal purpose of the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d.
Esti mated number and type of mi nes to be empl aced.
Locati on.
Proposed start and compl eti on ti mes.
Type of mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d.
Whether mi nes are surface-l ai d or buri ed.
Whether AHDs are used.
Locati on and wi dth of l anes and gaps.
Conventi onal mi nefi el ds/muni ti on fi el ds that ar e par t of an OPLAN or a
gener al defense pl an (GDP) appr oved by the author i zi ng commander do not
requi re a report of i ntenti on because i ncl usi on i n an OPLAN or a GDP i mpl i es
an i ntenti on to l ay.
REPORT OF INITIATION
A r epor t of i ni ti ati on i s mandator y. I t i nfor ms hi gher headquar ter s that
empl acement has begun and that the ar ea i s no l onger safe for fr i endl y
movement and maneuver. The r eport speci fi es the ti me empl acement began
FM 20-32
8-2 Reporting and Recording
and i denti fi es the l ocati on and the tar get number of mi nefi el ds/muni ti on
fi el ds.
REPORT OF COMPLETION
A report of compl eti on i s usual l y an oral report to the authori zi ng commander.
I t i ndi cates that the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i s compl ete and functi onal . A
r epor t of compl eti on i s i mmedi atel y fol l owed by a compl eted DA Form 1355 or
1355-1-R.
REPORT OF TRANSFER
Mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d responsi bi l i ty i s tr ansferred from one commander to
another i n a repor t of tr ansfer (Fi gure 2-26, page 2-54). Thi s r epor t i s si gned
by the transferri ng and recei vi ng commanders. I t i ncl udes a certi fi cate stati ng
that the r ecei vi ng commander was shown or other wi se i nfor med of al l the
mi nes wi thi n the transferri ng commanders zone of r esponsi bi l i ty. The repor t
states that the recei vi ng commander assumes responsi bi l i ty for those mi nes.
Figure 8-1. Conventional minefield/munition field reporting chain
Division
G3
ADE
Brigade
S3
Engineer
battalion
Adjacent
brigade
Engineer
company
Engineer
platoon
Maneuver
company
Maneuver
company
Maneuver
company
Adjacent
TF
Brigade
engineer
TF
S3
Report
Record
Critical coordination
FM 20-32
The report of transfer i s sent to the next hi gher commander who has authori ty
over the transferri ng and recei vi ng commanders.
REPORT OF CHANGE
A r epor t of change i s made i mmedi atel y upon any change or al ter ati on to a
pr evi ousl y r epor ted mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d. I t i s sent to the next hi gher
commander and through channel s to the headquarters that keeps the wri tten
mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d record. A report of change i s made by the commander
responsi bl e for survei l l ance and mai ntenance of the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d.
PROGRESS REPORTS
Dur i ng the empl aci ng pr ocess, the commander may r equi r e per i odi c r epor ts
on the amount of work compl eted.
MINEFIELD/MUNITION FIELD RECORDS
Most conventi onal mi nefi el ds/muni ti on fi el ds ar e recor ded on DA For m 1355;
hasty pr otecti ve r ow mi nefi el ds/muni ti on fi el ds ar e r ecor ded on DA For m
1355-1-R.
The l ayi ng uni t pr epar es the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d r ecord. The OI C si gns
the for m and for war ds i t to the next hi gher command as soon as possi bl e.
Once the i nfor mati on i s entered on the for m, the for m i s cl assi fi ed SECRET,
NATO SECRET, or SECRET-ROKUS. (When used for tr ai ni ng, the r ecor d i s
mar ked SAMPLE.) The number of copi es pr epar ed depends on the type of
mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d empl aced and the l ocal procedures. Uni t SOPs shoul d
provi de advanced gui dance on how mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i nformati on i s to
be passed to hi gher , l ower, and adjacent commands. Mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d
r ecor ds ar e ci r cul ated on a need-to-know basi s. Lar ge mi nefi el ds/muni ti on
fi el ds are recorded on two or more DA Forms 1355.
Once the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i s r emoved, the date of r emoval , the ti me
removal was compl ete, and the name of the uni t that removed the mi nefi el d/
muni ti on fi el d wi l l be pl aced i n the remar ks bl ock of the form. The for m wi l l
then be for war ded to th e un i ts centr al contr ol cel l for mi n e cl ear an ce
i nfor mati on. The centr al contr ol cel l wi l l r etai n the for m for two year s and
then destroy i t.
When changes are made to an exi sti ng mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d, a new record
must be pr epar ed. Thi s r ecor d i s mar ked REVI SED. I t shows the mi nefi el d/
muni ti on fi el d as i t i s after changes. The or i gi nal mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d
number remai ns unchanged. Some changes whi ch requi re a new record are
Rel ocati on of mi nes i n safe l anes.
Rel ocati on of safe l anes.
Changed l ane or mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d marki ng.
I ncl usi on of the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i nto a l arger mi nefi el d/
muni ti on fi el d system.
Removal or detonati on of mi nes.
Addi ti on of mi nes to the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d.
Con v en ti onal mi n efi el d/mu ni ti on fi el d r ecor ds ar e for war ded thr ough
oper ati onal channel s to theater ar my headquar ter s (TAHQ) wher e they wi l l
be mai ntai ned on fi l e by the theater engi neer . I f a TAHQ has not been
establ i shed, mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d recor ds ar e mai ntai ned on fi l e wi th the
assi stant cor ps engi neer of the AO wher e the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i s
l ocated.
FM 20-32
MINEFIELD RECORD
DA For m 1355 consi sts of a si ngl e sheet that i s pr i nted on both si des and
fol ded i n hal f. The fr ont si de contai ns bl ocks of tabul ar data, the i nsi de i s a
gr aph of 1-centi meter squar es for a scal ed sketch of the fi el d, and the back
si de i ncl udes a computati on for mul a and i nstructi ons. The scal e for pl otti ng
mi nefi el ds/muni ti on fi el ds depends on the si ze of the fi el d. To avoi d usi ng two
sheets for the sketch, adjust the scal e so that one form wi l l support the sketch.
For ver y l ar ge mi nefi el ds/muni ti on fi el ds, two sheets may be r equi r ed. The
system of measur ement and the scal e si ze must be i ndi cated i n the l egend
bl ock. A second form may be used to suppor t any addi ti onal i nfor mati on i n the
notes bl ock. Any bl ocks or l i nes not used on the form must be cr ossed out to
avoi d unauthori zed entri es on the form.
An example of a completed DA Form 1355 i s shown i n Figures 8-2a through 8-2c,
pages 8-5 through 8-7.
The fol l owi ng step-by-step i nstructi ons are provi ded for compl eti ng DA Form
1355:
Block 1. Enter compl ete data on the l ayi ng authori ty and the l ayi ng uni t. The
OI C bl ock shoul d i ncl ude rank, name, and soci al securi ty number (SSN).
Block 2. Enter the date-ti me group (DTG) for start and compl eti on ti mes. The
recorder bl ock i ncl udes rank, name, and SSN.
Block 3. Enter th e copy and th e s heet n u mber . The n umber of copi es
pr epar ed depen ds on th e u n i t SOP an d th e mi n efi el d/mu n i ti on fi el d
cl assi fi cati on.
NOTE: The minefield/munition field record is forwarded by the
laying unit. One copy is retained by the overwatchingunit, one copy
by thenext higher command, onecopy by theunit central control cell
(for mine clearance informati on), and one copy by the proper
national territorial authority.
C2, FM 20-32
Figure 8-2a. Sample DA Form 1355 (front side) for a standard-pattern minefield/munition field
FM 20-32
Figure 8-2b. Sample DA Form 1355 (inside) for a standard-pattern minefield/munition field
FM 20-32
Figure 8-2c. Sample DA Form 1355 (back side) for a standard-pattern minefield/munition field
FM 20-32
Block 4. The mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d obstacl e numberi ng system (Tabl e 8-1)
consi sts of 11 char acter s and 1 obstacl e status symbol . I t shows the type of
obstacl e, the bel t and the zone i n whi ch i t i s l ocated, and the headquar ter s
that establ i shed the zone. Abbrevi ati ons for obstacl e types are shown i n Tabl e
8-2.
Example: Obstacl e number I 005-A2A-SM21/i ndi cates that the 5th I nfantry
Di vi si on pl anned the obstacl e i n Zone A. I t i s the 21st obstacl e i n Gr oup A,
Bel t 2, and has not been executed. The obstacl e i s a MOPMS.
Table 8-1. Minefield/munition field obstacle numbering system
Character Description
1 through 4
Alphanumeric description of the headquarters type and numerical
designation that established the obstacle zone; character 1 designates the
unit type with a letter:
A = armor division or brigade
I = infantry division or brigade
C = cavalry division
R = cavalry regiment
Z = corps
5 Letter indicating the obstacle zone
6 Number indicating the belt number in the obstacle zone
7 Letter indicating the group in the obstacle belt
8 and 9 Letters indicating the obstacle type (see Table 8-2)
10 and 11 Two numbers indicating the obstacle number in the group
12
One of four characters indicating the obstacle status
/ = planned obstacle
= obstacle being prepared
+ = prepared obstacle (This sign is for reserve demolition targets
and may indicate a readiness state of safe or armed.)
X = completed obstacle
C2, FM 20-32
Block 5. Enter the map data as stated on the map(s) used.
Block 6. En ter th e gr i d coor di n ates an d a descr i pti on of at l east two
l andmar ks. I f the l andmar ks ar e roads, tr ai l s, or r outes, enter thei r name or
number . Thi s mak es i denti fi cati on easi er when r emovi ng the mi nefi el d/
muni ti on fi el d. When r ecor di ng mi nefi el ds/muni ti on fi el ds, GPSs can onl y be
used to determi ne the coordi nates for mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d l andmarks and
RPs.
Table 8-2. Abbreviations for obstacle types
BBridge Demolition WWire Obstacle
BA Abutment WA Double apron
BS Span WB Booby-trapped
BC Abutment and span WF Tanglefoot
MMinefield/Munition Field WG General-purpose, barbed tape
MD Disrupt WN Nonstandard
MT Turn WR Road block
MF Fix WT Triple standard
MB Block RRoad Crater
MN Nonstandard RH Hasty
MP Protective RD Deliberate
MQ Nuisance RM Mined
MS Standard pattern MMiscellaneous
SScatterable Minefield/Munition Field AD AT ditch
SA ADAM AR Rubble by CEV gun
SB Gator AB Rubble by blade
SR RAAM AT Abatis
SF ADAM and RAAM AE Rubble by explosives
SM MOPMS AM Movable MOBA obstacle (car, bus)
SV Volcano AN Expedient nonstandard
HHand-Emplaced Munitions AL Log crib, log obstacle
HH Hornet AP Post obstacle (hedgehog, tetrahedron)
HS SLAM AH Log hurdle
WARNING
Do not use GPSs to chart or record minefield/munition field
perimeter coordinates or to determine safe routes through or around
existing minefields/munition fields.
FM 20-32
Block 7. Enter the descri pti on of i ntermedi ate markers, i f appl i cabl e. When a
l andmar k i s mor e than 200 meter s fr om the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d, or a
s tr i p or r ow r ef er en ce s tak e can n ot be s een f r om th e l an dmar k , an
i ntermedi ate marker must be used. I f possi bl e, the i ntermedi ate marker i s at
l east 75 meters from the stri p or row reference stake.
Block 8. Enter the word STANDARD when a standard marki ng fence i s used.
Descri be the boundary marki ng i f a standard marki ng fence i s not used. (Use
two si des and the rear for a tacti cal mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d; use four si des for
a protecti ve mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d.)
Block 9. Enter the number of str i ps or r ows l ai d. (Do not i ncl ude the I OE.)
Descri be the stri p or row markers. Cross out words that do not appl y.
Block 10. Enter the wi dth, the mar ki ng, and the pr ovi si ons for each l ane.
When appr opr i ate, gi ve the types of mi nes and the number of each type of
mi ne for cl osi ng. (The l ocati on of these mi nes i s descri bed i n Bl ock 12.)
C2, FM 20-32
Block 11. Enter the type of mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d by crossi ng out the l i nes
that ar e not needed. I ndi cate the method of l ayi ng by cr ossi ng out i ncor r ect
descr i pti ons. Enter the types of mi nes and the number of each type of mi ne.
Al so enter the number of AHDs i nstal l ed i n the I OE and i n each r ow. Letter
the stri ps or rows sequenti al l y, starti ng wi th the fi rst one l ai d. Enter total s.
I f th e type of mu ni ti on fi el d i s Hor net, en ter Hor n et above the wor d
tacti cal and l i ne out nui sance mi nefi el d and phoney mi nefi el d. (See
Fi gures 8-3a and 8-3b, pages 8-12 and 8-13.)
FM 20-32
Figure 8-3a. Sample DA Form 1355 (front side) for a Hornet minefield/munition field
S
A
M
P
L
E
FM 20-32
Figure 8-3b. Sample DA Form 1355 (back side) for a Hornet minefield/munition field
S
A
M
P
L
E
FM 20-32
Block 12. As a mi ni mum, enter the fol l owi ng i tems i n Bl ock 12. Al so enter
any addi ti onal i nformati on that woul d be useful when removi ng the mi nefi el d/
muni ti on fi el d.
1. Mi ne cl usters at ____meters spaci ng.
2. Number of I OE l i ve cl usters (al l others numbered but omi tted).
3a. Number of omi tted cl uster s i n the I OE and i n r egul ar stri ps and why
they were omi tted.
3b. Omi tted cl usters i n l anes and gaps.
4. Cl usters wi th AHDs (i denti fy the mi ne and the type of devi ce used).
5. Cl usters wi th tri p-wi re-actuated AP mi nes.
6. Stri p cl uster composi ti on.
7. Locati on of safety cl i ps and pi ns (bur i ed 30 centi meter s to the r ear of
each start stri p or row marker).
8. Locati on of mi nes for cl osi ng l anes and gaps.
9. SD ti me for speci al muni ti ons.
FM 20-32
Block 13. The empl aci ng uni t OI C si gns and dates the form.
The fr ont si de of DA For m 1355 i s now compl ete. Conti nue on the i nsi de as
fol l ows:
Block 14. When compl eti ng the sketch, enter arr ows for the di recti on of the
enemy and the magneti c north. The enemy arrow wi l l al ways poi nt wi thi n the
top 180 degrees of the form; the north arrow wi l l fol l ow one of the graph l i nes.
Block 15. I f a compass was not avai l abl e, en ter what was used i n the
i nformati on bl ock. I ndi cate the system of measurement and the scal e used.
FM 20-32
Block 16. Enter the i nformati on shown bel ow on the sketch:
C2, FM 20-32
Block 17. Enter the securi ty cl assi fi cati on of the for m. I f the for m was used
for trai ni ng, enter the word SAMPLE.
Block 18. The empl aci ng uni t OI C si gns the si gnature bl ock.
HASTY PROTECTIVE ROWMINEFIELD RECORD
Hasty pr otecti ve r ow mi nefi el ds/muni ti on fi el ds ar e r ecor ded on DA For m
1355-1-R (Fi gure 8-4, page 8-18). DA Form 1355-1-R wi l l be pri nted on 8 - by
11-i nch paper. A copy for l ocal reproducti on i s avai l abl e i n the back of thi s FM.
DA Form 1355-1-R i s al so avai l abl e on the Army El ectroni c Li brary (AEL) CD-
ROM (EM 0001) and the USAPA web si te (www.usapa.army.mi l ).
Use the fol l owi ng formul a to determi ne the scal e used on DA Form 1355-1-R:
DistancefromRP tothefarthest point in theminefield +10 meters 4 =scale
Example: 90 meters + 10 meters = 100 meters 4 = 25 meters
The number 4 i s a constant and r epr esents the four concentr i c r i ngs on DA
Form 1355-1-R. Ten i s added as a safety margi n to ensure that the mi nefi el d/
muni ti on fi el d sk etch i s enti r el y contai ned wi thi n the l ar gest r i ng. The
di stance between r i ngs i s 2 centi meter s; ther efor e, the scal e used i n thi s
exampl e i s 2 centi meters = 25 meters.
C2, FM 20-32
Figure 8-4. Sample DA Form 1355-1-R
S
A
M
P
L
E
FM 20-32
The fol l owi ng step-by-step i nstructi ons are provi ded for compl eti ng DA Form
1355-1-R (see Fi gure 8-5):
Fr om the RP, the l eader measur es the magneti c azi muth, i n degr ees, to a
speci fi c poi nt on the r i ght si de (faci ng the enemy) of the tentati ve mi nefi el d/
muni ti on fi el d. He deter mi nes the di stance and r ecor ds i t i n meter s. He
i denti fi es the method of measur ement i n the remarks bl ock of DA For m 1355-
1-R (for exampl e, di stances were paced out and mul ti pl i ed by 0.75 to conver t
the measur ement to meter s). Thi s poi nt, cal l ed B1 (i f ther e ar e two r ows),
mar ks the begi nni ng of the second r ow. A mar ker i s pl aced at B1, and the
l eader records the azi muth and the di stance.
The l eader measur es the azi muth and the di stance from B1 to a second poi nt
on the ri ght si de of the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d (faci ng the enemy). A marker
i s pl aced at thi s poi nt and recorded as A1.
The l eader measures the di stance and the azi muth from A1 to the l ocati on of
the fi rst mi ne i n that row and records the i nformati on.
The di stance (or spaci ng) fr om the end r ow mar ker to the fi r st mi ne i s the
spaci ng between al l the mi nes i n that r ow. After the l ocati on i s recor ded, the
mi ne i s empl aced, but i t i s not armed.
The l eader measur es the di stance and the azi muth from the fi rst mi ne to the
second, and so on, unti l al l the mi nes ar e empl aced and thei r l ocati ons ar e
r ecor ded. Thi s pr ocedur e i s r epeated for the second r ow. As each mi ne i s
recorded, i t i s assi gned a number to i denti fy i t i n the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d
record. When the l ast mi ne l ocati on i s recorded for a row, the di stance and the
azi muth are measured from that poi nt to another arbi trary poi nt, A2 or B2. A
marker i s pl aced her e i n the same manner as A1 and B1. Next, the di stance
and the azi muth fr om the RP to B2 and fr om B2 to A2 ar e measur ed and
recorded.
Figure 8-5. Hasty protective row minefield/munition field record
A1
B1
RP
FM 20-32
When al l the mi nes have been empl aced and r ecor ded, the l eader measur es
the di stance and the azi muth between the RP and a per manent l andmar k
that can be found on the map. He records the i nformati on on DA Form 1355-1-
R. The l andmar k i s used to hel p l ocate the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i f i t i s
tr a n s f er r ed or u n ex p ect ed l y a ba n d on ed. Fi n a l l y , th e t a bu l a r a n d
i denti fi cati on bl ocks are compl eted.
Mi nes can be armed after recordi ng i s compl ete. The mi nes nearest the enemy
ar e ar med fi r st, al l owi ng sol di ers to safel y wor k thei r way back to the uni t's
posi ti on. Pi ns and cl i ps can be buri ed 30 centi meters behi nd row markers, the
RP, or any easi l y i denti fi abl e, accessi bl e l ocati on. Note the l ocati on i n the
remarks secti on of DA Form 1355-1-R. The l eader then reports the compl eti on
of the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d to hi gher headquarters.
I f the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i s tr ansfer r ed to another uni t, the r ecei vi ng
uni t l eader i s bri efed by the transferri ng uni t l eader. The recei vi ng uni t l eader
si gns and dates the mi nes transferred bl ock on the DA Form 1355-1-R. When
th e mi n efi el d/mu n i ti on fi el d i s r emov ed, th e for m i s des tr oy ed. I f th e
mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i s abandoned unexpectedl y, the DA For m 1355-1-R
must be forwarded to hi gher headquarters.
NUISANCE MINEFIELD
I t i s unnecessar y to r ecor d the pr eci se l ocati on of i ndi vi dual nui sance mi nes
that are l ai d i n a pattern. Recordi ng the posi ti on of a mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d
that i s l ai d i n a patter n (ei ther a standar d patter n or one adopted for the
si tuati on) i s easy and qui ck. However, the number of mi nes to be l ai d on si te
may make i t i mpr acti cabl e or undesi r abl e to l ay mi nes i n a patter n. I n thi s
case, they may be l ai d i ndi vi dual l y and thei r posi ti ons accuratel y recorded.
Fi gures 8-6a and 8-6b, pages 8-21 and 8-22 provi de an exampl e of a compl eted
nui sance mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d record.
SCATTERABLE MINEFIELD/MUNITION FIELD REPORTING AND
RECORDING
The speed and responsi veness of SCATMI NE empl oyment requi r e accur ate,
uni form, and ti mel y reports. Al l known i nformati on on scatterabl e mi nefi el ds/
muni ti on fi el ds i s si mpl y and rapi dl y reported to al l affected uni ts. Al though
SCATMI NES have SD capabi l i ty, they are sti l l recorded; and the i nformati on
i s di ssemi nated to prevent casual ti es to fri endl y forces.
Si nce the l ocati ons of i ndi vi dual SCATMI NEs ar e unknown, they cannot be
r ecor ded i n detai l . For most systems, a safety zone i s cal cul ated fr om one or
mor e ai m poi nts. For exampl e, a RAAM mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i s r ecor ded
based on the target l ocati on (the gri d coor di nates gi ven to the fi ri ng battery).
The si ze of the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d depends on the number of r ounds
fi r ed, the number of ai m poi nts, and the angl e of fi r e. An ar ti l l er y-del i ver ed
mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d i s recorded by pl otti ng i t on a map, based on the ai m
poi nt and the safety zone speci fi ed i n the scatterabl e mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d
report and record that was prepared by the empl aci ng uni t. A ground-Vol cano
mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d can be r ecor ded mor e accur atel y by pl otti ng each of
the mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d corner poi nts rather than an ai m poi nt.
C2, FM 20-32
Figure 8-6a. Sample DA Form 1355 (front side) for a nuisance minefield/munition field
FM 20-32
Figure 8-6b. Sample DA Form 1355 (inside) for a nuisance minefield/munition field
C2, FM 20-32
To faci l i tate reporti ng and recordi ng of scatterabl e mi nefi el ds/muni ti on fi el ds,
a si mpl e, uni for m procedur e i s used. Thi s procedure combi nes the r eport and
the r ecor d i nto one document (Fi gur e 8-7) that i s appl i cabl e for al l del i ver y
systems.
I n addi ti on to the scatterabl e mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d r epor t and record, the
SCATMI NWARN (a sampl e i s shown i n Fi gur e 8-8, page 8-24) noti fi es
effected uni ts that SCATMI NEs wi l l be empl aced. These two repor ts ar e the
onl y reports used wi th scatterabl e mi nes.
A compl eted scatter abl e mi nefi el d/muni ti on fi el d r epor t and r ecor d for an
ADAM/RAAM ar ti l l ery mi ssi on i s shown i n Fi gur e 8-9, page 8-24. Note that
on l i ne 6, onl y one gr i d coor di nate i s gi ven. I t i s the ai m poi nt used when the
mi ssi on was fi r ed. Al so note that the 500-meter di stance fr om the ai m poi nt
(l i ne 15) desi gnates a safety zone that i s 1,000 by 1,000 meters.
Line
No
Information Required Data
1 Approving authority Enter the approving authority, such as CDR 3AD.
2 Target/obstacle number
If the minefield/munition field is part of an obstacle plan, enter the
obstacle number, such as 2XXX0157. This number represents II
Corps, target number 157. If the minefield/munition field is not a
part of an obstacle plan or does not have a number, then leave
this line blank or enter NA.
3
Type of emplacing
system
Enter the type system that emplaced the minefield/munition field,
such as artillery or Volcano.
4 Type of mines
Enter AP for antipersonnel mines and AT for antitank mines. If
both types of mines are used, enter AP/AT.
5 Life cycle
Enter the DTG the minefield/munition field was emplaced and the
DTG the last mine SDs.
6-14
Aim point/corner points
of minefield/munition
field
If the system used to emplace the minefield/munition field uses a
single aim point to deliver the mines, enter that aim point, such as
MB 10102935. If the system has distinct corner points (Volcano),
enter those corner points, such as MB 17954790, MB 18604860,
MB 18504890, and MB 18054895.
15
Size of safety zone from
aim point
If an aim point is given in Line 6, enter the size of the safety zone
from that aim point. Example: Artillery emplaces a minefield/
munition field from aim point MB 10102935, and the safety zone
is 1,000 x 1,000 m. Enter 500 m so that personnel plotting or
receiving the information can plot the coordinates and go 500 m
in each direction from the aim point to plot the safety zone.
16
Unit emplacing mines/
report number
Enter the unit emplacing mines and the report number, such as
BCO 23 ENGR BN 4. Reports should be numbered
consecutively. This would be the fourth minefield/munition field
that B Company has emplaced.
17
Person completing
report
Enter the persons name completing the report, such as SFC
Jones.
18 DTG of report Enter the DTG of the report, such as 160735ZOCT90.
19 Remarks Include any other items the reporting unit may feel are important.
Figure 8-7. Scatterable minefield/munition field report and record work sheet
C2, FM 20-32
Line Message
Alpha Emplacing system
Bravo AT (Yes or No)
Charlie AP (Yes or No)
Delta 4 aim or corner points
Echo Grid coordinates of aim points/corner
points and size of the safety zone
Foxtrot DTG of the life cycle
Figure 8-8. Sample SCATMINWARN
Line No Information Required Data
1 Approving authority CDR 3AD
2 Target/obstacle number 2XXX0157
3 Type of emplacing system Artillery
4 Type of mines AT/AP
5 Life cycle 0816102-082020OCT90
6 Aim point/corner points of minefield/munition field MB 10102935
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 Size safety zone from aim point 500 m
16 Unit emplacing mines/report number 2/48FA/2
17 Person completing report SFC Hollins
18 DTG of report 061645ZOCT90
19 Remarks NA
Figure 8-9. Scatterable minefield/munition field report and record
for an ADAM/RAAM artillery mission
C2, FM 20-32
The SCATMI NWARN provi des affected uni ts wi th the necessary war ni ng to
pl an and execute thei r operati ons. The i nfor mati on i s kept to a mi ni mum to
ensure r api d di ssemi nati on. The report may be sent or al l y, di gi tal l y, or hard
copy. I t i s sent befor e or i mmedi atel y after the mi nes have been empl aced. A
compl eted SCATMI NWARN for an arti l l ery mi ssi on i s shown i n Fi gure 8-10.
MINEFIELD/MUNITION FIELD OVERLAY SYMBOLS
The symbol s contai ned i n Fi gure 8-11, pages 8-26 through 8-30, are extracted
fr om FM 101-5-1 and ar e pr ov i ded for posti ng mi n e data on maps and
overl ays.
Line Message
Alpha Artillery
Bravo Yes
Charlie Yes
Delta One
Echo MB 10102935 500 m
Foxtrot 081610Z-081920ZOCT90
Figure 8-10. Sample SCATMINWARN for an artillery mission
FM 20-32
Description Symbol
Minefield/Munition Fields
Korea Only: AP mine
AT mine
AT mine with AHD
Directional mine (arrow points in
direction of main effect)
Mine cluster
Mine, type unspecified
Trip wire
Control Measures
Zone
Belt
Restrictions
Figure 8-11. Minefield/munition field overlay symbols
FM 20-32
Block effect
Turn effect
Disrupt effect
Fix effect
Conventional
A planned minefield/munition
field consisting of unspecified
mines
A completed minefield/munition
field consisting of unspecified
mines
Scatterable minefield/munition
field (DTGs used for SD times)
Conventional AP minefield/
munition field reinforced with
SCATMINEs
Tactical AP row minefield/
munition field (outline drawn to
scale)
Description Symbol
Figure 8-11. Minefield/munition field overlay symbols (continued)
FM 20-32
Tactical minefield/munition field
of scatterable AT mines, effective
until 101200Z
Completed AT minefield/muni-
tion field (drawn away from the
location and connected by a vec-
tor)
Executed Volcano minefield/
munition field (DTG used for SD
time)
Lane in conventionally laid AT
minefield/munition field
Gap in conventionally laid AT
minefield/munition field (DTG
opened to DTG closed)
Description Symbol
FM 20-32
AT ditch reinforced with AT mines
UXO
UXO area
Nuisance
Nuisance minefield/munition field
Demolished crossroads with nui-
sance mines
Phony
Phony minefield/munition field
Description Symbol
FM 20-32
Phony minefield/munition field,
fenced
Hornet Symbology
Planned
Unarmed
Armed
Expended
Armed munition field (DTG used
for SD time)
Description Symbol
W
W
W
W
W
DTG
Countermine Operations 9-1
PART TWO
Counteroperations
This part of the manual provides overall guidance for conducting counteroperations by
US forces. The types of breaching and clearing operations conducted, the tasks
performed, and the equipment required are described in detail. Responsibilities and
planning considerations are outlined for each operation.
Chapter 9
Countermine Operations
Countermi ne operati ons are undertaken to breach or cl ear a mi nefi el d. Al l
th e tas k s fal l u n der br each i n g or cl ear i n g oper ati on s an d i n cl u de
detecti ng, reporti ng, reduci ng, proofi ng, and marki ng.
DEFINITIONS
OBSTACLE
The ter m obstaclei s used often i n thi s chapter because the same br eachi ng
and cl ear i ng oper ati ons ar e used for mi nefi el ds and other obstacl es. For the
pur pose of thi s manual , br eachi ng and cl ear i ng tacti cs, techni ques, and
procedures (TTP) focus sol el y on mi nefi el ds.
REDUCTION
Reducti on i s the act or acti ons taken agai nst an obstacl e that di mi ni shes i ts
or i gi nal effect. For exampl e, cr eati ng a l ane i n a mi nefi el d woul d yi el d a
reducti on of the mi nefi el d obstacl e.
BREACHING
Breachi ng i s the empl oyment of TTP to project combat power to the far si de of
an obstacl e. I t i s a synchr oni zed combi ned ar ms oper ati on that i s under the
control of the maneuver commander.
AREA CLEARANCE
Ar ea cl ear ance i s the total el i mi nati on or neutr al i zati on of an obstacl e or
porti ons of an obstacl e. Cl eari ng operati ons are not conducted under fi re. They
are usual l y performed by fol l ow-on engi neer forces after a breachi ng operati on
or an yti me i n a fr i en dl y AO wher e an obs tacl e i s a h azar d or h i n der s
movement.
ROUTE CLEARANCE
Route cl earance i s the removal of mi nes al ong pr eexi sti ng roads and tr ai l s.
MINE NEUTRALIZATION
Mi ne neutr al i zati on occur s when a mi ne i s r ender ed i ncapabl e of fi r i ng on
passage of a target. The mi ne may sti l l be dangerous to handl e.
C2, FM 20-32
9-2 Countermine Operations
PROOFING
Pr oofi ng i s done by passi ng a mi ne r ol l er or other mi ne-r esi stant vehi cl e
through a l ane as the l ead vehi cl e. I t veri fi es that a l ane i s free of mi nes.
DEMINING
Demi ni ng i s the compl ete removal of al l mi nes and UXO wi thi n a geopol i ti cal
boundary after hosti l i ti es cease.
BREACHING OPERATIONS
Br eachi ng i s a synchr oni zed combi ned ar ms oper ati on that i s under the
contr ol of the maneuver commander. FM 3-34.2 pr ovi des combi ned ar ms
commander s and staffs wi th doctr i ne TTP that ar e needed to successful l y
overcome obstacl es. Breachi ng operati ons make maneuver possi bl e i n the face
of enemy obstacl e effor ts. Si nce obstacl es may be encounter ed anywher e,
maneuver forces i ntegrate breachi ng operati ons i nto al l movement pl ans.
When possi bl e, enemy mi nefi el ds ar e bypassed to mai ntai n the momentum
and conser ve cr i ti cal counter mobi l i ty assets. However, when maki ng the
deci si on to bypass rather than breach, consi der the l i kel i hood of fri endl y uni ts
bei ng channel i zed i nto ki l l zones. Bypassi ng i s done by maneuveri ng around a
mi nefi el d or, i f avi ati on assets are avai l abl e, movi ng over the mi nefi el d. When
maneuver i ng ar ound an obstacl e, attempt to l ocate a por ti on of the for ce i n
over watch posi ti ons to cover the bypass of the mai n el ement. Even when the
deci si on i s made to conduct a breach, scouts shoul d conti nue to reconnoi ter for
bypass routes.
The fi rst step i n understandi ng br eachi ng operati ons i s to know the obstacl e
breachi ng theory. Knowi ng the theory behi nd breachi ng operati ons equi ps the
engi neer and the maneuver commander wi th fundamental s that are needed to
i ntegr ate br each i nto the tacti cal pl anni ng, prepar ati on, and executi on of an
operati on.
Successful br eachi ng oper ati ons ar e char acter i zed by the appl i cati on of the
fol l owi ng tenets of breachi ng:
INTELLIGENCE
I n any oper ati on wher e enemy obstacl es i nter fer e wi th fr i endl y maneuver,
obs tacl e i n tel l i gen ce (OBSTI NTEL ) becomes a pr i or i ty i n tel l i gen ce
requi rement (PI R). Fi ndi ng enemy obstacl es or seei ng enemy obstacl e acti vi ty
val i dates and r efi nes the S2's pi ctur e of the battl efi el d. OBSTI NTEL hel ps
deter mi ne enemy i ntenti ons, pl ans, and str ength. The for ce engi neer i s the
uni t's exper t on enemy counter mobi l i ty, and he assi sts the S2 i n templ ati ng
enemy obstacl es and anal yzi ng OBSTI NTEL.
When col l ecti ng OBSTI NTEL, r econnai ssance i s a combi ned ar ms acti vi ty
that i ncl udes engi neer s. An engi neer squad moves wi th scouts or the patr ol
and conducts di smounted reconnai ssance of templ ated or di scovered obstacl es.
Addi ti on al i n for mati on on r econ n ai s s an ce can be fou n d i n FM 5-170.
Reconnai ssance teams gather the fol l owi ng OBSTI NTEL i nfor mati on fr om
the reconnai ssance:
Mi nefi el d l ocati on. Pl ot the peri meter l ocati on on a l arge-scal e map
and refer to recogni zabl e l andmarks.
FM 20-32
Peri meter descri pti on. Descri be how the peri meter i s fenced. I f i t i s
unfenced, descr i be how i t i s mar ked. I f i t i s unmar ked, show how i t
was recogni zed.
Nui sance mi nes. I f you di scover a nui sance mi ne forward of the
mi nefi el ds outer edge, r emember, ther e may be other s. Assembl y
areas mi ght al so be mi ned.
Types of mi nes. I ndi cate whether mi nes are AT or AP or have
unknown fuses (sel f-neutral i zed or SD). I f possi bl e, recover speci mens
of unknown or new mi nes and note the detai l s.
Detai l s of any other devi ces. Descri be booby traps, tri p wi res, and
fl ares.
Layi ng method. I ndi cate whether mi nes are buri ed or surface-l ai d.
Densi ty and pattern. I ncl ude the mi ne spaci ng and the number of
mi ne rows; esti mate the mi ne densi ty based on thi s i nformati on.
Mi nefi el d depth. Provi de the di stance between stri ps or rows and
descri be markers.
Safe l anes and gaps. Pl ot the l ocati on of suspected safe l anes and gaps
and descri be thei r marki ngs.
Ground condi ti ons. I ncl ude i nformati on on general ground condi ti ons.
Other obstacl es. Pl ot the l ocati on and the constr ucti on of other
obstacl es.
Enemy defenses. Descri be the enemy's l ocati on and si ze. I ncl ude the
l ocati on of enemy di rect-fi re weapons.
NOTE: Engineers engaged in reconnaissance for OBSTINTEL should
rarely, if ever, beused toreduceobstacles duringthereconnaissance.
Each reconnai ssance team commander submi ts a detai l ed OBSTI NTEL report
to the next hi gher headquar ter s when the r econnai ssance i s compl ete. A
sampl e OBSTI NTEL report i s shown i n Fi gure 9-1.
Letter
Designation
Explanation
A Map sheet(s).
B Date and time the information was collected.
C Type of minefield (AT, AP, or mixed).
D Grid references of minefield extremities, if known.
E Depth of minefield.
F Estimated time required to clear the minefield.
G Estimated material and equipment required to clear the minefield.
H Routes for bypassing the minefield, if any.
I-Y Grid references of lanes (entry and exit) and width of lanes, in meters.
Z
Additional information such as types of mines used, unknown mines, or types of
booby traps.
Figure 9-1. Sample OBSTINTEL report
FM 20-32
FUNDAMENTALS
Suppress, obscure, secure, and reduce (SOSR) are the breachi ng fundamental s
that must be appl i ed to ensur e success when br eachi ng agai nst a defendi ng
enemy. Thi s TTP wi l l al ways appl y but may vary based on speci fi c si tuati ons.
Suppress
Suppr essi on i s the focus of al l avai l abl e fi r es on enemy per sonnel , weapons,
and equi pment to pr event effecti ve fi r es on fr i endl y for ces. The pur pose of
s u ppr es s i on i s to pr otect f or ces wh o a r e r edu ci n g th e obs tacl e an d
maneuveri ng through i t and to soften the enemys i ni ti al foothol d.
Obscure
Obscur ati on hamper s enemy obser vati on and tar get acqui si ti on, and i t
conceal s fri endl y acti vi ti es and movement. Obscurati on smoke depl oyed on or
near the enemy posi ti on mi ni mi zes the enemys vi si on.
Secure
The for ce secur es the br eachi ng si te to pr event the enemy fr om i nter fer i ng
wi th r educti on and to pr event the enemys passage thr ough l anes cr eated
dur i ng r educti on. I n gener al , enemy tacti cal obstacl es ar e secur ed by fi r es,
and protecti ve obstacl es are secured by force.
Reduce
Reducti on means creati ng l anes through or over the obstacl e to al l ow passage
of the attacki ng for ce. The l anes must be suffi ci ent to al l ow the force to cross
and accompl i sh the mi ssi on. (Tabl e 9-1 pr ovi des i nformati on on l ane wi dths.)
The uni t reduci ng the mi nefi el d mar ks the mi nefi el d and l ane l ocati ons and
reports thei r condi ti ons to hi gher headquarters.
ORGANIZATION
Th e comman der or gan i zes th e for ce to accompl i s h SOSR br each i n g
fundamental s qui ckl y and effecti vel y. Thi s r equi r es hi m to organi ze suppor t,
br each, and assaul t for ces wi th the necessar y assets to accompl i sh thei r
mi ssi ons.
Support Force
The support force i s pri mari l y responsi bl e for el i mi nati ng the enemy's abi l i ty
to i nter fere wi th the breachi ng oper ati on. I t must i sol ate the battl efi el d wi th
fi r es and suppr ess enemy fi r es that ar e cover i ng the br each l ocati on. Thi s
i nvol ves massi ve di r ect and i ndi r ect fi r e to destr oy enemy vehi cl es and
personnel who are abl e to bri ng fi re on the breach force.
Table 9-1. Lane widths
Lane Width Remarks
Assault footpath 1 meter
Allows passage of dismounted troops so that they may continue
an attack or secure the far side of a minefield while vehicle
lanes are being breached
Initial lane 4.5 meters
Allows passage of breaching and assault forces (initial lanes
are widened and marked as soon as the tactical situation
allows)
Intermediate lane 4.5 meters Upgrades sign posting and further defines exit markers
Full lane 10 meters Allows passage of two-way traffic
FM 20-32
Breach Force
The br each for ce cr eates l anes that enabl e the assaul t for ce to pass thr ough
the obstacl e and conti nue the attack. I t i s al so r esponsi bl e for mar ki ng l anes
(l ength and entry poi nts) to speed passage of assaul t and fol l ow-on forces. The
breach force i s a combi ned arms force. I t i ncl udes engi neers, breachi ng assets,
and enough maneuver force to provi de l ocal securi ty. The breach force must be
abl e to depl oy and begi n r educi ng the obstacl e as soon as enemy fi r es have
been suppr essed. I t must be capabl e of cr eati ng a mi ni mum of one l ane for
each assaul ti ng company or two l anes for an assaul ti ng TF. At a mi ni mum,
the l anes must be mar ked and thei r l ocati ons and condi ti ons r epor ted to
hi gher headquarters and fol l ow-on uni ts as prescri bed i n the uni t's SOP. The
commander shoul d expect a 50 percent l oss of mobi l i ty assets i n cl ose combat.
Assault Force
The assaul t for ce destr oys or di sl odges the enemy on the far si de of the
obstacl e. I t secur es the far si de by physi cal occupati on i n most br eachi ng
oper ati ons. The assaul t for ce may be tasked to assi st the support for ce wi th
suppr essi on whi l e the br each for ce r educes the obstacl e. The assaul t for ce
must be suffi ci ent i n si ze to sei ze obj ecti ves that el i mi nate fi r es on the
breachi ng si te.
MASS
Breachi ng i s conducted by rapi dl y appl yi ng concentrated force at a desi gnated
poi nt to cr ack the obstacl e and r upture the defense. Massed combat power i s
di r ected agai nst an enemy weakness. Smoke and ter r ai n hel p i sol ate the
enemy force that i s under attack. The commander al so masses engi neers and
breachi ng equi pment to reduce the obstacl e. The breach force i s organi zed and
equi pped to use sever al di ffer ent r educti on techni ques i n case the pr i mar y
techni que fai l s (a key vehi cl e i s destr oyed or casual ti es r ender di smounted
engi neer s i neffecti ve). Addi ti onal r educti on assets ar e present to handl e the
unexpected (50 percent over the requi rement are normal l y posi ti oned wi th the
breach force).
SYNCHRONIZATION
Br eachi ng operati ons r equi r e preci se synchr oni zati on of the SOSR br eachi ng
fundamental s by support, br each, and assaul t for ces. Fai l ur e to synchr oni ze
effecti ve suppressi on and obscurati on wi th reducti on and assaul t can resul t i n
rapi d, devastati ng l osses of fri endl y troops i n the obstacl e or the enemy's fi re
sack. The commander cannot adequatel y synchroni ze hi s force's appl i cati on of
combat power i n the shor t ti me avai l abl e to hi m when he encounter s an
obstacl e. The number of deci si ons that he must make whi l e under fi r e i n an
uncl ear si tuati on wi l l r api dl y over whel m hi m. Even wi th a for ce tr ai ned to
execute a combi ned ar ms br each, synchr oni zi ng al l the necessar y task s
r emai ns a compl ex, di ffi cul t pr ocess. The commander uses the fol l owi ng
pr i nci pl es to ensur e synchr oni zati on thr ough pr oper pl anni ng and for ce
preparati on:
Detai l ed reverse pl anni ng.
Cl ear subuni t i nstructi ons.
Effecti ve C
2
.
A wel l -rehearsed force.
FM 20-32
CLEARING OPERATIONS
Cl ear i ng i s the total el i mi nati on or neutral i zati on of mi nes fr om an area. I t i s
not usual l y conducted under enemy fi re, but i t can be conducted by engi neers
duri ng war or after hosti l i ti es as part of nati on assi stance.
A l i mi ted cl eari ng operati on can be conducted by fol l ow-on engi neers after the
br eachi ng for ce has r educed the mi nefi el d and secur ed the ar ea. Engi neer s
i ni ti al l y i mpr ove exi sti ng br each l anes by wi deni ng and mar ki ng them, and
they al so cl ear and mar k new l anes thr ough the mi nefi el d. The cl ear i ng
operati on supports the conti nued passage of forces.
A cl eari ng operati on i s al so conducted to el i mi nate al l the mi nes i n a mi nefi el d
(pr evi ousl y i denti fi ed, r epor ted, and mar ked i n a fr i endl y AO) that hi nder s
mobi l i ty or i s a hazard to fri endl y forces.
UPGRADE OF BREACH LANES
Lane cl ear ance i s mor e del i ber ate than l ane br eachi ng and nor mal l y takes
l onger. Fol l ow-on engi neer s upgr ade br each l anes to i mpr ove exi sti ng l anes
thr ough mi nefi el ds and to cr eate new l anes. Thi s cl ear i ng oper ati on i s
i ntended to fur ther r educe the mi nefi el d so that fol l ow-on uni ts can pass
through i t qui ckl y.
The br each for ce that i ni ti al l y r educed the obstacl e and mar ked the l anes
tur ns over the l anes to fol l ow-on engi neer s. Fol l ow-on engi neer s can expect
l ane wi dths of 4.5 meters. The total number of l anes depends on the si ze of the
l ead assaul t for ce. Two to four assaul t l anes are nor mal i f the l ead uni t was
bri gade-si ze.
I f for ces conti nue to pass through exi sti ng l anes whi l e further r educti on and
cl earance i s conducted, fol l ow-on engi neers fi rst begi n reduci ng new l anes. At
a mi ni mum, two l anes ar e r equi r ed for an assaul ti ng TF and one l ane i s
requi red for an assaul ti ng company/team.
A l i mi ted amount of mechani cal br eachi ng assets i s avai l abl e for cl ear i ng
oper ati ons. Fol l ow-on engi neer s wi l l pr obabl y not have tank-mounted mi ne-
cl eari ng bl ades (MCBs) or mi ne-cl eari ng rol l ers (MCRs). The mai n mechani cal
cl ear i ng asset i s an ar mor ed dozer wi th a mi ne r ak e. Mi ne-cl ear i ng l i ne
char ges (MI CLI Cs) ar e used i f avai l abl e. Engi neer s conducti ng cl ear i ng
operati ons
Ensure that l anes are a mi ni mum of 100 meters apart.
Reduce addi ti onal l anes by usi ng the equi pment and techni ques
outl i ned i n Chapter 10.
Wi den l anes to 10 meters to al l ow two-way traffi c.
Mark breach l anes by usi ng the ori gi nal marki ng system or the
di vi si on SOP. (Marki ng procedures are outl i ned i n Chapter 10.)
Empl ace entrance, exi t, and l eft and ri ght l ane markers to provi de day
and ni ght capabi l i ty.
Tr affi c contr ol i s cr i ti cal dur i ng l ane r educti on and when shi fti ng l anes to
i mpr ove exi sti ng l anes. Engi neer s conducti ng r educti on and cl ear ance may
al so pr ovi de gui des at the l anes. Contr ol pr ocedur es ar e outl i ned i n FM
90-13-1.
To el i mi nate the danger of forces enteri ng the mi nefi el d adjacent to l anes, the
mi nefi el d i s marked wi th fenci ng (barbwi r e or concerti na) and mi ne markers.
C2, FM 20-32
Marki ng i s empl aced across the front, on both si des, between l anes, and to the
l eft and ri ght of the crossi ng si te as far out as practi cal .
Engi neer s may al so hel p r emove damaged vehi cl es fr om mi nefi el d l anes.
Recovery vehi cl es shoul d be avai l abl e near l anes for thi s purpose.
AREA CLEARANCE
Cl ear i ng oper ati ons ar e done when engi neer s r ecei ve a mi ssi on to cl ear an
ar ea of mi nes or to cl ear a speci fi c mi nefi el d i n a fr i endl y AO. The mi nefi el d
was r epor ted and may al r eady be mar ked on al l si des. The worst case woul d
be i f the mi nefi el d was reported but not marked and i ts l i mi ts were unknown.
The engi neer uni t r ecei vi ng the mi ssi on bases pl ans on avai l abl e i nfor mati on
and pr epar es equi pment based on the esti mate. Detai l ed techni ques and
procedures for area and route cl earance operati ons are outl i ned i n Chapter 11.
Acti ons at the mi nefi el d begi n wi th a thorough reconnai ssance to i denti fy the
mi nefi el d l i mi ts and the types of mi nes. Thi s i s a ti me-consumi ng process that
i s hazar dous to shor tcut. I denti fi ed l i mi ts ar e mar ked wi th an expedi ent
system of si ngl e-str and bar bwi r e or concer ti na. I n thi s si tuati on, si nce al l
mi nes must be destr oyed, the uni t takes a systemati c appr oach to cl ear i ng
mi nes. The pr ocedur e depends on the types of mi nes and whether the mi nes
are buri ed or surface-l ai d.
I f mi nes are magneti c- or sei smi c-fused, mechani cal assets are used. Pressure
mi nes can be destroyed by usi ng hand-empl aced expl osi ves. When a manual
procedure i s used, el i mi nate tri p wi res on AP mi nes wi th grapnel hooks before
movi ng forward to detect mi nes.
Usi ng the manual pr ocedure, engi neer s vi sual l y detect mi nes or detect them
wi th mi ne detector s and pr obes. They al so mar k mi nes for destr ucti on by
expl osi ves. Chapter 11 contai ns i nformati on on mi nesweepi ng procedures.
After the mi nes are destroyed, engi neers proof used l anes and routes to ensure
that al l the mi nes wer e el i mi nated. Thi s i s done by usi ng a mi ne r ol l er or
another bl ast-resi stant devi ce. Proofi ng i s di scussed further i n Chapter 10.
DEMINING
Demi ni ng i s the compl ete r emoval of al l mi nes and UXO to safeguar d the
ci vi l i an popul ati on wi thi n a geopol i ti cal boundary after hosti l i ti es cease. I t i s
an extr emel y manpower- and ti me-i ntensi ve oper ati on and i s someti mes
contr acted. Al though not a for mal Ar my mi ssi on or functi on, SOFs may
pr ovi de speci al exper ti se i n tr ai ni ng demi ni ng or gani zati ons, acti ng as
advi sors, and taki ng the l ead i n provi di ng cl ear ance equi pment or techni ques
that can be useful i n demi ni ng oper ati ons. Demi ni ng TTP ar e outl i ned i n TC
31-34.
FM 20-32
Minefield Reduction 10-1
Chapter 10
Minefield Reduction
Reducti on i s the physi cal cr eati on of a l ane thr ough a mi nefi el d. I t i s a
fundamental of breachi ng operati ons as di scussed i n Chapter 9 and i n FM
3-34.2. A number of tasks (detecti ng, r epor ti ng, r educi ng, pr oofi ng, and
marki ng) di rectl y support or are i ncl uded i n mi nefi el d r educti on.
DETECTING
Detecti on i s th e actual con fi r mati on an d l ocati on of mi n es. I t may be
accompl i shed thr ough r econnai ssance, or i t may be uni ntenti onal (such as a
vehi cl e r unni ng i nto a mi ne). Mi ne detecti on i s used i n conjuncti on wi th
i ntel l i gence-gather i ng oper ati ons, mi nefi el d bypass r econnai ssance, and
br each i n g an d cl ear i n g oper ati on s. Th er e ar e fou r ty pes of detecti on
methodsvi sual , physi cal (probi ng), el ectroni c, and mechani cal .
VISUAL
Vi sual detecti on i s par t of al l combat oper ati ons. Per sonnel vi sual l y i nspect
the terrai n for the fol l owi ng mi nefi el d i ndi cators:
Tri p wi res.
Si gns of road repai r (such as new fi l l or pavi ng, road patches, di tchi ng,
cul vert work).
Si gns pl aced on trees, posts, or stakes. Threat forces mark thei r
mi nefi el ds to protect thei r own forces.
Dead ani mal s.
Damaged vehi cl es.
Di sturbances i n previ ous ti re tracks or tracks that stop unexpl ai nabl y.
Wi res l eadi ng away from the si de of the road. They may be fi ri ng wi res
that are parti al l y buri ed.
Odd features i n the ground or patterns that are not present i n nature.
Pl ant gr owth may wi l t or change col or, r ai n may wash away some of
the cover, the cov er may si nk or cr ack ar ou nd the edges, or the
materi al coveri ng the mi nes may l ook l i ke mounds of di rt.
Ci vi l i ans. They may know where mi nes or booby traps are l ocated i n
the resi denti al area. Ci vi l i ans stayi ng away from certai n pl aces or out
of cer tai n bui l di ngs ar e good i ndi cati ons of the pr esence of mi nes or
booby traps. Questi on ci vi l i ans to determi ne the exact l ocati ons.
Pi eces of wood or other debri s on a road. They may be i ndi cati ve of
pressure or pressure-rel ease FDs. These devi ces may be on the surface
or parti al l y buri ed.
C2
FM 20-32
10-2 Minefield Reduction
Patterns of objects that coul d be used as a si ghti ng l i ne. The enemy
can use mi nes that are fi red by command, so road shoul ders and areas
cl ose to the objects shoul d be searched.
PHYSICAL
Physi cal detecti on (probi ng) i s very ti me-consumi ng and i s used pri mari l y for
cl ear i n g oper ati on s, sel f-ex tr acti on , an d cov er t br each i n g oper ati on s.
Detecti on of mi nes by vi sual or el ectr oni c methods shoul d be confi r med by
probi ng. Use the fol l owi ng procedures and techni ques when probi ng for mi nes:
Rol l up your sl eeves and remove your jewel r y to i ncr ease sensi ti vi ty.
Wear a Kevl ar hel met, wi th the chi n str ap buckl ed, and a pr otecti ve
fragmentati on vest.
Stay cl ose to the ground and move i n a prone posi ti on to reduce the
effects of an acci dental bl ast. When movi ng i nto a prone posi ti on
Squat down wi thout touchi ng your knees to the ground.
Scan forward up to 2 meters and to the si des up to 3 meters for
mi ne i ndi cators.
Probe the area around your feet and as far forward as possi bl e.
Kneel on the ground after the area i s found to be cl ear, and
conti nue probi ng forward unti l you are i n a prone posi ti on.
Use si ght and touch to detect tri p wi res, fuses, and pressure prongs.
Use a sl ender, nonmetal l i c object as a probe.
Probe every 5 centi meters across a 1-meter front.
Gentl y push the probe i nto the ground at an angl e that i s l ess than 45
degrees.
Appl y just enough pressure on the probe to si nk i t sl owl y i nto the
ground.
I f the probe encounters resi stance and does not go i nto the ground
freel y, careful l y pi ck the soi l away wi th the ti p of the probe and remove
the l oose di rt by hand. Care must be taken to prevent functi oni ng the
mi ne.
When you touch a sol i d object, stop probi ng and use two fi ngers from
each hand to car eful l y r emove the sur r oundi ng soi l and i denti fy the
object.
I f the object i s a mi ne, remove enough soi l to show the mi ne type and
mar k i ts l ocati on. Do not attempt to r emove or di sarm the mi ne. Use
expl osi ves to destr oy detected mi nes i n pl ace, or use a gr appl i ng hook
and rope to cause mi nes to sel f-detonate. Do not use metal grappl i ng
hooks on magneti c-fused mi nes.
DANGER
Use extreme caution when probing. If the probe is pushed
straight down, its tip may detonate a pressure fuse.
C2, FM 20-32
Probi ng i s extremel y stressful and tedi ous. The seni or l eader must set a l i mi t
to the ti me a pr ober can actual l y pr obe i n the mi nefi el d. To deter mi ne a
r easonabl e ti me, th e l eader mu st con s i der METT-TC factor s, weather
condi ti ons, the thr eat l evel , the uni ts str ess l evel , and the pr ober s fati gue
l evel and state of mi nd. As a rul e, 20 to 30 mi nutes i s the maxi mum amount of
ti me that an i ndi vi dual can probe effecti vel y.
ELECTRONIC
El ectr oni c detecti on i s effecti ve for l ocati ng mi nes, but thi s method i s ti me-
consumi ng and exposes per sonnel to enemy fi r e. I n addi ti on, the suspected
mi nes must be confi rmed by probi ng.
AN/PSS-12MineDetector
The AN/PSS-12 mi ne detector (Fi gur e 10-1) can onl y detect metal , but most
mi nes have metal components i n thei r desi gn. The detector can l ocate and
i denti fy pl asti c or wooden mi nes by a sl i ght metal l i c si gnature. Empl oyment
and operati on procedures for the AN/PSS-12 are di scussed i n Appendi x F, and
techni cal data i s avai l abl e i n TM 5-6665-298-10. The detector i s hand-hel d
and i denti fi es suspected mi nes by an audi o si gnal i n the headphones.
As i n probi ng, consi derati on must be taken for the maxi mum amount ti me an
i ndi vi dual can oper ate the detector. The l eader consi der s METT-TC factor s,
weath er con di ti on s, th e th r eat l ev el , th e u n i ts s tr es s l ev el , an d th e
i ndi vi dual s fati gue l evel and state of mi nd. As a rul e, 20 to 30 mi nutes i s the
maxi mum amount of ti me an i ndi vi dual can use the detector effecti vel y.
AirborneStandoff Minefield Detection System
The Ai rborne Standoff Mi nefi el d Detecti on System (ASTAMI DS) (Fi gure 10-2,
page 10-4) provi des US forces wi th the capabi l i ty to detect mi nefi el ds rapi dl y.
Envi r onmental condi ti ons must be favor abl e for ai r cr aft and ASTAMI DS
operati ons. ASTAMI DS can be mounted on a UH-60 Bl ackhawk hel i copter, an
unmanned aer i al vehi cl e (UAV), or a fi xed-wi ng ai rcr aft. The system detects
Figure 10-1. AN/PSS-12 mine detector
FM 20-32
and cl assi fi es ther mal and other anomal i es as suspected mi nefi el ds al ong
r outes or i n ar eas of i nter est. ASTAMI DS can be used to pr otect advanci ng
forces and can operate i n concert wi th ai r and ground uni ts i n reconnai ssance
mi ssi ons.
System Components
ASTAMI DS har dwar e and softwar e components consi st of a sensor wi th
associ ated el ectr oni cs and the mi nefi el d-detecti on al gor i thm and pr ocessor
(MI DAP). Sur r ogate equi pment i ncl udes an ai r-data package (GPS, r adar
al ti meter, i n er ti al measu r emen t u n i t [ I MU] ), a power su ppl y, a wor k
stati on(s), a di gi tal data recorder, mounti ng racks, and a modi fi ed fl oor for the
speci fi c ai rcraft.
Oper ator s vi ew the data di spl ayed on the moni tor s, communi cate wi th the
ai r cr ew, and per for m other functi ons (such as changi ng data tapes and
produci ng reports). The ai rcrew must mai ntai n an al ti tude of 300 feet and an
ai rspeed of appr oxi matel y 70 knots for the system to detect mi nes accuratel y
wi thi n the sensors gr ound swath (appr oxi matel y 215 feet wi de). The system
has a 2-hour oper ati onal capabi l i ty, based on standar d fl i ght ti me for the
mi ssi on profi l e.
Empl oyment Concept
ASTAMI DS i s a fast method for detecti ng tacti cal mi nefi el ds. When i t i s
empl oy ed by av i ati on el emen ts i n s u ppor t of man eu v er u n i ts, cl os e
coor di nati on between avi ati on and gr ound uni ts assur es that mi nefi el d
detecti on i s reported accur atel y and qui ckl y. ASTAMI DS i s not as preci se as
gr ound detecti on systems, but i t i s accur ate enough to hel p mi ti gate the
danger s i nher ent wi th mi nefi el ds. I t can be used i n both fr i endl y and enemy
terri tori es. The use of a Bl ackhawk ASTAMI DS i n areas of threat observati on
Figure 10-2. ASTAMIDS
FM 20-32
and fi re must be pl anned and coordi nated very careful l y, because a hel i copter
i s extremel y vul nerabl e whi l e fl yi ng the mi ssi on profi l e requi red for detecti on
(steady al ti tude, speed, and path).
Once ai r bor ne and at i ts star t poi nt, the ASTAMI DS system i s pl aced i n the
cor r ect detecti on mode, bas ed on th e i n ten ded mi ss i on (r ou te or ar ea
reconnai ssance). When the system i ndi cates an i ni ti al detecti on, the operator
communi cates i t to the pi l ot. The pi l ot then fl i es a ver i fi cati on pass over the
i ndi cated area. I f the system agai n i ndi cates a detecti on, the pi l ot resumes the
mi ssi on (r oute r econnai ssance) or conti nues the sur vey patter n to deter mi ne
the mi nefi el d borders (area reconnai ssance). I f no detecti on i s i ndi cated on the
veri fi cati on pass, the operator i nstructs the pi l ot to resume the fl i ght pl an.
InterimVehicle-Mounted MineDetector
The i nter i m vehi cl e-mounted mi ne detector (I VMMD) i s used i n al l l evel s of
confl i ct and OOTW. The I VMMD i s mounted on a bl ast- and fr agmentati on-
sur vi vabl e vehi cl e; i t i s desi gned to detect and mar k buri ed and sur face-l ai d,
metal l i c AT mi nes. The pr i mar y mi ssi on of the I VMMD i s to detect mi nes
dur i ng route cl earance. The system shoul d not be used when oper ati ng i n an
envi ronment where the enemy empl oys mi nes that are not pressure-fused.
System Components
A compl ete I VMMD (Fi gur e 10-3) consi sts of one mi ne-detecti on vehi cl e
(MDV), one towi ng/mi ne-detecti on vehi cl e (T/MDV), thr ee mi ne detonati on
trai l er s, a spare-wheel modul e for the MDV, a spare-wheel modul e for the T/
MDV, and a contai ner of spare parts.
The MDVs onl y mi ssi on i s to detect mi nes. I t can negoti ate verti cal sl opes up
to a 20 per cent gr ade. The MDV empl oys a 4-cyl i nder engi ne and a manual
transmi ssi on to propel the 4.8-ton vehi cl e wi th a 3-meter-wi de detecti on array.
The detecti on ar r ay consi sts of two separ ate i nducti on coi l s (one for the l eft
si de and one for the ri ght si de) that detect magneti c fi el ds bel ow the vehi cl e.
Figure 10-3. IVMMD components
MDV
T/MDV
Mine detonation
trailers
FM 20-32
The detecti on ar r ay i s suspended between the two axl es of the vehi cl e. When
the detector encounters a metal l i c object, the operator i s noti fi ed by an audi bl e
si gnal i n the earphone. A vi sual si gnal appears on the dashboard that denotes
whi ch si de of the ar r ay detected the obj ect. The oper ator then stops the
vehi cl e, backs i t up, and r eencounters the metal l i c object. (The MDV has two
detecti on modesthe l ocate mode i s used to i denti fy the metal object, and the
pi npoi nt mode i s used to fi nd the center of the object.) When the oper ator
encounter s the str ongest si gnal , he acti vates the mar ki ng system (a nozzl e
mounted on the rear frame and centered on each detecti on array) that depl oys
a water-based i nk onto the roadway.
The T/MDV has a 6-cyl i nder engi ne and the same detecti on and mar ki ng
s y s tem as th e MDV. Th e T/MDV tows th r ee deton ati on tr ai l er s. Th e
r ecommended maxi mum oper ati ng speed whi l e towi ng the tr ai l er s i s 20 kph.
The T/MDV (wi th tr ai l er s) can negoti ate ver ti cal sl opes up to a 20 per cent
gr ade; however, goi ng down such sl opes i s di ffi cul t. The T/MDV must be i n
fi rst gear, and the trai l er brakes must be depl oyed to decrease the speed of the
vehi cl e when goi ng down a sl ope.
The mi n e deton ati on tr ai l er s ar e ver y heavy, and they ar e speci fi cal l y
desi gned to appl y heavy gr ound pr essur e that i ni ti ates pr essur e-acti vated
mi nes. Each trai l er has two axl es of di fferent l engths so that the three trai l ers
provi de a ful l 3-meter-wi de pr oofi ng capabi l i ty behi nd the T/MDV. I f a mi ne
detonates under neath the tr ai l er s, the wheel bol ts ar e desi gned to sheer so
that repai r i s l i mi ted to repl aci ng a si ngl e wheel .
The detecti on array i s suspended between the two axl es of the MDV. Al though
the vehi cl e i s desi gned to produce very l i ttl e ground pressure, i t wi l l detonate
most pressure-fused mi nes, dependi ng on the sensi ti vi ty of thei r fuses.
The MDV produces 27.9 pounds per square i nch (psi ) of ground
pressure when the ti res are i nfl ated to 14.5 psi and 21.8 psi of ground
pressure when the ti res are i nfl ated to 8.7 psi .
The T/MDV produces 49.8 psi of ground pressure when the ti res are
i nfl ated to 29 psi and 23.4 psi of gr ound pr essur e when the ti r es ar e
i nfl ated to 8.7 psi .
Empl oyment Concept
Th e I VMMD i s u sed to su ppor t r oute-cl ear an ce oper ati on s. Cl ear an ce
oper ati on s en sur e th at LOC ar e safe for the passage of per sonn el and
equi pment. The I VMMD shoul d not be used duri ng hours of l i mi ted vi si bl i ty,
because i t hampers the operators abi l i ty to see surface-l ai d mi nes and vi sual
si gnatures that i ndi cate mi ni ng acti vi ti es.
MECHANICAL
The track-wi dth mi ne rol l er i s a mechani cal mi nefi el d-detecti on system. I t i s
most effecti vel y depl oyed to l ead col umns on r oute movement, but i t can be
used to precede tacti cal formati ons. I n col umn movement, uni t vehi cl es travel
a narrow path, and one or two mi ne rol l ers can effecti vel y detect mi nes i n the
path. Mi ne r ol l er s can al so be used to detect mi nefi el ds i n fr ont of depl oyed
tacti cal for mati ons; however, mor e than one r ol l er i s r equi r ed for a good
probabi l i ty of detecti on.
FM 20-32
REPORTING
I ntel l i gence concer ni ng enemy mi nefi el ds i s r epor ted by the fastest means
avai l abl e. Spot r epor ts (SPOTREPs) ar e the tacti cal commander 's most
common sour ce of mi nefi el d i ntel l i gence. They or i gi nate fr om patr ol s that
have been sent on speci fi c mi nefi el d r econnai ssance mi ssi ons or fr om uni ts
that have di scover ed mi nefi el d i nfor mati on i n the cour se of thei r nor mal
operati ons. The i nformati on i s transmi tted to hi gher headquarters.
REDUCING
Mi nefi el d r educti on and cl ear i ng equi pment i s br oken down i nto expl osi ve,
mechani cal , el ectr oni c, and manual . Combat engi neer s and the oper ator s of
br each assets practi ce and become pr ofi ci ent i n these r educti on means. They
i ntegr ate them i nto the br each dr i l l s of the uni ts they suppor t. The team
appl i es di ffer ent TTP to br each dr i l l s and pr epar es and r ehear ses them as
part of the TF pl an.
EXPLOSIVE
M58A4Mine-ClearingLineCharge
The MI CLI C (Fi gur e 10-4, page 10-8) i s a r ocket-pr opel l ed, expl osi ve l i ne
charge. I t i s used to reduce mi nefi el ds that contai n si ngl e-i mpul se, pressure-
acti vated AT mi nes and mechani cal l y acti vated AP mi nes. I t cl ear s a 14- by
100-meter path. The MI CLI C has a 62-meter standoff di stance fr om the
l auncher to the detonati on poi nt. The MI CLI Cs effecti veness i s l i mi ted
agai nst pr ong AP mi nes, magneti cal l y acti vated mi nes (i ncl udi ng some
SCATMI NEs), top-attack mi nes, si de-attack mi nes, and mi nes contai ni ng
mul ti pl e-i mpu l se or del ay -ti me fu ses. I t al so h as l i ttl e effect on oth er
obstacl es, such as l og and concr ete barri ers, anti vehi cul ar di tches, and wal l s.
The shock effect and the psychol ogi cal i mpact of the detonati on make the
MI CLI C a useful weapon i n a cl ose fi ght or i n MOBA.
The MI CLI C i s mounted on a r ubber-ti r ed tr ai l er, or two MI CLI Cs can be
mounted on an ar mor ed vehi cl e-l aunched br i dge (AVLB), wi th the br i dge
downl oaded, usi ng a fabr i cated I -beam fr ame (pr ocedur es for mounti ng the
MI CLI C on the AVLB are outl i ned i n TM 9-1375-215-14&P). Thi s i s cal l ed an
armored vehi cl e-l aunched MI CLI C (AVLM) (Fi gure 10-5, page 10-8), and i t i s
the prefer r ed system because no tr ai l er i s i nvol ved to hi nder the mobi l i ty of
the vehi cl e.
Towi ng vehi cl es for the tr ai l er-mounted MI CLI C ar e a combat engi neer
vehi cl e (CEV), an M113 APC, M2 and M3 Br adl eys, an M9 ar mor ed combat
earthmover (ACE), a 5-ton wheel ed vehi cl e, and a 2 -ton wheel ed vehi cl e. The
tr ai l er l i mi ts the MI CLI Cs mobi l i ty i n r ough ter r ai n and degr ades the
maneuverabi l i ty of the towi ng vehi cl e, thereby i ncreasi ng vul nerabi l i ty. Si nce
the MI CLI C i s cri ti cal to the breach, i t i s kept under the protecti on of the force
and i s moved to the breach si te al ong easi l y traffi cabl e, covered, and conceal ed
routes. Thi s effecti vel y prevents the towi ng vehi cl e from performi ng any other
task (fi r i ng or maneuver i ng) or ser vi ng as an engi neer squad vehi cl e unl ess
MI CLI C empl oyment i s the squads onl y mi ssi on. Thi s i s an i mpor tant
consi derati on when sel ecti ng the towi ng vehi cl e because thi s vehi cl e must be
sol el y dedi cated to the mi ssi on.
FM 20-32
The MI CLI C can be fi r ed fr om wi thi n an ar mor ed vehi cl e wi thout exposi ng
sol di ers to fi res; however, the prefi ri ng preparati ons must be done i n advance
at a covered and conceal ed l ocati on near the breach si te. The i ni ti ati ng cabl e i s
brought i nto the vehi cl e through the hatch, whi ch must be l eft ajar, or through
the portal of the peri scope, whi ch has been removed. Therefore, the crew i s not
afforded nucl ear, bi ol ogi cal , chemi cal (NBC) protecti on. When the MI CLI C i s
Figure 10-4. MICLIC
Figure 10-5. AVLM
FM 20-32
fi r ed fr om a wheel ed vehi cl e, however, the cr ew must move to a cover ed
posi ti on outsi de the backbl ast ar ea. The speci al -pur pose cabl e on the fi r i ng
control swi tch i s l ong enough to al l ow adequate standoff.
The vehi cl e oper ator must be pr ofi ci ent i n al l aspects of pr epar i ng and
depl oyi ng the MI CLI C, i ncl udi ng the cr i ti cal aspect of sel ecti ng the opti mum
br each si te. Al though the oper ator wi l l be di r ected to the br each si te by the
engi neer pl atoon l eader or the breach force commander, ensuri ng that he can
i ndependentl y accompl i sh the task wi l l si mpl i fy the oper ati on and gr eatl y
enhance i ts l i kel i hood of success. The towi ng vehi cl e and the operator must be
sel ected wel l i n advance and be dedi cated sol el y to the task. The oper ator
must be i ncl uded i n al l r ehear sal s and pl anni ng sessi ons and, i f possi bl e,
duri ng l eaders' reconnai ssances.
Each MI CLI C tr ai l er tr anspor ts and fi r es one char ge, and then i t must be
r el oaded. The AVLM can fi r e both MI CLI Cs befor e r el oadi ng. The l oaded
char ge contai ner wei ghs 1,283 ki l ogr ams, so a l i fti ng devi ce such as a 5-ton
wr eck er or a HEMTT i s n eeded. Rel oadi n g, wh i ch can be don e by an
experi enced crew i n about 20 mi nutes, entai l s l oadi ng a rocket on the rai l and
l i fti ng a new char ge contai ner onto the l auncher. The r el oadi ng oper ati on
must be done i n a covered and conceal ed l ocati on.
The exact l i mi ts and depth of an enemy mi nefi el d ar e sel dom known befor e
the br each. Thi s i s par ti cul ar l y tr ue when the si tuati on i s uncl ear, and the
mi nefi el d i s encounter ed si mul taneousl y wi th enemy contact. The fi r st and
onl y i ndi cati on that a uni t i s i n a mi nefi el d may be when a vehi cl e encounters
a mi ne. The l eadi ng edge of the mi nefi el d sti l l may be an uncertai nty, because
the vehi cl e coul d have hi t a mi ne i n an i nteri or row. The number of MI CLI Cs
needed to cl ear a si ngl e l ane thr ough a mi nefi el d depends on the mi nefi el d
depth:
Cl eari ng a l ane through a mi nefi el d l ess than 100 meters deep
r equi r es one MI CLI C (Fi gur e 10-6, page 10-10). The l eadi ng edge of
t h e mi n e f i e l d i s i d e n t i f i e d a n d , i f p os s i b l e, con f i r me d b y
r econnai ssance. The MI CLI C i s depl oyed fr om a mi ni mum standoff
di stance of 62 meter s from the l eadi ng edge of the mi nefi el d.
Cl eari ng a l ane through a mi nefi el d more than 100 meters deep or of
uncertai n depth requi res two or more MI CLI Cs (Fi gure 10-7, page 10-
10). I f the l eadi ng edge cannot be i denti fi ed, the MI CLI C i s depl oyed
100 meter s from the possi bl e edge or str i cken vehi cl e. When the fi rst
MI CLI C i s detonated, a second MI CLI C moves 25 meters i nto the fi rst
MI CLI Cs path an d fi r es i ts ch ar ge. Th i s ex ten ds th e l an e an
addi ti onal 87 meter s. Addi ti onal MI CLI Cs are used for mi nefi el ds of
extreme depth, and each one moves down the l ane 25 meters i nto the
path created by the previ ous charge.
FM 20-32
Figure 10-6. MICLIC employment in a minefield less than 100 meters deep
Figure 10-7. MICLIC employment in a minefield of uncertain depth or greater than 100 meters
Inert
Actual charge
Known to
be <100 m
62 m
Inert
100 m
First MICLIC
Second MICLIC
62 m 100 m
100 m
100+ m
100 m 62 m
25 m
First charges
Second charges
Inert
C2, FM 20-32
The neutr al i zati on of mi nes by bl ast depends on the peak pr essur e and the
i mpul se. For the MI CLI C, the i mpul se i s at a maxi mum of 3 meters from the
l i ne char ge (on both si des) and decr eases the cl oser i t gets towar d the l i ne
char ge, to a mi ni mum of 1 meter fr om the l i ne char ge. Thi s decr ease on
i mpu l s e cau s es a ski p zone (Fi gu r e 10-8). Th i s does n ot mean th a t
neutr al i zati on i s equal to zer o per cent; i t means that i t i s not equal to 100
per cent. Mi nes that ar e bur i ed deeper than 10 centi meter s and l ocated 1 to 2
meters from the l i ne charge have a hi gh probabi l i ty of not bei ng neutral i zed.
Figure 10-8. Skip zone
Skip zone
Skip zone
5 m
3 m
4 m
2 m
1 m
1 m
3 m
2 m
4 m
5 m
Line charge
C2, FM 20-32
Antipersonnel ObstacleBreachingSystem
The Anti per sonnel Obstacl e Br eachi ng System (APOBS) (Fi gur e 10-10) i s a
man-portabl e devi ce that i s capabl e of qui ckl y creati ng a footpath through AP
mi nes and wi r e entangl ements. The APOBS i s normal l y empl oyed by combat
engi neer s, i nfantr y sol di er s, or di smounted ar mor ed caval r y per sonnel . The
APOBS pr ovi des a l i ghtwei ght, sel f-contai ned, two-man, por tabl e l i ne char ge
that i s r ocket-pr opel l ed over AP obstacl es fr om a standoff posi ti on away fr om
the edge of the obstacl e.
For di smounted oper ati ons, the APOBS i s car r i ed i n 25-ki l ogr am backpacks
by no mor e than two sol di er s for a maxi mum of 2 ki l ometer s. One backpack
assembl y consi sts of the rocket-motor l aunch mechani sm, contai ni ng a 25-
FM 20-32
meter l i ne-char ge segment and 60 attached gr enades. The other backpack
assembl y contai ns a 20-meter l i ne-charge segment and 48 attached grenades.
The total wei ght of the APOBS i s approxi matel y 54 ki l ograms. I t i s capabl e of
breachi ng a footpath that i s approxi matel y 0.6 by 45 meter s and i s fi red fr om
a 25-meter standoff.
M1A1/M1A2BangaloreTorpedo
The bangal ore torpedo (Fi gure 10-11) i s a manual l y empl aced, expl osi ve-fi l l ed
pi pe that was desi gned as a wi r e br eachi ng devi ce, but i t i s al so effecti ve
agai nst si mpl e pr essur e-acti vated AP mi nes. I t i s i ssued as a demol i ti on ki t
and consi sts of ten 1.5-meter tubes. Each tube contai ns 4 ki l ogr ams of hi gh
expl osi ves and wei ghs 6 ki l ograms. The ki t cl ears a 1- by 15-meter l ane.
The bangal or e tor pedo i s used by di smounted i nfantr y and engi neer tr oops.
An i ndi vi dual sol di er or a pai r of sol di er s connects the number of secti ons
needed and pushes the torpedo through the AP mi nefi el d before pri mi ng i t. A
Figure 10-9. APOBS
Figure 10-10. Bangalore torpedo
FM 20-32
detai l ed reconnai ssance i s conducted before empl oyi ng the bangal or e torpedo
to ensure that tri p wi res have not been used.
The bangal or e tor pedo gener ates one shor t i mpul se and i s not effecti ve
agai nst pronged, doubl e-i mpul se, or pressure-resi stant AP and AT mi nes.
MECHANICAL
MCBs and MCRs ar e fi el ded as ar mor battal i on sets that contai n 12 MCBs
and 4 MCRs. Bl ades cl ear l anes thr ough mi nefi el ds, whi l e rol l ers ar e used to
detect mi nefi el ds and pr oof l anes cr eated by other means. Rol l er s ar e not a
good pr i mar y system for l ane r educti on because mul ti pl e mi ne detonati ons
destroy the rol l er system and the vehi cl e pushi ng i t. (The rol l er i s desi gned to
resi st two conventi onal -mi ne or three scatterabl e-mi ne stri kes, dependi ng on
the mi ne type.)
The CEV, the ACE, and dozer bl ades wer e not desi gned for br eachi ng
mi nefi el ds and shoul d be empl oyed onl y as a l ast resort, because usi ng them i s
extremel y hazardous to the crew and equi pment. However, CEVs or ACEs can
effecti vel y cl ear a l ane thr ough AP scatter abl e mi nefi el ds because they
sustai n l i ttl e or no damage and offer pr otecti on to the cr ew. When usi ng a
dozer to cl ear a path thr ough mi nefi el ds, the oper ator i s exposed to mi ne
effects. Befor e cl ear i ng begi ns, the oper ator 's cabi n shoul d be sandbagged or
up-armored and the l ane shoul d be cl ear ed of tr i p wi r es. When usi ng an
engi neer bl ade to cl ear a path thr ough a scatter abl e mi nefi el d, use the ski m
techni que (Fi gur e 10-12). Star t ski mmi ng 100 meter s fr om the suspected
mi nefi el d l eadi ng edge.
Mine-ClearingBlade
The MCB (Fi gur e 10-13) i s used to r emove l and mi nes fr om the mi nefi el d. I t
consi sts of a bl ade ar r angement wi th scar i fyi ng teeth to extr act mi nes, a
mol dboar d to cast mi nes asi de, and l evel i ng ski ds to contr ol the depth of the
bl ade.
The MCB l i fts and pushes mi nes, whi ch ar e sur face-l ai d or bur i ed up to 31
centi meter s deep, to the si de of the tr ack-wi dth l anes. The bl ade has thr ee
depth setti ngs21, 25, and 31 centi meter s. The bl ade cr eates a 1.5-meter
cl ear ed path i n fr ont of each tr ack. Fi gur e 10-14, page 10-16, shows i nsi de
cl ear ance di stances between tr acks of common tr ack vehi cl es i n rel ati onshi p
to the uncl eared area l eft by the MCB.
Mi nes ar med wi th AHDs, magneti c fuses, or sei smi c fuses may be acti vated
when they are l i fted by the bl ade; and they may di sabl e the bl ade. Mi nes l i fted
by the bl ade are l eft i n the spoi l on each si de of the furrowed path and remai n
a hazar d unti l they are removed. Doubl e-i mpul se mi nes that are l i fted i nto the
spoi l on the si de have a probabi l i ty of functi oni ng i nto the hul l of the pl owi ng
vehi cl e. The ski d shoe for each bl ade exer ts adequate pr essur e to acti vate
WARNING
Do not modi fy the bangal ore torpedo. Cutti ng t he
bangalore in half or performing any other modification
could cause the device to explode.
FM 20-32
most si ngl e-i mpul se mi nes, whi ch effecti vel y cl ears a secti on of the centerl i ne
by expl osi ve detonati on. Thi s acti on may di sabl e the bl ade. Mul ti pl e-i mpul se
pr essur e fuses encounter ed by the ski d shoe ar e not defeated. A dog-bone
assembl y between the bl ades defeats ti l t-r od mi nes. The i mpr oved dog-bone
assembl y (I DA) pr oj ects a magneti c si gnatu r e and defeats ti l t-r od and
magneti c mi nes.
The MCB wei ghs appr oxi matel y 3,150 ki l ogr ams and can be mounted on an
M1 tank wi thout speci al pr epar ati on or modi fi cati on. Mounti ng r equi r es l i ft
capabi l i ty and takes up to an hour, so i t must be mounted wel l i n advance of
the mi ssi on. I t i s not easy to mount or tr ansfer the MCB to another tank
under battl efi el d condi ti ons.
Figure 10-11. Skim technique
Figure 10-12. MCB
1
5
m
FM 20-32
Once mounted, an el ectri c motor rai ses and l owers the bl ade. When i t i s i n the
rai sed posi ti on, i t mi ni mal l y effects the M1's maneuverabi l i ty and speed. Thi s
wi l l not greatl y i mpact the empl oyment of the weapon system except when the
bl ade i s i n oper ati on. The MCB i s al so equi pped wi th an emer gency, qui ck-
di sconnect feature.
The M1 shoul d per for m pl owi ng oper ati ons fr om 8 to 10 kph, dependi ng on
soi l condi ti ons. I t cannot maneuver but must conti nue i n a str ai ght path
thr ough the mi nefi el d to avoi d damagi ng the bl ade. The mai n gun must be
traversed to the si de duri ng pl owi ng because mi ne detonati on under the bl ade
may cause the gun to be thrown vi ol entl y i nto the ai r, damagi ng the tube. The
ar ea sel ected for the l ane must be r el ati vel y fl at and fr ee of r ocks or other
obstacl es.
The oper ator begi ns pl owi ng appr oxi matel y 100 meter s fr om the esti mated
mi nefi el d l eadi ng edge. He cr eates a l ane extendi ng another 100 meter s
beyond the esti mated mi nefi el d far edge to ensur e that the l ane extends
thr ough the enti r e mi nefi el d. Mul ti pl e vehi cl es cr ossi ng the br each wi l l
deepen the cut made by the MCB, and pr essur e-fused mi nes l eft i n the
uncl ear ed str i p wi l l be danger ous. The uncl ear ed str i p shoul d be cl ear ed as
soon as possi bl e.
Mine-ClearingRoller
The MCR (Fi gur e 10-15) consi sts of a r ol l er assembl y, a mounti ng ki t, and a
hand wi nch ki t. The r ol l er assembl y wei ghs appr oxi matel y 9,072 ki l ogr ams
and consi sts of two push beams mounted to the fr ont of the tank. The r ol l er s
Figure 10-13. Mine-blade width compared to track-vehicle widths
457 cm
163 cm
137 cm
226 cm
66 cm
221 cm
201 cm
191 cm
183 cm
M1 IP
63.5
cm
M60A3
M88
M2/M3
M113
Uncleared
strip
Plowed path
FM 20-32
are desi gned to defeat most si ngl e-pul se, pressure-acti vated ATand AP mi nes.
The rol l er creates a 1.1-meter-wi de cl eared path i n front of each track.
Fi gur e 10-16 shows i nsi de cl ear ance di stances between tr acks of common
tr ack vehi cl es i n r el ati onshi p to the uncl ear ed ar ea l eft by the MCR. A dog-
bone-and-chai n assembl y between the r ol l ers defeats ti l t-rod mi nes. The I DA
can be fi tted to the r ol l er. The r ol l er i s desi gned to wi thstand mul ti pl e mi ne
expl osi ons befor e damage; however, thi s depends on the si ze of the mi nes.
Large bl asts may destroy the rol l er or the vehi cl e or i njure the crew.
Figure 10-14. MCR
Figure 10-15. Mine-roller width compared to track-vehicle widths
407 cm
183 cm 112 cm 112 cm
226 cm
221 cm
201 cm
191 cm
183 cm
M1 IP
63.5
cm
M60A3
M88
M2/M3
M113
Uncleared
strip
Roller path
FM 20-32
The r ol l er can be mounted on an M1 or M60 tank that i s modi fi ed wi th a
permanentl y attached mi ne-rol l er mounti ng ki t. Mounti ng the rol l er to a tank
i s a cumbersome, ti me-consumi ng operati on because i t i s very di ffi cul t under
battl efi el d condi ti ons and r equi r es l i ft capabi l i ty. The r ol l er tank i s l i mi ted to
a speed of 5 to 15 kph. When empl oyed i n a suspected mi nefi el d, the MCR
must tr avel i n a r el ati vel y str ai ght path, because ti ght tur ns may cause the
r ol l er to devi ate fr om the path of the tr ack and l eave the tank vul ner abl e to
mi nes. Gr ound fl uctuati ons, bumps, and ber ms may cause the r ol l er to l i ft
from the ground and mi ss mi nes.
The MCR i s not desi gned to negoti ate gaps on i ts own; however, i t can be used
on AVLB cauti on cr ossi ngs. I n thi s si tuati on, the cur bi ng fr om the br i dge i s
r emoved. To pr event damage to the br i dges hydr aul i c l i ne, the tank dr i ver
uses a strap to l i ft the dog bone and chai n when crossi ng the bri dge. The mai n
gun must be tr aver sed to the si de when a mi ne encounter i s possi bl e or
i mmi nent, because a mi ne bl ast can thr ow the r ol l er or par ts of the r ol l er
vi ol entl y i nto the ai r and damage the tube. The mai n gun shoul d onl y be fi red
from a temporary hal t.
When the si tuati on and the mi ssi on per mi t, MCRs may be empl oyed as l ead
vehi cl es to detect mi nefi el ds. Thi s i s most vi abl e when the supported el ement
i s tr avel i ng i n a col umn. The r ol l er may al so be used to l ead a suppor ted
el ement tr avel i ng i n a tacti cal for mati on other than a col umn, but i t i s l ess
effecti ve than other methods because
Vehi cl es not di rectl y behi nd the rol l er may encounter mi nes passed by
the rol l er.
The rol l er may travel wel l i nto or compl etel y through a wi del y spaced
mi nefi el d wi thout encounter i ng a mi ne, thus gi vi ng the for mati on a
fal se sense of securi ty.
A mi ne encountered by the rol l er may not be on the l eadi ng edge of the
mi nefi el d.
The rol l er vehi cl e i s extremel y vul nerabl e because i t can onl y use i ts
weapon system from a temporary hal t.
Rol l er s ar e best used to pr oof l anes i n obstacl es that ar e br eached by other
means, such as a MI CLI C or an MCB. A r ol l er pul l i ng a tr ai l er-mounted
MI CLI C can pr oof a l ane created by a MI CLI C that was l aunched by another
vehi cl e. The rol l er then fi res the second MI CLI C and proofs i ts own l ane.
I f r ol l er s par ti ci pate i n a del i ber ate br each oper ati on or i f th e for ce
i ncorporates r ol l ers i nto a hasty breach pl an, rol l ers must be mounted before
rehearsal s. Unmounted rol l ers that not bei ng used for the mi ssi on are carri ed
i n the TF for mati on on M916 tr actor tr ai l er s. Rol l er s r equi r e l i ft capabi l i ty
(such as an M88), a secure l ocati on, and 30 to 60 mi nutes to mount on a tank
that i s fi tted wi th a mounti ng ki t.
Panther
The M60 Panther (Fi gure 10-17) i s one of several devel opmental countermi ne
systems used by US for ces dur i ng oper ati ons J oint Endeavor and J oint Task
ForceEagle. The Panther i s a r emotel y contr ol l ed vehi cl e wi th mi ne r ol l er s,
and i t i s used to pr oof l anes and assembl y ar eas. The system consi sts of a
FM 20-32
tur r etl ess M60 tank, I sr ael i mi ne r ol l er s, an anti magneti c actuati ng devi ce,
and an RCU that i s mounted i n a separ ate vehi cl e. Addi ti onal l y, a r emote
vi deo camera al l ows the operator to see the road ahead.
Duri ng route cl earance or proofi ng operati ons, the Panther i s the l ead vehi cl e
on the r oute. I t i s fol l owed cl osel y by an ar mor ed contr ol vehi cl e, usual l y an
M113. The contr ol vehi cl e contai ns the Panther oper ator, the RCU, and the
moni tor. The moni tor di spl ays the r oute bei ng pr oofed or cl ear ed thr ough a
camer a mou n ted on th e Pan th er. Th e Pan th er i s con tr ol l ed fr om th e
commander copul a or tr oop hatch of the contr ol vehi cl e. The contr ol vehi cl e
shoul d be appr oxi matel y 200 to 300 meter s behi nd the Panther, and i ts
hatches shoul d be secur ed open. Cr ew members i n the contr ol vehi cl e shoul d
be weari ng I mproved Body Ar mor System, I ndi vi dual Countermi ne (I BASI C)
protecti ve garments.
Mi ne r ol l ers can be r ai sed for l i mi ted travel whi l e mounted on the Panther. I f
the di stance i s excessi ve, the r ol l er s must be tr ansported on a cargo car r i er.
Rol l er s must be adj usted befor e ever y mi ssi on to ensur e that they have
contact wi th the gr ound and that thei r wei ght i s uni for ml y di str i buted. To
ensure proper coverage and over l ap of rol l ers, at l east three passes shoul d be
conducted. Passes shoul d have a mi ni mum of 30 centi meter s over l ap. I nsi de
rol l er di stances are the same as the MCR.
MiniFlail
The Mi ni Fl ai l (Fi gure 10-18. page 10-20) i s a remotel y operated, l i ne-of-si ght,
AP-mi ne and UXO neutr al i zati on system that was devel oped for use by US
l i ght for ces. I t can cl ear at a r ate of 1,200 squar e meter s per hour. The
Mi ni Fl ai l detonates or di sabl es AP mi nes fr om a safe oper ati ng di stance. The
Mi ni Fl ai l neutral i zes by stri ki ng objects wi th a rotati ng chai n assembl y, cal l ed
a flail, and cl ear s a foot path appr oxi matel y 1.1 meter s wi de. The system
neutr al i zes AP mi nes and UXO by detonati on, mechani cal destr ucti on, or
di spl acement fr om the cl ear ed l ane. The Mi ni Fl ai l i s appr oxi matel y 1.3
meters wi de, 1.3 meters hi gh, 3 meters l ong, and wei ghs 1,100 ki l ograms. The
system i s oper ated by a hand-hel d contr ol l er that has a maxi mum r ange of
300 meters. I t i s ful l y armored wi th a materi al si mi l ar to Kevl ar, and the ti res
Figure 10-16. Panther
FM 20-32
ar e fi l l ed wi th foam. The fl ai l i s a sel f-ar ti cul ati ng, hydr aul i cal l y power ed
shaft wi th 84 chai ns; each chai n i s 0.5 meter l ong.
M1Grizzly
The Gr i zzl y (Fi gure 10-19) provi des a hasty capabi l i ty for breachi ng compl ex
obstacl es of mi nes, wi r e, posts, r ubbl e, and tank di tches to cr eate a l ane for
other vehi cl es to fol l ow. The Gr i zzl ys pr i mar y featur es ar e a ful l -wi dth, 4.2-
meter MCB and a power ar m. The power ar m has a r each of 9 meter s and a
bucket capaci ty of 1.2 cubi c meters. I ts pri mary mi ssi ons are to reduce berms
and fi l l AT di tches.
The system i s ar med wi th an M240 7.62-mi l l i meter machi ne gun and an
MK19 40-mi l l i meter gr enade l auncher. The Gr i zzl y has an M1-ser i es tank
chassi s.
Figure 10-17. MiniFlail
Figure 10-18. Grizzly
FM 20-32
The Gri zzl y l i fts and pushes mi nes, whi ch are surface-l ai d or buri ed up to 31
centi meters deep, to the si de of ful l -wi dth l anes. The bl ade has mul ti pl e depth
setti ngs, dependi ng on the mi ssi on, and i t cr eates a 4.2-meter-wi de cl ear ed
path. When pl owi ng, the Gri zzl y i s r estr i cted to l ess than 10 kph, dependi ng
on soi l condi ti ons. The oper ator begi ns pl owi ng appr oxi matel y 100 meter s
fr om the esti mated mi nefi el d l eadi ng edge. He cr eates a l ane extendi ng
another 100 meter s beyond the esti mated mi nefi el d far edge to ensur e that
the l ane extends through the enti re mi nefi el d.
The Gr i zzl y has i ntegr ated di gi tal featur es to enhance battl efi el d awar eness.
Some of the di gi tal featur es ar e ther mal and vi deo camer as, gr ound-speed
sensor s, ter r ai n-mappi ng sensor s, and an i ntegr ated commander s contr ol
stati on.
Combat Engineer Vehiclewith Full-Width MineRake
NOTE: TheCEV with full-width minerakewill beused in Korea only.
Thi s system consi sts of a wedge-shaped rake that i s mounted to a CEV bl ade
(Fi gure 10-20).
The rake wei ghs 2,025 ki l ograms and i s l i fted off i ts tr ansport vehi cl e wi th a
HEMTT, a wrecker, an M88, or a CEV boom. The CEV crew uses basi c-i ssue
i tems to i nstal l the r ake, and i nstal l ati on takes appr oxi matel y 30 mi nutes.
The r ake has a ski d shoe to mai ntai n a r aki ng depth of 31 centi meter s. The
CEV wi th mi ne rake provi des a vehi cl e-wi dth cl earance (4.5 meters) at 5 to 10
kph. The rake has a qui ck-di sconnect featur e. I t l i fts sur face-l ai d and buri ed
mi nes (up to 31 centi meters deep) and pushes them off to both si des.
The CEV wi th mi ne r ake i s used to cl ear l anes dur i ng mi nefi el d br eachi ng.
Whi l e i t can be empl oyed as the fi r st br eachi ng asset i nto a mi nefi el d, a
MI CLI C shoul d be used fi rst to el i mi nate as many mi nes as possi bl e. The rake
i s then used to proof the l ane. The system can pul l a MI CLI C and fi re i t before
pr oofi ng. Raki ng begi ns 100 meter s befor e the mi nefi el d and conti nues 100
meter s beyond the suspected l i mi t. The CEV mai ntai ns a str ai ght cour se
through the mi nefi el d. I f the ski d shoe i s damaged, the operator reduces speed
and manual l y control s the bl ade depth. Thi s i s very di ffi cul t and ri sky.
Figure 10-19. CEV with mine rake
FM 20-32
Mine-Clearing/Armor-Protection Kit
The mi ne-cl ear i ng/ar mor-pr otecti on ki t (MCAP) consi sts of two par tsthe
mi ne-cl eari ng rake and the armor protecti on.
The rake uses a ti ne that i s mounted on a di agonal beam. The rake assembl y
i s desi gned to si ft thr ough the soi l , l i ft out mi nes, and wi ndr ow bur i ed and
su r face-l ai d mi nes to th e r i gh t of the v eh i cl e. Th e sy stem cl ear s a 30-
centi meter-deep path through a mi nefi el d. The rake has a ski d shoe that acts
as a depth control gui de for the operator.
The armor protects the crew agai nst mi ne bl ast, smal l -arms fi re, and arti l l ery
fi r e. Pr otecti on i s al so pr ovi ded for the engi ne, the fuel tank, and exposed
hydraul i c cyl i nders and l i nes. Bal l i sti c gl ass bl ocks are provi ded at each vi si on
por t to per mi t u n r es tr i cted vi ew and oper ati on of the v ehi cl e an d th e
equi pment.
The MCAP i s mounted on a D7 dozer to perform mi nefi el d breachi ng and l ane
wi deni ng. Proofi ng the l ane must be conducted after the dozer has cl eared the
l ane. Some AP mi nes may sti l l be l eft i n the l ane.
ELECTRONIC
The Fi el d-Expedi ent Counter mi ne System (FECS) i s a ser i es of copper coi l s
that fi t over the fr ont of tr acked and wheel ed vehi cl es. Power i s suppl i ed by
the vehi cl es battery. The coi l emi ts a l arge magneti c si gnature that detonates
magneti cal l y fused mi nes l ocated 2 to 5 meter s i n fr ont of the vehi cl e. The
FECS i s desi gned to defeat magneti cal l y i nfl uenced mi nes onl y and must be
used wi th other countermi ne systems.
MANUAL
When steal th i s r equi r ed or advanced mechani cal equi pment i s unavai l abl e,
manual br eachi ng pr ocedur es can be used. Engi neer s use hand-empl aced
expl osi ves, grapnel hooks attached to ropes, probes, mi ne detectors, and hand-
empl aced mar ki ng equi pment to manual l y br each obstacl es. Thi s i s the onl y
method that works i n al l si tuati ons and under al l condi ti ons because cer tai n
types of ter r ai n, weather, and sophi sti cated fuses can sever el y degr ade the
effecti veness of rol l ers, pl ows, and l i ne charges.
Surface-Laid Minefields
The enemy possesses a si gni fi cant mechani cal , mi ne-buryi ng capabi l i ty. I t has
the capaci ty and the propensi ty for the l abor-i ntensi ve effort requi red to bury
mi nes by hand; however, the enemy often l ays mi nes on the sur face. Bur i ed
mi n es ar e u su al l y fou n d i n a hi gh l y pr epar ed defen s e th at r equ i r es a
del i ber ate br each oper ati on. Tr ai ni ng and executi on of sur face and bur i ed
mi nefi el d br eaches shoul d al ways assume the pr esence of AHDs and tr i p
wi res unti l proven otherwi se.
From covered posi ti ons, the engi neers fi rst use grapnel hooks to check for tri p
wi res i n the l ane. The l i mi ted range of the tossed hook requi res the procedure
to be repeated through the esti mated wi dth of the obstacl e. A demol i ti on team
then moves through the l ane. The team pl aces a linemain down the center of
the l ane, ti es the l i ne from the expl osi ves i nto the l i ne mai n, and pl aces bl ocks
of expl osi ves next to sur face-l ai d mi nes. After the mi nes ar e detonated, the
FM 20-32
team makes a vi sual check to ensure that al l of the mi nes were cl eared before
di recti ng a proofi ng rol l er and other traffi c through the l ane.
Manual procedur es must be wel l -pr acti ced. Members of the demol i ti on team
ar e assi gned speci al task s, such as gr appl er, detonati ng-cor d man, and
demol i ti ons man. Al l of the member s shoul d be cr oss-tr ai ned on al l the
pr ocedur es. Demol i ti ons ar e pr epar ed for use befor e ar r i vi ng at the br each
si te. An engi neer pl atoon uses squads i n ser i es through the mi nefi el d to cl ear
a l ane for a company team. The pl atoon must rehear se r educti on procedures
unti l executi on i s fl awl ess, qui ck, and techni cal l y safe. Duri ng the breach, the
engi neer pl atoon wi l l be exposed i n the l ane for 5 mi nutes or mor e dependi ng
on the mi ssi on, the mi nefi el d depth, and the pl atoons l evel of trai ni ng.
Buried Minefields
Manual l y reduci ng a buri ed mi nefi el d i s extremel y di ffi cul t to perform as part
of a br eachi ng oper ati on. I t i s usual l y par t of a cl ear ance oper ati on. I f the
mi ne burrows ar e not easi l y seen, mi ne detectors and probes must be used to
l ocate the mi nes. The mi nes are then destroyed by hand-empl aced charges. As
an al ter nati ve, the mi nes can be r emoved by usi ng a gr appl i ng hook and, i f
necessary, a tri pod (Fi gure 10-21). Usi ng a tri pod provi des a verti cal l i ft on the
mi ne, maki ng i t easi er to pul l the mi ne out of the hol e.
The pl atoon l eader or gani zes sol di er s i nto teams wi th di sti nct, r ehear sed
mi ssi ons i ncl udi ng gr appl i ng, detecti ng, mar ki ng, pr obi ng, and empl aci ng
demol i ti ons and detonati ng cor d. The pl atoon i s exposed i n the obstacl e for
l ong peri ods of ti me.
GrapplingHook
The grappl i ng hook (grapnel ) i s a mul ti pur pose tool that i s used for manual
obstacl e r educti on. Sol di er s use i t to detonate mi nes fr om a standoff posi ti on
by acti vati ng tri p wi res and AHDs. After the gr apnel i s used to cl ear the tr i p
wi r es i n a l ane, di smounted engi neer s can move thr ough the mi nefi el d,
vi sual l y l ocate sur face-l ai d mi nes, and pr epar e the mi nes for demol i ti on. I n
bur i ed mi nefi el ds, sol di er s gr appl e, then enter the mi nefi el d wi th mi ne
detectors and probes.
There two types of grapnel hookshand-thrown and weapon-l aunched.
Figure 10-20. Tripod
FM 20-32
Hand-Thrown
A 60+-meter l i ght r ope i s attached to the gr apnel for hand-thr owi ng. The
throwi ng range i s usual l y no more than 25 meters. The excess rope i s used for
the standoff di stance when the thr ower begi ns grappl i ng. The thrower tosses
the gr apnel and seeks cover before the grapnel and r ope touch the ground i n
case thei r i mpact detonates a mi ne. He then moves backward, reaches the end
of the excess r ope, takes cover, and begi ns gr appl i ng. Once the gr apnel i s
r ecover ed, the thr ower moves for war d to the or i gi nal posi ti on, tosses the
grapnel , and repeats the procedure at l east twi ce. He then moves to the end of
the gr appl ed ar ea and r epeats th i s sequ en ce thr ou gh the depth of the
mi nefi el d.
Weapon-Launched
A 150-meter l i ght rope i s attached to a l i ghtwei ght grapnel that i s desi gned to
be fi red from an M16A1 or M16A2 ri fl e usi ng an M855 cartri dge. The grapnel
i s pushed onto the r i fl e muzzl e, wi th the openi ng of the r etr i eval -r ope bag
ori ented toward the mi nefi el d. The fi rer i s l ocated 25 meters from the l eadi ng
edge of the mi nefi el d, and he ai ms the ri fl e muzzl e at a 30- to 40-degree angl e
for maxi mum range. Once fi red, the grapnel wi l l travel 75 to 100 meters from
the fi r er s posi ti on. After the weapon-l aunched gr apnel hook (WLGH) has
been fi r ed, the fi r er secur es the r ope, moves 60 meter s fr om the mi nefi el d,
moves i nto a pr one posi ti on, and begi ns to gr apnel . The WLGH can be used
onl y once, but i t can be reused up to 20 ti mes for trai ni ng (bl anks are used to
fi re the grapnel for trai ni ng).
Mul ti pl e gr appl er s can cl ear a l ane of tr i p wi res qui ckl y and thor oughl y, but
they must ti me thei r efforts and fol l ow procedures si mul taneousl y, i f possi bl e.
A hi t on a tr i p wi re or a pr essur e fuse can destr oy the hook and the cor d, so
engi neers shoul d carry extras.
PROOFING
Pr oofi ng i s done by passi ng a mi ne r ol l er or another mi ne-r esi stant vehi cl e
through the mi nefi el d as the l ead vehi cl e to veri fy that a l ane i s free of mi nes.
An MCB, a Panther, a Mi ni Fl ai l , or an MCR can be used to proof l anes. I f the
r i sk of l i ve mi nes r emai ni ng i n the l ane does not exceed the r i sk of l oss to
enemy fi r es whi l e wai ti ng, pr oofi ng may not be pr acti cal . Some mi nes ar e
r esi stant to some br eachi ng techni ques (for exampl e, magneti cal l y fused
mi nes may be resi stant to the MI CLI C bl ast), so proofi ng shoul d be done when
the ti me avai l abl e, the threat, and the mi ssi on al l ow.
Dur i ng a l i mi ted cl ear i ng operati on, pr oof upgr aded br each l anes fol l owi ng a
br each. After the mi nefi el d i s compl etel y cl ear ed, pr oof the r outes used
through the area.
MARKING
Thi s secti on provi des commanders wi th a standard system for marki ng breach
l anes and bypasses. I t center s ar ound a systemati c, phased upgr ade of l ane
mar ki ng. Each upgrade confor ms to the tacti cal r equi r ements for that phase
This section implements STANAGs 2036 and 2889.
C2, FM 20-32
of the attack, fr om i ni ti al r educti on of the obstacl e to the passage of l ar ger
fol l ow-on for ces, as wel l as the r etur n tr affi c necessar y to sustai n the for ce.
Addi ti onal gui del i nes are di scussed i n FM 3-34.2.
Marki ng breach l anes and bypasses i s cri ti cal to obstacl e reducti on. Effecti ve
l ane mar ki ng al l ows the commander to pr oject for ces thr ough the obstacl e
qui ckl y, wi th combat power and C
2
. I t gi ves the assaul ti ng force confi dence i n
the safety of the l ane and hel ps prevent unnecessary mi nefi el d casual ti es.
There are two cri ti cal components of the l ane-marki ng system:
Lane-marki ng pattern (l ocati on of markers i ndi cati ng the entrance,
the l ane, and the exi t).
Marki ng devi ce (type of hardware empl aced to mark the entrance, the
l ane, and the exi t).
The l ane-marki ng system outl i ned i n thi s secti on centers around standardi zed
marki ng patterns rather than the marki ng devi ce. Standardi zi ng the marki ng
pattern i s cri ti cal to offensi ve operati ons. A common l ane pattern
Enabl es cross attachments and adjacent uni ts to recogni ze breach
l anes easi l y wi th mi ni mal knowl edge of a par ti cul ar uni t's tacti cal
SOP.
Gi ves al l forces a standardi zed set of vi sual cues that are needed to
pass through a l ane safel y whi l e mai ntai ni ng thei r momentum.
Faci l i tates qui ck conversi on to the l ane-marki ng requi rements of
STANAGs 2889 and 2036 (di scussed l ater i n thi s chapter).
The standar d l ane-mar ki ng har dwar e i s deci ded by uni t commander s. Thi s
gi ves uni ts gr eater fl exi bi l i ty and al l ows them to adopt marki ng devi ces that
ar e tai l or -made for thei r type of uni t and oper ati onal focus (such as an
ar mor ed or l i ght for ce, a mounted or di smounted attack, l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty,
ther mal capabi l i ty). However, r egar dl ess of the type of devi ce used, i t must
s u ppor t th e s tan dar d l an e-mar k i n g patter n ou tl i n ed i n th e fol l owi n g
par agr aphs. Ther efor e, commander s shoul d consi der these gui del i nes and
exampl es before devel opi ng or adopti ng thei r own marki ng system.
LANE-MARKING TERMS
The defi ni ti ons i n the fol l owi ng par agr aphs pr ovi de a common basi s for
di scussi ng l ane marki ng.
EntranceMarkers
Entr ance mar ker s i ndi cate the star t of a r educed l ane thr ough an obstacl e.
They si gni fy the fr i endl y-si de l i mi t of the obstacl e and the poi nt at whi ch
movement i s r estr i cted by the l ane wi dth and path. Entr ance mar ker s ar e
pl aced to the l eft and the r i ght of the entrance poi nt and spaced the wi dth of
the r educed l ane. They must be vi sual l y di ffer ent fr om handr ai l mar ker s to
hel p the force di sti ngui sh thi s cri ti cal poi nt i n the l ane.
Handrail Markers
Handr ai l markers defi ne the l ane path through the obstacl e and i ndi cate the
l i mi ts of the l ane wi dth. As a mi ni mum, mounted and di smounted l anes wi l l
FM 20-32
have a l eft handrai l marker. Mounted and di smounted forces movi ng through
the l ane shoul d keep the l eft handrai l marker i mmedi atel y to thei r l eft. As the
operati on progresses, l ane marki ng may be upgraded to i ncl ude l eft and ri ght
handrai l markers.
Exit Markers
Exi t mar ker s i ndi cate the far si de of the r educed l ane thr ough an obstacl e.
Li ke entrance mar ker s, exi t mar ker s must be di sti ngui shabl y di ffer ent fr om
handrai l markers; however, the exi t may be marked the same as the entrance.
Exi t mar ker s ar e pl aced to the l eft and the r i ght of the exi t poi nt and spaced
the wi dth of the r educed l ane. Thi s vi sual refer ence i s cr i ti cal when onl y the
l eft handr ai l i s marked. The combi nati on of entr ance mar ker s, l eft handr ai l
mar ker s, and exi t mar ker s pr ovi de the dri ver and the tank commander wi th
vi sual cues so that they can safel y pass through a reduced l ane.
EntranceFunnel Markers
Entr ance funnel mar ker s augment entr ance mar ki ng. The V for med by a
funnel mar ker for ces the pl atoon i nto a col umn and hel ps dr i ver s and tank
commanders make l ast-mi nute adjustments before enteri ng a l ane.
Final-Approach Markers
Fi nal -approach markers ar e hi ghl y vi si bl e, r obust markers that augment the
vi sual si gnatur e of entr ance funnel mar ker s. They ar e cr i ti cal when i ni ti al
assaul t for ces must maneuver to the br eachi ng si te. Nor mal l y, the i ni ti al
assaul t for ce can obser ve the br eachi ng ar ea but cannot cl ear l y di sti ngui sh
entr ance funnel mar ker s. Fi nal -appr oach mar ker s pr ovi de the assaul t for ce
commander wi th a hi ghl y vi si bl e RP toward whi ch to maneuver hi s formati on.
They al so si gnal company team commander s to begi n changi ng from combat
col umn to col umn formati on, wi th pl atoons i n combat col umn.
Far Recognition Markers
Far recogni ti on mar ker s ar e hi ghl y vi si bl e mar ker s that ar e l ocated between
the fi nal -appr oach mar ker and the fr i endl y uni t. They ar e pr i mar i l y used
when passi ng for ces ar e deni ed di r ect obser vati on of the fi nal -appr oach
mar ker due to di stance, vi si bi l i ty, or ter r ai n. When possi bl e, far r ecogni ti on
mar ker s shoul d be di ffer ent from the fi nal -approach mar ker. Far r ecogni ti on
marker s i ndi cate the poi nt at whi ch forces begi n changi ng thei r for mati on to
postur e for the passage. A si ngl e far r ecogni ti on mar ker may ser ve up to two
i n i ti al br each l an es. On ce l an es ar e u pgr aded to two-way tr affi c, far
r ecogn i ti on mar k er s ar e r equ i r ed for each two-way l an e. Wh en a far
recogni ti on marker serves more than one l ane, a gui de or a traffi c-control post
(TCP) i s col l ocated wi th the far r ecogni ti on mar ker that i s near est to the
breach.
Guides and Traffic-Control Posts
A TCP or a gui de consi sts of a two-man team wi th communi cati ons means.
The team assi sts the commander i n control l i ng the movement of forces. When
possi bl e, mi l i tar y pol i ce (MP) shoul d man TCPs. However, the commander
may i ni ti al l y use other per sonnel as gui des to man cr i ti cal far r ecogni ti on
mar k er s unti l the MP establ i sh ful l TCPs. TCPs and gui des pr ovi de the
commander wi th a man on th e gr ou nd wh o contr ol s tr affi c fl ow to the
C2, FM 20-32
appr opr i ate l anes. When ther e ar e mul ti pl e l anes br anchi ng off a si ngl e far
recogni ti on marker, the TCP can assi st i n br eaki ng parts of the formati on off
i nto var i ous l anes. The TCP can al so hel p modi fy the traffi c fl ow when l anes
h av e been cl os ed for mai n ten an ce, for l an e ex pan s i on , or by en emy
SCATMI NEs. The gui de or TCP must gi ve the assaul t for ce commander the
azi muth and di stance to the fi nal -appr oach mar ker, i denti fy the devi ce used
for the fi nal -appr oach mar ker, and pr ovi de the l evel of the l ane-mar ki ng
pattern. For l i ght forces, gui des may physi cal l y escor t passi ng uni ts from the
far recogni ti on marker to the l ane entrance.
LEVELS OF LANE MARKING AND PATTERNS
The thr ee standar d l evel s of mar k i ng for br each l anes and bypasses ar e
i ni ti al , i ntermedi ate, and ful l .
Each l ane-marki ng l evel provi des an i ncrease i n l ane si gnature and capabi l i ty.
Lane r equi r ements change as a br eachi ng operati on matur es fr om an i ni ti al
breach to the forward passage of l arge combat forces.
I ni ti al l ane-mar k i ng r equi r ements ar e dr i ven by the natur e of the fi ght
thr ou gh the obstacl e. Mar k i ng mu st be r api d, pr ovi di n g on l y th e bar e
mi ni mum si gnatur e needed to pass smal l uni ts who make up the i ni ti al
assaul t for ce. Thi s contr asts wi th the l ane requi r ements of l ater phases of an
offense where l arger uni ts are passed to subsequent objecti ves. Here, the l ane
si gnatur e must be mor e extensi ve and mor e vi si bl e, because i t must gui de
l ar ger for ces ov er a gr eater di s tan ce to th e l an e's en tr an ce wi th ou t
i nterrupti on. Two-way traffi c becomes a pri ori ty for the si mul taneous forward
passage of combat uni ts as wel l as the return traffi c (such as ambul ances and
empty suppl y vehi cl es) that i s necessar y to sustai n the for ce. Lane-mar ki ng
l i mi ts must be absol utel y cl ear to the most i nexper i enced dr i ver or cr ewman.
A ful l y devel oped l ane must suppor t two-way tr affi c and be compl etel y
marked.
Bypasses are not marked the same as l anes. They are marked wi th di recti onal
panel s i ndi cati ng the di r ecti on of the bypass. The l i mi ts of the mi ne thr eat
must be mar k ed to pr event fr i endl y for ces fr om enter i ng the mi nefi el d.
Mar ki ng the di r ecti on of the bypass and the mi nefi el d l i mi ts wi l l enabl e the
maneuveri ng el ement to bypass the mi nefi el d wi thout havi ng to unnecessari l y
defi l e through a marked l ane. Further i nformati on on bypass marki ng can be
found i n FM 3-34.2.
Commander s must be awar e of how the needs of the for ce change wi th the
oper ati on so that they can anti ci pate l ane-mar k i ng and l ane-capabi l i ty
r equ i r emen ts. I n tegr ati n g th e l ev el s of l an e mar k i n g i n to th e over al l
breachi ng pl an ensur es that the uni t's needs ar e sati sfi ed. For ces necessar y to
mar k, mai ntai n, and upgr ade l anes must be al l ocated and tasked wi th the
mi ssi on. The phases of the scheme of maneuver and the ser vi ce-support pl an
ar e the basi s for anal yzi ng l ane r equi r ements. The fol l owi ng par agr aphs
descr i be l ane-mar ki ng patterns i n detai l and provi de gui del i nes on when the
commander shoul d upgrade l ane marki ng and l ane capabi l i ty.
Initial LaneMarking
I ni ti al l ane mar ki ng (Fi gur e 10-22, page 10-28) i s empl aced by the br each
force i mmedi atel y after the l ane i s reduced and proofed. I t provi des a si gnal to
C2, FM 20-32
the assaul t for ce commander that the l ane i s r eady for tr affi c. I ni ti al l ane
mar k i ng i s k ept to a mi n i mu m, center i ng on mar k i ngs needed to pass
i mmedi ate assaul t forces through the l ane to sei ze the i ni ti al foothol d on the
objecti ve. Nor mal l y, the assaul t for ce can obser ve the br each and does not
need the mor e vi sual si gnatur e of a matur e l ane mar ki ng. The i ni ti al l ane-
marki ng pattern has the fol l owi ng markers:
Entrance.
Exi t.
Left handrai l .
Entrance funnel .
Fi nal -approach.
Figure 10-21. Initial lane marking
*Distance for dismounted lanes
4.5 m (1 m*)
200 m (30 m*)
Final-
approach
marker
Entrance-
funnel
markers
Entrance markers
Exit markers
Left-handrail markers
15 m (5 m*)
4.5 m (1 m*)
The distance between markers is
driven by METT-TC. Distances
shown are a recommendation.
A
t
t
a
c
k
15 m
(4.5 m*)
FM 20-32
The entrance, l eft handrai l , and exi t marker s are the fi rst mar kers empl aced
by the br each for ce because they defi ne the l ocati on and the l i mi ts of the
reduced l ane.
Entrance markers are pl aced to the l eft and the ri ght of the reduced
l ane's entr ance poi nt, and they ar e spaced the wi dth of the l ane (4.5
meters for mounted l anes, 1 meter for di smounted l anes).
Left handrai l markers are pl aced at the l eft l i mi t of the l ane, al ong the
enti r e path. Handr ai l mar ker s ar e pl aced at 15-meter i nter val s for
mounted for ces and at 5-meter i nter val s for di smounted for ces.
Commander s may have to modi fy the i nter val s based on the terr ai n,
the vi si bi l i ty, the l ane l ength, and the l ane path.
Exi t markers are pl aced to the l eft and the ri ght of the reduced l ane's
exi t poi nt, and they ar e spaced the wi dth of the l ane (4.5 meter s for
mounted l anes, 1 meter for di smounted l anes).
Once the entr ance, l eft handr ai l , and exi t markers are empl aced, the br each
force empl aces the entrance funnel markers and the fi nal -approach marker.
Entrance funnel markers are pl aced at 15-meter i nterval s for
mounted forces and at 5-meter i nter val s for di smounted for ces. They
ar e pl aced di agonal to the l ane entr ance and for m a 45-degr ee V
(Fi gure 10-22).
The fi nal -approach marker i s centered on the l ane and pl aced at l east
200 meters from the l ane entrance for mounted forces. For di smounted
for ces, the natur e of the attack may i ni ti al l y pr ecl ude usi ng a fi nal -
appr oach mar ker ; however, as soon as the mi ssi on al l ows, a fi nal -
appr oach mar k er i s pl aced 30 meter s fr om th e entr ance. Fi nal -
approach markers for mounted and di smounted forces must be pl aced
on hi gh ground to ensure that they are cl earl y vi si bl e. The commander
may modi fy the recommended di stance for the fi nal -approach marker,
based on the terrai n and the vi si bi l i ty.
IntermediateLaneMarking
Upgr adi ng i ni ti al l ane marki ng to i nter medi ate l ane mar ki ng (Fi gure 10-23,
page 10-30) i s tri ggered by one of two key eventsthe commi tment of l arger
combat for ces who ar e unabl e to di r ectl y observe the breach or the r ear ward
passage of sustai nment tr affi c (casual ty evacuati on and vehi cl e r ecover y).
I ntermedi ate l ane marki ng has two goal s:
I ncreasi ng the l ane si gnature to hel p the passage of l arger, more
di stant combat forces.
Provi di ng suffi ci ent marki ng for two-way, si ngl e-l ane traffi c.
I nter medi ate l ane mar ki ng bui l ds on i ni ti al l ane mar ki ng by addi ng r i ght
handrai l markers, exi t funnel markers, far recogni ti on markers, and a farsi de
fi nal -approach marker.
The commander sets the pr i or i ty of mar k er empl acement based on the
si tuati on. I f the scheme of maneuver requi res the i mmedi ate passage of l arger
combat forces, the ri ght handrai l markers and the far recogni ti on marker may
be the pr i or i ty. On the other hand, i f i t i s necessar y to gr ound evacuate
casual ti es or to r ecover vehi cl es, empl aci ng r i ght handr ai l mar ker s, exi t
funnel markers, and a farsi de fi nal -approach marker may be requi red fi rst.
C2, FM 20-32
When upgr adi ng to i nter medi ate mar ki ng, the fi r st step i s to empl ace the
ri ght handrai l markers. Ri ght handrai l markers defi ne the ri ghtmost l i mi t of
the l ane. They are pl aced the wi dth of the l ane as defi ned by the entrance and
exi t mar ker s. The r i ght handr ai l fol l ows a path par al l el to the l eft handr ai l
through the obstacl e. Ri ght handrai l markers are pl aced at the same i nterval
as l eft handrai l markers.
Exi t funnel mar ker s and a far si de fi nal -appr oach mar ker ar e empl aced to
mi r r or the entr ance mar ker s. Exi t funnel mar ker s pr event the pr ematur e
depl oyment of the passi ng for ce i nto combat for mati on befor e i t i s safel y
Figure 10-22. Intermediate lane marking
*Distance for dismounted lanes
4.5 m (1 m*)
500 m (200 m*)
Right-handrail
markers
Exit-funnel
markers
200 m (30 m*)
Guide or TCP
Farside final-
approach marker
Far-recognition
marker
700 m (230 m*)
A
t
t
a
c
k
200 m
(30 m*)
Final-
approach
marker
Entrance-
funnel
markers
Entrance markers
Exit markers
Left-handrail
markers
15 m (5 m*)
4.5 m (1 m*)
15 m
(4.5 m*)
FM 20-32
outsi de the obstacl e. They al so become the entr ance funnel mar k er s for
r ear war d passi ng tr affi c, gi vi ng these for ces the vi sual cues needed to l i ne
themsel ves up on the l ane. The exi t funnel mar ker s ar e augmented by a
farsi de fi nal -approach marker to hel p rearward passi ng forces cl earl y i denti fy
the l ane from thei r si de. The farsi de fi nal -approach marker i s centered on the
l ane and pl aced 200 meters (mounted forces) or 30 meters (di smounted forces)
from the exi t.
A far r ecogni ti on mar ker compl etes i nter medi ate l ane mar ki ng. I t pr ovi des
commanders wi th a vi sual si gnature or a seri es of si gnatures for gui di ng thei r
movement towar d the l ane. For mounted for ces, the far r ecogni ti on mar ker
near est to the breach l ane i s pl aced 500 meter s fr om the l ane entr ance or on
the nearest terrai n feature. Di smounted forces may requi re a system of gui des
i nstead of far r ecogni ti on mar ker s for passi ng combat for ces; however, far
r ecogni ti on mar ker s must be empl aced as soon as possi bl e to r educe gui de
requi rements for passi ng mounted sustai nment traffi c. Thi s gi ves the assaul t
force commander the space needed to transi ti on hi s formati on to compani es i n
combat col u mn . Far r ecogn i ti on mar k er s may be empl aced befor e or
concurrent wi th exi t markers, based on the mi ssi on and the si tuati on.
The commander col l ocates gui des or TCPs at the far r ecogni ti on marker when
h e feel s th e s i tuati on r equ i r es mor e pos i ti ve con tr ol ov er tr affi c fl ow.
Commander s shoul d pl an for the use of ful l -ti me gui des once they have
upgr aded to i nter medi ate mar ki ng. TCPs become mi ssi on-cr i ti cal dur i ng
l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty or i n r estr i cti ve ter r ai n. They shoul d al so be used when a
si ngl e far recogni ti on marker feeds more than one breach l ane. TCPs must be
manned wi th a mi ni mum of two sol di ers and must have FM communi cati ons
wi th the control l i ng headquarters. I t i s essenti al that sol di ers acti ng as gui des
or TCPs know the
Azi muth and di stance to the breach l ane and the 8-di gi t gri d
coordi nate of the l ane.
Level of l ane marki ng.
Type of fi nal -approach marker used.
Traffi c-control pl an and march order.
Up-to-date status of l ane marki ng, mai ntenance, and so forth.
Full LaneMarking
Expandi ng br each l anes to ful l (two-way) l ane mar ki ng (Fi gur e 10-24, page
10-32) i s r esour ce-i ntensi ve and i s not nor mal l y a par t of an i ni ti al br each
oper ati on. A ful l y matured l ane i s one that wi l l suppor t uni nter r upted, two-
way tr affi c. Expandi ng a br each l ane to a ful l l ane i nvol ves expandi ng the
wi dth of the l ane to accommodate two-way traffi c and modi fyi ng the marki ng
patter n to gi v e for war d an d r ear war d pass i n g for ces th e s ame v i s u al
si gnature. Upgradi ng to a ful l l ane i s normal l y assi gned to fol l ow-on engi neer
for ces, si nce i t i s usual l y beyond the i mmedi ate capabi l i ty of engi neer s wi th
forward uni ts.
Upgr adi n g i n ter medi ate l an e mar k i n g to fu l l l an e mar k i ng begi n s by
temporari l y cl osi ng the l ane, rerouti ng traffi c, and expandi ng the l ane wi dth.
The i ni ti al reduced and proofed l ane i s al ways expanded to the l eft, i n rel ati on
to the di r ecti on of the attack . Engi neer s r educe and pr oof the obstacl e
begi nni ng at the l eft handrai l to gi ve a total l ane wi dth of 10 meters (5 meters
C2, FM 20-32
each way). The expansi on wi dth r equi r ement i s the same for ar mor ed and
l i ght for ces, because both for ces must be abl e to pass mounted sustai nment
and combat forces duri ng thi s phase.
Once the engi neer s expand the l ane wi dth to 10 meter s, they ensur e that
entrance, exi t, handr ai l , funnel , and fi nal -approach markers ar e r epl aced on
th e r etu r n l an e. Al l mar k i n gs ar e th e s ame as des cr i bed i n pr ev i ou s
paragraphs.
The ful l l ane-mar ki ng patter n has thr ee entr ance and thr ee exi t mar ker s.
They ar e pl aced the wi dth of for war d and r etur n l anes and ar e vi sual l y
di ffer ent fr om other mar ker s. Uni ts must be tr ai ned to r ecogni ze that thr ee
entrance markers i ndi cate a two-way traffi c l ane and that they shoul d al ways
use the ri ghtmost l ane.
Figure 10-23. Full lane marking
10 m
Forward
traffic
Right handrail
(forward traffic)
Right handrail
(return traffic)
Return
traffic
Guide or TCP
Guide or TCP
Left handrail for
forward and return
traffic
Original lane
A
t
t
a
c
k
Far-recognition
marker
10 m
Entrance/exit markers
Entrance/exit markers
Funnel
markers
Funnel
markers
Far-recognition
marker
Final-approach
marker
Final-approach
marker
C2, FM 20-32
Entrance and exi t funnel markers ar e pl aced sl i ghtl y di fferent from pr evi ous
marki ng patterns. They extend out from the entrance and exi t markers on the
ri ght si de onl y.
Fi nal -appr oach mar k er s ar e pl aced 200 meter s fr om, and center ed on ,
entr ances of for war d and r etur n l anes. Thi s hel ps for ces cl ear l y i denti fy the
entrance poi nts from ei ther di recti on.
Far r ecogni ti on marker s ar e pl aced a maxi mum of 500 meter s fr om the l ane
entr ance or on the near est ter r ai n featur e fr om for war d and r etur n fi nal -
approach markers.
COMMANDER'S GUIDANCE FOR LANE MARKING
Tabl e 10-1 pr ovi des a summar y of l ane-mar ki ng l evel s, gui del i nes on uni t
responsi bi l i ti es, and events that tri gger l ane upgrade. I n the tabl e, whorefers
to the uni t responsi bl e for l ane upgr ade mar ki ng and when descri bes events
that tri gger the need to upgrade.
Table 10-1. Lane-marking levels, unit responsibilities, and trigger events
Initial Intermediate Full (Two Way)
Who TF breach force TF breach force Brigade
When
Obstacle is reduced
Passing battalion- or
company-size forces
Passing brigade- or battalion-size
forces
Passing platoon- or
company-size assault forces
Passing force which
cannot see the lane
Situation requires uninterrupted
sustainment traffic
Passing TF combat
trains
Markers
Entrance Add right handrail Expand lane width to 10 meters
Exit Add exit funnel Adjust entrance/exit
Left handrail
Add farside final
approach
Adjust left/right handrails to new width
Entrance funnel Add far recognition Add far recognition
Final approach Add guides or TCPs Add farside guides or TCPs
FM 20-32
LANE-MARKING DEVICES
The maj or i ty of l ane mar k i ng i n the fi el d i s done by usi ng nonstandar d
marki ng devi ces. When adopti ng a nonstandard marki ng devi ce, commanders
shoul d consi der the gui del i nes summari zed i n Tabl e 10-2.
Fi gure 10-25 shows some of the devi ces that can be uti l i zed for l ane marki ng,
and they are easi l y procured or fabri cated. Thi s i s not an i ncl usi ve l i sti ng but
i s i ntended to show commanders some of the opti ons.
Some general requi rements for l ane marki ng are
Markers must be abl e to wi thstand the ri gors of the terrai n, the
weather, and the battl efi el d.
Markers shoul d be easy to modi fy, usi ng mi ni mal manpower and
equi pment, when vi si bi l i ty i s l i mi ted.
Lane-marki ng panel s shoul d have thermal and I R refl ecti ve marki ng
so that they can be easi l y i denti fi ed duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty.
Enhancements for l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty shoul d be a constant source rather
than a pul sati ng str obe. Str obes do not make the mar ki ng patter n
readi l y apparent, parti cul arl y when approachi ng from an angl e.
Table 10-2. Guidelines for lane-marking devices
Marker Mounted Forces Dismounted Forces
Handrail and funnel
markers
Visible by TC and driver
(buttoned up) from 50 meters
Visible by a dismounted soldier in
a prone position from 15 meters
Quick and easy to emplace,
minimizing the need to expose
soldiers outside the carrier
Lightweight, quick, and easy to
emplace (a dismounted soldier
should be able to carry enough
markers for the lane and still be
able to fire and maneuver)
Entrance and exit
markers
Visible by TC buttoned up from
100 meters
Visible by a dismounted soldier
from 50 meters
Visually different from handrail
and funnel markers
Visually different from handrail
and funnel markers
Quick and easy to emplace (may
require soldiers to dismount to
emplace)
Lightweight, quick, and easy to
emplace
Easily man-portable
Final-approachand
far recognition
markers
Visible by TC (not buttoned up)
from 500 meters
Visible by a dismounted soldier
on the march from 100 meters
Visually different from each other Visually different from each other
Visually alterable to facilitate
traffic control through multiple
lanes
Visually alterable to facilitate
traffic control through multiple
lanes
FM 20-32
Figure 10-24. Marking devices
Traffic cone Highway marker Tippy Tom HEMMS pole
Short pole
Short-pole
assembly
Base
plate
HEMMS pole
VS-17
panel strip
Stake
straps
10 cm
26 cm
Long-pole
assembly
VS-17
panel
NOTE: Cut 61 cm
above the base to
make a short pole.
NOTE: Stack 3
short poles to
make a long pole.
Far recognition marker
using camouflage
support system
Entrance
marker
Exit marker
Left
handrail
marker
61 cm
1
6
c
m
FM 20-32
The fol l owi ng standar d mar ki ng sets ar e avai l abl e thr ough nor mal suppl y
channel s:
Mi nefi el d marki ng set number 2, l i ne i tem number (LI N): M49096,
NSN: 9905-00-375-9180.
HEMMS, LI N: M49483, NSN: 9905-01-019-0140.
MARKING REQUIREMENTS OF THE NORTH ATLANTIC TREATY ORGANIZATION
Th e fol l owi ng par agr aph s par aph r as e th e l an e-mar k i n g r equi r ements
outl i ned i n STANAGs 2889 and 2036. They al so establ i sh the procedures used
by US for ces to modi fy i nter medi ate and ful l l ane mar k i ng to STANAG
standard. Wi th the combi ned nature of warfare, commanders need to be aware
of thei r r esponsi bi l i ti es for mar ki ng hazar dous ar eas, par ti cul ar l y br each
l anes.
STANAGs 2889 and 2036 state that the type of marki ng devi ce, pattern, and
l i ghti ng used to mar k br each l anes i n for war d ar eas i s at the di scr eti on of
nati onal author i ti es or the author i zed commander. Thi s gi ves commander s
who ar e par ti ci pati ng i n a combi ned oper ati on the fl exi bi l i ty to mar k l anes
consi stent wi th thei r r especti ve Ar my's standar d. I t al so outl i nes mi ni mum
requi rements for the l ane-marki ng pattern before i t i s used by troops of other
nati ons; however, commander s must pl an for conver ti ng a l ane to NATO
standar d as ear l y as possi bl e. When conver ti ng to NATO standar d, the
STANAG di r ects commander s to use l ane-mar ki ng devi ces as stated bel ow.
Wi thi n an offensi ve oper ati on, mar ki ng a l ane to NATO standar d wi l l not
normal l y occur unti l after the l ane i s matured to a ful l l ane.
MarkingPattern and Device
The i ntermedi ate l ane marki ng di scussed earl i er sati sfi es the mi ni mum l ane-
mar ki ng patter n that must be used befor e for ces fr om another countr y ar e
abl e to pass through a l ane. STANAGs 2889 and 2036 state that regardl ess of
the mar ki ng devi ce used, the entr ance poi nt, exi t poi nt, and l eft and r i ght
handrai l s are the mi ni mum requi red l ane si gnatur e. Therefor e, once the l ane
i s marked to the i ntermedi ate l evel , al l i ed forces can use the l ane wi thout any
addi ti onal marki ng.
STANAG 2889 r equi r es that commanders convert mar ki ng devi ces to NATO
standard as ear l y as possi bl e. Fi gure 10-26 shows a NATO standar d mar ker.
The mar ker i s pl aced at r i ght angl es to the di r ecti on of tr avel , so that the
whi te porti on of the arrow poi nts i nward to the l ane, i ndi cati ng the safe si de of
the l ane. The r ed por ti on i s outwar d, i ndi cati ng the l ane l i mi t or danger ous
si de of the l ane. STANAG 2889 al so requi res that markers be l arge enough to
be vi si bl e from 50 meters under most dayl i ght condi ti ons and have a fi el d l i fe
of 60 days.
Conversion to NATO Standard Marking
To convert i ntermedi ate and ful l l ane marki ng to NATO standard, affi x NATO
mar ker s to l ong pi ckets and r epl ace the exi sti ng entr ance, exi t, funnel , and
handrai l markers one for one (Fi gure 10-27).
Two NATO mar ker s ar e used for entr ance and exi t mar ker s to make them
di sti nctl y di fferent. One NATO marker i s affi xed to each funnel marker and to
C2, FM 20-32
Figure 10-25. NATO standard marker
Figure 10-26. NATO lane-marking conversion
Lane markers painted red and white are erected at intervals of
about 30 meters from the lane entrance to the exit.
Lane
(Red) (White) (White) (Red)
Markers must be placed at right angles to the direction of the lane.
Guide sign
Guide sign
Lane
Black
Yellow
or
Illuminated wheel or track
sign fixed beneath route
markers (see Note 5)
NOTES:
1. Minimum lane width = 4.5 m
Normal one-way lane width = 8 m
Normal two-way lane width = 16 m
2. The use of separate track and wheel
routes and the distance of the route
junction from the lane is a decision
for the tactical commander.
3. The marking interval within the lane
should be 30 m.
4. On separate routes for wheeled and
tracked vehicles, the appropriate
yellow and black illuminated sign
may be fixed beneath the route
marker.
5. Only approach and exit markers are
required.
30 m
Route
markers
Entrance/
exit lights
Entrance/
exit lights
Route markers
Illuminated wheel or
track sign fixed
beneath route
markers (see Note 5)
C2, FM 20-32
each l eft and r i ght handrai l marker. When conver ti ng ful l l ane marki ng, the
center handrai l i s marked wi th a modi fi ed NATO marker. The combi nati on of
a modi fi ed center handr ai l mar k er and di r ecti onal ar r ows at each l ane
entr ance pr ovi des al l i ed for ces wi th the si gnatur e necessar y to di sti ngui sh
two separ ate l anes. I n addi ti on, a bar bwi r e or concer ti na fence (one str and
mi ni mum) i s l ai d 1 meter above the gr ound to connect funnel mar k er s,
entrance markers, handrai l markers, and exi t pi ckets.
NATO uses whi te or green l i ghts to i l l umi nate markers at ni ght (Fi gure 10-28).
Entrance and exi t markers are marked wi th two green or whi te l i ghts pl aced
hor i zontal l y, so that the safe and danger ous mar ki ngs on them ar e cl ear l y
vi si bl e. One whi te or green l i ght i s used on funnel and handrai l markers. The
commander deci des whether the l i ght i s pl aced on top of the NATO marker or
pl aced so that i t i l l umi nates the mar k er s. Li ghts must be vi si bl e fr om a
mi ni mum of 50 meters under most condi ti ons and have a conti nuous l i fe of 12
hours.
The mi ssi on to convert i ntermedi ate or ful l l ane marki ng to NATO standard i s
nor mal l y assi gned to cor ps-l evel engi neer battal i ons wor ki ng i n the di vi si on
rear ar ea. I n speci al cases, di vi si onal engi neer battal i ons may be tasked wi th
NATO marki ng.
Figure 10-27. NATO standard marking for limited visibility
(White) (Red) (White) (Red)
Exit
markers
(Red)
(White) (White)
(White) (White)
(Red)
(Red)
(Red)
Lights (green
or white)
Lights (green
or white)
Lane
markers
Lights (green
or white)
Entrance
markers
Route and Area Clearance 11-1
Chapter 11
Route and Area Clearance
The abi l i ty to move for ces and mater i al to any poi nt i n an AO i s basi c to
combat power and often deci des the outcome of combat oper ati ons.
Maneuver r el i es on the avai l abi l i ty of LOC wi thi n an AO; and dur i ng
OOTW, cl ear LOC i s essenti al to the movement of for ces. Uni ts must
conduct route and area cl earance to ensure that LOC enabl es safe passage
of combat, combat suppor t (CS), and CSS or gani zati ons. Cl ear ance
operati ons are best-sui ted for r ear-area and stabi l i ty support operati ons.
ROUTE CLEARANCE
Route cl ear ance i s a combi ned ar ms oper ati on. Uni ts must cl ear LOC of
obstacl es and enemy acti vi ty that di srupt battl efi el d ci rcul ati on.
PLANNING
The pr i nci pl es of breachi ng oper ati ons (Chapter 9) appl y to the devel opment
an d ex ecu ti on of th e r ou te-cl ear an ce mi s s i on . Th e br each i n g ten ets
(i ntel l i gence, fundamental s, or gani zati on, mass, and synchroni zati on) shoul d
be the basi s for pl anni ng.
Intelligence
I ncor por ati ng the I PB and METT-TC factor s i nto r oute-cl ear ance oper ati ons
wi l l enabl e uni ts to predi ct what the enemy wi l l do and where i t wi l l do i t. The
I PB and the EBA offer i deal methods for establ i shi ng a SI TEMP. After the S2
and the engi neer i denti fy the most pr obabl e thr eat si tes, the S2 desi gnates
th em as NAI s. Th es e NAI s ar e th e focu s of th e r econ n ai s san ce effor t.
Engi neer s wor k i n concer t wi th other r econnai ssance assets to confi r m the
pr esence or absence of ambushes, UXO, and mi nefi el ds. The i nfor mati on
gathered fr om the I PB and the r econnai ssance effor t deter mi nes the method
and the type of r oute cl ear ance necessar y. I t al so hel ps the commander
deter mi ne any outsi de resour ces (EOD, SOF) that he may need.
Fundamentals
SOSR may not be executed, but i t i s pl anned as i t i s i n breachi ng operati ons.
Uni ts must be prepared to execute SOSR fundamental s as necessary.
Organization
Task organi zati on for a route cl earance i s si mi l ar to the task organi zati on for
a del i ber ate br each. The cl ear ance company team i s or gani zed i nto br each,
support, and assaul t forces. The breach force conducts cl eari ng operati ons, the
support for ce i sol ates the ar ea bei ng cl ear ed, and the assaul t force per for ms
securi ty functi ons beyond the cl earance si te (traffi c control poi nts) and assi sts
C2
FM 20-32
11-2 Route and Area Clearance
the br each for ce i n di sengagement, as r equi r ed. Tabl e 11-1 shows a sampl e
task organi zati on for a route cl earance.
Mass
Suffi ci ent maneuver and engi neer assets must be al l ocated to the cl ear ance
company team. The l ength an d th e wi dth of the r ou te an d th e type of
cl ear ance to be conducted deter mi ne the si ze of the sweep team. Cl ear i ng a
Cl ass A mi l i tar y r oad wi th the del i ber ate sweep techni que r equi r es at l east
two engi n eer squ ads du e to the total l an e wi dth to be cl ear ed and the
r equi r ement for the r otati on of mi ne-detector oper ator s. Dependi ng on the
type of sweep operati ons, the commander can expect a 50 percent l oss of sweep
assets. Normal l y, as i n breachi ng, a 50 percent redundancy of engi neer assets
shoul d be al l ocated to the sweep team.
Synchronization
Al l aspects of synchr oni zati on shoul d be i mpl emented when pl anni ng r oute
cl ear ance. I t i s especi al l y i mpor tant that r ehear sal s be conducted at the
combi ned arms l evel . Rehearsal s shoul d i ncl ude
Reacti on to enemy contact.
Reacti on to an ambush.
Communi cati ons exerci se.
Fi re support (obscurati on smoke, i mmedi ate suppressi on fi res, cri ti cal
fr i endl y zones for counter fi r e r adar, and no-fi r e ar ea ar ound the
cl earance si te).
Table 11-1. Sample task organization for a route clearance
Team Support Force Assault Force Breach Force
Heavy
Mechanized infantry
platoon with
dismount capability
Armor platoon
Mechanized infantry platoon
Engineer squad
Mortar section
Medical team (two ambulances)
PSYOP team
FIST
MP element
Engineer platoon with
organic vehicles
Armor platoon with
plows and rollers
Light/Heavy
Two infantry platoons
(light)
Bradley platoon with dismount
capability
Engineer squad
60-mm mortar section
PSYOP team
Forward observer
MP element
organic vehicles
Armor platoon with
plows and rollers
Light
Two infantry platoons
(light)
AT/MP section with M60/MK19 mix
PSYOP team
Forward observer
MP element
Engineer squad (+)
Infantry platoon (light)
AT/MP section with
M60/MK19 mix
FM 20-32
CSS (maneuver, casual ty evacuati on, marki ng materi al s, and
demol i ti ons resuppl y).
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
The pur pose of br eachi ng i s to pr oj ect combat power to the far si de of an
obstacl e, and br eachi ng usual l y occur s under enemy fi r e. Route-cl ear ance
operati ons focus on openi ng and mai ntai ni ng LOC to ensur e the safe passage
of combat, CS, and CSS or gani zati ons. Li k e br eachi ng, r oute-cl ear ance
oper ati ons r equi r e extensi ve BOS coor di nati on. The fol l owi ng pl anni ng
consi der ati ons shoul d be used by br i gade and battal i on TFs when pl anni ng
route-cl earance operati ons:
Intelligence
I denti fy choke poi nts, bri dges, tunnel s, cri ti cal road juncti ons, and
other bui l t-up ar eas. These ar e the most suspect ar eas for obstacl e
empl acement. However, dependi ng on the enemys over al l mi ssi on, i t
may not al ways empl ace obstacl es at these l ocati ons. Thi s i s especi al l y
true i f the enemys goal i s to psychol ogi cal l y di srupt our convoys.
Mai ntai n a si tuati on map wi th a graphi cs overl ay that refl ects the
most current i ntel l i gence i nformati on.
Mai ntai n an i nci dent map wi th a graphi cs overl ay to faci l i tate a
pattern anal ysi s.
Mai ntai n a threat order-of-battl e database, such as how the enemy
wi l l di srupt uni t LOC.
Devel op a detai l ed R&S pl an that i ncorporates modern battl efi el d
techni ques and systems, such as gr ound sensor s, for war d-l ooki ng
ai rborne radar, and satel l i te i mages. As a mi ni mum
Coordi nate for UAV support, i f avai l abl e.
Devel op i nfi l trati on routes to support recon and securi ty at l i kel y
enemy ambush si tes.
Devel op an esti mate of i mpact to ci vi l i ans on the battl efi el d
(COBs ). COBs i n cl u d e l oca l n a t i on a l s , n on gov e r n me n t
or gan i zati on s (NGOs), an d pr i vate vol u n teer or gani zati ons
(PVOs).
Conduct a dai l y fl i ght over the area to provi de up-to-the-mi nute
i ntel l i gence. When avai l abl e, coordi nate ASTAMI DS coverage.
Coordi nate wi th the USAF to peri odi cal l y check the route (for
exampl e, usi ng an AC-130 Specter gunshi p).
Provi de an i ntel l i gence update to company team l eaders before
depar tur e. Thi s shoul d be i n the for m of a 1:50,000 enemy SI TEMP
overl ay (confi rmed and suspected/templ ated).
Establ i sh l i ai son wi th the host nati on, NGOs, and SOF.
Maneuver
Provi de personnel for TCPs.
FM 20-32
Cl ear and secure fl anks (at l east 100 meters) and the farsi de of
suspected and known obstacl e l ocati ons.
Cl ose the route to US-control l ed traffi c duri ng route-cl earance
operati ons to mi ni mi ze the target presented to enemy forces.
I denti fy and cl ear potenti al sni per posi ti ons befor e begi nni ng obstacl e
reducti on or cl earance.
Provi de securi ty for the cl eared route.
Gi ve operati onal control (OPCON) of avi ati on assets to the route-
cl earance commander for cl earance-support mi ssi ons.
Pl an the bui l di ng of stati c securi ty poi nts al ong the cl eared route to
reduce the probabi l i ty of reseedi ng.
FireSupport
Pl an smoke for templ ated l ocati ons.
Posi ti on mortars to ensure conti nuous coverage of the operati on (move
and set up wi th the support force).
Prepare fi res wi thi n the tacti cal rul es of engagement.
Ensure that the route-cl earance team has a FI ST coordi nator. The
cl earance commander shoul d l ocate the FI ST el ement wel l forward i n
the order of march.
Desi gnate obstacl e cl earance si tes as cri ti cal fri endl y zones for
counterfi re radar and no-fi re areas.
NOTES:
1. Priority targets shift in conjunction with company teammovement
on themain supply route(MSR).
2. Clearanceof firesis theresponsibility of themaneuver commander
of thesector wherethetarget is located.
3. Adequate Q-36 radar coverage is necessary for deliberate sweep
operations.
Mobility/Survivability
Provi de detai l ed OBSTI NTEL on mi nefi el ds. I t must i ncl ude the
Descri pti on of mi nes or expl osi ve devi ces most l i kel y encountered.
Composi ti on and pattern of obstacl e(s).
Enemy acti ons or techni ques used duri ng obstacl e empl acement.
Conduct del i berate sweep operati ons 100 meters past the obstacl e or
suspected threat.
Report, cl ear, and mark mi nes, obstacl es, and expl osi ve devi ces to
faci l i tate uni mpeded movement.
Ensure that l ane marki ng meets the standards outl i ned i n Chapter 10
and that materi al s and techni ques are standard throughout the route.
FM 20-32
Consi der i ncl udi ng road repai r equi pment and materi al as part of the
sweep el ement (for exampl e, a 5-ton dump truck fi l l ed wi th soi l and an
ACE to spread the soi l ).
Keep al l radi os, el ectroni c equi pment, and avi ati on assets at a safe
di stance duri ng reducti on operati ons.
Bl ock uncl eared roads and trai l s that branch from the route bei ng
cl eared. Thi s protects uni ts from i nadvertentl y travel i ng an uncl eared
route.
Debri ef the chai n of command and the TF S2 on the l ocati on, the
compos i ti on , an d th e or i en tati on of al l obs tacl es cl ear ed an d
encountered. Thi s assi sts the S2 and the engi neer i n I PB/EBA pattern
anal ysi s.
Air-DefenseArtillery
Consi der the possi bi l i ty of an ai r attack.
Use the fol l owi ng passi ve ai r-defense measures:
El i mi nate gl are by usi ng mud, tape, cardboard, or camoufl age nets
to cover headl i ghts, mi rrors, and porti ons of wi ndshi el ds.
Reduce dust cl ouds by reduci ng speed.
Pl an routes that offer natural conceal ment.
Use ai r guards.
I ncrease the di stance between vehi cl es.
I ncorporate Sti nger mi ssi l e teams i nto the support force.
Combat ServiceSupport
Ensure that cl earance operati ons are supported by a l ogi sti cal /combat
heal th support (CHS) package from the bri gade support area.
Pl an for ai r and ground evacuati on of casual ti es. The preferred
evacuati on method i s by ai r; the routi ne method i s by ground.
Conduct an ai r-mi ssi on bri ef wi th ai r ambul ance assets, to i ncl ude
pi ckup zones and mar ker s. Rehear se pr ocedur es for evacuati on
requests.
Ensure that the medi cal team consi sts of one or two ambul ances.
Locate the medi cal team wi th the support force.
I denti fy the ambul ance exchange poi nt al ong the route to be
cl eared.
Ensure that al l personnel wear fl ak vests or I BASI C (Fi gure 11-1,
page 11-6).
Ensure that al l vehi cl es have tow cabl es i n the front and the rear for
extracti on purposes.
Ensure that al l vehi cl es carryi ng troops have hardeni ng (sandbags on
fl oors and si des).
C2, FM 20-32
Provi de MP and expl osi ve-sni ffi ng dogs to hel p i n cl earance and
provi de securi ty for convoys duri ng and after cl eari ng operati ons.
Command and Control
NOTE: Thecompany teamcommander isrequired tooperateon three
separate frequenciesbattalion command network, company team
command network, and fire-support network.
Desi gnate, recogni ze, and i ncl ude mi nefi el d i ndi cators (Chapter 10) as
part of company team rehearsal s.
Desi gnate a reserve force (at l east pl atoon-si ze) that i s mechani zed or
ai r-assaul t capabl e.
Ensure that proper rehearsal s are pl anned and conducted accordi ng to
FM 3-34.2. As a mi ni mum, the cl earance force shoul d rehearse acti ons
on the obstacl e, acti ons on enemy contact, casual ty evacuati on, and
the control of COBs.
Ensure that the tasked uni t has a cl ear understandi ng of the mi ssi on,
i ntent, and end state. For exampl e, the cl ear i ng uni t commander
shoul d understand that hi s uni t must cl ear the road wi dth, i ncl udi ng
the shoul ders, and secure the route.
Assi gn cl earance responsi bi l i ti es to bri gade and battal i on assets.
Ensure that the maneuver commander/TF S3
Figure 11-1. IBASIC
SPECS
Antifragmentation
protective trousers
AP overboots
FM 20-32
Control s the movement of al l personnel and equi pment al ong the
route (travel authori zati on i s coordi nated through the S4).
Prepares a mi ne ri sk assessment of the mi ssi on before i ssui ng the
OPORD. (An exampl e of a mi ne r i sk assessment i s shown i n
Appendi x F.)
Tracks the status of routes (red, amber, green) i n the TF sector,
based on the amount of ti me si nce the route was cl ear ed and the
i ntel l i gence and enemy si tuati ons.
Tracks the progress of the cl earance operati on and i ntegrates i t
i nto the maneuver and CSS pl ans.
Determi nes the route l ength, usi ng cl earl y defi nabl e start and end
poi nts.
Sets pri ori ti es for the route-cl earance el ement.
Coordi nates wi th adjacent uni ts, the host nati on, NGOs, PVOs,
and SOF.
Special Operations
Ensure that psychol ogi cal operati ons (PSYOP)/ci vi l affai rs (CA)
s u ppor t th e cou n ter i n tel l i gen ce effor t by con du cti n g ci v i l i an
i ntervi ews.
Di rect ci vi l i ans al ong the MSR to the di spl aced-personnel hol di ng
areas or al ong the routes that the bri gade has i ndi cated for use.
Empl oy PSYOP/CA teams forward to di sperse ci vi l i ans and provi de
traffi c management to i sol ate the route duri ng cl earance operati ons.
TASK ORGANIZATION
A bri gade or battal i on TF nor mal l y conducts cl earance-i n-zone operati ons. To
cl ear a r oute, the battal i on TF focuses a company team as the mai n effor t on
the pr oposed MSR. Tabl e 11-1, page 11-2, shows a sampl e task or gani zati on
for a route cl earance.
Support Force
Thi s force i s compri sed of two maneuver pl atoons and the maneuver company
team XO. The su ppor t for ce pr ovi des fl ank secur i ty, r ear secur i ty, and
protecti on to the breach force. I t neutral i zes hosti l e forces encountered by the
company team. I n r ugged terr ai n or hi ghl y mi ned ar eas, movi ng the assaul t
for ce on the fl ank s woul d be too r i sky. Avi ati on assets can pr ovi de fl ank
secur i ty whi l e gr ound for ces pr ovi de r ear secur i ty. The assaul t for ce al so
searches for suspected off-route mi nes.
Assault Force
Thi s force i s compr i sed of a maneuver pl atoon, an engi neer squad, a mor tar
secti on, a medi cal team, a PSYOP team, an EOD team (or one that i s on cal l ),
and a for war d obser ver. The assaul t for ces mi ssi on i s the same as i n a
breachi ng operati on (Chapter 9).
C3, FM 20-32
Breach Force
Thi s force i s compri sed of a maneuver pl atoon (i ncl udi ng the commander) and
an engi neer pl atoon (mi nus). The br each force sweeps the route and reduces
mi ne and expl osi ve threats. I t i s further task-organi zed i nto sweep teams.
A sweep team i s a tr ai ned detecti on team th at sear ch es for mi n es and
expl osi ve devi ces. The or gani zati on of the sweep team depends on the type of
sweep mi ssi on an d the l ength, the wi dth, and the su r face composi ti on
(pavement, gr avel , di r t) of the ar ea to be swept. A pl atoon-si ze el ement can
normal l y cl ear a 4.5-meter-wi de path, and a squad-si ze el ement can normal l y
cl ear a 1.5-meter-wi de path. I f the r oute i s wi der or ti me does not per mi t
mul ti pl e passes of the route, addi ti onal engi neer assets are requi r ed. Tabl e 11-
2 outl i nes personnel and equi pment requi rements for a sweep team.
Pl atoon-Si ze Sweep Team
The normal confi gurati on for a pl atoon-si ze sweep team i s twel ve sol di ers i n a
modi fi ed col umn (Fi gur e 11-2). The pl atoon l eader super vi ses the enti r e
oper ati on. Thi s confi gur ati on i s best sui ted for sweepi ng r outes i n fr i endl y
terri tory that i s not under constant survei l l ance.
When sweepi ng i n ar eas wher e 100 per cent cover age i s r equi r ed, the team
shoul d establ i sh a cl ear l ane from whi ch to operate. Thi s i s conducted by the
gr appl e hook bei ng thr own one addi ti onal ti me i nto the suspected mi nefi el d.
The cor d on the gr appl e hook i s pul l ed taunt, wi th the fr ee end secur ed to a
stake.
Thi s establ i shes a l eft or r i ght physi cal boundar y mar k er for the mi ne-
detector oper ator to use as a gui de. The fi r st mi ne-detector oper ator wi l l
sweep a 1.5-meter l ane l eft or ri ght of thi s cord, up to the grappl e hook. At the
hook, a second stake wi l l be empl aced to hol d the boundar y l i ne and the
grappl e hook wi l l be thrown agai n and pul l ed for tri p wi res as before. A fourth
thr ow wi l l ser ve as the boundar y mar ker thr ough the suspected mi nefi el d.
Thi s procedure wi l l conti nue unti l the fi rst mi ne-detector operator i s out of the
mi nefi el d on the farsi de.
The boundary mar ker wi l l then be secured to stakes, usi ng the l ane marki ng
tape. A second boundary maker wi l l be pl aced 1 meter to the l eft or ri ght of the
or i gi nal boundar y mar ker, dependi ng on whi ch si de was swept. Thi s wi l l
Table 11-2. Personnel and equipment requirements for a sweep team
Personnel Support Personnel Equipment
NCOIC
Mine-detector
operators
Probers/markers
Radio operator
Demolition teams
Medics
Vehicle operator
One panel marker
Operational map with required maneuver graphics
Four smoke grenades (minimum)
Six mine detectors (includes three backups) and extra
batteries
Two grappling hooks with 60 meters of rope each
One demolition kit or bag for each demolition man
Six probes
Mine marking material
Lane marking tape
Ten stakes
C3, FM 20-32
establ i sh a fi xed 1-meter l ane. The 0.5-meter area that was not i ncl uded i n the
ori gi nal l ane i s to ensure that no gaps i n coverage were mi ssed on the edge of
the fi rst l ane.
The uni t wi l l then str etch a pi ece of mar ki ng tape out fr om acr oss the cl ear
footpath, movi ng i t l eft or r i ght 1.5 meter s and staki ng i t down on both ends.
Thi s wi l l be repeated as many ti mes as necessary.
Al ways mar k l anes that have not been cl ear ed wi th a pi ece of mar ki ng tape
across the entry to that l ane to prevent personnel from usi ng the l ane before i t
has been swept. After mul ti pl e l anes ar e physi cal l y mar ked, the uni t can
per for m a pl atoon-si ze sweep. Lanes shoul d be swept and cl ear ed by wor ki ng
out from the ori gi nal 1-meter footpath. As the cl eared area becomes bi gger, the
mar ki ng tape i s r emoved to al l ow the passage of per sonnel and equi pment
though the cl eared l ane.
As subsequent l anes are bei ng swept, the marki ng tape wi l l need to be secured
on the outsi de edge of the l ane. Al ways conduct a thor ough sweep of the spot
wher e the stake wi l l be pl aced. Stake i nter val s wi l l depend on ter r ai n and
atmospheri c condi ti ons.
Sol di ers 1, 2, and 3 (mi ne-detector operators) l ead the sweep team i n echel on.
Each sweep team covers 1.5 meter s of front, and sweep teams ar e spaced 30
meters apart to pr event fatal i ti es from acci dental detonati on by other mi ne-
detector oper ator s. I f r equi r ed, a four th mi ne-detector oper ator can be added
to the detecti on col umn.
Sol di er s 4 (NCOI C) and 5 (pr ober /mar ker ) fol l ow 30 meter s behi nd the l ast
mi ne-detector oper ator (Sol di er 3) and ar e center ed i n the cl ear ed l ane. The
prober/marker i s responsi bl e for marki ng the cl eared l ane on both si des.
Figure 11-2. Platoon-size sweep team
Subarea to be cleared
Relief
prober/
marker
Relief mine-
detector
operators Radio
operator
NCOIC
11
12
8
9
10
6
4
7
5
3
Mine-
detector
operator
Mine-
detector
operator
2
Mine-
detector
operator
1
Relief
demolition
man
Demolition
man
Prober/
marker
(-)
1
.
5
m
1
.
5
m
1
.
5
m
1
.
5
m
1
.
5
m
50 m 10 m 30 m 30 m 30 m 30 m
C3, FM 20-32
Sol di er s 6 (r adi o oper ator ) and 7 (demol i ti on man) fol l ow 10 meter s behi nd
Sol di ers 4 and 5 and are centered i n the cl eared l ane.
Sol di er s 8, 9, 10 (r el i ef mi ne-detector oper ator s), 11 (r el i ef pr ober /mar ker ),
and 12 (reserve demol i ti on man) fol l ow 30 meters behi nd Sol di ers 6 and 7. I f a
four th mi ne-detector oper ator i s added to the col umn, an addi ti onal r el i ef
mi ne-detector operator must al so be added.
The r emai ni ng pl atoon member s hel p the suppor t for ce or act as a r eser ve
for ce, as r equi r ed. They shoul d fi r st be i ntegr ated i nto the sweep team as a
rel i ef el ement and then moved forward as needed.
Squad-Si ze Sweep Team
The nor mal confi gur ati on for a squad-si ze sweep team i s seven sol di er s i n a
modi fi ed col umn (Fi gure 11-3). The squad l eader super vi ses the enti re sweep
oper ati on. Thi s confi gur ati on i s desi gned for sweepi ng r outes i n fr i endl y
terri tory that i s not under constant survei l l ance.
Sol di er 1 (mi ne-detector oper ator ) l eads the sweep team and cover s a 1.5-
meter-wi de path.
Sol di er s 2 (NCOI C) and 3 (pr ober /mar ker ) fol l ow 30 meter s behi nd Sol di er 1
and ar e center ed i n the cl ear ed l ane. The pr ober /mar ker i s r esponsi bl e for
marki ng the cl eared l ane on both si des.
Sol di er s 4 (r adi o oper ator ) and 5 (demol i ti on man) fol l ow 10 meter s behi nd
Sol di ers 2 and 3 and are centered i n the cl eared l ane.
Sol di er s 6 (r el i ef mi ne-detector oper ator) and 7 (r el i ef prober /mar ker ) fol l ow
30 meter s behi nd Sol di er s 4 and 5. I f the squad cannot use seven team
member s, the r el i ef pr ober /mar k er posi ti on can be el i mi nated fr om the
formati on.
The engi neer pl atoon can confi gur e the pl atoon i nto squad-si ze sweep teams
and pl ace them i n echel on (Fi gure 11-4).
Figure 11-3. Squad-size sweep team
Subarea to be cleared Relief
prober/
marker
Relief mine-
detector
operator
Radio
operator
NCOIC
6
4 7
5 3
Mine-
detector
operator
2
1
Demolition
man
Prober/
marker
1
.
5
m
1
.
5
m
1
.
5
m
10 m 30 m 30 m
Cleared area
C3, FM 20-32
METHODS AND TYPES
Th e i nfor mati on gather ed fr om the I PB an d the r econ n ai s sance effor t
deter mi nes the method and the type of r oute cl ear ance to conduct. The
deter mi nati on i s based on the si tuati on, the ti me avai l abl e, the threat l evel ,
and avai l abl e assets.
Du r i n g OOTW, i t i s r ecommen ded th at for mer war r i n g facti on (FWF)
engi neer-equi val ent cl ear ance teams pr ecede US for ces cl ear ance teams
wi thi n the FWFs AO. Do not assume that FWF cl ear ance teams wi l l be
thor ough i n thei r cl ear ance oper ati on. Treat the r oute as unsafe unti l US or
al l i ed for ce cl ear ance teams have pr oofed the r oute to confi r m that i t i s
cl eared.
Methods
Ther e ar e thr ee methods of r oute cl ear ancel i near, combat, and combi ned.
The method empl oyed depends on the si tuati on, the ti me avai l abl e, and the
cl ear ance assets avai l abl e. The maneuver for ce shoul d al ways establ i sh stati c
secur i ty posi ti ons at cr i ti cal l ocati ons fol l owi ng the compl eti on of r oute
cl earance.
Figure 11-4. Sweep teams in echelon
6
1
.
5
m
1
.
5
m
1
.
5
m
3rd squad
30 m 30 m
1
.
5
m
1
.
5
m
7
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
5
4
3
2
1
2nd squad 1st squad
C3, FM 20-32
Li near Cl earance
I n l i near cl ear ance (Fi gur e 11-5), sweep and secur i ty teams begi n r oute
cl earance at Poi nt A and compl ete i t at Poi nt B. Thi s method provi des the best
assurance of route coverage. Al though thi s i s an effecti ve method, i t i s not the
most secur e method i n a hi gh-thr eat envi r onment. I t i s al so ti me-i ntensi ve
and constrai ns the maneuver commanders fl exi bi l i ty.
Combat Cl earance
Wher eas l i near cl ear ance focuses on a speci fi c r oute, combat cl ear ance
(Fi gure 11-6) focuses on speci fi c poi nts al ong a route. As menti oned previ ousl y,
I PB and EBA can i denti fy areas for l i kel y mi ne and ambush l ocati ons. These
ar eas become NAI s or objecti ves for combat cl ear ance mi ssi ons. The combat
cl ear ance method di vi des a r oute i nto secti ons accor di ng to the number of
suspected hi gh-threat areas. Once the sweep el ement (maneuver and engi neer
forces) secures and sweeps these ar eas, the route i s consi dered cl ear. Combat
for ces can patr ol the r oute fr om these objecti ves to ensur e that the r oute i s
secure, and i f necessary, the sweep el ement can sweep the surroundi ng area i f
a mi nefi el d i s found. Fol l owi ng the sei zure of these objecti ves, the commander
mu st assume a moder ate r i sk that the S2 and the for ce en gi n eer have
i denti fi ed al l hi gh-thr eat ar eas and that the r oute i s cl ear of mi nes. Combat
cl earance i s i deal for di smounted (l i ght) forces si nce i t provi des the maxi mum
use of surpri se and conceal ment.
Figure 11-5. Linear clearance method
MSR WHITE
Sw
eep
route
M
S
R
B
L
U
E
M
S
R
B
L
U
E
S
t
r
e
a
m
C3, FM 20-32
Combi ned Cl earance
Thi s method combi nes the compl ete cl ear ance capabi l i ti es of the l i near
cl ear ance method wi th the secur i ty and sur pr i se el ements of the combat
cl ear ance method. Combi ned cl ear ance i s a two-phase, for ce-i n tensi ve
oper ati on and may r equi r e a battal i on-si ze effor t, dependi ng on the l ength of
the route. Fi rst, i denti fy hi gh-threat areas through I PB/EBA and target them
as NAI s and/or objecti ves to secur e. Then, cl ear obstacl es and enemy for ces
befor e the movement of sweep el ements. The sweep team moves down the
r oad and cl ear s any obstacl es mi ssed or not i denti fi ed dur i ng the pl anni ng
pr ocess. The mai n advantage of thi s method i s that the TF commander has
i mmedi atel y secur ed MSRs, al l owi ng hi m to push out (expand forces out past
the secur ed ar ea and secur e addi ti onal ar eas) and fi nd the enemy wi th a
degree of confi dence that fol l ow-on forces wi l l be much safer.
Types
Ther e ar e two types of sweep oper ati onsdel i ber ate and hasty. Del i ber ate
an d h asty cl ear an ce oper ati on s can be modi fi ed to meet th e ti me an d
equi pment l i mi tati ons of the TF, but the commander assumes gr eater r i sk
when the cl earance type i s modi fi ed.
Figure 11-6. Combat clearance method
MSR WHITE
M
S
R
R
E
D
M
S
R
B
L
U
E
M
S
R
B
L
U
E
Sw
eep
route
S
t
r
e
a
m
Objectives/NAIs
for clearance
efforts
C3, FM 20-32
Del i berate
A del i ber ate sweep (Fi gur e 11-7) i s ver y thor ough and i ncl udes a compl ete
sweep of the enti r e r oad (shoul der s, cul ver ts, di tches, and br i dges). I t i s the
most ti me-consumi ng sweep operati on and r el i es on el ectr oni c (pr i mar y) and
vi sual (secondary) detecti on systems.
The pl atoon sweep team (Fi gur e 11-2, page 11-9) i s di smounted to focus i ts
attenti on on the enti re l ength of the r oute. The suppor t for ce (company-si ze)
secur es at l east 100 meter s on the fl anks and 100 meter s for war d to cl ear
possi bl e enemy di r ect-fi r e systems and over watchi ng el ements i n fr ont of the
breach force. Thi s not onl y al l ows the breach force to focus sol el y on the route
but al so cl ears the area of off-route and command-detonated mi nes.
I f enemy contact i s made, the support force fi xes the threat whi l e the assaul t
for ce r eacts. Th e s weep teams wi th dr aw to a l ocati on th at pr ov i des
conceal ment and/or secur i ty. Mechani cal detecti on pr ovi des a thi r d means of
detecti on and i s the method used to pr oof the route after the sweep team has
p a s s ed t h r ou gh t h e a r ea . Th e d e l i be r a t e s we e p i n cl u d es a r ou t e
r econnai ssance and l ooks at al l ar eas of a r oute, i ncl udi ng bypasses. The
del i ber ate sweep focuses on thoroughness r ather than speed. Thi s method i s
very sl ow and tedi ous and shoul d onl y be used when ti me i s not a factor; 80 to
100 meters can be covered per hour.
Hasty
A hasty sweep (Fi gur e 11-8) consi sts of vi sual i nspecti on, physi cal sear ch or
probi ng, and the use of mi ne detectors. I t i s the fastest, most ri sky method and
i s sui ted for an ar mored or mechani zed team. I t rel i es pr i mari l y upon vi sual
Figure 11-7. Deliberate route clearance
Support force
Breach force
Assault force
MP
C3, FM 20-32
detecti on (ther mal si ghts or the naked eye) for mi nefi el d i denti fi cati on. The
br each for ce l ooks for mi nes, wi r e, and other mi nefi el d i ndi cator s. The r oad
sur face, cul ver ts, di tches, and br i dges ar e i nspected and sear ched. Vi sual
detecti on i s accompani ed by a mechani cal pr oofi ng system. El ectr oni c mi ne
detectors are used by sweep teams to check al l suspected areas.
The suppor t for ce i ncl udes a maneuver pl atoon that pr ovi des over watchi ng
fi r e an d/or secu r i ty. Acti on s u pon en emy con tact ar e th e same as i n a
del i ber ate sweep. The pr i mar y objecti ve of thi s techni que i s speed, movi ng
appr oxi matel y 3 to 5 kph. Thi s method i s extr emel y si mi l ar to the i nstr i de
breach method when encounteri ng mi nefi el ds.
The sweep team focuses on i denti fyi ng i mmedi ate ri sks to traffi c, neutral i zi ng
those ri sks, and conti nui ng on wi th the mi ssi on. A hasty sweep i s used duri ng
the combat cl earance method to val i date the ar eas that were not del i beratel y
cl eared by the sweep team. I t i s al so used i f the METT-TC anal ysi s does not
per mi t a del i ber ate sweep or i f the need for a r oad to be opened i s ur gent.
Ti me and di stance factor s may be i mposed. A l i ght for ce may not have an
MCR system but can conduct the same sweep method wi th an i mpr ovi sed
r ol l er s y stem, or th e for ce can u s e a s an dbagged, 5-ton tr u ck mov i n g
back war ds as a l ast-r esor t meth od. Usi n g MCRs or thei r equ i val ent i s
absol utel y i mper ati ve due to the hi gh r i sk of encounter i ng a mi nefi el d. The
mi ne r ake or pl ow i s not a sati sfactor y substi tute because i t destr oys r oad
surfaces.
AREA CLEARANCE
Ar ea cl ear ance i s al so a combi ned ar ms mi ssi on. Cl ear i ng oper ati ons occur
when engi neer s r ecei ve a mi ssi on to cl ear an ar ea of mi nes or to cl ear a
Figure 11-8. Hasty route clearance
Support force
Breach force
Assault force
MP
C3, FM 20-32
speci fi c mi nefi el d i n a fr i endl y AO. I n most cases, the mi nefi el d has been
reported and may al ready be marked on al l si des. The engi neer uni t recei vi ng
the mi ssi on must base i ts pl ans on avai l abl e i nfor mati on an d pr epar e
equi pment based on the esti mate.
PLANNING
Pl anni ng ar ea-cl ear an ce oper ati ons i s ver y si mi l ar to pl anni ng br each
oper ati ons. Commander s and staffs pl an and coor di nate al l the br eachi ng
tenets.
Intelligence
I ntel l i gence i s par ti cul ar l y i mpor tant for di scover i ng the types of mi nes and
mi ne fu ses th e enemy empl oy s. Th e engi neer u ses thi s i n for mati on to
deter mi ne whi ch cl ear ance and neutr al i zati on techni ques offer the best
chance for success and mi ni mi ze the ri sk to the sweep teams. I ntel l i gence al so
hel ps the commander determi ne the need for outsi de resources, such as EOD
and SOF el ements.
The i nformati on needed for area-cl earance operati ons i ncl udes
Mi nefi el d l ocati on.
Mi nefi el d ori entati on.
Presence of wi re as an obstacl e.
Locati on of gaps and bypasses.
Mi nefi el d composi ti on (buri ed or surface-l ai d mi nes, AT or AP mi nes,
AHDs, tri p wi res, and mi nefi el d depth).
Types of mi nes, empl oyment techni ques, fuses, and booby-trap
confi gurati ons.
I nfor mati on on whether or not the mi nefi el d i s mar ked and, i f i t i s
marked, the materi al used.
Possi bi l i ty of hosti l e forces i n the area.
Fundamentals
You must pl an to appl y the fou r fundamental s of br eachi ng oper ati ons
(SOSR), but you may n ot execute al l of them du e to the l ack of enemy
presence.
Organization
Task organi zati on i s si mi l ar to that used for r oute-cl ear ance oper ati ons. The
breach force i s the cl earance el ement, and the support force i s responsi bl e for
al l secur i ty and maneuver responsi bi l i ti es. There i s no assaul t for ce i n ar ea-
cl earance operati ons. Tabl e 11-3 shows a sampl e task organi zati on for an area
cl ear ance. The si ze of the for ce can be tai l or ed, based on the pr obabi l i ty of
contact.
Mass
Suffi ci ent maneuver and engi neer assets must be al l ocated to the cl ear ance
company team. The l ength and wi dth of the r oute and the amount of ti me
C3, FM 20-32
avai l abl e determi nes the si ze of the sweep team. A pl atoon i s normal l y used to
cl ear a 200- by 300-meter mi nefi el d; addi ti onal assets ar e r equi r ed to cl ear
l arger and mul ti pl e mi nefi el ds.
Synchronization
Al l aspects of synchr oni zati on shoul d be i mpl emented when pl anni ng ar ea
cl ear ance. I t i s especi al l y i mpor tant that r ehear sal s be conducted at the
combi ned arms l evel . Rehearsal s shoul d i ncl ude
Reacti on to enemy contact.
Reacti on to an ambush.
Communi cati ons exerci se.
Fi re support (obscurati on smoke, i mmedi ate suppressi on fi res, cri ti cal
fr i endl y zones for counter fi r e r adar, and no-fi r e ar ea ar ound the
cl earance si te).
CSS (maneuver, casual ty evacuati on, marki ng materi al s, and
demol i ti ons resuppl y).
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
Ar ea-cl ear ance BOS pl anni ng consi der ati ons ar e par al l el to r oute-cl ear ance
pl anni ng consi der ati ons. Br i gade and battal i on TF staffs shoul d use the
pl anni ng consi der ati ons outl i ned on pages 11-3 thr ough 11-7 pl us the ones
outl i ned bel ow:
I ntel l i gence. Focus on the most probabl e enemy attack method and
AAs.
Maneuver.
Cl ear and secure fl anks (at l east 500 meters) and the farsi de of the
area to be cl ear ed.
Provi de securi ty for the cl eared area.
Table 11-3. Sample task organization for an area clearance
Team Support Force Breach Force
Heavy
Mechanized infantry platoon
Mortar section
FIST
Armor platoon
organic vehicles
Medical team (two
ambulances)
EOD team
Light/heavy
Bradley platoon with dismount
capability
Forward observer
One infantry platoon (light)
organic vehicles
Medical team (two
ambulances)
EOD team
Light
AT/MP section with M60/MK19 mix
Forward observer
Two infantry platoons (light)
Engineer squad (-)
Medical team (two
ambulances)
EOD team
C3, FM 20-32
Fi re support. Ensure that the area-cl earance team has a FI ST
coordi nator. The FI STshoul d be col l ocated wi th the support force OI C.
Mobi l i ty/survi vabi l i ty. Establ i sh mi nefi el d control poi nts al ong the
area to be cl ear ed.
CSS.
Ensure that the medi cal team consi sts of one or two ambul ances
and that i t i s l ocated wi th the breach force.
Ensure that al l personnel wear fl ak vests or I BASI C (Fi gure 11-1,
page 11-6).
C2.
Determi ne the area l ength, usi ng cl earl y defi nabl e peri meter
poi nts.
Coordi nate wi th adjacent uni ts, the host nati on, NGOs, PVOs, and
SOF.
TASK ORGANIZATION
The battal i on TF wi l l focus a company team (mi nus) as the mai n effor t to
conduct area cl earance.
Support Force
Thi s for ce i s compr i sed of two maneuver pl atoons and an OI C. The suppor t
for ce pr ovi des fl ank secur i ty, for ward secur i ty, and protecti on for the br each
force. I t neutral i zes hosti l e forces that are encountered by the company team.
The support force secures the ar ea 500 meter s beyond the ar ea to be cl ear ed.
METT-TC factors wi l l affect the actual di stance based on the thr eat and the
weapon systems. The support for ce OI C establ i shes stati c secur i ty posi ti ons
around the area unti l the cl earance operati on i s compl ete. He al so has control
of fi res and the responsi bi l i ty to neutral i ze any hosti l e force.
Breach Force
The br each for ce i s compr i sed of an engi neer pl atoon that i s or gani zed i nto
sweep teams, a medi cal team, and an EOD team (or one that i s on cal l ). The
sweep team (squad-si ze) i s organi zed as shown i n Fi gure 11-3, page 11-10. The
br each for ces mi ssi on i s to sweep and cl ear the ar ea of mi ne and expl osi ve
threats.
METHODS AND TYPES
The br each for ce OI C deter mi nes the per i meter of the ar ea to be cl ear ed and
ensures that i t i s marked. The OI C di vi des the area i nto secti ons to be cl eared
(Fi gure 11-9). The secti ons shoul d be no l arger than 40 meters wi de and 100
meter s l ong. Thi s i s an opti mal -si zed ar ea for a sweep team to cl ear at one
ti me. The OI C assi gns squad-si ze sweep teams to each secti on.
The squads cl ear thei r assi gned secti ons usi ng the sweepi ng techni ques
di scussed earl i er i n thi s chapter. As the secti ons are cl eared, they are marked
for safety and control purposes. Thi s process i s conti nued unti l the enti re area
i s cl eared. Progress i s reported to the company team commander as requi red.
C3, FM 20-32
IMPROVISED MINE THREAT
Mi nes ar e not al ways empl oyed conventi onal l y by mi l i tar y for ces or gani c to
the host nati on or i ts enemi es. I n many cases, they ar e al so empl oyed by
terrori sts agai nst al l i ed forces or the host-nati on popul ace. I n these cases, the
threat i ncr eases because of the i mprovi sed methods i n whi ch the mi nes were
empl aced. I n conventi onal empl acement of mi nes, a pattern emerges from the
empl aci ng forces doctri ne, and the threat can easi l y be reduced by usi ng thi s
knowl edge. Ther e i s l ess patter n i n the case of i mpr ovi sed mi ni ng methods,
and thi s makes detecti on and removal very di ffi cul t.
I mprovi sed mi ni ng has many di fferent empl oyment techni ques. I n most of the
techni ques shown bel ow, a UXO can easi l y be empl oyed i n pl ace of a mi ne:
Coupl i ng mi nes. Coupl i ng i s done by l i nki ng one mi ne to another,
usual l y wi th detonati ng cor d. When the i ni ti al mi ne i s detonated, i t
deton a tes th e l i n k ed mi n e. Th i s tech n i qu e i s don e to defea t
countermi ne equi pment.
Boosti ng mi nes. Buri ed mi nes are stacked atop one another, and the
farthest mi ne from the surface i s fused. Thi s reduces the probabi l i ty of
detecti on and i ncreases the force of the bl ast.
Sensi ti zi ng AT mi nes. On some nonmetal l i c AT mi nes, the pressure
pl ate can be cr acked and the spr i ng r emoved or the mi nes expl osi ve
can be cut i nto smal l er bl ocks and empl oyed as power ful AP mi nes.
Figure 11-9. Area clearance site layout
Support force OIC
Sweep teams
(lanes are 2 m)
100 m
100 m
40 m
A
J
D
I
C B
H G K L
E F
C3, FM 20-32
The pr essur e pl ate can be r emoved fr om metal l i c AT mi nes and
empl oyed i n the same manner. Al ter nati vel y, a pr essur e-fused AP
mi ne can be pl aced on the top of an AT mi ne.
Mi xi ng trai ni ng mi nes wi th l i ve mi nes. Hosti l e forces can empl oy
tr ai ni ng mi nes at the star t of a mi nefi el d and empl ace l i ve mi nes
toward the end. The sweep el ement fal sel y bel i eves that the mi nefi el d
i s phony and becomes compl acent i n i ts reducti on acti vi ti es. When thi s
techni que i s used, l i ve mi nes are pai nted to resembl e trai ni ng mi nes.
Dai sy-chai ni ng mi nes. Command-detonated AP mi nes are commonl y
used i n dai sy chai ni ng. Hosti l e forces l i nk the mi nes wi th tri p wi res or
detonati ng cord. When the i ni ti al mi ne i s detonated, the other mi nes
wi l l detonate.
MINE LOCATIONS
Hosti l e forces normal l y pl ace more than one mi ne i n each mi ned area. Do not
focus the detecti on effor t sol el y on a hor i zontal mi ne thr eat, such as on the
gr ound or i n cul ver ts. The mi ne thr eat i s al so ver ti cal , such as i n tr ees or
attached to an over pass. Cl ear ance effor ts must accommodate the thr ee-
di mensi onal battl efi el d. Mi nes may be pl aced i n
Frequentl y used roadways.
Brush and other traffi c obstructi ons pl aced on roadways.
Bri dge bypasses and fordi ng si tes.
Road juncti ons.
Obvi ous turnarounds, bypasses, cul verts, di tches, and shoul ders.
Key l ogi sti c poi nts (water, fuel , food).
Debri s al ong a route.
DISPOSITION OF MINES
The fol l owi ng acti ons shoul d be taken when a suspected mi ne i s found:
Mark the suspected mi ne l ocati on; do not l eave any mi ne unmarked.
Search for el ectri c wi res and tri p wi res i n the i mmedi ate area. Trace
the wi r es i n both di r ecti ons to deter mi ne i f i tems ar e attached to
th em. I f th er e i s n oth i n g attach ed an d th e I PB does n ot s tate
otherwi se, cut l oose tri p wi res and el ectri c wi res.
Probe the suspected mi ne l ocati on and uncover enough of the object to
i denti fy i t. Other personnel shoul d stay at l east 30 meters away.
DANGER
Never cut taut trip wires. Alert the security element to search for an enemy that
may be manning a command-detonated mine. Keep troops away from the mine
until all the wires are traced and cut. Be alert for booby traps and ambush. If
booby traps are found, use the clearance procedures outlined in Chapter 13.
C3, FM 20-32
I f the object i s a mi ne, the prober wi thdraws and noti fi es the OI C.
The OI C deci des to bypass the mi ne, destroy i t i n pl ace, remove i t
wi th a grapnel , or noti fy EOD for hand neutral i zati on.
I f the object i s debri s, get i n a protected posi ti on and careful l y
remove the debri s wi th a grapnel hook. Be al ert for booby traps or
AHDs wi red to the debri s.
MINE-REMOVAL TECHNIQUES
A mi ne can be bypassed, detonated i n pl ace, pul l ed out by a rope or a wi re, or
neutral i zed and removed by hand. The method used depends on the l ocati on of
the mi ne, the type of the mi ne and the fuse, and the tacti cal si tuati on.
Methods of removal and acti ons on fi ndi ng a mi ne shoul d be addressed i n the
OPORD and rehearsed pri or to executi ng the mi ssi on.
Tr i p-wi r e and ti l t-rod mi nes can be detonated by thr owi ng a gr apnel , wi th a
r ope attached, past the tr i p wi r e or ti l t r od and pul l i ng the gr apnel back to
actuate the mi ne. Gr apnel s may be i mpr ovi sed fr om any avai l abl e materi al ,
such as a bent dri ft pi n or scrap materi al .
A hand-empl aced charge i s the standard demol i ti on materi al used to destroy a
mi ne i n pl ace (see FM 5-250). A 1-pound bl ock of expl osi ve pl aced next to a
mi ne i s suffi ci ent to detonate most mi nes. A charge can be pl aced next to each
mi ne i n a group, then the charges can be connected and fi red si mul taneousl y.
Rope or wi re can be used to pul l a mi ne out of i ts i nstal l ed posi ti on. Thi s i s a
safe method and onl y detonates mi nes that ar e equi pped wi th AHDs. I t al so
r educes noi se and cr ater i ng. A tr i pod (Fi gur e 10-21, page 10-23) makes i t
easi er to pul l a mi ne out of a hol e on the fi r st attempt. Use the fol l owi ng
procedures to remove mi nes:
Uncover onl y enough of the mi ne to expose a handl e or a projecti on.
Attach a 60-meter l ength of r ope or wi r e to the mi ne or engage a
grapnel . I f there i s no projecti on, engage a grapnel on the bottom si de
of the mi ne, opposi te the di recti on of pul l .
Ensure that the covered area i s not mi ned. Take cover and l i e i n a
pr one posi ti on at l east 50 meter s fr om the mi ne. Pul l the r ope to
remove the mi ne from the hol e.
Wai t at l east 30 seconds before l eavi ng cover and approachi ng the
mi ne i f the mi ne type i s unknown. Thi s guards agai nst the possi bi l i ty
of a del ay fi ri ng mechani sm.
Di spose of the mi ne accordi ng to the uni t di recti ve or SOP.
HAND NEUTRALIZATION
Appendi x A di scusses pr ocedur es for hand neutr al i zati on of US mi nes.
Forei gn mi nes and booby traps shoul d onl y be neutral i zed by EOD personnel .
DANGER
Do not move the mine while uncovering it or attaching
the rope because movement might detonate an AHD.
C3, FM 20-32
Mi nes are neutral i zed by hand, when
Uni ts are conducti ng a covert breach.
The mi ne i s l ocated on a bri dge, bui l di ng, or other faci l i ty requi red for
use by fri endl y forces.
Neutral i zati on by other means i s not possi bl e.
The mi ne can be posi ti vel y neutral i zed by hand and i s requi red for
reuse.
The mi ne type i s unknown and recovery must be attempted for
i ntel l i gence purposes.
Chemi cal mi nes are l ocated i n areas where contami nati on woul d
restri ct the use of the area by fri endl y troops.
SAFETY
The fol l owi ng safety pr ocedur es shoul d be obser ved dur i ng r oute and ar ea
cl earance:
Personnel shoul d wear hel mets and fl ak jackets to protect them
agai nst fr agmentati on. Sweep team member s shoul d wear I BASI C, i f
avai l abl e.
Vehi cl e fl oorboards shoul d be sandbagged.
Vehi cl es shoul d be di spersed at 50-meter i nterval s. Thi s ensures that
a mi ne detonated by one vehi cl e wi l l not cause casual ti es i n other
vehi cl es.
One person at a ti me shoul d be al l owed at a suspected mi ne l ocati on.
Personnel shoul d assume that mi nes and expl osi ve devi ces are
equi pped wi th AHDs unti l proven otherwi se.
Personnel shoul d not run and shoul d move onl y i n previ ousl y cl eared
areas.
Armored vehi cl es shoul d have thei r hatches open to vent the pressure
pul se from a mi ne detonati on.
Sol di ers shoul d wear bal l i sti c and l aser protecti ve spectacl es (BLPS)
or l i ghtl y ti nted, protecti ve eyewear to reduce eye fati gue and i mprove
thei r abi l i ty to recogni ze mi ne i ndi cators.
REPORTS
Di ssemi nati on of i nfor mati on i s the key to battl efi el d management. Uni ts
en coun ter i ng mi n efi el ds or expl osi ve dev i ces sh oul d fol l ow a fi v e-step
pr ocessstop, secur e, mar k, repor t, and avoi d. Uni ts must provi de adequate
i nfor mati on to thei r hi gher headquar ter s to ensur e that fol l ow-on el ements
ar e wel l i n for med. I n for mati on mu s t i n cl u de th e k n own or su spected
mi nefi el d l ocati on, types of mi nes (i f known), the mar ki ng method, the ti me
the mi nefi el d was encountered, and any addi ti onal i nformati on that may be of
use to the cl eari ng uni t.
Di vi si on and maneuver bri gades must establ i sh a central control cel l for mi ne
cl ear ance i nfor mati on. Thi s cel l r ecei ves and gather s al l mi ne and expl osi ve
C3, FM 20-32
threat data wi thi n the uni ts AO. Mi ne-contact r epor ts ar e r eported through
maneuver command channel s wi th a pr i or i ty of fl ash or i mmedi ate. The
i nfor mati on i s then joi ntl y contr ol l ed i n the oper ati ons cel l and the centr al
mi ne contr ol cel l by the engi neer staff offi cer, the G3/S3, and the Assi stant
Chi ef of Staff, G2 (I ntel l i gence) (G2)/S2. The mi ne contact database i s joi ntl y
mai ntai ned by the engi neer and the G2/S2, who subsequentl y conduct pattern
anal ysi s and i ntegrate i t i nto i ntel l i gence and operati onal updates.
The central mi ne control cel l performs the fol l owi ng acti ons:
Mai ntai ns a current si tuati on map and overl ay that depi ct fri endl y
and enemy mi nes and obstacl es.
Mai ntai ns and updates enemy obstacl e (Fi gure 11-10, page 11-24) and
route status (Fi gure 11-11, page 11-25) i nformati on.
Recei ves and mai ntai ns mi nefi el d recordi ng forms (US and forei gn)
wi thi n the uni ts operati onal area (thi s i ncl udes host-nati on mi nefi el d
data, i f avai l abl e).
Mai ntai ns a mi ne-contact database. (Thi s coul d be a cl eari nghouse for
future operati ons.)
Processes, anal yzes, and updates i nformati on; di ssemi nates the
i nformati on to subordi nate commanders and staff.
SITUATION REPORT
Cl ear i ng uni ts submi t a si tuati on r epor t to hi gher headquar ter s i f enemy
acti vi ty i s encountered or i f an expl osi ve devi ce i s di scovered. Thi s i nformati on
s h ou l d be tr ack ed i n th e TOC an d th e CTCP. I n f or mati on mu s t be
di ssemi nated to subordi nate uni ts, especi al l y CSS el ements.
PROGRESS REPORT
The cl eari ng uni t submi ts progress and compl eti on reports unti l the cl earance
oper ati on i s compl ete. Pr ogr ess r epor ts must be ti mel y and accur ate. Repor t
for mat and fr equency ar e establ i shed i n the OPORD befor e the cl ear ance
mi ssi on i s executed.
C3, FM 20-32
E
N
E
M
Y
O
B
S
T
A
C
L
E
R
E
P
O
R
T
A
s
o
f
:
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
N
o
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
R
e
p
o
r
t
i
n
g
U
n
i
t
I
n
f
o
D
T
G
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
(
T
y
p
e
o
f
M
i
n
e
s
/
W
i
r
e
)
D
e
p
t
h
D
T
G
M
a
r
k
e
d
D
T
G
R
e
d
u
c
e
d
D
T
G
C
l
e
a
r
e
d
L
a
n
e
/
B
y
p
a
s
s
G
r
i
d
s
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
F
i
g
u
r
e
1
1
-
1
0
.
S
a
m
p
l
e
e
n
e
m
y
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
r
e
p
o
r
t
C3, FM 20-32
R
O
U
T
E
S
T
A
T
U
S
R
E
P
O
R
T
A
s
o
f
:
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
R
o
u
t
e
N
a
m
e
R
e
s
p
o
n
s
i
b
l
e
U
n
i
t
S
t
a
t
u
s
(
R
e
d
,
A
m
b
e
r
,
G
r
e
e
n
)
A
s
O
f
S
t
a
r
t
P
o
i
n
t
E
n
d
P
o
i
n
t
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
F
i
g
u
r
e
1
1
-
1
1
.
S
a
m
p
l
e
r
o
u
t
e
s
t
a
t
u
s
r
e
p
o
r
t
C3, FM 20-32
MINE INCIDENT REPORT
A mi ne i nci dent i ncl udes any unpl anned acti vi ty i nvol vi ng a mi ne, UXO, or a
booby trap. I t al so i ncl udes near mi sses that coul d have resul ted i n damage or
i nj ur y. The mi ne i nci dent r epor t (Fi gur e 11-12) i s a techni cal r epor t that
fol l ows a ser i ous i nci dent r epor t (SI R), and i t shoul d be submi tted as soon as
possi bl e (l ocal SOP wi l l i ndi cate ti me requi rements).
MINE INCIDENT REPORT
DATE:
FROM: THRU: TO:
REFERENCE SIR #__________
A. Incident DTG A1. dd/time/zone/mm/yy
B. Incident location
B1. Map sheet/UTM/grid reference (8 digit)
Include a site sketch as an
attachment.
B2. Location (road, field, building)
B3. Emplacement (buried, surface-laid, off-
route)
C. Effects (to
complement
information already in
the SIR)
C1. Casualties (rank, name, date of
awareness training, time in the mission area,
protection equipment used)
C2. Vehicle damage (number, type, extent of
damage)
Include a photo if possible.
C3. Collateral damage
D. Device suspected
D1. Type of mine (AT, AP, make, model)
D2. Type of booby trap (pull, release,
pressure)
D3. Type of UXO (dropped, thrown, projected)
D4. Unknown (detail, color, shape, size)
E. Circumstances
E1. Activity at the time of the incident
E2. Degree of previous use of the route, area,
location
E3. Date of previous clearance and proofing
by engineers
E4. Where the route, area, or location is
monitored
F. Recommendations
F1. Recommendations to prevent
reoccurrence
G. Miscellaneous G1. Any other pertinent data
Figure 11-12. Sample mine incident report
Mining Operations in Special Environments 12-1
PART THREE
Special Mining Operations
Part three provides tactical and technical information on special-mining operations,
such as using booby traps and expedient devices. It also discusses mining in rivers,
urban terrain, and unique environments. Restrictions and responsibilities are outlined
in detail for the employment and the clearance of special mines and devices.
Chapter 12
Mining Operations in Special Environments
Mi nes ar e empl aced and encounter ed i n al l envi r onments, some of whi ch
need speci al consi derati on to understand effecti ve empl oyment, detecti on,
and/or removal .
STREAMBED AND RIVER MINING
EMPLOYMENT
Conventi onal AT mi nes ar e much mor e effecti ve i n water than on l and
because water tr ansmi ts the shock effect better than ai r. Vehi cl e suppor t
members, tracks, and wheel s are damaged by a mi ne bl ast. Smal l vehi cl es are
over tur ned and al most compl etel y destr oyed. Because water ampl i fi es and
tr ansmi ts shock waves, mi nes equi pped wi th pr essur e-actuated fuses ar e
subject to sympatheti c detonati on at greater di stances i n water than on l and.
M15 and M19 AT mi nes can be used for streambed and ri ver mi ni ng. The M21
AT mi ne shoul d not be used because i t i s ver y di ffi cul t to ar m and di sar m
under water, and i t can be easi l y functi oned by dr i fti ng debr i s. To avoi d
sympatheti c detonati on, AT mi nes must be at l east 14 meters apart i n water
that i s l ess than 61 centi meter s deep, and at l east 25 meter s apar t i n water
that i s deeper than 61 centi meter s. The mi ned ar eas ar e chosen to tak e
advantage of str eam and adjacent ar ea char acter i sti cs. Water depth wi thi n
the mi nefi el d shoul d not exceed 1 meter because i t i s di ffi cul t to wor k i n
deeper water, and pr essur e-actuated fuses ar e usual l y i neffecti ve agai nst
waterborne vehi cl es.
Current vel oci ty must be consi dered when empl aci ng mi nes i n a streambed or
a r i ver. I f the mi nes ar e pl aced deeper than 45 centi meter s, they must be
recovered by engi neer di vers:
A l i ghtwei ght di ver has di vi ng restri cti ons based on current vel oci ty.
A scuba di ver i s restri cted to a maxi mum current vel oci ty of 0.5 meter
per second.
C2, FM 20-32
12-2 Mining Operations in Special Environments
A surface-suppl i ed di ver i s restri cted to a maxi mum current vel oci ty of
1.3 meters per second.
Seasonal current vel oci ty shoul d al so be consi dered i f the mi nefi el d i s to be i n
pl ace for an extended per i od of ti me. Addi ti onal i n for mati on on di vi ng
restri cti ons can be found i n FMs 20-11 and 5-490.
Si nce sand i n i nl and water s conti nuousl y moves downstr eam, i t may be
di ffi cul t to l ocate and remove mi nes pl anted on sandbars or downstream from
sandbars. I f the si te has a muddy bottom, the mud shoul d not be deeper than
46 centi meter s and ther e must be a har d base under neath i t. The enemy i s
unl i kel y to choose a for di ng poi nt wher e vehi cl es mi r e easi l y. I f under water
obstacl es (gr avel , rock, stumps) ar e bi gger than the mi ne, the ar ea cannot be
easi l y mi ned. I f such ar eas must be used, pl ace the mi nes so that they ar e
exposed to vehi cl e wheel s or tracks. Ar mored vehi cl es usual l y enter and exi t
str eams at poi nts wher e the i ncl i ne i s l ess than 45 percent. After enter i ng a
str eam, veh i cl es often tr av el u pstr eam or down s tr eam befor e ex i ti n g.
Careful l y exami ne ri ver bank formati ons and underwater obstacl es to predi ct
the trai l a vehi cl e wi l l use to ford the stream.
EMPLACEMENT
When empl aci ng mi nes i n str eams and r i vers, al ways wor k i n pai r s. Pr epare
the mi ne on l and near the empl acement si te. Coat fuse thr eads and wel l s wi th
si l i cone gr ease (a water pr oof l ubr i cant) or a heavy gr ease to mi ni mi ze the
ch ances of water l eak i ng i nto the mi ne. Water pr oof j oi nts between the
pr essur e pl ate and the mi ne case wi th si l i cone gr ease. As a r ul e of thumb,
water pr oofed mi nes ar e r el i abl e up to 3 months when i mmer sed wi thout
waterproof coveri ngs. Secure the mi ne wi th outri ggers to prevent dri fti ng:
Construct fi el d-i mprovi sed outri ggers wi th
Two green l i mbs that are about 3 centi meters i n di ameter and 1
meter l on g. Gr een l i mbs ar e r ecommended because they ar e
stronger and l ess l i kel y to fl oat than those whi ch are dri ed out and
dead. (Steel pi ckets, si gn posts, fence rai l s, or si mi l ar i tems havi ng
the proper di mensi ons may al so be used.)
Two pi eces of cl othesl i ne, mani l a l i ne, or si mi l ar materi al that are
about 1 meter l ong.
Fasten the l i mbs to the undersi de of the mi ne and secure them wi th
the l i ne (Fi gure 12-1).
Approach the empl acement posi ti on from the downstream si de. To
pr event dr aggi ng the outr i gger or contacti ng objects i n the str eam,
carry the mi ne by graspi ng i ts si des, not by i ts carryi ng handl e.
Pl ace the mi ne and the outri gger on the stream bottom. Stake down
outr i gger s after they ar e empl aced to pr event dr i fti ng. I f staki ng i s
i mpossi bl e, pl ace sandbags or l ar ge rocks on the outri gger s for better
anchorage.
Arm the fuse.
FM 20-32
RECOVERY
A two-person recovery team
Sl owl y proceeds 2 meters downstream from where the mi ne was
empl aced and then car eful l y pr obes for the mi ne. I f the mi ne was
pl aced deeper than 45 centi meter s, i t must be recover ed by engi neer
di vers.
Removes any forei gn materi al from the top of the mi ne and di sarms i t.
Carri es the mi ne ashore and removes the fuse and the detonator.
Engi neer di ver s nor mal l y empl ace new mi nes or mi nes that have not been
submersed i n water; but i f the mi ne and the fuse show no evi dence of damage
or deter i or ati on, the mi ne can be r esused. I f the mi ne i s r eused, mar k i t to
i ndi cate that i t has been i mmersed i n water; for exampl e, pl ace the l etter Won
the pressure pl ate.
RECORDING
The mi nefi el d i s recorded on DA For m 1355 (Fi gur es 12-2a and 12-2b, pages
12-4 and 12-5).
SAFETY
I n addi ti on to n or mal s afety meas u r es, u n der water mi n i n g r equ i r es
ev al u ati on of th e tacti cal s i tu ati on an d appl i cati on of s peci al s afety
techni ques. The tur bi di ty, the vel oci ty, and the depth of the water and the
condi ti on of the bottom r equi r e that l ayi ng-par ty per sonnel be abl e to swi m
wel l . Prol onged i mmersi on of personnel , especi al l y i n col d temperatures, must
be avoi ded. Sudden dr op-offs, r ocks, and other objects that are l i kel y to cause
per sonnel to l ose thei r footi ng must be consi der ed. Other safety measur es
i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Work i n pai rs.
Figure 12-1. Outrigger techniques
WARNING
Mines may have drifted downstream and/or been tampered with by
enemy forces. Removal by any method other than explosive breaching
(see TM 9-1375-213-12) is extremely hazardous and is not recommended.
If the situation demands recovery by hand, proceed with utmost caution.
Green limbs
U-shaped pickets
FM 20-32
Figure 12-2a. Sample DA Form 1355 (front side) for river mining
S
A
M
P
L
E
FM 20-32
Figure 12-2b. Sample DA Form 1355 (inside) for river mining
S
A
M
P
L
E
FM 20-32
Empl ace mi nes from upstream to downstream to prevent personnel
and equi pment from bei ng swept i nto the mi ned area.
Stay on the downstream si de of the mi ne when armi ng the fuse.
Pl ace the mi ne as fl at as possi bl e on the bottom to prevent dri fti ng.
Us e gr een s apl i n gs or oth er n on bu oy an t mater i al to con s tr u ct
outri ggers.
Do not arm the mi ne before i t i s l ai d.
Carry the mi ne hori zontal l y or edgewi se to the current to reduce water
resi stance on the mi ne's pressure pl ate.
URBAN-TERRAIN MINING
Char acter i sti cs of ur ban ar eas (such as a hi gh pr opor ti on of har d-sur faced
r oa ds ) pr oh i bi t a s i mpl e tr a n s i ti on fr om open - to u r ban -ar ea mi n e
empl oyment techni ques and doctri ne. The advantages of abundant cover and
conceal ment, maneuver restri cti ons, and observati on al ready possessed by the
defender of an urban area can be si gni fi cantl y enhanced by the pr oper use of
mi nes. Ter r ai n modi fi ed thr ough the pr ocess of ur bani zati on pr ovi des a
uni que battl e envi ronment.
The major characteri sti cs of urban terrai n whi ch are l i kel y to i mpact on mi ne
warfare i ncl ude the fol l owi ng:
Mul ti stori ed bui l di ngs add a verti cal di mensi on to the battl e.
Ba s emen ts a n d f l oor s become p a r t of t h e ba ttl e s cen e. Th e
vul ner abi l i ty of combat vehi cl es i ncreases because attack from above
or bel ow i s l i kel y.
Fi ghti ng i s done at cl ose range, often face-to-face, and sel dom exceeds
50 meter s. Some weapons, par ti cul ar l y l ar ge-cal i ber weapons, ar e
unsui tabl e at a short range.
Sewers, subways, and tunnel s provi de covered and conceal ed
passageways for the movement of tr oops on both si des. Detai l ed
knowl edge of the l ocati on and the status of these tunnel s i s needed to
successful l y wage an urban battl e.
Streets and parki ng l ots are modi fi ed to wi thstand conti nuous use by
vehi cl es. Major routes and l ots are paved. A hi gh densi ty and compl ex
patter n of str eets pr ovi de numer ous avenues of advance. Bur yi ng
mi n es i s ex tr emel y di ffi cu l t. Mos t mi n es ar e s u r face-l ai d an d
camoufl aged wi th rubbl e and debri s to avoi d detecti on.
Movement by vehi cl e i s di ffi cul t. Streets are l i ttered by rubbl e and
cr ater ed i f the ci ty has been bombed or subjected to ar ti l l er y attack.
Br i dges and over passes ar e l i kel y to be destr oyed or bl ocked. Tr affi c
fl ow i s hi ghl y channel i zed.
Extensi ve map and chart data are needed by the commander. For
exampl e, the commander shoul d know the l ocati ons of tel ephone,
el ectr i c, gas, water, an d s ewer con n ecti on s ; s u bs tati on s ; an d
generati ng and pumpi ng stati ons.
FM 20-32
ANTIPERSONNEL MINES
US pol i cy prohi bi ts the use of non-sel f-destructi ng AP mi nes for al l US for ces
except those on the Kor ean Peni nsul a. However, US for ces can expect to
encounter AP mi nes that ar e empl aced by other countr i es i n suppor t of
MOBA. They ar e empl oyed to bl ock i nfantr y appr oaches thr ough or over
under gr ound passageways; open spaces; str eet, r oof, and bui l di ng obstacl es;
and dead spaces.
When AP mi nes ar e encounter ed (Korea Only: or used) i n MOBA, mi ne
l ocati ons are recorded on DA Form 1355 as shown i n Fi gure 12-3)
Underground Passageways
Subways, sewer s, cel l ar s, and uti l i ty tunnel s pr ovi de pr otected movement
r outes for tr oops. I n l ar ge ci ti es wher e under gr ound systems ar e numer ous
and compl ex, l i mi ted manpower may di ctate that for ces empl oy obstacl es to
bl ock key passageways wi th wi re and AP mi nes. (See Fi gure 12-4, page 12-8.)
Open Spaces
Open spaces i ncl ude gaps between bui l di ngs, cour tyar ds, r esi denti al yar ds,
gar dens, par ks, and par ki ng l ots. I n some cases, mi nes can be conceal ed i n
r ubbl e or bur i ed. However, the char acter i sti cs of most ter r ai n sur faces,
coupl ed wi th l i mi ted ti me and r esour ces, di ctate that mi nes be sur face-l ai d.
(See Fi gure 12-5, page 12-8.)
Figure 12-3. Building sketch and mine plan (DA Form 1355)
FM 20-32
Figure 12-4. Underground passageway
Figure 12-5. Open spaces
Trip wire
Enemy
Wire/rubble
Anchor points
Unattended sensors
Warning sign
for defenders
AP
minefield
AP
minefield
Concealed AP mines
with trip wires
Overwatching fires
Overwatching fires
FM 20-32
Street Obstacles
Hand-empl aced AP mi nes can be empl aced on str eet sur faces, on r ai l r oad
l i nes, and i n areas al ong shal l ow waterways. (See Fi gure 12-6.)
Roof Obstacles
Mi nes and booby tr aps suppl ement wi r e obstacl es to deny oper ati ons that
r equi r e ai r assaul t onto r ooftops. They al so pr event occupati on on r oofs that
afford good observati on poi nts and fi el ds of fi re. (See Fi gure 12-7.)
Figure 12-6. Street obstacles
Figure 12-7. Roof obstacles
Overwatching fires
Overwatching fires
Wire with booby traps
and directional
fragmentation mines Antihelicopter
obstacle
C2, FM 20-32
BuildingObstacles
Bui l di ng obstacl es i ncl ude areas wi thi n and adjacent to bui l di ngs. Forces can
l ay mi nes i n conjuncti on wi th wi r e obstacl es to deny i nfantr y access to covered
routes and weapon posi ti ons (Fi gure 12-8).
Dead Spaces
Obstacl es and mi nes can be empl aced to restri ct i nfantry movement i n ar eas
that cannot be observed and i n areas that are protected from di rect fi re.
Employment
The fol l owi ng AP mi nes are effecti ve i n urban terrai n:
M14 (used by US forces in Korea only). Its small size makes it
ideal for obscure places, such as stairs and cellars. It can be
used in conjunction with metallic AP and AT mines to confuse
and hinder breachingattempts. (SeeFigure12-9.)
M16 (used by US forces in Korea only). With trip-wire
actuation, its lethal radius covers largeareas such as rooftops,
backyards, and cellars. An added advantage can be gained by
attaching twine or wire to the release-pin ring to expediently
rigtheminefor command detonation. (SeeFigure12-10.)
M18A1 (cl aymore). Numerous i nnovati ve appl i cati ons of cl aymore
muni ti on depl oyment can be found for defensi ve war far e i n ur ban
ar eas (Fi gur e 12-11, page 12-12). Wi th r emote fi r i ng, a ser i es of
cl aymor e mi nes al ong a str eet establ i shes a hi ghl y effecti ve ambush
zon e. Mi n es can al s o be empl oyed on th e s i des of bu i l di n gs, i n
abandoned vehi cl es, or i n any other stur dy str uctur e. Numer ous
oppor tu n i ti es ex i s t for eff ecti v el y s i ted, wel l -con ceal ed mi n e
empl oyment above the ter r ai n sur face. Cl aymor e muni ti ons can be
used to fi l l the dead space i n the FPF of automati c weapons. They
pr esent a hazar d when used i n confi ned, bui l t-up ar eas. Exer ci se
cauti on when usi ng them cl ose to fr i endl y for ces because ther e i s a
danger of backbl ast.
Figure 12-8. Building obstacles
Boarded up window
Directional AP mine
Buried directional
AP mine wire
AP mine
With trip
wires
With trip
wires
With trip
wires
With trip
wires
Overwatching fires
Defensive fires
Overwatching fires Overwatching fires
C2, FM 20-32
Figure 12-9. Probable M14 AP mine emplacement
Figure 12-10. Probable M16 AP mine emplacement
In footpaths
Under steps
Behind doors
Under thresholds
In rubble
At base of walls and fences
Rooftops
Trip wire (command-
detonated)
C2, FM 20-32
CONVENTIONAL ANTITANK MINES
Enemy tank s, i nfantr y fi ghti ng vehi cl es (I FVs), and di r ect-fi r e suppor t
weapons ar e r estr i cted to str eets, r ai l r oad l i nes, and, i n some i nstances,
waterways. (See Fi gure 12-12.) M15, M19, and M21 mi nes are used pri mari l y
i n tacti cal an d nu i san ce mi n efi el ds; but th ey ar e occas i on al l y us ed i n
pr otecti ve mi nefi el ds. They shoul d be empl oyed wi th other obstacl es and
cover ed by fi r e. Conventi onal AT mi nes empl aced i n str eets or al l eys bl ock
r outes of advance i n n ar r ow defi l es. Con ceal ment of l ar ge AT mi nes i s
accompl i shed by pl aci ng them i n and ar ound r ubbl e and other obstacl es.
Extensi ve l abor r equi r ements gener al l y pr ohi bi t bur yi ng mi nes i n di ffi cul t
terrai n types.
I n di sper sed r esi denti al ar eas, obstacl es ar e r equi r ed to r educe the enemys
i nfantr y mobi l i ty thr ough and between houses and i n open ar eas. They al so
prevent ar mored vehi cl es fr om movi ng between houses and al ong streets. AT
mi nefi el d patter ns shoul d extend outwar d fr om the str eets, i ncor por ati ng
open ar eas between bui l di ngs and str eets to pr event easy bypass of str eet
obstacl es.
Si gni fi cant l abor and mi ne mater i al s ar e r equi r ed to depl oy conventi onal
mi nes between wi del y spaced bui l di ngs, i n hi gh-r i se constr ucti on, and i n
i ndustr i al and tr anspor tati on ar eas. Ther efor e, SCATMI NEs shoul d be
ser i ousl y consi der ed as vi abl e al ter nati ves. Some si tuati ons, such as the one
shown i n Fi gure 12-13, provi de opportuni ti es for the effecti ve empl oyment of
mi nes i n tacti cal and nui sance mi nefi el ds.
Figure 12-11. Probable M18A1 munition emplacement
On streets
Outside
buildings
In rubble
In alleys
On streets
Coverage for dead spaces
Overwatching fires
FM 20-32
SCATTERABLE MINES
Area-Denial Artillery Munitions and RemoteAntiarmor Mines
I n addi ti on to the advantages (such as r educi ng r equi r ed r esour ces and
empl acement ti me) appl i cabl e to al l SCATMI NE systems, ADAMs and
RAAMs have two speci fi c advantages. They ar e the most r api dl y depl oyed
SCATMI NE systems, and prepl anni ng arti l l ery-del i vered mi nefi el ds i ncreases
the rate at whi ch nui sance mi nefi el ds can be empl aced. Secondl y, these mi nes
can be del i ver ed under enemy fi r e. Empl oyment of ADAMs and RAAMs i s
most effecti ve when the enemy's i ntenti ons ar e known and thei r for ces ar e
commi tted to an avenue of advance. (See Fi gure 12-14, page 12-14.)
Figure 12-12. AT mine emplacement in urban areas
Figure 12-13. AT mine emplacement in industrial and transportation areas
In artificial
barrier
Off-route AT
mine
Supplementing road crater
FM 20-32
Usi ng ADAMs/RAAMs i n urban terrai n i nvol ves fi ve speci fi c probl em areas:
Di ffi cul ty i n preci se mi nefi el d si ti ng. Accurate si ti ng i s extremel y
cri ti cal due to the typi cal l y restri cti ve avenues of advance and may be
fu ti l e du e to th e di ffi cu l ty i n adj u s ti n g ar ti l l er y r ou n ds i n an
envi r onment that obscur es obser vati on. Fur ther, bui l di ngs tend to
create unmi ned shadow zones.
Uncertai nty of ADAM/RAAM survi vabi l i ty upon i mpact wi th a
bui l di ng or ground surfaces that are characteri sti c i n urban areas.
Li kel y avai l abi l i ty of arti l l ery fi ri ng uni ts. ADAM/RAAM
empl acement may not be a pr i or i ty of the maneuver commander,
because hi s suppor ti ng uni ts may not have enough ADAM/RAAM
muni ti ons on hand. Assumi ng the avai l abi l i ty of arti l l ery assets for an
ADAM/RAAM mi ssi on coul d prove di sastrous for defendi ng forces.
Hi gh detectabi l i ty of these mi nes on bare and l i ghtl y covered surfaces.
Thi s per mi ts the enemy to seek out unmi ned passageways or pi ck
thr ough l i ghtl y seeded ar eas. I f you use the doctr i nal gui del i nes for
empl aci ng arti l l ery-del i vered mi nes on top of the advanci ng enemy or
i mmedi atel y i n fr ont of them, the desi r ed obstacl e i ntent (di sr upt,
turn, fi x, bl ock) and enhanced fi res are achi eved.
Di ffi cul ty i n achi evi ng a good, random pattern. Hard-surfaced areas
cause mi nes to bounce and rol l . Some mi nes (especi al l y AT mi nes) wi l l
l and on top of bui l di ngs and are i neffecti ve.
Figure 12-14. ADAM/RAAM employment
Artillery delivery
NOTE: Unshaded areas cannot
be mined by assigned artillery.
Potential enemy route
through areas with
low mine-density
C2, FM 20-32
Air Volcano
The pri mary advantage of the ai r Vol cano system i s i ts capabi l i ty to si te and
emp l a ce mi n ef i e l d s a ccu r a t e l y. Th i s d e p en d s on t h e h el i cop t e r 's
man eu v er abi l i ty ov er th e s el ected mi n efi el d ter r ai n an d th e pr oper
coor di nati on between gr ound for ces and avi ati on suppor t. Di sadvantages
i n cl ude vu l n er abi l i ty an d th e h i gh r epl acement cos t of th e hel i copter.
However, i n vi ew of the system's oper ati onal concept, empl oyment i n ur ban
terrai n (whi ch provi des l i ttl e exposure of the hel i copter) actual l y i ncreases the
pr acti cal i ty of empl oyi ng thi s system i n ur ban ar eas. Mi ne sur vi val r ate on
i mpact wi th a hard surface i s another potenti al probl em.
Ground Volcano
Thr ee aspects of the gr ound Vol cano di sti ngui sh i t fr om other SCATMI NE
systems:
The di spenser i s organi c to supporti ng combat engi neers, maki ng i t
r eadi l y avai l abl e to suppor t the maneuver commander 's defensi ve
pl an.
Del i very si ti ng i s accuratel y pi npoi nted to the ground.
Better opportuni ti es exi st to record the presence of a mi nefi el d. I n
contr ast to ar ti l l er y-del i ver ed and ai r Vol cano systems, the gr ound
Vol cano i s del i ver ed by engi neer s who are normal l y l ocated wi th and
report di rectl y to the maneuver commander.
Some pr i mar y factor s may degr ade gr ound Vol cano depl oyment i n ur ban
ter r ai n. The r equi r ement to empl ace mi nefi el ds befor e an actual attack i n
order to reduce system vul nerabi l i ty i s the most si gni fi cant factor. Thi s makes
the mi nefi el d detectabl e and pr ovi des mor e r eacti on ti me for the enemy to
al ter thei r scheme of maneuver. The del i ver y of mi nes depends on ter r ai n
tr affi cabi l i ty. The pr i me mover and the l aunch vehi cl e must negoti ate the
terrai n over whi ch mi nes are to be di spensed.
Modular Pack MineSystem
The MOPMS i s i deal l y sui ted for empl oyment i n urban terrai n (Fi gure 12-15,
page 12-16). The modul e can be hi dden fr om enemy vi ew, and the mi nes can
be di spensed after attackers are commi tted to a route of advance. Addi ti onal l y,
mi n es can be empl aced r api dl y un der enemy fi r e. I n con tr ast to oth er
SCATMI NE systems, the commander contr ol s when and wher e mi nes ar e
di spensed and how they are detonated, regardl ess of the enemy si tuati on.
Gator
When consi der ed for empl oyment i n ur ban ter r ai n, Gator s encompass the
same probl ems as arti l l ery-del i vered and ai r Vol cano mi ne systems.
DECEPTION MEASURES
Phony mi nefi el ds can be establ i shed r api dl y wi th negl i gi bl e effor t and cost.
They have the di sti nct advantage of bl ocki ng the enemy but not fr i endl y
forces. Al though i t i s di ffi cul t to fake a surface-l ai d mi nefi el d, expedi ents such
as soup pans, seat cushi ons, and car dboar d boxes have hi stor i cal l y pr oven
effecti ve i n del ayi ng and channel i zi ng attacki ng forces. These objects, as wel l
FM 20-32
as oth er on es r eadi l y av ai l abl e i n u r ban ar eas, can be u s ed as ph on y
mi nefi el ds or used to cover real mi nes. A more real i sti c phony mi nefi el d coul d
be created wi th i nert or trai ni ng mi nes.
I nadequate mi nefi el d camoufl age i n ur ban ter r ai n i s vi ewed as a cr i ti cal
constr ai nt i n depl oyi ng conventi onal mi nes and SCATMI NEs. Smoke can be
depl oyed fr om var i ous di spenser s, but i t must be dense and accur atel y
empl oyed and rel eased.
SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTS
COLD REGIONS
Mi ne empl oyment i n col d r egi ons poses speci al pr obl emsthe pr i nci pal one
bei ng empl acement. Mi ne bur i al i s extr emel y di ffi cul t i n fr ozen gr ound. The
fr eezi ng water i n s oi l causes i t to have h i gh str en gth an d penetr ati on
resi stance, so di ggi ng ti mes are greatl y i ncreased i f not i mpracti cal . However,
th er e ar e s ever al means to over come thi s pr obl em. I n some cases, the
mi nefi el d can be l ai d out befor e the soi l fr eezes. To do thi s, di g hol es for each
i ndi vi dual mi ne and i nser t a pl ug i nto the hol e to pr otect i ts shape and
pr event i t fr om bei ng fi l l ed i n. A wi de var i ety of mater i al can be used for
pl ugs. I deal l y, the pl ug shoul d be economi cal , easy to remove, and ri gi d enough
to mai ntai n the depth and shape of the hol e. Sandbags, pl asti c bags fi l l ed wi th
sand or sawdust, or l ogs make excel l ent pl ugs. I f the mi nefi el d cannot be
pr echamber ed, mechani cal means can be used to di g hol es. When avai l abl e,
ci vi l i an constr ucti on equi pment (parti cul arl y l ar ge earth auger s) can be used
to dri l l hol es for mi ne empl acement.
Figure 12-15. MOPMS employment
MOPMS transmitter
MOPMS
MOPMS
MOPMS
Direction of enemy advance
FM 20-32
To assur e detonati on of bur i ed, pr essur e-actuated mi nes, they shoul d be
pl aced i n a hol e that i s shal l ow enough for the pr essur e pl ate to be above
ground. Coveri ng spoi l shoul d be a maxi mum of 1 centi meter deep.
When buri al i s i mpossi bl e, mi nes are pl aced on the surface. Heavy snow cover
may reduce the effecti veness of both buri ed and surface-l ai d mi nes by causi ng
them to be br i dged. Mi nes l ai d i n deep snow shoul d be pl aced as cl ose as
pos s i bl e to th e s u r face an d s u ppor ted by boar ds or compacted s n ow.
Water pr oof mi nes befor e empl acement i n col d r egi ons. Mi nes can al so be
pl aced i n pl asti c bags before buri al . I n some cases, a l ayer of i ce may form over
the top of the pr essur e pl ate. Al though the l oad r equi r ed to br eak the i ce i s
sl i ghtl y hi gher than that requi red to acti vate the fuse, thi n l ayers of external
i ce wi l l have l i ttl e effect on mi ne functi oni ng. When possi bl e, ti l t-r od mi nes
shoul d be used i n col d r egi ons because they ar e l ess suscepti bl e to i ce and
snow. Magneti c mi nes ar e not si gni fi cantl y affected by snow, al though col d
weather decreases battery l i fe.
Camoufl agi ng a mi nefi el d i n a col d regi on i s di ffi cul t. Mi nes shoul d be pai nted
whi te when snow i s expected to remai n on the ground for extended per i ods of
ti me. Mi nefi el d si gnatur e tr acks shoul d be swept away, or del i ber ate tr acks
shoul d be made to gi ve the i mpressi on of a safe area.
Korea Only: When trip-wire mines are employed in snow, the wire
should be about 10 meters long, with a slight amount of slack left in
the wire. The trip wires should be supported approximately 46
centimeters abovetheground to avoid degradation by snowfall.
J UNGLES
Fuses and expl osi ve components deter i or ate ver y r api dl y i n jungl e cl i mates.
As a r esul t, mi nes and mi ne mater i al r equi r e mor e fr equent and extensi ve
mai ntenance and i nspecti on. Water pr oof mi nes empl oyed i n humi d cl i mates.
The r api d gr owth of vegetati on hi nder s mai ntenance r ecover y and r emoval .
Dense vegetati on may cause mi nes to become i noperabl e or wi ndbl own fol i age
can deton ate th em. FM 90-5 pr ov i des detai l ed i n for mati on on j u n gl e
operati ons.
DESERTS
I n deser t cl i mates, fuses and expl osi ve components deter i or ate sl owl y. The
terrai n and the si tuati on determi ne how mi nes wi l l be empl aced. Mi ne boards
wi l l nor mal l y be r equi r ed to pr ovi de suppor t i n soft, shi fti ng sand. Mi nes
empl aced i n the deser t have a tendency to shi ft posi ti on, and the spaci ng
between mi n es an d r ows sh ou l d be i n cr eased to pr ev en t s y mpath eti c
detonati on. Bl owi ng sand may expose bur i ed mi nes or cover sur face-l ai d
mi nes. Sand may al so cause mi nes to mal functi on. I t i s i mpor tant to r eal i ze
the di ffi cul ty of accur atel y recor di ng mi nefi el d l ocati ons i n vast, open, deser t
areas voi d of recogni zabl e terrai n features. More mi nes are requi red for desert
oper ati ons. Typi cal l y, deser t mi nefi el ds ar e much l ar ger and have a l ower
densi ty than those used i n Eur ope or Kor ea. FM 90-3 pr ovi des detai l ed
i nformati on on desert operati ons.
FM 20-32
Booby Traps and Expedient Devices 13-1
Chapter 13
Booby Traps and Expedient Devices
Dur i ng war and OOTW, booby tr aps can be found anywher e at anyti me.
They can ki l l or i ncapaci tate thei r unsuspecti ng vi cti ms. Thi s chapter
pr ovi des i nfor mati on on booby-tr ap empl oyment concepts, detecti on
techni ques, marki ng and recordi ng procedures, and removal gui del i nes.
Thi s chapter al so pr ovi des an over vi ew of expedi ent devi ces and thei r
empl oyment consi der ati ons.
US pol i cy r estr i cts the use of booby tr aps by US per sonnel . Thi s does not
precl ude thei r use by other countri es, so US forces may encounter them duri ng
operati ons.
Th e us e of booby tr aps i s l i mi ted onl y by the i magi n ati on of th e for ce
empl oyi ng them. They
Are usual l y expl osi ve i n nature.
Are actuated when an unsuspecti ng person di sturbs an apparentl y
harml ess object or performs a presumabl y safe act.
Are desi gned to ki l l or i ncapaci tate.
Cause unexpected, random casual ti es and damage.
Create an atti tude of uncertai nty and suspi ci on i n the enemy's mi nd,
ther eby, l ower i ng hi s mor al e and i nduci ng a degr ee of cauti on that
restri cts or sl ows hi s movement.
Many booby traps are constructed usi ng mi l i tary equi pment and ammuni ti on.
I mprovi sed traps are used duri ng counteri nsurgency mi ssi ons i n l ow-i ntensi ty
confl i cts.
The cor ps commander i s the empl oyment author i ty for booby tr aps. He can
del egate thi s authori ty to the di vi si on commander. I f authori ty i s gi ven to set
booby tr aps, US per sonnel wi l l adher e to the r ul es for i nter nati onal l aw
appl i cabl e to ar med confl i ct. Ther e ar e sever al uses of booby tr aps that ar e
prohi bi ted. Remember, these restri cti ons are not observed by al l countri es; US
per sonnel must sti l l be cauti ous when appr oachi ng objects i n ar eas wher e
booby traps are supposedl y prohi bi ted.
I nternati onal l aw prohi bi ts the use of booby traps as fol l ows:
Booby traps and other devi ces are prohi bi ted i f they are attached to or
associ ated wi th
SECTION I. SETTING BOOBY TRAPS
C2
FM 20-32
13-2 Booby Traps and Expedient Devices
I nternati onal l y recogni zed protecti ve embl ems, si gns, or si gnal s.
Si ck, wounded, or dead personnel .
Buri al or cremati on si tes or graves.
Medi cal faci l i ti es, equi pment, or suppl i es.
Chi l drens toys or other portabl e objects or products that are
desi gned for thei r feedi ng, heal th, hygi ene, cl othi ng, or educati on.
Food or dri nk.
Ki tchen utensi l s or appl i ances except i n mi l i tary establ i shments,
mi l i tary l ocati ons, or suppl y depots.
Objects that are cl earl y rel i gi ous i n nature.
Hi stori c monuments, works of art, or pl aces of worshi p.
Ani mal s or thei r car casses.
Booby traps are prohi bi ted i n ci ti es, vi l l ages, and other ar eas that
contai n ci vi l i ans i f combat between ground for ces i s not taki ng pl ace
or does not appear to be i mmi nent, unl ess
Booby traps are pl aced on or i n the cl ose vi ci ni ty of a mi l i tary
objecti ve.
Measures (guards, warni ng, or fences) are taken to protect
ci vi l i ans from booby-trap effects.
TACTICS
Booby tr aps ar e psychol ogi cal weapons. They make the enemy cauti ous and
sl ow i t down. These acti ons, i n tur n, cause enemy casual ti es. Do not waste
ti me attempti ng to set el abor ate traps that ar e undetectabl e or i mpossi bl e to
di sarm. Al so, do not waste ti me devel opi ng di ffi cul t si tes, because si mpl e traps
usual l y have the same chance of catchi ng the enemy. Even i f booby traps are
detected and cl eared, thei r ai m i s achi eved.
The pr i nci pl es gover ni ng the use of booby tr aps and nui sance mi nes ar e
i denti cal , so consi der usi ng them i n conjuncti on wi th one another. They have
characteri sti cs that make them sui tabl e for use i n di fferent si tuati ons:
Nui sance mi nes are qui cker to l ay and safer to use than booby traps,
and they ar e nor mal l y used i n outsi de l ocati ons wher e they can be
buri ed.
Booby traps are normal l y used i n urban areas, structures, and pl aces
where mi nes ar e easi l y detected.
Booby tr aps an d n u i san ce mi n es ar e par ti cu l ar l y s ui ted for defen s i ve
operati ons. They are used to
Sl ow the enemy's advance.
Deny the enemy use of faci l i ti es and materi al .
Warn of enemy approach.
FM 20-32
Deter the enemy from usi ng ground not covered by di rect fi re.
Pl an defensi ve operati ons.
I n offensi ve operati ons, booby tr aps and nui sance mi nes ar e empl oyed on an
oppor tuni ty basi s dur i ng rai ds and patrol s. Formal i nstructi on i s not usual l y
i ssued by the staff.
Exerci se cauti on when usi ng bobby traps i n offensi ve operati ons because they
may hi nder the oper ati on. I n advance and pur sui t oper ati ons, they ar e
pri mari l y used by patrol s and rai di ng parti es. They sl ow down enemy fol l ow-
up acti ons and hi nder the enemys repai r and mai ntenance teams after rai ds.
The fol l owi ng consi der ati ons per tai n to defensi ve oper ati ons but may be
rel evant to offensi ve operati ons and must be consi dered when bri efi ng troops:
Booby trappi ng i s rarel y gi ven a hi gh pri ori ty and i s usual l y
peri pheral to other engi neer tasks.
Nui sance mi nes are more cost-effecti ve than booby traps, unl ess booby
tr aps ar e used i n si tuati ons that al l ow thei r ful l potenti al to be
expl oi ted. I f i t i s easi er, use nui sance mi nes i nstead of booby tr aps.
To maxi mi ze the effect of booby tr aps and nui sance mi nes, the staff pr ovi des
engi neer commanders wi th the fol l owi ng i nformati on:
Purpose. Booby traps are ti me-consumi ng and dangerous to set. Do
not waste ti me and effort setti ng traps that are unl i kel y to be actuated
or that ar e not speci fi cal l y desi gned to achi eve the requi r ed ai m. For
exampl e, i f booby tr aps ar e bei ng used agai nst tr oops, smal l , si mpl e
tr aps desi gned to i ncapaci tate wi l l achi eve thi s r esul t just as wel l as
compl i cated ones wi th l ar ge charges. I f the ai m i s to destr oy vehi cl es,
use mi nes.
Locati on. The preci se l ocati on for booby traps and nui sance mi nes can
onl y be determi ned by the setti ng uni t. Areas must be del i neated and
r ecor ded so that ther e i s no thr eat to fr i endl y for ces i n the event of
reoccupati on.
Ti me setti ng starts and ti me avai l abl e for setti ng. The ti me setti ng
starts affects other engi neer tasks, and the l ength of ti me avai l abl e for
setti ng governs the number of men requi red.
Number of safe routes requi red. Safe routes are i mportant duri ng
gener al wi thdr awal s wher e author i ty has been gi ven to booby-tr ap
posi ti ons as they ar e evacuated. They al so pr ovi de safe ar eas for the
coveri ng force to l aunch counterattacks.
Li kel i hood of reoccupati on. Even i f the enemy has not detonated booby
tr aps, they mi ght have i nter fer ed wi th them. Ther efor e, do not set
booby tr aps when areas ar e to be vacated to meet short-ter m tacti cal
requi rements or when reoccupati on i s expected soon.
I ntel l i gence per sonnel pr ovi de i nfor mati on to assi st the setti ng uni t i n
maxi mi zi ng the effect of booby tr aps. The natur e and the type of tr aps
r equi r ed depend on the enemy uni t. For exampl e, whi l e payi ng par ti cul ar
attenti on to dead space and defi l ade posi ti ons, use mi nes or wi del y di spersed
C2, FM 20-32
traps (wi th l arge charges) agai nst a mechani zed enemy. Conversel y, use smal l
traps and AP mi nes (i n pl aces that afford cover) agai nst an i nfantry enemy.
SITING
I f the fi r st obstacl e or i nstal l ati on the enemy str i k es i s booby-tr apped or
nui sance-mi ned, he i s del ayed whi l e he cl ears i t. The enemy i s further del ayed
by an i ncr eased degr ee of cauti on. Hi s tr oops know that addi ti onal tr aps and
mi nes can be encounter ed. Booby tr aps and nui sance mi nes ar e gener al l y
l ocated
I n and around bui l di ngs, i nstal l ati ons, and fi el d defenses.
I n and around road craters or any obstacl e that must be cl eared.
I n natural , covered resti ng pl aces al ong routes.
I n l i kel y assembl y areas.
I n the vi ci ni ty of stocks of fuel , suppl i es, or materi al s.
At focal poi nts and bottl enecks i n the road or rai l systems
(parti cul arl y the ones that cannot be bypassed).
The setti ng-party commander i s responsi bl e for the detai l ed si ti ng and desi gn
of booby tr aps. Consi der al l the i nfor mati on about the enemy sol di er and hi s
operati ng procedures when sel ecti ng pl aces and objects to trap. Al so, consi der
the tr aps fr om the enemys poi nt of vi ew and assess the cour ses open to the
enemy when he encounter s them. Thi s can expose weaknesses i n your i ni ti al
pl an and br i ng about changes to the pr oposed l ayout, or i t can r esul t i n a
di fferent l ocati on bei ng sel ected. I n addi ti on, determi ne the effort requi red by
the enemy to bypass the traps. Thi s shows whether the i mposed del ay justi fi es
the effort requi red to set the booby traps i n the sel ected l ocati on.
TYPES OF TRAPS
Booby traps are desi gned to
Be actuated by persons carryi ng out thei r normal duti es.
Take advantage of human nature.
The fol l owi ng booby tr aps can often be detected because they are desi gned to
make the person do somethi ng:
Bai t. Usual l y consi sts of objects that arouse someones i nter est, such
as attr acti ve or i nter esti ng i tems that have appar entl y been l eft
behi nd or di scarded duri ng a rapi d evacuati on.
Decoy. The most common decoy consi sts of two trapsone desi gned to
be detected, the other desi gned to actuate when per sonnel deal wi th
the fi rst one. The fi rst trap can be a dummy. A cl assi c form of a decoy
i s to pl ace booby traps or nui sance mi nes i n l ocati ons from whi ch the
decoy mi ne can be removed.
Bl uff. A bl uff i s a hoax and usual l y consi sts of a dummy trap.
C2, FM 20-32
Doubl e bl uff. A doubl e bl uff onl y appears to be a bl uff. Personnel
bel i eve the tr ap i s safe or can be di sar med. For exampl e, a number of
tr aps can be set that ar e di sar med when th e detonati ng cor d i s
r emoved fr om the char ge. The doubl e bl uff i s achi eved by setti ng
another tr ap that appear s to be the same, but i t actual l y expl odes
when the detonati ng cor d i s r emoved fr om the char ge. Doubl e bl uffs
rel y on a reduced awareness and al ertness caused by repeti ti on.
COMPONENTS AND PRINCIPLES
Ther e ar e two i ni ti ati on methods for expl osi ve booby tr apsel ectr i c and
nonel ectr i c. Both methods can be constr ucted usi ng many di ffer ent types of
FDs. FDs can be secur ed to the char ge (di r ect connecti on) or l ocated away
fr om i t (remote connecti on). They ar e actuated by one or more methods. I t i s
i mpossi bl e to descr i be ever y type of tr ap that may be encounter ed; however,
most are constructed and operated by usi ng components si mi l ar to those l i sted
bel ow:
FD.
Power source (battery, for exampl e).
Connecti on (usual l y detonati ng cord or el ectri c wi res).
Bl asti ng cap.
Mai n charge.
Fi gure 13-1, page 13-6, shows how typi cal el ectri c and nonel ectri c traps can be
made.
ACTUATION METHODS
Many sophi sti cated booby-tr ap devi ces ar e now bei ng manufactur ed that
operate on vi brati on, sound, temperature change, and other methods. Current
i ntel l i gence on the booby trap bei ng used i n the AO shoul d be gathered so that
counter measur es can be devel oped and pr acti ced. Most FDs found i n the
combat zone are si mpl e mechani sms desi gned to be actuated by pul l , pressure,
pressure rel ease, or tensi on rel ease (Fi gure 13-2, page 13-7).
METHODS OF CONNECTION
Pr ocedur es can be var i ed when i t i s safe to do so. For exampl e, i nstead of
connecti ng the FD to a charge al ready i n posi ti on, preconnect trap components
and then posi ti on the trap.
Smal l char ges (up to 1 k i l ogr am) ar e suffi ci ent for AP tr aps, but l ar ger
quanti ti es can be used to i ncr ease thei r effect. Shr apnel can be pr oduced by
packi ng stones, scr ap metal , nai l s, or other mater i al ar ound the char ge. AT
tr aps r equi r e l ar ge char ges (up to 6.75 ki l ogr ams for wheel ed vehi cl es and
11.25 ki l ograms or more for tracked vehi cl es).
REMOTE
Fol l ow the pr ocedur es l i sted bel ow when assembl i ng a r emotel y connected
trap usi ng an M142 FD (si mi l ar to the i l l ustrati on i n Fi gure 13-3, page 13-7):
Desi gn the trap and col l ect necessary materi al s.
FM 20-32
Test the M142 FD.
Lay the detonati ng cord from the charge l ocati on to the FD l ocati on.
Posi ti on the charge.
Connect the detonati ng cord to the charge.
Prepare the coupl er.
Tape a l ength (46 centi meters, mi ni mum) of detonati ng cord to the
coupl ers bl asti ng end.
Prepare and posi ti on the M142, set i t to operate i n the desi red
manner, and remove the round- or square-headed pi n.
Figure 13-1. Typical electric and nonelectric booby traps
Detonating cord
REMOTE
Blasting cap
Charge
FD
FD
DIRECT
REMOTE
DIRECT
DIRECT
Charge
Blasting cap
Battery
Electrical cable
Detonating cord
FM 20-32
Ensure that the two detonati ng cords are not touchi ng but can be
conveni entl y connected when necessary.
Remove any materi al s and other si gns of l ayi ng, and ful l y camoufl age
the area.
Figure 13-2. Methods of actuation
Figure 13-3. Remotely connected traps
Pull
Pressure
Pressure release
Tension release
Pressure switch
Charge
FM 20-32
Arm the FD by removi ng the posi ti ve safety pi n.
Arm the trap by connecti ng the two detonati ng cords.
DIRECT
Fol l ow the pr ocedur es l i sted bel ow when assembl i ng a nonel ectr i c, di r ectl y
connected tr ap usi ng an M142 FD (si mi l ar to the i l l ustr ati on i n Fi gure 13-1,
page 13-6):
Desi gn the trap and col l ect necessary materi al s.
Test the M142 FD.
Prepare and posi ti on the charge for coupl i ng to the FD, and prepare
the expl osi ve to recei ve a bl asti ng cap.
Prepare the coupl er and i nsert i t i nto the charge.
Prepare the M142, set i t to operate i n the desi red manner, and remove
the round- or square-headed pi n.
Remove any materi al s and other si gns of l ayi ng, and ful l y camoufl age
the area.
Arm the trap by removi ng the posi ti ve safety pi n.
PLANNING, SETTING, AND RECORDING
TIMELINESS
The setti ng-party commander must be gi ven al l the i nformati on and suffi ci ent
ti me to car r y out a r econnai ssance. Thi s al l ows hi s pl an and the sol di er s
bri efi ng to be as compl ete as possi bl e.
ORDERS AND BRIEFING
Once the commander has fi ni shed the r econnai ssance, he makes a detai l ed
pl an, prepares the order, and bri efs sol di ers. The fol l owi ng poi nts are covered:
Enemy i ntel l i gence.
Number and types of traps to be set.
Locati on and desi gn of traps (preci se or general ).
Taski ng and al l ocati on of areas.
Recordi ng, marki ng, and armi ng procedures.
Control measures.
Ti me requi rements.
Materi al and equi pment avai l abi l i ty.
Rehearsal and equi pment preparati on.
DANGER
Do not attempt to further camouflage the
area after the trap is armed.
FM 20-32
REHEARSAL
Whenever possi bl e, r ehear se l ayi ng pr ocedur es. Thor oughl y exer ci se contr ol
and safety measures so that any fl aws i n the system wi l l be di scover ed. Lay
pr acti ce tr aps and car ry out ar mi ng and r ecor di ng pr ocedur es. I f you cannot
rehearse at the trap l ocati on, hol d the rehearsal i n a si mi l ar area.
ORGANIZATION AND PROCEDURE
Setti ng booby tr aps i s a danger ous task and i t must be car eful l y contr ol l ed.
Exact dr i l l s cannot be pr escr i bed, but the fol l owi ng pr ocedur es shoul d be
fol l owed as cl osel y as possi bl e:
Control poi nt. The commander must establ i sh a control poi nt upon
arri val at the trap area. The control poi nt forms a headquarters and a
mater i al hol di ng ar ea. Al so, safe r outes star t at the contr ol poi nt. I f
the rehearsal i s conducted at another area, assembl e al l the troops at
the contr ol poi nt befor e setti ng star ts. At thi s ti me, r el ate the gr ound
to the pl an, confi r m contr ol measures, and check FDs and equi pment
for servi ceabi l i ty and adequacy.
Control of parti es. Each setti ng party consi sts of one or two men.
Cl earl y defi ne the area where each setti ng party wi l l work (use tape, i f
necessary). Posi ti on traps so that acci dental detonati on wi l l not cause
fri endl y casual ti es. Stri ctl y control the entr y to areas where traps are
bei ng set. I n most si tuati ons, onl y the commander, setti ng parti es, and
a r ecor der enter ar eas. Tr oops who ar e not assi gned tasks shoul d
r emai n at th e con tr ol poi nt un l ess other wi se au thor i zed by the
commander.
Marki ng. As wi th nui sance mi nefi el ds, mark booby-trapped areas
unti l they ar e evacuated. When possi bl e, use standar d booby-tr ap
si gns (Fi gur e 13-4). When si gns ar e not avai l abl e, use tempor ar y
mar ki ngs (any bar r i er or fence) to cl ear l y i ndi cate a booby-tr apped
area. Remove the temporar y marki ng after the area i s evacuated and
before the enemy reconnoi ters the area.
Setting. Setti ng parti es transport requi red expl osi ves and materi al to
the si te. They do not ar m FDs or tr aps unti l or der ed to do so. I f the
setti ng party consi sts of one man, he remai ns wi th the trap unti l i t i s
ar med or unti l the commander di r ects hi m to l eave. I n a two-man
Figure 13-4. Standard booby-trap sign
28 cm
2
0
c
m White
Red
FM 20-32
party, one man returns to the control poi nt and reports the compl eti on
of the task, and the other man remai ns wi th the trap. A setti ng party
enters and l eaves i ts area by the same route. I f the route i s not cl earl y
appar ent, per son nel l ay tapes to gui de the commander an d the
recorder to the area.
I nspecti on and armi ng. The setti ng-party commander i nspects traps
for safety and camoufl age befor e gi vi ng the or der to ar m them. He
devi ses an armi ng pl an that enabl es the setti ng parti es to wi thdraw to
the contr ol poi nt i n a safe and l ogi cal manner. For exampl e, i n open
ar eas, star t ar mi ng at the fur thest mi ne fr om the contr ol poi nt; i n
bui l di ngs, arm from the top down.
REPORTING AND RECORDING
Booby traps do not di sti ngui sh between fri end and foe. Correct r eporti ng and
r ecor di ng pr ocedur es must be obser ved to avoi d fr i endl y casual ti es. The
procedures for recordi ng booby traps are the same as for nui sance mi nes (see
Chapter 8). When traps ar e set i n ar eas occupi ed by the enemy, they are not
r ecor ded. I n thi s case, i t i s suffi ci ent to note thei r l ocati on and type i n after-
acti on reports.
Tactical Reports
I nfor mati on about booby-trapped ar eas must be provi ded i n stages from the
ti me they are establ i shed unti l they are cl eared. Thi s procedure al l ows up-to-
date i nfor mati on to be annotated on operati onal maps at al l concerned uni ts
and headquarters (see Tabl e 13-1).
Booby-Trap Records
The setti ng-party commander compi l es records for al l booby-trapped areas on
DA For m 1355 (Fi gur es 13-5a and 13-5b, pages 13-12 and 13-13). Str i ctl y
obser ve the i nstr ucti ons pr i nted on the back of the form. Booby-tr ap recor ds
provi de detail ed informati on about the composi tion of an area, and they al low the
area to be cl eared qui ckl y, wi th mi ni mum casual ty ri sk. They contai n compl ete
i nfor mati on on the number and types of tr aps set, as wel l as accur ate and
preci se detai l s on the l ocati on and desi gn of i ndi vi dual traps. I f a si ngl e record
i s not l arge enough to record al l the traps set i n a defi nabl e area, cl earl y note
th i s fact and r efer ence ser i al number s of adj acent r ecor ds. Submi t the
compl eted DA Form 1355, i n tri pl i cate, to the next hi gher headquarters.
FM 20-32
Table 13-1. Tactical reports
Report
By Whom and
When Initiated
To Whom
Forwarded
Details to be Included
Intention to
set (required)
Division
commander, on
deciding to set
booby traps
Corps HQ
Controlling HQ
Purpose
General area to be booby-
trapped (by grid coordinates)
Estimated number and types
of traps
Estimated starting date and
time
Estimated completion date
and time
Siting
(optional)
Setting unit, on
completion of
reconnaissance
Division
ordering
setting, only if
materially
different from
intention-to-set
report
Division
ordering setting
Next higher HQ
Boundaries of booby-trapped
area (by grid coordinates)
Number and approximate
positions of safe routes, if any
Estimated number and types
of traps
Start of
setting
(required)
Setting unit,
when setting
starts
Division
ordering setting
Division HQ
ordering setting
Next higher HQ
Time setting started
Estimated time of completion
Number and types of traps
being set
Any change to the detail given
in the siting report, and
whether or not it was a result
of orders
Completion
(required)
Setting unit,
when setting is
completed
Division HQ
ordering setting
Division HQ
ordering setting
Next higher HQ
A trace on the largest scale
map available, showing the
boundaries of the trapped
area
Full details of the area and
buildings trapped (with sketch
maps)
Full details of traps set,
including design and location
Full details of all safe routes
Total number and types of
traps
Time and date of completion
Changes
(required)
Division HQ
ordering change
Next higher HQ
Any other unit
holding
information on
existing traps
Full details of change
FM 20-32
Figure 13-5a. Sample DA Form 1355 (front side) for a booby-trapped area
S
A
M
P
L
E
FM 20-32
Figure 13-5b. Sample DA Form 1355 (inside) for a booby-trapped area
S
A
M
P
L
E
FM 20-32
Sol di er s must be awar e of the thr eat that i s pr esented by booby tr aps. They
must al so recei ve suffi ci ent trai ni ng to recogni ze l ocati ons and i tems that l end
themsel ves to booby-tr appi ng. Avoi d over emphasi s and str i k e a bal ance
between what i s possi bl e and what i s probabl e. For exampl e, i n medi um-l evel
oper ati ons, over emphasi s of the booby-tr ap thr eat can be counter pr oducti ve
by sl owi ng momentum. Thi s causes casual ti es that mi ght otherwi se have been
av oi ded. I n l ow-i n ten s i ty con fl i cts wh er e th e u s e of booby tr aps an d
i mprovi sed expl osi ve devi ces are probabl y wi despread, trai ni ng must be gi ven
hi gh pri ori ty and emphasi zed at al l l evel s.
SITES
Al though many booby-trapped si tes are si mi l ar, the i tems sel ected, the reason
for thei r use, and the scal e of the threat ar e qui te di fferent. I n medi um-l evel
confl i cts, booby tr aps ar e mai nl y used i n r ecentl y contested areas. The i tems
sel ected and the reasons for usi ng traps ar e the same as those taught to our
troops. Therefore, by anti ci pati ng the presence of traps, i t i s possi bl e to i sol ate
a n d by pa s s tr a pp ed a r ea s . I f th i s i s n ot pr a cti ca bl e, y ou ca n pl a n
counter measur es, such as avoi di ng conveni ent and cover ed r esti ng pl aces
al ong r outes wher e mi nes can be l ocated. At bri dge or fer ry si tes that cannot
be avoi ded, you must ensure that they are free of traps.
I n l ow-i ntensi ty confl i cts wher e booby tr aps ar e used to cause casual ti es,
del ays, or di sr upti ons, no i tems or ar eas can be consi der ed safe. Qual i ty
col l ecti ve trai ni ng i n booby-tr ap awar eness i s necessar y for al l uni ts. Rapi dl y
di ssemi nate booby-trap i nci dent reports to al l l evel s. Thi s al l ows personnel to
devel op an under standi ng of the enemy's method of oper ati on and a feel for
what mi ght or mi ght not be targets.
SAFETY
The fol l owi ng r ul es and safety procedur es can save your l i fe and the l i ves of
othersl earn and remember them:
Suspect any object that appears to be out of pl ace or arti fi ci al i n i ts
surr oundi ngs. Remember, what you see may wel l be what the enemy
wants you to see. I f you di d not put i t there, do not pi ck i t up.
Exami ne mi nes and booby traps from al l angl es, and check for
al ternati ve means of fi ri ng before approachi ng them.
Ensure that onl y one man works on a booby trap.
Do not use force. Stop i f force becomes necessary.
Do not touch a tri p wi re unti l both ends have been i nvesti gated and al l
devi ces are di sarmed or neutral i zed.
Trace tri p wi res and check for addi ti onal traps l ocated al ong and
beneath them.
Treat al l parts of a trap wi th suspi ci on, because each part may be set
to actuate the trap.
SECTION II. CLEARING BOOBY TRAPS
C2, FM 20-32
Wai t at l east 30 seconds after pul l i ng a booby trap or a mi ne. There
mi ght be a del ay fuse.
Mark al l traps unti l they are cl eared.
Expect constant change i n enemy techni ques.
Never attempt to cl ear booby traps by hand i f pul l i ng them or
destroyi ng them i n pl ace i s possi bl e and acceptabl e.
INDICATIONS
Successful detecti on depends on two thi ngsbei ng awar e of what mi ght be
trapped and why, and bei ng abl e to recogni ze the evi dence of setti ng. The fi rst
r equi r ement demands a wel l -devel oped sense of i ntui ti on; the second, a keen
ey e. I n tu i ti on , l i k e mi n e s en s e, i s gai n ed th r ou gh ex per i en ce an d an
understandi ng of the enemy's techni ques and habi ts. A keen eye i s the resul t
of tr ai ni ng and pr acti ce i n the r ecogni ti on of thi ngs that mi ght i ndi cate the
presence of a trap. The presence of booby traps or nui sance mi nes i s i ndi cated
by
Di sturbance of ground surface or scattered, l oose soi l .
Wrappers, seal s, l oose shel l caps, safety pi ns, nai l s, and pi eces of wi re
or cord.
I mprovi sed methods of marki ng traps, such as pi l es of stones or marks
on wal l s or trees.
Evi dence of camoufl age, such as wi thered vegetati on or si gns of
cutti ng.
Breaks i n the conti nui ty of dust, pai nt, or vegetati on.
Trampl ed earth or vegetati on; foot marks.
Lumps or bul ges under carpet or i n furni ture.
DETECTION
Detecti on methods depend on the natur e of the envi r onment. I n open ar eas,
methods used to detect mi nes can usual l y detect booby tr aps. Look for tr i p
wi res and other si gns suggesti ng the presence of an actuati ng mechani sm. I n
ur ban ar eas, mi ne detector s ar e pr obabl y of l i ttl e use. You have to r el y on
manual search techni ques and, i f avai l abl e, speci al equi pment.
CLEARING METHODS
The method used to neutr al i ze or di sar m a tr ap depends on many thi ngs,
i ncl udi ng ti me constrai nts, personnel assets, and the type of trap. Remember,
a tr ap cannot be consi dered safe unti l the bl asti ng cap or the detonati ng cord
h as been r emov ed fr om th e ch ar ge. Th i s i s y ou r fi r st obj ecti v e an d i s
par ti cul ar l y i mpor tant for el ectr i c tr aps, whi ch may contai n a col l apsi ng
ci rcui t.
Use the safest method to neutr al i ze a tr ap. For exampl e, i f the FD and the
detonati ng cor d ar e accessi bl e, i t i s usual l y safer to cut the detonati ng cor d.
Thi s method does not actuate the trap, but i nserti ng pi ns i n the FD mi ght.
C2, FM 20-32
COMBAT CLEARANCE
Cl ear i ng booby tr aps and nu i s an ce mi n es i n AOs i s done pr i mar i l y by
engi neers. Therefore, engi neer advi ce i s i mportant duri ng the pl anni ng stages
of any oper ati on wher e booby tr aps ar e l i kel y to be encounter ed. I ntel l i gence
r egar di ng the possi bl e pr esence and types of tr aps must be pr ovi ded to
engi neer uni ts as soon as possi bl e. Thi s al l ows the uni t to take necessar y
acti on and pr ovi de r el evant tr ai ni ng. Cl ear ance of booby tr aps cannot be
under tak en as a secondar y task , because engi neer cl ear i ng teams mi ght
requi re protecti on that necessi tates combi ned arms trai ni ng. Before engi neer
pl anni ng can start, the staff provi des commanders wi th the l atest i ntel l i gence
i nformati on and, i f possi bl e, the fol l owi ng i nformati on:
Amount of cl earance requi red.
Acceptabl e damage.
Avai l abi l i ty of speci al equi pment.
Securi ty requi rements.
I ntel l i gence i nformati on regar di ng the nature, type, and l ocati on of traps has
a di rect beari ng on the number of cl eari ng parti es necessary and the degree of
pr otecti on r equi r ed. For exampl e, i n bui l t-up ar eas wher e tr aps have to be
cl ear ed i n bui l di ngs that offer pr otecti on from enemy fi r e, di rect protecti on i s
usual l y provi ded by the normal combat si tuati on. On the other hand, i n open
ar eas where cl ear i ng parti es may be requi red to cl ear traps covered by di rect
enemy fi re, protecti on arrangements must be more speci fi c.
Engi neer commander s must be awar e of the ti me needed to cl ear var i ous
types of tr aps i n di ffer i ng ter r ai n si tuati ons. Remember, i ncr easi ng the
number of cl ear ance par ti es may not necessar i l y r educe the ti me r equi r ed to
cl ear tr aps. Thi s i s par ti cul ar l y true when tr aps are set cl ose together or set
deep al ong a narrow front that i s the onl y avai l abl e route.
I ni ti al l y, cl ear areas of i mmedi ate tacti cal i mportance and traps that present a
speci fi c thr eat. For exampl e, cl ear onl y the por ti on of a bui l di ng r equi red for
obser vati on and those tr aps pr esenti ng an i mmedi ate hazar d. Thi s enabl es
cl eari ng parti es to concentrate on other areas of tacti cal i mportance.
Cl ear i ng tr aps by hand i s the onl y way that damage can be avoi ded and
securi ty guaranteed. When i t i s vi tal to avoi d equi pment or structure damage,
consi der usi ng avai l abl e EOD assets. I t i s often necessar y to bal ance the
r equi r ement to r emai n si l ent and avoi d damage wi th the r equi r ement to
mai ntai n momentum.
When tr aps ar e bei ng cl ear ed i n di r ect-suppor t combat si tuati ons, they ar e
nor mal l y deal t wi th by usi ng uni t r esour ces and l ocal l y manufactur ed or
acqui red ai ds. Speci fi ed equi pment i s rarel y avai l abl e. Equi pment vari es wi th
the si tuati on but usual l y consi sts of sel ected i tems fr om Tabl e 13-2. I n areas
wi th a hi gh i nci dence of booby tr aps, assembl e and r eser ve speci al cl ear i ng
ki ts.
FM 20-32
CLEARANCE IN SECURE AREAS
POLICY AND PLANNING
For mal cl ear i ng pr ocedur es must be fol l owed i n secur e ar eas. Thi s type of
cl ear ance can be done by engi neer s or EOD per sonnel . I t i s subject to ti me
constr ai nts when tr aps or suspected tr aps ar e l ocated i n ur gentl y r equi r ed
i nstal l ati ons or faci l i ti es, such as suppl y dumps or tel ecommuni cati on centers.
Commander s r econnoi ter thei r ar eas of r esponsi bi l i ty, make detai l ed pl ans,
prepare orders, and bri ef thei r men. The fol l owi ng poi nts are covered:
I ntel l i gence.
How the operati on i s to be conducted (i ncl ude acceptabl e damage and
methods of cl eari ng).
Acti on on fi ndi ng traps.
Marki ng.
Di sarmi ng procedures.
Taski ng and al l ocati on of areas.
Equi pment avai l abl e.
Control measures.
Table 13-2. Clearing equipment
Item Remarks
Unit Equipment
Mine detector
Mine probe/knife/bayonet
Eye protection
Body armor Flak jacket, Kevlar helmet
Booby-trap signs
Mine marking tape
Mine markers Chalk, felt-tipped pens
Electricians adhesive tape
Flashlight
Tape measure
Mine marking cones
Trademans tools Saws, pliers, hammers, screwdrivers
Self-developing camera
and film
Locally Manufactured/Acquired
Trip-wire feeler
Grapnel and rope
Hand mirrors
Pins, wire, nails For use as safety pins
Meat hooks For use as block and tackle
FM 20-32
Rehearsal and equi pment preparati on.
CONTROL POINT
The operati on commander establ i shes a control poi nt upon arri val at the area
to be cl ear ed. Th e contr ol poi nt functi ons as th e headquar ter s and the
mater i al hol di ng ar ea. I t i s al so the poi nt fr om whi ch al l cl earance star ts. I ts
sui tabi l i ty mi ght not have escaped the enemys noti ce, so i t must be cl ear ed
before i t can be used.
CONTROL AND SIZE OF PARTIES
The si ze of cl ear i ng par ti es var i es dependi ng on the l ocati on bei ng cl ear ed.
The fol l owi ng rul es appl y:
Each party i s control l ed by an NCO.
Onl y one party works i n a parti cul ar subarea.
The di stance between parti es i s suffi ci ent so that detonati on i n one
area does not endanger persons i n other areas.
The NCOI C of each party i s i n vi sual , radi o, or voi ce contact wi th
every person i n hi s party.
Onl y one person works on a booby trap.
MARKING
Booby tr aps and nui sance mi nes can be pl aced i n di ver se l ocati ons. I t i s
i mpossi bl e to standar di ze a method for mar ki ng ar eas, i ndi vi dual tr aps, or
safe routes. Any form of promi nent, permanent marki ng can be used.
Uncleared Areas
The per i meter mar ki ng of uncl ear ed ar eas can take any cl ear l y r ecogni zed
form. Standard mi nefi el d or booby-trap si gns suspended from a si ngl e-str and
fence ar e r ecommended. The spaci ng of the si gns i s the same as standar d
mi nefi el d marki ng (see Chapter 2). As the area i s cl eared, the fence shoul d be
progressi vel y moved.
Individual Traps
Because booby tr aps can have mor e than one means of actuati on, do not
attempt to pl ace a cone or other marker over any part of a trap. Use suffi ci ent
si gns to ensur e that the tr ap can be detected and accur atel y l ocated. I n
bui l di ngs, cl ear l y mark r ooms contai ni ng tr aps and, where possi bl e, i ndi cate
the exact l ocati on of traps.
Internal Marking
The i nter nal mar ki ng system depends on the ar ea bei ng cl ear ed. One good
system i s to di vi de the total ar ea i nto subar eas, cl ear and mar k safe l anes
between the subareas, and then use the l anes as safe routes.
CLEARING OF OPEN AREAS
Roads, r oad shoul der s, br i dges, obstacl es, and other str uctur es must be
cl eared i n open areas. The mai n threat comes from nui sance mi nes, so regard
FM 20-32
each potenti al si te as a nui sance mi nefi el d and use establ i shed mi nefi el d
cl ear i ng pr ocedur es. After the si te i s cl ear ed, adapt the dr i l l to sui t the
si tuati on.
CLEARING OF BUILDINGS
Bui l di ngs are excel l ent l ocati ons for booby traps. Booby traps are concentrated
i nsi de the bui l di ng, so car eful l y or gani ze sear ch and cl ear i ng pr ocedur es. I n
most cases, bui l di ngs ar e r equi r ed for use, and excessi ve damage must be
avoi ded.
A two-man cl ear i ng par ty can cl ear an aver age-si ze str uctur e. No one el se
shoul d enter the bui l di ng unti l i t i s cl ear ed. I n ver y l ar ge bui l di ngs, two or
mor e par ti es can be empl oyed, i f they wor k as far apar t as possi bl e and have
cl ear l y defi ned boundar i es. As a gener al r ul e, two wal l s or two fl oor s i s the
mi ni mum di stance between parti es.
EXTERIOR RECONNAISSANCE AND ENTRY
Befor e appr oachi ng a bui l di ng, check the sur r oundi ng ar ea for booby tr aps
and nui sance mi nes. Car r y out a r econnai ssance to deter mi ne the poi nt of
entry and cl ear the way to i t. When sel ecti ng the poi nt of entry, consi der the
fol l owi ng:
Doorways. Never consi der doorways to be safe unl ess the door i s ful l y
open and the entrance i s cl ear. I f a house i s bui l t on a concrete sl ab, i t
i s not l i kel y to have a pressure FD i n the fl oor.
Wi ndows. Wi ndows are excel l ent l ocati ons for booby traps. Pay
parti cul ar attenti on to the ground outsi de and the fl oor i nsi de because
they are cl assi c si tes for pressure FDs. Use the fol l owi ng procedures i f
access must be gai ned through a wi ndow:
Pul l the wi ndow i f i t i s unl ocked and can be moved. I f i t i s l ocked,
use a smal l charge or a heavy object to break the gl ass.
Sel ect a stati onary wi ndow that cannot be opened versus a
wi ndow that can be opened when both types are avai l abl e, because
the wi ndow that can be opened i s mor e l i kel y to contai n a booby
trap.
Deal wi th bl i nds and curtai ns i n a manner si mi l ar to procedures
used for wi ndows.
Use a mi rror to exami ne i nsi de the wi ndow frame before enteri ng
the bui l di ng.
Mousehol es. I f you deci de not to enter the structure through a door or
a wi ndow, use expl osi ves to make a mousehol e i n the wal l , r oof, or
fl oor. Thi s offers a remote, safe method of creati ng an access poi nt, but
i t can al so detonate nearby traps. Exerci se cauti on i f enteri ng through
the roof of a two-story bui l di ng, because i t i s far more di ffi cul t to cl ear
booby traps when goi ng down steps than i t i s when goi ng up them.
SEARCH TECHNIQUES
I t i s i mpossi bl e to establ i sh a sear ch dr i l l that i s sui tabl e for use i n al l
bui l di ngs. I t i s essenti al , however, for each worki ng par ty to devel op i ts own
FM 20-32
dr i l l and fol l ow i t. Domesti c dwel l i ngs shoul d be sear ched i n the fol l owi ng
order:
1. Fl oors and furni ture.
2. Wal l s (i ncl udi ng doors, wi ndows, fi repl aces, and cupboards).
3. Fi tti ngs (i ncl udi ng l i ght swi tches and pi ctures).
4. Cei l i ngs.
Mar k each ar ea or i tem SAFE as i t i s cl ear ed. Thi s can be conveni entl y done
by usi ng chal k or a fel t-ti pped pen.
Use the fol l owi ng techni ques and precauti ons when searchi ng bui l di ngs. They
can save your l i fel earn and remember them!
Check both si des of a door before openi ng i t. Do thi s by dri l l i ng a hol e
thr ough the door and usi ng a mi r r or to check the other si de. You can
al so check or open doors by pul l i ng or bl owi ng the l ock and hi nges wi th
a smal l charge.
Exami ne fl oor coveri ngs for si gns of di sturbance. The presence of FDs
i s often i ndi cated by l oose fl oor boar ds, bul ges or tear s i n car pets, or
l oose ti l es.
Use a pul l i ng cabl e to move furni ture and to open cupboard doors and
drawers.
Check uphol stered furni ture and beds by remotel y droppi ng a heavy
object onto them.
Treat every swi tch wi th suspi ci on, si nce el ectri cal wi ri ng provi des a
ready-made ci rcui t for booby traps. To expl ode al l the traps connected
to the nor mal power suppl y, di sconnect the power at the fuse boar d,
tur n al l the swi tches on, and then r econnect the power. Repeat the
pr ocedur e wi th the swi tch tur ned off i n case the swi tch has been
r ever sed. Remember, thi s procedure wi l l not di scl ose tr aps that use a
batter y. Exer ci se cauti on when usi ng swi tches, even i f the power i s
di sconnected.
Leave doors, wi ndows, cupboards, and drawers open after they have
been cl eared.
Mark al l routes, areas, and i tems that have been cl eared.
Check pl umbi ng by remotel y turni ng on al l water taps and al l owi ng
the water to run for at l east one mi nute.
Check toi l et tanks before fl ushi ng.
Beware of l i ght-sensi ti ve devi ces i n dark pl aces (cl osets, cabi nets,
basements, atti cs, chi mneys).
Al l ow at l east 30 seconds for an expl osi on after pul l i ng anythi ng,
because there mi ght be a del ay fuse.
FM 20-32
CLEARING INSTALLATIONS AND FACILITIES
Cl ear i ng by hand i s necessar y i n i nstal l ati ons and faci l i ti es (fuel dumps,
ammuni ti on dumps, el ectr i c substati ons) wher e an expl osi on coul d r esul t i n
the l oss of r esour ces. I n other si tuati ons, the i tem's i mpor tance or the
r esul ti ng damage mi ght not be obvi ous. For exampl e, a smal l char ge pl aced
agai nst the contr ol val ves of a dam or agai nst the mai n cabl e enter i ng a
tel ephone exchange resul ts i n unforeseen damage that can take days to repai r.
Ther efor e, you shoul d seek a speci al i st's advi ce, i f possi bl e, when cl ear i ng
booby traps i n i ndustri al areas and unfami l i ar l ocati ons.
CLEARING OBSTACLES
I f an enemy has ti me to create obstacl es, he al so has ti me to set booby tr aps
an d l ay nui sance mi nes. Th e obstacl e i tsel f i s usual l y cl ear of tr aps to
encourage a fal se sense of securi ty and l ead troops i nto more dangerous areas.
Therefor e, r egar d al l obstacl es as booby-tr apped unti l pr oven other wi se. The
si mpl est, safest way to deal wi th movabl e obstacl es i s to pul l them. Before an
obstacl e can be pul l ed, you must fi r st cl ear the ar ea fr om whi ch the pul l wi l l
be made.
CLEARING SECURE AREAS
When cl ear i ng secur e ar eas and ti me i s not a major factor, use speci al i zed
cl ear ance equi pment as much as possi bl e. The fol l owi ng equi pment mi ght be
avai l abl e for use:
Cameras. Cameras have a wi de range of appl i cati ons. They can be
used wi th di fferent types of fi l m, such as i nfr ared and ul tr avi ol et, to
di scl ose evi dence that i s i ndi scer ni bl e to the naked eye. For exampl e,
i nfr ar ed photogr aphy r eveal s di ffer ences i n the heat emi tted by
objects and can often di scl ose recent di ggi ng and bur i ed or conceal ed
objects.
Expl osi ve detector dogs (EDDs). Al though EDDs can detect mi nute
quanti ti es of expl osi ves and the pr esence of tr i p wi r es, they ar e
tr ai ned to detect the char ge and not the FD. Thi s extr emel y l i mi ts
thei r useful ness i n detecti ng booby tr aps. They al so tend to become
confused i f the area contai ns expl osi ve odors other than those emi tti ng
from booby traps.
El ectroni c countermeasures. El ectroni c countermeasures can be used
to expl ode el ectr i c booby tr aps and to pr event r emotel y contr ol l ed,
i mpr ovi sed expl osi ve devi ces fr om bei ng detonated by r adi o.
Robots. I n thei r si mpl est form, robots can be used to detonate or
neutr al i ze booby tr aps. Mor e sophi sti cated model s can be r emotel y
contr ol l ed to car r y out si mpl e tasks, such as vi deotapi ng or cutti ng
wi res.
Body armor.
El ectri c meters.
X-ray equi pment.
C2, FM 20-32
CLEARANCE METHODS
Pul l i ng. Thi s method uses a grapnel and a rope to pul l the trap. I t i s
used when the resul ti ng damage i s acceptabl e. I t i s the safest method
and i s parti cul arl y appl i cabl e to traps set i n open areas. Do not di sturb
any par t of a booby tr ap when pl aci ng the gr apnel and pul l i ng the
cabl e. Car eful l y sel ect the si te fr om wher e the pul l i s to be made
because i t mi ght be mi ned or trapped. When a booby trap i s pul l ed and
does not expl ode, wai t at l east 30 seconds before approachi ng i t i n case
del ay devi ces have been used. Di sposal of unexpl oded tr aps depends
on thei r condi ti on when i nspected. The pr ocedur e for pul l i ng booby
traps i s si mi l ar to that for pul l i ng mi nes (see Chapter 11).
Tri p wi res. Check the area for AP devi ces before proceedi ng. Pl ace a
grapnel hook as cl ose as possi bl e to the tri p wi re. Do not touch the tri p
wi re unti l the pul l i ng party i s i n a covered area.
Pul l and rel ease. Pul l away objects that conceal and operate pul l and
rel ease mechani sms.
Pressure mechani sm. Pul l pressure mechani sms from under objects
that conceal and oper ate them. I f thi s i s i mpossi bl e, bl ow them i n
pl ace. I n many cases, i t mi ght be easi er to pul l the charge rather than
the FD. Take extr eme care when attempti ng thi s, because addi ti onal
mechani sms are often conceal ed i n or under the mai n charge.
Destroyi ng i n pl ace. When destroyi ng booby traps i n pl ace, expl ode a
smal l charge near the booby trap's charge. Agai n, use thi s method onl y
i f damage fr om the expl osi on i s acceptabl e. When i t i s i mpossi bl e to
pl ace the expl osi ve cl ose enough to ensur e detonati on of the mai n
charge, careful l y pl ace i t al ongsi de the mechani sm. Do not assume the
mai n char ge i s safe to handl e just because the mechani sm has been
destr oyed. Actuate pr essur e mechani sms by suspendi ng one-hal f
pound of expl osi ve above the pressure pl ate.
Cl eari ng by hand. Thi s method i nvol ves neutral i zi ng, di sarmi ng,
r emovi ng, and di sposi ng of tr aps wi th out causi ng damage. I t i s
extr emel y h azar dou s an d s h ou l d on l y be u sed wh en pu l l i n g or
destr ucti ng tr aps i n pl ace i s i mpossi bl e or unacceptabl e. Cl ear ance
shoul d onl y be conducted by EOD personnel or experi enced engi neers.
Car eful l y exami ne al l aspects of the tr ap befor e deci di ng how to cl ear
i t.
Expl osi ve l i ne charge. Usi ng thi s devi ce produces qui ck resul ts when
onl y a narrow path i s requi red through a booby-trapped area. I t gi ves
cl ear ance for the same di stance to ei ther si de, onl y wher e i t i s i n
contact wi th the ground.
Armor. Thi s method i s used where traps wi th smal l charges (desi gned
as AP devi ces) are l ocated i n open areas. Armored vehi cl es track back
and forth over the area. Thi s shortens the cl eari ng ti me wi th l i ttl e ri sk
of casual ti es.
FM 20-32
Fi re. I f traps are set i n grass or dense vegetati on, fi re can be used to
bur n away camoufl age mater i al and expose tr aps. I n most cases,
suffi ci ent heat i s generated to bur n or expl ode the traps. Unexpl oded
tr aps ar e consi der ed extremel y sensi ti ve and must not be cl ear ed by
hand.
IMPROVISED TRAPS
I n l ow-i ntensi ty confl i cts, ther e i s a hi gh i nci dence of i mpr ovi sed mi nes and
booby traps. I t i s i mpossi bl e to provi de a compl ete l i st of FDs and i mprovi sed
demol i ti on mater i al that can be used. However, most i mpr ovi sed tr aps ar e
vari ati ons of those descri bed bel ow.
An el ectri c FD requi res a current to be passed between two contacts. The ways
i n whi ch thi s can be achi eved are l i mi ted onl y by the i magi nati on. Exampl es of
si mpl e el ectr i c FDs that can be manufactur ed usi ng househol d i tems or
appl i ances ar e shown i n Fi gur e 13-6, page 13-24. Exampl es of i mpr ovi sed
mechani cal FDs are shown i n Fi gures 13-7 and 13-8, page 13-25.
The si mpl est and most accur ate method of i ncor por ati ng del ay i s to use some
for m of cl ock or ti mer. However, any mechani sm or chemi cal r eacti on that
takes a measur abl e ti me to compl ete i ts functi on can be used. Exampl es of
si mpl e i mpr ovi sed del ay devi ces ar e shown i n Fi gur es 13-9 and 13-10, page
13-26.
NONEXPLOSIVE TRAPS
Nonexpl osi ve tr aps are typi cal l y used i n tr opi cal or rai n-forest r egi ons. I deal
constructi on materi al s abound, and conceal ment i n surroundi ng vegetati on i s
rel ati vel y easy. No prescri bed procedures exi st for cl eari ng nonexpl osi ve traps.
Each trap must be cl eared accordi ng to i ts nature.
PUNJ I
The punj i (Fi gu r e 13-11, page 13-27) i s one of the si mpl est tr aps. I t i s
nor mal l y made fr om l ocal l y avai l abl e mater i al , such as shar pened stakes,
nai l s, or heavy-gauge wi re. I t i s pl aced i n conceal ed pi ts or i n pl aces that gi ve
cover fr om fi r e. The enemy normal l y smear s the spi kes or cutti ng edges wi th
excr ement or poi son. After cl ear i ng a punj i , ster i l i ze cuts and abr asi ons
i mmedi atel y and see a medi cal offi cer as soon as possi bl e.
CLOSING TRAP
The si de-cl osi ng tr ap (Fi gure 13-12, page 13-27) consi sts of two wooden sl ats
that ar e studded wi th spi k es. The sl ats sl i de al ong a pai r of gui de r ods
control l ed by heavy bands. When the prop hol di ng the sl ats apart i s di sl odged,
the sl ats spr i ng together and i mpl ant the spi kes i nto the por ti on of the body
passi ng between them.
FM 20-32
Figure 13-6. Improvised electrical FDs
Pull
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure release
Pressure release
Tension release
Tension release
Pull
Gravity
FM 20-32
Figure 13-7. Improvised nonelectric FDs (shear-pin operated)
Figure 13-8. Improvised nonelectric FDs (spring-operated)
Metal tube
Nail
Improved percussion-
cap assembly
Pressure board
Copper shear pin
NOTE: An improvised percussion cap
assembly consists of a small-arms
round and a nonelectric blasting cap.
Plug
Metal tube
Bolt stem and nut
Shear pin
Release pin
Improved percussion-
cap assembly
FM 20-32
Figure 13-9. Improvised, electric delay devices
Figure 13-10. Improvised, nonelectric delay devices
Battery
Electric blasting cap Electric blasting cap
Thin spring steel
contact
Leads to battery and electric
blasting cap
Fuse train
Time fuse
Pin-release device
FM 20-32
Figure 13-11. Typical punjis
Figure 13-12. Side-closing trap
Punjis placed adjacent to tracks
Punji foot trap
Punji board
FM 20-32
SPIKE BOARD
The spi ke board (Fi gure 13-13) i s used i n a pi t and consi sts of a treadl e board
wi th one end spi ked. When a man steps on the board, the spi ked end fl i es up
and stri kes hi m i n the face or chest.
VENUS FLYTRAP
The Venus fl ytrap consi sts of a rectangul ar framework wi th overl appi ng barbs
empl aced i n a pi t. The one shown i n Fi gur e 13-14 i s made fr om a metal
contai ner that i s sunk i nto the ground unti l the top i s fl ush. I t i s then covered
wi th gr ass and/or l eaves. The bar bs i nfl i ct i njur y, especi al l y when the vi cti m
attempts to wi thdr aw hi s l eg from the trap. These tr aps are typi cal l y l ocated
on tracks and al ong road edges.
Figure 13-13. Spike board
Figure 13-14. Venus fly trap
FM 20-32
Expedi ent devi ces are constructed i n the fi el d wi th l ocal l y avai l abl e materi al .
They are empl oyed agai nst vehi cl es or personnel i n the same manner as other
mi ne systems. Expedi ent devi ces
Suppl ement a uni t's l ow suppl y of conventi onal mi nes.
Hi nder reconnai ssance, cl earance, and neutral i zati on of mi nefi el ds.
Create enemy atti tudes of uncertai nty and suspi ci on to l ower moral e
and sl ow movement).
AUTHORIZATION
Because expedi ent devi ces have nonstandar d desi gn and functi oni ng, take
speci al pr ecauti ons to pr otect fr i endl y for ces. Consi der neutr al i zati on,
di sar mi ng r equi r ements, and adequate mar k i ng pr ocedur es. The use of
expedi ent devi ces i s restri cted under the Conventi on of Conventi onal Warfare.
Expedi ent devi ces have the same i nter nati onal r estr i cti ons as booby tr aps.
The cor ps commander i s the empl oyment authori ty for expedi ent devi ces. He
can del egate thi s authori ty to the di vi si on commander. I f authori ty i s gi ven to
use expedi ent devi ces, US personnel wi l l adhere to the rul es for i nternati onal
l aw that are appl i cabl e to armed confl i ct.
EMPLOYMENT AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES
I f i ssued mi nes are not readi l y avai l abl e on the battl efi el d, expedi ent devi ces
can be manufactur ed i n the fi el d. Constr ucti on var i es based on avai l abl e
materi al s and the i ngenui ty of the personnel who are fabri cati ng the devi ces.
Expedi ent devi ces pose a potenti al safety hazard to fri endl y forcesthose who
are constructi ng them and those who may l ater encounter them. Constructi on
shoul d be per for med by personnel who are fami l i ar wi th the materi al s bei ng
used. I nnovati ve desi gns shoul d be checked and tested befor e ar mi ng and
empl aci ng the devi ces.
As a mi ni mum, test the fusi ng mechani sm separ atel y to ensur e that i t
functi ons as desi gned. I mpr oper fuse oper ati on i s the most common cause of
mal functi on. Al so, test the fuse and the fi ri ng chai n (base charge, bl asti ng cap,
and detonati ng cor d) wi thout the mai n char ge to ensur e pr oper oper ati on.
Empl ace the devi ce after sati sfactor y per for mance of the fi r i ng mechani sm.
Fi rst, empl ace heavy i tems (such as arti l l ery shel l s) that are used as the mai n
char ge, and then add the fi r i ng mechani sm. Tak e car e when movi ng or
empl aci ng expedi ent devi ces because thei r nonstandar d manufactur e and
potenti al l y faul ty constructi on make them hi ghl y sensi ti ve to jars and shocks.
Construct devi ces at the empl acement si te whenever possi bl e.
Ex pedi en t dev i ces ar e pr epar ed i n th e fi el d u s i n g s tan dar d US FDs,
detonators, and demol i ti on materi al s. Al l devi ces di scussed i n thi s chapter can
be made to fu n cti on el ectr i cal l y or n on el ectr i cal l y u s i n g moder n i zed
demol i ti on i ni ti ators (MDI s). AP devi ces must be command-detonated.
SECTION III. EXPEDIENT DEVICES
C2, FM 20-32
HIGH-EXPLOSIVE, ARTILLERY-SHELL DEVICE
The HE, ar ti l l er y-shel l devi ce (Fi gur e 13-15) can be r eadi l y adapted to
expedi ent mi ni ng. Remove the arti l l ery fuse and repl ace i t wi th a standard FD
and a l ength of detonati ng cor d or wi th an MDI bl asti ng cap. I f pr oper l y
assembl ed, a destr uctor may al so be used. I f a destr uctor i s not avai l abl e,
fi rml y pack the fuse wel l wi th composi ti on C4 expl osi ve and i nsert a l ength of
knotted detonati ng cord or a bl asti ng cap.
The devi ce can be acti vated by a vari ety of methods dependi ng on the type of
FD used. When MDI bl asti ng caps are used, the devi ce i s command-detonated.
The devi ce can al so be adapted to functi on el ectr i cal l y by addi ng an el ectr i c
cap and a power source.
Thi s devi ce can be used as an AT or an AP devi ce. When used as an AP devi ce,
i t must be command-detonated.
NOTE: Useonly serviceableUS ammunition that has remained in the
possession of US forces. Never use captured ammunition or UXO
found on the battlefi eld. I t may be armed, booby-trapped, or
deteriorated.
Figure 13-15. HE, artillery-shell device
PRESSURE FD WITH
DESTRUCTOR
Nonelectric
blasting cap
M10 universal
destructor
Artillery shell
with fuse
removed
Artillery shell
with fuse
removed
Artillery shell
with fuse
removed
M142 multi-
purpose FD
Standard base cap
(remove)
Priming adapter
C4 explosive
Nonelectric
blasting cap
Standard base cap
(remove)
Electric
blasting cap
Standard base
Pull FD with
C4 explosive
Detonating cord
Composition C4
explosive
ELECTRICAL
FIRING SYSTEM
Standard base
Metal plates
Power system
Paper or suitable
insulating material
NOTE: For command-detonation, an M34 blasting
machine can replace the metal plates and the battery.
Electric-cap leads
C2, FM 20-32
PLATTER CHARGE
The pl atter charge (Fi gure 13-16) consi sts of a sui tabl e contai ner that i s fi l l ed
wi th uni for ml y packed expl osi ve and pl aced behi nd a pl atter. The pl atter i s
metal (pr efer abl y r oun d, but squ ar e i s sati sfactor y) and wei ghs 1 to 3
ki l ogr ams. The expl osi ve r equi r ed i s equal to the wei ght of the pl atter. The
contai ner may not be necessary i f the expl osi ve can be hel d fi rml y agai nst the
pl atter (tape can be used). The char ge shoul d be pr i med fr om the exact r ear
center, and the bl asti ng cap shoul d be secur ed wi th a smal l amount of C4 to
ensure detonati on.
The char ge shoul d be ai med at the di r ect center of the tar get. The effecti ve
r ange (pr i mar i l y a matter of ai m) i s appr oxi matel y 35 meter s for a smal l
tar get. Wi th pr acti ce, exper i enced per sonnel can hi t a 55-gal l on dr um (a
rel ati vel y smal l target) at 25 meters wi th about 90 percent accuracy.
The pl atter charge can be used as an AT or an AP devi ce. When used as an AP
devi ce, i t must be command-detonated.
IMPROVISED CLAYMORE
For the i mpr ovi sed cl aymor e devi ce (Fi gur e 13-17, page 13-32), a l ayer of
pl asti c expl osi ve i s attached to the convex si de of a sui tabl y dense, curved base
(such as wood or metal ). A hol e must be made i n the exact rear of the base. A
bl asti ng cap i s pl aced i n the hol e to pri me the devi ce. Shrapnel i s fi xed to the
expl osi ve wi th a sui tabl e retai ner (cl oth, tape, mesh screen).
The dev i ce mu st be comman d-deton ated. Comman d deton ati on i s bes t
achi eved wi th el ectr i cal pr i mi ng or an MDI . A bl asti ng devi ce i s attached to
the el ectri c cap vi a fi ri ng wi res l ai d at l east 50 meters from the devi ce. Ensure
th at per s on n el h av e adequ ate cov er wh en deton ati n g th e i mpr ov i s ed
cl aymore.
Figure 13-16. Platter charge
To initiating device
(electric or
nonelectric)
Blasting cap (electric or
nonelectric) primed in
center rear of explosive
C4 explosive
main charge
Platter
Center of target
C2, FM 20-32
GRAPESHOT ANTIPERSONNEL DEVICE
Pl ace shr apnel i n the bottom of a cyl i ndr i cal contai ner to make a gr apeshot
AP devi ce (Fi gur e 13-18). The shr apnel i s tamped and hel d i n pl ace wi th a
sui tabl e separ ator (waddi ng). Expl osi ve (appr oxi matel y one-quar ter the
wei ght of the shr apnel ) i s packed to a uni for m densi ty behi nd the waddi ng.
The devi ce i s pr i med i n the center of the expl osi ve wi th an el ectr i c cap or an
MDI .
NOTE: The United Nations Convention of Certain Conventional
Weapons mandates that all fragment munitions produce fragments
that arevisibleby X ray (such as metal or rock).
Thi s devi ce must be command-detonated. The expl osi ve propel s the shr apnel
outward from the contai ner. The grapeshot i s very effecti ve agai nst personnel
targets.
BARBWIRE ANTIPERSONNEL DEVICE
The barbwi re AP devi ce (Fi gure 13-19) can be made di recti onal by pl aci ng the
wi r e agai nst an embankment or a fi xed object. Thi s causes the for ce of the
expl osi on to expel the barbwi re fragments i n the desi red di recti on. One rol l of
standard barbwi re i s pl aced i nto posi ti on, and one bl ock of C4 i s pl aced i n the
center of the rol l and pri med. Thi s devi ce must be command-detonated.
Figure 13-17. Improvised claymore device
Screen or
retainer
Shrapnel
Convex base
Electric blasting cap
Legs
Tape
Explosive ( weight of shrapnel)
Electric blasting cap primed in
center with C4 wadding
Blasting machine (or
suitable substitute)
Enemy
50 m
(minimum)
C2, FM 20-32
Figure 13-18. Grapeshot AP device
Figure 13-19. Barbwire AP device
xplosive ( weight of
hrapnel)
Wadding Shrapnel
Container
Blasting machine
Electric
blasting cap
Wadding
Shrapnel
Bottom
C4 explosive
Primed in
center
M34 blasting machine
(or suitable substitute)
Wooden
base
Electric blasting cap
1-lb block of C4
Roll of barbwire
FM 20-32
Installation and Removal of US Mines and Firing Devices A-1
Appendix A
Installation and Removal of US Mines
and Firing Devices
Thi s appendi x provi des i nstal l ati on and removal procedures for AT mi nes,
AP mi nes, and FDs. The scope of thi s appendi x i s l i mi ted to US hand-
empl aced mi nes that requi re manual armi ng.
WARNINGS
1. If there is a problem when performing any installation or removal step, notify the NCOIC.
2. If you hear a click when removing the safety clip or if the pressure plate snaps downward
so it is level with the body of the mine, notify the NCOIC. DO NOT use the mine.
3. If the safety clip cannot be reinserted, notify the NCOIC.
4. DO NOT apply pressure to the pressure plate, tilt rod, or fuse at any time.
5. Before attempting to disarm and remove the mine, check for AHDs, damage, and
malfunctions. If any of these conditions exist, notify the NCOIC. DO NOT attempt to disarm
the mine.
6. If you feel a jar or hear a metallic click when removing the locking safety pin, stop and
notify the NCOIC. The firing pin has gone forward and is resting on the positive safety pin.
DO NOT remove the positive safety pin.
7. After removing the positive safety pin, proceed with extreme caution. The slider pin can
detonate the mine if it is accidentally pushed in.
8. When attaching trip wires to the release-pin ring on the fuse, leave a little slack in the
wires. This prevents pull on the release-pin ring, which could set off the mine when the
safety pins are removed.
9. Ensure that the extension rod is vertical and is not tilted in any direction. A 20-degree tilt
of the extension rod will detonate the mine.
10. Ensure that the safety fork moves freely. If there is pressure on the fork, DO NOT remove
it.
11. DO NOT apply pressure to the pressure plate of the fuse when inserting it into the fuse
well.
12. If the setting knob is difficult to turn, DO NOT force it; notify the NCOIC.
13. DO NOT adjust the setting knob while the detonator is in the detonator well.
14. If any cracks are noted in the plastic collar, slowly and carefully reassemble the stop
and safety pin on the fuse. Carefully remove the extension rod and the fuse from the mine.
Give the fuse to the NCOIC and replace it with a new fuse.
15. Before cutting loose trip wires, look at each end to ensure that there are no electric-
producing devices that might initiate another system.
16. Arm and disarm all mines while in the prone position.
FM 20-32
A-2 Installation and Removal of US Mines and Firing Devices
AP mi nes can ki l l or i ncapaci tate thei r vi cti ms. They can be fused by pressure,
wi re, or command detonati on and contai n a bl ast, boundi ng-fragmentati on, or
di rect-fragmentati on warhead.
M14
The M14 mi ne (Fi gur e A-1) i s a l ow-metal l i c, bl ast AP mi ne. I t has a pl asti c
body and an i ntegral pl asti c fuse wi th a steel fi ri ng pi n.
CHARACTERISTICS
Korea Only: The M14 is employed in tactical and nuisance
minefields.
The M14s si ze al l ows for empl oyment i n l arge numbers, and rapi d
conceal ment i s possi bl e.
The M14 i s buri ed to prevent the target from knocki ng i t over.
SECTION I. ANTIPERSONNEL MINES
Figure A-1. M14 AP mine
Main Charge Diameter Height Weight No Mines per Box Weight per Box
Tetryl, 28.4 g 56 mm 40 mm 99.4 g (fused) 90 19.8 kg
Indicating
arrow
Pull cord
Safety clip
40 mm
56 mm
Carrying cord
Pressure plate
Belleville
spring
Tetryl
charge
Fuse body
Mine body
Detonator holder
Detonator
Firing pin
FM 20-32
The M14 i s not desi gned to ki l l but to penetr ate a boot or a foot.
The M14 i s di ffi cul t to detect because of pl asti c constructi on.
The M14 requi res an operati ng force of 11.5 to 13.5 ki l ograms to
acti vate.
INSTALLATION
I nspect the mi ne.
Do not use the mi ne i f i t i s dented, cracked, or damaged.
Use the M22 wrench (Fi gure A-2) to remove the shi ppi ng pl ug
from the detonator wel l .
I nspect the posi ti on of the fi ri ng pi n. Do not use the mi ne i f the
fi ri ng pi n extends i nto the detonator wel l .
I nspect the detonator wel l for forei gn materi al . I f forei gn materi al
i s pr esent, r emove i t by car eful l y tappi ng the mi ne agai nst the
pal m of your hand. I f you cannot r emove the debr i s, r epl ace the
shi ppi ng pl ug and do not use the mi ne.
Test the pressure pl ate.
Ensure that the arrow i s i n the SAFE posi ti on.
Use the M22 wrench to turn the pressure pl ate from the SAFE
posi ti on to the ARMED posi ti on (Fi gure A-3, page A-4).
Grasp the mi ne i n one hand and remove the safety cl i p wi th the
other hand. Li sten for a cl i ck, i ndi cati ng that the fi r i ng pi n has
dropped. Recheck the fuse wel l (Fi gure A-4, page A-4).
Repl ace the safety cl i p.
WARNING
Emplace and remove the mine while in the
prone position.
Figure A-2. M22 wrench
Use to remove the plug or
the detonator holder.
Use to turn the pressure plate.
FM 20-32
Use the M22 wrench to turn the pressure pl ate back to the SAFE
posi ti on.
Ensure that a metal l i c washer i s attached (gl ued) to the bottom of the
mi ne. I f a washer i s not attached, noti fy the NCOI C and do not use
the mi ne. Appl y si l i cone on the outsi de of the washer to prevent water
damage, and scr ew the detonator i nto the wel l on the bottom of the
mi ne (Fi gu r e A-5). NOTE: Ensure that the gasket is tightly
wedged between the detonator and the washer and that the
washer is properly seated between the gasket and the body of
theminesothat water cannot enter themine.
Di g a hol e to fi t the mi ne.
Figure A-3. M14 mine in ARMED position
Figure A-4. Removal of safety clip
Pressure plate
Carrying cord
Safety clip
Remove
Pull cord
Indicating arrow
FM 20-32
Di g a hol e approxi matel y 10 centi meters i n di ameter and deep
enough (approxi matel y 3.5 centi meters) so that the pressure pl ate
extends above the ground.
I nspect the ground at the bottom of the hol e.
> Ensure that the ground i s hard enough to support the mi ne
when pressure i s appl i ed to the pressure pl ate.
> Pl ace a fl at object i n the bottom of the hol e for the mi ne to rest
on i f the gr ound i s too soft. Al l ow addi ti onal depth for the
objects.
Arm the mi ne wi th an M22 wrench by turni ng the pressure pl ate to
the ARMED posi ti on.
Pl ace the mi ne i n the hol e.
Remove the safety cl i p careful l y, whi l e hol di ng the mi ne body fi rml y i n
the hol e.
Camoufl age the mi ne.
REMOVAL
Di sarm the mi ne.
Cl ear the soi l away from the mi ne careful l y.
Grasp the body of the mi ne fi rml y wi th one hand, and i nsert the
safety cl i p wi th the other hand.
Use the M22 wrench to turn the pressure pl ate to the SAFE
posi ti on.
Remove the mi ne from the hol e.
Turn the mi ne over, and careful l y remove the detonator from the
detonator wel l .
Screw the shi ppi ng pl ug i nto the detonator wel l .
Gi ve the detonator to the NCOI C.
Figure A-5. Bottom view of M14 mine
Detonator
Lot number
Date loaded
(month/year)
FM 20-32
M16
The M16-seri es mi ne (Fi gures A-6, page A-6) i s a boundi ng-fragmentati on AP
mi ne. Once actuated, the mi ne i s pr opel l ed out of the gr ound (to a hei ght of
approxi matel y 1.8 meters) and expl odes. The mi ne consi sts of an M605 fuse, a
pr opel l i ng char ge, and a pr ojecti l e that ar e contai ned i n a sheet-steel case.
The fuse i s screwed i nto the top of the case and extends through the center of
the projecti l e to the bottom of the case, where the propel l i ng charge i s l ocated.
The r emai ni ng space i nsi de the case i s occupi ed by the pr ojecti l e. Ear l i er
ver si ons of the mi ne ar e al so avai l abl e for i ssue. The pr i nci pal di ffer ence
between the ol d and new ver si ons i s the constr ucti on of the detonator s and
boosters.
CHARACTERISTICS
Korea Only: The M16 is employed in protective, tactical, and
nuisanceminefields.
The M16 i s used to defeat di smounted assaul ts and breachi ng
operati ons.
The M16 i s pressure-actuated (3.6 to 9 ki l ograms) or pul l -actuated (1.4
to 4.5 ki l ograms).
Figure A-6. M16A1 AP mine
TNT 103 mm 199 mm 3.5 kg 4 20.25 kg
199 mm
103 mm
Fragmentation
shell (body)
Main charge Main charge
Booster
charge
Detonator
Primer mixture
Delay
element
Propelling charge
FM 20-32
The M16 and M16A1 have a casual ty radi us of 27 meters; the M16A2
has a casual ty r adi us of 30 meter s. The danger r adi us for fr i endl y
forces i s 183 meters for al l M16 mi nes.
INSTALLATION
I nspect the mi ne.
Use the cl osed end of an M25 wrench to remove the shi ppi ng pl ug
from the fuse wel l (Fi gure A-7).
I nspect the fuse wel l for forei gn materi al . I f forei gn materi al i s
pr esent, tur n the mi ne upsi de down and gentl y tap the bottom
wi th your hand to di sl odge the materi al . I f you cannot remove the
debri s, repl ace the shi ppi ng pl ug and do not use the mi ne.
Exami ne the fuse assembl y careful l y for evi dence of damage or
mi ssi ng safety pi ns. Ensur e that the safety pi ns move fr eel y i n
thei r hol es and that the r ubber gasket i s ar ound the fuse base
(Fi gure A-8, page A-8).
WARNING
prone position.
Figure A-7. M16A1 mine and M25 wrench
Shipping plug
M25 wrench
A16A1 mine
FM 20-32
Fuse the mi ne.
Use the open end of the M25 wrench to ti ghten the bushi ng
adapter on the fuse wel l .
Screw the fuse assembl y i nto the fuse wel l by hand and ti ghten
the assembl y wi th the M25 wrench. Ensure that the rubber gasket
i s between the fuse body and the bushi ng adapter . NOTE: For
long-term use, smear a thin layer of silicone grease or
similar lubricant on thefuseand threads.
Pressure i nstal l ati on. Di g the hol e so that onl y the pressure-prong
ti ps are above ground l evel .
Tri p-wi re i nstal l ati on. Di g the hol e so that the rel ease-pi n ri ng i s
above ground l evel .
Empl ace the mi ne.
Pl ace the mi ne i n the hol e and ensure that the safety pi ns remai n
i n pl ace.
Cover the mi ne wi th soi l to the bottom of the rel ease-pi n ri ng.
Press the soi l fi rml y around the si des of the mi ne.
PressureInstallation
Remove the l ocki ng safety pi n (Fi gure A-9). The i nterl ocki ng safety
pi n wi l l come free.
Figure A-8. M605 fuse
WARNING
DO NOT use any fuse that was manufactured
before 1957.
Pressure
prongs
Positive
safety pin
Release-pin
ring
Rubber
gasket
Flash igniter
Locking safety pin
Interlocking safety pin
FM 20-32
Arrange the pul l cord on the posi ti ve safety pi n so that i t wi thdraws
easi l y. Remove the metal col l ar.
Fi ni sh coveri ng the mi ne wi th soi l unti l onl y the pressure prongs are
above ground l evel .
Camoufl age the mi ne, pl ace excess soi l i n sandbags, and remove
sandbags from the area.
Arm the mi ne by removi ng the posi ti ve safety pi n (Fi gure A-9).
Gi ve the safety pi ns and the shi ppi ng pl ug to the NCOI C.
Trip-WireInstallation
I nstal l the tri p wi re (Fi gure A-10).
Figure A-9. Safety pins
Figure A-10. Buried mine with a trip wire
Locking safety pin
Positive safety pin Interlocking safety pin
Enemy side
FM 20-32
Cover the mi ne wi th soi l and press i t fi rml y around the si des of the
mi ne. Leave the rel ease-pi n ri ng and the pressure prongs exposed.
Ti e off tri p wi res, approxi matel y 10 meters from the mi ne. The wi res
shoul d form a wi de V, wi th the openi ng toward the enemy.
Attach tri p wi res to the rel ease-pi n ri ng on the fuse.
Remove the l ocki ng safety pi n. The i nterl ocki ng safety pi n wi l l come
free.
Arrange the pul l cord on the posi ti ve safety pi n so that i t wi thdraws
easi l y.
Arm the mi ne by removi ng the posi ti ve safety pi n.
Gi ve the safety pi ns and the shi ppi ng pl ug to the NCOI C.
REMOVAL
WARNING
Before attempting to disarm and remove the mine,
ensure that the metal collar (Figure A-11) over the
top of the striker on the M605 fuse is in place.
Figure A-11. Metal collar on an M605 fuse
Metal collar
C2, FM 20-32
Di sarm the mi ne.
Cl ear the soi l careful l y from the top of the fuse to the posi ti ve
safety-pi n hol e. When usi ng the M605 fuse, cl ear away al l the soi l
from the fuse area.
I nsert the posi ti ve safety pi n through the posi ti ve safety-pi n hol e.
I nsert the l ocki ng safety pi n through the l ocki ng safety-pi n hol e.
Cut the sl ack tri p wi res that are attached to the rel ease-pi n ri ng.
Check for AHDs.
Hol d the mi ne body fi rml y i n pl ace wi th one hand.
Feel for AHDs wi th the other hand by di ggi ng around the si des of
and underneath the mi ne.
Remove the mi ne.
Remove the mi ne from the hol e. Ensure that the safety pi ns
remai n i n pl ace.
Remove the M605 fuse wi th the M25 wrench.
Repl ace the shi ppi ng pl ug i n the fuse wel l .
AT mi nes are desi gned to i mmobi l i ze or destroy tanks and vehi cl es and thei r
cr ews. They per for m thi s functi on by pr oduci ng an M-Ki l l or a K-Ki l l . An M-
Ki l l i s ach i ev ed by des tr oy i n g on e or mor e of th e v eh i cl e's v i tal dr i v e
components (usual l y br eaki ng the tr ack on a tank), causi ng the tar get to be
i mmobi l i zed. The weapon system and the crew are not destroyed i n an M-Ki l l ;
the weapon system i s i mmobi l e but conti nues to functi on. A K-Ki l l r esul ts
when the weapon system or the crew i s destroyed.
Conventi onal AT mi nes ar e di sti ngui shed by thei r effects and thei r fusi ng
systems. Bl ast AT mi nes, such as the M15 and M19, deri ve thei r effecti veness
through the bl ast generated by thei r detonati on. These usual l y produce an M-
Ki l l , but a K-Ki l l may r esul t. Mi nes such as the M21 use a shaped charge or
an SFF desi gned to penetr ate the under si de of a vehi cl e's ar mor . A K-Ki l l
normal l y resul ts unl ess the mi ne detonates under the vehi cl e's track.
M15
The M15 (Fi gur e A-12, page A-12) i s a bl ast AT mi ne that i s contai ned i n a
round sheet-steel casi ng. The pri mary fuse wel l i s l ocated i n the top center of
the mi ne. There are two secondary fuse wel l sone on the si de and one on the
bottom. The pr i mar y fuse wel l accepts the M603 pr essur e-actuated fuse.
Standard FDs can be used i n the secondary fuse wel l s wi th the M1 acti vator.
The M624 ti l t-rod-actuated fuse can al so be used wi th thi s mi ne.
SECTION II. ANTITANK MINES
C3, FM 20-32
CHARACTERISTICS
The M15 i s empl oyed i n protecti ve, tacti cal , and nui sance mi nefi el ds.
The M15 i s surface-l ai d or buri ed.
The M15 requi res a force of 158 to 338 ki l ograms to detonate the M603
fuse and a force of 1.7 ki l ograms to defl ect the ti l t rod and detonate the
M624 fuse.
The M15 i s desi gned to defeat heavy tanks.
The M15 produces an M-Ki l l upon contact.
Figure A-12. M15 AT mine
Comp B, 9.9 kg 337 mm 125 mm 13.5 kg 1 18 kg
337 mm
125 mm
Arming plug in
SAFE position
Pressure plate
Secondary
fuse well
Secondary
fuse well
Gasket
Secondary
fuse well
Filling hole
Pressure plate Arming plug
Fuse retainer spring
M120 booster
M603 fuse
Charge (Composition B)
NOTE: Inspect secondary fuze wells for corrosion. Do not fit an
M1 activator into a corroded fuze well. In training, return any
mine with a corroded fuze well to the ASP as unserviceable.
FM 20-32
INSTALLATION USING THE M624FUSE
I nspect the mi ne.
Use the M20 wrench (Fi gure A-13) to remove the armi ng pl ug.
debri s, repl ace the armi ng pl ug and do not use the mi ne.
Ensure that the booster retai ner ri ng i s seated i n the fuse wel l . I f
the retai ner ri ng i s mi ssi ng, repl ace the mi ne.
I nspect the fuse.
Remove the M624 fuse from the metal shi ppi ng contai ner and
i nspect i t for ser vi ceabi l i ty.
I nspect the pl asti c col l ar of the fuse by l ooki ng down through the
top of the pressure ri ng. I f the safety pi n i s mi ssi ng or i mproperl y
assembl ed, do not use the fuse (Fi gure A-14, page A-14).
Do not use the fuse i f the pl asti c col l ar appears to be cracked.
Fuse the mi ne.
Remove the M624 fuse from i ts fi ber sl eeve.
Remove the end cl osure on the M624 fuse. NOTE: For long-term
emplacement, coat the fuse threads and gasket wi th
silicone grease before removingthe end closure (Figure A-
15, pageA-14).
WARNING
prone position.
Hook end
Tab end
FM 20-32
Screw the fuse hand-ti ght i nto the fuse wel l .
Remove the extensi on rod from i ts packagi ng.
Ti ghten the fuse by i nserti ng the unthreaded end of one extensi on
r od pi ece i nto the hol e on the si de of the fuse. Tur n the fuse a
quarter turn (Fi gure A-16).
Remove the extensi on rod for further use after the fuse i s secure.
NOTE: The M15 AT mine (with the M624 fuse) can be buried or
surface-laid. If surface-laid, it must bestaked in place.
Di g a hol e deep enough so that the top of the pressure pl ate wi l l be
at ground l evel .
Figure A-14. Correct safety-pin configuration
Figure A-15. Greasing the M624 fuse
Safety pin
Safety stop
M624 fuse
Hole for fuse
tightening
End closure
Threads
Gasket
Pressure ring
Safety band
Safety pin
FM 20-32
Di g the si des of the hol e at a 45-degree angl e to prevent vehi cl es
from bri dgi ng the mi ne.
Empl ace the mi ne.
Cover the mi ne wi th 2 centi meters of soi l (Fi gure A-17).
NOTE: The M15AT mine (with the M624fuse) can be used in the tilt-
rod or pressure role. In the tilt-rod role only, assemble all three
pieces of the extension rod (Figure A-18, page A-16) and thread the
extension rod into the threaded pressure ring of the fuse (Figure A-
19, pageA-16).
Figure A-16. Tightening the fuse with the extension rod
Figure A-17. M15 mine in the hole
Holes to
tighten fuse
Safety pin
M624 fuse
Extension-rod
piece
Tighten
clockwise.
Keep debris away
from the tilt rod.
Replaced soil
2 cm
45
o
FM 20-32
Arm the mi ne.
Use your ri ght hand to rai se the safety pi n to the hori zontal
posi ti on, and grasp the safety band and safety stop wi th your l eft
hand. Note the posi ti on of the thumb i n Fi gure A-20.
Remove the safety pi n wi th your ri ght i ndex fi nger, pul l i ng i t to
the ri ght.
Remove the safety stop careful l y whi l e hol di ng the safety band i n
pl ace.
Remove the safety band.
Camoufl age the mi ne wi th twi gs, grass, or other materi al i n the
ar ea. Pl ace mi nes wi th extensi on r ods i n tal l gr ass, i f possi bl e.
Ensure that no pressure i s appl i ed to the ti l t rod or the fuse.
Figure A-18. Extension-rod assembly
Figure A-19. Assembly of the extension rod into the fuse ring
Extension-rod pieces
Threaded end
Extension-rod
assembly
M624 fuse
Pressure ring
Safety pin
M15 mine
FM 20-32
Pl ace excess soi l i n sandbags and remove them from the area.
Gi ve the band, the stop, the pul l -ri ng assembl y, the armi ng pl ug,
and the end cl osure to the NCOI C.
REMOVAL USING THE M624FUSE
Di sarm the mi ne.
Cl ear camoufl age away from the mi ne careful l y.
Assembl e the band, the stop, and the safety-pi n assembl y on the
fuse so that the pressure ri ng i s i mmobi l i zed.
Remove the extensi on rod.
Check for AHDs.
Hol d the mi ne fi rml y i n pl ace wi th one hand, wi thout putti ng
pressure on the fuse.
Remove the mi ne.
Remove the fuse from the mi ne; use the extensi on rod i f necessary.
Repl ace the end cl osure on the fuse.
I nstal l the armi ng pl ug i nto the fuse wel l .
INSTALLATION USING THE M603FUSE
I nspect the mi ne.
Figure A-20. Removal of safety pin
Left hand
Right
hand
Left
hand
Right hand
Extension rod
P
u
ll
Safety pin
Safety stop
Safety band
Pressure ring
FM 20-32
Use the M20 wrench to remove the armi ng pl ug from the mi ne.
debri s, repl ace the armi ng pl ug and do not use the mi ne.
Ensure that the booster retai ner ri ng i s seated i n the fuse wel l . I f
the retai ner ri ng i s mi ssi ng, repl ace the mi ne.
Perform a functi on check wi th the armi ng pl ug.
Turn the setti ng knob to the ARMED posi ti on. Ensure that the
shutter bar moves across the bottom of the armi ng pl ug (Fi gure A-
21)
Turn the setti ng knob to the SAFE posi ti on. Ensure that the
shutter bar moves back acr oss the bottom of the ar mi ng pl ug
(Fi gure A-22). NOTE: If the shutter bar does not go into the
SAFE or ARMED position, notify theNCOIC.
Figure A-21. ARMED position
Figure A-22. SAFE position
Setting knob in
ARMED position
Shutter bar in
ARMED position
Coil
spring
NOTE: A coil spring may not
be present in older models.
Setting knob in
SAFE position
Shutter bar in
SAFE position
FM 20-32
Fuse the mi ne.
Remove the M603 fuse from the metal shi ppi ng contai ner and
i nspect i t for ser vi ceabi l i ty. The gr een end of the detonator must
show i n the bottom of the fuse.
Remove the safety fork; use the hooked end of an M20 wrench i f
necessary (Fi gure A-23).
I nsert the fuse i nto the fuse wel l careful l y unti l i t seats securel y
on top of the booster retai ni ng ri ng.
Perform a cl earance test usi ng the tab end of the M20 wrench
(Fi gure A-24, page A-20).
NOTE: For long-term emplacement, smear a thin layer of silicone
grease or similar lubricant on the arming plug, the threads, and the
gasket.
Ensure that the setti ng knob i s i n the SAFE posi ti on.
Screw the armi ng pl ug i nto the mi ne by hand. Ensure a waterti ght
seal by ti ghteni ng the armi ng pl ug wi th the M20 wrench.
Di g a hol e deep enough so that the top of the pressure pl ate i s
about 3 centi meters bel ow ground l evel .
from bri dgi ng the mi ne (Fi gure A-25, page A-20).
Empl ace the mi ne.
Figure A-23. Safety fork
WARNING
If the fuse pressure plate interferes with the tab end
of the M20 wrench, investigate the cause and notify
the NCOIC. DO NOT arm the mine.
Fuse pressure plate
Safety fork
FM 20-32
Cover the mi ne wi th soi l unti l i t i s l evel wi th the top of the
pressure pl ate.
Use the M20 wrench to arm the mi ne by turni ng the setti ng knob from
the SAFE posi ti on to the ARMED posi ti on.
Cover the mi ne wi th 3 to 5 centi meters of soi l .
Gi ve the safety cl i p to the NCOI C.
REMOVAL USING THE M603FUSE
Di sarm the mi ne.
Cl ear the soi l from the top of the mi ne careful l y.
pressure on the pressure pl ate.
Figure A-24. Clearance test
Figure A-25. M15 mine in the hole
M20 arming wrench
Hook end
Tab end
45
o
45
o
3 cm
FM 20-32
Use the M20 wrench to turn the setti ng knob to the SAFE
posi ti on.
Remove the mi ne.
Use the M20 wrench to turn the armi ng pl ug countercl ockwi se,
and remove the armi ng pl ug.
Remove the M603 fuse from the fuse wel l and repl ace the safety
fork.
I nstal l the armi ng pl ug.
M19
The M19 AT mi ne (Fi gure A-26) i s housed i n a square, pl asti c case and hol ds
9.45 ki l ograms of Composi ti on B (HE charge). I t consi sts of an M606 i ntegral
pr essur e fuse and two secondar y fuse wel l sone i n the si de and one i n the
bottom. The fuse body contai ns a pressure pl ate, a Bel l evi l l e spri ng, a setti ng
knob, a step pl ate, a fi ri ng-pi n assembl y, and a detonator.
Safety clip Setting knob in
SAFE position
Pressure plate
3
3
2
m
m
94 mm
Safety-clip cord
Carrying-cord
handle
Activator-well plug
Pressure plate Step plate
Belleville springs
M606 integral-
pressure fuse
HE charge
Tetryl booster pellet
FM 20-32
CHARACTERISTICS
The M19 i s empl oyed i n tacti cal and nui sance mi nefi el ds.
The M19 i s buri ed or surface-l ai d.
The M19 requi res a force of 157 to 225 ki l ograms to detonate.
Standard FDs may be used wi th the M2 acti vator i n any of the
secondary fuse wel l s of the M19.
INSTALLATION
I nspect the mi ne.
Remove the M606 fuse from the fuse wel l by turni ng i t
countercl ockwi se a quarter turn (Fi gure A-27).
Ensure that the rubber gasket i s on the M606 fuse.
Comp B, 9.45 kg 332 mm 94 mm 12.6 kg 2 32.5 kg
WARNING
prone position.
Figure A-27. Removal of the pressure plate
M606 fuse
Pressure plate
Safety-clip cord
Fuse well
Activator well
Setting knob
Shipping plug
Detonator
well
Detonator-holder
assembly
Bottom of
pressure plate
FM 20-32
Remove any forei gn materi al from the fuse wel l .
Ensure that the setti ng knob i s i n the SAFE posi ti on and that the
safety cl i p i s i n pl ace.
Use the M22 wrench to remove the shi ppi ng pl ug from the
detonator wel l .
I nspect the detonator wel l for forei gn materi al . I f forei gn materi al
i s pr es en t, gen tl y tap the pr es su r e pl ate wi th you r han d to
di sl odge the materi al .
Test the posi ti on of the fi ri ng pi n (Fi gure A-28).
Ensure that the fi ri ng pi n i s at the edge of the wel l when the
setti ng knob i s i n the SAFE posi ti on.
Remove the safety cl i p.
Use the M22 wrench to turn the setti ng knob to the ARMED
posi ti on. Ensure that the fi ri ng pi n i s i n the center of the wel l .
Use the M22 wrench to turn the setti ng knob back to the SAFE
posi ti on. Ensur e that the fi ri ng pi n moves back to the si de of the
wel l . NOTE: If the firing pin is not in the correct position
when the setting knob is in the ARMED or SAFE position,
notify theNCOIC.
Repl ace the safety cl i p.
Use the M22 wrench to screw the M50 detonator i nto the detonator
wel l .
Use the M22 wrench to ti ghten the M606 fuse i nto the fuse wel l .
Di g a hol e deep enough so that the top of the pressure pl ate wi l l be
even wi th or sl i ghtl y bel ow ground l evel .
Figure A-28. Firing pin
Armed
Safe
FM 20-32
from bri dgi ng the mi ne.
Empl ace the mi ne.
Cover the mi ne wi th soi l unti l i t i s l evel wi th the top of the
pressure pl ate.
Arm the mi ne.
Remove the safety cl i p.
Use the M22 wrench to turn the setti ng knob from the SAFE
posi ti on to the ARMED posi ti on.
Cover the mi ne wi th 3 centi meters of soi l .
Gi ve the safety cl i p and the shi ppi ng pl ug to the NCOI C.
REMOVAL
Di sarm the mi ne.
Cl ear the soi l from the top of the mi ne careful l y.
pressure on the pressure pl ate.
Use the M22 wrench to turn the setti ng knob to the SAFE
posi ti on.
Repl ace the safety cl i p on the M606 fuse.
Remove the mi ne.
Use the M22 wrench to remove the M606 fuse by turni ng i t
countercl ockwi se and l i fti ng i t out of the fuse wel l .
Use the M22 wrench to remove the detonator from the detonator
wel l .
Repl ace the shi ppi ng pl ug i n the detonator wel l .
Repl ace the pressure pl ate i n the mi ne.
M21
The M21 AT mi ne (Fi gur e A-29) uti l i zes a di r ect-ener gy war head that i s
desi gned to produce a K-Ki l l . I t i s used i n conjuncti on wi th the M607 fuse. The
M21 pr oduces a K-Ki l l agai nst heavy tanks, unl ess the mi ne i s acti vated
under the track. I t can be buri ed wi th a ti l t rod, or i t can be surface-l ai d wi th
FM 20-32
or wi thout a ti l t r od. I f the M21 i s sur face-l ai d wi th a ti l t r od, i t must be
staked to pr event i t fr om bei ng knocked over and causi ng the warhead to be
di r ected away fr om th e tar get. Th e M21 i s n ot compati bl e wi th an y
mechani cal mi ne-di spensi ng system.
CHARACTERISTICS
The M21 requi res a mi ni mum of 130.5 ki l ograms of pressure to
detonate.
The M21 can be used wi th a ti l t-rod assembl y, requi ri ng 1.7 ki l ograms
of pressure on the extensi on rod to cause a 20-degree defl ecti on.
The M21 i s the onl y conventi onal US AT mi ne wi th a di rect-energy
warhead.
Comp H6, 4.95 kg 230 mm 115 mm 7.8 kg 4 41 kg
511 mm
M607 fuse
115 mm
230 mm
Shipping plug
Black-powder
expelling charge
Concave
steel plate
M42 primer
Carrying
strap
M120 booster
Firing pin
HE
charge
Delay
element
Closing plug
FM 20-32
INSTALLATION
I nspect the mi ne.
Ensure that the cotter pi ns on the fuse pul l -ri ng assembl y and the
fuse-cl osure assembl y are securel y i n pl ace (Fi gure A-30).
I nspect the fuse to ensure that the neck porti on behi nd the ti l e
col l ar i s not cracked.
I nsert the booster.
Use the screwdri ver end of the M26 wrench (Fi gure A-31) to
remove the cl osi ng pl ug from the bottom of the mi ne.
WARNING
prone position.
Figure A-30. M607 fuse
Extension-rod adaptor
Extension rod
Pressure ring
Band
Pull-ring
assembly
Fork
Closure
assembly
Closure-assembly end
Shipping-plug end
Screwdriver
end
FM 20-32
I nspect the booster wel l for forei gn materi al . I f forei gn materi al i s
present, gentl y tap the top of the mi ne wi th your hand to di sl odge
the materi al . I f you cannot r emove the debri s, r epl ace the cl osi ng
pl ug and do not use the mi ne.
I nsert the M120 booster (wi th the washer si de toward the fuse)
i nto the booster wel l .
Repl ace the cl osi ng pl ug wi th the M26 wrench.
Fuse the mi ne.
Remove the shi ppi ng pl ug from the fuse wel l wi th the M26
wrench.
pr esent, gentl y shake the mi ne to di sl odge the mater i al . I f bl ack
powder fal l s out of the fuse wel l or you cannot remove the forei gn
materi al , do not use the mi ne.
Remove the cl osure assembl y from the M607 fuse wi th the M26
wrench. Ensure that the gasket remai ns i n pl ace on the fuse.
Screw the fuse hand-ti ght i nto the fuse wel l .
Di g a hol e deep enough so that the top of the mi ne wi l l be at
ground l evel (Fi gure A-32).
Check the bottom of the hol e to ensure that the ground i s sol i d
enough to support the mi ne. I f necessary, pl ace a fl at object under
the mi ne to provi de a fi rm foundati on. Al l ow addi ti onal depth for
the object.
Empl ace the mi ne.
Cover the mi ne wi th soi l unti l i t i s l evel wi th the top of the mi ne.
Ensure that no soi l fal l s around or under the pl asti c col l ar.
Figure A-32. Buried M21 mine
Ground level
FM 20-32
Press the soi l fi rml y around the si des of the mi ne.
Assembl e the extensi on rod. NOTE: For pressure operation, do
not usetheextension-rod assembly.
Screw the extensi on rod onto the M607 fuse.
Ensure that the extensi on rod i s poi nti ng strai ght up.
Arm the mi ne.
Squeeze the end of the cotter pi n together on the pul l ri ng.
Remove the cotter pi n by hol di ng the fuse fi rml y i n one hand and
pul l i ng the pul l ri ng wi th the other hand.
Remove the band and the stop sl owl y and careful l y from the neck
of the fuse (Fi gure A-33).
Camoufl age the mi ne wi th twi gs, grass, or other materi al i n the
ar ea. Pl ace mi nes wi th extensi on r ods i n tal l gr ass, i f possi bl e.
Ensure that no pressure i s appl i ed to the ti l t rod or the fuse.
Pl ace the excess soi l i n sandbags and remove them from the area.
Figure A-33. Removing the band and the stop
Cotter pin
Pull-ring assembly
Stop
Band
C2, FM 20-32
Gi ve the band, the stop, the pul l ri ng, the shi ppi ng pl ugs, and the
cl osure assembl y to the NCOI C.
REMOVAL
Di sarm the mi ne.
Cl ear the camoufl age away from the mi ne careful l y.
Attach the band and the stop to the fuse.
I nsert the cotter pi n i nto the band and the stop. Spread the ends of
the cotter pi n.
Remove the extensi on rod.
Check for AHDs.
pressure on the fuse.
Remove the mi ne.
Remove the fuse from the mi ne.
I nstal l the cl osure assembl y on the fuse.
I nstal l the shi ppi ng pl ug i nto the fuse wel l of the mi ne.
Remove the cl osi ng pl ug from the bottom of the mi ne.
Remove the booster from the mi ne.
I nstal l the cl osi ng pl ug i nto the booster wel l .
An FD performs the functi on of a mi ne fuse by provi di ng an al ternati ve means
to detonate the mi ne. I t i s normal l y used i n conjuncti on wi th a standard fuse
so that a mi ne wi l l have two separ ate expl osi ve chai ns. The pur pose of the
second fi ri ng chai n i s to prevent the enemy from di sarmi ng or removi ng mi nes
after empl acement. When used for thi s purpose, the FD i s cal l ed an AHD and
i t i s desi gned to functi on by detonati ng the attached mi ne or another expl osi ve
char ge near by i f unauthor i zed per sonnel attempt to r emove or tamper wi th
the mi ne. NOTE: US forces will not employ AHDson AP mines. Both the
M19 and the M15 have two secondar y fuse wel l s for attachi ng an FD and an
acti vator.
Th er e a r e t wo s t a n d a r d U S FDs M5 p r es s u r e r el ea s e a n d M142
mul ti pur pose. They uti l i ze a spr i ng-l oaded str i ker and a standar d base and
are desi gned to functi on i n one or more of the fol l owi ng modes:
SECTION III. FIRING DEVICES AND ACTIVATORS
C2, FM 20-32
Pressure.
Pressure rel ease.
Tensi on.
Tensi on rel ease.
M5PRESSURE-RELEASE FIRING DEVICE (MOUSETRAP)
The M5 FD (Fi gur e A-34) i s acti vated by the r el ease of pr essur e. Li fti ng or
removi ng a restrai ni ng wei ght rel eases the stri ker to fi re the cap.
CHARACTERISTICS
Case: Metal .
Col or: Ol i ve-drab.
Length: 445 mi l l i meters.
Wi dth: 239 mi l l i meters.
Hei ght: 175 mi l l i meters.
I nternal acti on: Mechani cal wi th hi nged stri ker rel ease.
I ni ti ati ng acti on: Removal of restrai ni ng wei ght, 2.25 ki l ograms or
more.
Accessori es: Pressure board.
Safeti es: Safety pi n and hol e for i nterceptor pi n.
Packagi ng: Four compl ete FDs and four pl ywood pressure boards are
packaged i n a paper carton, fi ve car tons are packaged i n a fi berboard
box, and 10 fi berboard boxes are shi pped i n a wooden box.
Figure A-34. M5 FD
Interceptor or
improvised positive
safety-pin hole
Locking
safety pin
Protective cap
(always remove)
Standard
base
Firing pin
Release
plate
Activator
Gasket
Cap
Standard base
Locking
safety pin
Interceptor pin
(thin wire)
Pressure base
M5 pressure-
release FD
FM 20-32
INSTALLATION
Di g a hol e deep enough to bury the mi ne on a fi rm foundati on. The
pressure pl ate shoul d be sl i ghtl y above ground l evel .
Remove the protecti ve cap from the standard base. Assembl e the FD.
Use a coat hanger as a posi ti ve safety pi n. Pl ace the mi ne i n the hol e.
Leave enough room to remove the pi ns.
Bury and camoufl age the mi ne.
Arm the mi ne.
Remove the l ocki ng safety pi n (Fi gure A-35).
Remove the posi ti ve safety pi n (i nterceptor pi n). NOTE: If the
positive safety pin is difficult to remove or if you hear a click
when removing the locking safety pin, carefully remove the
mineand replacetheFD.
REMOVAL
Uncover the mi ne careful l y and i nspect i t for tamperi ng. Locate and
careful l y uncover the FD.
I nsert the posi ti ve safety pi n i nto the i nterceptor hol e, and then i nsert
the l ocki ng safety pi n i nto the safety-pi n hol e.
WARNING
Ensure that the mine and the FD are resting on
a firm foundation before removing the pins.
Figure A-35. Arming the M15
WARNING
DO NOT release the pressure being applied
to the device.
Positive safety pin in
interceptor hole (remove last)
Locking safety pin
(remove first)
FM 20-32
Di sarm and remove the mi ne. Recover the FD.
M142MULTIPURPOSE FIRING DEVICE
The M142 FD (Fi gur e A-36) can be desi gned to functi on i n the fol l owi ng
modes:
Pressure (11 ki l ograms or more).
Pressure rel ease (between 2 and 67 ki l ograms).
Tensi on (3 ki l ograms or more).
Tensi on rel ease.
Al though pr i mar i l y i ntended for booby-tr ap appl i cati ons, the M142 can be
r eadi l y adapted as an AHD. The M142 comes wi th a coupl i ng devi ce and a
pri mer that accepts a standard nonel ectr i c bl asti ng cap. The i ni ti ati ng acti on
sets off an expl osi ve chai n that passes fr om the FD and the pr i mer to the
bl asti ng cap, and then vi a the detonati ng cor d to the mai n charge. However ,
the coupl i ng devi ce wi th the pri mer wi l l not i ni ti ate the detonati ng cord al one
Figure A-36. M142 FD
Spool or trip wire
Instruction sheet
Fastening devices
Tension-release
device
FD
Square-head
safety pin
Round-head
safety pin
Positive safety
(remove last)
Explosive
coupler
Shipping
container
C2, FM 20-32
wi thout a bl asti ng cap attached, and i t i s not adaptabl e to any acti vator or
secondary fuse wel l . When the M142 i s used as an AHD, the coupl i ng devi ce i s
removed and an M1 or M2 standard base i s used.
CHARACTERISTICS
Case: Pl asti c.
Col or: Ol i ve-drab.
Di ameter: 190.5 mi l l i meters.
Length: 571.5 mi l l i meters.
I nternal acti on: Spri ng-dri ver stri ker.
Safeti es: Posi ti ve safety pi n, square-head pi vot pi n, round-head pi vot
pi n, and al ternati ve safety-pi n hol e.
Accessori es: Nai l and screw fasteners, coupl i ng assembl y, tensi on-
rel ease attachment, 15-meter spool of tri p wi re, and vi nyl i nstructi on
sheet.
Packagi ng: Round, metal can contai ni ng FD wi th accessori es.
ARMING AND DISARMING
Ar mi n g an d di sar mi n g pr ocedu r es var y bas ed on the acti vati on mode.
Detai l ed i nstr ucti ons are pr i nted on a weather pr oof, vi nyl sheet i ncl uded i n
each FD package.
M1AND M2ACTIVATORS
When FDs are empl oyed wi th M15 and M19 AT mi nes, they requi re the use of
an M1 or M2 acti vator.
Acti vators are essenti al l y detonator boosters that are desi gned to magni fy the
expl osi ve for ce gener ated by an FD wi th a standar d base and tr ansfer the
for ce to the mai n char ge. Acti vator s may be used wi th ei ther type of FD to
suppl y an AT mi ne wi th a secondar y fuse for anti handl i ng purposes. The M1
acti vator i s used wi th the M15 ATmi ne, and the M2 acti vator i s used wi th the
M19 AT mi ne. The acti vator al so per for ms the functi on of an adapter for
attachi ng the FD to the mi ne. One end of the acti vator i s threaded external l y
for i nser ti on i n the secondar y wel l of the mi ne; the other end i s thr eaded
i nternal l y to recei ve the standard base coupl i ng of the FD.
The M1 acti vator (Fi gure A-37, page A-34) i s 54 mi l l i meters l ong (wi th cap), i s
made of ol i ve-dr ab pl asti c, contai ns a detonator , and has a thr eaded cl osi ng
pl ug and a gasket. I t has a cyl i ndri cal , unthreaded cap that i s cemented to the
opposi te end of the body and contai ns a tetr yl booster char ge. The thr eaded
end, whi ch screws i nto the mi ne, i s 25 mi l l i meters i n di ameter.
The M2 acti vator i s si mi l ar to the M1 except that i t contai ns an HE pel l et, and
i ts overal l l ength, wi th cap, i s 53 mi l l i meters.
C1,
FM 20-32
Figure A-37. M1 activator
Tetryl cup
Well for standard base
Gasket
Cap
Plastic body
Controls and Components of Special-Purpose Munitions B-1
Appendix B
Controls and Components of
Special-Purpose Munitions
Thi s appendi x pr ovi des char acter i sti cs and detai l ed descr i pti ons of US
speci al -pur pose muni ti ons. The use of these muni ti ons i s outl i ned i n
Chapter 4.
SELECTABLE LIGHTWEIGHT ATTACK MUNITION
The SLAM i s a mul ti pur pose muni ti on wi th anti di sturbance and anti tamper
featur es. Ther e ar e two model s of the SLAMone i s sel f-neutr al i zi ng (M2)
and the other i s sel f-destructi ng (M4). The M2 i s sol i d green and has no l abel s,
brands, or other di sti ngui shi ng marks. The M4 i s green wi th a bl ack warhead
(EFP) face.
Empl oyment methods for the SLAM are outl i ned i n Chapter 4.
Fi gur e B-1 descri bes and i l l ustrates the major components of the SLAM.
Component Description
Mounting holes (1)
The mounting holes are used to secure the carrying strap or the mounting wire to the
SLAM when attaching the SLAM to trees and so forth.
Bore sights (2)
Two bore sights and an omega sight are located on the top of the SLAM and are used to
aim the SLAM at targets.
Selector switch (3)
The selector switch is used to select operating modes and times. It has eight detent
positions. The switch is against a stop (in the shipping position), which is the only switch
position that allows the SLAM to fit in the reusable environmental protective pack.
Turning clockwise, there are three positions for selecting the operating time (4, 10, and
24 hours). Setting any of these positions will select an internal sensor mode of
operation, which is a magnetic sensor for mine mode and a passive infrared sensor for
side-attack mode. These three positions will cause the SLAM to self-destruct (M4) or
self-neutralize (M2) at the end of the selected operating time. Continuing clockwise, the
last four positions select an internal timer, which sets the minutes until demolition. These
positions are 15, 30, 45, and 60 minutes.
Activation-lever
shear pin (4)
There is a shear pin mounted across the SLAMs lever slot. If the shear pin is sheared,
thereby breaking the seal, the lever may have been pulled and the SLAM may be an
electronic dud. If the shear pin is broken, it should only be used in the command-
detonation mode.
Safety pin (7)
The safety pin slides from the body and starts the SLAMs timing. It is pried from its latch
with the tip of the lever. Once the safety pin is pulled, it cannot be reinserted.
Figure B-1. SLAM components
C2
C2, FM 20-32
B-2 Controls and Components of Special-Purpose Munitions
M93HORNET
The M93 Hornet i s a l i ghtwei ght (35 pounds) AT/anti vehi cul ar muni ti on that
one per son can car r y an d empl oy. I t i s a one-ti me use, non r ecover abl e
muni ti on that i s capabl e of destr oyi ng vehi cl es usi ng sound and moti on as
detecti on methods. The Hor net wi l l automati cal l y sear ch, detect, r ecogni ze,
and engage movi ng targets, usi ng top attack at a maxi mum standoff di stance
of 100 meters. I t i s empl oyed by uni ts equi pped wi th an M71 RCU. The RCU i s
a hand-hel d encodi ng uni t that i nter faces wi th the Hor net when the r emote
mode i s sel ected at the ti me of empl oyment. After encodi ng, the RCU can be
u s ed to a r m th e H or n et, r es et SD ti mes , a n d des tr u ct th e H or n et.
Empl oyment methods of the Hornet are outl i ned i n Chapter 4.
Fi gur e B-2 descr i bes and i l l ustr ates the major components of the Hor net.
Fi gure B-3, page B-4, descr i bes and i l l ustrates the contr ol s and i ndi cator s of
the Hornet.
Passive infrared
sensor (8) and
cover (9)
The SLAM is equipped with a passive infrared sensor that detects trucks and light
armored vehicles by sensing the change in background temperature as vehicles cross in
front of the SLAM. The sensor is directional and is aligned with the EFP. The sensor is
active when the SLAM is operating with the selector switch set to 4, 10, or 24 hours and
the sensor cover is removed to expose the infrared sensor (such as, during the side-
attack mode). The SLAM will self-destruct (M4) or self-neutralize (M2) if the selected
time expires before it is detonated by vehicle passage.
Blasting-cap well
and plug (10)
The threaded plug seals the blasting-cap well. It is removed to mount a standard military
blasting cap with a priming adapter.
Warhead (11)
The warhead is an EFP that is designed to defeat light armored vehicles. The EFP forms
within the first 5 inches of flight and has an effective range of 25 feet.
Housing assembly
(12)
The housing assembly contains the fusing, electronics, and S&A components. It also
provides a structural interface for the warhead, the sights, the activation lever, the
passive infrared sensor, the selector switch, and the safety pin.
Figure B-1. SLAM components (continued)
5
6
7
6
5
7
8
10
9
12
4
3
2
1
1
11
C2, FM 20-32
Support legs (1) Support legs are used to stabilize the Hornet when it is deployed.
Active battery-
pack cover (2)
The active battery-pack cover provides a seal to protect and secure the active battery
pack. The latch is lifted up to remove the cover, the active battery pack is installed, and
the cover is then reinstalled and latched down. A line secures the battery-pack cover to
the control panel of the munition.
SD switch (3)
The SD switch is a six-position rotary switch that is used to select the SD time and
unlock the arm control switch. The SD switch is also used to unlock the arming lever.
This is done by rotating the switch to the setting U. A red lock element is extended 1/8
inch from the side of the munition when the SD switch is in the unlock position. The SD
time is preset to Setting 1 when the Hornet is shipped. SD times are as follows:
Setting Time
1 4 hours
2 48 hours
3 5 days
4 15 days
5 30 days
Arm control
switch (4)
The arm control switch consists of an arming lever interlocked with the SD switch and
the S&H band assembly to prevent inadvertent actuation. Until the S&H band assembly
is removed and the SD switch is placed in the unlock position, the arming lever cannot
be moved to the arm position. An internal lock secures the arming lever in the arm
position.
Microphones (5)
When the geophone seismic sensor detects a potential target, usually at ranges up to
600 meters, it alerts the munition to start listening with the three microphones that
extend from the munition body. They track the two loudest noise sources that are heard.
Antenna (6) The antenna provides a means for the Hornet to receive M71 RCU commands.
Capture screws
(7)
These are four flat-head screws that secure the bottom plate to the munition body. They
are removed along with the bottom plate to access the battery compartment.
Bottom plate (8)
The bottom plate provides a seal to protect and secure the battery compartment and
connect the batteries once they are installed.
D-cell batteries
(9)
The battery compartment houses four D-cell batteries. A drawing on the inside of each
battery tube shows battery orientation.
Dowel pin (10)
The dowel pin ensures that the bottom plate is in the correct orientation to properly
connect the batteries.
Figure B-2. Hornet components
C2, FM 20-32
B-4 Controls and Components of Special-Purpose Munitions
Magnetic
coupling device
(MCD) (1)
This device is used as part of the RCU interface. The RCU interface consists of the
MCD and keyed tabs. In the remote arming mode, the RCU is placed on top of the MCD
and minefield code data is transferred to the munition. Upon successful encoding, the
status light begins to flash.
Target switch (2)
The target switch is a toggle switch used to select the type of target engagement. This
gives the operator the choice between detecting and destroying only heavy armored
vehicles or all vehicles.
Manual select
switch (3)
The manual select switch is a push-button switch, protected by a plastic cover that must
be removed to access the switch. Successful activation of the switch will cause the
status light to flash. This switch is used to allow the operator to employ the Hornet
without the RCU.
Status light (4)
The status light is a visual indicator for the operator during the munition setup. It is a
green light-emitting diode (LED) that indicates a self-test was successfully performed or
an operating-mode selection was successfully selected.
SD switch (5) See Figure B-2, page B-3.
Arming lever (6) See Figure B-2.
Active battery-
pack cover (7)
See Figure B-2.
Figure B-3. Hornet controls and indicators
Figure B-2. Hornet components (continued)
4
6
3
2
1
5
8
7
10
9
C2, FM 20-32
Figure B-3. Hornet controls and indicators (continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Threat Mine/Countermine Operations C-1
Appendix C
Threat Mine/Countermine Operations
Thi s appendi x i s i ntended to compl ement the i nfor mati on pr esented i n
other manual s on thr eat obstacl e tacti cs. I t appl i es to most thr eat armi es
and thei r sur r ogates. Commander s shoul d use thi s i nfor mati on to gi ve
added r eal i sm to uncl assi fi ed tr ai ni ng, al though obstacl e empl oyment
nor ms can change wi th METT-TC factor s for a gi ven AO. Ther efor e,
pr eoper ati onal tr ai ni ng on templ ati ng, i ntel l i gence, r econnai ssance, and
r educti on pr ocedur es must be based on the best i nfor mati on avai l abl e
before depl oyment.
Appendi x G contai ns a compi l ati on of counter mi ne data.
MINE OPERATIONS
Thr eat for mati ons contai n consi der abl e or gani c mi nefi el d empl acement
capabi l i ty. Thr eat r api d-mi ni ng capabi l i ty pr esents a ser i ous chal l enge to
fri endl y maneuver.
To l ay mi nes and pl ace obstacl es r api dl y dur i ng offensi ve oper ati ons, thr eat
ar mi es form a speci al team from r egi mental and di vi si onal assets. Thi s team
i s cal l ed a mobileobstacledetachment (MOD). The MOD pl aces AT mi nes on
the most l i kel y avenues for ar mor ed attacks or counter attacks. MODs ar e
posi ti oned on the fl anks of a mar ch for mati on for r api d depl oyment and ar e
normal l y cl ose to AT reserves. Duri ng the march, MODs reconnoi ter avenues
i nto the fl anks and i denti fy the most l i kel y avenues for tank movement. At
secured objecti ves, MODs rei nforce exi sti ng obstacl es and pl ace new obstacl es
to assi st i n the defeat of counterattacks.
Th e combi ned ar ms comman der or der s th e or gani zati on of MODs an d
deter mi nes thei r composi ti on based on the combat si tuati on and avai l abl e
tr oops. Engi neer el ements i n a di vi si on MOD come fr om the di vi si onal
engi neer battal i on and normal l y consi st of three armored tracked mi ne l ayers
known as GMZs (Fi gure C-1, page C-2). Thi s pl atoon-si zed el ement has two or
thr ee tr ucks that car r y mi nes for i mmedi ate r esuppl y. For the r egi mental
MOD, the r egi mental engi neer company nor mal l y pr ovi des a pl atoon-si zed
uni t equi pped wi th two or three GMZs. The pl atoon travel s i n BTR-50/60s and
has 600 AT mi nes.
The GMZ di spenses mi nes at a pr edeter mi ned spaci ng of 5.5 meter s. Mi ne-
l ayi ng hel i copter s al so suppor t the MOD. The HI P and HI ND-D hel i copter s
car r y two or th r ee di s pen s er pods of AP or AT mi n es. Ar ti l l er y -fi r ed
SCATMI NEs can al so suppor t the MOD. Thr ee GMZs can l ay a 1,200-meter,
thr ee-r ow mi nefi el d, contai ni ng 624 mi nes, i n 26 mi nutes. Doctr i nal l y, thi s
mi nefi el d woul d be br oken i nto sever al mi nefi el ds, each 200 to 300 meter s
l ong.
Threat armi es use obstacl es extensi vel y throughout the depth of thei r defense,
and thei r tacti cs are chosen wel l . Shal l ow obstacl es ar e r educed qui ckl y and
easi l y. For exampl e, a shal l ow, one-r ow mi nefi el d i s essenti al l y r educed by
bl owi ng one or two mi nes i n the r ow. A thr eat r api dl y empl aced mi nefi el d
C2
FM 20-32
C-2 Threat Mine/Countermine Operations
consi sts of three or four 200- to 300-meter rows, spaced 20 to 40 meters apart,
wi th mi nes spaced 4 to 6 meter s apar t. As a r ul e, the mi nefi el d cover s the
depth of a footbal l fi el d.
Tabl e C-1 pr ovi des detai l ed i nfor mati on on standar d thr eat AT and AP
mi nefi el ds. Terr ai n and tacti cal si tuati ons di ctate the actual di mensi ons and
di stances of mi nefi el ds.
Figure C-1. GMZ armored tracked mine layer
Table C-1. Normal parameters for threat-style minefields
AT Minefields
Front (situation-dependent) 200 to 300 meters
Depth 40 to 120 meters
Number of rows 3 or 4
Distance between rows 20 to 40 meters
Distance between mines
4 to 6 meters for antitrack mines; 9 to 12 meters for
anithull mines
Outlay, normal
550 to 750 antitrack mines per kilometer; 300 to 400
antihull mines per kilometer
Outlay, increased effect
1,000+ antitrack mines per kilometer; 500+ antihull
mines per kilometer
Probability of destruction
57% for antitrack mines (750 per kilometer); 85% for
antihull mines (400 per kilometer)
AP Minefields
Front (situation-dependent) 30 to 300 meters
Depth 10 to 150 meters
Number of rows 3 or 4
Distance between rows
5+ meters for blast mines; 25 to 50 meters for
fragmentation mines
Distance between mines
1 meter for blast mines; 50 meters (or twice the lethal
radius of fragmentation) for fragmentation mines
Outlay, normal
2,000 to 3,000 HE/blast mines per kilometer; 100 to 300
fragmentation mines per kilometer
Outlay, increased effect 2 to 3 times the normal outlay
Probability of destruction
15 to 20% for HE/blast mines (2,000 per kilometer); 10
to 15% for fragmentation mines (100 per kilometer)
FM 20-32
Fi gur e C-2 shows a standar d r api dl y empl aced mi nefi el d. The thr eat ar my
typi cal l y uses such a mi nefi el d when they ar e i n a hasty defense (offense i s
temporari l y stal l ed).
Fi gures C-3 shows a standard anti track mi nefi el d.
Figure C-2. Threat-style rapidly emplaced minefield
Figure C-3. Threat-style antitrack minefield
20-40 m
5.5 m
2
0
0
-
3
0
0
m
200-300 m
20-40 m
40-80 m
4-6 m
FM 20-32
Fi gure C-4 shows a standard anti hul l mi nefi el d.
Fi gure C-5 shows a standard AP mi nefi el d.
Figure C-4. Threat-style antihull minefield
Figure C-5. Threat-style AP minefield
200-300 m
20-40 m 70-80 m
9-12 m
5+ m
30-300 m
10-150 m
1 m
Blast Mines
Types: PMN, MPMD-GM
Density: 2,000-3,000 per kilometer
Fragmentation Mines
Types: OZM4, POMZ-2M
Density: 100-300 per kilometer
10-150 m
30-300 m
25 m
25-50 m
FM 20-32
Thr eat ar mi es al so empl ace mi xed mi nefi el ds. They ar e not the same as US
mi xed mi nefi el ds. Thr eat ar mi es nor mal l y empl ace thr ee r ows of AT mi nes,
then sever al rows of AP mi nes. AT and AP mi nes are not mi xed i n the same
row.
Threat engi neers use two fundamental dri l l s to empl ace mi nes:
When empl aci ng armed mi nes, the dri l l uses a crew of fi ve sappers.
The fi r st cr ew member (the seni or man and operator) i s i n the mi ne-
l ayer s seat and moni tor s the oper ati on of the mi ne l ayer and the
moti on of the mi nes i n the gui de chute. He al so sets the mi ne spaci ng
and contr ol s the acti ons of the GMZ. The second and thi r d member s
take mi nes out of contai ner s and pl ace them i n the i ntake chute at
i nterval s between the gui de tray's dri ve chai n. The GMZ dri ver steers
the vehi cl e al ong the i ndi cated route at the establ i shed speed.
When empl aci ng unarmed mi nes, two or three addi ti onal sappers are
assi gned to ar m the mi nes. After empl aci ng the mi nes, one sapper
tr ai l s the mi ne l ayer, mar ks empl aced mi nes wi th pennants, and
par ti al l y camoufl ages the mi nes. The r emai ni ng sapper (s) then ar m
the mi nes.
Speci al precauti ons are taken when empl aci ng AP mi nefi el ds. Threat doctri ne
onl y al l ows PMN mi nes to be surface-l ai d from mi ne l ayers. POMZ-2M mi nes
ar e empl aced wi th the tr uck-and-tr ay techni que. Extr a effor t i s r equi r ed to
assembl e, empl ace, and depl oy the tri p wi re and to camoufl age the POMZ-2M
mi ne.
Usi ng three GMZs, a threat MOD can empl ace 1,200 meters of a three-row AT,
surface-l ai d mi nefi el d, contai ni ng 624 AT mi nes, i n 26 mi nutes. Thi s does not
i ncl ude the 12- to 15-mi nute rel oad and travel ti mes. Travel and rel oad ti mes
i ncrease duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty.
Threat forces can al so have ground-empl aced SCATMI NE capabi l i ty. One such
system i s the UMZ SCATMI NE system (Fi gur e C-6, page C-6). Ther e ar e
three UMZ truck-mounted SCATMI NE systems i n each combat regi ment. The
UMZ consi sts of si x fi r i ng modul es mounted on the back of a Zi l -131 tr uck.
Each modul e has 30 fi r i ng tubes, for a total of 180 fi r i ng tubes per system.
Dependi ng on the type of mi nefi el d desi r ed, the UMZ can l ay 180 to 11,520
mi nes wi thout rel oadi ng. The UMZ can l aunch an AT or AP mi nefi el d 30 to 60
meter s from the vehi cl e whi l e the tr uck i s dri vi ng 10 to 40 kph. I t takes two
men 1 to 2 h ou r s to r el oad th e UMZ. On e UMZ can l ay a th r ee-r ow
mi nefi el d, 150 to 1,500 meter s l ong, dependi ng on the type of mi ne that i s
used.
UMZ vehi cl es are usual l y depl oyed together as a mobi l e obstacl e/mi ne-l ayi ng
detachment. The UMZ i s used to l ay mi nefi el ds that protect subuni t posi ti ons
and fl anks and the boundar i es between subuni ts. UMZ-l ai d mi nefi el ds al so
cover fi r i ng l i nes and gaps i n combat for mati ons. The UMZ can qui ckl y cl ose
gaps i n exi sti ng mi nefi el ds and i ncr ease the densi ty of mi nes on ar mor
avenues of approach.
For han d-empl aced SCATMI NEs, ther e i s a man -por tabl e SCATMI NE
di spenser. The PKM wei ghs 2.63 ki l ogr ams (wi thout the mi ne cani ster ) and
consi sts of a si ngl e l aunch tube wi th a base mount, a bl asti ng machi ne, and a
r eel of el ectr i c i gni ti on wi r e. The oper ator l oads a pr opel l i ng char ge and a
mi ne cani ster i nto the l aunch tube and mounts the tube on the edge of a
tr ench or fi r i ng par apet. He then ai ms the tube, connects the i gni ti on wi re to
FM 20-32
the tube, and moves to a safe di stance. At an i ni ti ati ng poi nt, the oper ator
connects the i gni ti on wi r e to the bl asti ng machi ne and i ni ti ates the system.
The PKM pr opel s the cani ster 30 to 100 meter s, dependi ng on the type of
mi ne. I t l ays an AP mi nefi el d that i s 10 by 20 meters (POM-1S mi ne cani ster),
10 by 40 meter s (POM-2S mi ne cani ster ), or 20 by 10 meter s (PFM-1S mi ne
cani ster). I t takes a trai ned operator 5 mi nutes to set up the PKM and create a
mi nefi el d. The PKM can al so be used to l aunch the PTM-1S and PTM-3 AT
mi ne cani sters.
Thr eat for ces use the PKM to l ay mi nefi el ds that pr otect subuni t posi ti ons
and fl anks and the boundar i es between subuni ts. PKM-l ai d mi nefi el ds al so
cover fi r i ng l i nes and gaps i n combat for mati ons. The PKM can qui ckl y cl ose
br eaches i n exi sti ng mi nefi el ds and i ncr ease the densi ty of mi nes on ar mor
avenues of approach.
The type and compl exi ty of an obstacl e depends on the i nstal l i ng uni t.
Man eu v er an d ar ti l l er y s ol di er s u s u al l y i n s tal l s i mpl e s i n gl e-s y s tem
mi nefi el ds that ar e pr otecti ve i n natur e. Engi neer sol di er s i nstal l compl ex
obstacl es that can i ncl ude AHDs. Engi neer obstacl e pl acement i s usual l y
equi pment-i ntensi ve. Threat engi neer effort general l y concentrates on tacti cal
obstacl es unl ess maneuver sol di er s ar e unabl e to empl oy the necessar y
pr otecti v e obs tacl es. Th r eat u n i ts con ti n u e to i mpr ov e th e obs tacl es,
suppor ti ng thei r posi ti ons by mar k i ng the fr i endl y si de of the obstacl es,
buryi ng mi nes, and addi ng AHDs.
CHEMICAL MINES
Chemi cal l and mi nes are AP mi nes wi th command- or target-detonated fuses,
and they ar e fi l l ed wi th a per si stent chemi cal (ner ve or bl i ster ) agent. US
pol i cy pr ohi bi ts thei r use by US per sonnel . However, thi s does not pr ecl ude
thei r use by other countr i es, and US for ces may encounter them dur i ng
oper ati ons. When used, they ar e nor mal l y used i n defense and r etr ogr ade
operati ons. They are mi xed wi th HE mi nes to form a HE chemi cal mi nefi el d.
Chemi cal mi nes are nor mal l y encountered i n tacti cal or nui sance mi nefi el ds,
and some countri es use them i n protecti ve mi nefi el ds. When an i ntegrated HE
chemi cal mi nefi el d i s l ai d, i t serves the fol l owi ng purposes:
Chemi cal mi nes di scourage the use of expl osi ve, rapi d mi ne-cl eari ng
devi ces because they create a chemi cal hazard i n the area.
Figure C-6. UMZ SCATMINE system
FM 20-32
HE mi nes reduce the speed of enemy forces crossi ng the mi nefi el d.
Speed i s fur ther r educed by for ci ng the enemy to use pr otecti ve
cl othi ng and masks.
Chemi cal mi nes wi l l usual l y be added to exi sti ng HE mi nefi el ds by l ayi ng
addi ti onal str i ps of chemi cal mi nes i n a r andom patter n or by addi ng HE
chemi cal stri ps or rows to the front or rear of exi sti ng fi el ds (Fi gure C-7).
No par ti cul ar br anch i s r esponsi bl e for cl ear i ng chemi cal mi nes. Pl anni ng
chemi cal counter mi ne oper ati ons i s a br i gade-l evel r esponsi bi l i ty. When
r educi ng chemi cal mi nes, consi der pr evai l i ng and expected wi nd condi ti ons.
Commander s must ensur e that fr i endl y tr oops ar e pr otected when chemi cal
agents ar e r el eased. The r el ease of chemi cal agents occur s as a r esul t of
enemy fi r e or fr i endl y br eachi ng attempts. Contact-actuated chemi cal mi nes
are not l i kel y to create a major downwi nd hazard because onl y si ngl e mi nes or
smal l groups may be set off at one ti me.
COUNTERMINE OPERATIONS
I n offensi ve oper ati ons, thr eat engi neer s cl ear l anes through obstacl es when
they cannot be bypassed. Al though cl eari ng obstacl es appl i es to the march and
the defense, the most cr i ti cal per for mance of thi s task occur s dur i ng the
attack. Engi neers can be requi red to cl ear mi nes del i vered by ai r, arti l l ery, and
r ock ets wel l ahead of NATO's for war d edge. They must br each obstacl es
contai ned wi thi n NATO strongpoi nts. Threat forces must al so cl ear thei r own
mi nefi el ds when maki ng the transi ti on from defense to offense. I n the offense,
thr eat for ces br each or bypass remotel y del i ver ed mi nefi el ds i n thei r for m-up
ar eas or r outes of movement to the attack l i ne. They al so br each obstacl es
al ong the forward edge of the battl e area and deep wi thi n NATO defenses.
Al though cl ear i ng passages thr ough obstacl es i s a pr i mar y task for thr eat
engi neer s, any maneuver el ement may encounter mi nes. Engi neer s may not
be abl e to respond to every encounter, so maneuver troops are al so requi red to
breach through remotel y empl aced obstacl es.
ORGANIZATION
A movement support detachment (MSD) supports the movement of maneuver
for ces. I t i s task-or gani zed fr om di vi si onal or regi mental engi neer assets and
Figure C-7. Chemical-mine employment
Chemical mines
Regular mine
clusters
FM 20-32
can be pl atoon- to company-si ze. The MSD i s equi pped wi th route- and mi ne-
cl eari ng vehi cl es and devi ces. Dependi ng on the mi ssi on (whi ch comes di rectl y
fr om the combi ned ar ms commander or the chi ef of engi neer ser vi ces), an
MSD i s capabl e of fi l l i ng cr ater s, cl ear i ng mi nefi el ds, pr epar i ng bypasses
around major obstructi ons, and i denti fyi ng NBC-contami nated areas.
The di vi si onal engi neer battal i on can for m two or thr ee MSDs. Dur i ng
mar ches, MSDs tr avel i n advance of the mai n body and cl ear obstr ucti ons
r epor ted by di vi si on r econnai ssance el ements. When they ar e depl oyed on
mai n r outes, they ar e under the pr otecti on of an advance guar d or for war d
secur i ty el ement. When depl oyed on other r outes, the l eadi ng r egi ments
pr ovi de MSDs fr om or gani c engi neer assets. An MSD at thi s l evel mi ght
consi st of an engi neer pl atoon, wi th one or two dozer s and up to three tanks
fi tted wi th dozer bl ades. MSDs can be pr otected by a pl atoon of i nfantr y or
tanks and ar e usual l y accompani ed by chemi cal -r econnai ssance per sonnel .
They can detect, mar k, and br each hasty mi nefi el ds that ar e not pr oper l y
cover ed by fi r e. I f MSDs encounter pr oper l y defended mi nefi el ds, thei r
cl ear i ng capabi l i ti es are l i mi ted.
Each battal i on for ms an obstacl e-cl ear i ng gr oup to cr eate gaps i n expl osi ve
and nonexpl osi ve obstacl es. Nor mal l y a par t of a battal i on-l evel MSD, the
gr oup fol l ows fi r st-echel on compani es i n APCs and cr eates gaps for those
for ces. These uni ts may possess BAT-M vehi cl es wi th BTU bul l dozer bl ades
(Fi gure C-8) or KMT-seri es mi ne pl ows (Fi gure C-9).
Figure C-8. BAT-M with BTU bulldozer blade
Figure C-9. KMT-4 plow
FM 20-32
An obstacl e-cl eari ng detachment i s cr eated when mor e r esour ces ar e needed
to cl ear obstacl es and debri s. Thi s usual l y occur s i n urban envi ronments and
under condi ti ons of massi ve destructi on. An obstacl e-cl ear i ng detachment i s
si mi l ar to an MSD, but i ts sol e mi ssi on i s to cl ear debr i s. Li ke an MSD, i ts
composi ti on depends on the mi ssi on scope, the mi ssi on objecti ve, and the
tempo of the offensi ve.
The di vi si onal engi neer battal i on of the motor i zed r i fl e or tank di vi si on has a
sapper company to cl ear obstacl es. The company commander r ecei ves a
mi ssi on to cl ear mi nefi el ds. He then deter mi nes the exact l ocati on of the
obs tacl e, as cer tai n s th e as s ets to dev ote to th e tas k , an d pl an s th e
methodol ogy for success. Teams may be cr eated to manual l y br each l anes
usi ng probes, I MP portabl e mi ne detectors (Fi gure C-10), and shovel s. Larger
tasks may necessi tate the use of vehi cl e-mounted DI M mi ne detectors (Fi gure
C-11), ar mor ed vehi cl e mi ne pl ows and/or r ol l er s (Fi gur e C-12, page C-10),
and expl osi ve l i ne char ges. When necessar y or mor e pr acti cal , mi nes ar e
expl osi vel y destr oyed i n pl ace.
Figure C-10. IMP portable mine detector
Figure C-11. DIM mine detector
FM 20-32
The engi neer company of the motori zed r i fl e or tank regi ment has br eachi ng
equi pment such as KMT-ser i es mi ne pl ows and r ol l er s and BTU bul l dozer
bl ades l ocated i n i ts techni cal pl atoon. Because of l i mi ted assets i n the
techni cal pl atoon, coupl ed wi th the responsi bi l i ty of formi ng i ts own MSD, the
regi ment can recei ve a sapper secti on from the di vi si onal sapper company. An
addi ti onal I MR ar mor ed engi neer tr actor (Fi gur e C-13), BTR-50/60, and
M1979 armored mi ne cl earer (Fi gure C-14) and manual breachi ng equi pment
come wi th the sapper secti on.
Man eu v er u ni ts u su al l y br each r emotel y empl aced obstacl es by u si ng
attached, bui l t-i n br eachi ng equi pment (BTUs and KMTs). I n order to carr y
out thi s task successful l y, al l subuni t commander s must or gani ze constant
r econnai ssance, noti fy subor di nates about mi ned ar eas i n a ti mel y manner,
tr ai n per sonnel on the means and methods for handl i ng r emotel y empl aced
mi nes, and cl ear terr ai n i n a ti mel y manner. They must al so trai n thei r own
teams for i ndependent acti ons when removi ng combat equi pment from mi ned
areas. Pl ows i n the threat army are consi dered maneuver-force assets, and one
pl ow i s assi gned to each tank pl atoon. The BMP has recentl y been equi pped
wi th track-wi dth mi ne pl ows, but the al l ocati on has not been determi ned.
Figure C-12. KMT-5 plow-roller combination
Figure C-13. IMR armored engineer tractor
FM 20-32
EQUIPMENT
Sever al pi eces of equi pment ar e used by thr eat ar mi es to detect and cl ear
mi nes.
BAT-MDozer
The BAT-M dozer (Fi gure C-8, page C-8) i s a modi fi ed arti l l ery tractor wi th a
hydr aul i cal l y oper ated bul l dozer bl ade and cr ane. I t i s someti mes cal l ed a
roader by Russi ans. The BAT-M dozer cl ears obstacl es, fi l l s craters, pr epares
br i dge appr oaches, and per for ms other heavy pi oneer tasks. I t can al so be
confi gured for snowpl owi ng.
The second generati on BAT-M is the BAT-2. The BAT-2 is able to carry an 8-man
engi neer squad and operate i n an NBC envi ronment. I t is repl acing the BAT-M.
KMT-Series Plows and Rollers
KMT-4
The KMT-4 mi ne-cl ear i ng pl ow (Fi gur e C-9, page C-8) was devel oped i n the
1960s to fi t on a T-545/55 tank. I t actual l y consi sts of two pl ows (one mounted
i n front of each track), and each pl ow has fi ve attached teeth. When the pl ow
i s l owered, the teeth di g i nto the ground and r emove mi nes fr om the path of
the tank. A pl ow i s l i ghter than a r ol l er and per mi ts tanks to r etai n thei r
cross-country mobi l i ty. The esti mated cl eari ng speed i s 10 kph, and the depth
of cl earance i s 10 centi meters.
Thr ee pl ows ar e i ssued per tank company (one per pl atoon). However, these
assets are normal l y hel d i n the engi neer company of a tank or MRR.
KMT-5
The KMT-5 mi ne-cl ear i ng pl ow-r ol l er combi nati on (Fi gur e C-12, page C-10)
consi sts of two pl ows and two rol l ers attached to the front of a tank hul l . The
pl ows or the r ol l er s can be used, dependi ng on ter r ai n featur es, the type of
soi l , and the mi ne fuse. Pl ows and rol l ers cannot be used si mul taneousl y. The
rol l ers functi on agai nst pr essur e-fused mi nes. The system can survi ve 5 to 6
ki l ograms of expl osi ves, fi ve or si x ti mes. The KMT-5 al so i ncl udes a l umi nous
l ane-marki ng devi ce for ni ght operati ons.
Figure C-14. M1979 armored mine clearer
FM 20-32
KMT-6
The KMT-6 mi ne-cl eari ng pl ow was i ntroduced wi th the T-64 and T-72 tanks
i n the ear l y 1970s. I t has oper ati ng char acter i sti cs si mi l ar to those of the
KMT-4.
KMT-10
The KMT-10 mi ne-cl ear i ng pl ow i s fi tted to the BMP-2 i nfantr y combat
vehi cl e.
IMP PortableMineDetector
The I MP por tabl e mi ne detector (Fi gur e C-10, page C-9) wei ghs 7 ki l ogr ams
and can detect mi nes bur i ed to a depth of 45 centi meter s. I t has a tubul ar
search head (one transmi tti ng and two recei vi ng coi l s encased i n pl asti c) and a
four-secti on handl e. Power i s fur ni shed by four fl ashl i ght batter i es that
permi t 20 hours of conti nuous operati on. Two tuni ng control s are mounted on
the handl e. The coi l s i n the search head compromi se an i nducti on bri dge and
are i ni ti al l y bal anced for zero coupl i ng. When the head passes over a metal l i c
object, the i nducti on br i dge becomes unbal anced and pr oduces an audi bl e
si gnal i n the headset.
DIM Vehicle-Mounted MineDetector
The DI M vehi cl e-mounted mi ne detector (Fi gure C-11, page C-9) i s pri mari l y
used to cl ear r oads duri ng convoys and road marches. I t sweeps at a speed of
10 kph wi th a 2.2-meter wi dth. I t can detect metal l i c mi nes at a depth of 25
centi meter s. The br akes on the DI M automati cal l y engage when a mi ne i s
detected. Cross-country use of the DI M i s l i mi ted.
IMR Armored Engineer Tractor
The I MR armored engi neer tr actor (Fi gure C-13, page C-10) i s mounted on a
modi fi ed T-54/55 chassi s. The turr et i s r emoved and a hydraul i c crane, whi ch
can be fi tted wi th ei ther a gr ab or an excavator buck et, i s empl aced. An
adjustabl e, hydr aul i cal l y oper ated bl ade i s mounted on the fr ont. The cr ane
operator i s provi ded wi th an armored cupol a. The I MR can operate i n an NBC
envi ronment.
M1979Armored MineClearer
The M1979 armored mi ne cl earer (Fi gure C-14, page C-11) i s mounted on the
chassi s of an amphi bi ous 122-mi l l i meter, 2S1 sel f-propel l ed howi tzer. I t has a
turret-l i ke superstructure that contai ns three rockets on l aunch ramps. These,
al ong wi th the upper part of the superstructure, are hydraul i cal l y el evated for
fi r i ng. The r ocket r ange i s esti mated at 200 to 400 meter s. Each r ocket i s
connected to 170 meter s of mi ne-cl ear i ng hose vi a a towi ng l i ne. The hose i s
fol ded and stowed i n the uncover ed base of the tur r et and connected to the
vehi cl e wi th a cabl e. The cabl e al l ows the vehi cl e crew to r eposi ti on the hose
after l aunchi ng.
Air Volcano D-1
Appendix D
Air Volcano
The ai r Vol cano system pr ovi des a thr ee-di mensi onal capabi l i ty that
al l ows uni ts to empl ace mi nefi el ds i n deep, cl ose, and r ear oper ati ons. I t
pr ovi des US forces wi th the capabi l i ty to empl oy mi nefi el ds r api dl y under
var i ed con di ti ons. The ai r Vol can o can be us ed to empl ace tacti cal
mi nefi el ds; r ei nfor ce exi sti ng obstacl es; cl ose l anes, gaps, and defi l es;
pr otect fl ank s; and deny the enemy use of potenti al ai r-defense si tes.
Vol cano mi nefi el ds ar e i deal for fl ank pr otecti on of advanci ng for ces and
for operati ng i n concert wi th ai r and ground caval ry uni ts on fl ank-guard
or screen mi ssi ons.
COMPONENTS
The ai r Vol cano system (Fi gure D-1) consi sts of an M87-ser i es mi ne cani ster,
an M139 di s pen s er, an d v eh i cl e-s peci fi c mou n ti n g h ar dwar e (UH-60
Bl ackhawks requi re a jetti son ki t).
M87-SERIES MINE CANISTER
The M87-ser i es mi ne cani ster i s the same cani ster used for the gr ound
Vol cano system:
M87. Pr epackaged wi th fi ve AT mi nes, one AP mi ne, and a pr opul si on
devi ce i nsi de a tube housi ng.
M87A1. Prepackaged wi th si x AT mi nes and a propul si on devi ce
i nsi de a tube housi ng.
The mi xture of mi nes i s fi xed and cannot be al tered i n the fi el d. The mi nes i n
each cani ster are el ectri cal l y connected wi th a web that functi ons as a l ateral
Figure D-1. Air Volcano system
FM 20-32
D-2 Air Volcano
di sper si on devi ce as the mi nes exi t the cani ster. Spr i ng fi nger s mounted on
each mi ne prevent the mi ne from comi ng to rest on i ts edge. AT mi nes have a
del ay-arm ti me of 2 mi nutes 30 seconds; AP mi nes have a del ay-arm ti me of 4
mi nutes. Al l cani sters are capabl e of di spensi ng mi nes wi th 4-hour, 48-hour, or
15-day SD ti mes. SD ti mes are sel ected pri or to di spensi ng and do not requi re
a change or modi fi cati on i n the base M87-seri es mi ne cani ster.
M139DISPENSER
The M139 di spenser consi sts of an el ectr oni c DCU and four l auncher r acks;
each r ack h ol ds 40 M87-s er i es mi n e can i s ter s. Th e r ack s pr ov i de th e
str uctur al str ength and the mechani cal suppor t r equi r ed for l aunch and
pr ovi de the el ectr i cal i nter face between the mi ne cani ster s and the DCU.
Mou n ti n g h ar dwa r e for th e U H-60A Bl ack h awk i n cl u des a j etti s on
subassembl y to propel the Vol cano racks and cani sters away from the ai rcraft
i n the event of an emergency.
The oper ator uses the DCU to el ectr i cal l y contr ol the di spensi ng oper ati on
from wi thi n the ai r craft. The DCU pr ovi des control s for the armi ng sequence
and the del i ver y speed sel ecti on, and i t sets mi ne SD ti mes. The DCU al l ows
the oper ator to star t and stop mi ne di spensi ng at anyti me. A counter on the
DCU i ndi cates the number of cani sters remai ni ng on each si de of the ai rcraft.
Mi nes are di spensed from thei r cani sters by an expl osi ve propel l i ng charge, 35
to 70 meter s from the ai rcrafts l i ne of fl i ght. The ai rcraft fl i es at a mi ni mum
al ti tude of 1.5 meter s, at speeds of 20 to 120 knots. I t can del i ver up to 960
mi nes per sorti e.
LIMITATIONS
The total wei ght of the ai r Vol cano system i s 2,886 ki l ograms. An ai rcraft wi l l
be cl ose to i ts maxi mum gross wei ght when i t contai ns the Vol cano system and
a ful l crew. Based on weather and envi ronmental condi ti ons, the ai rcraft may
be r equi r ed to execute the mi ssi on wi thout a ful l fuel l oad, thus r educi ng
enroute ti me.
The fl i ght cr ew cannot oper ate the M60D machi ne gun wi th the ai r Vol cano
system i nstal l ed, and i t takes 3 to 4 hours to i nstal l the ai r Vol cano system on
a UH-60A Bl ackhawk.
EMPLOYMENT
The ai r Vol cano i s the fastest method for empl aci ng l arge tacti cal mi nefi el ds.
When empl oyed by combat avi ati on el ements i n suppor t of maneuver uni ts,
cl ose coordi nati on between avi ati on and ground uni ts ensures that mi nes are
empl aced accuratel y and qui ckl y. Al though pl acement i s not as preci se as i t i s
wi th ground systems, ai r Vol cano mi nefi el ds can be pl aced accuratel y enough
to avoi d the danger s i nher ent i n mi nefi el ds empl aced by ar ti l l er y or j et
ai rcraft.
Ai r Vol cano mi nefi el ds can be empl aced i n fr i endl y and enemy ter r i tor i es.
They shoul d not be pl anned i n ar eas of enemy obser vati on and fi r e, because
the hel i copter i s extr emel y vul nerabl e whi l e fl yi ng at the steady al ti tude, the
speed, and the path requi r ed to empl ace the mi nefi el d. The ai r Vol cano i s the
FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-3
best form of a si tuati onal obstacl e because of i ts shor t empl acement ti me. I ts
empl oyment vari es dependi ng on the type of operati on.
DEEP OPERATIONS
Employment
The ai r Vol cano i s empl oyed i n deep operati ons to
Di srupt enemy formati ons al ong key AAs and choke poi nts.
Fi x enemy formati ons i n EAs to enhance target acqui si ti on by attack
hel i copters, CAS, arti l l ery, or a combi nati on of weapon pl atforms.
Provi de area deni al of possi bl e enemy arti l l ery and ADA si tes that wi l l
affect future fri endl y schemes of maneuver.
AH-64 secur i ty i s essenti al to ai r Vol cano mi ssi ons because the tar get ar ea
must not be i n the enemy for mati ons di rect l i ne of si ght. I t may requi r e two
suppr essi on of enemy ai r defense (SEAD) mi ssi ons to get the ai r Vol cano
across the FLOTto the target l ocati on. Thi s removes the securi ty ai rcraft from
the battl e. Al l ai r Vol cano mi ssi ons requi re pl anni ng, desi gnati on, and control
duri ng the executi on of ai r corri dors (routes).
Aviation Configuration
The ai r Vol cano can be used i n deep operati ons, but i t has di sti nct l i mi tati ons.
The ai r cr aft can mai ntai n a speed of 80 to 90 knots (UH-60A) for 90 to 120
ki l ometer s, dependi ng on the wi nd and the temper atur e (see Tabl e D-1, page
D-4).
The ai r cr aft cannot empl oy the door guns for sel f-defense wi th the Vol cano
sy stem mou n ted. Th e attack ai r cr aft av er ages 100 to 120 k n ots whi l e
tar geti ng enemy for mati ons that ar e 150 to 200 ki l ometer s deep. I n or der for
the ai r Vol cano to go deep, the attack ai r cr aft must sl ow down or speci al
secur i ty/escor t ai r cr aft must be assi gned for pr otecti on. The secur i ty/escor t
can be AH -64s or OH -58D Ki owa War r i or s (KWs ). KWs h av e man y
advantagesthey are not a pri mary ki l l i ng pl atfor m, and they ar e very good
at qui ckl y secur i ng an ar ea. The ai r Vol cano r equi r es one or two secur i ty
ai r cr aft for pr otecti on, and ther e shoul d al so be a backup ai r cr aft for the
mi ssi on.
Fire-Support Coordination
The di vi si on mai n (l i ght for ce) or br i gade mai n (mechani zed for ce) FSE i s
r esponsi bl e for coor di nati ng and executi ng fi r es i n suppor t of ai r Vol cano
mi ssi ons. Upon compl eti on of the tar get meeti ng, the FSE, the assi stant
di vi si on/br i gade engi neer, and the G3/S3 ai r repr esentati ve wi l l coor di nate to
ensur e that the ai r-coor di nati on/taski ng or der wi l l suppor t the mi ssi on and
the pl anned SEAD fi res.
I f th e mi s s i on i s a deep av i ati on attack , th e av i ati on el emen t FSE i s
r esponsi bl e for coor di nati ng thr ough the for war d command post to the
di vi si on/bri gade mai n FSE. I f the forward command post has jumped forward
or has not depl oyed, the avi ati on el ement FSE wi l l coor di nate di r ectl y wi th
the di vi si on/bri gade mai n FSE.
FM 20-32
D-4 Air Volcano
CLOSE OPERATIONS
Employment
The ai r Vol cano i s empl oyed i n cl ose oper ati ons to fi x enemy for mati ons i n
EAs, tur n advanci ng for mati ons i nto desi r abl e ter r ai n that suppor ts the
fr i endl y scheme of maneuver, di sr upt for mati ons enough to sl ow the enemy
down, and bl ock key AAs. Mul ti pl e mi ssi ons may be r equi r ed, dependi ng on
Table D-1. Air Volcano capabilities and limitations
Pressure
Altitude (ft)
Temperature
(
o
C)
Maximum
Weight (lb)
1
Cruise
Speed
(knots/kph)
Fuel Burn
Rate
(lb per hr)
Endurance
(hr + min)
2
Maximum
Range
(nm/km)
3
Planning
Combat
Radius
(nm/km)
4
0
+20 22,000
80/148 965 1 + 57 154/285
60/111 90/166 1,040 1 + 48 160/296
100/182 1,145 1 + 35 158/292
+30 22,000
80/148 975 1 + 56 156/289
59/109 90/166 1,045 1 + 48 160/296
100/182 1,160 1 + 34 156/289
+40 21,600
80/148 995 1 + 53 150/277
58/107
90/166 1,055 1 + 45 156/289
100/182
7
1,175 1 + 33 154/285
2,000
+20 22,000
80/148 960 1 + 58 157/290
60/111 90/166 1,060 1 + 45 157/290
100/182 1,155 1 + 35 158/292
+30
21,000
5
80/148 1,000 1 + 28 117/217
45/83
90/166 1,045 1 + 23 124/229
100/182
7
1,175 1 + 12 120/222
+40
20,000
6
80/148 1,005 1 + 21 28/52
7/13 90/166
7
1,075 1 + 19 29/53
100/182
7
1,150 1 + 16 27/49
NOTE: Based on UH-60A with an aircraft torque factor of 97.5.
1
Maximum weight for deep operations only; no interdiction capability.
2
Endurance includes 20-minute fuel reserve.
3
Does not compensate for winds. This is the maximum range line-of-site distance.
4
The general planning figures used for time-on-target missions; includes compensation for 10-knot winds,
makeup for lost time, and a 5-minute on-station time.
5
1,800 pounds of fuel at takeoff
6
700 pounds of fuel at takeoff
7
Operation at this air speed may be limited to 30 minutes due to target limits.
LIMITATIONS:
There are no modifications to mount the M60D machine gun on the air Volcano aircraft.
Crews cannot use the M60D with the system mounted on an aircraft.
Crews cannot fly the aircraft with full tanks above +30
o
C and 2,000-ft pressure altitude.
Aircraft may require a rolling takeoff and landing, depending on ambient weather conditions.
C2, FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-5
the i ntended effect. The ai r Vol cano can be used to reseed exi sti ng mi nefi el ds
or to cl ose l anes and gaps. The tar get ar ea must be cl ear of fr i endl y for ces
before an ai r Vol cano mi ssi on i s executed.
Use of the ai r Vol cano i n cl ose oper ati ons shoul d be a pr i mar y pl anni ng
consi der ati on. I t can qui ckl y r each the outer edge of the for war d oper ati ng
base where AAs need a mi nefi el d obstacl e. The threat l evel wi l l be l ower, and
the stati on ti me wi l l i ncrease.
Two ai r Vol cano ai r cr aft shoul d be used (one pr i mar y, one backup). The
r equi r ement for secur i ty ai r cr aft depends on METT-TC factor s, but secur i ty
shoul d be used whenever possi bl e.
The for ward command post FSE coor di nates and executes fi r es i n suppor t of
ai r Vol cano mi ssi ons. The FSE, the engi neer l i ai son offi cer, and the G3/S3
r epr esentati ve coor di nate to ensur e that the ai r coor di nati on/taski ng or der
supports the mi ssi on and the pl anned SEAD fi r es. The di vi si on/bri gade mai n
wi l l be avai l abl e to support the forward command post as necessary.
The br i gade/TF FSE i s r esponsi bl e for coor di nati ng thr ough the for war d
command post to the di vi si on/bri gade mai n FSE. I f the forward command post
has jumped, the bri gade/TF FSE coordi nates di rectl y wi th the di vi si on/bri gade
mai n FSE.
REAR OPERATIONS
Employment
The pri mary purposes of the ai r Vol cano i n rear areas i s to protect key terrai n
from possi bl e ai rbor ne/ai r-assaul t for ces and to fi x/di srupt enemy for ces l ong
enough to al l ow the tacti cal combat for ce or r eady-r eser ve for ce ti me to r eact
and meet the changi ng enemy si tuati on.
The l east pr efer r ed empl oyment method i s to del i ver tacti cal mi nefi el ds to
br i gade and cor ps suppor t ar eas. Thi s empl oyment tacti c i s nor mal l y used
when al l other avai l abl e assets have been exhausted. The fl exi bi l i ty of the ai r
Vol cano system makes i t i deal for empl oyment agai nst a mounted Level I I I
threat i n the rear. The target area shoul d be out of the di rect vi ew/fi re of the
threat and on a choke poi nt that al l ows cover for the reacti ng forces.
The ai r Vol cano ai rcraft coul d be empl oyed i ndi vi dual l y or wi th securi ty/escort
ai r cr aft. The use of OH-58D KWs as secur i ty ai r craft al l ows uni ts to devel op
the si tuati on and hel ps pl ace mi nefi el ds i n the pr oper l ocati on to assi st
i nbound attack ai r cr aft or fi r es. I f the ai r Vol cano ai r cr aft i s not pr ovi ded
securi ty ai rcraft, i t i s recommended that ground forces provi de coveri ng fi res.
The di vi si on/bri gade rear FSE coordi nates and executes fi res i n support of ai r
Vol cano mi ssi ons. The FSE, the engi neer l i ai son offi cer, and the G3/S3
r epr esentati ve coor di nate to ensur e that the ai r coor di nati on/taski ng or der
FM 20-32
D-6 Air Volcano
supports the mi ssi on and the pl anned SEAD fi r es. The di vi si on/bri gade mai n
wi l l be avai l abl e to support the di vi si on/bri gade rear as necessary.
The headquar ter s el ement that contr ol s the r ear ar ea coor di nates wi th the
di vi si on/bri gade rear FSE. The di vi si on/bri gade rear FSE coordi nates wi th the
di vi si on/bri gade FSE for fi re support and ai r assets.
MINEFIELD EFFECTS
Turn
A tur n mi nefi el d mani pul ates enemy maneuver i n a desi r ed di r ecti on. I t
forces or enti ces enemy formati ons to move i n a di fferent di recti on rather than
br each the obstacl e. Thi s means the bypass must be easi l y i denti fi ed. Tur n
mi nefi el ds ar e extremel y l ethal , wi th approxi matel y 80 percent probabi l i ty of
mi ne encounter. The typi cal wi dth i s 557 by 320 meters for ai r Vol cano. Fi gure
D-2 shows two turn mi nefi el ds combi ned to create a turn-effect obstacl e group.
I t takes 160 cani ster s (800 AT/160 AP mi nes) to empl ace one tur n mi nefi el d.
One ai r Vol cano ai rcraft can l ay one turn mi nefi el d (see Tabl e D-2).
Block
A bl ock mi nefi el d (Fi gure D-3) i s desi gned to stop an enemy advance al ong a
speci fi c AA or al l ow i t to advance at an extremel y hi gh cost. Bl ock mi nefi el ds
ar e obstacl es wi th i ntensi ve i ntegr ated fi r es. They shoul d be empl oyed i n a
Figure D-2. Turn obstacle
Table D-2. Air Volcano minefield data
Type of
Minefield
Depth (m)
Frontage of
Minefield (m)
Number
of Strips
Canisters per
Strip
Total
Canisters
Minefieldsper
Aircraft
Disrupt 120 278 1
40
(20 each side)
40 4
Fix 120 278 1
40
(20 each side)
40 4
Turn 320 557 1
80
(40 each side)
160 1
Block 320 557 1
80
(40 each side)
160 1
Aircraft line of flight
320 m
320 m
557 m
557 m (1) (2)
(3) (4)
NOTE: Numbers correspond to the aircraft pass.
FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-7
compl ex obstacl e scheme wi th r oad cr ater s or br i dge demol i ti ons enhanci ng
the effecti veness of the mi nefi el d. One ai r Vol cano ai r cr aft can l ay a 557- by
320-meter bl ock mi nefi el d, usi ng al l 160 cani sters (800 AT/160 AP mi nes). The
pr obabi l i ty of mi ne encounter i s mor e than 80 per cent. One Vol cano ai r cr aft
can l ay one bl ock mi nefi el d, maki ng two passes si de by si de (see Tabl e D-2).
Disrupt
A di srupt mi nefi el d (Fi gure D-4) fractures and breaks up enemy formati ons. I t
causes prematur e commi tment of reducti on assets, i nterr upts C
2
, and al ters
ti mi ng. A di srupt mi nefi el d i s not resource- or ti me-i ntensi ve. The probabi l i ty
of mi ne encounter i s approxi matel y 50 percent, and the typi cal wi dth i s 278 by
120 meters. I t takes 40 cani sters (200 AT/40 AP mi nes) to empl ace one di srupt
mi nefi el d. One ai r Vol cano ai r craft can l ay four di srupt mi nefi el ds (see Tabl e
D-2).
Fix
A fi x mi nefi el d (Fi gure D-5) sl ows enemy formati ons wi thi n a speci fi ed EA. I t
gi ves fr i endl y forces ti me to acqui re, target, and destroy enemy formati ons. A
Figure D-3. Block obstacle
Figure D-4. Disrupt obstacle
320 m
557 m
(1) (2)
120 m
278 m
(3)
(2)
(1)
FM 20-32
D-8 Air Volcano
fi x mi nefi el d i s empl oyed i n depth and causes enemy for mati ons to r eact and
breach repeatedl y. The ai r Vol cano fi x mi nefi el d does not l ook i mpenetrabl e to
enemy for mati ons. The pr obabi l i ty of mi ne encounter i s 50 per cent, and the
typi cal si ze i s 278 by 120 meters. I t takes 40 cani sters (200 AT/40 AP mi nes)
to empl ace on e fi x mi n efi el d. One ai r Vol cano ai r cr aft can l ay four fi x
mi nefi el ds (see Tabl e D-2, page D-6).
Linear
I f the thr eat si tuati on al l ows, the ai r cr ew mak es a pass to confi r m the
mi nefi el d end poi nts and the sui tabi l i ty of the ter r ai n. I n a hi gh-thr eat
si tuati on, the ai r cr ew empl aces the mi nefi el d on the fi r st pass. Thi s hasty
mi nefi el d i s l i near i n confi gu r ati on and i s 1,115 by 75 meter s. Al l 160
cani sters are fi red.
PLANNING
Responsibilities
Di vi si on Commander
The di vi si on commander appr oves ai r Vol cano empl oyment and i ntegr ati on
i nto deep, cl ose, and r ear oper ati ons. He i s al so the author i ty for SCATMI NE
empl oyment.
Maneuver Bri gade Commander
When author i ty i s del egated by the di vi si on commander, the maneuver
br i gade comman der i s r es pon s i bl e for empl oy i n g ai r Vol can o i n cl os e
oper ati ons and i n suppor ti ng fol l ow-on mi ssi on s. He i s r esponsi bl e for
approvi ng tar get nomi nati ons to be submi tted to the di vi si on. The maneuver
bri gade commander r ecei ves the ai r Vol cano ai rcraft and i ts crew i n OPCON
status.
Figure D-5. Fix obstacle
120 m
120 m
278 m
278 m
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-9
Avi ati on Bri gade Commander
The avi ati on bri gade commander i s responsi bl e for i ntegrati ng the ai r Vol cano
i n to deep avi ati on attack s and for shapi ng EAs i n th e di vi si on AO. He
executes the ai r Vol cano mi ssi ons i n deep, cl ose, and r ear oper ati ons. The
avi ati on br i gade commander submi ts tar get nomi nati ons to the di vi si on
targeti ng cel l thr ough the avi ati on bri gade engi neer and provi des support for
transporti ng and l oadi ng Vol cano mi nes.
Di vi si on Engi neer
The di vi si on engi neer i s r esponsi bl e for tar get nomi nati ons that suppor t
di vi si on mi ssi ons or objecti ves i n deep operati ons. He
Submi ts the nomi nati ons to the di vi si on targeti ng cel l .
Determi nes mi nefi el d characteri sti cs.
I ncorporates the Vol cano mi nefi el d, DTG of SD ti mes, and safety zones
i nto the di vi si on obstacl e pl an.
Esti mates the requi rements for mi ne cani sters and Cl ass I V/V
suppl i es.
Determi nes the i ntent of the Vol cano mi nefi el d as i t i s i ntegrated i nto
the di vi si on obstacl e pl an.
Di ssemi nates the SCATMI NWARN to adjacent and subordi nate uni ts
before the mi nefi el d i s l ai d and one hour before the SD sequence of the
mi nefi el d i s i ni ti ated.
Bri gade Engi neer
The br i gade engi neer i s r esponsi bl e for tar get nomi nati ons that suppor t
objecti ves wi thi n hi s respecti ve fi ght. He
Submi ts target nomi nati ons to the assi stant di vi si on engi neer.
Synchroni zes ai r Vol cano mi ssi ons i nto bri gade operati ons.
Assi sts the bri gade FSE i n pl anni ng SEAD, CAS, and Apache escort.
Pr ovi des l ogi sti cs esti mates to the bri gade S4 for coordi nati on of
ammuni ti on requi rements.
Posts the operati ons map wi th the mi nefi el ds l ocati on, avi ati on
graphi cs, the safety zone, and the DTG of SD ti mes.
Di ssemi nates the SCATMI NWARN to adjacent and subordi nate uni ts
befor e the mi nefi el d i s l ai d and one hour befor e SD sequence of the
mi nefi el d i s i ni ti ated.
Deputy Fi re-Support Coordi nator
The depu ty FSCOORD r ecommends commandi n g gener al /chi ef of staff
approval for target nomi nati ons devel oped by the di vi si on targeti ng cel l . He i s
responsi bl e for submi tti ng di vi si on-appr oved ai r Vol cano target nomi nati ons
to the G3 ai r for i ncl usi on i n the ai r coordi nati on order. He coordi nates SEAD,
CAS, and i ntel l i gence and el ectroni c warfare for di vi si on-di r ected ai r Vol cano
mi ssi ons. The deputy FSCOORD i s al so responsi bl e for
FM 20-32
D-10 Air Volcano
Targeti ng (i ntel l i gence and asset coordi nati on).
The ai r taski ng order.
The G3 ai r coordi nati on order.
G2 col l ecti on and assessment.
G3 Ai r
The G3 ai r synchr oni zes coor di nati on and deconfl i cti on of di vi si on ai r space
for ai r mi ss i ons, SEAD, an d CAS. When n ecessar y, he submi ts th e ai r
coor di nati on or der to hi gher headquar ter s wi th the di vi si on-appr oved tar get
l i st.
Empl aci ng Uni t/UH-60 Company
The empl aci ng uni t or the desi gnated UH-60 company sets up and l oads the
ai r Vol cano system i n conjuncti on wi th the for war d-ar ea r efuel poi nt. The
Vol cano system i s l oaded on the UH-60 at the desi gnated poi nt. The empl aci ng
uni t/UH-60 company i s al so responsi bl e for
Mai ntai ni ng the uni t basi c l oad at the forward-area refuel poi nt or
ATP.
Prepari ng the scatterabl e mi nefi el d report and record, forwardi ng i t to
the author i zi ng commander or the avi ati on br i gade engi neer, and
ver i fyi ng that the assi stant di vi si on/br i gade engi neer r ecei ves the
enti re report.
Coordi nati ng ai r routes and corri dors.
Requesti ng SEAD and securi ty ai rcraft.
Pl anni ng the ai r-mi ssi on coordi nati on meeti ng to refi ne or devel op the
avi ati on scheme of maneuver.
Ensuri ng that pi l ots attend the uni ts rehearsal .
Posti ng avi ati on graphi cs on the current operati ons overl ay.
Process
Al l tar get nomi nati ons ar e submi tted thr ough the di vi si on tar geti ng cel l . I n
the br i gade, al l tar get nomi nati ons go to the assi stant di vi si on engi neer for
submi ssi on to the boar d. Nomi nati ons shoul d be submi tted 96 hour s pr i or to
the executi on ti me (see Tabl e D-3).
The targeti ng cel l val i dates the targets based on the SI TEMP and
recommends approval through the commandi ng general /chi ef of staff.
Upon approval , the deputy FSCOORD turns the target numbers and
the ai r requi rements over to the G3 ai r, who adds the targets to the ai r
coordi nati on order.
The deputy FSCOORD begi ns to pl an SEAD/CAS requi rements for
di vi si on mi ssi ons.
The G3 i ssues the di vi si on WO so that uni ts can be prepared to
execute speci fi c ai r Vol cano mi ssi ons.
FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-11
Table D-3. Planning process (H-hour sequence)
H-96+00. Submit target nominations/receive approval. Submit CAS requests for enemy ADA sites along
ingress and egress routes.
H-72+00. Receive mission. Division WO issued.
Conduct air-mission coordination meeting.
Conduct S2 update on enemy situation and pass down to executing unit.
Submit additions or changes to the CAS request to FSE for enemy ADA sites.
Post the air Volcano mission in the air coordination order.
Disseminate the SCATMINWARN.
H-48+00. Mount the system. The system takes 3 to 4 hours with a crew of three on a hard surface. The
time is doubled in a field environment and requires three or four personnel to assist in loading.
H-24+00. Conduct detailed mission analysis and planning. Issue WO to attack assets, including
NLT time for mission planning and upload completion.
Time and location of air-mission brief.
Units attending.
Minefield location and type.
Establishment of C
2
relationship.
Face-to-face coordination with attack assets.
Liaison officers planning multiple routes to minefield.
Liaison officers coordinating with engineers, ADA, and FSEs for support. G4/S4 must be notified of
reload plans and any other Class III/V requirements.
Intelligence update.
H-20+00. Volcano integrated into deep attack or air-assault matrix by the aviation brigade.
H-8+00. Conditions-check matrix approved by the commanding general or designated authority,
including
Weather.
Threat suppression along route.
Attack support.
FLOT crossing coordination completion.
FLOT initial crossing point.
SEAD fire coordination.
Mines available.
Integration into execution matrix.
Crews updated on ADA threat.
Backup system and aircraft available.
CAS coordination.
Rehearsal completion with attack assets.
Intelligence update.
Close operation mission, including
Location of friendly forces.
Type of marking and when it will be in place.
H-6+00. Conduct air-mission brief, including
S2 intelligence update.
ADA threat update.
Rehearsal held after brief.
Brigade engineer and brigade fire-support officer being present.
H-4+00. Latest time for link-up of aviation assets. Fly to forward-area refuel point or tactical assembly area
for mine load-up. Remember that
Loading canisters takes 1 to 3 hours with a crew of four to eight. Time varies greatly based on
whether or not the canisters are in shipping containers.
The loading time in a field environment is decreased if one pad is dedicated to air Volcano aircraft
loading and arming.
H-0+30. Cross FLOT (estimated; exact time is based on route), to include
SEAD fired.
CAS sorties.
H-hour. Minefield deployed, to include
Aircraft reports to the supporting brigade engineer if an infantry brigade mission.
Aircraft reports to the aviation brigade engineer if a division mission.
Engineer disseminates the scatterable minefield report and record to appropriate units.
FM 20-32
D-12 Air Volcano
The di vi si on i ssues a fragmentary order (FRAGO) to order the
executi on of the ai r Vol cano mi ssi on.
The pl anni ng staff gi ves the avi ati on bri gade a date and a ti me for the
ai r Vol cano system to be upl oaded and prepared for empl oyment.
Ai r Vol cano mi nefi el ds are i ntegrated i nto the scheme of maneuver as
a di r ected, si tuati onal , or reserve obstacl e as stated i n FM 90-7. Thi s
i ncl udes i ntegr ati on i nto the COA that i s synchr oni zed dur i ng war
gami ng and i ncl uded i n the OPORD as part of the rehearsal .
Logistics
Ai r Vol cano muni ti ons ar e tr anspor ted and handl ed i n the same manner as
Cl ass V mi nes and expl osi ves. The onl y si gni fi cant di ffer ence i n handl i ng i s
whether ai r Vol cano operati ons are conducted from the tacti cal assembl y area
or the forward operati ng base.
Echel on-above-cor ps tr anspor tati on assets wi l l tr ansfer the ai r Vol cano to
cor ps stor age ar eas (ammu n i ti on ). Bas ed on for ecasts by th e di v i s i on
ammuni ti on offi cer, the corps support area wi l l push ai r Vol canos to ASPs or
ATPs i n the di vi si on area (tacti cal assembl y area). ASPs and ATPs i n or near
th e tacti cal ass embl y ar ea ar e n or mal l y oper ated by a di r ect-s u ppor t
ammuni ti on company attached to the corps support group (forward). ATPs i n
br i gade suppor t ar eas ar e nor mal l y oper ated by for war d suppor t battal i ons.
Mi nes are moved from the corps support area to ASPs/ATPs by transportati on
uni ts from the corps support group (rear). Further throughput of mi nes fr om
ASPs to ATPs i s suppor ted by tr anspor tati on assets fr om the cor ps suppor t
gr oup (for war d). Based on the di vi si on ammuni ti on offi cer s for ecast and the
avai l abi l i ty of transportati on, the corps suppor t area wi l l attempt to transfer
bul k mi nes to the ASP/ATP that i s best posi ti oned to suppor t r equi r ements.
ATPs i ssue mi nes to usi ng uni ts whi l e ASPs handl e bul k ammuni ti on. ASPs
can do emer gency i ssue to usi ng uni ts, but thi s i s usual l y done onl y for uni ts
usi ng l arge quanti ti es of bul k ammuni ti on and havi ng thei r own ammuni ti on
transportati on support avai l abl e (di vi si on or corps arti l l ery).
Preparation and Coordination
I f an ai r Vol cano mi ssi on has been appr oved for a uni t, an avi ati on br i gade
l i ai son offi cer coor di nates wi th the S3 ai r, the engi neer, and the ai r defense
offi cer to outl i ne ai r Vol cano requi rements.
Logi sti cal Requi rements
The engi neer pl anner cal cul ates Cl ass I V/V suppl i es and r equests them fr om
the Assi stant Chi ef of Staff, G4 (Logi sti cs)(G4)/S4. The engi neer and the
assi stant di vi si on avi ati on offi cer coordi nate the l ocati on (forward-ar ea refuel
poi nt, tacti cal assembl y ar ea, for war d operati ng base) of the ATP wher e the
UH-60 wi l l be l oaded and fuel ed. The ALO must pr ovi de the amount of ai r
ti me avai l abl e and the fuel r equi r ed, and he must be pr epar ed to di scuss
empl acement ti mes based on Vol cano l ocati ons. The ai r-mi ssi on br i ef wi l l
faci l i tate di ssemi nati on of thi s i nformati on.
FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-13
Concept of the Operati on
The scheme of maneuver, fi res, and engi neer operati on must be outl i ned. The
scheme of engi neer oper ati ons outl i nes exact gr i d coor di nates, the obstacl e
i ntent, and the mi nefi el d composi ti on and si ze. The ai r Vol cano can be
empl aced under enemy contact, but addi ti onal control measures must be used
to protect the ai r cr aft and the crew. I f the ai r Vol cano i s tri gger ed by enemy
acti on, the DST must be bri efed dur i ng the ai r-mi ssi on br i ef. The DST must
ou tl i n e NAI s, i n cl u di n g th e ty pe of s en s or s an d tr i gger s (l on g-r an ge
survei l l ance devi ce [LRSD], SOF, UAV), TAI s, deci si on poi nts, and executi on
cri teri a.
Control Poi nts and Markers
The i ni ti al poi nt, the approach marker, and mi nefi el d markers are desi gnated.
Approach and mi nefi el d markers must be vi si bl e from the ai r and be di sti nctl y
di fferent from one another:
The i ni ti al poi nt i s an easi l y i denti fi abl e terrai n feature used for
coordi nati ng the entry poi nt of the UH-60 i nto the sector.
The approach marker al l ows the ai rcraft to set the al ti tude, the speed,
and the fi nal or i entati on to the mi nefi el d. The appr oach mar ker can
al so be a terrai n feature.
Mi nefi el d markers establ i sh the l i mi ts of the desi red mi nefi el d. Deep
area mi nefi el ds do not requi re mi nefi el d markers.
Terrai n Anal ysi s
A combi ned (avi ati on, maneuver, fi re-support, and engi neer pl anners) terrai n
anal ysi s shoul d be conducted usi ng Terrabase or a si mi l ar product. Terrabase
enabl es pl anner s to anal yze the effects of the ter rai n i n a thr ee-di mensi onal
for mat. AAs, ter r ai n r efer ences, TAI s, NAI s, l i ne-of-si ght pr ofi l es, and
mi nefi el d l ocati ons can be confi rmed duri ng thi s anal ysi s.
Ai r-Mi ssi on Bri ef
The ai r-mi ssi on bri ef i s the most cri ti cal pl anni ng and coordi nati on meeti ng at
the executi on l evel , and i t must occur no l ater than H-6 i n the pl anni ng
process. Duri ng the ai r-mi ssi on bri ef
C
2
i s establ i shed.
Updates and changes to the si tuati on are exchanged between the
br i gade or TF engi neer, the fi r e-suppor t offi cer, and the ai r-mi ssi on
commander.
The engi neer and the ai r-mi ssi on commander use four control
techni ques (di scussed l ater i n thi s appendi x) to ensur e mi ssi on
s u cce s s . Th e p r i ma r y t ech n i qu e f or e mp l a ce me n t a n d t h e
responsi bi l i ti es for each control techni que are outl i ned.
Radi o frequenci es; poi nts of contact; code words; i denti fi cati on, fri end
or foe, modes; and chal l en ge and passwor ds ar e exch an ged and
di ssemi nated.
FM 20-32
D-14 Air Volcano
The forward-area refuel poi nt l ocati on, the securi ty ai rcraft, fl i ght
routes, and l ethal /nonl ethal SEAD are i denti fi ed (i f al ready approved).
Mounti ng
The system must be mounted no l ater than H-48 i n the pl anni ng process.
Execution
Si ti ng
The key to proper empl acement i s the l ocati on of the mi nefi el d i n rel ati on to
exi sti ng ter r ai n featur es. I f appr opr i ate, the mi nefi el d shoul d ti e i nto an
exi sti ng ter r ai n featur e to pr event easy bypass or for di ng. Usi ng Ter r abase
en h a n ces s i t i n g a n d emp l a cemen t p r oced u r es i n d eep op er a t i on s .
Reconnai ssance must be conducted to veri fy the l ocati on.
Movement
Loading. The l auncher r ack functi ons as the car r i er and l auncher pl atfor m
for 40 mi ne cani ster s. The r ack has 40 keyhol es for mi ne cani ster s, a gr een
l atch that l atches the mi ne cani ster to the rack, and a red l atch that arms the
mi ne cani sters. The rack has two el ectri cal receptacl esone for the connector
and one for the l auncher r ack cabl e fr om the DCU. Whi l e l ook i ng at the
cani ster si de of the rack, rows are 1 through 4 from bottom to top and col umns
are 1 through 10 from l eft to ri ght.
Arming.
Due to the wei ght of the Vol cano mi ne system, a l arge, open area that
i s cl ear of obstacl es must be sel ected. The si te shoul d have a har d
surface i f possi bl e. I f a hard surface i s unavai l abl e, i nspect the ground
to ensur e that i t i s fi r m enough to support the wei ght of the ai r cr aft.
Per for ated steel pl anki ng or two pi eces of 1-i nch pl ywood (4 by 4 feet)
may be used as a fi el d-expedi ent surface i n soft areas.
Concentrati ons of nonessenti al personnel or frequentl y travel ed
vehi cul ar r outes shoul d not be wi thi n 1,000 meter s of the si te. Thi s
di stance i s based on the total wei gh t of expl osi ves and the safe
fr agmentati on di stance found i n FM 5-250. When usi ng the M88
trai ni ng cani sters, the mi ni mum di stance i s 30 meters.
Two Underwri ters Laboratori es, I ncorporated (UL)-l i sted 10BC fi re
exti ngui shers and a groundi ng rod (mi ni mum safety equi pment) must
be avai l abl e at the ar mi ng poi nt. Thi s equi pment i s pr ovi ded by
personnel who del i ver the mi nes.
The number of personnel al l owed access to the si te shoul d be hel d to a
mi ni mum. Al l per sonnel i nvol ved i n the ar mi ng wi l l r ecei ve a safety
bri ef that i ncl udes
Ammuni ti on handl i ng and i nspecti on procedures.
Loadi ng procedures.
Emergency procedures and rendezvous poi nts.
Emergency procedures.
FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-15
Fi re. I n the event of a fi re away from the mi nes, attempt to contai n
or exti ngui sh the fi r e by any avai l abl e means. I f the fi r e i s near
the mi nes or i n them, cl ear the ar ea to a mi ni mum di stance of
1,000 meters and noti fy fi re-fi ghti ng personnel i mmedi atel y. When
trai ni ng wi th M88 cani sters, cl ear the area to a mi ni mum di stance
of 30 meters.
Acci dental di scharge. I mmedi atel y cl ear the area to a di stance of
640 meter s and noti fy EOD. The mi nes ar m appr oxi matel y 2
mi nutes after fi ri ng. When trai ni ng wi th M88 cani sters, termi nate
armi ng unti l the probl em can be i denti fi ed and corrected.
Fai l ure to fi re. Remove the cani ster from the ai rcraft and pl ace i t
i n the dud pi t. Noti fy EOD i mmedi atel y. When trai ni ng wi th M88
cani ster s, r emove the cani ster from the ai r cr aft, separate i t fr om
the other cani sters, repack i t, and return i t to the ASP.
Si te l ayout (Fi gure D-6).
Bermi ng of the si te i s not requi red for a tacti cal armi ng poi nt.
The fol l owi ng rul es appl y when the si te i s l ocated next to a refuel
poi nt:
> A mi ni mum of 1,000 meters must exi st between armi ng poi nts
and refuel poi nts when the total quanti ty of expl osi ves i s l ess
th a n 600 k i l ogr a ms . For qu a n ti ti es gr ea ter th a n 600
ki l ograms, refer to FM 5-250.
NOTE: Each M87canister contains 3.4kilograms of explosives; a full
load (160canisters) contains 550kilograms of explosives.
Figure D-6. Site layout
Dud pit
Ammunition
points
Avoid
area
Avoid
area
Spent ammunition
O
r
i
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
i
r
c
r
a
f
t
C2, FM 20-32
D-16 Air Volcano
> The refuel poi nt for armed ai rcraft must be l ocated at l east
375 meters from other ai rcraft refuel i ng poi nts.
> Parked, armed ai rcraft must be at l east 36 meters from other
ar med ai r cr aft to pr event the detonati on of expl osi ves on
adjacent ai r cr aft. Thi s di stance wi l l not pr event damage to
adjacent ai rcraft; a 130-meter di stance i s requi red to prevent
damage by fragments and to ensure that the ai rcraft remai ns
operati onal .
A dud pi t (bermed when possi bl e) for damaged or mi sfi red
ammuni ti on shoul d be establ i shed beyond the ammuni ti on poi nts.
Armi ng poi nts shoul d be l ai d out as shown i n Fi gure D-6.
Dearming. After the mi ssi on i s compl ete, the ai rcraft r etur ns to the ar mi ng
poi nt for dear mi ng. Spent cani ster s shoul d be di scar ded at l east 30 meter s
fr om the ai r cr aft, at the 4- and 8-ocl ock posi ti ons. Li ve cani ster s shoul d be
returned to ASPs for future use or repackagi ng. Cani sters that mi sfi re shoul d
be pl aced i n the dud pi t.
Flight Planningand Preflight.
The fl i ght crew anal yzes the mi ssi on usi ng METT-TC factors and
determi nes the fl i ght pr ofi l e to be used dur i ng mi ne empl acement. I t
wi l l sel ect (or have desi gnated) one or mor e of the fol l owi ng contr ol
measures to be used duri ng mi ne empl acement:
Vi sual i denti fi cati on (start and stop markers on the ground).
Ti me-l apse (tabl es to determi ne the mi nefi el d l ength).
Number of cani sters fi red.
Doppl er/GPS (start and stop coordi nates).
The crew member(s) wi l l ensure that the ai r Vol cano i s i nstal l ed
pr oper l y, that al l i nstal l ati on checks ar e compl eted, and that mi ne
cani ster pal l ets are l oaded as di rected by the pi l ot or the SOP.
The fl i ght crew conducts ground checks accordi ng to the checkl i st i n
TM 1-1520-237-10 to confi rm proper operati on of the ai r Vol cano pri or
to takeoff.
BeforeArrival at theTarget Area.
Duri ng the equi pment check, the crew chi ef turns on the DCU power-
control swi tch, veri fi es that no mal functi ons were i ndi cated duri ng the
i ni ti al bui l t-i n test, and turns off the DCU power-control swi tch.
After compl eti on of run-up wi th the ai rcraft at fl i ght i dl e, the crew
chi ef turns on the DCU power-control swi tch.
Befor e arri val at the rel ease poi nt, the pi l ot wi l l make the fol l owi ng
checks (l i sted on the Vol cano card [a sampl e i s shown i n Fi gure D-7]):
Veri fy that the DCU i s on.
Veri fy that the mi ne SD ti me i s properl y set.
FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-17
Announce the ground speed i n knots or kph, as requi red. (The
pi l ot and the crew chi ef wi l l acknowl edge.)
Announce the number of cani sters the crew chi ef wi l l count down.
I f depl oyment i s 40 cani ster s per r un (20 per si de) and ther e ar e
two runs, the crew chi ef wi l l count down from 80 to 60 on the fi rst
r u n an d 60 to 40 on th e s econ d r u n . (Th e cr ew ch i ef wi l l
acknowl edge.)
Announce the al ti tude for empl oyment. (The pi l ot wi l l
acknowl edge.)
Announce the course for the del i very track. (The pi l ot wi l l
acknowl edge.)
VOLCANO CARD
Emplacement Date:
N
Unit Engr ASP
Call Sign
Frequency
Location
Remarks
Not to scale
1st pass 2nd pass 3rd pass 4th pass
Initial Point A D G J
SD Time
Ground Speed
knots
kph
knots
kph
knots
kph
knots
kph
No Tubes
Altitude
Track
Start Time B E H K
Stop Time C F I L
Figure D-7. Sample Volcano card
FM 20-32
D-18 Air Volcano
Announce the del i very ti me based on the setti ng of the ground
speed. (The crew chi ef wi l l acknowl edge.)
Before arri val at the i ni ti al poi nt, the crew chi ef wi l l
Ensure that the DCU fi re-ci rcui t swi tchs safety pi n and streamer
are removed.
Ensure that the DCU fi re-ci rcui t swi tch i s enabl ed.
Pl ace the i nterface control -panel armi ng swi tch to the ARM
posi ti on. He wi l l ver i fy that the jetti son advi sor y l i ght i ndi cates
armed and that no faul t codes are di spl ayed on the DCU.
At theTarget Area.
The pi l ot si mul taneousl y announces mark, presses the go-around
swi tch, and starts ti mi ng the run when he i s over the mi nefi el d star t
poi nt.
The pi l ot mai ntai ns a ground speed of 5 kph/3 knots and an al ti tude of
3 meters duri ng the mi ne-di spensi ng pass. The pi l ot i s responsi bl e for
fl yi ng the ai rcraft wi thi n the prescri bed l i mi tati ons.
The crew chi ef announces the mi ne-cani ster count, as the cani sters
ar e di spensed, by counti ng down i n 10s. He then announces the l ast
three cani ster s. For exampl e, the pi l ot announces a cani ster count of
60, the crew chi ef cal l s out 80, 70, 3, 2, 1, mark.
The pi l ot termi nates mi ne di spensi ng when the gri d l ocati on i s
reached.
After Mission Completion.
The crew chi ef wi l l
Pl ace the i nterface control -panel armi ng swi tch to the SAFE posi ti on
and veri fy that the armed advi sory capsul e i s exti ngui shed.
Pl ace the DCU fi re-ci rcui t swi tch to the OFF posi ti on. I nstal l the
safety pi n and the streamer.
Prepare and submi t a SCATMI NWARN.
EMPLACEMENT
The ai r Vol cano i s fast and fl exi bl e, but i t i s di ffi cul t to accur atel y di spense
mi nes wi thi n the confi nes of the mi nefi el d mar ki ng. The desi r ed obstacl e-
effect nor ms for the ai r Vol cano r equi r e extensi ve pl anni ng, pr epar ati on,
coor di nati on, and posi ti ve control dur i ng empl acement. The cri ti cal aspect of
the ai r Vol cano i s getti ng the r i ght amount of mi nes i n the speci fi ed l ocati on
and i n the desi red densi ty.
The detai l ed coordi nati on focuses on posi ti ve control . Posi ti ve control of an ai r
Vol cano mi ssi on r equi r es a r edundancy of contr ol techni ques to mi ni mi ze
er r or s i n mi n efi el d s i ze an d l ocati on . Th es e con tr ol tech n i qu es mu s t
compensate for poor vi si bi l i ty, wi nd speed and di r ecti on, and navi gati onal
errors.
FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-19
The fol l owi ng control techni ques are used by the engi neer and the ai r-mi ssi on
commander to ensur e that Vol cano mi nefi el ds match speci fi c obstacl e-effect
norms. Uni ts rel y on these techni ques to accompl i sh the mi ssi on, and they are
part of the Vol cano ai r-mi ssi on bri ef:
Vi sual i denti fi cati on. Focuses on the vi sual i denti fi cati on of mi nefi el d
empl acement. As par t of the pr epar ati on for a Vol cano mi nefi el d, an
engi neer el ement erects ai rfi el d panel marker s to mark start and end
poi nts. Thi s pr ovi des a vi sual si gnal for the engi neer and the ai r-
mi ssi on commander to star t and stop fi r i ng Vol cano cani ster s. The
pi l ot depr esses the l aunch swi tch over the fi rst marker to star t fi ri ng
and depr esses i t agai n over the second mar ker to stop fi r i ng. Thi s
control techni que i s good for open terrai n wi th adequate vi si bi l i ty and
l i ttl e canopy coverage.
Ti me l apse. Focuses on when to stop fi ri ng Vol cano cani sters. The UH-
60s ai r speed and the type of mi nefi el d bei ng l ai d deter mi nes the
amount of ti me i t takes to l ay a mi nefi el d. The ai r Vol cano has si x ai r
speed setti ngs20, 30, 40, 55, 80, and 120 knots. Tabl e D-4 shows the
ti me requi red to l ay mi nefi el ds and the ful l l oad ti me.
The fol l owi ng exampl e i s provi ded to show how Tabl e D-4 i s used:
Example: The mi ssi on i s to i nstal l an ai r Vol cano di srupt mi nefi el d.
The UH-60 i s tr avel i ng at 40 knots (thi s i s enter ed on the DCU), and
the pi l ot i ni ti ates (depresses the l aunch swi tch) at the i denti fi cati on of
the Vol cano start marker or the gri d l ocati on on the ground. The pi l ot
depr esses the l aunch swi tch a second ti me after 13 seconds have
el apsed.
Number of cani sters fi red. Focuses on when to stop fi ri ng Vol cano
cani sters. The number of Vol cano cani sters di spensed al so determi nes
when fi ri ng i s ter mi nated. Ther e i s a di gi tal readout on the DCU (for
Table D-4. Air Volcano dispensing times based on air speed
Knots
Disrupt and Fix
Minefields
Turn and Block
Minefields
160 Canisters
per Load
20 27 seconds 54 seconds 108 seconds
30 18 seconds 36 seconds 72 seconds
40
1
13 seconds 27 seconds 54 seconds
55
9 seconds
2
18 seconds 39 seconds
80
6 seconds
2
13 seconds
2
27 seconds
120
4 seconds
2
9 seconds
2
18 seconds
Width of minefield (meters) 278.8 557.5 1,115
No passes per minefield
1
2
3
1
No canisters per pass 40 80 160
1
Recommended air speed
2
Recommended only if absolutely necessary
3
Blackhawks in pairs can lay turn and block minefields in one pass, firing 80 canisters each.
FM 20-32
D-20 Air Volcano
the l eft and ri ght si de) that shows the number of cani sters remai ni ng.
The pi l ot stops fi r i ng when the r equi r ed number of cani ster s have
been fi red (see Tabl e D-4, page D-19).
Usi ng the di sr upt mi nefi el d exampl e above, the UH-60 star ts the
mi ssi on wi th a ful l l oad (80 cani sters on each si de of the ai rcraft). The
pi l ot i ni ti ates (depresses the l aunch swi tch) at the i denti fi cati on of the
Vol cano star t mar ker or the gr i d l ocati on on the gr ound. The pi l ot
depr esses the l aunch swi tch a second ti me after 20 cani ster s have
been expended on each si de. The DCU counts down fr om the total
number of cani ster s. When the DCU r eads 60 r i ght/60 l eft, the pi l ot
depr esses the swi tch to end the fi r i ng pr ocess. I deal l y, the ti mi ng of
del i very and the number of cani sters fi red are done si mul taneousl y. As
the cr ew chi ef counts down the ti mer, the pi l ot and the cr ew chi ef
mon i tor the n umber of cani ster s r emai n i n g on th e DCU di gi tal
readout.
Doppl er/GPS. Focuses on when to start and stop fi ri ng Vol cano
cani ster s usi ng the UH-60s Doppl er /GPS gui dance and navi gati on
set. Thi s set pr ovi des the pr esent posi ti on or desti nati on i n l ati tude
and l ongi tude (degrees and mi nutes) or gri d coordi nates. As part of the
pr epar ati on for the Vol cano mi nefi el d, exact gr i d coor di nates ar e
n eeded to deter mi n e th e appr oach poi n ts an d th e l i mi ts of th e
mi n efi el d. Th es e coor di n ates ar e pr ov i ded to th e ai r -mi s s i on
commander dur i ng the ai r-mi ssi on br i ef. The pi l ot enter s the gr i d
coor di nates i nto the Doppl er /GPS on the pr i mar y and the backup
ai r cr aft. Dur i ng executi on, the ai r-mi ssi on commander moni tor s the
Doppl er /GPS and deter mi nes the ti me to tar get, when to i ni ti ate
fi ri ng, and when to termi nate fi ri ng.
OUTSIDE FRIENDLY TERRITORY
Reconnai ssance of the pr oposed si te for the ai r Vol cano mi nefi el d wi l l be
conducted before mi nes are empl aced. Thi s coul d i ncl ude
LRSD.
Apache gun tapes.
UAV overfl i ghts.
I magery.
Key terrai n or l andmarks are used to i denti fy start and end poi nts for avi ati on
assets. I t i s unl i kel y that mi l i tar y mar ki ng wi l l be empl oyed based on the
proxi mi ty to enemy forces and the probabi l i ty of earl y detecti on i f man-made
markers are present. Fenci ng the mi nefi el d i s not requi red unti l the area has
been secured by fri endl y forces.
WITHIN FRIENDLY TERRITORY
Wi thi n fri endl y terri tory, ai r Vol cano mi nefi el ds shoul d be fenced and marked
wi th NATO i denti fi cati on si gns to protect fri endl y forces.
Fenci ng i s i nstal l ed befor e the ai r Vol cano mi nefi el d i s del i ver ed, and i t i s
l ocated 100 meter s from the center l i ne of the mi nefi el d and 100 meter s fr om
the start and end poi nts (Fi gure D-8).
FM 20-32
Air Volcano D-21
Start and end poi nts shoul d be marked wi th man-made devi ces such as VS-17
panel s. Duri ng l i mi ted vi si bi l i ty, start and end poi nts shoul d be marked wi th
i nfr ar ed or heat-pr oduci ng sour ces. Key ter r ai n featur es and l andmar ks
shoul d sti l l be used to i denti fy start and end poi nts.
Fenci ng the mi nefi el d i s not vi abl e when the mi nefi el d dur ati on i s shor t or
ci vi l i ans on the battl efi el d ar e an i ssue. I n thi s case, CA, publ i c affai r s, and
PSYOP per sonnel shoul d be i nvol ved i n l etti ng fr i endl y per sonnel know the
mi nefi el d l ocati on. Thi s coul d i ncl ude
Leafl et drops.
CA teams di ssemi nati ng i nformati on.
Host-nati on support.
PSYOP.
Figure D-8. Fencing for an air Volcano minefield
1,785 m
1,315 m
1,115 m
100 m
35 m
30 m
100 m
35 m
35 m
200 m
6
7
0
m
FM 20-32
D-22 Air Volcano
REPORTING
SCATTERABLE MINEFIELD WARNING
The empl aci ng uni t i s responsi bl e for i ssui ng the SCATMI NWARN (Fi gure 8-
7, page 8-23) to adj acent u n i ts an d h i gher h eadqu ar ter s. Th e br i gade
engi neer s and the assi stant di vi si on engi neer assi st i n thi s pr ocess. They
di ssemi nate the war ni ng based on whether or not i t i s a br i gade (br i gade
engi neer ) or di vi si on (avi ati on br i gade engi neer ) mi ssi on. To ensur e that al l
u n i ts a r e i n f or med , th e a s s i s ta n t d i v i s i on en gi n eer f or wa r d s th e
SCATMI NWARN to the G3 for di ssemi nati on through operati onal channel s.
SCATTERABLE MINEFIELD REPORT AND RECORD
The ai rcraft empl aci ng the mi nefi el d r epor ts i ni ti ati on and compl eti on ti mes
to the engi neer of the empl aci ng uni t. The engi neer prepares the scatter abl e
mi nefi el d r epor t and r ecor d (Fi gur e 8-8, page 8-23) and for war ds i t thr ough
hi s uni t to the assi stant di vi si on engi neer. The assi stant di vi si on engi neer
for war ds the r epor t to the G3 who pr ovi des the i nfor mati on to hi gher and
subordi nate uni ts through operati onal channel s.
Safety and Training E-1
Appendix E
Safety and Training
Mi ne tr ai ni ng i s i nher entl y danger ous, i n par t, because sever al di ffer ent
types of mi nes and fuse systems ar e used thr oughout the worl d. Detai l ed
safety i nstr ucti ons for each type of mi ne ar e pr ovi ded thr oughout thi s
manual . Thi s appendi x mer el y poi nts out the safety aspects of l i ve-mi ne
tr ai ni ng that are common to al l types of mi nes.
Conduct mi ne tr ai ni ng as i f the mi nes wer e l i ve. Thi s i s the onl y way
sol di er s for m a habi t of cor r ectl y and safel y handl i ng mi nes and gai n a
true appreci ati on of the r equi rements and the ti me i t takes to perform an
actual mi ne-war far e mi ss i on. Li v e-mi ne tr ai ni ng gi v es sol di er s the
confi dence they need to handl e mi nes and thei r components. Acci dents can
us ual l y be tr aced to i gnor ance, negl i gence, del i ber ate mi shandl i ng,
over con fi dence, mech ani cal fai l ur e, or fr i ght. Th e fi r s t four can be
over come by tr ai ni ng and pr oper super vi si on. Mechani cal fai l ur e r ar el y
happens ; but i f i t does, i t can be contr ol l ed by tr ai ni ng and pr oper
super vi si on. The l ast i tem, fr i ght, i s master ed thr ough wel l -contr ol l ed,
l i ve-mi ne trai ni ng.
STORAGE
There are three types of mi nes used i n mi ne trai ni ng:
I nert. Does not contai n expl osi ves.
Practi ce. Contai ns an LE charge or a smoke-produci ng component to
si mul ate detonati on.
HE. I nvol ves actual mi nes used i n combat
Conventi onal mi nes ar e pai nted to enhance conceal ment, r etar d r usti ng of
exposed metal par ts, and hel p i denti fy the type of mi ne and fi l l er (HE, LE, or
chemi cal agent). Ol der manufactured mi nes are pai nted accordi ng to the Fi ve-
El ement Marki ng System; newer mi nes use the Standard Ammuni ti on Col or-
Codi ng System (see Tabl e E-1, page E-2).
NOTE: Mines that are color-coded and marked according to the old
system have been on hand for several years. Ensure that al l
ammunition, whether color-coded according to the old or new
system, is properly and fully identified.
Al ways handl e mi nes wi th car e. The expl osi ve el ements i n fuses, pr i mer s,
detonator s, and booster s ar e par ti cul ar l y sensi ti ve to mechani cal shock ,
fri cti on, stati c el ectri ci ty, and hi gh temperatures. Boxes and crates contai ni ng
mi nes shoul d not be dropped, dragged, tumbl ed, wal ked on, or str uck. Do not
smoke wi thi n 50 meters of a mi ne or i ts components.
C2, FM 20-32
E-2 Safety and Training
When i t i s necessary to l eave mi nes i n the open
Set them on dunnage at l east 5 centi meters above the ground.
Pl ace a waterproof cover (such as canvas) over them, and l eave enough
space for ai r ci rcul ati on.
Di g drai nage trenches around stacks of mi nes to prevent water from
col l ecti ng under them.
Protect mi nes and thei r components agai nst moi sture by
waterproofi ng them wi th grease coati ngs, tar paper, or tarpaul i ns.
Addi ti onal mai ntenance procedures are as fol l ows:
Do not open mi ne boxes i n a magazi ne, at an ammuni ti on dump, or
wi thi n 30 meter s of an expl osi ve stor e. Use copper or wooden safety
tool s, i f avai l abl e, to unpack and repack mi nes.
Do not fuse mi nes wi thi n 30 meters of an expl osi ve or ammuni ti on
hol di ng area. Mi nes can be fused at the mi ne dump.
Use speci fi cs authori zed by the US Army Materi el Command and
appl i cabl e TMs to di sassembl e mi nes and thei r components.
Remove safety pi ns, safety for ks (cl i ps), and other safety devi ces as the
l ast step when armi ng the mi ne; and r epl ace them before the mi ne i s
moved agai n. These devi ces prevent acci dental i ni ti ati on of the mi ne
whi l e i t i s bei ng handl ed.
Pl ace tape over open fuse cavi ti es and secondary fuse wel l s. Ensure
that they ar e cl ear of obstr ucti on and fr ee of for ei gn matter befor e
attempti ng to i nstal l the fuse, the detonator, or the FD.
Take steps to prevent moi sture or water from accumul ati ng around
the mi ne and subsequentl y fr eezi ng i f the temper atur e fl uctuates
around freezi ng. Mi nes usual l y functi on sati sfactori l y at temperatures
between 40 and 160F. Most mi nes ar e not appr eci abl y affected by
temper atu r e changes, bu t mi n es can become neu tr al i zed by i ce
formati ons (see Chapter 12).
Table E-1. Mine color-coding system
Type of Ammunition
Five-Element Marking System
(Old)
Standard Ammunition Color-
Coding System (New)*
Persistent casualty chemical
agent
Gray with green markings and
two green bands
two 12-mm green bands
Nerve agents
two or three green bands
three 12-mm green bands
Incendiary
Gray with violet markings and
one violet band
Light red with black markings and
one yellow band
HE Olive drab with yellow markings Olive drab with yellow markings
Practice mines Blue with white markings Blue with white markings
Inert mines
Black with the word INERT in
white
Blue with the word INERT in
white
*Chemical ammunition containing an HE has one 6-mm yellow band in addition to the other markings.
FM 20-32
Observe proper procedures when recoveri ng mi nes. Ensure that
components do not show evi dence of damage or deteri orati on.
Ensure that practi ce or i nert mi nes or thei r components are not
present when l i ve mi nes or thei r components are bei ng used.
Do not mi x i nert mi nes wi th l i ve mi nes.
Do not di spl ay l i ve mi nes or thei r components i n museums,
demonstrati ons, model s, or si mi l ar l ayouts. Onl y i nert equi pment can
be used for di spl ays.
Handl e expl osi ve materi al s wi th appropri ate care. The expl osi ve
el emen ts i n pr i mer s, bl as ti n g caps, an d fu s es ar e par ti cu l ar l y
sensi ti ve to shock and hi gh temperatures.
Assembl e acti vators, standard bases, and FDs before i nstal l i ng them.
Do not carry them i n the pockets of your cl othi ng.
Do not poi nt FDs at anyone.
Camoufl age the mi ne before removi ng the posi ti ve safety pi n when
possi bl e.
NOTE: Additional storage and safety precautions are outlined in TM
9-1300-206.
LIVE-MINE TRAINING
NOTE: No live-mine training is authorized with M14 mines. Units
outside Korea will not use live M16A1mines in tactical or protective
minefield training.
Li ve-mi ne tr ai ni ng i s conducted by pr epar i ng, l ayi ng, ar mi ng, neutr al i zi ng,
and di sar mi ng l i ve mi nes (wi th l i ve fuses and components) i n a tr ai ni ng
envi ronment.
Su per v i s or s mu s t adh er e to th e fol l owi n g s afety cons i der ati on s when
conducti ng l i ve-mi ne trai ni ng:
Onl y personnel who are qual i fi ed and certi fi ed accordi ng to the l ocal
range SOP are al l owed to supervi se acti vi ti es or trai ni ng i n whi ch l i ve
mi nes or thei r components are used.
Mi ni mum personnel requi rements to conduct l i ve-mi ne trai ni ng are
Range offi cer (OI C).
Range safety offi cer (RSO).
One NCO supervi sor for each armi ng bay.
Mi ne-expl osi ve breakdown NCO.
One medi c per four armi ng bays.
Guards, as requi red by the range SOP.
Sound organi zati on i s a must before l i ve-mi ne trai ni ng can begi n. The
OI C and super vi si ng NCOs conduct a demonstr ati on/br i efi ng to
ensure that the practi ce runs smoothl y.
FM 20-32
The trai ni ng offi cer must foresee hazards that can occur through
per sonnel ner vousness or mater i al fai l ur e. The commander shoul d
conduct a ri sk assessment accordi ng to AR 385-10.
The OI C takes hi s pl ace at the control poi nt or post. Once he i s
sati sfi ed that al l safety regul ati ons have been observed, he orders the
fi rst detai l to start trai ni ng.
Sol di ers are trai ned on i nert and practi ce mi nes before armi ng l i ve
mi nes, accor di ng to the gui del i nes establ i shed by the Standar ds i n
Trai ni ng Commi ssi on.
Fuses are not i nserted i nto mi nes unti l ordered by the OI C.
An NCO supervi sor must be present when sol di ers arm l i ve mi nes. He
ensures that sol di ers adhere to the proper procedures and regul ati ons.
Onl y one sol di er arms a mi ne at any gi ven ti me.
Personnel di sarm one mi ne before armi ng the next one.
Personnel never arm an M16 AP mi ne i n the tri p-wi re mode duri ng
l i ve-mi ne trai ni ng.
Personnel never remove the posi ti ve safety pi n from the M16 AP mi ne
duri ng l i ve-mi ne trai ni ng.
I nstructors i nspect fuses and mi nes for servi ceabi l i ty before starti ng
practi ce.
I nstructors i nspect mi nes and thei r components for damage and
excessi ve wear after each student has gone thr ough the stati on.
Repl ace the mi ne and the fuse i f damage or wear i s found.
Al l personnel wear a hel met (wi th the servi ceabl e chi n strap fastened)
and body armor when armi ng and di sarmi ng mi nes.
Ear protecti on i s not permi tted i n the armi ng bays. The student must
be abl e to hear the super vi sor and cer tai n di sti nct noi ses (such as a
fi ri ng pi n droppi ng).
I nstructors post guards at al l entrances to the range. The guards
communi cate wi th the RSO by r adi o, wi r e, voi ce, or si gnal . No one
enters the range wi thout permi ssi on from the RSO.
I nstructors keep mi ne records and i nventory sheets. They mai ntai n
accountabi l i ty of al l mi nes and fuses, before and after each exerci se.
I nstructors draw and return suppl i es; check equi pment for i ssue; and
ensur e that l i ve mi nes ar e safe, ser vi ceabl e, and unar med. They
en s u r e th at th e r equ i r emen ts con tai n ed i n AR 385-63, r an ge
regul ati ons, and SOPs are observed and that no one does anythi ng to
prejudi ce safety.
I nstructors cl earl y mark the word LI VE on al l l i ve mi nes and thei r
components that ar e used for l i ve-mi ne tr ai ni ng. Li ve mi nes ar e
mai ntai ned separatel y from practi ce and i nert mi nes.
FM 20-32
Li ve AHDs are not used wi th l i ve mi nes duri ng trai ni ng, but they can
be used wi th practi ce and i nert mi nes.
Armi ng and di sarmi ng are conducted i n the prone posi ti on.
Wai ti ng personnel are l ocated i n a bunker, behi nd a sui tabl e
barri cade, or at a safe di stance from l i ve-mi ne trai ni ng.
Supervi sors ensure that l i ve-mi ne trai ni ng i s not rushed. There are no
shor tcuts. Super vi sor s must al l ow sol di er s ampl e ti me to ar m and
di sarm mi nes. Most sol di ers are al ready i n a hi gh state of stress from
deal i ng wi th l i ve muni ti ons, and rushi ng them onl y serves to hei ghten
thei r stress l evel .
LIVE-MINE DEMONSTRATIONS
Li ve-mi ne demonstr ati ons show mi ne char acter i sti cs and capabi l i ti es usi ng
M16 and M18 AP mi nes and M15, M19, and M21 AT mi nes. The appropr i ate
author i ty must author i ze the demonstr ati on, and fi r i ng per sonnel must be
ful l y conver sant wi th al l safety and techni cal aspects pertai ni ng to l i ve-mi ne
fi ri ng.
An OI C and an RSO are appoi nted for each acti vi ty i nvol vi ng l i ve-mi ne fi ri ng.
The amount of expl osi ve contai ned i n the mi ne cannot exceed the maxi mum
amount al l owed for the range, and one mi ne i s fi red at a ti me.
Upon arr i vi ng at the range, the i nstructor and hi s assi stants establ i sh areas
accordi ng to the fol l owi ng rul es (si gns are posted for l arge demonstrati ons):
Fi ri ng poi nt. Si ted outsi de the danger area and near the OI C to
faci l i tate coordi nati on, commentari es, and fi ri ng.
Spectator area. Si ted outsi de the danger area and wi thi n earshot of
the commentator. I t i s l ar ge enough to pr ovi de a good vi ew of the
expl osi on.
Suppl y area. Any sui tabl e area away from spectators.
Expl osi ve area. Si ted away from suppl i es and spectators.
Mi ne area. Mi nes are set out i n ful l vi ew of the OI C and spectators.
I ndi vi dual mi nes are at l east 25 meters apart.
Target area. Targets are posi ti oned and i nspected by spectators before
the bl asti ng cap i s i nserted i nto the mi ne.
M16ANTIPERSONNEL MINE
Safety di stance. 300 meter s.
Fi ri ng procedures.
Rol l out 300 meters of fi ri ng cabl e and attach i t to a stake or pi cket
i n the gr ound (l eave at l east 1 meter of fr ee end). Test the fi r i ng
cabl e for conti nui ty.
Pl ace the mi ne i n the ground (di g i n l evel wi th the surface).
Remove the shi ppi ng pl ug.
Test a bl asti ng cap (under a sandbag) wi th the demol i ti on test set.
FM 20-32
Attach the ends of the bl asti ng-cap l eads to the ends of the el ectri c
cabl e and i nsul ate the joi nts wi th tape. Pl ace the bl asti ng cap i nto
the fuse wel l (see Fi gure E-1, page E-6).
Suggested target. A ci rcl e of tar paper, 6 meters i n di ameter,
suppor ted by 1.8-meter pi ckets. Spectator s can l ater vi ew shr apnel
effects.
NOTE: The procedure detailed here dispenses with the M605igniter.
The mine cannot be detonated by pull or pressure. The expulsion
charge and millisecond delay fuses are still operated, and the mine
bounds out of its casing (which remains in the ground) before
exploding in the air. Although the normal firing delay is removed, it
does not detract from the demonstrati on. The blasti ng cap i s
suspended two-thirds of the way down the fuse well to initiate the
expellingchargeand delay elements.
Mi sfi res. I n the event of a mi sfi re, the RSO di sposes of the mi ne by
pl aci ng a bl ock of C4 as cl ose to the mi ne as possi bl e, wi thout touchi ng
i t. He destroys the mi ne by normal nonel ectri c means.
M18A1ANTIPERSONNEL MUNITION
Safety di stance. 300 meter s.
Rol l out 300 meters of fi ri ng cabl e and attach i t to a stake or pi cket
i n the gr ound (l eave at l east 1 meter of fr ee end). Test the fi r i ng
cabl e for conti nui ty.
Pl ace the mi ne on the ground and ensure that the front of the
mi ne faces away from the fi ri ng poi nt. Remove the shi ppi ng pl ug.
Test an el ectri c bl asti ng cap (under a sandbag) wi th the demol i ti on
test set.
Figure E-1. M16 AP mine
Taped joints
Stake
NOTE: The cap is suspended
two thirds of the way down
the fuse well.
FM 20-32
Attach the ends of the bl asti ng cap l eads to the ends of the el ectri c
cabl e and i nsul ate the joi nts wi th tape. Pl ace the bl asti ng cap i nto
the detonator wel l (see Fi gure E-2).
Suggested target. Several E-type si l houette targets, 15 to 100 meters
from the mi ne.
NOTE: The procedure detailed here applies only to demonstration
firings. Standard accessories are used on all other occasions. The
mineexplodes instantaneously and clearly illustrates thesound of an
M18A1explosion.
M15, M19, AND M21ANTITANK MINES
Safety di stance. 1,000 meters.
Rol l out 1,000 meters of fi ri ng cabl e and attach i t to a stake or
pi cket i n the gr ound (l eave at l east 1 meter of fr ee end). Test the
fi ri ng cabl e for conti nui ty.
Pl ace the mi ne i n the ground and l eave the top exposed. A target i s
used onl y when the mi ne can be pl aced wi thout di stur bi ng the
target. A derel i ct vehi cl e i s a sui tabl e target.
Pl ace a bl ock of C4 on top of M15s and M19s (see Fi gure E-3, page
E-8).
Remove the shi ppi ng pl ug from the booster wel l of the M21 and
pack the wel l wi th C4. I nsert an el ectr i c bl asti ng cap i nto the C4
(see Fi gure E-4, page E-8).
NOTE: Do not remove safety devices. Keep arming dials in the SAFE
posi ti on. The mi ne expl odes i nstantaneousl y and cl ear l y
demonstrates theblast/shaped-chargeeffect.
Figure E-2. M18A1 AP mine
Taped joints
Stake
FM 20-32
RISK ASSESSMENT FOR LIVE-MINE DEMONSTRATIONS
The fol l owi n g r i sk assessment i s pr ovi ded as a gui del i ne for l i ve-mi ne
demonstrati ons usi ng an M16 AP mi ne. I t must be careful l y r evi ewed before
conducti ng a demonstrati on. Li ve-mi ne demonstrati ons can be conducted i n a
safe manner. The ri sk of i njury to personnel i s si gni fi cantl y mi ni mi zed i f you
adhere to establ i shed procedures.
Duri ng the demonstrati on, mi nes are not armed wi th standard fuses. They are
acti vated by el ectri c bl asti ng caps pl aced i nsi de the fuse wel l s.
A demonstr ati on shows the effecti veness of an M16 AP mi ne. Spectator s do
not handl e the mi nes or expl osi ves. To show the effecti veness of an M16 mi ne,
a sheet of paper i s pl aced i n a semi ci rcl e around the mi ne. Spectators remai n
i n bunkers or at a safe di stance whi l e mi nes are pri med wi th el ectri c bl asti ng
caps and detonated. After the mi nes have been detonated and the RSO has
cl ear ed the ar ea, spectator s ar e al l owed to vi ew the r esul ts of the detonated
mi ne. Mi sfi res are handl ed by the RSO.
Fi gu r e E -5 i s a r i s k a s s e s s me n t p r e p a r e d by t h e De p a r t me n t of
Transpor tati on.
Figure E-3. M15 and M19 AT mines
Figure E-4. M21 AT mine
C4
Taped joints Stake
Taped joints
Stake
FM 20-32
QUALITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT
Qualitative risk-assessment techniques are used to place a value on the level of risks created by hazards in an
operation. The principal qualitative technique is the risk-assessment code (RAC) described in MILSTD-882C.
This method was established as a common way to set priorities for Department of Defense (DOD)-wide
hazard-abatement programs and uses an RAC matrix format to combine the concepts of frequency and
severity into a single, numerical code. It is very useful in comparing different risks (such as those from different
programs) or even differences (such as health versus safety risks).
RACs are implemented for the Army in Army Regulation (AR) 385-10, which describes the two qualities of
hazard severity and hazard probability as follows:
Category ICATASTROPHIC. May cause death or loss of a facility. In this case, loss does not mean a
period of interrupted service; it means destruction of the facility or operation.
Category IICRITICAL. May cause severe injury, severe occupational illness, or major property
damage.
Category IIIMARGINAL. May cause minor injury, minor occupational illness, or minor property
damage.
Category IVNEGLIGIBLE. Probably would not affect personnel safety or health, but is in violation of
specific standards.
Mishap probability is the probability that a hazard will result in a mishap, based on an assessment of factors
such as location, exposure in terms of cycles or hours of operation, and affected population. The expression
combines the idea of the probability of an event and the exposure to the event. These probabilities are
expressed as letters conforming to the following system:
Subcategory ALikely to occur immediately.
Subcategory BProbably will occur in time.
Subcategory CMay occur in time.
Subcategory DRemote.
Subcategory EImprobable.
The two qualities are combined to yield an RAC by using the following table:
In using the RAC system, it is important to note that the IA and IIA classifications are termed imminent
danger. Though their RAC codes of 1 are the same as that of the IB entry, their immediacy makes them more
critical. The codes are useful in assessing an operation as it begins, but they must be updated as the operation
continues, the facility ages, and so forth to account for degrading condition or performance.
For risk managers, there are some important organizational/management considerations to RAC codes. AR
40-10 also contains an RAC system, but due to a difference in definitions, the health RAC code may be a lower
number, indicating a higher degree of risk. This is important to managers who are comparing health risks to
others risks under AR 385-10; the health issue would always win if no compensation or consideration was
factored into the codes. From the managerial standpoint, it must be remembered that RACs are judgmental
and not necessarily held to be the same by different managers or evaluators. When differences in perception
occur, the differences are likely based on either the understanding of the operations behavior or the criteria for
selecting the probability and severity. It is wise to listen to the basis of others RAC choices and attempt to
develop a common understanding.
Figure E-5. Excerpt from Risk-Assessment Techniques Manual, prepared by the Department of
Transportations Transportation Safety Institute, August 1986
Risk-Assessment Code Table
H
a
z
a
r
d
S
e
v
e
r
i
t
y
Mishap Probability
A B C D E
I 1 1 2 3 4
II 1 2 3 4 5
III 2 3 4 5 5
IV
FM 20-32
RISK ASSESSMENT FOR LIVE-MINE TRAINING
The Un i ted States Ar my En gi neer Center, Depar tment of I n str u cti on ,
obtai ned i nfor mati on for the fol l owi ng r i sk assessment fr om the Col l ecti ve
Tr ai ni n g Br anch , Depar tment of Tr ai n i ng and Doctr i ne, an d fr om the
Engi neer i ng Branch for Engi neer Offi cer Basi c Cour se demol i ti ons tr ai ni ng.
Hazar ds ar e i denti fi ed and anal yzed on pr el i mi nar y hazar d-anal ysi s wor k
sheets (see Fi gur es E-6 thr ough E-15, pages E-11 thr ough E-21). Ri sk -
assessment codes ar e assi gned to each hazar d based on the severi ty and the
probabi l i ty of occurrence.
Refer ences used i n the r i sk-anal ysi s pr ocess i ncl ude thi s manual and the
fol l owi ng publ i cati ons:
DA Pamphl et (Pam) 350-38.
AR 385-10.
AR 385-16.
AR 385-63.
Sol di er Trai ni ng Publ i cati on (STP) 5-12B1-SM.
Trai ni ng Ci rcul ar (TC) 25-8.
TM 9-1345-203-12.
TM 43-0001-36.
Qualitative risk-assessment techniques are used to prepare estimates of risk levels using performance
data, when available, to improve the accuracy of risk estimates used in risk-acceptance decision making.
These assessments are numeric values representing the safety risk of an Army activity, system operation,
or comparable endeavor, based on actuarial or derived numeric data. Though RACs are numerical, they
are derived from judgments and are not demonstrable in records of performance. If it is desirable that
performance be measured, it is necessary that quantified estimates of risk levels be established, that risk
levels be predictive so that future performance has a base of comparison, and that risk levels be assigned
numeric values.
Figure E-5. Excerpt from Risk-Assessment Techniques Manual, prepared by the Department of
Transportations Transportation Safety Institute, August 1986 (continued)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
A
r
m
i
n
g
t
h
e
M
1
5
A
T
M
i
n
e
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
1
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
D
a
m
a
g
e
d
m
i
n
e
u
s
e
d
N
o
n
e
L
a
c
k
o
f
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
/
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
I
n
c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
o
r
n
o
i
n
s
p
e
c
t
i
o
n
I
V
B
(
-
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
m
i
n
e
.
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
Q
A
S
A
S
t
o
i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
e
.
T
u
r
n
m
i
n
e
i
n
f
o
r
i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
i
o
n
/
d
i
s
p
o
s
a
l
.
I
V
D
(
-
)
P
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
.
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
a
r
e
p
r
o
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
o
n
i
n
e
r
t
m
i
n
e
s
f
i
r
s
t
.
O
n
e
i
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
o
r
i
s
a
s
s
i
g
n
e
d
t
o
o
n
e
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
.
A
l
l
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
n
e
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
.
M
i
n
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
d
o
n
e
a
f
t
e
r
i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
e
d
b
y
a
u
n
i
t
s
M
E
T
L
a
n
d
o
n
l
y
w
i
t
h
s
e
l
e
c
t
p
e
r
s
o
n
n
e
l
.
T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
e
n
v
i
r
o
n
m
e
n
t
.
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
a
r
e
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e
g
e
a
r
.
N
o
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
o
r
A
H
D
s
a
r
e
u
s
e
d
w
i
t
h
a
n
M
1
5
m
i
n
e
.
U
s
i
n
g
t
h
e
c
a
p
t
o
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
d
e
p
t
h
c
h
e
c
k
i
s
n
o
t
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d
.
U
s
e
t
h
e
w
r
e
n
c
h
.
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
f
o
r
c
e
o
n
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
/
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
r
i
n
g
(
M
6
2
4
f
u
s
e
)
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
b
e
n
d
s
/
p
u
s
h
e
s
o
n
r
o
d
o
r
f
u
s
e
I
B
(
1
)
D
o
n
o
t
r
e
m
o
v
e
t
h
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
s
t
o
p
a
n
d
b
a
n
d
i
f
t
h
e
e
x
t
e
n
-
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
i
s
u
s
e
d
.
O
R
R
e
m
o
v
e
t
h
e
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
r
e
m
o
v
i
n
g
s
a
f
e
t
y
s
t
o
p
a
n
d
b
a
n
d
.
I
D
(
3
)
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
o
n
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
l
a
t
e
(
M
6
0
3
f
u
s
e
)
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
a
p
p
l
i
e
s
e
x
c
e
s
s
i
v
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
I
D
(
3
)
S
e
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
.
I
D
(
3
)
F
u
s
e
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
s
e
a
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
w
e
l
l
(
M
6
0
3
f
u
s
e
)
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
E
x
c
e
s
s
i
v
e
d
e
b
r
i
s
/
c
o
r
r
o
s
i
o
n
i
n
w
e
l
l
L
a
c
k
o
f
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
/
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
I
n
c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
o
r
n
o
i
n
s
p
e
c
t
i
o
n
I
C
(
2
)
P
e
r
f
o
r
m
d
e
p
t
h
c
h
e
c
k
w
i
t
h
w
r
e
n
c
h
.
I
D
(
3
)
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
h
a
n
d
l
i
n
g
o
f
f
u
s
e
(
M
6
0
3
f
u
s
e
)
F
u
s
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
a
p
p
l
i
e
d
t
o
f
u
s
e
w
i
t
h
s
a
f
e
t
y
f
o
r
k
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
I
I
D
(
4
)
H
a
n
d
l
e
f
u
s
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
.
I
I
D
(
4
)
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
6
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
a
r
m
i
n
g
M
1
5
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
D
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
t
h
e
M
1
5
A
T
M
i
n
e
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
1
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
C
a
m
o
u
f
l
a
g
e
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
o
n
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
l
a
t
e
D
a
m
a
g
e
t
o
t
h
e
m
i
n
e
I
D
(
3
)
D
o
n
o
t
a
p
p
l
y
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
t
o
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
l
a
t
e
.
S
e
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
.
I
D
(
3
)
S
e
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
f
o
r
a
r
m
i
n
g
a
n
M
1
5
A
T
m
i
n
e
(
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
8
,
p
a
g
e
E
-
1
3
)
.
S
e
e
r
i
s
k
a
s
s
e
s
s
m
e
n
t
f
o
r
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
n
g
a
m
i
n
e
i
n
p
l
a
c
e
w
i
t
h
e
x
p
l
o
s
i
v
e
s
(
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
6
,
p
a
g
e
E
-
2
1
)
.
U
n
a
b
l
e
t
o
t
u
r
n
t
h
e
m
i
n
e
t
o
S
A
F
E
o
r
r
e
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
s
a
f
e
t
y
r
i
n
g
,
s
a
f
e
t
y
s
t
o
p
,
o
r
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
(
M
6
0
3
f
u
s
e
)
i
s
a
p
p
l
i
e
d
t
o
t
u
r
n
i
n
g
i
n
d
i
c
a
t
o
r
.
S
a
f
e
t
y
b
a
n
d
(
M
6
2
4
)
,
s
a
f
e
t
y
s
t
o
p
,
o
r
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
h
a
s
b
e
c
o
m
e
d
a
m
a
g
e
d
.
F
o
r
e
i
g
n
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
h
a
s
e
n
t
e
r
e
d
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
w
e
l
l
.
I
C
(
2
)
P
e
r
f
o
r
m
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
o
n
i
n
p
l
a
c
e
.
N
o
n
e
F
u
s
e
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
/
s
a
f
e
t
y
f
o
r
k
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
d
F
u
s
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
d
o
n
t
h
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
l
a
t
e
o
f
f
u
s
e
.
F
u
s
e
i
s
n
o
t
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
.
I
I
D
(
4
)
F
o
l
l
o
w
p
r
o
p
e
r
p
r
o
c
e
d
u
r
e
s
.
I
I
D
(
4
)
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
7
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
d
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
M
1
5
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
A
r
m
i
n
g
t
h
e
M
1
6
-
S
e
r
i
e
s
A
P
M
i
n
e
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
1
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
D
a
m
a
g
e
d
m
i
n
e
u
s
e
d
N
o
n
e
L
a
c
k
o
f
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
/
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
I
n
c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
o
r
n
o
i
n
s
p
e
c
t
i
o
n
I
V
C
(
-
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
m
i
n
e
.
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
Q
A
S
A
S
t
o
i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
e
.
T
u
r
n
i
n
t
h
e
m
i
n
e
f
o
r
i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
i
o
n
/
d
i
s
p
o
s
a
l
.
N
o
n
e
P
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
.
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
a
r
e
p
r
o
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
o
n
i
n
e
r
t
m
i
n
e
s
f
i
r
s
t
.
O
n
e
i
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
o
r
i
s
a
s
s
i
g
n
e
d
t
o
o
n
e
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
.
A
l
l
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
n
e
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
.
M
i
n
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
d
o
n
e
a
f
t
e
r
t
h
e
n
e
e
d
i
s
i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
e
d
b
y
a
u
n
i
t
s
M
E
T
L
a
n
d
t
h
e
n
o
n
l
y
w
i
t
h
s
e
l
e
c
t
p
e
r
s
o
n
n
e
l
.
T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
e
n
v
i
r
o
n
m
e
n
t
.
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
a
r
e
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e
g
e
a
r
.
N
o
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
o
r
l
i
v
e
A
H
D
s
a
r
e
u
s
e
d
w
i
t
h
a
n
M
1
6
m
i
n
e
.
I
n
t
h
e
e
v
e
n
t
o
f
d
a
m
a
g
e
o
r
l
o
s
s
o
f
a
n
y
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
s
,
s
t
o
p
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
w
i
t
h
t
h
i
s
p
a
r
t
i
c
u
l
a
r
m
i
n
e
a
n
d
d
e
s
t
r
o
y
i
t
.
F
a
u
l
t
y
f
u
s
e
u
s
e
d
(
M
6
0
5
)
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
S
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
n
g
P
r
o
n
g
s
b
e
n
t
F
u
s
e
h
e
a
d
d
o
e
s
n
o
t
t
u
r
n
f
r
e
e
l
y
P
i
n
s
i
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
d
i
n
c
o
r
r
e
c
t
l
y
I
B
(
1
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
f
u
s
e
.
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
Q
A
S
A
S
t
o
i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
e
.
T
u
r
n
m
i
n
e
i
n
f
o
r
i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
i
o
n
/
d
i
s
p
o
s
a
l
.
C
o
n
d
u
c
t
q
u
a
l
i
t
y
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
c
h
e
c
k
b
e
f
o
r
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
.
I
D
(
3
)
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
a
p
p
l
i
e
d
t
o
p
r
o
n
g
s
a
f
t
e
r
t
h
e
p
o
s
i
t
i
v
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
i
s
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
i
s
a
p
p
l
i
e
d
i
n
a
d
v
e
r
t
e
n
t
l
y
I
B
(
1
)
D
o
n
o
t
r
e
m
o
v
e
t
h
e
p
o
s
i
t
i
v
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
a
t
a
n
y
t
i
m
e
.
I
D
(
3
)
F
u
s
e
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
a
r
m
e
d
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
I
n
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
p
u
s
h
e
s
i
n
o
n
r
e
l
e
a
s
e
p
i
n
w
h
i
l
e
o
r
a
f
t
e
r
p
o
s
i
t
i
v
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
i
s
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
W
r
o
n
g
s
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
f
o
r
r
e
m
o
v
i
n
g
p
i
n
s
L
o
c
k
i
n
g
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
i
s
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
,
c
l
i
c
k
i
s
h
e
a
r
d
,
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
s
I
B
(
1
)
D
o
n
o
t
r
e
m
o
v
e
t
h
e
p
o
s
i
t
i
v
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
a
t
a
n
y
t
i
m
e
.
I
D
(
3
)
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
8
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
a
r
m
i
n
g
M
1
6
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
D
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
t
h
e
M
1
6
-
S
e
r
i
e
s
A
P
M
i
n
e
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
1
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
C
a
m
o
u
f
l
a
g
e
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
o
n
M
6
0
5
f
u
s
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
r
o
n
g
s
I
C
(
2
)
P
r
o
v
i
d
e
c
l
o
s
e
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
.
D
o
n
o
t
r
u
s
h
t
h
e
p
r
o
c
e
d
u
r
e
.
D
o
n
o
t
c
a
m
o
u
f
l
a
g
e
m
i
n
e
.
I
D
(
3
)
D
o
n
o
t
f
u
l
l
y
a
r
m
t
h
i
s
m
i
n
e
;
l
e
a
v
e
t
h
e
p
o
s
i
t
i
v
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
i
n
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
a
t
a
l
l
t
i
m
e
s
.
S
e
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
f
o
r
a
r
m
i
n
g
a
n
M
1
6
A
P
m
i
n
e
(
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
0
,
p
a
g
e
E
-
1
5
)
.
S
e
e
r
i
s
k
a
s
s
e
s
s
m
e
n
t
f
o
r
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
n
g
a
m
i
n
e
i
n
p
l
a
c
e
w
i
t
h
e
x
p
l
o
s
i
v
e
s
(
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
6
,
p
a
g
e
E
-
2
1
)
.
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
s
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
P
i
n
s
n
o
t
r
e
p
l
a
c
e
d
P
u
l
l
o
n
r
e
l
e
a
s
e
-
p
i
n
r
i
n
g
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
o
n
f
u
s
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
r
o
n
g
s
P
i
n
s
r
e
p
l
a
c
e
d
i
n
w
r
o
n
g
o
r
d
e
r
I
C
(
2
)
P
r
o
v
i
d
e
c
l
o
s
e
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
.
D
o
n
o
t
r
u
s
h
t
h
e
p
r
o
c
e
d
u
r
e
.
I
D
(
3
)
M
6
0
5
f
u
s
e
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
S
a
f
e
t
y
p
i
n
s
n
o
t
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
i
n
p
l
a
c
e
,
t
h
u
s
a
l
l
o
w
i
n
g
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
t
o
b
e
a
p
p
l
i
e
d
t
o
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
,
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
r
o
n
g
s
,
o
r
r
e
l
e
a
s
e
p
i
n
I
C
(
2
)
P
r
o
v
i
d
e
c
l
o
s
e
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
.
A
s
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
p
i
n
s
a
r
e
s
e
c
u
r
e
a
n
d
r
e
p
l
a
c
e
d
c
o
r
r
e
c
t
l
y
.
I
D
(
3
)
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
9
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
d
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
M
1
6
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
A
r
m
i
n
g
t
h
e
M
1
9
A
T
M
i
n
e
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
1
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
D
a
m
a
g
e
d
m
i
n
e
u
s
e
d
N
o
n
e
L
a
c
k
o
f
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
/
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
I
n
c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
o
r
n
o
i
n
s
p
e
c
t
i
o
n
I
V
B
(
-
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
m
i
n
e
.
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
Q
A
S
A
S
t
o
i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
e
.
I
V
B
(
-
)
P
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
.
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
a
r
e
p
r
o
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
o
n
i
n
e
r
t
m
i
n
e
s
f
i
r
s
t
.
O
n
e
i
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
o
r
i
s
a
s
s
i
g
n
e
d
t
o
o
n
e
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
.
A
l
l
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
n
e
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
.
M
i
n
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
d
o
n
e
a
f
t
e
r
i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
e
d
b
y
a
u
n
i
t
s
M
E
T
L
a
n
d
o
n
l
y
w
i
t
h
s
e
l
e
c
t
p
e
r
s
o
n
n
e
l
.
T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
e
n
v
i
r
o
n
m
e
n
t
.
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
a
r
e
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e
g
e
a
r
.
N
o
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
o
r
A
H
D
s
a
r
e
u
s
e
d
w
i
t
h
a
l
i
v
e
M
1
9
m
i
n
e
.
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
h
a
n
d
l
i
n
g
o
f
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
o
r
D
e
t
o
n
a
t
o
r
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
h
a
n
d
l
e
s
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
o
r
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
L
a
c
k
o
f
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
/
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
I
n
c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
o
r
n
o
i
n
s
p
e
c
t
i
o
n
I
D
(
4
)
H
a
n
d
l
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
o
r
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
.
I
I
I
D
(
5
)
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
o
n
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
l
a
t
e
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
a
p
p
l
i
e
s
t
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
I
D
(
3
)
S
e
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
.
I
D
(
3
)
W
e
a
k
e
n
e
d
B
e
l
l
e
v
i
l
l
e
s
p
r
i
n
g
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
a
t
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
l
o
w
e
r
t
h
a
n
d
e
s
i
g
n
e
d
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
B
e
l
l
e
v
i
l
l
e
s
p
r
i
n
g
w
e
a
k
e
n
i
n
g
I
C
(
2
)
I
n
f
o
r
m
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
o
f
l
e
s
s
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
r
e
q
u
i
r
e
d
t
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
.
I
D
(
3
)
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
0
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
a
r
m
i
n
g
M
1
9
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
D
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
t
h
e
M
1
9
A
T
M
i
n
e
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
1
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
C
a
m
o
u
f
l
a
g
e
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
o
n
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
p
l
a
t
e
D
a
m
a
g
e
d
o
r
m
a
l
f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s
I
D
(
3
)
D
o
n
o
t
c
a
m
o
u
f
l
a
g
e
m
i
n
e
.
I
D
(
3
)
S
e
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
f
o
r
a
r
m
i
n
g
a
n
M
1
9
A
T
m
i
n
e
(
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
2
,
p
a
g
e
E
-
1
7
)
.
S
e
e
r
i
s
k
a
s
s
e
s
s
m
e
n
t
f
o
r
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
n
g
a
m
i
n
e
i
n
p
l
a
c
e
w
i
t
h
e
x
p
l
o
s
i
v
e
s
(
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
6
,
p
a
g
e
E
-
2
1
)
.
U
n
a
b
l
e
t
o
t
u
r
n
t
h
e
m
i
n
e
t
o
S
A
F
E
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
t
u
r
n
i
n
g
t
h
e
d
i
a
l
i
n
d
i
c
a
t
o
r
F
o
r
e
i
g
n
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
i
n
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
w
e
l
l
I
C
(
2
)
P
e
r
f
o
r
m
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
o
n
i
n
p
l
a
c
e
.
I
D
(
3
)
F
u
s
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
a
n
d
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
o
r
r
e
p
l
a
c
e
d
w
i
t
h
s
h
i
p
p
i
n
g
p
l
u
g
D
e
t
o
n
a
t
o
r
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
D
r
o
p
p
e
d
f
u
s
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
w
i
t
h
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
o
r
D
r
o
p
p
e
d
t
h
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
o
r
I
I
C
(
3
)
H
a
n
d
l
e
f
u
s
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
a
n
d
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
o
r
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
.
I
I
D
(
4
)
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
1
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
d
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
M
1
9
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
A
r
m
i
n
g
t
h
e
M
2
1
A
T
M
i
n
e
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
1
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
D
a
m
a
g
e
d
m
i
n
e
u
s
e
d
N
o
n
e
L
a
c
k
o
f
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
/
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
I
n
c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
o
r
n
o
i
n
s
p
e
c
t
i
o
n
I
V
B
(
-
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
m
i
n
e
.
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
Q
A
S
A
S
t
o
i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
e
.
T
u
r
n
m
i
n
e
i
n
f
o
r
i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
i
o
n
/
d
i
s
p
o
s
a
l
.
I
V
B
(
-
)
P
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
.
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
a
r
e
p
r
o
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
o
n
i
n
e
r
t
m
i
n
e
s
f
i
r
s
t
.
O
n
e
i
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
o
r
i
s
a
s
s
i
g
n
e
d
t
o
o
n
e
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
.
A
l
l
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
n
e
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
.
M
i
n
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
d
o
n
e
a
f
t
e
r
i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
e
d
b
y
a
u
n
i
t
s
M
E
T
L
a
n
d
o
n
l
y
w
i
t
h
s
e
l
e
c
t
p
e
r
s
o
n
n
e
l
.
T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
s
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
e
n
v
i
r
o
n
m
e
n
t
.
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
a
r
e
i
n
t
h
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e
g
e
a
r
.
N
o
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
o
r
A
H
D
s
a
r
e
u
s
e
d
w
i
t
h
a
l
i
v
e
M
2
1
m
i
n
e
.
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
f
o
r
c
e
o
n
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
/
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
r
i
n
g
(
M
6
0
7
f
u
s
e
)
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
b
e
n
d
s
/
p
u
s
h
e
s
o
n
r
o
d
o
r
f
u
s
e
I
B
(
1
)
D
o
n
o
t
r
e
m
o
v
e
t
h
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
s
t
o
p
a
n
d
b
a
n
d
i
f
t
h
e
e
x
t
e
n
-
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
i
s
u
s
e
d
.
O
R
R
e
m
o
v
e
t
h
e
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
r
e
m
o
v
i
n
g
t
h
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
s
t
o
p
a
n
d
b
a
n
d
.
I
D
(
3
)
F
u
s
e
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
s
e
a
t
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
w
e
l
l
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
E
x
c
e
s
s
i
v
e
d
e
b
r
i
s
/
c
o
r
r
o
s
i
o
n
i
n
w
e
l
l
L
a
c
k
o
f
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
/
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
I
n
c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
o
r
n
o
i
n
s
p
e
c
t
i
o
n
I
C
(
2
)
S
e
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
.
I
D
(
3
)
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
h
a
n
d
l
i
n
g
o
f
f
u
s
e
F
u
s
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
a
p
p
l
i
e
d
t
o
f
u
s
e
w
h
i
l
e
m
i
n
e
i
s
a
r
m
e
d
I
I
D
(
4
)
H
a
n
d
l
e
f
u
s
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
.
N
o
n
e
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
2
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
a
r
m
i
n
g
M
2
1
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
D
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
t
h
e
M
2
1
A
T
M
i
n
e
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
1
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
C
a
m
o
u
f
l
a
g
e
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
T
i
l
t
e
d
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
D
a
m
a
g
e
d
o
r
m
a
l
f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s
I
B
(
1
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
.
E
n
s
u
r
e
c
l
o
s
e
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
.
I
D
(
3
)
S
e
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
t
f
o
r
a
r
m
i
n
g
a
n
M
2
1
A
T
m
i
n
e
(
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
4
,
p
a
g
e
E
-
1
9
)
.
S
t
o
p
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
w
i
t
h
t
h
i
s
p
a
r
t
i
c
u
l
a
r
m
i
n
e
a
n
d
d
e
s
t
r
o
y
i
t
i
n
t
h
e
e
v
e
n
t
o
f
d
a
m
a
g
e
o
r
l
o
s
s
o
f
s
t
o
p
,
b
a
n
d
,
o
r
c
o
t
t
e
r
p
i
n
.
S
e
e
r
i
s
k
a
s
s
e
s
s
m
e
n
t
f
o
r
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
n
g
a
m
i
n
e
i
n
p
l
a
c
e
w
i
t
h
e
x
p
l
o
s
i
v
e
s
(
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
6
,
p
a
g
e
E
-
2
1
)
.
B
a
n
d
,
s
t
o
p
,
a
n
d
c
o
t
t
e
r
p
i
n
r
e
p
l
a
c
e
d
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
T
i
l
t
e
d
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
D
a
m
a
g
e
d
s
t
o
p
,
b
a
n
d
,
o
r
c
o
t
t
e
r
p
i
n
I
B
(
1
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
.
E
n
s
u
r
e
c
l
o
s
e
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
.
I
C
(
2
)
E
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
a
n
d
/
o
r
f
u
s
e
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
M
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
T
i
l
t
e
d
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
I
C
(
2
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
r
o
d
.
E
n
s
u
r
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t
o
f
b
a
n
d
,
s
t
o
p
,
a
n
d
c
o
t
t
e
r
p
i
n
.
I
D
(
3
)
B
o
o
s
t
e
r
r
e
m
o
v
e
d
B
o
o
s
t
e
r
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
S
o
l
d
i
e
r
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
h
a
n
d
l
e
s
b
o
o
s
t
e
r
I
I
D
(
4
)
H
a
n
d
l
e
b
o
o
s
t
e
r
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
.
N
o
n
e
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
3
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
d
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
M
2
1
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
P
r
e
p
a
r
i
n
g
c
h
a
r
g
e
s
a
n
d
p
r
i
m
i
n
g
e
x
p
l
o
s
i
v
e
s
t
o
b
e
u
s
e
d
f
o
r
m
i
n
e
d
e
m
o
l
i
t
i
o
n
(
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
d
i
n
p
l
a
c
e
)
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
1
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
D
e
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
w
i
r
e
o
r
f
a
u
l
t
y
t
e
s
t
o
f
w
i
r
e
N
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
o
n
W
i
r
e
w
i
l
l
n
o
t
c
a
r
r
y
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c
a
l
c
h
a
r
g
e
t
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
e
x
p
l
o
s
i
v
e
I
V
D
(
-
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
w
i
r
e
(
r
e
p
l
a
c
e
i
t
)
.
N
o
n
e
A
f
t
e
r
t
e
s
t
i
n
g
,
e
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
w
i
r
e
e
n
d
s
a
r
e
t
w
i
s
t
e
d
t
o
g
e
t
h
e
r
.
O
n
l
y
o
n
e
d
e
m
o
l
i
t
i
o
n
s
p
e
r
s
o
n
a
n
d
o
n
e
s
a
f
e
t
y
p
e
r
s
o
n
w
i
l
l
b
e
a
t
t
h
e
m
i
n
e
w
h
e
n
t
h
e
b
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
i
s
i
n
s
e
r
t
e
d
i
n
t
o
t
h
e
d
e
m
o
l
i
t
i
o
n
.
R
S
O
i
s
r
e
s
p
o
n
s
i
b
l
e
f
o
r
c
l
e
a
r
i
n
g
m
i
s
f
i
r
e
s
.
R
S
O
k
e
e
p
s
a
m
i
s
f
i
r
e
k
i
t
u
n
d
e
r
h
i
s
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
.
E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c
b
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
c
h
e
c
k
d
o
n
e
i
n
c
o
r
r
e
c
t
l
y
o
r
n
o
t
a
t
a
l
l
B
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
C
a
p
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
h
a
n
d
l
e
d
C
a
p
n
o
t
p
u
t
u
n
d
e
r
s
a
n
d
b
a
g
I
I
I
C
(
4
)
H
a
n
d
l
e
c
a
p
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
.
P
l
a
c
e
c
a
p
u
n
d
e
r
s
a
n
d
b
a
g
.
I
V
D
(
-
)
B
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
a
t
t
a
c
h
e
d
i
n
c
o
r
r
e
c
t
l
y
t
o
f
i
r
i
n
g
w
i
r
e
B
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
C
a
p
/
f
i
r
i
n
g
w
i
r
e
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
h
a
n
d
l
e
d
E
n
d
o
f
f
i
r
i
n
g
w
i
r
e
n
o
t
s
h
u
n
t
e
d
I
I
I
C
(
4
)
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
f
i
r
i
n
g
w
i
r
e
i
s
s
h
u
n
t
e
d
.
E
n
s
u
r
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
h
a
n
d
l
i
n
g
o
f
b
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
.
I
V
D
(
-
)
B
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
i
n
s
e
r
t
e
d
i
n
c
o
r
r
e
c
t
l
y
/
t
o
o
f
o
r
c
e
f
u
l
l
y
i
n
t
o
1
-
p
o
u
n
d
d
e
m
o
l
i
t
i
o
n
c
h
a
r
g
e
B
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
a
n
d
/
o
r
d
e
m
o
l
i
t
i
o
n
c
h
a
r
g
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
T
o
o
m
u
c
h
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
o
n
b
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
C
a
p
i
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
l
y
h
a
n
d
l
e
d
I
D
(
3
)
E
n
s
u
r
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
h
a
n
d
l
i
n
g
o
f
b
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
.
I
D
(
3
)
C
h
a
r
g
e
d
o
e
s
n
o
t
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
N
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
o
n
F
a
u
l
t
y
b
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
c
a
p
F
a
u
l
t
y
b
l
a
s
t
i
n
g
m
a
c
h
i
n
e
F
a
u
l
t
y
f
i
r
i
n
g
w
i
r
e
I
V
C
(
-
)
O
I
C
d
e
c
l
a
r
e
s
a
m
i
s
f
i
r
e
.
F
o
l
l
o
w
R
S
O
p
r
o
c
e
d
u
r
e
s
f
o
r
a
m
i
s
f
i
r
e
.
I
V
C
(
-
)
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
4
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
o
n
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
M
i
n
e
a
r
m
i
n
g
/
d
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
p
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
f
a
c
t
o
r
s
(
n
o
t
a
l
l
-
i
n
c
l
u
s
i
v
e
)
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
1
o
f
2
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
G
o
o
d
w
e
a
t
h
e
r
N
o
d
i
r
e
c
t
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
b
e
t
w
e
e
n
4
5
a
n
d
7
0
F
C
l
e
a
r
o
r
p
a
r
t
l
y
c
l
o
u
d
y
W
i
n
d
s
p
e
e
d
l
e
s
s
t
h
a
n
5
m
p
h
I
V
A
(
-
)
N
o
n
e
N
o
n
e
T
h
i
s
l
i
s
t
i
s
n
o
t
c
o
n
c
l
u
s
i
v
e
a
n
d
w
i
l
l
d
e
p
e
n
d
o
n
t
h
e
p
a
r
t
i
c
u
l
a
r
s
o
f
t
h
e
u
n
i
t
,
t
h
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
,
a
n
d
t
h
e
r
a
n
g
e
f
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s
.
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
p
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
f
a
c
t
o
r
s
a
u
n
i
t
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
e
r
m
a
y
w
i
s
h
t
o
c
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
o
f
p
r
o
f
i
c
i
e
n
c
y
.
T
i
m
e
o
f
e
v
e
n
t
(
d
a
y
o
r
n
i
g
h
t
)
.
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
a
n
d
e
x
t
e
n
t
o
f
e
m
e
r
g
e
n
c
y
-
r
e
s
p
o
n
s
e
a
s
s
e
t
s
.
T
r
a
i
n
u
p
(
r
e
h
e
a
r
s
a
l
s
a
n
d
d
r
y
r
u
n
s
)
.
T
e
r
r
a
i
n
.
L
o
c
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
i
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
o
r
i
n
r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
t
o
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
d
u
r
i
n
g
t
h
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
.
M
i
n
i
m
a
l
w
e
a
t
h
e
r
N
o
d
i
r
e
c
t
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
b
e
t
w
e
e
n
3
2
a
n
d
4
4
F
o
r
7
1
a
n
d
8
0
F
D
r
i
z
z
l
e
W
i
n
d
s
p
e
e
d
b
e
t
w
e
e
n
5
a
n
d
1
5
m
p
h
I
I
I
A
(
2
)
E
n
s
u
r
e
c
l
o
s
e
s
u
p
e
r
v
i
s
i
o
n
.
D
o
n
o
t
r
u
s
h
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
t
o
g
e
t
i
n
s
h
e
l
t
e
r
.
P
o
s
t
p
o
n
e
o
r
c
a
n
c
e
l
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
.
I
I
I
C
(
4
)
B
a
d
w
e
a
t
h
e
r
W
e
t
,
m
i
s
e
r
a
b
l
e
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
W
e
t
m
u
n
i
t
i
o
n
s
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
l
e
s
s
t
h
a
n
3
2
F
o
r
g
r
e
a
t
e
r
t
h
a
n
8
0
F
M
o
d
e
r
a
t
e
t
o
h
e
a
v
y
r
a
i
n
S
n
o
w
o
r
i
c
e
W
i
n
d
s
p
e
e
d
g
r
e
a
t
e
r
t
h
a
n
1
5
m
p
h
I
C
(
2
)
P
o
s
t
p
o
n
e
o
r
c
a
n
c
e
l
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
.
I
D
(
3
)
L
a
c
k
o
f
r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
s
T
h
e
s
e
q
u
e
n
t
i
a
l
a
r
m
i
n
g
o
r
d
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
n
o
t
d
o
n
e
c
o
r
r
e
c
t
l
y
,
c
a
u
s
i
n
g
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
a
n
d
/
o
r
m
i
n
e
t
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
d
o
c
t
r
i
n
e
n
o
t
a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
Q
u
e
s
t
i
o
n
s
o
r
c
o
n
f
i
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
t
e
c
h
n
i
q
u
e
s
n
o
t
q
u
a
n
t
i
f
i
e
d
I
B
(
1
)
S
t
o
p
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
f
u
n
s
u
r
e
o
f
a
t
a
s
k
.
H
a
v
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
s
a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
.
I
D
(
3
)
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
5
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
p
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
f
a
c
t
o
r
s
)
FM 20-32
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
N
a
m
e
:
M
i
n
e
a
r
m
i
n
g
/
d
i
s
a
r
m
i
n
g
p
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
f
a
c
t
o
r
s
(
n
o
t
a
l
l
-
i
n
c
l
u
s
i
v
e
)
D
a
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
e
d
:
1
1
O
c
t
o
b
e
r
1
9
9
0
S
h
e
e
t
N
u
m
b
e
r
:
2
o
f
2
H
a
z
a
r
d
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
E
f
f
e
c
t
s
C
a
u
s
a
l
F
a
c
t
o
r
s
R
A
C
A
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
d
R
A
C
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
/
C
o
m
m
e
n
t
s
L
a
c
k
o
f
s
u
p
p
o
r
t
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s
o
r
c
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
s
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
p
r
o
c
e
d
u
r
e
s
o
r
p
r
a
c
t
i
c
e
s
i
n
t
r
o
d
u
c
e
d
,
c
a
u
s
i
n
g
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
a
n
d
/
o
r
t
h
e
m
i
n
e
t
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
N
o
t
e
n
o
u
g
h
o
r
i
n
c
o
r
r
e
c
t
f
u
s
e
s
,
w
r
e
n
c
h
e
s
,
a
n
d
/
o
r
w
a
s
h
e
r
s
u
s
e
d
I
C
(
2
)
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
p
r
o
p
e
r
s
u
p
p
o
r
t
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
i
s
a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
.
S
t
o
p
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
f
t
h
e
p
r
o
p
e
r
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
i
s
n
o
t
a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
.
I
D
(
3
)
C
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
p
r
o
c
e
d
u
r
e
s
o
r
p
r
a
c
t
i
c
e
s
i
n
t
r
o
d
u
c
e
d
,
c
a
u
s
i
n
g
t
h
e
f
u
s
e
a
n
d
/
o
r
t
h
e
m
i
n
e
t
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
L
o
n
g
a
m
o
u
n
t
o
f
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
w
i
t
h
l
i
t
t
l
e
o
r
n
o
s
l
e
e
p
S
t
r
e
n
u
o
u
s
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
e
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
o
r
d
u
r
i
n
g
l
i
v
e
-
m
i
n
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
I
D
(
3
)
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
h
a
v
e
a
d
e
q
u
a
t
e
s
l
e
e
p
.
A
l
l
o
w
f
o
r
b
r
e
a
k
s
d
u
r
i
n
g
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
.
S
t
o
p
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
i
f
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
a
p
p
e
a
r
t
o
b
e
h
e
a
v
i
l
y
f
a
t
i
g
u
e
d
.
N
o
n
e
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e
c
l
o
t
h
i
n
g
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
o
r
l
a
c
k
i
n
g
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e
c
l
o
t
h
i
n
g
,
i
n
c
r
e
a
s
i
n
g
t
h
e
s
e
v
e
r
i
t
y
o
f
a
n
a
c
c
i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
t
d
o
e
s
o
c
c
u
r
I
m
p
r
o
p
e
r
o
r
l
a
c
k
i
n
g
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e
c
l
o
t
h
i
n
g
I
C
(
2
)
A
l
l
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
s
p
a
r
t
i
c
i
p
a
t
i
n
g
i
n
m
i
n
e
t
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
w
i
l
l
h
a
v
e
K
e
v
l
a
r
h
e
l
m
e
t
s
,
f
l
a
k
v
e
s
t
s
,
a
n
d
b
o
o
t
s
.
N
o
n
e
F
i
g
u
r
e
E
-
1
5
.
P
r
e
l
i
m
i
n
a
r
y
h
a
z
a
r
d
-
a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
w
o
r
k
s
h
e
e
t
(
p
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
f
a
c
t
o
r
s
)
(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-1
Appendix F
Mine Awareness
Mi ne awar eness shoul d actual l y be enti tl ed mi ne/UXO awar eness. I f onl y
mi nes ar e emphas i zed, or dnance (bombl ets, s ubmuni ti ons ) may be
over l ooked, and i t has equal i f not gr eater ki l l i ng potenti al . The mai n
objecti ve of mi ne awar eness i s to save l i ves, so i t i s i mpor tant to ensur e
that sol di er s ar e wel l -i nfor med and thor oughl y tr ai ned. Thi s appendi x
outl i nes the tasks needed for sol di ers and uni ts to survi ve i n a mi ned/UXO
envi ronment.
Mi ne awar eness shoul d be emphasi zed at al l l evel s of command, and i t
i nvol ves sol di er and l eader ski l l s. Sol di er ski l l s are a mi x of i ndi vi dual and
col l ecti ve tasks that ar e r equi r ed for an el ement to mai ntai n i ts combat
effecti veness i n and ar ound a mi ned envi r onment. I t i s i mpor tant to note
that a sol di ers basi c mi ne-awareness ski l l s are cri ti cal to hi s and the uni ts
sur vi val . Leader ski l l s i nvol ve pl anni ng mi ssi ons, assessi ng si tuati ons,
and tr acki ng/di ssemi nati ng mi ne i nformati on. A uni t must be profi ci ent i n
al l mi ne-awareness ski l l s to effecti vel y operate i n a mi ned envi ronment.
SOLDIER
Sol di er ski l l s i nvol ve i ndi vi dual and col l ecti ve tasks that are requi red for basi c
sur vi val i n a mi ned/UXO envi r onment. They i ncl ude mi nefi el d i ndi cator s,
pr obi ng techni ques, mi ne-detector oper ati on, extr acti on dri l l s, sur vi val rul es,
casual ty treatment, and evacuati on dri l l s.
VISUAL INDICATORS
Mi ne/UXO i ndi cator s ar e par t of al l combat oper ati ons. Under standi ng and
recogni zi ng mi ne i ndi cators coul d determi ne whether or not a sol di er becomes
a casual ty. The fol l owi ng may i ndi cate the presence of mi nes/UXO:
Tri p wi res.
Si gns of road repai r (such as new fi l l or pavi ng, road patches, di tchi ng,
cul vert work).
Si gns pl aced on trees, posts, or stakes. Threat forces mark thei r
mi nefi el ds to protect thei r own forces.
Dead ani mal s.
Damaged vehi cl es.
Di sturbances i n previ ous ti re tracks or tracks that stop unexpl ai nabl y.
Wi res l eadi ng away from the si de of the road. They may be fi ri ng wi res
that are parti al l y buri ed.
FM 20-32
F-2 Mine Awareness
Odd features i n the ground or patterns that are not present i n nature.
Pl ant gr owth may wi l t or change col or, r ai n may wash away some of
the cover, the cov er may si nk or cr ack ar ou nd the edges, or the
materi al coveri ng the mi nes may l ook l i ke mounds of di rt.
Ci vi l i ans. They may know where mi nes or booby traps are l ocated i n
the resi denti al area. Ci vi l i ans stayi ng away from certai n pl aces or out
of cer tai n bui l di ngs ar e good i ndi cati ons of the pr esence of mi nes or
booby traps. Questi on ci vi l i ans to determi ne the exact l ocati ons.
Pi eces of wood or other debri s on a road. They may be i ndi cati ve of
pressure or pressure-rel ease FDs. These devi ces may be on the surface
or parti al l y buri ed.
Patterns of objects that coul d be used as a si ghti ng l i ne. The enemy
can use mi nes that are fi red by command, so road shoul ders and areas
cl ose to the objects shoul d be searched.
PROBING
Probi ng i s very ti me-consumi ng and i s used pri mari l y for cl eari ng operati ons,
sel f-extracti on, and covert breachi ng operati ons. Detecti on of mi nes by vi sual
or el ectr oni c methods shoul d be confi r med by pr obi ng. Use the fol l owi ng
procedures and techni ques when probi ng for mi nes:
Rol l up your sl eeves and remove your jewel r y to i ncr ease sensi ti vi ty.
Wear a Kevl ar hel met, wi th the chi n str ap buckl ed, and a pr otecti ve
fragmentati on vest.
Stay cl ose to the ground and move i n a prone posi ti on to reduce the
effects of an acci dental bl ast. When movi ng i nto a pr one posi ti on, the
prober shoul d
Squat down wi thout touchi ng hi s knees to the gr ound.
Scan forward up to 2 meters and to the si des up to 3 meters for
mi ne i ndi cators.
Probe the area around hi s feet and as far forward as possi bl e.
Kneel on the ground after the area i s found to be cl ear and
conti nue probi ng forward unti l he i s i n a prone posi ti on.
Use si ght and touch to detect tri p wi res, fuses, and pressure prongs.
Use a sl ender, nonmetal l i c object as a probe.
Probe every 5 centi meters across a 1-meter front.
Gentl y push the probe i nto the ground at an angl e that i s l ess than 45
degrees.
Appl y just enough pressure on the probe to si nk i t sl owl y i nto the
ground.
DANGER
Use extreme caution when probing. If the probe is pushed
straight down, its tip may detonate a pressure fuse.
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-3
I f the probe encounters resi stance and does not go i nto the ground
freel y, careful l y pi ck the soi l away wi th the ti p of the probe and remove
the l oose di rt by hand. Care must be taken to prevent functi oni ng the
mi ne.
When a sol i d object i s touched, stop probi ng and use two fi ngers from
each hand to car eful l y r emove the sur r oundi ng soi l and i denti fy the
object.
I f the object i s a mi ne, remove enough soi l to show the mi ne type and
mar k i ts l ocati on. Do not attempt to r emove or di sarm the mi ne. Use
expl osi ves to destr oy detected mi nes i n pl ace or use a gr appl i ng hook
and r ope to cause mi nes to sel f-detonate. Metal gr appl i ng hook s
shoul d not be used on magneti c-fused mi nes.
Probi ng i s extremel y stressful and tedi ous. The seni or l eader must set a l i mi t
to the ti me a pr ober i s actual l y pr obi ng i n the mi nefi el d. To deter mi ne a
r easonabl e ti me, th e l eader mu st con s i der METT-TC factor s, weather
condi ti ons, the thr eat l evel , the uni ts str ess l evel , and the pr ober s fati gue
l evel and state of mi nd. As a rul e, 20 to 30 mi nutes i s the maxi mum amount of
ti me that an i ndi vi dual can probe effecti vel y.
AN/PSS-12METALLIC MINE DETECTOR
The AN/PSS-12 mi ne detector (Fi gur e F-1, page F-4) i s a man-por tabl e
metal l i c mi ne-detecti on system that i s used to detect AT and AP l and mi nes.
I ts sear ch head contai ns two concentr i c coi l sthe tr ansmi tti ng (outer ) coi l
and the recei vi ng (i nner ) coi l . Duri ng operati on, the transmi tti ng coi l emi ts a
magneti c fi el d symmetr i cal l y above and bel ow the sear ch head. When thi s
fi el d encounter s metal objects, i t i nduces cur r ents i n these objects. When the
i nduced currents reach the recei vi ng coi l , an audi tory si gnal i s provi ded to the
oper ator. The detector i s abl e to detect l arge metal mi nes fr om a di stance of
several feet, but can detect l ow-metal mi nes from onl y a few i nches.
Unpacking
The system i s stored and transported i n a si ngl e carryi ng case.
Open the pressure-rel i ef val ve i n the carryi ng case.
Rel ease the l atches on the carryi ng case and open the top.
Remove the bag that contai ns system components.
Unzip the bag and ensure that all components are present (Fi gure F-2,
page F-4).
Remove the fol l owi ng i tems from the bag careful l y:
Tel escopi c pol e and search-head assembl y wi th cabl e and pl ug.
El ectroni c uni t.
WARNING
It is important to understand that the mine
detect or i s onl y eff ecti ve when there i s a
sufficient amount of metal in the mine.
C3, FM 20-32
F-4 Mine Awareness
Headset wi th cabl e and pl ug.
Ensure that the bag contai ns the fol l owi ng spare parts and test i tems:
Spare pl asti c bol t.
Spare cabl e cl amps.
5-centi meter test pi ece.
I nspect the search head for cracks or damage.
Figure F-1. AN/PSS-12 metallic mine detector
Figure F-2. AN/PSS-12 packed components
Spare
plastic bolt,
sparecable
clamps,
and a 5-cm
test piece
Telescopic
pole and
search-
head
assembly
Headset
with cable
and plug
Electronic
unit
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-5
I nspect cabl e connectors for damage and check for bent pi ns.
I nspect hook and pi l e materi al on headphones for servi ceabi l i ty.
I nspect cabl es to ensure that they are not cut, broken, or frayed.
I nspect the el ectroni c uni t for cracks, damage, and compl eteness. Thi s
i n cl u des en su r i ng th at al l s wi tches and k nobs ar e pr es en t an d
functi onal .
Ensure that tel escopi c pol e i s not bent, dented, or damaged and can be
extended and retracted.
Electronic-Unit Setup
Ensure that the power swi tch on the el ectroni c uni t i s i n the OFF
posi ti on (Fi gure F-3).
Rel ease the l atches on the battery-compartment cover and remove the
cover (Fi gure F-4).
Figure F-3. Electronic unit
Figure F-4. Battery installation
HEADPHONE
LOUDNESS
ON
OFF
SENSITIVITY
SEARCH HEAD
ON
OFF
Indicator lamp
C3, FM 20-32
F-6 Mine Awareness
I nsert batteri es accordi ng to marki ngs.
Rei nstal l and l atch the battery cover. Ensure that the l atches are i n
the proper cl osed posi ti on.
Press i n the catch (l ocated just bel ow the arm support) to unl ock the
tel escopi c pol e from the tr anspor t posi ti on. Tur n the outer tube unti l
the catch snaps i nto the gui de groove. Pul l the tel escopi c pol e out to a
sui tabl e l ength. Ensur e that the tel escopi c pol e i s l ocked i n one of
three fi xed posi ti ons.
Connect the headphones and the detector-head cabl es to the el ectroni c
u n i t. Fi t th e p r otecti v e ca p s of th e ca bl e con n ect or s t o th e
correspondi ng rubber caps on the el ectroni c uni t.
Put on the headphones. Pl ace the straps of the headphones over the
for ehead and on top of the head. The hook and pi l e mater i al goes
behi nd the head at the nape of the neck.
Connect the detector-head cabl e to the l ower (pl asti c) porti on of the
tel escopi c pol e.
Attach the l ower cabl e cl amp 5 centi meters above the wi ng nut.
Attach the second cabl e cl amp 5 centi meters down from the
j u n cti on of th e l ower an d u pper (al u mi n u m) por ti on of th e
tel escopi c pol e.
Attach the thi rd cabl e cl amp between the other two cabl e cl amps.
Do not attach the cabl e to thi s mi ddl e cl amp. Thi s cl amp wi l l
become the sensi ti vi ty marker cl amp.
Adjust the posi ti on of the handl e by l ooseni ng the knurl nut.
Reti ghten the nut when the handl e i s properl y posi ti oned.
Adjust the posi ti on of the search head so that i t wi l l be paral l el to the
ground.
Attach the el ectroni c uni t to the operators l oad-beari ng equi pment
(LBE) bel t usi ng the bel t cl i ps. Ri ght-handed sol di er s shoul d put the
el ectr oni c uni t on the l eft hi p. Left-handed sol di er s shoul d put the
el ectroni c uni t on the ri ght hi p. Put the safety strap over the shoul der.
WARNING
Ensure that the battery cover is completely closed and the latches
are in the proper position. This prevents the inadvertent opening
of the battery compartment during operation. Failure to do this
could result in injury, damage to the equipment, and/or improper
operation.
WARNING
The cable should not be attached to the aluminum portion of the pole,
because it causes the sensitivity of the mine detector to fluctuate.
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-7
Electronic-Unit Controls and Indicators
The AN/PSS-12 el ectr oni c uni t has the fol l owi ng contr ol s and i ndi cator s
(Fi gure F-3, page F-5):
On/off swi tch. Thi s swi tch i s the power control for the AN/PSS-12. I t
must be i n the ON posi ti on when detecti on i s bei ng conducted.
Loudness control . Thi s i s the vol ume control for the audi bl e al arm. I t
shoul d be adjusted to a comfortabl e l i steni ng l evel duri ng use.
Sensi ti vi ty control . The sensi ti vi ty control i s used to adjust the
detecti on char acter i sti cs of the mi ne-detector head. Detai l s on how to
set the sensi ti vi ty are provi ded bel ow.
I ndi cator l amp. Thi s l amp i ndi cates l ow battery vol tage or a system
mal functi on. I t provi des a short fl ash when the uni t i s turned on and
fl as h es con ti n u ou s l y wh en th e batter i es ar e l ow or th er e i s a
mal functi on.
Audi bl e si gnal s.
The system provi des an audi bl e si gnal through the headset when
the search head i s over or very near a metal object. The si gnal i s a
conti nuous tone that at fi rst resembl es a growl . The tone i ncreases
to a hi gher pi tch as the sear ch head i s moved cl oser to a metal
source (such as a mi ne) and decreases i n pi tch when moved away.
The AN/PSS-l 2 has a check tone that i s provi ded every 1 to 2
seconds. The tone resembl es a cl i cki ng sound, and i ts purpose i s to
conti nuousl y i nfor m the oper ator that the system i s functi oni ng
sati sfactor i l y. I f th e ch eck ton e di sappear s or i ts fr equ ency
decreases, di sconti nue searchi ng and determi ne the mal functi on.
A fl ashi ng i ndi cator l amp and a conti nuous tone (the same tone
hear d wi th a tar get r etur n, except i t does not abate when moved
away) on the headphone i ndi cates l ow battery vol tage. I f the uni t's
i ndi cator l amp fl ashes, change the batteri es and readjust the uni t.
Operation
Once the system i s assembl ed, i t i s r eady for adjustments pr i or to oper ati on.
Remove r i ngs, watches, and other j ewel r y befor e adj usti ng or usi ng the
system.
Power Up/Sensi ti vi ty Adjustments
Turn the sensi ti vi ty and l oudness knobs compl etel y countercl ockwi se.
Look at the i ndi cator l amp on the el ectroni c uni t and turn the on/off
swi tch to the ON posi ti on. The l amp shoul d gi ve a shor t fl ash. I f i t
does not, ensure that the batteri es are correctl y i nstal l ed or i nsert new
batteri es. I f the l amp fl ashes conti nuousl y, the battery vol tage may be
l ow.
Hol d the search head approxi matel y 0.6 meter above the ground, and
tur n the sensi ti vi ty knob cl ockwi se unti l a conti nuous tone i s hear d.
C3, FM 20-32
F-8 Mine Awareness
Whi l e thi s i s bei ng done, adjust the l oudness contr ol to a comfor tabl e
l i steni ng l evel .
Turn the sensi ti vi ty knob sl i ghtl y countercl ockwi se unti l the tone
ceases. The check tone (a cl i cki ng sound) shoul d sti l l be heard every 1
to 2 seconds. Readjust the l oudness contr ol i f necessar y. I f the check
tone di sappears or i ts frequency decreases, di sconti nue searchi ng and
determi ne the mal functi on.
Set the sensi ti vi ty i n ei ther of the fol l owi ng two ways:
The preferred method i s to use the most di ffi cul t to detect type of
mi ne (made safe wi thout changi ng the metal content) that i s
expected to be encountered.
I n the absence an actual mi ne, use the 5-centi meter test pi ece that
comes wi th the AN/PSS-12 packed components.
Bury the mi ne (i f you have a mi ne) at the deepest depth that threat
mi nes ar e expected to be found. I f you do not have a mi ne, bur y the
5-centi meter test pi ece ver ti cal l y so that the metal por ti on i s at the
deepest depth whi ch thr eat mi nes ar e expected to be found. I n the
absence of more speci fi c i nformati on, bur y the test pi ece at a depth of
5 centi meter s). Thi s pl aces the top of the test pi ece fl ush wi th the
grounds surface.
Pl ace the detector head l i ghtl y on the ground di rectl y above the mi ne/
test pi ece and adjust the sensi ti vi ty knob so that the mi ne i s detected
and you have an easi l y heard si gnal from the headset. Now, move the
detector away fr om the mi ne/test pi ece unti l the si gnal ceases to be
heard.
Fl oat the detector head l i ghtl y on the ground at a 0.3-meter-per-
second movement r ate acr oss the mi ne/test pi ece. Wi th the detector
head i n moti on, check to see i f the si gnal can agai n be easi l y heard. I f
not, i ncrease the sensi ti vi ty unti l the si gnal can be easi l y heard.
NOTE: The higher the sensitivity is set (between just being able to
detect the mine/test piece and where the signal from the soil first
becomes audible) the less thechance of missinga mine, but the more
thechanceof a falsealarmrate.
NOTE: Adjusting the sensitivity with the mine/test piece buried in
soil that is similar to the soil where the detector will be used is very
important. Otherwise, the sensitivity setting is simply a guess,
because different soil types and moisture content influence the
sensitivity of thedetector.
WARNING
In some conditions, you may not be able to detect a target mine/test
pi ece at the deepest depth the threat mi ne i s expected to be
encountered. Do not use the AN/PSS-12 to detect mines in those
conditions.
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-9
Sensi ti vi ty Level
The AN/PSS-12's sensi ti vi ty setti ng dr i fts over ti me. Dur i ng use, sol di er s
shoul d check the detector's sensi ti vi ty every 1 to 2 meters of forward advance
i n the mi ne l ane.
Wi th the sensi ti vi ty properl y set usi ng a buri ed mi ne/test pi ece, the
detector i s moved to an adjacent pl ace on the ground over a cl ear area.
To check the detector, a metal object (bayonet or other metal object) i s
sl i d down the l ower (pl asti c) por ti on of the tel escopi c pol e unti l the
oper ator hear s the same audi tor y si gnal that was emi tted when the
search head was pl aced over the buri ed mi ne/test pi ece.
At thi s poi nt on the l ower pl asti c shaft, the mi ddl e pl asti c cabl e cl amp
(th e mi ddl e cl amp pr ev i ou s l y attach ed wi th ou t th e cabl e) i s
posi ti oned. Thi s cl amp now becomes the sensi ti vi ty marker cl amp.
At approxi matel y every 1 to 2 meters of forward advance i n the mi ne
l ane (or mor e often i f desi r ed), the same metal object (bayonet) i s
mov ed down the sh aft to th e s en si ti v i ty mar k er cl amp an d the
oper ator l i stens to deter mi ne i f the same audi tor y si gnal i s emi tted.
When the same audi tor y si gnal i s not hear d, the sensi ti vi ty knob i s
adjusted up or down unti l the same audi tor y si gnal i s r epl i cated and
mai ntai ned.
NOTE: It is important that the operator maintain a consistent body
posture and angle between the telescopic pole and the search head
each timea sensitivity check is made.
Search Methods
Sweep across the l ane, keepi ng the enti re search head i n l i ght contact
wi th the ground. Sweepi ng speed shoul d be appr oxi matel y 0.3 meter
per second. Each sweep must be a mi ni mum of 1.5 meter s and must
overl ap the edge of the l ane by at l east one-hal f the wi dth of the search
head. Each sweep shoul d advance for war d at no mor e than 6 i nches
per sweep. The sweep and advance must be mai ntai ned as descri bed,
other wi se gaps wi l l be l eft between sweep paths or at the edge of the
l ane and a l ow-metal mi ne can be mi ssed.
DANGER
Low batteries may reduce detector performance well
before the indicator light comes on. If you need to
frequently adjust the sensitivity knob to maintain a
constant sensitivity setting or if the indicator light comes
on, discard all batteries and replace them with new ones.
Failure to do this could result in injury or death.
DANGER
Discontinue searching and readjust the sensitivity if the
check tone disappears or its frequency decreases. Failure
to do this could result in injury or death.
C3, FM 20-32
F-10 Mine Awareness
Perform a sensi ti vi ty check at approxi matel y every 1 to 2 meters of
forward advance i n the mi ne l ane (or more often i f desi r ed) and make
adjustments as necessary. I t i s i mportant that the operator mai ntai n a
consi stent body posture and angl e between the tel escopi c pol e and the
search head each ti me a sensi ti vi ty check i s made.
Pat the search head l i ghtl y on the ground (each pat advanci ng no more
than one-hal f the wi dth of the search head) i n l ow vegetati on or rocky
or uneven gr ound wher e smooth sweepi ng cannot be per for med.
Ensur e that the wi ng nut i s ti ght, so that the posi ti on between the
head and tel escopi c pol e i s fi xed.
NOTE: Many conditions of vegetation may not allow getting the
search head on theground. Donot push through vegetation toget the
search head on the ground. Different environments will require
slightly different techniques. If you cannot get the search head on or
very near the surface of the ground, the detector will not detect low-
metal mines.
NOTE: The AN-PSS/12 detectors performance is reduced when the
cable between the electroni c uni t and the top cable clamp i s
permitted to hang unrestrained during sweeps. The soldier can
control this problemby holdingthecablein his freehand.
Al arm I nvesti gati on/Mi ne I denti fi cati on
When an audi tor y si gnal i s hear d, the sol di er must i nvesti gate fur ther to
determi ne i f the si gnal i s a rel i abl e i ndi cati on of a mi ne.
End the sweep procedure and begi n the i nvesti gati on procedure at the
fi rst audi tory i ndi cati on from the detector of metal i n the ground. The
purpose of the i nvesti gati on i s to determi ne i f the si gnal i s repeatabl e
and, ther efor e, a l i kel y i ndi cati on of a mi ne. I f so, the i nvesti gati on
conti nues wi th the pur pose of gai ni ng mor e i nfor mati on concer ni ng
the si ze, type (hi gh-metal or l ow-metal mi ne), and speci fi c l ocati on of
the si gnal source.
NOTE: In some cases, the detector may provide a weak signal that
cannot be repeated during the initial investigation process. Do not
give up on the reliability of the signal until the sensitivity of the
detector has been checked to ensurethat it has not drifted to thelow
side.
NOTE: A footprint isdefined astheentirearea on theground wherea
mine or metallic source causes the detector to generate an auditory
signal. Small footprints, often as small as 10 to 15 centimeters in
diameter, will indicate low-metal mines. Footprints as large as 60 to
122centimeters in diameter may indicatehigh-metal mines.
WARNING
Always be aware of the potential for booby traps. The search head
should never be swept where its path cannot be visually cleared. If trip
wires are a threat, other techniques to detect trip wires should be used
before sweeping.
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-11
Note the l ocati on on the ground (at the center of the search head)
where the si gnal i s fi rst heard. Then attempt to devel op a set of poi nts
on the ground that i denti fi es the source footpri nt.
Devel op thi s footpri nt by fi rst movi ng the search head away from
the si gnal sour ce unti l no si gnal i s hear d and then sl i di ng the
search head toward the si gnal from several cl ock posi ti ons.
Note the speci fi c l ocati on of the center of the search head at each
l ocati on wher e the audi tor y si gnal begi ns. Once the si gnal i s
detected, the detector i s no l onger sl i d toward the potenti al source
to avoi d comi ng cl oser than necessary to a potenti al mi ne.
Repeat thi s process and mark or note the l ocati ons on the ground
unti l the si ze and sh ape of th e footpr i nt can be under stood.
Typi cal l y, the pattern wi l l resembl e a semi ci rcl e wi th the 6 ocl ock
posi ti on nearest the operator.
I denti fy the center of very l arge footpri nts (i f i mportant). The ai rborne
techni que may be qui cker than the method pr evi ousl y di scussed to
i denti fy the peri meter.
The search head must be adjusted so that i t can be hel d above the
ground wi th the head paral l el to the surface.
The detector can then be mani pul ated above the source unti l the
si gnal can be heard at onl y a si ngl e poi nt. Move the search head i n
a cr ossi ng patter n, whi ch shoul d pr oduce a smal l er and smal l er
si gnal ar ea as the patter n i s r epeated at gr adual l y i ncr easi ng
hei ghts. Near the sur face, the si gnal can be hear d over a br oad
l ateral area, but as the search head i s rai sed hi gher off the ground,
thi s ar ea becomes pr ogr essi vel y smal l er. As the sear ch head i s
rai sed hi gher off the ground, the area where the si gnal can sti l l be
heard i s reduced to a poi nt.
The center of the mi ne or metal source shoul d be di rectl y bel ow
thi s poi nt. Do not i gnor e the potenti al for l ow-metal mi nes to be
hi dden i n thi s l arge footpri nt on the ground.
WARNING
The large footprints of high-metal mines may mask signals from low-
metal mines within the footprint. Always assume that there are low-
metal mines within the large footprint area.
WARNING
Always be aware of the potential for booby traps and UXO. The search
head should never be swept where its path cannot be visually cleared.
If trip wires are a threat, other techniques to detect trip wires should be
used before sweeping.
C3, FM 20-32
F-12 Mine Awareness
Other Operati onal Acti ons
Keep mi ne detectors at l east 2 meters apart duri ng setti ng,
adjustment, and operati onal phases to prevent i nterference.
Change the batteri es i mmedi atel y i f the i ndi cator l amp fl ashes, a
constant audi bl e tone i s heard, or the check tone (cl i cki ng sound) stops
and r eadjust the sensi ti vi ty. The sear ch sensi ti vi ty i s affected l ong
befor e the l amp begi ns fl ashi ng, and the uni t wi l l be unusabl e unti l
fresh batteri es are i nstal l ed.
Ensure that onl y the l ower part of the tel escopi c pol e i s used when the
equi pment i s operated by a sol di er i n the prone posi ti on.
Turn the uni t off after compl eti ng the search operati ons.
Disassembly and Packing
Ensure that the on/off swi tch on the el ectroni c uni t i s i n the OFF
posi ti on.
Di sconnect the headphones from the el ectroni c uni t.
Detach the cabl e connecti on on the el ectroni c uni t for the magneti c
search head, and repl ace the protecti ve caps on the pl ug and socket.
Rel ease the el ectroni c uni t's battery-cover l atches, and remove the
battery cover.
Remove the batteri es, and ensure that none of the battery cases have
r uptur ed; i f they have, noti fy your super vi sor. Rei nstal l the batter y
cover and l atch i t.
Remove the cabl e cl i ps from the tel escopi c pol e.
Col l apse the tel escopi c pol e to i ts travel l ength, and turn i ts outer tube
unti l i t i s l ocked by the catch. Loosen the pl asti c r estrai ni ng bol t, and
fol d i n the magneti c search head.
Pack the components i n the carry bag as shown i n Fi gure F-2, page F-
4. For l ong-term storage, do not put batter i es i n the car r y bag. Cl ose
and zi p the carry bag.
Pl ace the carry bag i n the metal transport case, and l atch the case.
Cl ose the pressure-rel i ef val ve.
As i n probi ng, the seni or l eader must set a l i mi t to the ti me an i ndi vi dual can
use the mi ne detector. The ti me l i mi t i s deter mi ned by METT-TC factor s,
weath er con di ti on s, th e th r eat l ev el , th e u n i t's s tr es s l ev el , an d th e
i ndi vi dual 's fati gue l evel and state of mi nd. As a rul e, 20 to 30 mi nutes i s the
maxi mum amount of ti me an i ndi vi dual can use the detector effecti vel y.
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-13
EVACUATION DRILLS
A wel l -devel oped, wel l -r ehear sed evacuati on dr i l l i s necessar y to extr act an
i ndi vi dual or a uni t fr om a mi ned ar ea. Uni ts must devel op evacuati on dr i l l s
for di smounted and mounted oper ati ons. Each type of oper ati on shoul d
i ncl ude two dr i l l sone usi ng a mi ne detector (mounted extr acti on) and one
wi thout usi ng a mi ne detector (di smounted extracti on).
Mounted Extraction
The convoy commander hal ts the convoy and reports to hi gher
headquarters.
No vehi cl es move and no troops di smount unl ess di rected to do so.
El ements provi de 360-degree securi ty from vehi cl es.
Troops thrown from vehi cl es shoul d not move. Personnel are extracted
by usi ng di smounted evacuati on procedures i f el ectroni c detectors are
not avai l abl e.
The seni or l eader, i f engi neer s ar e not avai l abl e, assesses the si tuati on
and di r ects vehi cl es to back up al ong the entr y-r oute tr acks. I f an
i mmedi ate thr eat exi sts, occupants of damaged vehi cl es evacuate out
the r ear of th e vehi cl e an d al on g the vehi cl e-entr y tr ack s. I f no
i mmedi ate threat exi sts, occupants of damaged vehi cl es remai n i n the
vehi cl e unti l i t i s extracted.
Engi neers, i f avai l abl e, sweep the area and provi de a cl eared path for
movement. They
Cl ear a l ane that i s wi de enough for the towi ng vehi cl e.
Use al l avai l abl e tow cabl es to i ncrease the di stance before towi ng
i f an M88 i s unavai l abl e. Remember, an M88 has a wi der tr ack
base than other tracked vehi cl es.
Ensure that al l towi ng-shackl e sets are compl ete and mounted.
Ensure that the towi ng vehi cl e has tow cabl es on the front and the
rear i f possi bl e.
Ensure that rear cabl es are attached to the l ower mounts. Thi s
al l ows th e cr ew to r ecover the veh i cl e wi thou t tou chi ng the
ground.
Pul l the vehi cl e out at l east two-vehi cl e l engths before swi tchi ng to
a tow bar. When towi ng a vehi cl e after a mi ne str i ke, the chance of
fi re i s greater because of possi bl e damage to the vehi cl e.
Provi de fi rst ai d and conduct casual ty evacuati on or have medi cs
provi de treatment and medi cal evacuati on.
Gui de vehi cl es through the safe area.
Mark, record, and report the threat.
Conti nue the mi ssi on.
C3, FM 20-32
F-14 Mine Awareness
Dismounted Extraction
Al l personnel freeze and crouch i nto a l ow-si l houette posi ti on. Be
cauti ous when mak i ng thi s movement to ensur e that you do not
detonate another mi ne. I f a pr otecti ve mask i s wor n on your hi p, do
not al l ow i t to come i n contact wi th the gr ound because contact may
detonate a mi ne. Do not hel p casual ti es because you coul d al so become
a casual ty.
The l eader desi gnates a securi ty el ement and a sol di er to assi st i n
casual ty evacuati on.
Sol di ers extract al ong the path they entered. I f possi bl e, they step i n
the same pl aces as before; i f i mpossi bl e, they probe thei r way out.
The securi ty el ement, consi sti ng of i ndi vi dual s who are not i n the
mi nefi el d, sets up securi ty for the uni t.
The sol di er extracti ng the casual ty
Probes a 1-meter-wi de path to the casual ty and marks the cl eared
path wi th foot powder or marki ng tape as i t i s probed.
Probes around the casual ty to cl ear the area.
Performs fi rst ai d.
Carri es the casual ty out of the mi nefi el d al ong the cl eared path.
(Str etcher par ti es do not enter the ar ea unl ess a 2-meter-wi de
path has been cl eared to the casual ty.)
The uni t marks the threat and assembl es back at the ral l y poi nt.
The uni t reports the i nci dent when i t i s 50 to 100 meters away from
the mi nefi el d. I f sol di ers are i n the mi nefi el d and radi o transmi ssi on i s
requi red, move the transmi tter at l east 300 meters from the mi nefi el d.
Thi s prevents acci dental mi ne detonati on from the radi o si gnal .
The uni t provi des fi rst ai d and conducts casual ty evacuati on or has
medi cs provi de treatment and medi cal evacuati on.
The uni t conti nues the mi ssi on.
Extraction fromScatterableMines
The i ndi vi dual who di scovers the mi ne i ni ti ates the al arm accordi ng to
the uni t SOP.
Uni t personnel at the command post recei ve the al arm and al ert
others.
The uni t TOC requests counterbattery fi re i f the mi nes are arti l l ery-
del i vered.
Vehi cl e commanders check the i mmedi ate area. They do not di smount.
I nspect the vehi cl e for mi nes and/or tr i p wi r es. Note and r ecor d the
l ocati on of al l mi nes found on or around the vehi cl e.
Personnel l eave any vehi cl e that i s touchi ng or i s bl ocked by AT mi nes
i n pl ace unti l the remai nder of the uni t i s out of the mi nefi el d.
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-15
Uni t l eaders i denti fy unmovabl e vehi cl es and desi gnate one or more
l anes for r emai ni ng per sonnel and vehi cl es to use when exi ti ng the
mi nefi el d.
Leaders i denti fy a cl earance team to extract remai ni ng vehi cl es and
personnel . The cl earance team
Uses vi sual means to l ocate mi nes and marks vehi cl e l anes at
l east 4 meters wi de. Personnel mark l anes accordi ng to the tacti cal
si tuati on and the thr eat i n the ar ea; however, they mar k them so
th at team per son n el can r een ter th e mi n efi el d an d r ecov er
equi pment and vehi cl es.
Destroys or removes al l mi nes i n l anes, usi ng a grapnel hook or
other means as necessar y, i n the sequence di r ected by the team
l eader. Per sonnel detonate unmovabl e mi nes to r educe per sonnel
i njury and equi pment damage.
Vehi cl e commanders di rect personnel to ground-gui de vehi cl es out of
the mi nefi el d. Ground gui des
Ensure that i ndi vi dual el ements move onl y when di rected by the
chai n of command.
Pl ace equi pment that i s not i n contact wi th a mi ne or a tri p wi re
onto vehi cl es.
Di rect vehi cl es to the desi gnated exi t l ane or, i f safer, al l ow
vehi cl es to exi t the mi nefi el d on thei r own.
Cl earance team personnel , ai ded by uni t personnel , remove
equi pment and vehi cl es r emai ni ng after i ni ti al extr acti on fr om the
mi nefi el d. They
Reenter the mi nefi el d usi ng the same exi t routes.
Detonate the mi ni mum number of mi nes necessary to remove
vehi cl es and equi pment from the mi nefi el d.
Avoi d touchi ng mi nes. Personnel shoul d take al l possi bl e
precauti ons to ensure that mi nes are not jarred.
Pl ace sandbags near mi nes, i f possi bl e, to mi ni mi ze damage to
vehi cl es and equi pment.
Remove mi nes from equi pment by usi ng a l i ne or other remote
means. Ensure that the enti re team i s far enough from the mi ne to
avoi d casual ti es i f i t expl odes.
Pl ace expl osi ve charges to mi ni mi ze vehi cl e damage when
detonati ng mi nes on the ground.
Cl earance team personnel
Cl ear suffi ci ent mi nes to al l ow for mi ssi on accompl i shment i f the
posi ti on cannot be evacuated.
Cl ear and mark communi cati on l anes between posi ti ons.
Conti nue the mi ssi on.
C3, FM 20-32
F-16 Mine Awareness
Survival Rules
Many of our al l i es have extensi ve experi ence i n mi ne operati ons. Among them
i s Canada. They have pr oduced sever al manual s and vi deotapes on mi ne
awar eness and have devel oped the fol l owi ng survival rules. They ar e ver y
practi cal and can be appl i ed to our sol di ers as wel l .
I f you did not drop it, donot pick it up.
All terrain and structures arepotentially mined or booby-trapped.
Beware of areas associated with basic human needs. They could be
mined or booby-trapped.
I mmediately report all confirmed or suspected mines.
Leaveminedisposal totheEOD personnel and combat engineers.
Avoid touching or removing foreign objects, no matter how attractive.
Theycould bemined or booby-trapped.
Avoid verges becausethey could bemined. Stay on thetraveled road.
Mark and avoid UXOs if possible. Consider themunstable.
Develop and rehearseeffectiveevacuation drills.
A convoy pr ovi des better pr otecti on agai nst mi ne and UXO thr eat than a
si ngl e vehi cl e. I n convoy movement, some rul es of thumb shoul d be fol l owed:
The l ead vehi cl e shoul d be one of the heavi est (2 -ton, 5-ton) vehi cl es
i n the uni t and be hardened agai nst a mi ne threat.
A hi gh-mobi l i ty, mul ti purpose, wheel ed vehi cl e (HMMWV) or a
HEMMT shoul d not l ead a convoy unl ess absol utel y necessar y. These
vehi cl es ar e extr emel y vul ner abl e to mi ne and UXO thr eat and ar e
di ffi cul t to harden wi thout commerci al products.
Casualty Treatment and Evacuation
Casual ty tr eatment and evacuati on shoul d be a par t of ever y mi ssi on or der.
I ncorporate the fol l owi ng el ements i nto the uni t SOP, and ensure that sol di ers
under stand them. Emphasi ze that r ushi ng to hel p a mi ne vi cti m can l ead to
the rescuer becomi ng a casual ty.
Reassure the casual ty.
Do not pani c and create another casual ty.
Cal l hi gher headquarters at the earl i est opportuni ty, and request a
speci al i st engi neer and medi cal hel p as soon as possi bl e.
Extract yoursel f and mark the path as you go.
Reenter al ong the marked path.
Cl ear a path to the casual ty.
Admi ni ster fi rst ai d.
Recover the casual ty.
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-17
Mark the area after i t i s cl ear, record i t on the map, and report to
hi gher headquarters.
Medi cal per sonnel and combat l i fesaver s shoul d anti ci pate and tr ai n for the
fol l owi ng i njuri es:
Bl ast i njuri es wi th fragments embedded.
Burns.
Fractures.
Traumati c amputati ons.
Bl unt trauma.
Psychol ogi cal anxi ety reacti on.
LEADER
Leader ski l l s i n effecti ve pl anni ng, ri sk management, and mi ne-data tracki ng/
di ssemi nati on can greatl y enhance force protecti on and reduce casual ti es i n a
mi n ed en v i r on men t. U n i t l ea der s mu s t tr a i n th ems el v es an d th ei r
subordi nates on mi ne-awareness tasks.
RISK MANAGEMENT
Ri sk management r educes the fr equency of mi ne and UXO str i k es and
di mi ni shes the physi cal effects when they do occur. I t i s used to i denti fy
h a z a r d s , d e f i n e r i s k s , i d en t i f y met h od s f or con t r ol , a n d i d en t i f y
r esponsi bi l i ti es for i mpl ementati on. The r i sk-management pr ocess enabl es
commander s and staffs to defi ne acceptabl e r i sk l evel s and i mpl emen t
contr ol s unti l ri sks are commensurate wi th the mi ssi on. Ri sk management i s
a si mpl e, fi ve-step process:
I denti fy hazards.
Assess the ri sk of each hazard.
Make ri sk deci si ons and devel op control s.
I mpl ement control s.
Supervi se.
Identify Hazards
Thi s i s often the most di ffi cul t part of ri sk management. A mi ne hazard i s the
condi ti on that r esul ts fr om the i nter acti ons of a mi ne, a catal yst (such as
acti vati on from a sol di er or vehi cl e), and a common spati al rel ati onshi p. These
hazar ds ar e defi ned i n ter ms of mi ne types (AT, AP, fuses, metal content,
AHD), how a sol di er mi ght encounter mi nes (di smounted or mounted and the
type of vehi cl e), and the l ocati ons wher e encounter s woul d be most l i kel y.
Mi nes ar e sel dom empl oyed i n i sol ati on, so compl ete hazar d defi ni ti on
i ncl udes the compl ex obstacl e and the coveri ng fi res.
C3, FM 20-32
F-18 Mine Awareness
Assess theRisk of Each Hazard
Thi s r equi r es deter mi ni ng the pr obabi l i ty of a mi ne str i ke and the effects of
the str i ke. An effecti ve r i sk assessment i s cr i ti cal for eval uati ng the combat
effecti veness of a uni t i n a mi ned envi r onment. Ri sk-assessment cr i ter i a i s
devel oped by usi ng Tabl e F-1. A sampl e ri sk assessment i s shown i n Tabl e F-2,
page F-19.
MakeRisk Decisions and Develop Controls
Thi s step r equi r es deci si on maker s to i denti fy acti ons that can r educe the
pr obabi l i ty and/or sever i ty to acceptabl e l evel s. Thi s may be accompl i shed by
taki ng acti ons to reduce the probabi l i ty of a mi ne stri ke or by provi di ng more
protecti on to the sol di er or materi el to reduce severi ty of a mi ne stri ke. Often,
i t i s a combi nati on of the two.
Implement Controls
Leader s must appl y the i denti fi ed contr ol s to r educe the pr obabi l i ty and
severi ty of a mi ne stri ke.
Table F-1. Risk-assessment criteria
Hazard Probability
Frequent
(A)
Probable
(B)
Occasional
(C)
Remote
(D)
Improbable
(E)
H
a
z
a
r
d
S
e
v
e
r
i
t
y
Single Item
Likely to
occur
frequently
Will occur
several times
during life of
item
Likely to
occur
sometime
during life of
item
Unlikely, but
possible to
occur during
life of item
So unlikely,
can assume
occurrence
will not take
place
Fleet/Inventory
Occurs
continuously
Will occur
frequently
Will occur
several times
Unlikely but
reasonably
expected to
occur
Unlikely to
occur, but
possible
CATASTROPHIC
(death or system
loss)
I High High High High Medium
CRITICAL
(severe injury or
occupational
illness or major
damage)
II High High High Medium Low
MARGINAL
(minor injury or
occupational
illness or minor
damage)
III High Medium Medium Low Low
NEGLIGIBLE
(less than minor
injury, illness, or
damage)
IV Medium Low Low Low Low
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-19
Table F-2. Sample risk assessment
DIRECTIONS: Circle the appropriate number in each section and total them. Appropriate directions
are at the end of the assessment block.
TRAINING (Circle One)
1. Experience working in mined areas
2. No experience working in mined areas, but trained
3. No experience or training working in or around mined areas
TYPE OF AREA (Circle One)
1. Area known by friendly forces to be clear of mines
2. Old confrontation line or suspected mined area
3. Area known to be mined
LIGHT AND WEATHER (Circle One)
1. Daylight with clear weather
2. Daylight with poor weather
3. Darkness
MISSION (Circle One)
1. One that your soldiers have done before
2. One that your subordinate leaders have done before
3. An unfamiliar type of mission
ON OR OFF ROAD (Circle One)
1. Approved division/corps route
2. Paved road
3. Unpaved road
4. Cross-country
SLEEP (Circle One)
1. 6 hours of sleep in last 24
4. Awake for more than 24 hours.
TYPE OF VEHICLES IN CONVOY (Circle One)
1. Armored
2. Mixed, armored vehicles leading
3. Wheeled
4. On foot
AVAILABILITY OF MINE INFORMATION (Circle One)
1. Updated mined-area graphics in each vehicle
2. Updated mined-area graphics in the lead vehicle or a reliable, knowledgeable guide is available
3. No upgraded mined-area graphics are available
GROUND COVER (Circle One)
1. Dry, hard ground with short grass
2. Dry, hard ground with long grass or vegetation
3. Wet, muddy ground or snow less than 10 centimeters deep
4. Snow more than 10 centimeters deep
ROAD USE (Circle One)
1. Heavy tracked vehicles or trucks recently used the road
2. Light wheeled vehicles recently used the road
3. No traffic observed on the road; some tire marks
4. No traffic observed on the road; no tire marks
10-16 Continue the mission. Keep following training and common-sense rules that apply to working
around mines.
17-24 Continue the mission. Remember to stress safety and mine awareness when you brief soldiers.
Ensure that leaders maintain positive control of personnel.
25-35 Consider postponing the mission until better conditions are attained. If you must continue the
mission, constantly stress mine awareness and safety. Ask higher headquarters for engineer support to
accomplish the mission. Conduct mine-awareness training.
C3, FM 20-32
F-20 Mine Awareness
Supervise
Thi s step ensur es that contr ol s ar e i mpl emented and that a measur e of
qual i ty control exi sts to ensure a quanti fi ed l evel of cl earance.
The k ey to usi ng r i sk management successful l y i s to empl oy i t at each
echel onfr om the commander, thr ough the tacti cal pl anner, to the sol di er s
executi ng the mi ssi on. Each l evel i denti fi es hazar ds, el i mi nates or r educes
hazards as feasi bl e, and communi cates the resi dual hazards to the next l ower
echel on. As such, each echel on works as a fi l ter to control unacceptabl e ri sks.
Trai ni ng provi des sol di ers wi th an understandi ng of equi pment
l i mi tati ons and pl ays a cri ti cal r ol e i n the r i sk-management pr ocess.
Capabi l i ti es an d l i mi tati on s of Ar my s y s tems ar e tak en i n to
consi derati on duri ng the devel opment of doctri ne and TTP.
Ri sk management at the tacti cal pl anni ng l evel requi res a thorough
knowl edge and awar eness of the hazar ds and potenti al contr ol s that
can be empl oyed. The pl anni ng pr ocess r equi r es a methodi cal and
di sci pl i ned techni que to i denti fy the hazards and devel op appropri ate
contr ol s for oper ati ng i n a mi ned envi r onment. The contr ol s for
counter mi ne oper ati ons, di scussed i n Chapter s 9 and 11 and i n FM
3-34.2, pr ovi de a fr amewor k for r i sk-managi ng hazar ds associ ated
wi th mi nes.
The executi on l evel i s the cul mi nati ng poi nt of ri sk management. I t i s
where sol di ers and l eaders empl oy the systems provi ded to accompl i sh
the mi ssi on. The amount of r esi dual hazar ds r emai ni ng after the
fi l teri ng process from echel ons above may wel l determi ne success. The
i ndi vi dual sol di er i s the l ast el ement to control any resi dual hazar ds.
Opti mi zi ng the components of ri sk management at the tacti cal pl anni ng l evel
i s mor e chal l engi ng as emer gi ng technol ogi cal l y dependent systems br i ng
more vari abl es i nto the mi ssi on. Whi l e tacti cal i ntel l i gence i s the key el ement
i n i denti fyi ng mi ne-rel ated hazards, techni cal knowl edge i s the key el ement i n
assessi ng the ri sks associ ated wi th mi ne hazards. Thi s knowl edge assi mi l ates
the tacti cal i ntel l i gence wi th the capabi l i ti es of the uni ts equi pment, the
per for mance of thr eat mi nes, and the pr otecti on pr ovi ded to our sol di er s by
thei r vehi cl es or personal protecti ve equi pment. The staff engi neer, usi ng hi s
engi neer C
2
sy stem to r i sk -manage each COA, pr ovi des th e man euv er
commander and hi s staff wi th i nfor mati on on r i sks and potenti al contr ol s
ear l y on i n the pl anni ng process. Each subsequent commander must per form
the same anal ysi s and i ncorporate the mi ne threat i nto ri sk management.
RECORDING AND MINE-DATA TRACKING
Obtai n i n g an d di s s emi n ati n g i n for mati on ar e th e k ey s to battl efi el d
management. Uni ts encounter i ng mi nefi el ds or expl osi ve devi ces shoul d
fol l ow a fi ve-step pr ocessstop, secur e, mar k, report, and avoi d. Uni ts must
pr ovi de adequate i nfor mati on to thei r hi gher headquar ter s to ensur e that
fol l ow-on el ements ar e wel l i nfor med. I nfor mati on must i ncl ude known or
suspected mi nefi el d l ocati ons, types of mi nes (i f known), the marki ng method,
the ti me encounter ed, and any addi ti onal i nfor mati on that may be of use to
the cl eari ng uni t.
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-21
Di vi si on and maneuver br i gade engi neer pl anni ng cel l s must establ i sh a
central control cel l for mi ne-cl earance i nformati on. The central control cel l
Mai ntai ns a current si tuati on map and overl ay that depi cts fri endl y
and enemy mi nes and obstacl es.
Mai ntai ns and updates i nformati on on mi nefi el d tracki ng and route
status.
Recei ves and mai ntai ns mi nefi el d recordi ng forms wi thi n the uni ts
AO (i ncl udes host-nati on mi nefi el d data i f avai l abl e).
Mai ntai ns a database of mi ne i nformati on.
Processes, anal yzes, updates, and di ssemi nates the i nformati on to
subordi nate commanders and staff.
MINE-INCIDENT REPORT
A mi ne i nci dent i ncl udes any unpl anned acti vi ty i nvol vi ng a mi ne, UXO, or
booby trap. I t al so i ncl udes near mi sses that coul d have r esul ted i n potenti al
damage or i njury. The mi ne-i nci dent report i s a techni cal report that fol l ows a
ser i ous-i nci dent r epor t. The r epor t shoul d be submi tted as soon as possi bl e
(the l ocal SOP wi l l i ndi cate ti me r equi r ements). A sampl e mi ne-i nci dent
report i s shown i n Fi gure 11-12, page 11-26.
TRAINING
Modern combat i s compl ex, l ethal , and demandi ng. Sol di er s must be capabl e
of per formi ng thei r mi ssi ons i n any type of battl efi el d envi r onment. Cur r ent
doctr i ne and TTP pr ovi de sol di er s wi th gui del i nes to accompl i sh thei r tasks
and qual i ty equi pment provi des the means. The common thread that connects
doctr i ne, tacti cs, and equi pment i s qual i ty tr ai ni ng. To fi ght and wi n, uni ts
must tr ai n thei r sol di er s to execute al l war ti me mi ssi ons successful l y. They
must use ever y tr ai ni ng oppor tuni ty to i mpr ove sol di er, l eader, and uni t task
per for mance. Wi thout qual i ty tr ai ni ng, no amount of wor l d-cl ass equi pment
can make the sol di er effecti ve or make hi m survi ve i n a warti me envi ronment.
Even the best doctr i ne i n the wor l d i s wor thl ess unl ess sol di er s r ecei ve
effecti ve trai ni ng. Thi s i s especi al l y true wi th mi ne-awareness trai ni ng.
Sol di er s must be tr ai ned to thi nk mi ne awar eness as wel l as per for m mi ne-
r el ated acti ons. Deci si ons, acti ons, and r eacti ons must become automati c to
ever y sol di er. Thi s requi r es that al l sol di er s r ecei ve mi ne-awar eness tr ai ni ng
ear l y i n thei r car eer s. I t must begi n at ear l y entr y tr ai ni ng wi th basi c
i ndi vi dual tasks and conti nue through advanced uni t trai ni ng wi th col l ecti ve
tasks. Sol di er s who sur vi ve mi ne thr eats can sur vi ve mi ne war far e, but i t
requi res conti nual trai ni ng.
INDIVIDUAL TRAINING
Basic Mine-Awareness Training
Thi s i s the most i mpor tant phase for pr epar i ng sol di er s to survi ve i n a mi ne
envi r onment. I ndi vi dual sol di er s must be tr ai ned to a l evel that meets the
envi r onment they wi l l face on the moder n battl efi el d. Basi c mi ne-awar eness
tasks (mi ne detecti on, survi val rul es, mi nefi el d i ndi cators, and procedures for
sel f-extracti on from a mi nefi el d) must begi n earl y i n the sol di ers career.
C3, FM 20-32
F-22 Mine Awareness
Wi th an esti mated 80 to 100 mi l l i on mi nes depl oyed wor l dwi de, countermi ne
consi der ati ons must become second natur e to mi ssi on pl anner s. Fr om CSS
operati ons i n the rear area to cl ose combat operati ons i n the mai n battl e area,
ther e i s no pl ace on the battl efi el d that i s safe from mi nes. Thi s i s especi al l y
tr ue wi th the thr eat of SCATMI NEs that ar e depl oyed fr om ai r cr aft and
i ndi rect-fi r e sources. The need for i ni ti al counter mi ne tr ai ni ng wi l l get more
cri ti cal as the modern battl efi el d becomes more l ethal .
Annual Mine-Awareness Training
Uni ts exerci si ng mi l i tary ski l l s at the Nati onal Trai ni ng Center, Joi nt Reserve
Trai ni ng Center, or the Combat Maneuver Trai ni ng Center can rei nforce and
eval uate thei r awar eness tr ai ni ng. Sol di er s shoul d be ful l y tr ai ned on the
i ndi vi dual and col l ecti ve tasks that ar e requi r ed to suppor t thei r uni ts mi ne-
rel ated mi ssi ons before depl oyi ng to the combat trai ni ng centers. An effecti ve
method to meet thi s chal l enge i s a wel l -pl anned annual trai ni ng program that
tr ai ns sol di er s on i ndi vi dual and col l ecti ve mi ne-awar eness tasks. The pl an
shoul d addr ess the r equi r ements for i ni ti al col l ecti ve-task tr ai ni ng and
sustai nment trai ni ng.
Predeployment Mine-Awareness Training
Wi th an ever-changi ng gl obal envi r onment, the pr obabi l i ty of pr ojecti ng US
for ces to var i ous geogr aphi cal l ocati ons i s ver y r eal . I t i s extr emel y cr i ti cal
that uni ts be si tuati onal l y awar e. Each fl ash poi nt i n the wor l d contai ns i ts
own type of thr eat. Many of these thr eats can be neutr al i zed or r educed
thr ough qual i ty pr edepl oyment tr ai ni ng. Qual i ty pr edepl oyment mi ne-
awareness trai ni ng enhances the abi l i ty of the uni t to perform i ts mi ssi on and
i ncreases the confi dence of sol di ers.
Uni ts must tr ai n i ntensi vel y when al erted for a depl oyment. Pr edepl oyment
tr ai ni ng i s the ti me to pol i sh and r efi ne tr ai ni ng and to focus on theater-
speci fi c operati ons. Predepl oyment trai ni ng i s i ntended to augment i ndi vi dual
and col l ecti ve trai ni ng, not repl ace i t.
In-Theater Mine-Awareness Training
Tr ai ni ng does not end wi th pr edepl oyment tr ai ni ng. Uni ts must tr ai n i n the
cou n tr y wh er e th ey depl oy. Th ey n eed to pl an an d con du ct r ou ti n e
sustai nment trai ni ng on i ndi vi dual and col l ecti ve mi ne-awareness tasks. Thi s
i s an essenti al i ngr edi ent of for ce-pr otecti on oper ati ons. I n-theater mi ne-
awar eness tr ai ni ng r ei nfor ces the sol di er s exi sti ng ski l l s and pl aces mi ne
survi val i n the forefront of each sol di ers mi nd.
LEADER TRAINING
Offi cers and NCOs must recei ve mi ne-awareness trai ni ng i n basi c and career
courses. Commi ssi oned and noncommi ssi oned l eaders must be tr ai ned on the
use and the empl oyment of the equi pment that they wi l l use i n the fi el d.
Offi cer basi c cour ses and offi cer and NCO advanced cour ses must i ncl ude
access to model i ng/si mul ati on tr ai ni ng. Usi ng model i ng/si mul ati on enabl es
the l eader to pr acti ce deci si on -mak i n g, empl oyment, and sustai nmen t
oper ati ons i n a si mul ated mi ne envi r onment. Thi s devel ops the si tuati onal
awareness requi red for ti mel y, accurate deci si ons.
C3, FM 20-32
Mine Awareness F-23
UNIT TRAINING
The Ar my Tr ai ni ng and Eval uati on Pr ogr am r emai ns the most effecti ve
measur e of i ndi vi dual and col l ecti ve tr ai ni ng effecti veness shor t of actual
combat. I t provi des l eaders wi th the opportuni ty to veri fy the effecti veness of
vi r tual and actual tr ai ni ng wi thout endanger i ng sol di er s wi th mi ne effects.
Uni ts must i ncl ude mi ne-thr eat scenar i os i n thei r home-stati on tr ai ni ng
exer ci ses. Basi c mi ssi ons i ncl ude mi nefi el d detecti on, r educti on, mar ki ng,
proofi ng, and recordi ng. Commanders are requi red to assess thei r uni ts state
of profi ci ency i n mi ne-awareness tasks on a routi ne basi s.
Mi ne awar eness i s a cr i ti cal , per i shabl e ski l l . I t must be tr ai ned effecti vel y
and sustai ned on a conti nuous basi s. I f a uni t proper l y tr ai ns i ts sol di er s on
mi ne awar eness, i t wi l l mai ntai n i ts for ce, boost i ts sol di er s confi dence i n
thei r abi l i ti es, and accompl i sh i ts mi ssi on more effecti vel y. Mi ne awareness i s
not a l i abi l i ty; i t i s an i nvestment i n a uni t's future.
Countermine Data G-1
Appendix G
Countermine Data
Thi s appendi x provi des a compi l ati on of countermi ne i nformati on to assi st
commanders i n the deci si on-maki ng process for countermi ne operati ons.
BREACHING ASSETS VERSUS THREAT OBSTACLES
Tabl es G-1 and G-2, pages G-2 through G-8, provi de gener al gui dance on the
effect of breachi ng assets versus threat obstacl es.
FOREIGN MINE DATA
Tabl es G-3 thr ough G-7, pages G-9 thr ough G-12, pr ovi de for ei gn mi ne
characteri sti cs.
FOREIGN MINEFIELD EMPLACEMENT DATA
Tabl e G-8, page G-13, pr ov i des for ei gn mi n efi el d empl acemen t data.
I nfor mati on i s pr esented i n the pr obabi l i ty of occur r ence based on hi stor i cal
data.
FOREIGN MINE DELIVERY SYSTEMS
Tabl e G-9, pages G-14 and G-15, contai ns char acter i sti cs of for ei gn mi ne
del i very systems.
NOTE: Blank areas in the above tables indicate that the information
is not applicable or that it was unavailable when this manual was
published.
FM 20-32
G-2 Countermine Data
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
1
.
M
o
u
n
t
e
d
b
r
e
a
c
h
i
n
g
a
s
s
e
t
s
v
e
r
s
u
s
t
h
r
e
a
t
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
A
s
s
e
t
T
r
a
c
k
-
W
i
d
t
h
A
T
M
i
n
e
F
u
l
l
-
W
i
d
t
h
A
T
M
i
n
e
S
i
d
e
-
A
t
k
A
T
M
i
n
e
C
m
d
-
D
e
t
B
l
a
s
t
M
i
n
e
A
T
D
i
t
c
h
a
n
d
O
t
h
e
r
G
a
p
s
W
i
r
e
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
M
C
B
w
i
t
h
d
o
g
-
b
o
n
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
I
s
m
o
r
e
t
h
a
n
9
0
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
t
o
1
2
i
n
c
h
e
s
d
e
e
p
a
t
s
p
e
e
d
s
l
e
s
s
t
h
a
n
1
0
k
p
h
(
s
o
i
l
d
e
p
e
n
d
e
n
t
)
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
m
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
-
i
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
m
i
n
e
s
;
i
s
m
o
r
e
t
h
a
n
9
9
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
t
i
l
t
-
r
o
d
m
i
n
e
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
M
a
y
b
e
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
t
f
i
l
l
i
n
g
i
n
s
o
m
e
s
h
a
l
l
o
w
g
a
p
s
o
r
t
r
e
n
c
h
e
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
T
h
e
M
C
B
p
r
o
v
i
d
e
s
a
l
m
o
s
t
1
0
0
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
c
l
e
a
r
a
n
c
e
o
f
s
i
m
p
l
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
w
h
e
n
u
s
e
d
w
i
t
h
t
h
e
M
I
C
L
I
C
.
T
h
e
M
C
B
h
a
s
m
i
n
i
m
a
l
i
m
p
a
c
t
o
n
t
h
e
M
1
'
s
m
a
n
e
u
v
e
r
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
a
n
d
s
p
e
e
d
w
h
e
n
n
o
t
p
l
o
w
i
n
g
.
T
h
e
m
a
i
n
g
u
n
s
h
o
u
l
d
b
e
t
r
a
v
e
r
s
e
d
t
o
t
h
e
s
i
d
e
t
o
p
r
e
v
e
n
t
d
a
m
a
g
e
i
n
t
h
e
e
v
e
n
t
o
f
a
m
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
o
n
w
h
e
n
p
l
o
w
i
n
g
.
T
h
e
r
e
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
s
i
t
e
s
h
o
u
l
d
b
e
r
e
l
a
t
i
v
e
l
y
f
l
a
t
a
n
d
f
r
e
e
o
f
l
a
r
g
e
r
o
c
k
s
a
n
d
o
t
h
e
r
o
b
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s
.
P
l
o
w
i
n
g
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
s
h
o
u
l
d
b
e
g
i
n
a
b
o
u
t
1
0
0
m
s
h
o
r
t
o
f
t
h
e
s
u
s
p
e
c
t
e
d
m
i
n
e
f
i
e
l
d
a
n
d
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
1
0
0
m
p
a
s
t
i
t
s
s
u
s
p
e
c
t
e
d
e
n
d
(
t
y
p
i
c
a
l
l
y
2
t
o
2
1
/
2
m
i
n
u
t
e
s
t
o
c
o
v
e
r
3
0
0
t
o
4
0
0
m
o
v
e
r
a
l
l
)
.
P
l
o
w
i
n
g
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
s
h
o
u
l
d
b
e
p
e
r
f
o
r
m
e
d
i
n
a
s
t
r
a
i
g
h
t
l
i
n
e
t
o
k
e
e
p
t
h
e
v
e
h
i
c
l
e
o
u
t
o
f
u
n
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
g
r
o
u
n
d
.
F
i
f
t
e
e
n
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
o
f
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
A
T
-
m
i
n
e
e
n
c
o
u
n
t
e
r
s
a
c
r
o
s
s
t
h
e
M
C
B
s
w
i
d
t
h
c
a
n
b
e
e
x
p
e
c
t
e
d
t
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
u
n
d
e
r
t
h
e
s
k
i
d
s
h
o
e
,
p
r
o
b
a
b
l
y
d
i
s
a
b
l
i
n
g
t
h
e
b
l
a
d
e
.
T
h
e
M
C
B
i
s
v
u
l
n
e
r
a
b
l
e
t
o
c
o
u
p
l
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
a
n
d
m
a
y
b
e
s
t
o
p
p
e
d
b
y
l
o
g
-
h
u
r
d
l
e
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
l
a
i
d
w
i
t
h
i
n
a
m
i
n
e
f
i
e
l
d
a
s
p
a
r
t
o
f
a
c
o
m
p
l
e
x
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
.
A
s
e
c
o
n
d
p
l
o
w
s
h
o
u
l
d
n
o
t
b
e
u
s
e
d
t
o
c
l
e
a
r
t
h
e
c
e
n
t
e
r
o
f
t
h
e
l
a
n
e
b
e
c
a
u
s
e
t
h
i
s
w
i
l
l
s
i
m
p
l
y
p
u
s
h
m
i
n
e
s
i
n
t
o
t
h
e
a
r
e
a
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
b
y
t
h
e
f
i
r
s
t
p
l
o
w
.
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
1
.
M
o
u
n
t
e
d
b
r
e
a
c
h
i
n
g
a
s
s
e
t
s
v
e
r
s
u
s
t
h
r
e
a
t
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
A
s
s
e
t
T
r
a
c
k
-
W
i
d
t
h
A
T
M
i
n
e
F
u
l
l
-
W
i
d
t
h
A
T
M
i
n
e
S
i
d
e
-
A
t
k
A
T
M
i
n
e
C
m
d
-
D
e
t
B
l
a
s
t
M
i
n
e
A
T
D
i
t
c
h
a
n
d
O
t
h
e
r
G
a
p
s
W
i
r
e
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
M
C
B
w
i
t
h
I
D
A
S
e
e
a
b
o
v
e
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
m
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
-
i
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
m
i
n
e
s
;
i
s
m
o
r
e
t
h
a
n
9
9
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
t
i
l
t
-
r
o
d
m
i
n
e
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
S
e
e
a
b
o
v
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
T
h
e
s
e
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
a
r
e
f
i
t
t
e
d
w
i
t
h
m
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
-
i
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
f
u
s
e
s
a
n
d
A
H
D
s
m
a
y
d
i
s
a
b
l
e
t
h
e
b
l
a
d
e
.
D
i
s
m
o
u
n
t
s
s
h
o
u
l
d
e
x
p
e
c
t
t
o
e
n
c
o
u
n
t
e
r
s
o
m
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
A
P
m
i
n
e
s
i
n
t
h
e
b
r
e
a
c
h
e
d
l
a
n
e
t
h
a
t
m
a
y
b
e
m
i
s
s
e
d
b
y
t
h
e
b
l
a
d
e
.
T
h
e
M
C
B
c
l
e
a
r
s
a
1
8
0
i
n
c
h
-
w
i
d
e
l
a
n
e
b
u
t
l
e
a
v
e
s
a
2
6
i
n
c
h
-
w
i
d
e
a
r
e
a
u
n
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
o
f
s
i
m
p
l
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
a
n
d
a
5
4
i
n
c
h
-
w
i
d
e
a
r
e
a
u
n
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
o
f
d
o
u
b
l
e
-
i
m
p
u
l
s
e
m
i
n
e
s
(
u
n
d
e
r
t
h
e
s
k
i
d
s
h
o
e
s
)
i
n
t
h
e
m
i
d
d
l
e
o
f
t
h
e
b
r
e
a
c
h
e
d
l
a
n
e
.
T
h
e
b
e
r
m
s
a
n
d
f
u
r
r
o
w
s
l
e
f
t
b
y
t
h
e
M
C
B
a
i
d
i
n
i
m
m
e
d
i
a
t
e
l
y
m
a
r
k
i
n
g
t
h
e
b
r
e
a
c
h
e
d
l
a
n
e
.
L
i
v
e
m
i
n
e
s
r
e
m
a
i
n
i
n
b
o
t
h
b
e
r
m
s
a
n
d
m
a
y
r
o
l
l
b
a
c
k
i
n
t
o
t
h
e
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
l
a
n
e
.
O
v
e
r
t
i
m
e
,
t
h
e
s
e
m
a
y
v
i
b
r
a
t
e
f
r
e
e
a
n
d
r
o
l
l
b
a
c
k
i
n
t
o
t
h
e
b
r
e
a
c
h
e
d
l
a
n
e
.
M
C
R
(
i
n
c
l
u
d
i
n
g
P
a
n
t
h
e
r
)
w
i
t
h
d
o
g
-
b
o
n
e
a
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
I
s
m
o
r
e
t
h
a
n
9
0
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
t
o
1
2
i
n
c
h
e
s
d
e
e
p
a
t
s
p
e
e
d
s
l
e
s
s
t
h
a
n
5
t
o
1
5
k
p
h
(
s
o
i
l
d
e
p
e
n
d
e
n
t
)
H
a
s
r
e
d
u
c
e
d
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
n
e
s
s
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
s
o
m
e
(
m
o
s
t
l
y
I
t
a
l
i
a
n
)
b
l
a
s
t
-
h
a
r
d
e
n
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
d
o
u
b
l
e
-
i
m
p
u
l
s
e
m
i
n
e
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
m
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
-
i
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
m
i
n
e
s
;
i
s
m
o
r
e
t
h
a
n
9
9
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
t
i
l
t
-
r
o
d
m
i
n
e
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
N
o
r
m
a
l
l
y
u
s
e
d
t
o
d
e
t
e
c
t
t
h
e
l
e
a
d
i
n
g
e
d
g
e
o
f
a
c
o
n
v
e
n
t
i
o
n
a
l
l
y
l
a
i
d
t
a
c
t
i
c
a
l
m
i
n
e
f
i
e
l
d
a
n
d
t
o
p
r
o
o
f
l
a
n
e
s
/
r
o
u
t
e
s
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
b
y
o
t
h
e
r
m
e
a
n
s
.
U
s
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
w
h
e
n
c
r
o
s
s
i
n
g
o
n
a
n
A
V
L
B
.
M
a
y
b
e
c
o
m
e
s
t
u
c
k
o
r
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
i
n
m
u
d
d
y
c
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n
s
.
T
h
e
M
C
R
i
s
v
u
l
n
e
r
a
b
l
e
t
o
c
o
u
p
l
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
.
T
h
e
M
C
R
i
s
d
e
s
i
g
n
e
d
t
o
w
i
t
h
s
t
a
n
d
u
p
t
o
t
w
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
o
n
s
p
e
r
s
i
d
e
.
T
h
e
M
C
R
c
l
e
a
r
s
a
1
6
0
i
n
c
h
-
w
i
d
e
l
a
n
e
b
u
t
l
e
a
v
e
s
a
7
2
i
n
c
h
-
w
i
d
e
a
r
e
a
u
n
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
i
n
t
h
e
m
i
d
d
l
e
o
f
t
h
e
b
r
e
a
c
h
e
d
l
a
n
e
.
N
O
T
E
:
T
h
e
M
1
1
3
a
l
s
o
h
a
s
7
2
i
n
c
h
e
s
b
e
t
w
e
e
n
t
r
a
c
k
s
a
n
d
m
u
s
t
u
s
e
e
x
t
r
e
m
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
w
h
e
n
f
o
l
l
o
w
i
n
g
t
h
e
M
C
R
.
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
1
.
M
o
u
n
t
e
d
b
r
e
a
c
h
i
n
g
a
s
s
e
t
s
v
e
r
s
u
s
t
h
r
e
a
t
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
A
s
s
e
t
T
r
a
c
k
-
W
i
d
t
h
A
T
M
i
n
e
F
u
l
l
-
W
i
d
t
h
A
T
M
i
n
e
S
i
d
e
-
A
t
k
A
T
M
i
n
e
C
m
d
-
D
e
t
B
l
a
s
t
M
i
n
e
A
T
D
i
t
c
h
a
n
d
O
t
h
e
r
G
a
p
s
W
i
r
e
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
M
C
R
w
i
t
h
I
D
A
S
e
e
a
b
o
v
e
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
m
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
-
i
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
m
i
n
e
s
;
i
s
m
o
r
e
t
h
a
n
9
9
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
t
i
l
t
-
r
o
d
m
i
n
e
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
M
u
l
t
i
p
l
e
r
o
l
l
e
r
s
a
r
e
r
e
q
u
i
r
e
d
t
o
p
r
o
v
i
d
e
t
h
e
o
v
e
r
l
a
p
n
e
c
e
s
s
a
r
y
f
o
r
p
r
o
o
f
i
n
g
t
h
e
r
o
u
t
e
s
e
n
t
i
r
e
w
i
d
t
h
w
h
e
n
t
h
e
M
C
R
i
s
u
s
e
d
f
o
r
p
r
o
o
f
i
n
g
d
u
r
i
n
g
r
o
u
t
e
-
c
l
e
a
r
a
n
c
e
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
.
V
e
h
i
c
l
e
s
p
e
e
d
i
s
l
i
m
i
t
e
d
t
o
5
t
o
1
5
k
p
h
.
T
h
e
m
a
i
n
g
u
n
s
h
o
u
l
d
b
e
t
r
a
v
e
r
s
e
d
t
o
t
h
e
s
i
d
e
t
o
p
r
e
v
e
n
t
d
a
m
a
g
e
i
n
t
h
e
e
v
e
n
t
o
f
a
m
i
n
e
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
i
o
n
w
h
e
n
r
o
l
l
i
n
g
a
s
u
s
p
e
c
t
e
d
m
i
n
e
d
a
r
e
a
.
T
h
e
I
D
A
m
a
y
b
e
d
a
m
a
g
e
d
b
y
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
.
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
2
.
D
i
s
m
o
u
n
t
e
d
b
r
e
a
c
h
i
n
g
a
s
s
e
t
s
v
e
r
s
u
s
t
h
r
e
a
t
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
A
s
s
e
t
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
T
r
i
p
-
W
i
r
e
/
B
r
e
a
k
-
W
i
r
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
I
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
C
m
d
-
D
e
t
B
l
a
s
t
M
i
n
e
W
i
r
e
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
A
P
O
B
S
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
l
y
c
l
e
a
r
s
9
5
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
,
i
n
c
l
u
d
i
n
g
b
l
a
s
t
-
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
t
t
y
p
e
s
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
l
y
c
u
t
s
9
9
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
o
f
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
i
n
i
t
s
p
a
t
h
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
C
l
e
a
r
s
a
f
o
o
t
p
a
t
h
P
r
o
v
i
d
e
s
a
0
.
6
-
x
4
5
-
m
f
o
o
t
p
a
t
h
f
r
o
m
a
2
5
-
m
s
t
a
n
d
o
f
f
C
a
n
b
e
d
e
p
l
o
y
e
d
b
y
t
w
o
m
e
n
i
n
2
m
i
n
u
t
e
s
C
o
n
s
i
s
t
s
o
f
t
w
o
m
a
n
p
a
c
k
u
n
i
t
s
w
e
i
g
h
i
n
g
a
p
p
r
o
x
i
m
a
t
e
l
y
5
5
l
b
s
e
a
c
h
B
a
n
g
a
l
o
r
e
t
o
r
p
e
d
o
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
l
y
c
l
e
a
r
s
8
5
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
o
f
s
i
m
p
l
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
;
i
s
l
e
s
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
b
l
a
s
t
-
h
a
r
d
e
n
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
l
y
c
u
t
s
9
9
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
o
f
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
i
n
i
t
s
p
a
t
h
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
C
l
e
a
r
s
a
f
o
o
t
p
a
t
h
P
r
o
v
i
d
e
s
a
0
.
6
-
x
1
5
-
m
f
o
o
t
p
a
t
h
C
a
n
b
e
d
e
p
l
o
y
e
d
b
y
a
s
q
u
a
d
i
n
5
m
i
n
u
t
e
s
C
o
n
s
i
s
t
s
o
f
t
e
n
1
.
5
-
m
-
l
o
n
g
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
w
e
i
g
h
i
n
g
1
3
l
b
s
e
a
c
h
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
G
r
a
p
n
e
l
h
o
o
k
a
n
d
W
L
G
H
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
l
y
c
l
e
a
r
s
9
9
p
e
r
c
e
n
t
o
f
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
/
b
r
e
a
k
w
i
r
e
s
i
n
a
s
i
n
g
l
e
p
a
s
s
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
;
h
o
w
e
v
e
r
,
i
t
m
a
y
s
n
a
g
t
h
e
w
i
r
e
s
b
e
t
w
e
e
n
t
h
e
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
u
n
i
t
a
n
d
i
t
s
m
i
n
e
s
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
;
h
o
w
e
v
e
r
,
i
t
m
a
y
s
n
a
g
t
h
e
w
i
r
e
s
b
e
t
w
e
e
n
t
h
e
o
b
s
e
r
v
e
r
a
n
d
h
i
s
m
i
n
e
s
I
s
s
o
m
e
w
h
a
t
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
t
c
l
e
a
r
i
n
g
t
r
i
p
-
w
i
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
i
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
e
d
w
i
t
h
w
i
r
e
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
H
a
s
a
r
a
n
g
e
o
f
8
0
t
o
1
0
0
m
w
h
e
n
l
a
u
n
c
h
e
d
C
a
n
b
e
t
h
r
o
w
n
1
5
t
o
2
0
m
w
h
e
n
h
a
n
d
t
h
r
o
w
n
M
u
s
t
c
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
t
h
e
l
e
t
h
a
l
r
a
n
g
e
/
r
a
d
i
u
s
(
u
p
t
o
9
0
m
i
n
s
o
m
e
c
a
s
e
s
)
o
f
f
r
a
g
m
e
n
t
i
n
g
A
P
m
i
n
e
s
t
h
a
t
m
a
y
b
e
e
n
c
o
u
n
t
e
r
e
d
,
a
n
d
s
e
l
e
c
t
a
c
o
v
e
r
e
d
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
o
r
m
o
v
e
b
a
c
k
a
n
a
d
e
q
u
a
t
e
d
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
b
e
f
o
r
e
p
u
l
l
i
n
g
t
h
e
g
r
a
p
n
e
l
H
e
l
p
s
i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
c
o
n
f
i
d
e
n
c
e
b
y
g
r
a
p
p
l
i
n
g
a
n
a
r
e
a
s
e
v
e
r
a
l
t
i
m
e
s
I
s
h
a
m
p
e
r
e
d
b
y
t
h
i
c
k
v
e
g
e
t
a
t
i
o
n
/
o
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
o
b
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s
w
h
i
c
h
m
a
y
r
e
d
u
c
e
t
h
e
r
a
n
g
e
/
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
n
e
s
s
o
f
t
h
e
W
L
G
H
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
2
.
D
i
s
m
o
u
n
t
e
d
b
r
e
a
c
h
i
n
g
a
s
s
e
t
s
v
e
r
s
u
s
t
h
r
e
a
t
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
A
s
s
e
t
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
T
r
i
p
-
W
i
r
e
/
B
r
e
a
k
-
W
i
r
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
I
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
C
m
d
-
D
e
t
B
l
a
s
t
M
i
n
e
W
i
r
e
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
P
r
o
b
e
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
t
l
o
c
a
t
i
n
g
a
l
l
b
u
r
i
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
;
h
o
w
e
v
e
r
,
e
x
t
r
e
m
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
s
h
o
u
l
d
b
e
u
s
e
d
w
h
e
n
p
r
o
b
i
n
g
f
o
r
s
m
a
l
l
m
i
n
e
s
(
l
e
s
s
t
h
a
n
3
-
i
n
c
h
d
i
a
)
a
n
d
s
e
n
s
i
t
i
v
e
m
i
n
e
s
(
m
o
r
e
t
h
a
n
1
0
l
b
s
a
c
t
u
a
t
i
n
g
f
o
r
c
e
)
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
;
t
h
e
s
o
l
d
i
e
r
m
u
s
t
r
e
l
y
o
n
c
l
e
a
r
a
n
c
e
b
y
o
t
h
e
r
m
e
a
n
s
a
n
d
v
i
s
u
a
l
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
o
b
s
e
r
v
e
r
i
s
n
e
u
t
r
a
l
i
z
e
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
a
p
p
r
o
a
c
h
i
n
g
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
W
i
r
e
c
u
t
t
e
r
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
D
o
n
o
t
c
u
t
a
s
l
a
c
k
w
i
r
e
u
n
t
i
l
b
o
t
h
e
n
d
s
h
a
v
e
b
e
e
n
c
h
e
c
k
e
d
i
f
b
r
e
a
k
-
w
i
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
m
a
y
b
e
p
r
e
s
e
n
t
;
d
o
n
o
t
c
u
t
t
a
u
g
h
t
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
u
n
t
i
l
b
o
t
h
e
n
d
s
h
a
v
e
b
e
e
n
c
h
e
c
k
e
d
f
o
r
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
-
r
e
l
e
a
s
e
F
D
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
o
b
s
e
r
v
e
r
i
s
n
e
u
t
r
a
l
i
z
e
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
a
p
p
r
o
a
c
h
i
n
g
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
;
s
o
u
n
d
c
a
n
b
e
m
i
n
i
m
i
z
e
d
b
y
w
r
a
p
p
i
n
g
t
h
e
w
i
r
e
w
i
t
h
a
c
l
o
t
h
b
e
f
o
r
e
c
u
t
t
i
n
g
i
t
G
u
n
f
i
r
e
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
s
u
r
f
a
c
e
-
l
a
i
d
m
u
n
i
t
i
o
n
s
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
s
u
r
f
a
c
e
-
l
a
i
d
m
u
n
i
t
i
o
n
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
s
u
r
f
a
c
e
-
l
a
i
d
m
u
n
i
t
i
o
n
s
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
I
s
u
s
e
d
a
s
a
l
a
s
t
r
e
s
o
r
t
I
s
a
r
e
l
a
t
i
v
e
l
y
s
l
o
w
m
e
t
h
o
d
f
o
r
c
l
e
a
r
i
n
g
v
i
s
u
a
l
l
y
d
e
t
e
c
t
e
d
o
r
d
n
a
n
c
e
E
n
s
u
r
e
s
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
w
e
a
p
o
n
s
o
p
e
r
a
t
o
r
W
o
r
k
s
b
e
t
t
e
r
w
i
t
h
l
a
r
g
e
r
c
a
l
i
b
e
r
w
e
a
p
o
n
s
(
u
p
t
o
2
5
m
m
)
,
i
n
c
e
n
d
i
a
r
y
a
m
m
o
w
o
r
k
s
b
e
s
t
M
a
y
b
e
t
h
e
o
n
l
y
o
p
t
i
o
n
o
p
e
n
t
o
a
r
t
i
l
l
e
r
y
,
M
P
,
a
n
d
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
a
t
i
o
n
u
n
i
t
s
f
o
r
d
e
a
l
i
n
g
w
i
t
h
S
C
A
T
M
I
N
E
s
i
n
t
h
e
a
b
s
e
n
c
e
o
f
e
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
s
a
n
d
r
e
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
a
s
s
e
t
s
C3, FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
2
.
D
i
s
m
o
u
n
t
e
d
b
r
e
a
c
h
i
n
g
a
s
s
e
t
s
v
e
r
s
u
s
t
h
r
e
a
t
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
A
s
s
e
t
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
T
r
i
p
-
W
i
r
e
/
B
r
e
a
k
-
W
i
r
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
I
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
C
m
d
-
D
e
t
B
l
a
s
t
M
i
n
e
W
i
r
e
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
M
i
n
i
F
l
a
i
l
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
s
i
m
p
l
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
A
P
m
i
n
e
s
I
s
l
e
s
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
b
l
a
s
t
-
h
a
r
d
e
n
e
d
A
P
m
i
n
e
s
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
I
s
a
r
m
o
r
e
d
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
f
r
a
g
m
e
n
t
i
n
g
t
h
r
e
a
t
s
I
s
v
u
l
n
e
r
a
b
l
e
t
o
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
d
b
l
a
s
t
m
i
n
e
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
i
f
t
h
e
p
r
e
s
e
n
c
e
o
f
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
i
s
s
u
s
p
e
c
t
e
d
,
b
e
c
a
u
s
e
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
c
a
n
d
e
s
t
r
o
y
t
h
e
M
i
n
i
F
l
a
i
l
.
C
a
n
c
l
e
a
r
a
t
a
r
a
t
e
o
f
a
b
o
u
t
1
,
5
0
0
s
q
u
a
r
e
m
e
t
e
r
s
p
e
r
h
o
u
r
A
N
/
P
S
S
-
1
2
I
s
v
e
r
y
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
t
f
i
n
d
i
n
g
m
e
t
a
l
l
i
c
m
i
n
e
s
I
s
l
e
s
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
l
o
w
-
m
e
t
a
l
m
i
n
e
s
C
a
n
n
o
t
d
e
t
e
c
t
m
o
n
o
f
i
l
a
m
e
n
t
f
i
s
h
i
n
g
l
i
n
e
u
s
e
d
f
o
r
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
;
i
t
i
s
u
n
d
e
t
e
c
t
a
b
l
e
b
y
t
h
e
A
N
/
P
S
S
-
1
2
.
V
i
s
u
a
l
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
a
n
d
o
t
h
e
r
n
e
u
t
r
a
l
i
z
a
t
i
o
n
m
e
a
n
s
s
h
o
u
l
d
b
e
u
s
e
d
f
i
r
s
t
i
n
a
n
y
a
r
e
a
s
u
s
p
e
c
t
e
d
o
f
h
a
v
i
n
g
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
s
.
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
o
b
s
e
r
v
e
r
i
s
n
e
u
t
r
a
l
i
z
e
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
a
p
p
r
o
a
c
h
i
n
g
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
I
s
l
e
s
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
l
o
w
-
m
e
t
a
l
m
i
n
e
s
a
n
d
i
n
a
r
e
a
s
c
o
n
t
a
m
i
n
a
t
e
d
w
i
t
h
m
e
t
a
l
f
r
a
g
m
e
n
t
s
(
a
r
t
i
l
l
e
r
y
,
m
o
r
t
a
r
,
s
m
a
l
l
a
r
m
s
)
o
r
a
r
e
a
s
t
h
a
t
h
a
v
e
h
e
a
v
i
l
y
m
i
n
e
r
a
l
i
z
e
d
s
o
i
l
s
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
2
.
D
i
s
m
o
u
n
t
e
d
b
r
e
a
c
h
i
n
g
a
s
s
e
t
s
v
e
r
s
u
s
t
h
r
e
a
t
o
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
A
s
s
e
t
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
T
r
i
p
-
W
i
r
e
/
B
r
e
a
k
W
i
r
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
I
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
-
F
u
s
e
d
A
P
M
i
n
e
C
m
d
-
D
e
t
B
l
a
s
t
M
i
n
e
W
i
r
e
O
b
s
t
a
c
l
e
s
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
D
e
m
o
l
i
t
i
o
n
s
P
l
a
c
e
a
t
l
e
a
s
t
a
1
-
p
o
u
n
d
c
h
a
r
g
e
w
i
t
h
i
n
6
i
n
c
h
e
s
o
f
s
i
m
p
l
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
t
h
e
c
h
a
r
g
e
i
s
p
l
a
c
e
d
w
i
t
h
i
n
a
n
i
n
c
h
o
f
b
l
a
s
t
-
h
a
r
d
e
n
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
P
l
a
c
e
a
t
l
e
a
s
t
a
1
-
l
b
c
h
a
r
g
e
w
i
t
h
i
n
6
i
n
c
h
e
s
o
f
t
h
e
m
i
n
e
a
f
t
e
r
t
h
e
m
i
n
e
a
t
t
h
e
e
n
d
o
f
a
t
r
i
p
w
i
r
e
h
a
s
b
e
e
n
l
o
c
a
t
e
d
C
a
n
u
s
e
e
l
e
v
a
t
e
d
c
h
a
r
g
e
s
i
f
n
e
c
e
s
s
a
r
y
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
t
h
e
c
l
a
y
m
o
r
e
a
n
d
s
t
a
k
e
-
t
y
p
e
m
i
n
e
s
D
o
n
o
t
u
s
e
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
o
b
s
e
r
v
e
r
i
s
n
e
u
t
r
a
l
i
z
e
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
a
p
p
r
o
a
c
h
i
n
g
C
a
n
u
s
e
e
l
e
v
a
t
e
d
c
h
a
r
g
e
s
i
f
n
e
c
e
s
s
a
r
y
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
c
l
a
y
m
o
r
e
-
t
y
p
e
m
i
n
e
s
I
s
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
w
h
e
n
u
s
e
d
t
o
m
a
k
e
a
n
i
m
p
r
o
v
i
s
e
d
b
a
n
g
a
l
o
r
e
t
o
r
p
e
d
o
B
l
a
s
t
o
v
e
r
s
h
o
e
s
M
a
y
b
e
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
v
e
r
y
s
m
a
l
l
(
u
p
t
o
1
o
z
o
f
e
x
p
l
o
s
i
v
e
)
m
i
n
e
s
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
m
i
n
e
s
w
i
t
h
m
o
r
e
t
h
a
n
1
-
o
z
e
x
p
l
o
s
i
v
e
w
e
i
g
h
t
C
a
n
r
e
d
u
c
e
c
a
s
u
a
l
t
y
s
e
v
e
r
i
t
y
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
f
r
a
g
m
e
n
t
i
n
g
m
i
n
e
s
C
a
n
r
e
d
u
c
e
c
a
s
u
a
l
t
y
s
e
v
e
r
i
t
y
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
f
r
a
g
m
e
n
t
i
n
g
m
i
n
e
s
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
o
b
s
e
r
v
e
r
i
s
n
e
u
t
r
a
l
i
z
e
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
a
p
p
r
o
a
c
h
i
n
g
C
a
n
r
e
d
u
c
e
c
a
s
u
a
l
t
y
s
e
v
e
r
i
t
y
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
I
B
A
S
I
C
W
i
l
l
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
p
e
r
s
o
n
n
e
l
n
e
a
r
t
h
e
i
n
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
w
h
o
d
e
t
o
n
a
t
e
s
a
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
A
P
m
i
n
e
C
a
n
r
e
d
u
c
e
c
a
s
u
a
l
t
y
s
e
v
e
r
i
t
y
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
f
r
a
g
m
e
n
t
i
n
g
m
i
n
e
s
C
a
n
r
e
d
u
c
e
c
a
s
u
a
l
t
y
s
e
v
e
r
i
t
y
a
g
a
i
n
s
t
f
r
a
g
m
e
n
t
i
n
g
m
i
n
e
s
E
n
s
u
r
e
t
h
a
t
o
b
s
e
r
v
e
r
i
s
n
e
u
t
r
a
l
i
z
e
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
a
p
p
r
o
a
c
h
i
n
g
C
a
n
r
e
d
u
c
e
c
a
s
u
a
l
t
y
s
e
v
e
r
i
t
y
I
s
i
n
e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
3
.
F
o
r
e
i
g
n
t
r
a
c
k
-
w
i
d
t
h
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
l
y
P
l
a
n
t
e
d
S
c
a
t
t
e
r
a
b
l
e
M
e
t
a
l
l
i
c
N
o
n
m
e
t
a
l
l
i
c
S
i
m
p
l
e
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
D
o
u
b
l
e
I
m
p
u
l
s
e
B
l
a
s
t
H
a
r
d
e
n
e
d
A
H
D
R
u
s
s
i
a
T
M
-
4
6
/
5
7
/
6
2
P
T
M
-
1
T
M
-
4
6
/
5
7
/
6
2
M
T
M
-
6
2
B
/
D
/
P
T
M
-
4
6
/
5
7
/
6
2
T
M
-
4
6
/
5
7
T
M
N
-
4
6
C
h
i
n
a
T
y
p
e
7
2
T
y
p
e
8
4
B
T
y
p
e
7
2
T
y
p
e
7
2
T
y
p
e
8
4
B
T
y
p
e
7
2
T
y
p
e
7
2
Y
u
g
o
T
M
M
-
1
T
M
M
-
1
T
M
A
-
1
/
2
/
3
/
4
/
5
T
M
A
-
1
/
2
/
5
T
M
A
-
3
/
4
T
M
M
-
1
,
T
M
A
-
1
/
2
/
3
/
4
/
5
C
z
e
c
h
P
T
-
M
I
-
K
,
P
T
-
M
I
-
B
A
I
I
I
P
T
-
M
I
-
K
,
P
T
-
M
I
-
D
P
T
-
M
I
-
B
A
I
I
/
I
I
I
P
T
-
M
I
-
B
A
I
I
I
,
P
T
-
M
I
-
D
P
T
-
M
I
-
K
,
P
T
-
M
I
-
B
A
I
I
P
T
-
M
I
-
K
,
P
T
-
M
I
-
D
I
t
a
l
y
V
S
-
1
.
6
/
2
.
2
,
T
C
-
.
6
/
6
,
S
B
-
8
1
V
S
-
1
.
6
,
S
B
-
8
1
V
S
-
1
.
6
/
2
.
2
,
T
C
-
.
6
/
6
,
S
B
-
8
1
V
S
-
1
.
6
/
2
.
2
,
T
C
-
3
.
6
/
6
,
S
B
-
8
1
V
S
-
1
.
6
/
2
.
2
F
r
a
n
c
e
M
-
5
1
,
M
-
5
2
M
-
5
1
,
M
-
5
2
M
-
5
1
,
M
-
5
2
M
-
5
1
U
K
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
,
M
K
-
7
M
K
-
7
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
,
M
K
-
7
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
,
M
K
-
7
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
G
e
r
P
M
-
6
0
,
D
M
-
1
1
D
M
-
2
1
P
M
-
6
0
,
D
M
-
1
1
P
M
-
6
0
,
D
M
-
1
1
,
D
M
-
2
1
P
M
-
6
0
,
D
M
-
1
1
,
D
M
-
2
1
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
4
.
F
o
r
e
i
g
n
f
u
l
l
-
w
i
d
t
h
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
l
y
P
l
a
n
t
e
d
S
c
a
t
t
e
r
a
b
l
e
T
i
l
t
R
o
d
M
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
I
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
S
e
i
s
m
i
c
I
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
C
o
u
p
l
e
d
A
H
D
R
u
s
s
i
a
T
M
-
6
2
/
7
2
/
8
9
P
T
M
-
3
T
M
K
-
2
T
M
-
6
2
/
7
2
/
8
9
T
M
-
6
2
/
7
2
/
8
9
T
M
-
6
2
/
7
2
/
8
9
C
h
i
n
a
T
y
p
e
8
4
C
T
y
p
e
8
4
A
T
y
p
e
8
4
A
Y
u
g
o
T
M
R
P
-
6
K
B
-
2
T
M
R
P
-
6
T
M
R
P
-
6
,
K
B
-
2
T
M
R
P
-
6
,
K
B
-
2
C
z
e
c
h
P
T
-
M
I
-
P
F
r
a
n
c
e
H
P
D
s
e
r
i
e
s
L
a
n
c
e
M
-
5
1
,
M
-
5
2
,
M
o
d
e
l
1
9
5
4
H
P
D
s
e
r
i
e
s
M
o
d
e
l
1
9
5
3
H
P
D
s
e
r
i
e
s
,
M
-
5
1
,
L
a
n
c
e
H
u
n
g
a
r
y
U
K
A
-
6
3
U
K
A
-
6
3
U
K
A
-
6
3
I
t
a
l
y
V
S
-
H
C
T
/
H
C
T
-
2
,
S
B
-
M
V
V
S
-
S
A
T
M
1
,
V
S
-
H
C
T
V
S
-
H
C
T
/
H
C
T
-
2
,
S
B
-
M
V
,
V
S
-
S
A
T
M
1
F
u
s
e
o
p
t
i
o
n
V
S
-
H
C
T
/
H
C
T
-
2
,
S
B
-
M
V
,
V
S
-
S
A
T
M
1
S
w
e
d
e
n
F
F
V
-
0
2
8
F
F
V
-
0
2
8
F
u
s
e
1
5
F
F
V
-
0
2
8
U
K
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
H
B
-
8
7
6
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
,
M
K
-
7
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
,
H
B
-
8
7
6
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
,
M
K
-
7
,
H
B
-
8
7
6
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
D
M
-
3
1
A
T
-
2
,
M
I
F
F
D
M
-
3
1
,
A
T
-
2
,
M
I
F
F
D
M
-
3
1
,
A
T
-
2
,
M
I
F
F
R
o
m
a
n
i
a
M
C
-
7
1
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
5
.
F
o
r
e
i
g
n
s
i
d
e
-
a
t
t
a
c
k
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
B
r
e
a
k
W
i
r
e
I
n
f
l
u
e
n
c
e
A
H
D
R
u
s
s
i
a
M
O
N
-
1
0
0
/
2
0
0
/
5
0
0
,
T
M
-
8
3
L
M
G
T
M
-
7
3
/
8
3
Y
u
g
o
T
M
R
P
-
6
,
C
O
B
R
A
F
r
a
n
c
e
M
I
A
C
A
H
F
1
M
I
A
C
A
H
F
1
M
I
A
C
A
H
F
1
U
K
L
1
4
L
1
4
A
J
A
X
A
J
A
X
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
D
M
-
1
2
S
w
e
d
e
n
F
F
V
-
0
1
6
,
A
T
-
4
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
6
.
F
o
r
e
i
g
n
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
A
P
m
i
n
e
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
S
c
a
t
t
e
r
a
b
l
e
L
o
w
M
e
t
a
l
S
i
m
p
l
e
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
S
m
a
l
l
D
i
a
m
e
t
e
r
L
o
w
-
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
T
h
r
e
s
h
o
l
d
P
r
o
n
g
e
d
F
u
s
e
B
l
a
s
t
H
a
r
d
e
n
e
d
A
H
D
R
u
s
s
i
a
P
F
M
-
1
P
M
N
,
P
M
D
-
6
P
M
N
,
P
M
D
-
6
,
P
F
M
-
1
O
Z
M
s
e
r
i
e
s
P
M
N
-
2
C
h
i
n
a
G
L
D
-
1
1
1
T
y
p
e
7
2
A
,
G
L
D
-
1
1
1
T
y
p
e
7
2
A
,
T
y
p
e
5
8
,
G
L
D
-
1
1
1
G
L
D
-
1
1
1
T
y
p
e
-
7
2
,
T
y
p
e
5
8
,
G
L
D
-
1
1
1
T
y
p
e
7
2
A
/
B
Y
u
g
o
P
M
A
-
1
/
2
/
3
P
M
A
-
1
,
P
M
D
-
1
P
M
A
-
1
/
3
,
P
M
D
-
1
P
R
O
M
-
1
/
2
,
P
M
R
-
3
P
M
A
-
2
C
z
e
c
h
P
P
-
M
I
-
D
,
P
P
-
M
I
-
B
A
P
P
-
M
I
-
D
P
P
-
M
I
-
S
R
,
P
P
-
M
I
-
S
R
I
I
I
t
a
l
y
T
S
-
5
0
,
V
S
-
5
0
,
S
B
-
3
3
,
V
S
-
M
K
2
T
S
-
5
0
,
S
B
-
3
3
,
V
S
-
M
K
2
V
a
l
m
a
r
a
5
9
/
6
9
T
S
-
5
0
,
V
S
-
5
0
,
S
B
-
3
3
,
V
S
-
M
K
2
V
S
-
5
0
,
S
B
-
3
3
,
V
S
-
M
K
2
F
r
a
n
c
e
M
-
5
9
M
-
5
9
M
-
5
9
M
-
5
9
U
K
R
a
n
g
e
r
R
a
n
g
e
r
R
a
n
g
e
r
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
D
M
-
1
1
P
P
M
-
2
D
M
-
1
1
D
M
-
1
1
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
7
.
F
o
r
e
i
g
n
t
r
i
p
-
w
i
r
e
/
b
r
e
a
k
-
w
i
r
e
-
f
u
s
e
d
A
P
m
i
n
e
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
S
c
a
t
t
e
r
a
b
l
e
T
r
i
p
W
i
r
e
B
r
e
a
k
W
i
r
e
R
u
s
s
i
a
P
O
M
-
2
P
O
M
Z
-
2
,
O
Z
M
s
e
r
i
e
s
,
M
O
N
s
e
r
i
e
s
O
Z
M
s
e
r
i
e
s
,
M
O
N
s
e
r
i
e
s
C
h
i
n
a
T
y
p
e
5
8
,
T
y
p
e
5
9
,
T
y
p
e
6
6
,
T
y
p
e
6
9
Y
u
g
o
P
R
O
M
-
1
/
2
/
K
D
,
P
M
R
-
2
/
3
/
4
,
M
R
U
D
P
R
O
M
-
1
/
2
/
K
D
,
P
M
R
-
2
/
3
/
4
,
M
R
U
D
C
z
e
c
h
P
P
-
M
I
-
S
R
,
P
P
-
M
I
-
S
R
I
I
,
P
P
-
M
I
-
S
K
I
t
a
l
y
V
S
-
S
A
P
F
M
3
V
a
l
m
a
r
a
5
9
/
6
9
,
B
M
-
8
5
,
P
-
2
5
,
P
-
4
0
,
V
S
-
D
A
F
M
1
F
r
a
n
c
e
M
1
9
5
1
/
1
9
5
5
,
M
A
P
E
D
F
1
M
1
9
5
1
/
1
9
5
5
U
K
P
A
D
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
D
M
-
3
1
,
S
M
-
7
0
FM 20-32
Table G-8. Foreign emplaced minefields
Russia Iraq North Korea Bosnia
Manually
Antitrack AT 1 1 1 1
Antihull AT 2 3 3 2
Side-attack AT 3 4 3 4
Blast AP 1 1 1 1
Directional AP 1 4 1
Bounding AP 1 1 2 1
Stake AP 1 4 1 1
Mechanically
Antitrack AT 1 1 1 4
Antihull AT 2 3 1
Vehicle Scattered
Antitrack AT 1
Antihull AT 1
Blast AP
Directional AP
Bounding AP
Simple Frag 1
Artillery/MLRS
Antitrack AT 1 4
Antihull AT 1 1
Blast AP
Directional AP
Bounding AP
Stake AP 1
Helicopter/Fixed-Wing Aircraft
Antitrack AT 1 1
Antihull AT 1
Blast AP 1 1
Directional AP
Bounding AP
Stake AP 1
NOTE: Scored from 1 (most common) to 4 (very rare).
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
9
.
F
o
r
e
i
g
n
m
i
n
e
d
e
l
i
v
e
r
y
s
y
s
t
e
m
s
O
r
i
g
i
n
S
y
s
t
e
m
T
y
p
e
1
R
a
n
g
e
M
i
n
e
P
a
y
l
o
a
d
D
e
n
s
i
t
y
2
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
R
u
s
s
i
a
B
M
-
2
1
R
2
0
k
m
P
T
M
-
1
/
3
,
P
O
M
-
2
1
.
5
1
,
0
0
0
x
5
0
0
m
p
e
r
b
a
t
t
e
r
y
B
M
-
2
2
R
3
5
k
m
P
T
M
1
/
3
,
P
O
M
-
2
1
.
5
P
K
P
I
F
,
H
N
A
P
T
M
1
/
3
,
P
F
M
-
1
,
P
O
M
-
2
1
.
5
L
a
y
s
r
e
l
a
t
i
v
e
l
y
n
a
r
r
o
w
s
t
r
i
p
s
K
S
M
U
F
N
A
P
T
M
1
/
3
,
P
F
M
-
1
,
P
O
M
-
2
1
.
5
U
M
Z
V
N
A
P
T
M
1
/
3
,
P
O
M
-
2
1
.
5
G
M
Z
/
P
M
Z
-
4
M
P
N
A
V
a
r
i
e
s
0
.
4
t
o
1
.
0
3
s
y
s
t
e
m
s
c
a
n
e
m
p
l
a
c
e
1
,
2
0
0
m
w
i
t
h
6
2
4
m
i
n
e
s
i
n
2
6
m
i
n
u
t
e
s
V
M
R
-
1
/
2
H
N
A
V
a
r
i
e
s
0
.
4
t
o
1
.
0
3
M
i
-
8
s
c
a
n
l
a
y
1
,
2
0
0
t
o
3
,
0
0
0
m
w
i
t
h
1
,
2
0
0
m
i
n
e
s
C
h
i
n
a
T
y
p
e
8
3
R
1
5
k
m
T
y
p
e
8
4
0
.
5
9
0
0
x
8
0
0
m
p
e
r
b
a
t
t
e
r
y
Y
u
g
o
M
8
7
R
5
0
k
m
K
B
-
2
0
.
5
9
0
0
x
5
0
0
m
p
e
r
b
a
t
t
e
r
y
I
t
a
l
y
F
I
R
O
S
2
5
R
2
2
k
m
V
S
-
H
C
L
,
V
S
-
M
k
,
V
S
-
S
A
P
F
M
3
0
.
5
1
,
0
0
0
x
5
0
0
m
p
e
r
b
a
t
t
e
r
y
F
I
R
O
S
3
0
R
3
5
k
m
V
S
-
H
C
L
,
V
S
-
M
k
,
V
S
-
S
A
P
F
M
3
0
.
5
D
A
T
H
N
A
V
a
r
i
e
s
1
.
2
L
a
y
s
r
e
l
a
t
i
v
e
l
y
n
a
r
r
o
w
s
t
r
i
p
s
o
f
u
p
t
o
3
2
0
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
I
s
t
r
i
c
e
V
N
A
S
A
T
M
1
,
V
S
-
M
k
2
E
L
,
V
S
-
S
A
P
F
M
3
M
a
x
1
.
6
T
y
p
i
c
a
l
l
y
3
6
0
x
1
4
0
m
S
T
-
A
T
/
V
M
P
N
A
V
a
r
i
e
s
0
.
3
t
o
1
.
5
2
4
0
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
h
o
u
r
G
r
i
l
l
o
9
0
M
D
N
A
S
A
T
M
1
,
V
S
-
M
k
2
E
L
0
.
5
5
A
T
o
r
1
5
A
P
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
d
i
s
p
e
n
s
e
r
S
w
e
d
e
n
F
F
V
-
5
8
2
1
M
P
N
A
F
F
V
-
0
2
8
0
.
4
t
o
1
.
4
3
0
0
b
u
r
i
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
h
o
u
r
o
r
5
0
0
s
u
r
f
a
c
e
-
l
a
i
d
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
h
o
u
r
F
r
a
n
c
e
M
i
n
o
t
a
u
r
V
N
A
L
a
n
c
e
0
.
7
1
,
2
0
0
x
6
0
0
m
w
i
t
h
8
0
0
m
i
n
e
s
E
B
G
V
N
A
L
a
n
c
e
1
.
5
6
0
x
6
0
0
m
w
i
t
h
4
0
m
i
n
e
s
1
5
5
-
m
m
H
o
w
A
1
8
k
m
L
a
n
c
e
8
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
r
o
u
n
d
M
a
t
e
n
i
n
M
P
N
A
H
P
D
s
e
r
i
e
s
0
.
4
t
o
1
.
4
5
0
0
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
h
o
u
r
U
K
J
P
-
2
3
3
F
N
A
H
B
8
7
6
4
3
0
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
T
o
r
n
a
d
o
a
i
r
c
r
a
f
t
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
l
a
y
e
r
M
P
N
A
L
9
B
a
r
m
i
n
e
0
.
4
t
o
0
.
9
U
p
t
o
7
0
0
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
h
o
u
r
R
a
n
g
e
r
V
N
A
L
1
0
1
,
2
9
6
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
d
i
s
p
e
n
s
e
r
FM 20-32
T
a
b
l
e
G
-
9
.
F
o
r
e
i
g
n
m
i
n
e
d
e
l
i
v
e
r
y
s
y
s
t
e
m
s
(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
O
r
i
g
i
n
S
y
s
t
e
m
T
y
p
e
1
R
a
n
g
e
M
i
n
e
P
a
y
l
o
a
d
D
e
n
s
i
t
y
2
R
e
m
a
r
k
s
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
S
k
o
r
p
i
o
n
V
,
H
N
A
A
T
-
2
0
.
4
1
,
5
0
0
x
5
0
m
w
i
t
h
6
0
0
m
i
n
e
s
M
W
-
1
F
N
A
M
I
F
F
,
M
U
S
P
A
0
.
5
5
5
t
o
5
0
0
m
w
i
d
e
a
n
d
2
0
0
t
o
2
,
5
0
0
m
l
o
n
g
w
i
t
h
8
9
2
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
L
A
R
S
R
1
4
k
m
A
T
-
2
0
.
5
1
,
8
3
6
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
l
a
u
n
c
h
e
r
,
1
,
0
0
0
x
5
0
0
m
p
e
r
b
a
t
t
e
r
y
M
A
R
S
R
3
0
k
m
A
T
-
2
0
.
3
1
,
0
0
0
x
5
0
0
m
w
i
t
h
3
3
6
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
l
a
u
n
c
h
e
r
F
F
V
-
5
8
2
1
M
P
N
A
D
M
-
3
1
0
.
4
t
o
1
.
4
3
0
0
b
u
r
i
e
d
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
h
o
u
r
o
r
5
0
0
s
u
r
f
a
c
e
-
l
a
i
d
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
h
o
u
r
1
A
=
a
r
t
i
l
l
e
r
y
,
H
=
h
e
l
i
c
o
p
t
e
r
,
F
=
f
i
x
e
d
-
w
i
n
g
a
i
r
c
r
a
f
t
,
R
=
r
o
c
k
e
t
,
V
=
v
e
h
i
c
l
e
d
i
s
p
e
n
s
e
d
,
M
D
=
m
a
n
-
p
o
r
t
a
b
l
e
d
i
s
p
e
n
s
e
r
,
M
P
=
m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
p
l
a
n
t
e
r
2
A
T
m
i
n
e
s
p
e
r
m
e
t
e
r
o
f
f
r
o
n
t
FM 20-32
Metric Conversion Chart H-1
Appendix H
Metric Conversion Chart
Thi s appendi x compl i es wi th current Army di recti ves whi ch state that the
metri c system wi l l be i ncorporated i nto al l new publ i cati ons. Tabl e H-1 i s a
conversi on chart.
Table H-1. Metric conversion chart
US Units Multiplied By Metric Units
Feet 0.3048 Meters
Inches 2.54 Centimeters
Inches 0.0254 Meters
Inches 25.4001 Millimeters
Miles 1.6093 Kilometers
Pounds 453.59 Grams
Pounds 0.4536 Kilograms
Metric Units Multiplied By US Units
Centimeters 0.3937 Inches
Grams 0.03527 Ounces
Kilograms 2.2046 Pounds
Kilometers 0.62137 Miles
Meters 3.2808 Feet
Meters 39.37 Inches
Meters 1.0936 Yards
Millimeters 0.03937 Inches
FM 20-32
H-2 Metric Conversion Chart
Glossary-1
Glossary
1LT fi rst l i eutenant
1SG fi rst sergeant
2LT second l i eutenant
AA avenue of approach
ACE armored combat earthmover
ACR armored caval ry regi ment
AD armor di vi si on
ADA ai r-defense arti l l ery
ADAM area-deni al arti l l ery muni ti on
ADE assi stant di vi si on engi neer
AHD anti handl i ng devi ce
AI area of i nterest
ALO ai r l i ai son offi cer
ammo ammuni ti on
AO area of operati ons
AP anti personnel
APB anti personnel bl ast
APC armored personnel carri er
APDS armor-pi erci ng di scardi ng sabot
APF anti personnel fragmentati on
APL anti personnel l and mi ne
APOBS Anti personnel Obstacl e Breachi ng System
AR Army regul ati on
ASP ammuni ti on suppl y poi nt
FM 20-32
Glossary-2
ASTAMIDS Ai rborne Standoff Mi nefi el d Detecti on System
AT anti tank
atk attack
ATP ammuni ti on transfer poi nt
attn attenti on
AVLB armored vehi cl e-l aunched bri dge
AVLM armored vehi cl e-l aunched MI CLI C
BAI battl efi el d ai r i nterdi cti on
bde bri gade
BICC battl efi el d i nformati on control center
BLPS bal l i sti c and l aser protecti ve spectacl es
bn battal i on
BOS Battl efi el d Operati ng System
BP battl e posi ti on
BRDEC US Army Bel voi r Research, Devel opment, and Engi neeri ng Center
C Cel si us
C
2
command and control
CA ci vi l affai rs
cal cal i ber
CAS cl ose ai r support
cdr commander
CEV combat engi neer vehi cl e
CG commandi ng general
CHS combat heal th support
CL centerl i ne
cm centi meter(s)
cmd command
CMMC corps materi al -management center
FM 20-32
Glossary-3
co company
COA course of acti on
COB ci vi l i an on the battl efi el d
comp composi ti on
CS combat support
CSR control l ed suppl y rate
CSS combat servi ce support
CTCP combat trai ns command post
cu cubi c
Czech Czechosl ovaki a
d day
DA Department of the Army
DAO di vi si on ammuni ti on offi cer
DCU di spenser control uni t
det detonated
det detonati ng
dia di ameter
div di vi si on
DMMC di vi si on materi al -management center
DOD Department of Defense
DODIC Department of Defense i denti fi cati on code
DST deci si on support templ ate
DTG date-ti me group
DZ drop zone
EA engagement area
ea each
EBA engi neer battl efi el d assessment
EDD expl osi ve detector dog
FM 20-32
Glossary-4
EFP expl osi ve-formed penetrati ng
EID end i tem code
EM enl i sted member
engr engi neer
ENS Expl osi ve Neutral i zati on System
EOD expl osi ve ordnance di sposal
ESMB expl osi ve standoff mi nefi el d breacher
F Fahrenhei t
FCP forward command post
FCS fi re control system
FD fi ri ng devi ce
FECS Fi el d-Expedi ent Countermi ne System
FIST fi re-support team
FLOT forward l i ne of own troops
FM fi el d manual
FM frequency-modul ated
FMFM Fl eet Mari ne Force manual
FPF fi nal protecti ve fi res
frag fragmentati on
FRAGO fragmentary order
FSB forward support battal i on
FSC federal stock cl assi fi cati on
FSCL fi re-support coordi nati on l i ne
FSCOORD fi re-support coordi nator
FSE fi re-support el ement
ft foot, feet
ft fort
FWF former warri ng facti on
FM 20-32
Glossary-5
g gram(s)
G2 Assi stant Chi ef of Staff, G2 (I ntel l i gence)
G3 Assi stant Chi ef of Staff, G3 (Operati ons and Pl ans)
G4 Assi stant Chi ef of Staff, G4 (Logi sti cs)
GDP general defense pl an
Ger Germany
GPS gl obal -posi ti oni ng system
H hour of executi on
HE hi gh-expl osi ve
HEI-T hi gh-expl osi ve i ncendi ary tracer
HEMMS hand-empl aced mi nefi el d marki ng set
HEMTT heavy expanded mobi l i ty tacti cal truck
HEXJ AM hand-empl aced, expandabl e jammer
HMMWV hi gh-mobi l i ty, mul ti purpose, wheel ed vehi cl e
HQ headquarters
hr hour(s)
HTF how to fi ght
hvy heavy
IBASIC I mproved Body Armor System, I ndi vi dual Countermi ne
ID i nfantry di vi si on
IDA i mproved dog-bone assembl y
IFV i nfantry fi ghti ng vehi cl e
ILLUM i l l umi nati on
IMU i nerti al measurement uni t
in i nch(es)
inf i nfantry
IOE i rregul ar outer edge
IP i mproved pl ow
FM 20-32
Glossary-6
IPB i ntel l i gence preparati on of the battl efi el d
IR i nfrared
ITV i mproved TOW vehi cl e
IVMMD i nteri m vehi cl e-mounted mi ne detector
J AAT joi nt ai r-attack team
J an January
J ul Jul y
K-Kill catastrophi c ki l l
kg ki l ogram(s)
km ki l ometer(s)
kph ki l ometers per hour
KW Ki owa Warri or
lb pound(s)
LBE l oad-beari ng equi pment
LE l ow expl osi ve
LED l i ght-emi tti ng di ode
LIN l i ne i tem number
LM l andmark
LOC l i nes of communi cati on
LOGPAC l ogi sti cs package
LRA l ocal reproducti on authori zed
LRP l ogi sti cs rel ease poi nt
LRSD l ong-range survei l l ance devi ce
LZ l andi ng zone
m month
m meter(s)
M-Kill mobi l i ty ki l l
M-S Mi znay-Schardi n
C2, FM 20-32
Glossary-7
mag magneti c
Mar March
MBA mai n battl e area
MC mobi l i ty corri dor
MCAP mi ne-cl eari ng/armor-protecti on ki t
MCB mi ne-cl eari ng bl ade
MCD magneti c coupl i ng devi ce
MCO Mari ne Corps order
MCOO modi fi ed combi ned obstacl e overl ay
MCR mi ne-cl eari ng rol l er
MCRP Mari ne Corps reference publ i cati on
MDI moderni zed demol i ti on i ni ti ati on
MDV mi ne-detecti on vehi cl e
Met+VE meteorol ogi cal data/vel oci ty error
METL mi ssi on-essenti al task l i st
METT-TC mi ssi on, enemy, terrai n, troops, ti me avai l abl e, and ci vi l i an consi derati ons
MHE materi al handl i ng equi pment
MICLIC mi ne-cl eari ng l i ne charge
MIDAP mi nefi el d-detecti on al gori thm and processor
MILSTD mi l i tary standard
min mi nute(s)
min mi ni mum
MLRS Mul ti pl e-Launched Rocket System
mm mi l l i meter(s)
MOBA mi l i tary operati ons i n bui l t-up areas
MOD mobi l e obstacl e detachment
MOPMS Modul ar Pack Mi ne System
MOPP mi ssi on-ori ented protecti ve posture
FM 20-32
Glossary-8
MOOTW mi l i tary operati ons other than war
MOUT mi l i tary operati ons on urbani zed terrai n
MP mi l i tary pol i ce
MRB motori zed ri fl e battal i on
MRC motori zed ri fl e company
MRR motori zed ri fl e regi ment
MSD movement support detachment
MSR mai n suppl y route
NA not appl i cabl e
NAI named area of i nterest
NATO North Atl anti c Treaty Organi zati on
NAVSEA Naval Sea Systems Command
NBC nucl ear, bi ol ogi cal , chemi cal
NCO noncommi ssi oned offi cer
NCOIC noncommi ssi oned offi cer i n charge
NE northeast
NGO nongovernment organi zati on
NLT no l ater than
nm nauti cal mi l e
no number
NSN nati onal stock number
OBSTINTEL obstacl e i ntel l i gence
Oct October
OIC offi cer i n charge
OP observati on post
OPCON operati onal control
OPLAN operati on pl an
OPORD operati on order
C2, FM 20-32
Glossary-9
P pace(s)
pam pamphl et
PIR pri ori ty i ntel l i gence requi rement
PIRS passi ve i nfrared sensor
PL pl atoon l eader
PL phase l i ne
PLS pal l eti zed l oad system
plt pl atoon
PSG pl atoon sergeant
psi pounds per square i nch
PSYOP psychol ogi cal operati ons
pt poi nt
PVO pri vate vol unteer organi zati on
QASAS qual i ty assurance ammuni ti on speci al i st
R&S reconnai ssance and survei l l ance
RAAM remote anti armor mi ne
RAC ri sk-assessment code
RCU remote-control uni t
RDX cycl oni te
recon reconnai ssance
rep representati ve
RF radi o frequency
ROKUS Republ i c of Kor ea, Uni ted States
RP reference poi nt
RSO range safety offi cer
RTO radi o-tel ephone operator
S&A safi ng and armi ng
FM 20-32
Glossary-10
S&H safety and handl i ng
S&T suppl y and transport
S2 I ntel l i gence Offi cer (US Army)
S3 Operati ons and Trai ni ng Offi cer (US Army)
S4 Suppl y Offi cer (US Army)
SAW squad automati c weapon
SCATMINE scatterabl e mi ne
SCATMINWARN scatterabl e mi nefi el d warni ng
sct scout
SD sel f-destruct
SE southeast
SEAD suppressi on of enemy ai r defense
sec second(s)
SEE smal l empl acement excavator
SFC sergeant fi rst cl ass
SFC sergeant fi rst cl ass
SFF sel f-forgi ng fragmentati on
SIR seri ous i nci dent report
SITEMP si tuati on templ ate
SLAM sel ectabl e l i ghtwei ght attack muni ti on
SOEO scheme of engi neer operati ons
SOF speci al -operati ons for ces
SOP standard operati ng procedure
SOSR suppress, obscure, secure, and reduce
SPECS Speci al Protecti ve Eyewear Cyl i ndri cal System
SPOTREP spot report
SSG staff sergeant
SSN soci al securi ty number
FM 20-32
Glossary-11
STANAG I nternati onal Standardi zati on Agreement
STP sol di er trai ni ng publ i cati on
T/MDV towi ng/mi ne-detecti on vehi cl e
TACC tacti cal ai r control center
TAHQ theater army headquarters
TAI target area of i nterest
TC track commander
TC trai ni ng ci rcul ar
TCP traffi c-control post
TCP tacti cal command post
TF task force
tm team
TM techni cal manual
TMD tacti cal -muni ti on di spenser
TNT tri ni trotol uene
TO theater of operati ons
TO Ai r Force techni cal order
TOC tacti cal operati ons center
TOW tube-l aunched, opti cal l y tracked, wi re-gui ded mi ssi l e
TRADOC Uni ted States Army Trai ni ng and Doctri ne Command
TRP target reference poi nt
TTP tacti cs, techni ques, and procedures
UAV unmanned aeri al vehi cl e
UK Uni ted Ki ngdom
UL Underwri ters Laboratori es, I ncorporated
US Uni ted States
USAF Uni ted States Ai r Force
USN Uni ted States Navy
FM 20-32
Glossary-12
UTM Uni versal Transverse Mercator
UXO unexpl oded ordnance
vs versus
W wi dth
w/ wi th
WLGH weapon-l aunched grapnel hook
WO warni ng order
WP whi te phosphorus
XO executi ve offi cer
y year
Yugo Yugosl avi a
References-1
References
SOURCES USED
These are the sources quoted or paraphrased i n thi s publ i cati on.
J oint and MultiservicePublications
AR 385-63. Policies and Procedures for FiringAmmunition for Training, Target Practiceand
Combat {MCO P3570.1A}. 15 October 1983.
FM 20-11. Military Diving{NAVSEA 0910-LP-708-8000}. 20 January 1999.
FM 90-3. Desert Operations {FMFM 7-27}. 24 August 1993.
FM 90-13. River-CrossingOperations {MCWP 3-17.1}. 26 January 1998.
FM 101-5-1. Operational Terms and Graphics {MCRP 5-2A}. 30 September 1997.
STANAG 2036. Land MineLaying, Marking, Recordingand ReportingProcedures. Edi ti on 5.
12 February 1987.
STANAG 2889. Markingof Hazardous Areas and Routes Through Them. Edi ti on 3.
26 March 1984.
STANAG 2990. Principles and Procedures for theEmployment in Land Warfareof Scatterable
Mines With a Limited Laid Life- ATP-50. Edi ti on 1. 15 September 1988.
TM 5-6665-298-10. Operators Manual AN/ PSS-12 MineDetectingSet {TM 5-6665-298-10}.
28 February 1995.
TM 9-1345-203-12&P. Operators and Organizational MaintenanceManual (I ncludingRepair
Parts and Special Tools List) for Land Mines {TO 11A8-3-1}. 14 January 1977.
TM 9-2590-509-10. Operators Manual MineClearingBladefor M1, I PM1, or M1A1Abrams Tank
(NSN 2590-01-230-8862) {TM 2590-10/ 1}. 12 Apri l 1990.
Army Publications
AR 40-10. Health Hazard Assessment Programin Support of theArmyMateriel Acquisition
Decision Process. 1 October 1991.
AR 385-10. TheArmy SafetyProgram. 23 May 1988.
AR 385-16. SystemSafety Engineeringand Management. 3 May 1990.
DA Pam 350-38. Standards in Weapons Training. 3 Jul y 1997.
FM 1-113. Utility and CargoHelicopter Operations. 12 September 1997.
FM 3-34.2 (formerl y FM 90-13-1). Combined-Arms BreachingOperations. 31 August 2000.
FM 5-7-30. BrigadeEngineer and Engineer CompanyCombat Operations (Airborne, Air Assault,
Light). 28 December 1994.
FM 5-10. Combat Engineer Platoon. 3 October 1995.
C2
C2, FM 20-32
References-2
FM 5-34. Engineer Field Data. 30 August 1999.
FM 5-71-2. Armored Task-ForceEngineer Combat Operations. 28 June 1996.
FM 5-71-3. BrigadeEngineer Combat Operations (Armored). 3 October 1995.
FM 5-100. Engineer Operations. 27 February 1996.
FM 5-170. Engineer Reconnaissance. 5 May 1998.
FM 5-250. Explosives and Demolitions. 30 Jul y 1998.
FM 90-5 (HTF). J ungleOperations (HowtoFight). 16 August 1982.
FM 90-7. Combined Arms ObstacleI ntegration. 29 September 1994.
FM 90-10 (HTF). Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT) (HowtoFight).
15 August 1979.
FM 90-10-1. An I nfantrymans GuidetoCombat in Built-up Areas. 12 May 1993.
FM 101-5. Staff Organization and Operations. 31 May 1997.
MI LSTD 882C (Revi si on). SystemSafety ProgramRequirements. 19 January 1993.
STP 5-12B1-SM. Soldiers Manual: MOS 12B, Combat Engineer, Skill Level 1. 14 February 2001.
TC 25-8. TrainingRanges. 25 February 1992.
TC 31-34. DeminingOperations. 24 September 1997.
TM 1-1520-237-10. Operators Manual for UH-60A Helicopters, UH-60L Helicopters, and EH-60A
Helicopters. 31 October 1996.
TM 9-1095-208-10-1. Operators Manual for Dispenser, Mine: M139 (NSN 1095-01-235-3139)
(EI C: 3V8) with MountingKits for 5-Ton Vehicle(1095-01-252-2818) (EI C: 3V9) and M548A1
Vehicle(1095-01-331-6755) (Ground Volcano). 10 Jul y 1992.
TM 9-1300-206. Ammunition and Explosives Standards. 30 August 1973.
TM 9-1345-203-12. Operators and Unit MaintenanceManual for Land Mines. 30 October 1995.
TM 9-1345-209-10. Operators Manual for Modular Pack MineSystem(MOPMS) Consistingof
Dispenser and Mine, Ground: M131 (NSN 1345-01-160-8909) Control, Remote, Land Mine
System: M71 (1290-01-161-3662) and Dispenser and Mine, Ground Training: M136 (6920-01-
162-9380). 31 March 1992.
TM 9-1375-213-12. Operatorsand Unit MaintenanceManual (I ncludingRepair Parts and Special
Tools List): Demolition Materials. 30 March 1973.
TM 9-1375-215-14&P. Operators, Unit, Direct Support and General Support MaintenanceManual
(I ncludingRepair Parts and Special Tools List) for Demolition Kit, MineClearingLineCharge
(MI CLI C). 31 January 1992.
TM 43-0001-36. Army Ammunition Data Sheets for Land Mines (FSC 1345). 1 September 1994.
C2, FM 20-32
References-3
DOCUMENTS NEEDED
These documents must be avai l abl e to the i ntended user s of thi s publ i cati on.
DA Form 1355. Minefield Record. March 1987.
DA Form 1355-1-R. HastyProtectiveRowMinefield Record (LRA). September 2001.
DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes toPublications and Blank Forms. February 1974.
READINGS RECOMMENDED
These readi ngs contai n rel evant suppl emental i nformati on.
FM 5-490. Engineer DivingOperations. 31 March 1992.
FM 6-20-40. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for FireSupport for BrigadeOperations (Heavy).
5 January 1990.
FM 6-20-50. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for FireSupport for BrigadeOperations (Light).
5 January 1990.
TM 5-2590-214-10. Operators Manual for Roller Kit, Mine(NSN 2590-01-134-3724) (EI C: AKZ)
and MountingKit, MineClearingRoller (2590-01-235-5458) (EI C: AKZ). 30 March 1993.
TM 9-1095-209-10. Operators Manual for MineDispenser: M138 (Flipper). 29 March 1990.
FM 20-32
References-4
Index-1
C3
Index
A
Ai rborne Standoff Mi nefi el d Detecti on System,
10-3
ai r-mi ssi on bri ef, D-13
anchor poi nt, 2-12
anti handl i ng devi ces, 2-9, 6-31, 6-37
M142 mul ti purpose FD, 1-7
M5 pressure-rel ease FD, 1-7
anti personnel mi nes, 1-5
characteri sti cs, 5-3
i nstal l ati on, A-3, A-7
M14, 5-3, A-2
M16, A-6
removal , A-5, A-10
sensi ng, types of, 1-5
warheads, types of, 1-6
Anti personnel Obstacl e Breachi ng System
(APOBS), 10-12
anti tamper feature, 4-6
anti tank mi nes, 1-4
M15, A-11, E-7
M19, A-21, E-7
M21, A-24, E-7
AP SCATMI NEs, 3-1
APOBS. SeeAnti personnel Obstacl e Breachi ng
System.
area cl earance, 9-1, 9-7, 11-15
area-deni al arti l l ery muni ti ons, 3-11
area-di srupti on obstacl e, 4-10
armi ng poi nt, D-16
armi ng ti me, 3-6, 4-1
armored vehi cl e-l aunched MI CLI C (AVLM),
10-7
arti l l ery-shel l AT devi ce, 13-30
assaul t force, 11-7
AT SCATMI NEs, 3-3
AVLM. Seearmored vehi cl e-l aunched MI CLI C.
B
bangal ore torpedo, 10-13
barbwi re AP devi ce, 13-32
Battl efi el d Operati ng System, 2-34
beari ng board, 5-6
beari ng pl ate, 5-6
begi nni ng-of-stri p marker, 7-2
bl asti ng machi ne, 3-27
bl ock mi nefi el ds, 2-13, 6-31, D-6
MOPMS, 3-29
row, 6-31
Vol cano, 3-24
booby traps, 13-1
actuati on methods, 13-5
booster charge, 1-1
breach force, 11-8, 11-18
breachi ng, 9-1, 9-2
break wi res. Seetri p wi res.
breaki ng a tri p wi re, 1-2
bypasses, 10-27
bypassi ng, 9-2
C
camoufl age, 5-6
catastrophi c ki l l (K-Ki l l ), 1-4
centuri on, 4-7
chemi cal l and mi nes, C-6
cl aymore devi ce, i mprovi sed, 13-31
cl eari ng, 9-6
bui l di ngs, 13-19
equi pment, 10-7
methods, 13-22
obstacl es, 13-21
open areas, 13-18
secure areas, 13-17, 13-21
sequence, 13-15
cl usters, 7-4
combat cl earance, 13-16
combat engi neer vehi cl e wi th ful l -wi dth mi ne
rake, 10-21
command-detonati on, 4-4
control measures
si te l ayout, 6-16, 6-17
control of parti es, 13-9
control poi nt, 13-9
C3, FM 20-32
Index-2
conventi onal mi nes, 5-1
countermi ne data, G-1
countermi ne operati ons, C-6
D
DA Form 1355, 8-3, 12-3
DA Form 1355-1-R, 8-3, 8-17
DCU. Seedi spenser control uni t.
deci si on and executi on, 2-29
obstacl e-executi on matri x, 2-29
scheme-of-obstacl e overl ay, 2-29
demi ni ng, 9-2, 9-7
densi ty, 3-8
detecti on, 10-1, 13-15
Ai rborne Standoff Mi nefi el d Detecti on
System (ASTAMI DS), 10-3
AN/PSS-12 mi ne detector, 10-3
el ectroni c, 10-3
mi ne rol l ers, 10-6
physi cal (probi ng), 10-2
vi sual , 10-1
detonator, 1-1
di ggi ng team, 6-16
di spenser control uni t (DCU), 3-21
di spensi ng marker, 3-19
di srupt mi nefi el ds, 2-10, D-7
MOPMS, 3-29
row, 6-28
Vol cano, 3-24
dud pi t, D-16
E
empl acement
ADAM/RAAM, 3-13
Gator, 3-16
hasty protecti ve row mi nefi el d, 6-34
Hornet, 4-14
MOPMS, 3-28
Vol cano, 3-23
water, 12-2
empl acement authori ty, 3-9
empl oyment
ADAM/RAAM, 3-12
Gator, 3-15
MOPMS, 3-28
Vol cano, 3-23
empl oyment authori ty, 6-34
end-of-stri p marker, 7-4
engi neer di vers, 12-1, 12-3
ENS. SeeExpl osi ve Neutral i zati on System.
ESMB. Seeexpl osi ve standoff mi nefi el d
breacher.
expedi ent devi ces, 13-29
Expl osi ve Neutral i zati on System (ENS), 10-11
expl osi ve standoff mi nefi el d breacher (ESMB),
10-11
extracti on
di smounted, F-14
mounted, F-13
F
FECS. SeeFi el d-Expedi ent Countermi ne
System.
fenci ng, 3-33, D-20, D-21
Fi el d-Expedi ent Countermi ne System (FECS),
10-22
fi re-support coordi nati on l i ne, 3-15
fi re-support pl an, 2-34
fi ri ng mechani sm, 1-1, 1-2
fi x mi nefi el ds, 2-11, D-7
MOPMS, 3-30
row, 6-28
Vol cano, 3-24
force organi zati on, 9-4
fragment hazard zone, 3-31, 3-32
fuse types, 1-2
G
gaps, 7-8
Gator, 3-14
gauntl et obstacl e, 4-12
grapeshot AP devi ce, 13-32
grapnel hook, 10-22, 10-23
hand-thrown, 10-24
weapon-l aunched, 10-24
Gri zzl y, 10-20
H
hand neutral i zati on, 11-21
hand-empl aced expl osi ves, 10-22
hand-empl aced mi ne marki ng system
(HEMMS), 10-36
hand-empl aced mi nes, 5-1
haul capaci ty, Cl ass I V/V, 2-45
HEMMS. Seehand-empl aced mi ne marki ng
system.
Hornet, 4-6
C3, FM 20-32
Index-3
I
I BASI C. SeeI mproved Body Armor System,
I ndi vi dual Countermi ne.
i gni ter, 1-1
I mproved Body Armor System, I ndi vi dual
Countermi ne (I BASI C), 10-19
i mproved dog-bone assembl y, 10-15, 10-17
i mprovi sed mi ni ng, 11-19
i ndi vi dual trai ni ng, F-21
i nterdi cti on weapons, 4-14
i nteri m vehi cl e-mounted mi ne detector
(I VMMD), 10-5
i ntermedi ate markers, 8-10
I OE. Seei rregul ar outer edge.
i rregul ar outer edge (I OE), 2-9, 6-2, 6-20, 7-3, 7-
6
basel i ne, 7-4
short rows, 6-20
short stri ps, 7-6
I VMMD. Seei nteri m vehi cl e-mounted mi ne
detector.
L
l andmarks, 6-3, 7-9, 8-9
l ane marki ng, 10-27
NATO standard, 10-36
l ane wi dths, 9-4, 9-6
l ane-cl osure team, 7-15
l anes, 7-7, 9-6
cl osi ng, 7-15
reduci ng, 9-4
l ayi ng a mi nefi el d, 6-20
l ayi ng a row mi nefi el d, 6-18, 6-23
dri l l , 6-18, 6-20
l ayi ng party, 6-15, 7-11
l ayout
si ti ng, 6-16
l ethal i ty, 3-5, 3-7
l ethal i ty and densi ty, 3-7
l i fe cycl e, 3-6
l i near obstacl e effort, 2-10, 2-39
l i ve-mi ne fi ri ng demonstrati ons, E-5
l i ve-mi ne trai ni ng, E-3
l ogi sti cal cal cul ati ons, 6-3, 7-9
M
M1 and M2 acti vators, A-33
M139 di spenser, D-2
M14 AT mi ne, 5-3
M142 fi ri ng devi ce, A-32
M15 AT mi ne, 5-1
M16 AP mi ne, 5-3, 5-4, E-5
M18A1 AP muni ti on, E-6
M18A1 Cl aymore muni ti on, 4-2
M19 AT mi ne, 5-1, 5-2
M21 AT mi ne, 5-1, 5-2
M5 fi ri ng devi ce, A-30
M58A4 mi ne-cl eari ng l i ne charge, 10-7
M60 Panther, 10-18
M603 fuse, 5-2
M606 i ntegral fuse, 5-2
M624 fuse, 5-2
M71 remote-control uni t, 3-26
M87 mi ne cani ster, D-1
M87A1 mi ne cani ster, D-1
M93 Hornet, 4-6, B-1
magneti c-i nfl uenced mi ne, 4-3
manual breachi ng, 10-22
manual obstacl e reducti on, 10-22
markers, D-13
entrance, 10-25
entrance funnel , 10-26
exi t, 10-26
far recogni ti on, 10-26
fi nal -approach, 10-26
handrai l , 10-25
marki ng, 3-29, 3-30, 9-7, 10-24, 13-9, 13-18
marki ng devi ces, 10-34
marki ng of mi nefi el ds and obstacl e groups, 2-
52
marki ng party, 6-15, 7-11
marki ng procedures, 6-25
MI CLI C. Seemi ne-cl eari ng l i ne charge.
mi ne
cl usters, 6-2, 7-1
components, 1-2
empl acement, 7-13
i nci dent, 11-26
removal , 6-36, 11-21
rows, 6-1, 6-16, 6-34
spaci ng, 6-17
stri ps, 7-1
vi sual i ndi cators, F-1
mi ne detector, AN/PSS-12, 10-3, F-3
mi ne dump, 2-43, 6-15
mi ne rol l er, 10-6
mi ne trai ni ng, E-1
mi ne-awareness trai ni ng, F-21
mi ne-cl eari ng bl ade, 10-14
mi ne-cl eari ng l i ne charge (MI CLI C), 10-7
C3, FM 20-32
Index-4
mi ne-cl eari ng rol l er, 10-14, 10-16
mi ne-cl eari ng/armor-protecti on ki t, 10-22
mi ne-dump party, 6-15, 7-11
mi nefi el d
densi ty, 3-14
desi gn, 2-5
gaps, 7-8
handover, 7-19
i nspecti on and mai ntenance, 2-55
l anes, 6-3, 7-7
marki ng, 2-49
recordi ng, 6-15
reducti on, 10-7
reporti ng, 6-15
si ti ng, 2-38, 6-15
turnover, 2-52
mi nefi el d marki ng set, 10-36
mi nefi el d packages, 2-40, 2-42, 2-43
mi nefi el d report and record, 2-53
mi nefi el d turnover report, 2-53
mi nefi el d vari abl es, 2-7
mi nefi el ds
bl ock, 6-31
di srupt and fi x row, 6-28
hasty protecti ve row, 6-33
nui sance, 7-17
standard pattern, 7-1
turn, 6-29
mi nefi el ds, types of, 2-1
mi ne-i nci dent report, F-21
mi nes
anti personnel
M14, 12-10
M16, 5-3, 5-4, 12-10
M18A1 (cl aymore), 12-10
M605 fuse, 5-4
prong-acti vated, 5-5
tri p-wi re-acti vated, 5-5
anti tank
M15, 5-1, 12-1
M603 fuse, 5-2
M624 fuse, 5-2
M19, 5-1, 5-2, 12-1
M606 i ntegral fuse, 5-2
M21, 5-1, 5-2, 12-1
sympatheti c detonati on, 5-8
conventi onal , 5-1
hand-empl aced, 5-1
mi nes tal l y sheet, 7-14
mi ne-stri p packages, 2-43, 2-47
Mi ni Fl ai l , 10-19
mi ssi on anal ysi s, 2-19
mobi l e obstacl e detachment, C-1
mobi l i ty ki l l (M-Ki l l ), 1-4
Modul ar Pack Mi ne System (MOPMS), 3-26,
12-15
empl oyment, 3-28
MOPMS. SeeModul ar Pack Mi ne System.
mousetrap. SeeM5 fi ri ng devi ce.
N
NATO markers, 10-36
NATO standard marki ng, 10-36
neutral i zati on, 9-1
nui sance mi nefi el ds, 7-17
O
obscurati on, 9-4
obstacl e control , 2-14
obstacl e control measures, 2-14
bel ts, 2-16
groups, 2-17
restri cti ons, 2-18
zones, 2-15
obstacl e effects, 2-5
obstacl e empl acement authori ty, 2-14
obstacl e i ntel l i gence, 9-2
obstacl e materi al
Cl ass I V, 2-39
Cl ass V, 2-39
obstacl e numberi ng system, 8-8
obstacl e pl anni ng, 2-19
obstacl e si ti ng, 2-37
obstacl e-turnover work sheet, 2-54
outri ggers, 12-2
overl ay symbol s, 8-25
P
Panther, 10-18
phony mi nefi el ds, 12-15
pl anni ng consi derati ons, 11-17
pl anni ng factors, 2-20
pl anni ng process (ai r Vol cano), D-11
pl atoon-si ze sweep team, 11-8
pl atter charge, 13-30
pl owi ng, 10-16
pressure pl ates, 5-4
probabi l i ty of encounter, 2-8
probabi l i ty of ki l l , 2-9
probes, 10-22
probi ng, 10-2, F-2
C3, FM 20-32
Index-5
progress report, 11-23
prongs, 5-4
proofi ng, 9-2, 9-7, 10-24
protecti ve obstacl es, 2-5
R
RAAM. Seeremote anti armor mi ne.
radi o-frequency jammi ng devi ces, 4-6
ranges of common weapons, 2-23
reconnai ssance, 9-2
recordi ng and mi ne-data tracki ng, F-20
recordi ng party, 7-11
reducti on, 9-1, 9-4, 10-1
regul ar stri ps, 7-5
rei nforce a conventi onal mi nefi el d, 4-8
remote anti armor mi ne (RAAM), 3-11, 3-12
remote control uni t, 3-26
reporti ng and recordi ng, 13-10
reporti ng procedures, 6-25
reports
change, 8-3
compl eti on, 8-2
i ni ti ati on, 8-1
i ntenti on, 8-1
spot, 10-7
stri p feeder, 6-15, 6-22
transfer, 8-2
resource factors, 2-10, 2-39
responsi bi l i ti es (ai r Vol cano), D-8
ri sk assessment, E-8, F-18
ri sk management, F-17
ri ver mi ni ng, 12-1
route cl earance, 9-1, 11-1
route cl earance, methods of, 11-11
row mi ni ng, 6-1
S
safe standoff di stance, 4-9
Hornet, 4-10
MOPMS, 4-9
Vol cano, 4-10
safe-separati on countdown, 3-6
safety consi derati ons, E-3
safety procedures, 13-14
safety tapes, 7-17
safety zone, 3-26, 3-30, 3-32
sampl e ri sk assessment, F-18
scatterabl e mi nefi el d rei nforcement, 4-10
scatterabl e mi nefi el d report and record, 8-23,
D-22
scatterabl e mi nefi el d warni ng, 3-10, 8-23, 8-24,
D-22
scatterabl e mi nes, 3-1
ADAM, 12-13
capabi l i ti es, 3-5
Gator, 12-15
RAAM, 12-13
Vol cano
ai r, 12-15
ground, 12-15
scatterabl e mi nes, extracti on from, F-14
sel ectabl e l i ghtwei ght attack muni ti on
(SLAM), 4-3, B-1
M2, 4-3
M4, 4-3
sel f-destruct ti mes
SLAM, 4-4
Vol cano, 3-21
wi ndows, 3-7
sel f-forgi ng fragmentati on, 3-5
sel f-neutral i zati on (SLAM), 4-4
sensi ng, types of, 1-5
setti ng party, 13-9
si de attack (SLAM), 4-4
si te l ayout, 3-24, 6-19, 6-34
si ti ng, 2-37
si ti ng party, 6-16, 7-10
si ti ng-and-recordi ng party, 6-18
si tuati on report, 11-23
ski m techni que, 10-14
ski p zone, 10-11
SLAM. Seesel ectabl e l i ghtwei ght attack
muni ti on.
speci al envi ronments
col d regi ons, 12-16
desert, 12-17
jungl e, 12-17
squad dri l l , 6-24
STANAG 2036, 6-1, 6-34, 10-36
STANAG 2889, 10-36
standard AP mi nefi el d, C-4
streambed mi ni ng, 12-1
suppl y operati ons, 2-39
support force, 11-7, 11-18
suppressi on, 9-4
sweep oper ati ons, 11-13
sweep team
squad-si ze, 11-10
sympatheti c detonati on, 5-8, 12-1
C3, FM 20-32
Index-6
T
tacti cal mi nefi el ds, 2-32
tacti cal muni ti on di spensers, 3-15
tacti cal obstacl es, 2-5
tacti cal -obstacl e effects, 2-6, 3-7
task organi zati on, 11-16
techni cal i nspecti ons, 2-55, 7-18
Terrabase, D-13
terrai n anal ysi s, D-13
theater ai r-taski ng order, 3-15, 3-16
threat
anti track mi nefi el d, C-3
equi pment, C-11
mi ne operati ons, C-1
mi nefi el d parameters, C-2
mi xed mi nefi el ds, C-5
movement support detachment, C-7
ti l t-rod fuses, 5-6
ti med-demol i ti on, 4-4
top attack, 4-6
traffi c control , 9-6
traffi c-control posts, 10-26
tri p wi res, 1-2, 1-6, 5-4, 6-2, 7-6
tri pod, 10-23
turn mi nefi el ds, 2-12, D-6
MOPMS, 3-29
row, 6-29
Vol cano, 3-24
turni ng poi nts, 7-6
turnover, 2-52
U
uncrati ng mi nes, 2-42
urban-area mi ne empl oyment, 12-6
V
Vol cano, 3-21, 3-23
ai r, 3-23, D-1
empl acement, 3-23
empl oyment, 3-23
fenci ng, 3-33
ground, 3-23
M87, 3-21
M87A1, 3-21
mi nefi el ds, 3-24
mul ti pl e-del i very mi ne system, 3-21
W
warheads, types of, 1-5
bl ast AT, 1-5
sel f-forgi ng fragmentati on, 1-5
FM 20-32
By Order of the Secr etar y of the Ar my:
DENNI S J. REI MER
Chief of Staff
Offi ci al :
JOEL B. HUDSON
AdministrativeAssistant tothe
Secretary of theArmy
DI STRI BUTI ON:
Acti ve Army, Army Nati onal Guard, and US Army Reserve: To be
di str i buted i n accor dance wi th the i ni ti al di str i buti on number 111053
requi rements for FM 20-32.

FM 20-32 Mine Countermine Operations

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FM 20-32 Mine Countermine Operations

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FM20-32

You might also like